40 CFR Part 60 · Subpart Appendix-A-7-to-Part-60--Appendix-K-to-Part-60
Part 60—Standards of Performance for New Stationary Sources
Protection of Environment · Chapter I, Chapter I—Environmental Protection Agency · Subchapter C
40 CFR Part 60, Subpart Appendix-A-7-to-Part-60--Appendix-K-to-Part-60 - Words
- 1,701,097
- Sections
- 0
- Last amended
- September 17, 2026
- Administered by
- Environmental Protection Agency
40 CFR Part 60
Text as published by eCFR on .
Appendix A-7 to Part 60—Test Methods 19 through 25E
Method 19—Determination of sulfur dioxide removal efficiency and particulate, sulfur dioxide and nitrogen oxides emission rates
Method 20—Determination of nitrogen oxides, sulfur dioxide, and diluent emissions from stationary gas turbines
Method 21—Determination of volatile organic compound leaks
Method 22—Visual determination of fugitive emissions from material sources and smoke emissions from flares
Method 23—Determination of Polychlorinated Dibenzo-p-Dioxins and Polychlorinated Dibenzofurans From Stationary Sources
Method 24—Determination of volatile matter content, water content, density, volume solids, and weight solids of surface coatings
Method 24A—Determination of volatile matter content and density of printing inks and related coatings
Method 25—Determination of total gaseous nonmethane organic emissions as carbon
Method 25A—Determination of total gaseous organic concentration using a flame ionization analyzer
Method 25B—Determination of total gaseous organic concentration using a nondispersive infrared analyzer
Method 25C—Determination of nonmethane organic compounds (NMOC) in MSW landfill gases
Method 25D—Determination of the Volatile Organic Concentration of Waste Samples
Method 25E—Determination of Vapor Phase Organic Concentration in Waste Samples
The test methods in this appendix are referred to in § 60.8 (Performance Tests) and § 60.11 (Compliance With Standards and Maintenance Requirements) of 40 CFR part 60, subpart A (General Provisions). Specific uses of these test methods are described in the standards of performance contained in the subparts, beginning with Subpart D.
Within each standard of performance, a section title “Test Methods and Procedures” is provided to: (1) Identify the test methods to be used as reference methods to the facility subject to the respective standard and (2) identify any special instructions or conditions to be followed when applying a method to the respective facility. Such instructions (for example, establish sampling rates, volumes, or temperatures) are to be used either in addition to, or as a substitute for procedures in a test method. Similarly, for sources subject to emission monitoring requirements, specific instructions pertaining to any use of a test method as a reference method are provided in the subpart or in Appendix B.
Inclusion of methods in this appendix is not intended as an endorsement or denial of their applicability to sources that are not subject to standards of performance. The methods are potentially applicable to other sources; however, applicability should be confirmed by careful and appropriate evaluation of the conditions prevalent at such sources.
The approach followed in the formulation of the test methods involves specifications for equipment, procedures, and performance. In concept, a performance specification approach would be preferable in all methods because this allows the greatest flexibility to the user. In practice, however, this approach is impractical in most cases because performance specifications cannot be established. Most of the methods described herein, therefore, involve specific equipment specifications and procedures, and only a few methods in this appendix rely on performance criteria.
Minor changes in the test methods should not necessarily affect the validity of the results and it is recognized that alternative and equivalent methods exist. section 60.8 provides authority for the Administrator to specify or approve (1) equivalent methods, (2) alternative methods, and (3) minor changes in the methodology of the test methods. It should be clearly understood that unless otherwise identified all such methods and changes must have prior approval of the Administrator. An owner employing such methods or deviations from the test methods without obtaining prior approval does so at the risk of subsequent disapproval and retesting with approved methods.
Within the test methods, certain specific equipment or procedures are recognized as being acceptable or potentially acceptable and are specifically identified in the methods. The items identified as acceptable options may be used without approval but must be identified in the test report. The potentially approvable options are cited as “subject to the approval of the Administrator” or as “or equivalent.” Such potentially approvable techniques or alternatives may be used at the discretion of the owner without prior approval. However, detailed descriptions for applying these potentially approvable techniques or alternatives are not provided in the test methods. Also, the potentially approvable options are not necessarily acceptable in all applications. Therefore, an owner electing to use such potentially approvable techniques or alternatives is responsible for: (1) assuring that the techniques or alternatives are in fact applicable and are properly executed; (2) including a written description of the alternative method in the test report (the written method must be clear and must be capable of being performed without additional instruction, and the degree of detail should be similar to the detail contained in the test methods); and (3) providing any rationale or supporting data necessary to show the validity of the alternative in the particular application. Failure to meet these requirements can result in the Administrator's disapproval of the alternative.
Method 19—Determination of Sulfur Dioxide Removal Efficiency and Particulate Matter, Sulfur Dioxide, and Nitrogen Oxide Emission Rates
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Analytes. This method provides data reduction procedures relating to the following pollutants, but does not include any sample collection or analysis procedures.
| Analyte | CAS No. | Sensitivity |
|---|---|---|
| Nitrogen oxides (NOX), including: | ||
| Nitric oxide (NO) | 10102-43-9 | N/A |
| Nitrogen dioxide (NO2) | 10102-44-0 | |
| Particulate matter (PM) | None assigned | N/A |
| Sulfur dioxide (SO2) | 7499-09-05 | N/A |
1.2 Applicability. Where specified by an applicable subpart of the regulations, this method is applicable for the determination of (a) PM, SO2, and NOX emission rates; (b) sulfur removal efficiencies of fuel pretreatment and SO2 control devices; and (c) overall reduction of potential SO2 emissions.
2.0 Summary of Method
2.1 Emission Rates. Oxygen (O2) or carbon dioxide (CO2) concentrations and appropriate F factors (ratios of combustion gas volumes to heat inputs) are used to calculate pollutant emission rates from pollutant concentrations.
2.2 Sulfur Reduction Efficiency and SO2 Removal Efficiency. An overall SO2 emission reduction efficiency is computed from the efficiency of fuel pretreatment systems, where applicable, and the efficiency of SO2 control devices.
2.2.1 The sulfur removal efficiency of a fuel pretreatment system is determined by fuel sampling and analysis of the sulfur and heat contents of the fuel before and after the pretreatment system.
2.2.2 The SO2 removal efficiency of a control device is determined by measuring the SO2 rates before and after the control device.
2.2.2.1 The inlet rates to SO2 control systems (or, when SO2 control systems are not used, SO2 emission rates to the atmosphere) are determined by fuel sampling and analysis.
3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
4.0 Interferences [Reserved]
5.0 Safety [Reserved]
6.0 Equipment and Supplies [Reserved]
7.0 Reagents and Standards [Reserved]
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport [Reserved]
9.0 Quality Control [Reserved]
10.0 Calibration and Standardization [Reserved]
11.0 Analytical Procedures [Reserved]
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
12.1 Nomenclature
Bwa = Moisture fraction of ambient air, percent.
Bws = Moisture fraction of effluent gas, percent.
%C = Concentration of carbon from an ultimate analysis of fuel, weight percent.
Cd = Pollutant concentration, dry basis, ng/scm (lb/scf)
%CO2d,%CO2w = Concentration of carbon dioxide on a dry and wet basis, respectively, percent.
Cw = Pollutant concentration, wet basis, ng/scm (lb/scf).
D = Number of sampling periods during the performance test period.
E = Pollutant emission rate, ng/J (lb/million Btu).
Ea = Average pollutant rate for the specified performance test period, ng/J (lb/million Btu).
Eao, Eai = Average pollutant rate of the control device, outlet and inlet, respectively, for the performance test period, ng/J (lb/million Btu).
Ebi = Pollutant rate from the steam generating unit, ng/J (lb/million Btu)
Ebo = Pollutant emission rate from the steam generating unit, ng/J (lb/million Btu).
Eci = Pollutant rate in combined effluent, ng/J (lb/million Btu).
Eco = Pollutant emission rate in combined effluent, ng/J (lb/million Btu).
Ed = Average pollutant rate for each sampling period (e.g., 24-hr Method 6B sample or 24-hr fuel sample) or for each fuel lot (e.g., amount of fuel bunkered), ng/J (lb/million Btu).
Edi = Average inlet SO2 rate for each sampling period d, ng/J (lb/million Btu)
Eg = Pollutant rate from gas turbine, ng/J (lb/million Btu).
Ega = Daily geometric average pollutant rate, ng/J (lbs/million Btu) or ppm corrected to 7 percent O2.
Ejo,Eji = Matched pair hourly arithmetic average pollutant rate, outlet and inlet, respectively, ng/J (lb/million Btu) or ppm corrected to 7 percent O2.
Eh = Hourly average pollutant, ng/J (lb/million Btu).
Ehj = Hourly arithmetic average pollutant rate for hour “j,” ng/J (lb/million Btu) or ppm corrected to 7 percent O2.
EXP = Natural logarithmic base (2.718) raised to the value enclosed by brackets.
Fd, Fw, Fc = Volumes of combustion components per unit of heat content, scm/J (scf/million Btu).
GCV = Gross calorific value of the fuel consistent with the ultimate analysis, kJ/kg (Btu/lb).
GCVp, GCVr = Gross calorific value for the product and raw fuel lots, respectively, dry basis, kJ/kg (Btu/lb).
%H = Concentration of hydrogen from an ultimate analysis of fuel, weight percent.
H = Total number of operating hours for which pollutant rates are determined in the performance test period.
Hb = Heat input rate to the steam generating unit from fuels fired in the steam generating unit, J/hr (million Btu/hr).
Hg = Heat input rate to gas turbine from all fuels fired in the gas turbine, J/hr (million Btu/hr).
%H2O = Concentration of water from an ultimate analysis of fuel, weight percent.
Hr = Total numbers of hours in the performance test period (e.g., 720 hours for 30-day performance test period).
K = Conversion factor, 10−5 (kJ/J)/(%) [106 Btu/million Btu].
Kc = (9.57 scm/kg)/% [(1.53 scf/lb)/%].
Kcc = (2.0 scm/kg)/% [(0.321 scf/lb)/%].
Khd = (22.7 scm/kg)/% [(3.64 scf/lb)/%].
Khw = (34.74 scm/kg)/% [(5.57 scf/lb)/%].
Kn = (0.86 scm/kg)/% [(0.14 scf/lb)/%].
Ko = (2.85 scm/kg)/% [(0.46 scf/lb)/%].
Ks = (3.54 scm/kg)/% [(0.57 scf/lb)/%].
Kw = (1.30 scm/kg)/% [(0.21 scf/lb)/%].
ln = Natural log of indicated value.
Lp,Lr = Weight of the product and raw fuel lots, respectively, metric ton (ton).
%N = Concentration of nitrogen from an ultimate analysis of fuel, weight percent.
N = Number of fuel lots during the averaging period.
n = Number of fuels being burned in combination.
nd = Number of operating hours of the affected facility within the performance test period for each Ed determined.
nt = Total number of hourly averages for which paired inlet and outlet pollutant rates are available within the 24-hr midnight to midnight daily period.
%O = Concentration of oxygen from an ultimate analysis of fuel, weight percent.
%O2d, %O2w = Concentration of oxygen on a dry and wet basis, respectively, percent.
Ps = Potential SO2 emissions, percent.
%Rf = SO2 removal efficiency from fuel pretreatment, percent.
%Rg = SO2 removal efficiency of the control device, percent.
%Rga = Daily geometric average percent reduction.
%Ro = Overall SO2 reduction, percent.
%S = Sulfur content of as-fired fuel lot, dry basis, weight percent.
Se = Standard deviation of the hourly average pollutant rates for each performance test period, ng/J (lb/million Btu).
%Sf = Concentration of sulfur from an ultimate analysis of fuel, weight percent.
Si = Standard deviation of the hourly average inlet pollutant rates for each performance test period, ng/J (lb/million Btu).
So = Standard deviation of the hourly average emission rates for each performance test period, ng/J (lb/million Btu).
%Sp, %Sr = Sulfur content of the product and raw fuel lots respectively, dry basis, weight percent.
t0.95 = Values shown in Table 19-3 for the indicated number of data points n.
Xk = Fraction of total heat input from each type of fuel k.
12.2 Emission Rates of PM, SO2, and NOX. Select from the following sections the applicable procedure to compute the PM, SO2, or NOX emission rate (E) in ng/J (lb/million Btu). The pollutant concentration must be in ng/scm (lb/scf) and the F factor must be in scm/J (scf/million Btu). If the pollutant concentration (C) is not in the appropriate units, use Table 19-1 in section 17.0 to make the proper conversion. An F factor is the ratio of the gas volume of the products of combustion to the heat content of the fuel. The dry F factor (Fd) includes all components of combustion less water, the wet F factor (Fw) includes all components of combustion, and the carbon F factor (Fc) includes only carbon dioxide.
12.2.1 Oxygen-Based F Factor, Dry Basis. When measurements are on a dry basis for both O (%O2d) and pollutant (Cd) concentrations, use the following equation:
12.2.2 Oxygen-Based F Factor, Wet Basis. When measurements are on a wet basis for both O2 (%O2w) and pollutant (Cw) concentrations, use either of the following:
12.2.2.1 If the moisture fraction of ambient air (Bwa) is measured:
Instead of actual measurement, Bwa may be estimated according to the procedure below.
12.2.2.1.1 Bwa = 0.027. This value may be used at any location at all times.
12.2.2.1.2 Bwa = Highest monthly average of Bwa that occurred within the previous calendar year at the nearest Weather Service Station. This value shall be determined annually and may be used as an estimate for the entire current calendar year.
12.2.2.1.3 Bwa = Highest daily average of Bwa that occurred within a calendar month at the nearest Weather Service Station, calculated from the data from the past 3 years. This value shall be computed for each month and may be used as an estimate for the current respective calendar month.
12.2.2.2 If the moisture fraction (Bws) of the effluent gas is measured:
12.2.3 Oxygen-Based F Factor, Dry/Wet Basis.
12.2.3.1 When the pollutant concentration is measured on a wet basis (Cw) and O2 concentration is measured on a dry basis (%O2d), use the following equation:
12.2.3.2 When the pollutant concentration is measured on a dry basis (Cd) and the O2 concentration is measured on a wet basis (%O2w), use the following equation:
12.2.4 Carbon Dioxide-Based F Factor, Dry Basis. When measurements are on a dry basis for both CO2 (%CO2d) and pollutant (Cd) concentrations, use the following equation:
12.2.5 Carbon Dioxide-Based F Factor, Wet Basis. When measurements are on a wet basis for both CO2 (%CO2w) and pollutant (Cw) concentrations, use the following equation:
12.2.6 Carbon Dioxide-Based F Factor, Dry/Wet Basis.
12.2.6.1 When the pollutant concentration is measured on a wet basis (Cw) and CO2 concentration is measured on a dry basis (%CO2d), use the following equation:
12.2.6.2 When the pollutant concentration is measured on a dry basis (Cd) and CO2 concentration is measured on a wet basis (%CO2w), use the following equation:
12.2.7 Direct-Fired Reheat Fuel Burning. The effect of direct-fired reheat fuel burning (for the purpose of raising the temperature of the exhaust effluent from wet scrubbers to above the moisture dew-point) on emission rates will be less than 1.0 percent and, therefore, may be ignored.
12.2.8 Combined Cycle-Gas Turbine Systems. For gas turbine-steam generator combined cycle systems, determine the emissions from the steam generating unit or the percent reduction in potential SO2 emissions as follows:
12.2.8.1 Compute the emission rate from the steam generating unit using the following equation:
12.2.8.1.1 Use the test methods and procedures section of 40 CFR Part 60, Subpart GG to obtain Eco and Eg. Do not use Fw factors for determining Eg or Eco. If an SO2 control device is used, measure Eco after the control device.
12.2.8.1.2 Suitable methods shall be used to determine the heat input rates to the steam generating units (Hb) and the gas turbine (Hg).
12.2.8.2 If a control device is used, compute the percent of potential SO2 emissions (Ps) using the following equations:
12.3 F Factors. Use an average F factor according to section 12.3.1 or determine an applicable F factor according to section 12.3.2. If combined fuels are fired, prorate the applicable F factors using the procedure in section 12.3.3.
12.3.1 Average F Factors. Average F factors (Fd, Fw, or Fc) from Table 19-2 in section 17.0 may be used.
12.3.2 Determined F Factors. If the fuel burned is not listed in Table 19-2 or if the owner or operator chooses to determine an F factor rather than use the values in Table 19-2, use the procedure below:
12.3.2.1 Equations. Use the equations below, as appropriate, to compute the F factors:
12.3.2.2 Use applicable sampling procedures in section 12.5.2.1 or 12.5.2.2 to obtain samples for analyses.
12.3.2.3 Use ASTM D 3176-74 or 89 (all cited ASTM standards are incorporated by reference—see § 60.17) for ultimate analysis of the fuel.
12.3.2.4 Use applicable methods in section 12.5.2.1 or 12.5.2.2 to determine the heat content of solid or liquid fuels. For gaseous fuels, use ASTM D 1826-77 or 94 (incorporated by reference—see § 60.17) to determine the heat content.
12.3.3 F Factors for Combination of Fuels. If combinations of fuels are burned, use the following equations, as applicable unless otherwise specified in an applicable subpart:
12.4 Determination of Average Pollutant Rates.
12.4.1 Average Pollutant Rates from Hourly Values. When hourly average pollutant rates (Eh), inlet or outlet, are obtained (e.g., CEMS values), compute the average pollutant rate (Ea) for the performance test period (e.g., 30 days) specified in the applicable regulation using the following equation:
12.4.2 Average Pollutant Rates from Other than Hourly Averages. When pollutant rates are determined from measured values representing longer than 1-hour periods (e.g., daily fuel sampling and analyses or Method 6B values), or when pollutant rates are determined from combinations of 1-hour and longer than 1-hour periods (e.g., CEMS and Method 6B values), compute the average pollutant rate (Ea) for the performance test period (e.g., 30 days) specified in the applicable regulation using the following equation:
12.4.3 Daily Geometric Average Pollutant Rates from Hourly Values. The geometric average pollutant rate (Ega) is computed using the following equation:
12.5 Determination of Overall Reduction in Potential Sulfur Dioxide Emission.
12.5.1 Overall Percent Reduction. Compute the overall percent SO2 reduction (%Ro) using the following equation:
12.5.2 Pretreatment Removal Efficiency (Optional). Compute the SO2 removal efficiency from fuel pretreatment (%Rf) for the averaging period (e.g., 90 days) as specified in the applicable regulation using the following equation:
12.5.2.1 Solid Fossil (Including Waste) Fuel/Sampling and Analysis.
12.5.2.1.1 Sample Increment Collection. Use ASTM D 2234-76, 96, 97a, or 98 (incorporated by reference—see § 60.17), Type I, Conditions A, B, or C, and systematic spacing. As used in this method, systematic spacing is intended to include evenly spaced increments in time or increments based on equal weights of coal passing the collection area. As a minimum, determine the number and weight of increments required per gross sample representing each coal lot according to Table 2 or Paragraph 7.1.5.2 of ASTM D 2234. Collect one gross sample for each lot of raw coal and one gross sample for each lot of product coal.
12.5.2.1.2 ASTM Lot Size. For the purpose of section 12.5.2 (fuel pretreatment), the lot size of product coal is the weight of product coal from one type of raw coal. The lot size of raw coal is the weight of raw coal used to produce one lot of product coal. Typically, the lot size is the weight of coal processed in a 1-day (24-hour) period. If more than one type of coal is treated and produced in 1 day, then gross samples must be collected and analyzed for each type of coal. A coal lot size equaling the 90-day quarterly fuel quantity for a steam generating unit may be used if representative sampling can be conducted for each raw coal and product coal.
12.5.2.1.3 Gross Sample Analysis. Use ASTM D 2013-72 or 86 to prepare the sample, ASTM D 3177-75 or 89 or ASTM D 4239-85, 94, or 97 to determine sulfur content (%S), ASTM D 3173-73 or 87 to determine moisture content, and ASTM D 2015-77 (Reapproved 1978) or 96, D 3286-85 or 96, or D 5865-98 or 10 to determine gross calorific value (GCV) (all standards cited are incorporated by reference—see § 60.17 for acceptable versions of the standards) on a dry basis for each gross sample.
12.5.2.2 Liquid Fossil Fuel-Sampling and Analysis. See Note under section 12.5.2.1.
12.5.2.2.1 Sample Collection. Follow the procedures for continuous sampling in ASTM D 270 or D 4177-95 (incorporated by reference—see § 60.17) for each gross sample from each fuel lot.
12.5.2.2.2 Lot Size. For the purpose of section 12.5.2 (fuel pretreatment), the lot size of a product oil is the weight of product oil from one pretreatment facility and intended as one shipment (ship load, barge load, etc.). The lot size of raw oil is the weight of each crude liquid fuel type used to produce a lot of product oil.
12.5.2.2.3 Sample Analysis. Use ASTM D 129-64, 78, or 95, ASTM D 1552-83 or 95, or ASTM D 4057-81 or 95 to determine the sulfur content (%S) and ASTM D 240-76 or 92 (all standards cited are incorporated by reference—see § 60.17) to determine the GCV of each gross sample. These values may be assumed to be on a dry basis. The owner or operator of an affected facility may elect to determine the GCV by sampling the oil combusted on the first steam generating unit operating day of each calendar month and then using the lowest GCV value of the three GCV values per quarter for the GCV of all oil combusted in that calendar quarter.
12.5.2.3 Use appropriate procedures, subject to the approval of the Administrator, to determine the fraction of total mass input derived from each type of fuel.
12.5.3 Control Device Removal Efficiency. Compute the percent removal efficiency (%Rg) of the control device using the following equation:
12.5.3.1 Use continuous emission monitoring systems or test methods, as appropriate, to determine the outlet SO2 rates and, if appropriate, the inlet SO2 rates. The rates may be determined as hourly (Eh) or other sampling period averages (Ed). Then, compute the average pollutant rates for the performance test period (Eao and Eai) using the procedures in section 12.4.
12.5.3.2 As an alternative, as-fired fuel sampling and analysis may be used to determine inlet SO2 rates as follows:
12.5.3.2.1 Compute the average inlet SO2 rate (Edi) for each sampling period using the following equation:
Where:
After calculating Edi, use the procedures in section 12.4 to determine the average inlet SO2 rate for the performance test period (Eai).
12.5.3.2.2 Collect the fuel samples from a location in the fuel handling system that provides a sample representative of the fuel bunkered or consumed during a steam generating unit operating day. For the purpose of as-fired fuel sampling under section 12.5.3.2 or section 12.6, the lot size for coal is the weight of coal bunkered or consumed during each steam generating unit operating day. The lot size for oil is the weight of oil supplied to the “day” tank or consumed during each steam generating unit operating day. For reporting and calculation purposes, the gross sample shall be identified with the calendar day on which sampling began. For steam generating unit operating days when a coal-fired steam generating unit is operated without coal being added to the bunkers, the coal analysis from the previous “as bunkered” coal sample shall be used until coal is bunkered again. For steam generating unit operating days when an oil-fired steam generating unit is operated without oil being added to the oil “day” tank, the oil analysis from the previous day shall be used until the “day” tank is filled again. Alternative definitions of fuel lot size may be used, subject to prior approval of the Administrator.
12.5.3.2.3 Use ASTM procedures specified in section 12.5.2.1 or 12.5.2.2 to determine %S and GCV.
12.5.4 Daily Geometric Average Percent Reduction from Hourly Values. The geometric average percent reduction (%Rga) is computed using the following equation:
12.6 Sulfur Retention Credit for Compliance Fuel. If fuel sampling and analysis procedures in section 12.5.2.1 are being used to determine average SO2 emission rates (Eas) to the atmosphere from a coal-fired steam generating unit when there is no SO2 control device, the following equation may be used to adjust the emission rate for sulfur retention credits (no credits are allowed for oil-fired systems) (Edi) for each sampling period using the following equation:
Where:
After calculating Edi, use the procedures in section 12.4.2 to determine the average SO2 emission rate to the atmosphere for the performance test period (Eao).
12.7 Determination of Compliance When Minimum Data Requirement Is Not Met.
12.7.1 Adjusted Emission Rates and Control Device Removal Efficiency. When the minimum data requirement is not met, the Administrator may use the following adjusted emission rates or control device removal efficiencies to determine compliance with the applicable standards.
12.7.1.1 Emission Rate. Compliance with the emission rate standard may be determined by using the lower confidence limit of the emission rate (Eao*) as follows:
12.7.1.2 Control Device Removal Efficiency. Compliance with the overall emission reduction (%Ro) may be determined by using the lower confidence limit of the emission rate (Eao*) and the upper confidence limit of the inlet pollutant rate (Eai*) in calculating the control device removal efficiency (%Rg) as follows:
12.7.2 Standard Deviation of Hourly Average Pollutant Rates. Compute the standard deviation (Se) of the hourly average pollutant rates using the following equation:
Equation 19-19 through 19-31 may be used to compute the standard deviation for both the outlet (So) and, if applicable, inlet (Si) pollutant rates.
13.0 Method Performance [Reserved]
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 References [Reserved]
17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
| From | To | Multiply by |
|---|---|---|
| g/scm | ng/scm | 109 |
| mg/scm | ng/scm | 106 |
| lb/scf | ng/scm | 1.602 × 1013 |
| ppm SO2 | ng/scm | 2.66 × 106 |
| ppm NOX | ng/scm | 1.912 × 106 |
| ppm SO2 | lb/scf | 1.660 × 10−7 |
| ppm NOX | lb/scf | 1.194 × 10−7 |
| Fuel Type | Fd | Fw | Fc | |||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| dscm/J | dscf/106 Btu | wscm/J | wscf/106 Btu | scm/J | scf/106 Btu | |
| Coal: | ||||||
| Anthracite 2 | 2.71 × 10−7 | 10,100 | 2.83 × 10−7 | 10,540 | 0.530 × 10−7 | 1,970 |
| Bituminus 2 | 2.63 × 10−7 | 9,780 | 2.86 × 10−7 | 10,640 | 0.484 × 10−7 | 1,800 |
| Lignite | 2.65 × 10−7 | 9,860 | 3.21 × 10−7 | 11,950 | 0.513 × 10−7 | 1,910 |
| Oil 3 | 2.47 × 10−7 | 9,190 | 2.77 × 10−7 | 10,320 | 0.383 × 10−7 | 1,420 |
| Gas: | ||||||
| Natural | 2.34 × 10−7 | 8,710 | 2.85 × 10−7 | 10,610 | 0.287 × 10−7 | 1,040 |
| Propane | 2.34 × 10−7 | 8,710 | 2.74 × 10−7 | 10,200 | 0.321 × 10−7 | 1,190 |
| Butane | 2.34 × 10−7 | 8,710 | 2.79 × 10−7 | 10,390 | 0.337 × 10−7 | 1,250 |
| Wood | 2.48 × 10−7 | 9,240 | 0.492 × 10−7 | 1,830 | ||
| Wood Bark | 2.58 × 10−7 | 9,600 | 0.516 × 10−7 | 1,920 | ||
| Municipal | 2.57 × 10−7 | 9,570 | 0.488 × 10−7 | 1,820 | ||
| Solid Waste | ||||||
| 1 Determined at standard conditions: 20 °C (68 °F) and 760 mm Hg (29.92 in Hg) | ||||||
| 2 As classified according to ASTM D 388. | ||||||
| 3 Crude, residual, or distillate. |
| n1 | t0.95 | n1 | t0.95 | n1 | t0.95 |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 2 | 6.31 | 8 | 1.89 | 22-26 | 1.71 |
| 3 | 2.42 | 9 | 1.86 | 27-31 | 1.70 |
| 4 | 2.35 | 10 | 1.83 | 32-51 | 1.68 |
| 5 | 2.13 | 11 | 1.81 | 52-91 | 1.67 |
| 6 | 2.02 | 12-16 | 1.77 | 92-151 | 1.66 |
| 7 | 1.94 | 17-21 | 1.73 | 152 or more | 1.65 |
| 1 The values of this table are corrected for n-1 degrees of freedom. Use n equal to the number (H) of hourly average data points. |
Method 20—Determination of Nitrogen Oxides, Sulfur Dioxide, and Diluent Emissions From Stationary Gas Turbines
1.0 Scope and Application
What is Method 20?
Method 20 contains the details you must follow when using an instrumental analyzer to determine concentrations of nitrogen oxides, oxygen, carbon dioxide, and sulfur dioxide in the emissions from stationary gas turbines. This method follows the specific instructions for equipment and performance requirements, supplies, sample collection and analysis, calculations, and data analysis in the methods listed in section 2.0.
1.1 Analytes. What does this method determine?
| Analyte | CAS No. | Sensitivity |
|---|---|---|
| Nitrogen oxides (NOX) as nitrogen dioxide: | 10102-43-9 | Typically <2% of Calibration Span. |
| Nitric oxide (NO) | 10102-44-0 | |
| Nitrogen dioxide NO2 | ||
| Diluent oxygen (O2) or carbon dioxide (CO2) | Typically <2% of Calibration Span. | |
| Sulfur dioxide (SOX) | 7446-09-5 | Typically <2% of Calibration Span. |
1.2 Applicability. When is this method required? The use of Method 20 may be required by specific New Source Performance Standards, Clean Air Marketing rules, and State Implementation Plans and permits where measuring SO2, NOX, CO2, and/or O2 concentrations in stationary gas turbines emissions are required. Other regulations may also require its use.
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. How good must my collected data be? Refer to section 1.3 of Method 7E.
2.0 Summary of Method
In this method, NOX, O2 (or CO2), and SOX are measured using the following methods found in appendix A to this part:
(a) Method 1—Sample and Velocity Traverses for Stationary Sources.
(b) Method 3A—Determination of Oxygen and Carbon Dioxide Emissions From Stationary Sources (Instrumental Analyzer Procedure).
(c) Method 6C—Determination of Sulfur Dioxide Emissions From Stationary Sources (Instrumental Analyzer Procedure).
(d) Method 7E—Determination of Nitrogen Oxides Emissions From Stationary Sources (Instrumental Analyzer Procedure).
(e) Method 19—Determination of Sulfur Dioxide Removal Efficiency and Particulate Matter, Sulfur Dioxide, and Nitrogen Oxide Emission Rates.
3.0 Definitions
Refer to section 3.0 of Method 7E for the applicable definitions.
4.0 Interferences
Refer to section 4.0 of Methods 3A, 6C, and 7E as applicable.
5.0 Safety
Refer to section 5.0 of Method 7E.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
The measurement system design is shown in Figure 7E-1 of Method 7E. Refer to the appropriate methods listed in section 2.0 for equipment and supplies.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
Refer to the appropriate methods listed in section 2.0 for reagents and standards.
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport
8.1 Sampling Site and Sampling Points. Follow the procedures of section 8.1 of Method 7E. For the stratification test in section 8.1.2, determine the diluent-corrected pollutant concentration at each traverse point.
8.2 Initial Measurement System Performance Tests. You must refer to the appropriate methods listed in section 2.0 for the measurement system performance tests as applicable.
8.3 Interference Check. You must follow the procedures in section 8.3 of Method 3A or 6C, or section 8.2.7 of Method 7E (as appropriate).
8.4 Sample Collection. You must follow the procedures of section 8.4 of the appropriate methods listed in section 2.0. A test run must have a duration of at least 21 minutes.
8.5 Post-Run System Bias Check, Drift Assessment, and Alternative Dynamic Spike Procedure. You must follow the procedures of sections 8.5 and 8.6 of the appropriate methods listed in section 2.0. A test run must have a duration of at least 21 minutes.
9.0 Quality Control
Follow quality control procedures in section 9.0 of Method 7E.
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
Follow the procedures for calibration and standardization in section 10.0 of Method 7E.
11.0 Analytical Procedures
Because sample collection and analysis are performed together (see section 8), additional discussion of the analytical procedure is not necessary.
12.0 Calculations and Data Analysis
You must follow the procedures for calculations and data analysis in section 12.0 of the appropriate method listed in section 2.0. Follow the procedures in section 12.0 of Method 19 for calculating fuel-specific F factors, diluent-corrected pollutant concentrations, and emission rates.
13.0 Method Performance
The specifications for the applicable performance checks are the same as in section 13.0 of Method 7E.
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 Alternative Procedures
Refer to section 16.0 of the appropriate method listed in section 2.0 for alternative procedures.
17.0 References
Refer to section 17.0 of the appropriate method listed in section 2.0 for references.
18.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
Refer to section 18.0 of the appropriate method listed in section 2.0 for tables, diagrams, flowcharts, and validation data.
Method 21—Determination of Volatile Organic Compound Leaks
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Analytes.
| Analyte | CAS No. |
|---|---|
| Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC) | No CAS number assigned. |
1.2 Scope. This method is applicable for the determination of VOC leaks from process equipment. These sources include, but are not limited to, valves, flanges and other connections, pumps and compressors, pressure relief devices, process drains, open-ended valves, pump and compressor seal system degassing vents, accumulator vessel vents, agitator seals, and access door seals.
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant sampling methods.
2.0 Summary of Method
2.1 A portable instrument is used to detect VOC leaks from individual sources. The instrument detector type is not specified, but it must meet the specifications and performance criteria contained in section 6.0. A leak definition concentration based on a reference compound is specified in each applicable regulation. This method is intended to locate and classify leaks only, and is not to be used as a direct measure of mass emission rate from individual sources.
3.0 Definitions
3.1 Calibration gas means the VOC compound used to adjust the instrument meter reading to a known value. The calibration gas is usually the reference compound at a known concentration approximately equal to the leak definition concentration.
3.2 Calibration precision means the degree of agreement between measurements of the same known value, expressed as the relative percentage of the average difference between the meter readings and the known concentration to the known concentration.
3.3 Leak definition concentration means the local VOC concentration at the surface of a leak source that indicates that a VOC emission (leak) is present. The leak definition is an instrument meter reading based on a reference compound.
3.4 No detectable emission means a local VOC concentration at the surface of a leak source, adjusted for local VOC ambient concentration, that is less than 2.5 percent of the specified leak definition concentration. that indicates that a VOC emission (leak) is not present.
3.5 Reference compound means the VOC species selected as the instrument calibration basis for specification of the leak definition concentration. (For example, if a leak definition concentration is 10,000 ppm as methane, then any source emission that results in a local concentration that yields a meter reading of 10,000 on an instrument meter calibrated with methane would be classified as a leak. In this example, the leak definition concentration is 10,000 ppm and the reference compound is methane.)
3.6 Response factor means the ratio of the known concentration of a VOC compound to the observed meter reading when measured using an instrument calibrated with the reference compound specified in the applicable regulation.
3.7 Response time means the time interval from a step change in VOC concentration at the input of the sampling system to the time at which 90 percent of the corresponding final value is reached as displayed on the instrument readout meter.
4.0 Interferences [Reserved]
5.0 Safety
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to performing this test method.
5.2 Hazardous Pollutants. Several of the compounds, leaks of which may be determined by this method, may be irritating or corrosive to tissues (e.g., heptane) or may be toxic (e.g., benzene, methyl alcohol). Nearly all are fire hazards. Compounds in emissions should be determined through familiarity with the source. Appropriate precautions can be found in reference documents, such as reference No. 4 in section 16.0.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
A VOC monitoring instrument meeting the following specifications is required:
6.1 The VOC instrument detector shall respond to the compounds being processed. Detector types that may meet this requirement include, but are not limited to, catalytic oxidation, flame ionization, infrared absorption, and photoionization.
6.2 The instrument shall be capable of measuring the leak definition concentration specified in the regulation.
6.3 The scale of the instrument meter shall be readable to ±2.5 percent of the specified leak definition concentration.
6.4 The instrument shall be equipped with an electrically driven pump to ensure that a sample is provided to the detector at a constant flow rate. The nominal sample flow rate, as measured at the sample probe tip, shall be 0.10 to 3.0 l/min (0.004 to 0.1 ft 3/min) when the probe is fitted with a glass wool plug or filter that may be used to prevent plugging of the instrument.
6.5 The instrument shall be equipped with a probe or probe extension or sampling not to exceed 6.4 mm ( 1/4 in) in outside diameter, with a single end opening for admission of sample.
6.6 The instrument shall be intrinsically safe for operation in explosive atmospheres as defined by the National Electrical Code by the National Fire Prevention Association or other applicable regulatory code for operation in any explosive atmospheres that may be encountered in its use. The instrument shall, at a minimum, be intrinsically safe for Class 1, Division 1 conditions, and/or Class 2, Division 1 conditions, as appropriate, as defined by the example code. The instrument shall not be operated with any safety device, such as an exhaust flame arrestor, removed.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
7.1 Two gas mixtures are required for instrument calibration and performance evaluation:
7.1.1 Zero Gas. Air, less than 10 parts per million by volume (ppmv) VOC.
7.1.2 Calibration Gas. For each organic species that is to be measured during individual source surveys, obtain or prepare a known standard in air at a concentration approximately equal to the applicable leak definition specified in the regulation.
7.2 Cylinder Gases. If cylinder calibration gas mixtures are used, they must be analyzed and certified by the manufacturer to be within 2 percent accuracy, and a shelf life must be specified. Cylinder standards must be either reanalyzed or replaced at the end of the specified shelf life.
7.3 Prepared Gases. Calibration gases may be prepared by the user according to any accepted gaseous preparation procedure that will yield a mixture accurate to within 2 percent. Prepared standards must be replaced each day of use unless it is demonstrated that degradation does not occur during storage.
7.4 Mixtures with non-Reference Compound Gases. Calibrations may be performed using a compound other than the reference compound. In this case, a conversion factor must be determined for the alternative compound such that the resulting meter readings during source surveys can be converted to reference compound results.
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport
8.1 Instrument Performance Evaluation. Assemble and start up the instrument according to the manufacturer's instructions for recommended warmup period and preliminary adjustments.
8.1.1 Response Factor. A response factor must be determined for each compound that is to be measured, either by testing or from reference sources. The response factor tests are required before placing the analyzer into service, but do not have to be repeated at subsequent intervals.
8.1.1.1 Calibrate the instrument with the reference compound as specified in the applicable regulation. Introduce the calibration gas mixture to the analyzer and record the observed meter reading. Introduce zero gas until a stable reading is obtained. Make a total of three measurements by alternating between the calibration gas and zero gas. Calculate the response factor for each repetition and the average response factor.
8.1.1.2 The instrument response factors for each of the individual VOC to be measured shall be less than 10 unless otherwise specified in the applicable regulation. When no instrument is available that meets this specification when calibrated with the reference VOC specified in the applicable regulation, the available instrument may be calibrated with one of the VOC to be measured, or any other VOC, so long as the instrument then has a response factor of less than 10 for each of the individual VOC to be measured.
8.1.1.3 Alternatively, if response factors have been published for the compounds of interest for the instrument or detector type, the response factor determination is not required, and existing results may be referenced. Examples of published response factors for flame ionization and catalytic oxidation detectors are included in References 1-3 of section 17.0.
8.1.2 Calibration Precision. The calibration precision test must be completed prior to placing the analyzer into service and at subsequent 3-month intervals or at the next use, whichever is later.
8.1.2.1 Make a total of three measurements by alternately using zero gas and the specified calibration gas. Record the meter readings. Calculate the average algebraic difference between the meter readings and the known value. Divide this average difference by the known calibration value and multiply by 100 to express the resulting calibration precision as a percentage.
8.1.2.2 The calibration precision shall be equal to or less than 10 percent of the calibration gas value.
8.1.3 Response Time. The response time test is required before placing the instrument into service. If a modification to the sample pumping system or flow configuration is made that would change the response time, a new test is required before further use.
8.1.3.1 Introduce zero gas into the instrument sample probe. When the meter reading has stabilized, switch quickly to the specified calibration gas. After switching, measure the time required to attain 90 percent of the final stable reading. Perform this test sequence three times and record the results. Calculate the average response time.
8.1.3.2 The instrument response time shall be equal to or less than 30 seconds. The instrument pump, dilution probe (if any), sample probe, and probe filter that will be used during testing shall all be in place during the response time determination.
8.2 Instrument Calibration. Calibrate the VOC monitoring instrument according to section 10.0.
8.3 Individual Source Surveys.
8.3.1 Type I—Leak Definition Based on Concentration. Place the probe inlet at the surface of the component interface where leakage could occur. Move the probe along the interface periphery while observing the instrument readout. If an increased meter reading is observed, slowly sample the interface where leakage is indicated until the maximum meter reading is obtained. Leave the probe inlet at this maximum reading location for approximately two times the instrument response time. If the maximum observed meter reading is greater than the leak definition in the applicable regulation, record and report the results as specified in the regulation reporting requirements. Examples of the application of this general technique to specific equipment types are:
8.3.1.1 Valves. The most common source of leaks from valves is the seal between the stem and housing. Place the probe at the interface where the stem exits the packing gland and sample the stem circumference. Also, place the probe at the interface of the packing gland take-up flange seat and sample the periphery. In addition, survey valve housings of multipart assembly at the surface of all interfaces where a leak could occur.
8.3.1.2 Flanges and Other Connections. For welded flanges, place the probe at the outer edge of the flange-gasket interface and sample the circumference of the flange. Sample other types of nonpermanent joints (such as threaded connections) with a similar traverse.
8.3.1.3 Pumps and Compressors. Conduct a circumferential traverse at the outer surface of the pump or compressor shaft and seal interface. If the source is a rotating shaft, position the probe inlet within 1 cm of the shaft-seal interface for the survey. If the housing configuration prevents a complete traverse of the shaft periphery, sample all accessible portions. Sample all other joints on the pump or compressor housing where leakage could occur.
8.3.1.4 Pressure Relief Devices. The configuration of most pressure relief devices prevents sampling at the sealing seat interface. For those devices equipped with an enclosed extension, or horn, place the probe inlet at approximately the center of the exhaust area to the atmosphere.
8.3.1.5 Process Drains. For open drains, place the probe inlet at approximately the center of the area open to the atmosphere. For covered drains, place the probe at the surface of the cover interface and conduct a peripheral traverse.
8.3.1.6 Open-ended Lines or Valves. Place the probe inlet at approximately the center of the opening to the atmosphere.
8.3.1.7 Seal System Degassing Vents and Accumulator Vents. Place the probe inlet at approximately the center of the opening to the atmosphere.
8.3.1.8 Access door seals. Place the probe inlet at the surface of the door seal interface and conduct a peripheral traverse.
8.3.2 Type II—“No Detectable Emission”. Determine the local ambient VOC concentration around the source by moving the probe randomly upwind and downwind at a distance of one to two meters from the source. If an interference exists with this determination due to a nearby emission or leak, the local ambient concentration may be determined at distances closer to the source, but in no case shall the distance be less than 25 centimeters. Then move the probe inlet to the surface of the source and determine the concentration as outlined in section 8.3.1. The difference between these concentrations determines whether there are no detectable emissions. Record and report the results as specified by the regulation. For those cases where the regulation requires a specific device installation, or that specified vents be ducted or piped to a control device, the existence of these conditions shall be visually confirmed. When the regulation also requires that no detectable emissions exist, visual observations and sampling surveys are required. Examples of this technique are:
8.3.2.1 Pump or Compressor Seals. If applicable, determine the type of shaft seal. Perform a survey of the local area ambient VOC concentration and determine if detectable emissions exist as described in section 8.3.2.
8.3.2.2 Seal System Degassing Vents, Accumulator Vessel Vents, Pressure Relief Devices. If applicable, observe whether or not the applicable ducting or piping exists. Also, determine if any sources exist in the ducting or piping where emissions could occur upstream of the control device. If the required ducting or piping exists and there are no sources where the emissions could be vented to the atmosphere upstream of the control device, then it is presumed that no detectable emissions are present. If there are sources in the ducting or piping where emissions could be vented or sources where leaks could occur, the sampling surveys described in section 8.3.2 shall be used to determine if detectable emissions exist.
8.3.3 Alternative Screening Procedure.
8.3.3.1 A screening procedure based on the formation of bubbles in a soap solution that is sprayed on a potential leak source may be used for those sources that do not have continuously moving parts, that do not have surface temperatures greater than the boiling point or less than the freezing point of the soap solution, that do not have open areas to the atmosphere that the soap solution cannot bridge, or that do not exhibit evidence of liquid leakage. Sources that have these conditions present must be surveyed using the instrument technique of section 8.3.1 or 8.3.2.
8.3.3.2 Spray a soap solution over all potential leak sources. The soap solution may be a commercially available leak detection solution or may be prepared using concentrated detergent and water. A pressure sprayer or squeeze bottle may be used to dispense the solution. Observe the potential leak sites to determine if any bubbles are formed. If no bubbles are observed, the source is presumed to have no detectable emissions or leaks as applicable. If any bubbles are observed, the instrument techniques of section 8.3.1 or 8.3.2 shall be used to determine if a leak exists, or if the source has detectable emissions, as applicable.
9.0 Quality Control
| Section | Quality control measure | Effect |
|---|---|---|
| 8.1.2 | Instrument calibration precision check | Ensure precision and accuracy, respectively, of instrument response to standard. |
| 10.0 | Instrument calibration |
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
10.1 Calibrate the VOC monitoring instrument as follows. After the appropriate warmup period and zero internal calibration procedure, introduce the calibration gas into the instrument sample probe. Adjust the instrument meter readout to correspond to the calibration gas value.
11.0 Analytical Procedures [Reserved]
12.0 Data Analyses and Calculations [Reserved]
13.0 Method Performance [Reserved]
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 References
1. Dubose, D.A., and G.E. Harris. Response Factors of VOC Analyzers at a Meter Reading of 10,000 ppmv for Selected Organic Compounds. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, NC. Publication No. EPA 600/2-81051. September 1981.
2. Brown, G.E., et al. Response Factors of VOC Analyzers Calibrated with Methane for Selected Organic Compounds. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, NC. Publication No. EPA 600/2-81-022. May 1981.
3. DuBose, D.A. et al. Response of Portable VOC Analyzers to Chemical Mixtures. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, NC. Publication No. EPA 600/2-81-110. September 1981.
4. Handbook of Hazardous Materials: Fire, Safety, Health. Alliance of American Insurers. Schaumberg, IL. 1983.
17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data [Reserved]
Method 22—Visual Determination of Fugitive Emissions From Material Sources and Smoke Emissions From Flares
1.0 Scope and Application
This method is applicable for the determination of the frequency of fugitive emissions from stationary sources, only as specified in an applicable subpart of the regulations. This method also is applicable for the determination of the frequency of visible smoke emissions from flares.
2.0 Summary of Method
2.1 Fugitive emissions produced during material processing, handling, and transfer operations or smoke emissions from flares are visually determined by an observer without the aid of instruments.
2.2 This method is used also to determine visible smoke emissions from flares used for combustion of waste process materials.
2.3 This method determines the amount of time that visible emissions occur during the observation period (i.e., the accumulated emission time). This method does not require that the opacity of emissions be determined. Since this procedure requires only the determination of whether visible emissions occur and does not require the determination of opacity levels, observer certification according to the procedures of Method 9 is not required. However, it is necessary that the observer is knowledgeable with respect to the general procedures for determining the presence of visible emissions. At a minimum, the observer must be trained and knowledgeable regarding the effects of background contrast, ambient lighting, observer position relative to lighting, wind, and the presence of uncombined water (condensing water vapor) on the visibility of emissions. This training is to be obtained from written materials found in References 1 and 2 or from the lecture portion of the Method 9 certification course.
3.0 Definitions
3.1 Emission frequency means the percentage of time that emissions are visible during the observation period.
3.2 Emission time means the accumulated amount of time that emissions are visible during the observation period.
3.3 Fugitive emissions means emissions generated by an affected facility which is not collected by a capture system and is released to the atmosphere. This includes emissions that (1) escape capture by process equipment exhaust hoods; (2) are emitted during material transfer; (3) are emitted from buildings housing material processing or handling equipment; or (4) are emitted directly from process equipment.
3.4 Observation period means the accumulated time period during which observations are conducted, not to be less than the period specified in the applicable regulation.
3.5 Smoke emissions means a pollutant generated by combustion in a flare and occurring immediately downstream of the flame. Smoke occurring within the flame, but not downstream of the flame, is not considered a smoke emission.
4.0 Interferences
4.1 Occasionally, fugitive emissions from sources other than the affected facility (e.g., road dust) may prevent a clear view of the affected facility. This may particularly be a problem during periods of high wind. If the view of the potential emission points is obscured to such a degree that the observer questions the validity of continuing observations, then the observations shall be terminated, and the observer shall clearly note this fact on the data form.
5.0 Safety
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to performing this test method.
6.0 Equipment
6.1 Stopwatches (two). Accumulative type with unit divisions of at least 0.5 seconds.
6.2 Light Meter. Light meter capable of measuring illuminance in the 50 to 200 lux range, required for indoor observations only.
7.0 Reagents and Supplies [Reserved]
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transfer [Reserved]
9.0 Quality Control [Reserved]
10.0 Calibration and Standardization [Reserved]
11.0 Analytical Procedure
11.1 Selection of Observation Location. Survey the affected facility, or the building or structure housing the process to be observed, and determine the locations of potential emissions. If the affected facility is located inside a building, determine an observation location that is consistent with the requirements of the applicable regulation (i.e., outside observation of emissions escaping the building/structure or inside observation of emissions directly emitted from the affected facility process unit). Then select a position that enables a clear view of the potential emission point(s) of the affected facility or of the building or structure housing the affected facility, as appropriate for the applicable subpart. A position at least 4.6 m (15 feet), but not more than 400 m (0.25 miles), from the emission source is recommended. For outdoor locations, select a position where the sunlight is not shining directly in the observer's eyes.
11.2 Field Records.
11.2.1 Outdoor Location. Record the following information on the field data sheet (Figure 22-1): Company name, industry, process unit, observer's name, observer's affiliation, and date. Record also the estimated wind speed, wind direction, and sky condition. Sketch the process unit being observed, and note the observer location relative to the source and the sun. Indicate the potential and actual emission points on the sketch. Alternatively, digital photography as described in section 11.2.3 may be used for a subset of the recordkeeping requirements of this section.
11.2.2 Indoor Location. Record the following information on the field data sheet (Figure 22-2): Company name, industry, process unit, observer's name, observer's affiliation, and date. Record as appropriate the type, location, and intensity of lighting on the data sheet. Sketch the process unit being observed, and note the observer location relative to the source. Indicate the potential and actual fugitive emission points on the sketch. Alternatively, digital photography as described in section 11.2.3 may be used for a subset of the recordkeeping requirements of this section.
11.2.3 Digital Photographic Records. Digital photographs, annotated or unaltered, may be used to record and report sky conditions, observer's location relative to the source, observer's location relative to the sun, process unit being observed, potential emission points and actual emission points for the requirements in sections 11.2.1 and 11.2.2. The image must have the proper lighting, field of view and depth of field to properly distinguish the sky condition (if applicable), process unit, potential emission point and actual emission point. At least one digital photograph must be from the point of the view of the observer. The photograph(s) representing the environmental conditions including the sky conditions and the position of the sun relative to the observer and the emission point must be taken within a reasonable time of the observation (i.e., 15 minutes). When observations are taken from exactly the same observation point on a routine basis (i.e., daily) and as long as there are no modifications to the units depicted, only a single photograph each is necessary to document the observer's location relative to the emissions source, the process unit being observed, and the location of potential and actual emission points. Any photographs altered or annotated must be retained in an unaltered format for recordkeeping purposes.
11.3 Indoor Lighting Requirements. For indoor locations, use a light meter to measure the level of illumination at a location as close to the emission source(s) as is feasible. An illumination of greater than 100 lux (10 foot candles) is considered necessary for proper application of this method.
11.4 Observations.
11.4.1 Procedure. Record the clock time when observations begin. Use one stopwatch to monitor the duration of the observation period. Start this stopwatch when the observation period begins. If the observation period is divided into two or more segments by process shutdowns or observer rest breaks (see section 11.4.3), stop the stopwatch when a break begins and restart the stopwatch without resetting it when the break ends. Stop the stopwatch at the end of the observation period. The accumulated time indicated by this stopwatch is the duration of observation period. When the observation period is completed, record the clock time. During the observation period, continuously watch the emission source. Upon observing an emission (condensed water vapor is not considered an emission), start the second accumulative stopwatch; stop the watch when the emission stops. Continue this procedure for the entire observation period. The accumulated elapsed time on this stopwatch is the total time emissions were visible during the observation period (i.e., the emission time.)
11.4.2 Observation Period. Choose an observation period of sufficient length to meet the requirements for determining compliance with the emission standard in the applicable subpart of the regulations. When the length of the observation period is specifically stated in the applicable subpart, it may not be necessary to observe the source for this entire period if the emission time required to indicate noncompliance (based on the specified observation period) is observed in a shorter time period. In other words, if the regulation prohibits emissions for more than 6 minutes in any hour, then observations may (optional) be stopped after an emission time of 6 minutes is exceeded. Similarly, when the regulation is expressed as an emission frequency and the regulation prohibits emissions for greater than 10 percent of the time in any hour, then observations may (optional) be terminated after 6 minutes of emission are observed since 6 minutes is 10 percent of an hour. In any case, the observation period shall not be less than 6 minutes in duration. In some cases, the process operation may be intermittent or cyclic. In such cases, it may be convenient for the observation period to coincide with the length of the process cycle.
11.4.3 Observer Rest Breaks. Do not observe emissions continuously for a period of more than 15 to 20 minutes without taking a rest break. For sources requiring observation periods of greater than 20 minutes, the observer shall take a break of not less than 5 minutes and not more than 10 minutes after every 15 to 20 minutes of observation. If continuous observations are desired for extended time periods, two observers can alternate between making observations and taking breaks.
11.5 Recording Observations. Record the accumulated time of the observation period on the data sheet as the observation period duration. Record the accumulated time emissions were observed on the data sheet as the emission time. Record the clock time the observation period began and ended, as well as the clock time any observer breaks began and ended.
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
If the applicable subpart requires that the emission rate be expressed as an emission frequency (in percent), determine this value as follows: Divide the accumulated emission time (in seconds) by the duration of the observation period (in seconds) or by any minimum observation period required in the applicable subpart, if the actual observation period is less than the required period, and multiply this quotient by 100.
13.0 Method Performance [Reserved]
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 References
1. Missan, R., and A. Stein. Guidelines for Evaluation of Visible Emissions Certification, Field Procedures, Legal Aspects, and Background Material. EPA Publication No. EPA-340/1-75-007. April 1975.
2. Wohlschlegel, P., and D.E. Wagoner. Guideline for Development of a Quality Assurance Program: Volume IX—Visual Determination of Opacity Emissions from Stationary Sources. EPA Publication No. EPA-650/4-74-005i. November 1975.
17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
Method 23—Determination of Polychlorinated Dibenzo-p-Dioxins, Polychlorinated Dibenzofurans, Polychlorinated Biphenyls, and Polycyclic Aromatic Hydrocarbons From Stationary Sources
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Applicability. This method applies to the measurement of polychlorinated dibenzo-p-dioxins and polychlorinated dibenzofurans (PCDD/PCDF), polychlorinated biphenyls (PCB), and/or polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons (PAH) in emissions from stationary sources. Using this method, you can measure these analyte groups individually or in any combination using a single sample acquisition unless otherwise specified in a rule, regulation, or permit. Tables 23-1 through 23-3 of this method list the applicable target analytes for Method 23. If all 209 PCB are analyzed, the 17 toxic PCB congeners should be resolved and reported while the other PCB can be reported as totals by homolog, for example, total trichlorobiphenyl (TrCB).
1.2 Scope. This method describes the sampling and analytical procedures used to measure selected PCDD and PCDF in stationary sources when required in an applicable subpart. This method also describes how the same sampling and analysis technology can be used to measure selected PCB and PAH from stationary source in combination or as each individual compound class when required in an applicable subpart. However, Method 23 incorporates by reference some of the specifications (e.g., equipment and supplies) and procedures (e.g., sampling and analytical) from other methods in this part that are essential to conducting Method 23. To obtain reliable samples, source sampling teams should be trained and experienced with the following additional EPA test methods: Method 1, Method 2, Method 3, Method 4, and Method 5 of Appendices A-1, A-2, and A-3 to 40 CFR part 60. Laboratory analysis teams should be trained and experienced with Method 1668C (found at: https://www.epa.gov/sites/production/files/2015-09/documents/method_1668c_2010.pdf) and Method 1613B of 40 CFR part 136 Appendix A and have a working knowledge of isotope dilution and the use of high-resolution gas chromatography/high-resolution mass spectrometry (HRGC/HRMS).
1.3 The HRGC/HRMS portions of this method are for use by laboratory analysts experienced with HRGC/HRMS analysis of PCDD, PCDF, PCB, and PAH or under the close supervision of such qualified persons. Each source testing team, including the sampling and laboratory organization(s) that use this method, must demonstrate the ability to generate acceptable results that meet the performance criteria in Section 13 of this method.
1.4 This method is “performance-based” and includes acceptability criteria for assessing sampling and analytical procedures. Users may modify the method to overcome interferences or to substitute superior materials and equipment, provided that they meet all performance criteria in this method. Section 13 of this method presents requirements for method performance.
2.0 Summary of Method
This method identifies and determines the concentration of specific PCDD, PCDF, PCB, and PAH compounds. Gaseous and particulate bound target pollutants are withdrawn from the gas stream isokinetically and collected in the sample probe, on a glass fiber or quartz filter, and on a packed column of adsorbent material. This method is not intended to differentiate between target compounds in particulate or vapor fractions. The target compounds are extracted from the combined sample collection media. Portions of the extract are chromatographically fractionated to remove interferences, separated into individual compounds or simple mixtures by HRGC, and measured with HRMS. This method uses isotopically labeled standards to improve method accuracy and precision through isotope dilution quantitation.
3.0 Definitions
3.1 Alternate Recovery Standards. A group of isotopically labeled compounds that is not otherwise designated in this method for quality control (QC) purposes. Alternate recovery standards can be used to assess the recovery of a compound class relative to any step in the sampling and analysis procedure that is not already assessed as a mandatory part of this method, such as the cleanup step.
3.2 Benzo[a]pyrene Toxic Equivalency Quotient (B[a]P-TEQ). One of several schemes that express the toxicity for PAH compounds in terms of the most toxic form of PAH, benzo[a]pyrene, as specified in applicable regulations, permits, or other requirements.
3.3 Continuing Calibration Verification (CCV) Standard. A standard prepared at the mid-point concentration of the calibration used to verify the initial calibration. Prepare the CCV standard at the same time as the batch of field samples using the same labeled standards.
3.4 Congener. An individual compound with a common structure (dioxin, furan, or biphenyl), only differing by the number of chlorine or other substituent attached to the structure.
3.5 Estimated Detection Limit (EDL). The minimum qualitatively recognizable signal above background for a target compound. The EDL is a detection limit specific to each sample analysis based on the noise signal measured near the retention time of a target compound or target isomer group. Being sample specific, the EDL is affected by sample size, dilution, recoveries of pre-extraction standard, chemical noise from sample extract, electronic noise from instrument, extract aliquot, relative response of instrument, etc.
3.6 Estimated Maximum Possible Concentration (EMPC). An EMPC is a worst-case estimate of the target compound concentration. Report the results as EMPC when the ion abundance ratio for a target analyte is outside the performance criteria. Calculate the EMPC using both quantitation ions.
3.7 Field Train Proof Blank. A field train proof blank train is a QC sample to evaluate equipment preparation and potential contamination during sample recovery and consists of a fully assembled train at the sampling site, without actual sampling. The field train proof blank train uses glassware from the same preparation batch as the field samples.
3.8 Homolog. A compound belonging to a series of compounds with the same general molecular formula, differing from each other by the number of repeating units of chlorine.
3.9 Isomer. An individual compound with a common structure (dioxin, furan, or biphenyl), only differing by the position of chlorine atoms attached to the structure.
3.10 Isotope Dilution. A means of determining a naturally occurring (native) compound by reference to the same compound in which one or more atoms has been isotopically enriched.
3.11 Laboratory Method Blank (LMB). A quality control sample to assess background contamination or interference from media, reagents, equipment, etc. An LMB is prepared in the laboratory, composed of clean sampling media (filter and XAD-2), using same labeled standards, media, reagents, and materials (sodium sulfate, glass wool, etc.) and processed (extraction, fractionations, cleanup) and analyzed using the same procedures as a field sample.
3.12 Polychlorinated Biphenyl (PCB) congeners. Any or all 209 chlorinated biphenyl congeners. Table 23-3 of this method lists the primary target compounds and Appendix A to this method provides the full list of 209 PCB congeners and isomers.
3.12.1 Monochlorobiphenyl (MoCB). Any or all three monochlorinated biphenyl isomers.
3.12.2 Dichlorobiphenyl (DiCB). Any or all 12 dichlorinated biphenyl isomers.
3.12.3 Trichlorobiphenyl (TrCB). Any or all 24 trichlorinated biphenyl isomers.
3.12.4 Tetrachlorobiphenyl (TeCB). Any or all 42 tetrachlorinated biphenyl isomers.
3.12.5 Pentachlorobiphenyl (PeCB). Any or all 46 pentachlorinated biphenyl isomers.
3.12.6 Hexachlorobiphenyl (HxCB). Any or all 42 hexachlorinated biphenyl isomers.
3.12.7 Heptachlorobiphenyl (HpCB). Any or all 24 heptachlorinated biphenyl isomers.
3.12.8 Octachlorobiphenyl (OcCB). Any or all 12 octachlorinated biphenyl isomers.
3.12.9 Nonachlorobiphenyl (NoCB). Any or all three nonachlorinated biphenyl isomers.
3.12.10 Decachlorobiphenyl (DeCB). Biphenyl fully chlorinated with 10 chlorine atom substituents replacing hydrogen in the parent compound.
3.13 Polychlorinated dibenzo-p-dioxin (PCDD) congeners. Any or all 75 chlorinated dibenzo-p-dioxin congeners. There are seven 2,3,7,8 substituted PCDD congeners and four PCDD homolog groups listed in Table 23-1 of this method. This method does not measure mono- through tri-PCDD and includes non-2,3,7,8 substituted congeners in the total homolog categories.
3.13.1 Tetrachlorodibenzo-p-dioxin (TeCDD). Any or all 22 tetrachlorinated dibenzo-p-dioxin isomers.
3.13.2 Pentachlorodibenzo-p-dioxin (PeCDD). Any or all 14 pentachlorinated dibenzo-p-dioxin isomers.
3.13.3 Hexachlorodibenzo-p-dioxin (HxCDD). Any or all 10 hexachlorinated dibenzo-p-dioxin isomers.
3.13.4 Heptachlorodibenzo-p-dioxin (HpCDD). Any or all two heptachlorinated dibenzo-p-dioxin isomers.
3.13.5 Octachlorodibenzo-p-dioxin (OCDD). Dibenzodioxin fully chlorinated with eight chlorine atom substituents replacing hydrogen in the parent compound.
3.14 Polychlorinated dibenzofuran (PCDF) congeners. Any or all chlorinated dibenzofuran congeners. There are ten 2,3,7,8 substituted PCDF congeners and four PCDF homolog groups listed in Table 23-1 of this method. This method does not measure mono- through tri-PCDF and includes non-2,3,7,8 substituted congeners in the total homolog categories.
3.14.1 Tetrachlorodibenzofuran (TeCDF). Any or all 38 tetrachlorinated dibenzofuran isomers.
3.14.2 Pentachlorodibenzofuran (PeCDF). Any or all 28 pentachlorinated dibenzofuran isomers.
3.14.3 Hexachlorodibenzofuran (HxCDF). Any or all 16 hexachlorinated dibenzofuran isomers.
3.14.4 Heptachlordibenzofuran (HpCDF). Any or all four heptachlorinated dibenzofuran isomers.
3.14.5 Octachlorodibenzofuran (OCDF). Dibenzofuran fully chlorinated with eight chlorine atom substituents replacing hydrogen in the parent compound.
3.15 Polychlorinated diphenyl ethers (PCDPE). Any or all chlorinated substituted diphenyl ethers.
3.15.1 Hexachlorodiphenyl ether (HxCDPE). Any or all 42 hexachlorinated diphenyl ether isomers.
3.15.2 Heptachlorodiphenyl ether (HpCDPE). Any or all 24 heptachlorinated diphenyl ether isomers.
3.15.3 Octachlorodiphenyl ether (OCDPE). Any or all 12 octachlorinated diphenyl ether isomers.
3.15.4 Nonachlorodiphenyl ether (NCDPE). Any or all three nonachlorinated diphenyl ether isomers.
3.15.5 Decachlorodiphenyl ether (DCDPE).
3.16 Polycyclic Aromatic Hydrocarbons (PAH). Any or all aromatic compounds with two or more fused six-member rings. Table 23-2 of this method lists the target PAH compounds for this method. You may add and analyze additional PAH compounds by adding the appropriate 13C isotopically labeled compound to the pre-extraction standard mixture and by following the other requirements for target PAH compounds in this method.
3.17 Pre-analysis Standard. A group of isotopically labeled compounds added at a known amount immediately prior to analysis and used to monitor instrument response, injection errors, instrument drift and to determine the recovery of the pre-extraction standard compounds. Add pre-analysis standard to every sample (including blank, QC samples, and calibration solutions) at a known amount.
3.18 Pre-extraction Filter Recovery Standard. A group of isotopically labeled compounds added at a known amount to the filter used to indicate the extraction efficiency of the filter media. Add pre-extraction filter recovery standard to the filter samples just prior extraction. The pre-extraction filter recovery standard is not used for quantitating or recovery correction.
3.19 Pre-extraction Standard. A group of isotopically labeled compounds added in a known amount to the XAD-2 adsorbent resin of each sample immediately before extraction and used for quantitation of target and other labeled compounds to correct for extraction, cleanup, and concentration recovery. These isotopically labeled compounds constitute a matrix spike of the resin. Add pre-extraction standard to every sample at the same level (including blank, QC samples, and calibration solutions).
3.20 Pre-sampling Adsorbent Standard. A group of isotopically labeled compounds added in a known amount to the XAD-2 adsorbent prior to sampling used to monitor sampling aspects of the method.
3.21 Pre-transport Standard. Spiking compound from the list of alternative recovery standards that can be added by the laboratory to the sample shipping containers used to transport field equipment rinse and recovery samples prior to sampling. The measured concentration of the pre-transport recovery standard provides a quality check on potential probe rinse sample spillage or mishandling after sample collection and during shipping.
3.22 Quality Control Sample (QCS). A mid-level standard prepared from a second source standard or prepared from a source of standards different from the source of calibration standards. The purpose of the QCS is to verify the integrity of the primary calibration standards. A QCS is analyzed during the initial demonstration of capability (IDC) and following each initial calibration (at a minimum quarterly) thereafter.
3.23 Relative Response Factor (RRF). The response of the mass spectrometer (MS) to a known amount of an analyte relative to a known amount of an isotopically labeled standard.
3.24 2,3,7,8-Tetrachlorodibenzo-p-dioxin Toxic Equivalency Quotient (2,3,7,8-TeCDD TEQ). A procedure that expresses the toxicity of PCDD, PCDF, and PCB in terms of the most toxic dioxin, as specified in applicable regulations, permits, or other requirements.
4.0 Interferences
Despite interferences, confidence of the data is based on the enhanced selectivity of fractionation, gas chromatograph (GC) separation and detector resolving power, the QC check ions, and monitoring PCDPE.
4.1 PCB and PCDPE have similar molecular weight and chromatographic properties to PCDD and PCDF. PCB may produce fragment ions at interfering mass-to-charge ratios (m/z) when losing chlorine (Cl2) or 2 Cl2 during ionization processes. With HRMS, GC separation, and fractionation, PCB should not pose a problem for PCDD/PCDF identification and quantitation. PCDPE, when losing Cl2, also produce interfering m/z values in the PCDF homolog group with two fewer chlorine atoms (i.e., an octachlorinated PCDPE can interfere with a hexachlorinated PCDF). The latter interferences are potentially detected by monitoring an m/z corresponding to the potentially interfering PCDPE; however, the fragmentation patterns of all PCDPE may not be known, complicating any attempt to quantify the extent of ether interference.
Note: Consider monitoring 328 m/z if high levels of PCB are expected.
4.2 Very high amounts of other organic compounds in the matrix may interfere with the analysis. This method provides examples of column-chromatographic cleanup as procedures to reduce, but not necessarily eliminate, matrix effects due to high concentrations of organic compounds (International Agency for Research on Cancer 1991).
4.3 Target compound contaminants or related organics in solvents, reagents, glassware, isotopically labeled spiking standards, and other sample processing hardware are potential method interferences. Routinely evaluate all these materials to demonstrate that they are either free from interferences under the conditions of the analysis, or that the interference does not compromise the quality of the analysis results. Evaluate chemical interference through the preparation and analysis of an LMB. Use high purity reagents, solvents, and standards to minimize interferences in sample analysis.
4.4 PAH are subject to degradation when exposed to ultraviolet light. Take precautions to shield samples from sunlight or fluorescent light sources during sample collection, recovery, extraction, cleanup, and concentration.
5.0 Safety
Note: Develop a strict laboratory safety program for the handling of PCDD, PCDF, PCB, and/or PAH.
5.1 Compounds in the PCDD and PCDF classes such as 2,3,7,8-TeCDD are aneugenic, carcinogenic, and teratogenic in laboratory animal studies. Other PCDD and PCDF containing chlorine atoms in positions 2,3,7,8 have toxicities comparable to that of 2,3,7,8-TeCDD.
5.2 PCB and benzo[a]pyrene are classified as known or suspected human or mammalian carcinogens. Be aware of the potential for inhalation and ingestion exposure to laboratory analysts.
5.3 This method recommends that the laboratory purchase dilute standard solutions of the analytes required for this method. However, if preparing primary solutions, use a hood or glove box. Laboratory personnel handling primary solutions should wear personal protective equipment including a toxic gas respirator mask fitted with charcoal filters approved by the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH)/Mine Safety Health Administration (MSHA) to prevent the inhalation of airborne particulates if not working in an approved hood or glove box.
5.4 The toxicity or carcinogenicity of other reagents or chemicals used in this method is not precisely defined. However, treat each chemical as a potential health hazard and minimize exposure to these chemicals. The laboratory is responsible for maintaining a current awareness file of Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) regulations regarding the safe handling of the chemicals specified in this method. Ensure that a reference file or list of internet sites that contain safety data sheets (SDS) is available to all personnel involved in the sampling and chemical analysis of samples known or suspected to contain PCDD, PCDF, PCB, and PAH.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
Note: Brand names, suppliers, and part numbers are for illustration purposes only and no endorsement is implied. Apparatus and materials other than those specified in this method may achieve equivalent performance. Meeting the performance requirements of this method is the responsibility of the source testing team and laboratory team.
6.1 Sampling Apparatus. Figure 23-1 of this method shows a schematic of the Method 23 sampling train. Do not use sealing greases or brominated flame retardant-coated tape in assembling the train. Do not use silicon tubing in direct contact with flue gases. The train is identical to that described in Section 6.1.1 of Method 5 of Appendix A-3 to 40 CFR part 60 with the following additions:
6.1.1 Nozzle. The nozzle must be made of quartz, borosilicate glass, or titanium. Stainless steel nozzles should not be used.
6.1.2 Probe Liner. Use either polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE), borosilicate, or quartz glass probe liners with a heating system capable of maintaining a probe gas temperature of 120 ± 14 °C (248 ± 25 °F) during sampling, or such other temperature as specified by an applicable subpart of the standards or as approved by the Administrator. Use a PTFE ferrule or single-use PTFE coated O-ring to achieve the seal at the nozzle end of the probe for stack temperatures up to about 300 °C (572 °F). Use a quartz glass liner and integrated quartz nozzle for stack temperatures between 300 and 1,200 °C (572 and 2,192 °F).
6.1.3 Filter Holder. Use a filter holder of borosilicate glass with a PTFE frit or PTFE-coated wire filter support. The holder design should provide a positive seal against leakage from the outside or around the filter. The holder should be durable, easy to load, leak-free in normal applications, and positioned immediately following the probe and cyclone bypass (or cyclone, if used) with the active side of the filter perpendicular to the source of the flow.
6.1.4 Filter Heating System. Use any heating system capable of monitoring and maintaining the temperature around the filter to ensure that the sample gas temperature exiting the filter is 120 ± 14 °C (248 ± 25 °F) during sampling or such other temperature as specified by an applicable subpart of the standards or approved by the Administrator for a particular application.
6.1.5 Filter Temperature Sensor. Install a temperature sensor capable of measuring temperature to within ±3 °C (5.4 °F) so that the sensing tip protrudes at least 1.3 centimeters (cm) (1-2 in.) into the sample gas exiting the filter. Encase the sensing tip of the sensor in glass or PTFE, if needed.
6.1.6 Sample Transfer Line. The sample transfer line transports gaseous emissions from the heated filter holder to the condenser and must be heat traced and constructed of glass or PTFE with connecting fittings that form leak-free, vacuum-tight connections without using sealing greases or tapes. Keep the sample transfer lines as short as possible and maintain the lines at a temperature of 120 °C ± 14 °C (248 °F ± 25 °F) using active heating when necessary. Orient the sample transfer lines with the downstream end lower than the upstream end so that any condensate will flow away from the filter and into the condenser.
6.1.7 Condenser. Glass, water-jacketed, coil-type with compatible fittings. Orient the condenser to cause moisture to flow down to the adsorbent module to facilitate condensate drainage. Figure 23-2 of this method shows a schematic diagram of the condenser.
6.1.8 Water Circulating Bath. Use a bath pump circulating system capable of providing chilled water flow to the condenser and adsorbent module water jackets. Typically, a submersible pump is placed in the impinger ice water bath to circulate the ice water contained in the bath. Verify the function of this system by measuring the gas temperature at the entrance to the adsorbent module. Maintain this temperature at <20 °C (68 °F).
6.1.9 Adsorbent Module. Use a water-jacketed glass container to hold up to 40 grams (g) of the solid adsorbent. Figure 23-2 of this method shows a schematic diagram of the adsorbent module. Other physical configurations of the adsorbent resin module/condenser assembly are acceptable if the configuration contains the requisite amount of solid adsorbent and maintains the minimum length-to-width adsorbent bed ratio of two-to-one. Orient the adsorbent module vertically to facilitate condensate drainage. The connecting fittings must form leak-free, vacuum-tight seals. Include a coarse glass frit in the adsorbent module to retain the adsorbent.
6.1.10 Impingers. Use five impingers connected in series with leak-free ground glass fittings or any similar leak-free noncontaminating fittings. The first impinger must be a short-stem (water-dropout) design or equivalent. The second, fourth, and fifth impingers must be of the Greenburg-Smith design, modified by replacing the tip with a 1.3 cm ( 1/2 in.) inside diameter (ID) glass tube extending to approximately 1.3 cm ( 1/2 in.) from the bottom of the flask. The third impinger must be of the Greenburg-Smith design with the standard tip. The second and third impingers must contain known quantities of water, and the fifth impinger must contain a known weight of silica gel or equivalent desiccant. Alternatively, you may omit the first impinger if you do not expect excess moisture in the sample gas.
6.2 Sample Recovery Equipment.
6.2.1 Fitting Caps. Use leak-free ground glass fittings or any similar leak-free non-contaminating fitting to cap the sections of the sampling train exposed to the sample gas. Alternatively, use PTFE tape or contaminant-free aluminum foil for this purpose (see Section 6.2.6 of this method).
6.2.2 Wash Bottles. Use PTFE bottles.
6.2.3 Probe-Liner, Probe-Nozzle, and Filter-Holder Brushes. Use inert bristle brushes with precleaned stainless steel or PTFE handles. Extensions of the probe brush must be made of stainless steel or PTFE and be at least as long as the probe. Use brushes that are properly sized and shaped to remove accumulated material from the nozzle and probe liner if used.
6.2.4 Filter Storage Container. Use a sealed filter holder, wide-mouth amber glass jar with PTFE-lined cap, or glass petri dish sealed with PTFE tape. Purchase precleaned amber glass jars and petri dishes, or clean according to the glassware cleaning procedures listed in Section 8.1.1.1 of this method.
6.2.5 Field Balance. Use a weighing device capable of measurements to an accuracy of 0.5 g.
6.2.6 Aluminum Foil. Use heavy duty aluminum foil cleaned by rinsing three times with hexane or toluene and stored in a pre-cleaned glass petri dish or glass jar. Do not use aluminum foil to wrap or contact filter samples due to the possibility of reaction between the sample and the aluminum.
6.2.7 Silica Adsorbent Storage Container. Use an air-tight container to store silica gel.
6.2.8 Glass Sample Storage Container. Recover samples in amber glass bottles, 500- or 1000-milliliters (mL) with leak-free PTFE-lined caps. Either purchase precleaned bottles or clean containers according to glassware cleaning procedures listed in Section 8.1.1.1 of this method.
6.3 Sample Extraction Equipment.
6.3.1 Sample Container. Use 125- and 250-mL amber glass bottles with PTFE-lined caps.
6.3.2 Test Tubes. Use glass test tubes or small (e.g., 5 to 10 mL) amber vials.
6.3.3 Soxhlet/Dean-Stark Extraction Apparatus.
6.3.3.1 Soxhlet Apparatus. Use 200-mL capacity thimble holder capable of holding 43 × 123-millimeter (mm) extraction thimbles, with receiving flask (typically round-bottom).
6.3.3.2 Moisture Trap. Use Dean-Stark or Barret with fluoropolymer stopcock trap to fit between the Soxhlet extractor body and the condenser as shown in Figure 23-3 of this method.
Note: Dean-Stark or Barret traps are used to remove water with extraction solvents that are less dense and insoluble in water.
6.3.3.3 Extraction Thimble. Use quartz, glass, or glass fiber thimble, typically 43 × 123 mm to fit Soxhlet apparatus. The use of cellulose thimbles for sample extraction in this method is prohibited.
6.3.3.4 Heating Mantle. Use a hemispherical shaped heating mantle to fit round-bottom flask.
6.3.4 Kuderna-Danish (KD) Concentrator. Use an apparatus consisting of a three-ball Snyder column, a flask with leak-free joint to accept the three-ball Snyder column at the top, a leak-free joint to receive a graduated concentration tube at the bottom and a heating mantle.
Note: Rotary evaporation has only been demonstrated when analyzing PCDD/PCDF. The KD with Snyder column is recommended when analyzing for PAH and/or PCB to avoid evaporation loss resulting in failed performance criteria for pre-extraction spike recovery.
6.3.5 Nitrogen Evaporative Concentrator. Use a nitrogen evaporative concentrator equipped with a water bath with the temperature controlled in the range of 30 to 60 °C (86 to 140 °F) (N-Evap Organomation Associates, Inc., South Berlin, MA, or equivalent).
6.3.6 Separatory Funnels. Use glass or PTFE 2-liter separatory funnels.
6.4 Glass Liquid Chromatography Columns.
6.4.1 Pasteur Pipettes. Use disposable pipettes, or glass serological pipettes typically 150 mm long × 6 mm ID.
6.4.2 Liquid Chromatography Columns. 200 to 300 mm long × 20 mm ID with 250-mL reservoir.
6.5 Analytical Equipment.
6.5.1 Gas Chromatograph. Use a gas chromatograph consisting of the following components:
6.5.1.1 GC Oven. Use an oven capable of maintaining the separation column at the proper operating temperature ± 1.0 °C (1.8 °F) and performing programmed increases in temperature at rates of at least 40 °C/min with isothermal hold.
6.5.1.2 GC Temperature Monitor. Use a temperature monitor to measure column oven temperature to ± 1.0 °C (1.8 °F).
6.5.1.3 GC Flow System. Use an electronic pressure control or equivalent gas metering system to control carrier gas flow or pressure.
6.5.1.4 GC Injection Port. Use a split/splitless injection port in the splitless mode or on-column injection port for the capillary column.
6.5.2 Capillary GC Column. Use different columns for the analysis of the different target compound classes in this method, if needed. Perform the resolution checks in Sections 10.2.3.5 and 10.2.3.6 of this method to document the required resolution. Compound separation must meet the resolution specifications in Section 10.2.3.5 of this method and the identification specifications found in Section 11.4.3.4 of this method.
6.5.2.1 PCDD/PCDF Column. Gas chromatographic columns used to measure PCDD/PCDF should be capable of achieving separation of the 17 PCDD/PCDF target compounds from the nearest eluting target compound(s). The valley height resolution between 2,3,7,8-substituted TeCDD and TeCDF and the nearest eluting isomers must not exceed 25% of the taller of the two peaks. The valley height resolution between all other target PCDD/PCDF compounds and the nearest eluting targets (or interference) must not exceed 40% of the taller of the two peaks.
Note: Fishman, et al. (see Section 16.3 of this method) demonstrated that all TEF isomers can be fully differentiated from closely eluting isomers using either of two sets of non-polar and polar stationary phase combinations. One set consisted of 5% phenyl methylpolysiloxane (DB-5, HP-5MS, Rtx-5MS, Equity-5) and 50% cyanopropylmethyl, 50% phenylmethylsiloxane (DB-225, SP 2331) GC columns and the other set consisted of 5% phenyl, 94% methyl, 1% vinyl silicone bonded-phase (DB-5MS, ZB-5MS, VF-5MS, CP-Sil 8 CB LowBleed/MS) with 50% cyanopropylmethyl, 50% phenylmethylsiloxane (SP-2331).
6.5.2.2 PAH Column. Use column systems for measuring PAH that can achieve separation of anthracene and phenanthrene at m/z 178 such that the valley between the peaks does not exceed 50% of the taller of the two peaks, and benzo[b]fluoranthene and benzo[k]fluoranthene such that the valley between the peaks is less than 60% of the height of the taller peak. These requirements are achievable using a 30-m narrow bore (0.25 mm ID) 5% phenyl polysilphenylene-siloxane (BPX5 or equivalent) bonded-phase, fused-silica capillary column.
6.5.2.3 PCB Column. Use column systems for measuring PCB that can achieve unique resolution and identification of the toxics for determination of a TEQPCB using toxic equivalency factors (TEF). Resolution is shown by a valley between the peaks not exceeding 40% of the taller of the two peaks. Isomers may be unresolved if they have the same TEF and RRF and if these unresolved isomers are uniquely resolved from all other congeners. These requirements are achievable using several 30-meter (m) narrow bore (0.25 mm ID) columns including 8% phenyl polycarborane-siloxane (HT8), DB-XLB, and poly (50% n-octyl/50% methyl siloxane) (SPB-Octyl). Quantification of unresolved isomers should use the nearest eluting target PCB pre-extraction standard in Appendix A of this method, unless otherwise specified in applicable rule, regulation, or permit.
Note: If all 209 PCB are analyzed the 17 toxic PCB congeners should be resolved and reported while the other PCB can be reported as totals by homolog, for example, total TrCB.
6.5.3 Mass Spectrometer. Instrument employing 28 to 70 electron volt ionization. The instrument and data system must be capable of repetitive monitoring of at least 12 exact m/z values with a mass resolution defined in Section 10.2.1 within the measurement mass range. The recommended lock-mass ions to be used for mass drift correction are presented in Tables 23-4, 23-5, and 23-6 of this method for PCDD/PCDF, PAH, and PCB, respectively, as applicable to target analytes. Mass drifts of 5 parts per million (ppm) or more can have serious effects on instrument performance.
6.5.4 Mass Spectrometer Data System. Use a data system compatible with the mass spectrometer and capable of sequencing and monitoring multiple groups of selected ions.
6.5.5 Analytical Balance. Use an analytical balance to measure within 0.1 milligram (mg).
7.0 Reagents, Media, and Standards
7.1 Filter. Glass fiber filters, without organic binder, exhibiting at least 99.95% efficiency (<0.05% penetration) on 0.3-micron dioctyl phthalate smoke particles.
7.1.1 Conduct a QC check on the filter lot prior to the field test to demonstrate that filters are free from contamination or interference by extracting and analyzing a minimum of three filters from each lot as follows. Spike with pre-extraction and pre-extraction filter recovery standards for target compounds to be measured and extract each filter separately with toluene as described in Section 11 of this method. After extraction, remove the filters and the solvent from the filters under clean conditions (e.g., a clean nitrogen stream). Analyze the extracts according to the procedures in Section 11 of this method, including adding pre-analysis standard. This filter check analysis must meet the performance requirements in Section 13.1 of this method. Ongoing analysis of LMB can be used to fulfill this check. If criteria are not met for target compounds, repeat with additional filters from the lot or evaluate another lot.
7.2 Adsorbent Resin. Amberlite® XAD-2 resin. All adsorbent resin must meet the cleanliness criteria described for LMB in Section 13.1 of this method following the same extraction, concentration, cleanup, and analysis steps as field samples. This method recommends using the procedures provided in Appendix B to this method to clean the resin before use, if needed. However, this method allows alternative cleanup procedures that use automated extraction equipment if the adsorbent meets the required performance criteria described for LMB in Section 13.1 of this method.
7.2.1 Conduct a QC check on the cleaned adsorbent lot or batch following the extraction and analyses procedures in Section 11 of this method, including adding applicable labeled standards. The cleaned adsorbent must meet the criteria described for LMB in Section 13.1 of this method. An LMB conducted with an adsorbent lot or batch can serve this purpose.
7.2.2 Storage. Store adsorbent in a solvent-rinsed nonporous clean container and secure lid.
7.3 Glass Wool. Clean the glass wool to meet the specifications in Section 13.1 of this method. Glass wool is dried of the solvent and stored in a clean glass container with a PTFE-lined screw cap.
7.4 Water. Use deionized or distilled water meeting requirements in Section 13.1 of this method and store in its original container or in a clean glass container with a PTFE-lined screw cap.
7.5 Silica Gel. Indicating type for sampling, 6-16 mesh. If previously used, dry at 175 °C (347 °F) for two hours. Use new silica gel as received. As an alternative, use other types of desiccants (equivalent or better), subject to the approval of the Administrator.
7.6 Methylene Chloride. Pesticide grade or better.
7.7 Sample Recovery Reagents.
7.7.1 Acetone. Pesticide grade or better.
7.7.2 Toluene. Pesticide grade or better.
7.8 Sample Extraction and Cleanup.
7.8.1 Potassium Hydroxide. American Chemical Society (ACS) grade, 2% (weight/volume) in water.
7.8.2 Sodium Sulfate. Granulated or powdered, reagent grade. Evaluate for cleanliness prior to use with an LMB. The LMB must meet the requirements in Section 13.1 of this method for target compounds. Store in a clean glass container with a PTFE-lined screw cap.
7.8.3 Sulfuric Acid. Reagent grade.
7.8.4 Sodium Hydroxide. 1.0 N. Weigh 40 g of sodium hydroxide into a 1-liter volumetric flask. Dilute to 1 liter with water.
7.8.5 Hexane. Pesticide grade or better.
7.8.6 Methanol. Pesticide grade or better.
7.8.7 Toluene. Pesticide grade or better.
7.8.8 High-Boiling Alkanes Used as Keeper Solvents (e.g., tetradecane, nonane, decane). Pesticide grade. Note: Lower homologous series alkanes (nonane or decane) are necessary for higher volatility targets such as MoCB and naphthalene to maintain retention during concentration procedures. However, do not take samples to dryness when using these lower alkane homologs.
7.8.9 Liquid Column Chromatography Packing Materials. Use the following column chromatography packing materials, as needed, to prepare sample extracts by fractionation and removal of interferences. Commercially prepacked cleaning columns may be available for this purpose. The liquid column chromatography packing materials must be adequate to clean the samples to be fit for purpose and meet the performance criteria of this method. All procedures for preparing column chromatography packing materials are recommendations shown to meet the performance specifications required for the recovery of labeled compounds described in Section 13 of this method.
7.8.9.1 Alumina. Use either acidic or basic alumina in the cleanup of sample extracts. Use the same type of alumina for all samples in an analytical sequence, including those used to demonstrate LMB performance.
7.8.9.1.1 Acidic Alumina (Sigma-Aldrich® 199966 or equivalent). Brockmann activity grade 1, 100-200 mesh. Prior to use, activate the alumina by heating for 12 hours at 130 °C (266 °F). Store in a desiccator. You may use pre-activated alumina purchased from a supplier as received.
7.8.9.1.2 Basic Alumina (Sigma-Aldrich® 19943 or equivalent). Brockmann activity grade 1. Activate by heating to 600 °C (1,112 °F) for a minimum of 24 hours. Do not heat to over 700 °C (1,292 °F) because this can lead to reduced capacity for retaining the target compounds. Store at 130 °C (266 °F) in a covered flask. Recommended storage time for acidic alumina is up to five days from baking. Use prepacked alumina columns immediately after opening the vacuum-sealed pouch or container.
7.8.9.2 Florisil®. Activated, 60-100 mesh recommended. Heat previously activated Florisil® in a glass container loosely covered with aluminum foil in an oven at 130 to 150 °C (266 to 302 °F) for a minimum of 24 hours. Allow to cool and store activated Florisil® silica in a desiccator.
7.8.9.3 Silica Gel. Use either activated, acid- or base-coated silica gel in the cleanup of sample extracts. Use the same type of silica gel for all samples in an analytical sequence, including those used to demonstrate LMB performance.
7.8.9.3.1 Activated Silica Gel. Supelco® 1-3651, Bio-Sil® A, 100-200 mesh (or equivalent). Prior to use, silica gel should be activated by solvent rinsing and heat activation. It is recommended to rinse with methylene chloride and activate the silica gel by heating for at least 1 hour at 180 °C (356 °F). After allowing to cool, rinse the silica gel sequentially with methanol and toluene. Heat the rinsed silica gel at 50 °C (122 °F) for 10 minutes, then increase the temperature gradually to 180 °C (356 °F) over 25 minutes and maintain the gel at this temperature for 90 minutes. Allow to cool in a desiccator to room temperature and store in a glass container with a PTFE-lined screw cap. Alternative conditioning procedure may be used if the performance criteria in Section 13.1 are met for target compounds.
7.8.9.3.2 Acidic Silica Gel (30% weight/weight). Combine 100 g of activated silica gel with 44 g of concentrated sulfuric acid in a clean screw-capped glass container and agitate thoroughly. Disperse the solids with a stirring rod until obtaining a uniform mixture of acid-coated silica gel. Store the mixture in a glass container with a PTFE-lined screw cap.
7.8.9.3.3 Basic Silica Gel. Combine 30 g of 1 N sodium hydroxide with 100 g of activated silica gel in a clean screw-capped glass container and agitate thoroughly. Disperse solids with a stirring rod until obtaining a uniform mixture of base-coated silica gel. Store the mixture in glass container with a PTFE-lined screw cap.
7.8.9.4 Carbon/Celite® 545 (or equivalent solid support). Use of a carbon-based column cleanup material (e.g., one of the many including for example Carbopack® B or C) to further remove non-planar impurities from the samples prior to analysis may be necessary. You must evaluate alternative carbon-based sorbents for this purpose prior to their use. An 18% weight/weight mixture of Carbopack® C and Celite® 545 has been used for this purpose and should be activated at 130 °C (266 °F) for a minimum of 6 hours. Allow to cool and store this mixture in a desiccator.
7.8.10 Nitrogen. 99.999% (ultra-high) purity.
7.9 Sample Analysis.
7.9.1 Helium. 99.999% (ultra-high) purity.
7.9.2 Spiking Standards. Prepare spiking standards quantitatively at a convenient concentration (e.g., 10 nanograms (ng)/mL) or use commercial standards if available, to enable accurate spiking of a labeled standard at various stages of the sample and extract preparation. You may adjust the sample fortification concentrations from those recommended in Tables 23-7, 23-8, and 23-9 of this method to accommodate the concentration of target compounds anticipated in samples if the performance criteria in Section 13 of this method are met.
Note: When adjusting the fortification concentrations in the final sample extract, consider variables such as the aliquot of extract used and injection volume of samples and calibration.
7.9.3 Pre-Sampling Adsorbent Standard. Prepare stock standard solutions in nonane to enable spiking so that the isotopically labeled compounds in the final sample extract are at the concentration shown under the heading “Pre-sampling Adsorbent Standard” in Tables 23-7, 23-8, and 23-9 of this method, for applicable target compound classes.
7.9.4 Pre-extraction Filter Recovery Standard. Prepare stock standard solutions in nonane to enable spiking so that the isotopically labeled compounds in the final sample extract are at the concentration shown under the heading “Pre-extraction Filter Recovery Standard” in Tables 23-7, 23-8, and 23-9 of this method, for applicable target compound classes.
7.9.5 Pre-extraction Standard. Prepare stock standard solutions in nonane to enable spiking so that the isotopically labeled compounds in the final sample extract are at the concentration shown under the heading “Pre-extraction Standard” in Tables 23-7, 23-8, and 23-9 of this method, for applicable target compound classes.
7.9.6 Pre-analysis Standard. Prepare stock standard solutions in nonane to enable spiking so that the isotopically labeled compounds in the final sample extract are at the concentration shown under the heading “Pre-analysis Standard” in Tables 23-7, 23-8, and 23-9 of this method, for applicable target compound classes.
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, and Storage
8.1 Sampling. This method involves collection and recovery of trace concentrations of target semivolatile organic compounds. Therefore, field sampling and recovery staff should be trained and experienced in the best practices for handling and using organic solvents in field environments to recover and protect samples from contamination.
8.1.1 Pretest Preparation.
8.1.1.1 Cleaning Glassware. Clean glassware thoroughly before using. This section provides a recommended procedure, but any protocol that consistently results in contamination-free glassware meeting the LMB criteria in Section 13.1 of this method is acceptable.
8.1.1.1.1 Soak all glassware in hot soapy water (Alconox® or equivalent).
8.1.1.1.2 Rinse with hot tap water.
8.1.1.1.3 Rinse with deionized/distilled water.
8.1.1.1.4 Rinse with methanol.
8.1.1.1.5 Rinse with toluene.
8.1.1.1.6 Baking glassware up to 400 °C (752 °F) for a minimum of 2 hours may be necessary to remove contaminants or interferents from particularly dirty samples. Allow glassware to cool after baking.
Note: Repeated baking of glassware may cause active sites on the glass surface that may irreversibly adsorb target compounds.
8.1.1.1.7 Cover glassware openings with clean glass fitting caps or cleaned aluminum foil (see Section 6.2.6 of this method).
8.1.1.1.8 Rinse glassware immediately before use with acetone and toluene.
Note: To prepare heavily soiled glassware, remove surface residuals from the glassware by soaking in hot soapy water, rinsing with hot water, then soaking with a non-chromic acid oxidizing cleaning reagent in a strong acid (e.g., NOCHROMIX® prepared according to manufacturer's directions). After the acid soak, rinse with hot water and repeat the cleaning procedures in Section 8.1.1.1 of this method.
8.1.1.2 Adsorbent Module. Load the modules in a clean area to avoid contamination. Fill a module with 20 to 40 g of XAD-2. Spike modules before the sampling event, but do not spike the modules in the field. Add the pre-sampling adsorbent standard to the top quarter of the adsorbent bed rather than onto the top or bottom of the adsorbent bed. Add sufficient spike (picograms (pg)/module) to result in the final sample theoretical concentrations specified in Tables 23-7, 23-8, and 23-9 of this method for PCDD/PCDF, PAH, and PCB, respectively, and to be above the lowest calibration concentration to ensure the standard recovery is quantitative. For samples with known or anticipated target compound concentration significantly higher or lower than the specified concentration in these tables, adjust the pre-sampling adsorbent standard concentration to the expected native compound concentration, but no less than 10 times the method detection limit (MDL). Follow the XAD-2 with cleaned glass wool and tightly cap both ends of the module. For analysis that includes PAH, use spiked modules within 14 days of preparation. See Table 23-10 of this method for storage conditions.
8.1.1.3 Sampling Train. Figure 23-1 of this method shows the complete sampling train. Follow the best practices by maintaining all sampling train components according to the procedure described in APTD-0576 Maintenance, Calibration, and Operation of Isokinetic Source-sampling Equipment (U.S. EPA 1972).
8.1.1.4 Silica Gel. Weigh several 200 to 300 g portions of silica gel in an air-tight container to the nearest 0.5 g. Record the total weight of the silica gel plus container, on the outside of each container. As an alternative, directly weigh the silica gel in its impinger or sampling holder just prior to sampling.
8.1.1.5 Filter. Check each filter against light for irregularities and flaws or pinhole leaks. Pack the filters flat in a clean glass container. Do not mark filters with ink or any other contaminating substance.
8.1.2 Preliminary Determinations. Use the procedures specified in Section 8.2 of Method 5 of Appendix A-3 to 40 CFR part 60.
8.1.2.1 Sample Volume. Unless otherwise specified in an applicable rule, regulation, or permit, sample for a minimum of 2 minutes at each traverse point. This method recommends sampling a minimum of 2.5 dry standard cubic meters (dscm).
8.1.2.2 For continuously operating processes, use the same sampling time at each traverse point. To avoid timekeeping errors, use an integer, or an integer plus one-half minute, for each traverse point.
8.1.2.3 For batch processes, determine the minimum operating cycle duration, dividing the sampling time evenly between the required numbers of traverse points. After sampling all traverse points once, sample each point again for the same duration of time per sampling point in reverse order until the operating cycle is completed. Sample all traverse points at least once during each test run.
8.1.3 Preparation of Sampling Train.
8.1.3.1 During field preparation and assembly of the sampling train, keep all train openings where contamination can enter sealed until just prior to assembly or until sampling is about to begin. To protect the adsorbent module from radiant heat and sunlight, you must wrap the module with aluminum foil or other suitable material capable of shielding the module from light. The XAD-2 adsorbent resin temperature must never exceed 50 °C (122 °F) because thermal decomposition will occur. Clean and prepare a complete set of sampling train components that will contact the sample for each sampling run, including one complete set to be used as a field train proof blank as a tool to evaluate equipment preparation and potential contamination during sample recovery as described in Section 9.6 of this method.
8.1.3.2 Place approximately 100 mL of water in the second and third impingers but leave the first and fourth impingers empty. Transfer approximately 200 g or more of silica gel from its container to the fifth impinger. Weigh each impinger and the adsorbent module, including the fitting caps, to the nearest 0.5 g using the field balance and record the weight for moisture determination. Remove the aluminum foil from the adsorbent module before weighing. Keep the module out of direct sunlight and rewrap the module with foil immediately after recording the module weight.
8.1.3.3 Using tweezers or clean disposable surgical gloves, place a filter in the filter holder. Be sure that the filter is properly centered, and the gasket properly placed, to prevent the sample gas stream from circumventing the filter. Check the filter for tears after completing the assembly.
8.1.3.4 Prepare the inside of the sampling probe and nozzle by brushing each component while rinsing three times each with acetone and toluene. Install the selected nozzle, using the connecting systems described in Section 6.1.2 of this method. Mark the probe with heat resistant tape or by some other method to denote the proper distance into the stack or duct for each sampling point. Assemble the train as shown in Figure 23-1 of this method. Orient the adsorbent module vertically so condensed moisture drains into the first impinger. See APTD-0576 Maintenance, Calibration, and Operation of Isokinetic Source-sampling Equipment (U.S. EPA 1972) for details.
8.1.3.5 Turn on the recirculation pump to the adsorbent module and condenser coil and begin monitoring the temperature of the gas entering the adsorbent module. Ensure proper temperature of the gas entering the adsorbent module before proceeding.
8.1.4 Leak-Check Procedure. Same as Section 8.4 of Method 5 of Appendix A-3 to 40 CFR part 60.
8.1.5 Sampling Train Operation. Same as Sections 8.5.1 through 8.5.9 of Method 5 of Appendix A-3 to 40 CFR part 60.
8.1.5.1 Monitor the filter temperature with a sensor and record the filter temperature during sampling to ensure a sample gas temperature exiting the filter of 120 °C ± 14 °C (248 °F ± 25 °F), or such other temperature as specified by an applicable subpart of the standards or approved by the Administrator for an application of this method.
8.1.5.2 During testing, you must record the temperature of the gas entering the XAD-2 adsorbent module. The temperature of the gas must not exceed 20 °C (68 °F) for efficient capture of the target compounds.
8.2 Sample Recovery. Begin the cleanup procedure as soon as the probe is removed from the stack at the end of the sampling period. Seal the nozzle end of the sampling probe with PTFE tape or clean (e.g., toluene rinsed) aluminum foil.
8.2.1 When the probe can be safely handled, wipe off all external particulate matter near the tip of the probe. Conduct a post-test leak check. Remove the probe from the train and close off both ends with PTFE tape or clean aluminum foil. Seal off the inlet to the train with PTFE tape, a ground glass cap, or clean aluminum foil.
8.2.2 Transfer the probe and impinger assembly to the cleanup area. This method recommends cleaning and enclosing this area to minimize the chances of losing or contaminating the sample. To avoid sample contamination and unnecessary exposure to toxic chemicals, smoking or eating in the sample recovery area shall not be allowed.
8.2.3 Inspect the train prior to and during disassembly. Note and record any abnormal conditions (e.g., broken filters, colored impinger liquid). Recover and prepare samples for shipping as follows in Sections 8.2.4 through 8.2.12 of this method.
8.2.4 Container No. 1. Either seal the filter holder or carefully remove the filter from the filter holder and place it in its identified container. If it is necessary to remove the filter, use a pair of cleaned tweezers to handle the filter. If necessary, fold the filter such that the particulate cake is inside the fold. Carefully transfer to the container any particulate matter and filter fibers that adhere to the filter holder gasket by using a dry inert bristle brush and a sharp-edged blade. Seal the container and store cool (≤20 °C, 68 °F) for transport to the laboratory.
8.2.5 Adsorbent Module Sample. Remove the module from the train, tightly cover both ends with fitting caps and PTFE tape, remove the foil, drain the recirculating water from the module, weigh and record the module weight, and label the adsorbent module. Moisture measurement in the field using the Method 23 train requires weighing the adsorbent module before sampling and after sampling as part of the sample recovery.
8.2.6 Container No. 2. Quantitatively recover material deposited in the nozzle, the front half of the filter holder, and the cyclone, if used, by brushing while rinsing three times with acetone followed by three rinses with toluene. Collect all the rinses in Container No. 2.
8.2.7 Rinse the back half of the filter holder three times with acetone followed by three rinses with toluene. Rinse the sample transfer line between the filter and the condenser three times with acetone followed by three rinses with toluene. If using a separate condenser and adsorbent module, rinse the condenser three times with acetone followed by three rinses with toluene. Collect all the rinses in Container No. 2 and mark the level of the liquid on the container.
8.2.8 Moisture Weight. Weigh the adsorbent module, impingers, and silica gel impinger to within ±0.5 g using the field balance and record the weights. This information is required to calculate the moisture content of the effluent gas. For PCDD/PCDF-only measurements, discard the liquid after measuring and recording the weight.
8.2.9 Container No. 3. You must save and analyze impinger water samples if PAH and/or PCB are the target compounds. Quantitatively recover impinger water samples for analysis if PAH and/or PCB are the target compounds by rinsing three times with acetone followed by three rinses with toluene. Collect impinger water and rinses in Container No. 3 and mark the level of the liquid on the container.
8.2.10 Silica Gel. Note the color of the indicating silica gel to determine if it has been completely spent and report its condition on the field data sheet.
8.2.11 Field Sample Handling, Preservation, Storage, and Transport. Store all field samples temporarily in cool (≤20 °C, 68 °F) and dark conditions prior to transport to the laboratory. Ship samples cool (≤20 °C, 68 °F), shielded from ultraviolet light. In addition, follow the procedures in American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) D6911-15 (Guide for Packaging and Shipping Environmental Samples for Laboratory Analysis) for all samples, where appropriate. To avoid contamination of the samples, pay special attention to cleanliness during transport, field handling, sampling, recovery, and laboratory analysis, as well as during preparation of the adsorbent cartridges.
8.2.12 Sample Custody. Proper procedures and documentation for sample chain of custody are critical to ensuring data integrity. Follow the chain of custody procedures in ASTM D4840-99(2018)e1 (Standard Guide for Sample Chain-of-Custody Procedures) for all samples (including field samples and blanks).
8.3 Sample Storage Conditions and Laboratory Hold Times.
8.3.1 Table 23-10 of this method summarizes the sample storage conditions and laboratory hold times.
8.3.2 Store sampling train rinses and filter samples in the dark at the storage conditions in Table 23-10 from the time the laboratory receives the samples until analysis.
8.3.3 You may store adsorbent samples for PCDD/PCDF or PCB analysis prior to extraction in the dark at 6 °C (43 °F) or less for up to one year from the time the laboratory receives the samples.
Note: The hold times listed in this method for adsorbent samples for PCDD/PCDF and PCB are recommendations as these compounds are very stable under the conditions listed in this section.
8.3.4 Protect adsorbent samples destined for PAH analysis from ultraviolet light. You may store adsorbent samples for PAH analysis in the dark at 6 °C (43 °F) or less for up to 30 days from the time the laboratory receives the samples.
8.3.5 Analyze PAH extracts within 40 days of extraction.
8.3.6 You may store sample aliquots including archived extracts of PCDD/PCDF, PAH and/or PCB samples in the dark at −10 °C (14 °F) or less for up to one year. Sample extracts must not be stored with pierced septa.
Note: The hold times listed in this method for sample aliquots for PCDD/PCDF and PCB are recommendations as these compounds are very stable under the conditions listed in this section.
9.0 Quality Control
Note: In recognition of advances that are occurring in sampling and analytical technology, and to allow the test team to overcome analyte sensitivity and matrix interferences, this method allows certain options to increase sample collection volume and to improve separations and the quality of the analysis results for target analytes. It is the laboratory's responsibility to establish the conditions for optimum sample extraction, cleanup, and concentration to meet the performance criteria in this method. However, you may not change the fundamental sampling and analysis techniques, isokinetic sampling with an adsorbent collection media followed by sample extraction, and HRMS detection and isotopic dilution quantification procedures. Section 13 of this method specifies the performance criteria to ensure that options employed for a sample set and analytes of interest are equal to or better than the specificity of the techniques in this method. The minimum requirements of this method consist of the initial demonstration of capability (IDC) and ongoing QC requirements. The analysis team shall perform an IDC to demonstrate acceptable accuracy and precision with this method as described in Section 9.3. The ongoing QC includes performing CCVs and LMBs to evaluate an individual laboratory's performance against the criteria in this method. The method includes analysis of samples spiked with labeled compounds to evaluate and document data quality. Laboratory performance is compared to established performance criteria to determine if the results of analyses meet the performance characteristics and requirements of the method.
9.1 Record and report data and information that will allow an independent reviewer to validate the determination of each target compound concentration. Record and report the data as described in Sections 9.1.1 through 9.1.7 of this method and performance criteria results required in Section 13 of this method.
9.1.1 Sample numbers and other sample identifiers. Each sample must have a unique identifier.
9.1.2 Field sample volume.
9.1.3 Field sampling date.
9.1.4 Extraction dates.
9.1.5 Analysis dates and times.
9.1.6 Analysis sequence/run chronology.
9.1.7 Quantitation Reports.
9.1.7.1 This method does not consider EMPC-flagged data to be zero concentrations. Calculate and report the EMPC concentrations.
9.1.7.2 In determining compliance with any PCDD and PCDF standard developed using zero for values that are below the EDL of the method, including federal emission standards using Method 23 promulgated under 40 CFR parts 60 and 63 prior to March 20, 2023, use zero for the determination of total and weighted concentrations when the target compound is not detected. For all other circumstances, unless otherwise specified in applicable regulations, permits, or other requirements, when a target compound is measured at or below EDL, use EDL as the concentration for calculating compliance.
9.1.7.3 For each sample you must report EDLs, MDLs, LMBs and Field Train Proof Blank results and target compound analysis results.
9.2 Isotopically Labeled Standard Recovery.
9.2.1 Pre-sampling Adsorbent Standard and Pre-extraction Filter Recovery Standard Recoveries. Pre-sampling adsorbent standard and pre-extraction filter recovery standard recoveries must demonstrate on a per sample basis that recovery of the labeled standard achieved the requirements in Section 13 of this method. Recoveries below the acceptable range for the pre-sampling adsorbent standard may be an indication of breakthrough in the sampling train.
9.2.1.1 If the pre-sampling adsorbent standard average percent recovery is below 70%, the sampling run is not valid, and the stack test must be repeated. As an alternative, you do not have to repeat the stack test for invalid analyses if the pre-sampling adsorbent standard average percent recovery is 25% or more and you divide the final results by the fraction of the pre-sampling adsorbent standard average percent recovery.
9.2.1.2 If the percent recovery of all the pre-extraction filter recovery standard compounds is below 70%, you may reanalyze the sample. If the recovery is still below the limit, the filter sampling extraction is not valid, and you must repeat the stack or vent sampling and subsequent analysis.
9.2.2 Pre-extraction Standard Recoveries. Pre-extraction standard recoveries must demonstrate on a per sample basis that recovery of the labeled standard achieved the requirements in Section 13.15 of this method. If the recovery criteria are not met, you may reanalyze the sample. If the recovery criteria are still not met, the sampling run is not valid, and the stack test must be repeated. Recoveries outside the acceptable range for pre-extraction standard are an indication that sample preparation procedures did not adequately address sample and or sample matrix processing to recover native target compounds.
9.2.3 Pre-analysis Standard Response. Pre-analysis standard recoveries must demonstrate on a per sample basis that adequate labeled standard signal meets the requirements in Section 13.16 of this method. Add pre-analysis standard to every sample (including blanks, QC samples, and calibration solutions) in a known concentration. If the prepared samples do not meet the pre-analysis standard response criteria, you may reanalyze and/or prepare and analyze archive samples to attempt meeting requirements for the compounds that do not meet the pre-analysis standard response criteria. Poor sensitivity compared to initial calibration response may indicate injection errors or instrument drift.
9.3 Initial Demonstration of Capability (IDC). The IDC must be successfully performed prior to analyzing field samples by meeting the QC requirements in Table 23-18. The IDC must be repeated if changes are made to analytical parameters not previously validated during the IDC. This may include, for example, changing the sample volume, selecting alternate quantitation ions, extending the calibration range, adding additional pre-analysis standard, or adding additional pre-extraction standard. The same calibration range used during the IDC must be used for the analysis of field samples.
9.3.1 Perform initial calibration following the procedures in Section 10. The lowest calibration standard used to establish the initial calibration must not be less than three times the MDL. The initial calibration must meet performance criteria in Section 13.9.
9.3.2 Lowest Calibration Concentration Confirmation. Establish a target concentration for the lowest calibration standard based on the intended use of the method. The lowest calibration concentration may be established by a laboratory or programmatic lowest quantitative reporting requirement. The laboratory calibration curve must be set at or below this level. Perform seven replicate analyses of a calibration sample prepared at proposed lowest calibration concentration. The replicate analyses of the lowest calibration concentrations standards must meet the criteria in Sections 13.9 and 13.17.1.
Note: Consider that establishing the lowest calibration concentration too low may cause repeated failure of ongoing QC requirements.
9.3.3 Calculate Lowest Calibration Statistics. Calculate the mean and standard deviation for each analyte in these replicates (those used in Section 9.3.2). Determine the Half Range for the Prediction Interval of Results (HRPIR) using Equation 23-13. Calculate the Upper and Lower Limits for the Prediction Interval of Results (PIR) with Equations 23-14 and 23-15.
9.3.4 Lowest Calibration Point Acceptance Criteria. The laboratory's ability to measure analyte concentrations down to the lowest calibration point is confirmed if the criteria presented in Section 13.17.1 are met. If these criteria are not met, the lowest calibration point as been set too low and must be confirmed at a higher concentration.
9.3.5 Demonstration of Low System Background. Analyze an LMB after the highest standard in the calibration range. If an automated extraction system is used, an LMB must be extracted on each port. Performance criteria are presented in Section 13.1. Note: When using automated systems, the same systems must be used for samples and QC samples, such as blanks and resin checks.
9.3.6 Initial Calibration Verification. A QCS must be analyzed during the IDC, and then following each initial calibration thereafter (at a minimum quarterly). A QCS is a mid-level standard prepared from a second source standard or prepared from a source of standards different from the source of calibration standards. The purpose of the QCS is to verify the integrity of the primary calibration standards. The acceptance criterion is presented in Section 13.11.
9.3.7 MDL. Perform an MDL determination using a minimum of seven spiked combined filter/sorbent media samples, spiked within 2 to 10 times of the expected MDL, and seven LMBs (combined filter/sorbent media) through all the steps of the method following the requirements in 40 CFR part 136 Appendix B. Confirm target compounds meet the qualitative identification criteria in Sections 13.12 and 13.13. The criteria for the MDL determination are presented in Section 13.6.1 of this method.
9.3.8 MDL Confirmation. Confirm newly determined MDLs by preparing a low-level spiked combined filter/sorbent media sample by spiking the sorbent with native target compounds at 1 to 5 times the MDL and pre-extraction standard at the concentration used to analyze field samples and analyze. The criterion for the MDL confirmation is presented in Section 13.6.1 of this method.
9.3.9 Demonstration of Precision. Prepare, extract, and analyze seven replicate spiked samples in a valid Extraction Batch. Fortify the spiked samples near the midpoint of the initial calibration curve. The criterion is presented in Section 13.17.2 and Table 23-18. Demonstration is repeated for failed compounds only.
9.3.10 Demonstration of Accuracy. Using the same set of replicate data generated for Section 9.3.9 of this method, calculate the average % recovery. The criterion is presented in Section 13.17.3 and Table 23-18. Demonstration is repeated for failed compounds only.
9.4 LMBs. Evaluate background contamination from glassware, equipment, solvents, standards, and media used for sample batches using an LMB prepared and analyzed identically to the field samples, including the same labeled standards, media, sodium sulfate, glass wool, glassware, solvents, etc. An LMB must be extracted with every batch of samples. Analyze an LMB at least once during each analytical sequence or every 12 hours, whichever period is shorter. If multiple LMB are required for an analytical sequence, report the initial LMB associated with each 12 hour analysis period.
9.5 EDL. Calculate the EDL using Equation 23-11 of this method.
Note: If the applicable compliance limit is total dioxin or total furan, report the sum of the EDLs for all the target compounds. If the applicable rule limit is a TEQ value, report the sum of the EDLs for all target compounds multiplied by their corresponding compound specific TEF.
9.6 Field Train Proof Blank Assessment. Conduct at least one field train proof blank for each test series at a single facility. A field train proof blank is used to evaluate equipment preparation and potential contamination during sample recovery and consists of a fully assembled train at the sampling site. Prepare and assemble the field train proof blank train in a manner identical to that described in Sections 8.1.3 and 8.1.4 of this method using glassware from the same preparation batch as the field samples. The field train proof blank train must remain assembled for the same average amount of time samples are collected. Recover the field train proof blank train as described in Section 8.2 of this method. Follow all subsequent steps for field train proof blank train sample preparation and analysis used for field samples including data reporting. Section 13.1 of this method describes the criteria for the field train proof blank.
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
10.1 Sampling System. Same as Sections 6.1 and 10.1 through 10.7 of Method 5 of Appendix A-3 to 40 CFR part 60.
10.2 HRGC/HRMS System.
10.2.1 Mass Resolution. Tune the HRMS instrument to a resolving power of at least 10,000 at 10% percent of the peak height or 25,000 at 50% percent of the peak height. The resolving power for PAH and PCB analysis may be 8,000 at 10% of the peak height or 15,000 at 50% of the peak height. Assess the resolution at three exact m/z's representing the low-, mid-, and high-m/z range of the masses used to measure the target compound class. You may use peak matching and the chosen perfluoro-kerosene (PFK) or perfluorotributylamine (FC43) reference peak to verify that the exact mass is within 5 ppm of the required value.
10.2.2 Initial Calibration. Calibrate the HRGC/HRMS system using a minimum of five concentrations over a range that brackets expected field sample concentrations and the concentration of isotopically labeled standards in spiked samples. Tables 23-11, 23-12, and/or 23-13 of this method show the calibration concentrations recommended by this method, as applicable to the target compound classes. Determine the initial relative response factors for the target compounds and isotopically labeled standards using the initial calibration. Criteria for the initial calibration is in Section 13.9 of this method.
10.2.2.1 Lock-Mass Ions. Tables 23-4, 23-5, and 23-6 of this method present the recommended mass spectrometer lock-mass ions for PCDD/PCDF, PAH, and PCB, respectively. The reference compounds PFK or FC43 have ions that may be selected as your lock-mass and QC check ions. Monitor the QC check ions specified in these tables to verify instrument stability during the analysis (see Section 13.8 for performance criteria). Additional cleanup of the sample extract (or archive extract) and reanalysis is necessary for failure to maintain the lock-mass during analysis.
10.2.2.2 The relative standard deviation (RSD) for the mean calibration relative response factor from each of the unlabeled analytes and isotopically labeled compounds used in an analysis must be less than or equal to the values in Table 23-14 of this method.
10.2.2.3 The signal-to-noise (S/N) ratio for the GC/MS signal present in every selected ion current profile must be greater than or equal to 10 in all concentrations of calibration standards for unlabeled targets and isotopically labeled standards. The ion abundance ratios must be within the control limits in Table 23-15 of this method.
Note: An interference with PFK m/z 223.9872 may preclude meeting 10:1 S/N for the DiCB congeners at the optional Cal 1 level (Table 23-11). If this interference occurs, 10:1 S/N must be met at the Cal 2 level.
10.2.3 Continuing Calibration Verification.
10.2.3.1 Prepare the CCV standard at the same time as the batch of field samples using the same labeled standards. Prepare CCV standards at mid-level of the calibration (C3 level from Tables 23-11, 23-12, or 23-13 of this method). Inject a CCV standard, for the target compound class, at least once every 12 hours during an analysis sequence. Calculate the RRF for each compound and compare each RRF to the corresponding mean RRF obtained during the initial calibration. The RRF for each native compound measured in a CCV must not deviate from the initial calibration RRF by more than the limits shown in Table 23-14.
10.2.3.2 The ion abundance ratios must be within the allowable control limits shown in Table 23-15 of this method.
10.2.3.3 The S/N ratio for the GC/MS signal present in every selected ion current profile must be greater than or equal to 10.
10.2.3.4 Repeat the initial calibration when there is a failure to meet the requirements for acceptable CCV standard analysis.
10.2.3.5 Column Separation Check. Use the results from a CCV to verify and document the resolution required in Section 13.2, 13.3, or 13.4 of this method for the target compound classes analyzed with this method. If target compounds are not sufficiently resolved to meet the requirement, an analysis on a confirmation column is recommended (see Section 13.5 of this method).
10.2.3.6 If you use a confirmation column, perform the resolution check in Section 10.2.3.5 of this method to document the required resolution on the confirmation column. See Section 13.5 of this method on confirmation columns, if needed.
11.0 Analysis Procedure
11.1 Sample Extraction and Concentration. The sample extraction procedures in this method are the same for PCDD, PCDF, PCB and PAH targets. Figure 23-4 provides a flow chart showing sample container combination and extraction steps. Do not allow samples and extracts destined for PAH or PCB analysis to concentrate to dryness because the lower molecular weight PAH and the mono- through tri-chlorobiphenyls may be totally or partially lost. Note: Rotary evaporation is applicable when analyzing for PCDD/PCDF only. Snyder column apparatus is recommended when analyzing for PAH and PCB.
11.1.1 Optional Soxhlet Precleaning. Place an extraction thimble (see Section 6.3.3.3 of this method) and a plug of glass wool into the Soxhlet apparatus equipped with a Dean-Stark trap, charge the apparatus with toluene, and reflux for a minimum of 3 hours. Remove the toluene and discard it. Remove the extraction thimble from the extraction system and place it in a glass beaker to catch the solvent rinses from sample transfer to the extraction thimble. Retain the clean glass wool plug. Alternatively, confirm that the LMB for associated reagents, materials, and media meets the performance requirements in Section 13.1 of this method.
11.1.2 Container No. 1 (Filter) Preparation. Spike the filter with the appropriate pre-extraction filter recovery standard to result in the final sample extract concentrations shown in Tables 23-7, 23-8, and 23-9 of this method taking care that all spike liquid is distributed on the filter. Allow the filter to dry enough to prevent overspill, then transfer the filter and the contents of Container No. 1 directly to the glass extraction thimble in the glass solvent rinse catch beaker so that the filter will be completely immersed in the solvent during extraction.
11.1.3 Adsorbent Module. Spike the adsorbent with the appropriate pre-extraction standard to result in the final sample extract concentrations shown in Tables 23-7, 23-8, and 23-9 of this method, as applicable, spiked into the adsorbent, not on top of the adsorbent. Transfer the adsorbent material to the glass extraction thimble in the glass solvent rinse catch beaker. Rinse the module into the thimble in the beaker with the contents of Container No. 1. Alternatively, suspend the adsorbent module directly over the extraction thimble in a beaker, then, using a wash bottle containing methanol, flush the XAD-2 into the thimble onto the filter. Thoroughly rinse the interior of the glass module that contained the XAD-2 with toluene.
11.1.4 Container No. 2 (Acetone and Toluene Rinses). Concentrate the sample to a volume of no less than 5 mL. Concentrate samples containing toluene using a heating mantle and three-ball Snyder column or a rotary evaporator. Rinse sample Container No. 2 three times with small portions of toluene and add these to the concentrated solution and concentrate further to no less than 5 mL. This residue contains particulate matter removed in the rinse of the train probe and nozzle. Rinse the concentrated material from Container No. 2 into the glass extraction thimble containing the filter and the XAD-2 resin.
11.1.5 Transfer the solvent contained in the glass solvent rinse catch beaker to the extraction apparatus solvent reservoir. Rinse the beaker into the Soxhlet extraction apparatus solvent reservoir three times with small portions of toluene.
11.1.6 Container No. 3 (Impinger Water and Rinses). For PAH and PCB analysis, transfer the contents of Container No. 3 to a separatory funnel. Adjust to pH 2 with 6 N sulfuric acid, if necessary. Rinse the sample container with three successive 10-mL aliquots of the toluene and add these rinses to the separatory funnel. Extract the sample by vigorously shaking the separatory funnel for 5 minutes. After complete separation of the phases, remove the solvent and filter it through a bed of precleaned, dry sodium sulfate into the Soxhlet extraction apparatus solvent reservoir. Repeat the extraction step two additional times. Adjust the pH to 11 with 6 N sodium hydroxide, re-extract the impinger water and rinses, and filter it through a bed of precleaned, dry sodium sulfate into the Soxhlet extraction apparatus solvent reservoir. Rinse the sodium sulfate into the extraction apparatus solvent reservoir with fresh solvent and discard the sodium sulfate.
11.1.7 Add the appropriate pre-extraction standard for the target compound classes (to result in the final sample extract concentrations shown in Tables 23-7, 23-8, and 23-9 of this method) to the extraction thimble containing the combined filter and adsorbent sample fractions. Cover the contents of the extraction thimble with the cleaned glass wool plug to prevent the XAD-2 resin from splashing into the solvent reservoir of the extractor. Place the extraction thimble into the Soxhlet extraction apparatus.
11.1.8 Pour additional toluene to fill the solvent reservoir to approximately two-thirds capacity. Add PTFE boiling chips and assemble the apparatus.
11.1.9 Adjust the heat source to cause the extractor to cycle approximately three times per hour. Extract the sample for sufficient time to meet the pre-extraction standard recovery performance criteria in Section 13.15 of this method. The solvent should cycle completely through the system a minimum of 48 times.
11.2 Sample Aliquots for Cleanup and Analysis.
11.2.1 After extraction, allow the Soxhlet apparatus to cool.
11.2.2 Initial Extract Concentration. You may perform an initial concentration of the sample extract using the techniques (e.g., Kuderna Danish, rotary evaporation, nitrogen blowdown) found to recover the pre-extraction standard sufficient to meet the performance criteria in Section 13.15 of this method. Concentrate initial extracts in toluene using a heating mantle and three-ball Snyder column or a rotary evaporator. Concentrate the field train proof blank and LMB samples in the same manner as samples.
Note: To meet isotopically labeled standard recoveries for low molecular weight PCB and PAH, do not evaporate samples to dryness and do not use a rotary evaporator to concentrate extracts.
11.2.3 Allow the sample extract to cool. You should use a minimum of one half of the sample extract for PCDD/PCDF analysis. You may archive the remaining sample extract or further split the sample extract for PCB and/or PAH analysis and archive.
Note: If using amount other than half the sample extract, adjust the spiking amount of the labeled standards accordingly.
11.2.4 If necessary, further concentrate the sample extract for cleanup and analysis using concentration techniques (e.g., Kuderna Danish, rotary evaporation, nitrogen blowdown) found to recover the pre-extraction standard sufficient to meet the performance criteria in Section 13 of this method.
11.3 Sample Cleanup and Fractionation. You may process a separate aliquot/split of the sample extract for each of the compound classes analyzed by this method. Sample cleanup for each compound class may include techniques in addition to column chromatography such as acid/base back-extraction, Gel Permeation Chromatography, or high-performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) to isolate target compounds from interferences. This section includes a description of column chromatography shown to meet the performance criteria in Sections 9.2 and 13 of this method. The following sample cleanup and fractionation procedures are recommended but not required. You may modify cleanup column dimensions to meet manual or automated cleanup procedures as technology changes and improves. You must evaluate the cleanup and fractionation procedures used to confirm acceptable recovery of isotopically labeled standards. The alternative procedures must provide sufficient cleanup to meet method identification criteria (Section 11.4.3.4 of this method) and recovery criteria (Section 9.2 of this method). Section 13 of this method summarizes the method performance requirements.
Note: Recommendations in this section provide a cleanup approach that may allow multiple compound class measurement from a single aliquot of the original sample extract. Typically, Florisil® and alumina are used to separate PAH and PCDPE from PCDD and PCDF target compounds. Use acid, neutral, and basic silica gel and cleanup procedures to remove nonpolar and polar interferences from samples destined for PCB and PCDD/PCDF analysis. Use Carbopack®/Celite® (or other equivalent carbon-based column material) to remove other nonpolar interferences.
11.3.1 PAH and PCDPE Fractionation and Cleanup. You may use a Florisil® column to remove PAH and PCDPE from the sample extract. You may also fractionate sample extracts using Florisil® as the first cleanup step to separate PAH for analysis.
Note: High concentrations of PAH may interfere, leading to failure of performance criteria for PCDD/PCDF or PCB analysis.
11.3.1.1 Pack a 6-mm ID chromatographic column or equivalent diameter glass pipet with a glass wool plug followed by approximately 1.5 g (approximately 2 mL) of activated Florisil®. Add approximately 1 cm (approximately 1 mL) of anhydrous sodium sulfate followed by a glass wool plug to the head of the column. Pre-elute the column with 10 mL of methylene chloride followed by 10 mL of hexane and discard the eluate.
11.3.1.2 When the solvent is within 1 mm of the packing, transfer the concentrated extract (up to 5 mL) to the top of the Florisil® column, rinse the sample container twice with 1 to 2 mL of hexane, adding each rinse to the column, and elute the column with 35 mL of 5% dichloromethane in hexane. This fraction (Fraction 1) should contain target PCB, and selected hydrocarbons and chlorinated monoaromatic compounds.
11.3.1.3 Elute the column with 35 mL of 15% of dichloromethane in hexane and collect the eluate. This fraction (Fraction 2) should contain target PCDD/PCDF compounds.
11.3.1.4 Elute the column with 50 mL of 50% dichloromethane in hexane. The fraction (Fraction 3) should contain target PAH.
11.3.1.5 If necessary to remove any remaining polar organic compounds, elute the column with 70 mL of 15% acetone in hexane.
11.3.2 PCDD/PCDF and PCB Fractionation and Cleanup. You may remove PAH from the original aliquot of sample extract used for PCDD/PCDF analysis as described in Section 11.3.1 of this method. Design the column cleanup chromatography for PCDD/PCDF and PCB such that two consecutive fractions are collected (one with PCDD/PCDF and one with PCB) without impacting the detection limits. Depending on the source and sample matrix of the original sample, one or more of the following column cleanup approaches may be necessary to further remove polyhalogenated diphenyl ethers. You may use any number of permutations found in the referenced literature for this cleanup if the pre-extraction standard recoveries from field and LMB samples meet the associated performance criteria in Section 13 of this method. Alternatively, you may use an automated cleanup approach that meets the labeled spike recovery requirements in Section 13 of this method.
11.3.2.1 Silica Gel Column Chromatography. Pack one end of a glass column, approximately 20 mm ID × 230 mm long, with glass wool. Add in sequence to the glass column, 1 g of silica gel, 2 g of sodium hydroxide impregnated silica gel, 1 g of silica gel, 4 g of acid-modified silica gel, 1 g of silica gel, and 1 cm layer of anhydrous sodium sulfate. Pre-elute the column with 30 to 50 mL of hexane leaving a small quantity of hexane above the sodium sulfate layer. Discard the pre-elution hexane. Add the sample extract, dissolved in 5 mL of hexane to the head of the column. Allow the sample to flow into the column leaving a small quantity of hexane above the sodium sulfate layer. Rinse the extract container with two additional 5-mL rinses of hexane and apply each rinse to the column separately as the previous addition elutes. Elute the column with an additional 90 mL of hexane and retain the entire eluate. Concentrate this solution to a volume of about 1 mL using the nitrogen evaporative concentrator (see Section 6.3.5 of this method).
11.3.2.2 Silver Nitrate Silica Gel Column Chromatography. Pack a column (6 mm ID, 150 mm in length) sequentially with 1 g of silica gel and 1 g of 10% silver nitrate silica gel followed by a layer of about 10 mm of sodium sulfate (anhydrous). Wash the column sufficiently with hexane, elute until the liquid level reaches to the upper end of the column, and then transfer the concentrated sample (about 5 mL). Rinse the container several times with a small amount of hexane, elute with 200 mL of hexane at a flow rate about 2.5 mL/min (approximately one drop per second) to elute PCDD/PCDF.
11.3.2.3 Multi-layer Silica Gel Column Chromatography. You may use a multi-layer silica gel column in place of separate silica columns. Pack a column of 20 mm ID and 300 mm in length sequentially by the dry pack method with 0.9 g of silica gel, 3.0 g of 2% potassium hydroxide silica gel, 0.9 g of silica gel, 4.5 g of 44% sulfuric acid silica gel, 6.0 g of 22% sulfuric acid silica gel, 0.9 g of silica gel, 3.0 g of 10% silver nitrate silica gel, 2.0 g of silica gel and 6.0 g of sodium sulfate (anhydrous). Wash the column sufficiently with hexane, elute until the liquid level reaches to the upper end of the column, and then load the sample solution. Rinse the container several times with a small amount of hexane, elute with 150-200 mL of hexane at a flow rate about 2.5 mL/min (approximately one drop per second) to elute PCDD/PCDF.
11.3.2.4 Basic Alumina Column Chromatography. Pack a column (20 mm ID, 300 mm in length) with approximately 6 to 12 g of basic alumina. Pre-elute the column with 50 to 100 mL of hexane. Transfer the concentrated extract from the previous column cleanup to the top of the basic alumina column. Allow the sample to flow into the column leaving a small quantity of solvent above the top of the bed. Rinse the extract container with two additional 1-mL rinses of hexane and apply each rinse to the column separately as the previous addition elutes. Elute the column with 100 mL hexane to remove the interferences. Elute the PCDD/PCDF from the column with 20 to 40 mL of 50% methylene chloride in hexane. The ratio of methylene chloride to hexane may vary depending on the activity of the alumina used in the column preparation. Do not let the head of the column go without solvent. The first 100 mL hexane eluate is not used for subsequent PCDD/PCDF analysis. The eluate is concentrated to approximately 0.5 mL using the nitrogen evaporative concentrator.
11.3.2.5 Carbopack® C/Celite® 545 Column or Equivalent. Cut both ends from a 10 mL disposable Pasteur pipette (see Section 6.4.1 of this method) to produce a 10 cm column. Fire-polish both ends and flare both ends if desired. Insert a glass wool plug at one end and pack the column with 0.55 g of Carbopack®/Celite® (see Section 7.8.9.4 of this method) to form an adsorbent bed approximately 2 cm long. Insert a glass wool plug on top of the bed to hold the adsorbent in place. Pre-elute the column with 5 mL of toluene followed by 2 mL of methylene chloride:methanol:toluene (15:4:1 volume/volume (v/v)), 1 mL of methylene chloride:cyclohexane (1:1 v/v), and 5 mL of hexane. If the flow rate of eluate exceeds 0.5 mL/minute, discard the column. Do not let the head of the column go without solvent. Add the sample extract to the column. Rinse the sample container twice with 1 mL portions of hexane and apply separately to the column. Apply 2 mL of hexane to the head of the column to complete the transfer. Elute the interfering compounds with two 3 mL portions of hexane, 2 mL of methylene chloride:cyclohexane (1:1 v/v), and 2 mL of methylene chloride:methanol:toluene (15:4:1 v/v). Discard the eluate. Invert the column and elute the PCDD/PCDF with 20 mL of toluene. If carbon particles are present in the eluate, filter through glass-fiber filter paper. Concentrate the eluate to approximately 0.5 mL using the nitrogen evaporative concentrator for further cleanup or analysis by HRGC/HRMS.
11.4 PCDD, PCDF, PCB and PAH Analysis.
11.4.1 Analyze the sample extract with an HRGC/HRMS using the instrumental parameters in Sections 11.4.2 and 11.4.3 of this method.
11.4.1.1 Immediately prior to analysis, add an aliquot (typically 20 microliters (µl)) of the pre-analysis standard to result in the final sample extract concentrations in Tables 23-7, 23-8, and 23-9 of this method to each sample as appropriate for the compounds you are measuring by this method.
11.4.1.2 Inject an aliquot of the sample extract into the GC, typically 1 µl. You may perform separate analyses using different GC columns for each of the target compound classes. Perform calibration and sample analysis for each target compound class using the same instrument operating conditions including injection volume.
11.4.1.2.1 If target compounds are not resolved sufficiently from other target compounds or interferences in the sample to meet the requirements in Section 10.2.3.5 or 10.2.3.6 of this method, as applicable to the compound class being analyzed, or as otherwise specified in an applicable regulation, permit, or other requirement, analyze sample (or another aliquot of the sample) using an alternative column that provides elution order to uniquely quantify the target compounds subject to interference on the first GC column.
11.4.1.2.2 You may use column systems other than those recommended in this method provided the analyst is able to demonstrate, using calibration and CCVs, that the alternative column system is able to meet the applicable specifications of Section 10.2.3.5 or 10.2.3.6 of this method.
11.4.2 Example Gas Chromatograph Operating Conditions.
11.4.2.1 Injector. Configured for capillary column, splitless, 250 °C (482 °F).
11.4.2.2 Carrier Gas. Helium, 1 to 2 mL/min.
11.4.2.3 Oven. Optimize the GC temperature program to achieve the required separation and target compound recovery for the GC column in use. Table 23-16 of this method presents the typical conditions for a DB5-MS column.
11.4.3 High-Resolution Mass Spectrometer.
11.4.3.1 Ionization Mode. Electron ionization.
11.4.3.2 Source Temperature. Maintain the source temperature in the range of 250 to 300 °C (482 to 572 °F).
11.4.3.3 Ion Monitoring Mode. Tables 23-4, 23-5, and 23-6 of this method summarize the various ions to be monitored for PCDD/PCDF, PAH, and PCB, respectively.
11.4.3.4 Identification Criteria for Target Compounds. Use the following identification criteria for the characterization of target compounds in this method. The available native and isotopically labeled standards allow the unique identification of all PCDD/PCDF, PAH, and selected PCB congeners analyzed in this method. Also see Sections 13.12 and 13.13 of this method for identification criteria for PCDD/PCDF/PCB and PAH target compounds, respectively.
11.4.3.4.1 For PCDD/PCDF and PCB, Table 23-15 of this method provides acceptance limits for the integrated ion abundance ratio of primary and secondary target compound ions. When the ion abundance ratio for a target analyte is outside the performance criteria, you may reanalyze samples on an alternative GC column to resolve chemical interferences, tune the mass spectrometer to operate at a higher mass resolution to discriminate against the interference(s), and/or further cleanup an archived sample to remove the interference(s). Report analysis results as an EMPC when a response meets identification criteria except the ion abundance ratio criteria or when a peak representing a PCDPE has been detected at the retention time. This method does not consider EMPC-flagged data to be zero concentrations.
Note: Some EMPCs may be caused by poor ion statistics when the concentration of the target compound is at or near the DL.
11.4.3.4.2 The retention time for the analytes must be within 3 seconds of the corresponding labeled pre-extraction standard.
11.4.3.4.3 The signals for the two exact masses in Tables 23-4 and 23-6 of this method for PCDD/PCDF and PCB, respectively, must be present and must reach their maximum response within two seconds of each other.
11.4.3.4.4 Identify and quantify specific target compounds or isomers that do not have corresponding pre-extraction standard compounds by comparing to the pre-extraction standard of the same compound class with the nearest retention time to target compound.
11.4.3.4.5 For the identification of specific PCB congeners, the retention time of the native congener must be within 0.006 relative retention time (RRT) units of the pre-extraction standard.
11.4.3.4.6 For qualitative identification, the S/N ratio for the GC signal present in every selected ion current profile for native compound response must be greater than or equal to 2.5.
11.4.3.4.7 The separation of target compounds, including 2,3,7,8-TeCDD and 2,3,7,8-TeCDF, must satisfy the separation criteria in Section 10.2.3.5 of this method and all the identification criteria specified in Sections 11.4.3.4.1 through 11.4.3.4.6 of this method. See Section 13.5 of this method on confirmation columns, if needed.
11.4.3.4.8 Chlorodiphenyl Ether Interference. If chromatographic peaks are detected at the retention time of any PCDF in any of the m/z channels used to monitor PCDPE, there is evidence of a positive interference and you may opt to flag data noting the interference and keep the value to calculate PCDF concentration as EMPC or reanalyze to remove or shift the interference. This method recommends alumina (see Section 11.3.2.4 of this method) and Florisil® (see Section 11.3.1 of this method) liquid column chromatography packing materials for removal of PCDPE during sample cleanup.
11.4.3.4.9 The recommended MS lock-mass ions are specified in Tables 23-4, 23-5, and 23-6 of this method for PCDD/PCDF, PAH, and PCB, respectively. Monitor the QC check ions to verify instrument stability during the analysis. If the QC check ion signal varies by more than 25% from the average response across the run, flag results for all isomers at corresponding retention time as the lock-mass ions or QC check ions. You have the option to reanalyze after additional cleanup on the sample (or an archived portion of the sample if the archive is available), or after dilution of the sample. Alternately, determine through additional quality review whether the target analyte and its corresponding isotopically labeled standard are equally affected by the change in lock-mass ions and/or QC check ions. When you reanalyze a sample, ensure all concentration calculations are reported from the reanalyzed sample.
11.4.3.4.10 For the identification of PAH, the RRT of each native to its labeled compound must be within 0.006 RRT units compared to the corresponding RRTs in the continuing calibration. The signals for the characteristic ion listed in Table 23-5 of this method must be present.
11.4.3.5 Quantitation. Measure the response of each native target compound and the corresponding pre-extraction standard. Using the CCV RRF, calculate the mass of each target compound, using equations in Section 12.7 of this method. Use the pre-extraction standard to correct the native target compounds result for variations in performance of the extraction, cleanup, and concentration steps of the analysis. Recovery of pre-extraction standard must meet the minimum specifications in Section 9.2. of this method to ensure that the method performance and reliability have not been compromised by unacceptable losses during sample processing. Table 23-17 of this method shows the assignments for pre-extraction standard compounds for use in calculating the response factor and the concentrations of PCB. Recoveries of all labeled standard compounds must meet the minimum recovery specifications in Section 13 of this method. Note: Unacceptably low recoveries can be an indication of a sample processing step that caused the low recoveries, such as spiking errors.
11.4.3.5.1 Use Equation 23-7 to calculate the amount of each target compound or group in the sample.
11.4.3.5.2 Use Equation 23-8 to calculate the concentration per dscm of each target compound or group in the gas.
11.4.3.5.3 Quantify native PCDD and PCDF in its homologous series using the corresponding native and pre-extraction standard response in its homologous series. For example, use 13C12-2,3,7,8-TeCDD to calculate the concentrations of all other tetra chlorinated isomers.
11.4.3.5.4 As an option or as required or specified in applicable regulations, permits, or other requirements, you may quantify any or all other PCB congeners as resolved or coeluting combinations using the RRF of the nearest eluting native target PCB in the same homolog group and the pre-extraction standard assigned in Appendix A to this method.
11.4.3.5.5 As an option or as required or specified in applicable regulations, permits, or other requirements, report the total concentration of congeners at a given level of chlorination (homolog; i.e., total TrCB, total PeCB, total HxCB, etc.) by summing the concentrations of all congeners identified in the retention time window for the homologs as assigned in Appendix A to this method.
11.4.3.5.6 As an option or if required in an applicable regulation, permit or other requirement, total PCB may be reported by summing all congeners identified at all window-defining congeners (WDCs) as assigned in Appendix A to this method.
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
Note: Same as Section 12 of Method 5 of Appendix A-3 to 40 CFR part 60, with the following additions.
12.1 Nomenclature.
A1n = Integrated ion current of the primary m/z values for the target native compound.
A1pe = Integrated ion current of the primary m/z values for the pre-extraction standard compound (assigned in Tables 23-4, 23-5, and 23-6 of this method).
A1pa = Integrated ion current of the primary m/z values for the pre-analysis standard compound.
A2n = Integrated ion current of the secondary m/z values for the target native compound. For PAH A2n = 0.
A2pe = Integrated ion current of the secondary m/z's for the pre-extraction standard compound. For PAH A2l = 0.
A2pa = Integrated ion current of the secondary m/z values for the pre-analysis standard compound.
Ci = Mass of compound i in the sample, pg.
Cidscm = Concentration of target native compound i in the emission gas, pg/dscm.
CT = Total mass of target compounds in the sample, pg/sample.
dscm = Dry standard cubic meters of gas volume sample measured by the dry gas meter, corrected to standard conditions.
Hai = Summed heights of the noise for each quantitation ion for native target compounds.
Hci = Summed heights of the noise at the primary and secondary m/z's of the pre-extraction standard i.
LPIR = Lower limit for the prediction interval of results.
n = Number of values.
PD = Percent Difference in the RRF of the continuing calibration verification compared to the average RRF of the initial calibration, %.
Qn = Quantity of the target native compound, pg.
Qpe = Quantity of the pre-extraction standard, pg.
Qpa = Quantity of the pre-analysis standard, pg.
R = Recovery of pre-sampling adsorbent standard and pre-extraction filter recovery standard, %.
Rpe = Recovery of pre-extraction standard, %.
RRFi = Relative response factor of a native target compound or pre-sampling adsorbent standard and pre-extraction filter recovery standard at calibration level i.
RRFpe = Relative response factor of a pre-extraction standard compound.
RRFccv = Relative response factor of a native target compound or pre-sampling adsorbent standard and pre-extraction filter recovery standard in the continuing calibration verification.
RSD = Relative standard deviation, in this case, of RRFs over the calibration levels, %.
SD = Standard deviation.
SDRRF = Standard deviation of initial calibration RRFs.
UPIR = Upper limit for the prediction interval of results.
WDC = Window-defining congener representing an isotopically labeled compound that defines the beginning or end of a retention time window bracketing a target homolog.
12.2 Individual Compound RRF for Each Calibration Level i. Equation 23-1 for the response factor of each target native compound relative to its labeled pre-extraction standard analog includes the integrated ion current of both the primary and secondary m/z values for each compound in the calibration standard, excluding PAH, which use only primary m/z values. Use Equation 23-2 to calculate the RRF for pre-extraction standard.
Note: the units for Qpe and Qn in Eq. 23-1 and the units for Qpa and Qpe in Equation 23-2 must be the same.
12.3 Average RRF for Each Compound Over the Minimum of Five Calibration Levels.
12.4 Percent RSD of the RRFs for a Compound Over the Calibration Levels. The requirement for the initial calibration RSD is in Section 13.9 and Table 23-14 of this method.
12.5 Standard Deviation of the RRFs for a Compound Over the Calibration Levels.
12.6 Percent Difference of the RRF of the Continuing Calibration Verification Compared to the Average RRF from the Initial Calibration for Each Target Compound. Use Equation 23-1 to calculate the RRF for the continuing calibration verification for comparison to the average RRF from the initial calibration. The requirement for the continuing calibration verification % difference is in Section 13.10 and Table 23-14 of this method.
12.7 Amount of Individual Target Compound i in the Sample by Isotope Dilution (pg). This equation corrects for the target native compound recovery based on its labeled pre-extraction standard analog. This equation is also used to calculate the amount of pre-sampling adsorbent standard and pre-extraction filter recovery standard recovered.
Note: For the quantitation of the pre-sampling adsorbent standard and the pre-extraction filter recovery standard, use a corresponding pre-extraction isomer (or homolog) with the closest retention time.
12.8 Concentration of the Individual Target Compound or Group i in the Emission Gas (pg/dscm). The total concentration of a target compound group in the sample can be calculated by substituting CT from Eq. 23-12 for Ci in Equation 23-8.
12.9 Recovery of Labeled Compound Standards. Use Equation 23-9 to determine the recovery of pre-sampling adsorbent standard and the pre-extraction filter recovery standard. Use Equation 23-10 to determine the recovery of the pre-extraction standard. The recovery performance criteria for these standards are in Sections 13.14, 13.15, and 13.16 of this method.
Note: Recovery may be calculated based on mass instead of concentration, as needed.
Note: Rpe must be corrected for the fraction of the original sample extract used for analysis. (e.g., if half of the extract is used for analysis of the target class, Rpe must be multiplied by a factor of 2).
12.10 Estimated Detection Limit (EDL).
12.11 Total Target Compound Mass.
Note: Unless otherwise specified in applicable regulations, permits or other requirements, count any target compounds reported as non-detected as EDL when calculating the concentration of target compounds in the sample.
12.12 Upper and Lower Limits for the Prediction Interval of Results (PIR)
Half Range (HR) for the Predication Interval of Results
Note: 3.963 is a constant value for seven replicates.
Upper and Lower Limits for the Prediction Interval of Results
13.0 Method Performance
Data generated with this method must be fit for purpose. Applicable results of method performance criteria in this section must be reported. Consequences of failed quality criteria are provided with the criteria in this section.
13.1 Background Assessment—Field Train Proof Blank, LMB and Materials. Determine the contribution to target compound concentration from reagents, media and glassware used to make target compound measurements. Conduct at least one field train proof blank for each test series at a single facility. Analyze at least one LMB sample during an analytical sequence or every 12 hours, whichever is shorter. Native target compound concentrations in the field train proof blank, LMB and materials assessment must be less than or equal to three times the EDL of the method or 10 times lower than the quantitation limit required by the end use of the data (e.g., compliance limit or other limits set by consent decree or permit), whichever is higher. The field train proof blank, LMB and materials assessment must also meet the performance specifications in Tables 23-7, 23-8, and 23-9, as applicable to the compound target list.
13.2 GC column or column systems used to measure PCDD/PCDF must meet the column separation requirements in Section 6.5.2.1 of this method and the applicable requirements in Sections 10.2.3.5 and 11.4.3.4 of this method using the continuing calibration verification. Failure to meet this chromatographic resolution criterion requires data from this analysis to be flagged explaining the potential bias of the results.
13.3 GC column or column systems used to measure PAH must meet the column separation requirements in Section 6.5.2.2 of this method and the applicable requirements in Sections 10.2.3.5 and 11.4.3.4 of this method using the continuing calibration check. Failure to meet this chromatographic resolution criterion requires data from this analysis to be flagged explaining the potential bias of the results.
13.4 GC column or column systems used to measure PCB must meet the column separation requirements in Section 6.5.2.3 of this method and the applicable requirements in Sections 10.2.3.5 and 11.4.3.4 of this method using the continuing calibration check and be able to achieve unique resolution and identification of the toxics for determination of a TEQPCB. The rule requiring the use of this method will establish which WHO TEF to use. Failure to meet this chromatographic resolution criterion requires data from this analysis to be flagged explaining the potential bias of the results.
13.5 Confirmation Column. If target compounds are not sufficiently resolved from other target compounds or interferences in the sample to meet the requirements for target compounds in Sections 13.2, 13.3, and/or 13.4 of this method, analyze sample (or another aliquot of the sample) using an alternative column that provides elution order to uniquely quantify the target compounds subject to interference on the first GC column. When using a confirmation column, document the required resolution.
13.6 Detection Limits.
13.6.1 MDL. The MDLs are determined following the procedures in Section 9.3.7 of this method. MDLs are confirmed by preparing and analyzing a spiked sample (spiked at 1 to 5 times the determined MDL, see Section 9.3.8), then confirm that the target compounds meet the qualitative identification criteria in Section 11.4.3.4 of this method. If the MDL confirmation criteria are not met, the MDL determination is repeated with a higher spike concentration until criteria are met.
13.6.2 EDL. If the sample specific EDLs are less than 50% of the emission standard, the EDLs are acceptable.
13.7 Tune. The groups of monitored ions are listed in Tables 23-4, 23-5, and 23-6 of this method, as applicable for the target compound class. Tune the instrument to meet the required resolving power in Section 10.2.1 for the desired target compound class. Assess the resolution at three exact m/z's representing the low-, mid-, and high-m/z range of the masses used to measure the target compound class. You may use peak matching and the chosen PFK (or FC43) reference peak to verify that the exact mass is within 5 ppm of the required value.
13.8 Lock-Mass Ions. The MS lock-mass and QC check ions in Tables 23-4, 23-5, and 23-6 of this method are recommended for PCDD/PCDF, PCB, or PAH, respectively. The reference compounds PFK or FC43 have ions that may be selected as your lock-mass and QC check ions. Monitor the QC check ions specified in these tables to verify instrument stability during the analysis; these must not vary >25% from the average response. Additional cleanup on sample extract (or archive extract) and reanalysis is necessary for failure to maintain lock-mass during analysis.
13.9 Initial Calibration.
13.9.1 The RSD for mean RRF from each of the target analytes and labeled standards in the calibration samples must not exceed the values in Table 23-14 of this method.
13.9.2 The S/N in every selected ion current profile must be ≥10 for all unlabeled targets and labeled standards in the calibration samples.
13.9.3 The ion abundance ratios must be within the control limits in Table 23-15 of this method.
13.10 Continuing Calibration Verification.
13.10.1 The RRF for each unlabeled and labeled compound measured in a CCV must not deviate from the initial calibration RRF by more than the limits shown in Table 23-14 of this method.
13.10.2 The ion abundance ratios must be within the control limits in Table 23-15 of this method.
13.10.3 The S/N ratio for the GC/MS signal present in every selected ion current profile must be greater than or equal to 10.
13.10.4 Repeat the initial calibration when there is a failure to meet the requirements for an acceptable CCV analysis.
13.10.5 Column Separation Check. Use the results from a CCV to verify and document the resolution required in Sections 13.2, 13.3, or 13.4 of this method for the target compound classes analyzed with this method. The separation criteria are applicable to all the compounds in a target class whether analyzed by a single or multiple GC columns. If a confirmation column is used, document required resolution (see Section 13.5).
13.11 QCS. A QCS must be analyzed during the IDC and after initial calibrations (at a minimum quarterly). The acceptance criterion for the QCS is 70-130% of the true value. If the accuracy for any analyte fails the recovery criterion, prepare a fresh standard dilution and repeat. If the freshly prepared QCS fails, determine the cause, recalibrate the instrument if necessary and reanalyze the QCS.
13.12 Compound Identification for PCDD/PCDF and PCB.
13.12.1 Target compounds must have ion abundance ratios within the control limits in Table 23-15 of this method. PAH target compounds have single ion identifiers with no ion abundance ratio requirement. Report analysis results as an EMPC when a response meets identification criteria but fails the ion abundance ratio criteria or when a peak representing a PCDPE has been detected at the target compound retention time.
13.12.2 The retention time for the analytes must be within 3 seconds of the corresponding pre-extraction standard.
13.12.3 The monitored ions, shown in Table 23-4 of this method for a given PCDD/PCDF, must reach their maximum response within 2 seconds of each other.
13.12.4 The monitored ions, shown in Table 23-6 of this method for a given PCB, must reach their maximum response within 2 seconds of each other.
13.12.5 For the identification of specific PCB, the RRT of the native congener must be within 0.006 RRT units of the pre-extraction standard RRT.
13.12.6 The S/N ratio for the monitored ions for native compounds must be greater than or equal to 2.5.
13.12.7 Identify and quantify isomers that do not have corresponding pre-extraction standard compounds by comparing to the pre-extraction standard of the same compound class with the nearest retention time to the target compound.
13.12.8 If chromatographic peaks are detected at the retention time of any PCDD/PCDF in any of the m/z channels used to monitor PCDPE, there is evidence of interference and positive bias. Data must be flagged to indicate an interference. You may report the total with bias for the affected target. To reduce the bias, you may use a confirmatory column or perform additional clean up on an archived sample followed by reanalysis.
13.13 Compound Identification for PAH.
13.13.1 The signals for the characteristic ion listed in Table 23-5 of this method must be present.
13.13.2 The RRT between each native and labeled compound must be within 0.006 RRT units.
13.14 Pre-sampling Adsorbent Standard and Pre-extraction Filter Recovery Standard Recovery. Recoveries of pre-sampling adsorbent standard added to the sample and pre-extraction filter recovery standard added to the filter must be between 70 and 130% (see Tables 23-7, 23-8, and 23-9 of this method).
13.14.1 If the recovery of all the pre-sampling adsorbent standard compounds is below 70%, the sampling runs are not valid, and you must repeat the stack or vent sampling. As an alternative, you do not have to repeat the test if the average pre-sampling adsorbent standard recovery is 25% or more and you divide the final results by the average fraction of pre-sampling adsorbent standard recovery.
13.14.2 If the recovery of all the pre-extraction filter recovery standard compounds is below 70%, you may reanalyze the sample. If the recovery criteria are still not met, the sampling recovery is not valid, and you must repeat the stack or vent sampling.
13.15 Pre-extraction Standard Recovery. Recoveries of all pre-extraction standard compounds added to the sample must be between 20 to 130% for PCDD/PCDF and PAH (see Tables 23-7 and 23-8 of this method) and between 20 to 145% for PCB (see Table 23-9 of this method). If the recovery criteria are not met, you may reanalyze the sample and/or prepare and analyze the archive sample. If the recovery criteria are still not met, the sampling run is not valid, and the stack test must be repeated.
13.16 Pre-analysis Standard Response. Response of all pre-analysis standard compounds must show a S/N for every selected ion current profile of ≥ 10. If the minimum response is not met, you must reanalyze the sample. Poor sensitivity compared to initial calibration response may indicate injection errors or instrument drift.
13.17 IDC—Lowest calibration concentration, Demonstration of precision, Demonstration of accuracy.
13.17.1 Lowest calibration concentration. The Upper PIR Limit must be less than, or equal, to 150%; and the Lower PIR Limit must be greater than, or equal to, 50%. If these criteria are not met, the lowest calibration point has been set too low and must be confirmed at a higher concentration.
13.17.2 Demonstration of precision. The percent relative standard deviation (%RSD) of the concentrations from the replicate analyses must be less than 20% for all target analytes. Demonstration would be repeated for failed compounds only.
13.17.3 Demonstration of accuracy. The average % recovery for each target analyte must be within 70 to 130%. Demonstration would be repeated for failed compounds only.
13.18 Requirements for Equivalency. The Administrator considers any modification of this method, beyond those expressly permitted in this method as options, to be a major modification subject to application and approval of alternative test procedures following EPA Guidance Document 22 currently found at: https://www.epa.gov/emc/emc-guideline-documents.
13.19 Records. As part of the laboratory's quality system, the laboratory must maintain records of modifications to this method.
14.0 Pollution Prevention
The target compounds used as standards in this method are prepared in extremely small amounts and pose little threat to the environment when managed properly. Prepare standards in volumes consistent with laboratory use to minimize the disposal of excess volumes of expired standards.
15.0 Waste Management
15.1 The laboratory is responsible for complying with all federal, state, and local regulations governing waste management, particularly the hazardous waste identification rules and land disposal restrictions, and for protecting the air, water, and land by minimizing and controlling all releases from fume hoods and bench operations. The laboratory must also comply with any sewage discharge permits and regulations. The EPA's Environmental Management Guide for Small Laboratories (EPA 233-B-98-001) provides an overview of requirements.
15.2 Samples containing hydrogen chloride or sulfuric acid to pH <2 are hazardous and must be handled and disposed in accordance with federal, state, and local regulations.
15.3 For further information on waste management, consult The Waste Management Manual for Laboratory Personnel and Less is Better-Laboratory Chemical Management for Waste Reduction, available from the American Chemical Society's Department of Government Relations and Science Policy, 1155 16th Street NW, Washington, DC 20036.
16.0 Bibliography
1. American Society of Mechanical Engineers. Analytical Procedures to Assay Stack Effluent Samples and Residual Combustion Products for Polychlorinated Dibenzo-p-Dioxins (PCDD) and Polychlorinated Dibenzofurans (PCDF). Prepared for the U.S. Department of Energy and U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Washington, DC. December 1984. 23 p.
2. American Society of Mechanical Engineers. Sampling for the Determination of Chlorinated Organic Compounds in Stack Emissions. Prepared for U.S. Department of Energy and U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Washington DC. December 1984. 25 p.
3. Fishman, V.N., Martin, G.D. and Lamparski, L.L., Comparison of a variety of gas chromatographic columns with different polarities for the separation of chlorinated dibenzo-p-dioxins and dibenzofurans by high-resolution mass spectrometry, Journal of Chromatography A 1139 (2007) 285-300.
4. International Agency for Research on Cancer. Environmental Carcinogens Methods of Analysis and Exposure Measurement, Volume 11—Polychlorinated Dioxins and Dibenzofurans. IARC Scientific Publications No. 108, 1991.
5. Stieglitz, L., Zwick, G., Roth, W. Investigation of different treatment techniques for PCDD/PCDF in fly ash. Chemosphere 15: 1135-1140; 1986.
6. Triangle Laboratories. Case Study: Analysis of Samples for the Presence of Tetra Through Octachloro-p-Dibenzodioxins and Dibenzofurans. Research Triangle Park, NC. 1988. 26 p.
7. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Method 8290A—Polychlorinated Dibenzo-p-dioxins (PCDDs) and Polychlorinated Dibenzofurans (PCDFs) by High-Resolution Gas Chromatography/High-Resolution Mass Spectrometry (HRGC/HRMS), Revision 1. February 2007. In: Test Methods for Evaluating Solid Waste, Physical/Chemical Methods, EPA publication SW-846. Washington, DC.
8. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Office of Air Programs Publication No. APTD-0576: Maintenance, Calibration, and Operation of Isokinetic Source Sampling Equipment. Research Triangle Park, NC. March 1972.
9. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Method 1625C-Semivolatile Organic Compounds by Isotope Dilution GCMS. June 1989.
10. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Method 1613B-Tetra- through Octa-Chlorinated Dioxins and Furans by Isotope Dilution HRGC/HRMS. October 1994.
11. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Method 1668C-Chlorinated Biphenyl Congeners in Water, Soil, Sediment, Biosolids, and Tissue by HRGC/HRMS. April 2010.
12. Tondeur, Y., Nestrick, T., Silva, Héctor A., Vining, B., Hart, J. Analytical procedures for the determination of polychlorinated-p-dioxins, polychlorinated dibenzofurans, and hexachlorobenzene in pentachlorophenol, Chemosphere Volume 80, Issue 2, June 2010 pages 157-164.
13. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Definition and Procedure for the Determination of the Method Detection Limit, Revision 2. EPA 821-R-16-006. December 2016.
14. Tondeur Y, Niederhut WJ, Missler SR. A hybrid HRGC/MS/MS Method for the Characterization of Tetrachlorodibenzo-p-Dioxins in Environmental Samples; Bio. Med. and Environ. Mass Spectr. 14, pages 449-456, 1987.
15. Gianluca R., Mosca S., Guerriero E., Rotatori M. Development of a new automated clean-up system for the simultaneous analysis of polychlorinated dibenzo-p-dioxins (PCDDs), dibenzofurans (PCDFs) and `dioxin-like' polychlorinated biphenyls (dl-PCB) in flue gas emissions by GPC-SPE. J. Environ. Monit. 14, pages 1082-1090, 2012.
16. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. The National Dioxin Air Monitoring Network (NDAMN) Report of the Results of Atmospheric Measurements of Polychlorinated Dibenzo-p-Dioxins (PCDDs), Polychlorinated Dibenzofurans (PCDFs), and Dioxin-like Polychlorinated Biphenyl (PCBs) in Rural and Remote Areas of the United States from June 1998 through November 2004. EPA/600/R-13/183F. August 2013.
17. Guo, Y., Kannan, K. Analytical Methods for the Measurement of Legacy and Emerging Persistent Organic Pollutants in Complex Sample Matrices. Comprehensive Analytical Chemistry. Vol. 67. January 2015.
18. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. USEPA Contract Laboratory Program (CLP) National Functional Guidelines for Chlorinated Dibenzo-p-Dioxins (CDDs) and Chlorinated Dibenzofurans (CDFs) Data Review. EPA-540-R-11-016. September 2011.
17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
| Polychlorinated dibenzo-p-dioxins | CAS a Registry No. | Polychlorinated dibenzofurans | CASa Registry No. |
|---|---|---|---|
| 2,3,7,8-TeCDD | 1746-01-6 | 2,3,7,8-TeCDF | 51207-31-9 |
| 1,2,3,7,8-PeCDD | 40321-76-4 | 1,2,3,7,8-PeCDF | 57117-41-6 |
| 1,2,3,4,7,8-HxCDD | 39227-28-6 | 2,3,4,7,8-PeCDF | 57117-31-4 |
| 1,2,3,6,7,8-HxCDD | 57653-85-7 | 1,2,3,4,7,8-HxCDF | 70648-26-9 |
| 1,2,3,7,8,9-HxCDD | 19408-74-3 | 1,2,3,6,7,8-HxCDF | 57117-44-9 |
| 1,2,3,4,6,7,8-HpCDD | 35822-46-9 | 1,2,3,7,8,9-HxCDF | 72918-21-9 |
| Total TeCDD | 41903-57-5 | 2,3,4,6,7,8-HxCDF | 60851-34-5 |
| Total PeCDD | 36088-22-9 | 1,2,3,4,6,7,8-HpCDF | 67562-39-4 |
| Total HxCDD | 34465-46-8 | 1,2,3,4,7,8,9-HpCDF | 55673-89-7 |
| Total HpCDD | 37871-00-4 | Total TeCDF | 55722-27-5 |
| OCDD | 3268-87-9 | Total PeCDF | 30402-15-4 |
| Total HxCDF | 55684-94-1 | ||
| Total HpCDF | 38998-75-3 | ||
| OCDF | 39001-02-0 | ||
| a Chemical Abstract Service. |
| Polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons | CAS a Registry No. | Polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons | CAS a Registry No. |
|---|---|---|---|
| Naphthalene | 91-20-3 | Chrysene | 218-01-9 |
| 2-Methylnaphthalene | 91-57-6 | Benzo[b]fluoranthene | 205-99-2 |
| Acenaphthylene | 208-96-8 | Benzo[k]fluoranthene | 207-08-9 |
| Acenaphthene | 83-32-9 | Perylene | 198-55-8 |
| Fluorene | 86-73-7 | Benzo[a]pyrene | 50-32-8 |
| Anthracene | 120-12-7 | Benzo[e]pyrene | 192-97-2 |
| Phenanthrene | 85-01-8 | Benzo[g,h,i]perylene | 191-24-2 |
| Fluoranthene | 206-44-0 | Indeno[1,2,3-cd]pyrene | 193-39-5 |
| Pyrene | 129-00-0 | Dibenz[a,h]anthracene | 53-70-3 |
| Benz[a]anthracene | 56-55-3 | ||
| a Chemical Abstract Service. |
| PCB congener | BZ No.a | CAS b Registry No. | PCB congener | BZ No.a | CAS b Registry No. |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 2,4′-DiCB | 8 | 34883-43-7 | 2,2′,3,3′,4,4′-HxCB | 128 | 38380-07-3 |
| 2,2′,5-TrCB | 18 | 37680-65-2 | 2,2′,3,4,4′,5′-HxCB | 138 | 35065-28-2 |
| 2,4,4′-TrCB | 28 | 7012-37-5 | 2,2′,4,4′,5,5′-HxCB | 153 | 35065-27-1 |
| 2,2′,3,5′-TeCB | 44 | 41464-39-5 | 2,3,3′,4,4′,5-HxCB | 156 | 38380-08-4 |
| 2,2′,5,5′-TeCB | 52 | 35693-99-3 | 2,3,3′,4,4′,5′-HxCB | 157 | 69782-90-7 |
| 2,3′,4,4′-TeCB | 66 | 32598-10-0 | 2,3′,4,4′,5,5′-HxCB | 167 | 52663-72-6 |
| 3,3′,4,4′-TeCB | 77 | 32598-13-3 | 3,3′,4,4′,5,5′-HxCB | 169 | 32774-16-6 |
| 3,4,4′,5-TeCB | 81 | 70362-50-4 | 2,2′,3,3′,4,4′,5-HpCB | 170 | 35065-30-6 |
| 2,2′,4,5,5′-PeCB | 101 | 37680-73-2 | 2,2′,3,4,4′,5,5′-HpCB | 180 | 35065-29-3 |
| 2,3,3′,4,4′-PeCB | 105 | 32598-14-4 | 2,2′,3,4′,5,5′,6-HpCB | 187 | 52663-68-0 |
| 2,3,4,4′,5-PeCB | 114 | 74472-37-0 | 2,3,3′,4,4′,5,5′-HpCB | 189 | 39635-31-9 |
| 2,3′,4,4′,5-PeCB | 118 | 31508-00-6 | 2,2′,3,3′,4,4′,5,6-OcCB | 195 | 52663-78-2 |
| 2′,3,4,4′,5-PeCB | 123 | 65510-44-3 | 2,2′,3,3′,4,4′,5,5′,6-NoCB | 206 | 40186-72-9 |
| 3,3′,4,4′,5-PeCB | 126 | 57465-28-8 | 2,2′,3,3′,4,4′,5,5′,6,6′-DeCB | 209 | 2051-24-3 |
| a BZ No.: Ballschmiter and Zell 1980, or International Union of Pure and Applied Chemistry (IUPAC) number. | |||||
| b Chemical Abstract Service. |
| Mass a | Ion type b | Elemental composition | Target analyte b | Mass a | Ion type b | Elemental composition | Target analyte b |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 263.9871 | LOCK | C5 F10 N | FC43 | 383.8639 | M | 13 C12 H2 35 Cl6 O | HxCDF (S). |
| 292.9825 | LOCK | C7 F11 | PFK | 385.8610 | M+2 | 13 C12 H2 35 Cl5 37 ClO | HxCDF (S). |
| 303.9016 | M | C12 H4 35 Cl4 O | TeCDF | 389.8157 | M+2 | C12 H2 35 Cl5 37 ClO2 | HxCDD. |
| 305.8987 | M+2 | C12 H4 35 Cl37 ClO | TeCDF | 391.8127 | M+4 | C12 H2 35 Cl4 37 Cl2 O2 | HxCDD. |
| 313.9839 | QC | C6 F12 N | FC43 | 392.9760 | LOCK | C9 F15 | PFK. |
| 315.9419 | M | 13 C12 H4 35 Cl4 O | TeCDF (S) | 401.8559 | M+2 | 13 C12 H2 35 Cl5 37 ClO2 | HxCDD (S). |
| 316.9745 | M+2 | 13 C12 H4 35 Cl3 37 ClO | TeCDF (S) | 403.8529 | M+4 | 13 C12 H2 35 Cl4 37 Cl2 O | HxCDD (S). |
| 317.9389 | M+2 | 13 C12 H4 35 Cl2 37 ClO | TeCDF (S) | 425.9775 | QC | C9 F16 N | FC43. |
| 319.8965 | M | C12 H4 35 Cl4 O2 | TeCDD | 445.7555 | M+4 | C12 H2 35 Cl6 37 Cl2 O | OCDPE. |
| 321.8936 | M+2 | C12 H4 35 Cl3 37 ClO2 | TeCDD | 407.7818 | M+2 | C12 H35 Cl6 37 ClO | HpCDF. |
| 325.9839 | QC | C7 F12 N | FC43 | 409.7789 | M+4 | C12 H35 Cl5 37 Cl2 O | HpCDF. |
| 330.9792 | QC | C7 F13 | PFK | 417.8253 | M | 13 C12 H35 Cl7 O | HpCDF (S). |
| 331.9368 | M | 13 C12 H4 35 Cl4 O2 | TeCDD (S) | 419.8220 | M+2 | 13 C12 H35 Cl6 37 ClO | HpCDF (S). |
| 333.9339 | M+2 | 13 C12 H4 35 Cl3 37 ClO2 | TeCDD (S) | 423.7766 | M+2 | C12 H35 Cl6 37 ClO2 | HpCDD. |
| 339.8597 | M+2 | C12 H3 35 Cl4 37 ClO | PeCDF | 425.7737 | M+4 | C12 H35 Cl5 37 Cl2 O2 | HpCDD. |
| 341.8567 | M+4 | C12 H3 35 Cl3 37 Cl2 O | PeCDF | 430.9729 | QC | C9 F17 | PFK. |
| 354.9792 | LOCK | C9 F13 | PFK | 435.8169 | M+2 | 13 C12 H35 Cl6 37 ClO2 | HpCDD (S). |
| 351.9000 | M+2 | 13 C12 H3 35 Cl4 37 ClO | PeCDF (S) | 437.8140 | M+4 | 13 C12 H35 Cl5 37 Cl2 O2 | HpCDD (S). |
| 353.8970 | M+4 | 13 C12 H3 35 Cl3 37 Cl2 O | PeCDF (S) | 442.9728 | LOCK | C10 F17 | PFK. |
| 355.8546 | M+2 | C12 H3 35 Cl4 37 ClO2 | PeCDD | 479.7165 | M+4 | C12 H35 Cl7 37 Cl2 O | NCPDE. |
| 357.8516 | M+4 | C12 H3 35 Cl3 37 Cl2 O2 | PeCDD | 430.9729 | LOCK | C9 F17 | PFK. |
| 367.8949 | M+2 | 13 C12 H3 35 Cl4 37 ClO2 | PeCDD (S) | 441.7428 | M+2 | C12 35 Cl7 37 ClO | OCDF. |
| 369.8919 | M+4 | 13 C12 H3 35 Cl3 37 Cl2 O2 | PeCDD (S) | 443.7399 | M+4 | C12 35 Cl6 37 Cl2 O | OCDF. |
| 375.9807 | QC | C8 F14 N | FC43 | 457.7377 | M+2 | C12 35 Cl7 37 ClO2 | OCDD. |
| 375.8364 | M+2 | C12 H4 35 Cl5 37 ClO | HxCDPE | 459.7348 | M+4 | C12 35 Cl6 37 Cl2 O2 | OCDD. |
| 409.7974 | M+2 | C12 H3 35 Cl6 37 ClO | HpCPDE | 463.9743 | QC | C9 F18 N | FC43. |
| 373.8208 | M+2 | C12 H2 35Cl5 37 ClO | HxCDF | 469.7779 | M+2 | 13 C12 35 Cl7 37 ClO2 | OCDD (S). |
| 375.8178 | M+4 | C12 H2 35 Cl4 37 Cl2 O | HxCDF | 471.7750 | M+4 | 13 C12 35 Cl6 37 Cl2 O2 | OCDD (S). |
| 375.9807 | QC | C8 F14 N | FC43 | 513.6775 | M+4 | C12 35 Cl8 37 Cl2 O2 | DCDPE. |
| 442.9728 | QC | C10 F17 | PFK. | ||||
| a The following nuclidic masses were used to calculate exact masses: H = 1.007825, C = 12.000000, 13 C = 13.003355, F = 18.9984, O = 15.994915, 35 C l= 34.968853, 37 Cl = 36.965903. | |||||||
| b (S) = Labeled Standard. LOCK = Lock-Mass Ion PFK or FC43. QC = Quality Control Check Ion. Note: Consider monitoring 328 m/z if a high level of PCB is expected. |
| Aromatic ring No. | Mass a | Ion type b | Elemental composition | Target analyte |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 2 | 128.0624 | M | C10 H8 | Naphthalene. |
| 130.9920 | LOCK | PFK/FC43. | ||
| 2 | 134.0828 | M | 13 C6 12 C4 H8 | 13 C6-Naphthalene. |
| 2 | 142.078 | M | C11 H10 | 2-Methylnaphthalene. |
| 2 | 148.0984 | M | 13 C6 12 C5 H10 | 13 C6-2-Methylnaphthalene. |
| 2 | 152.0624 | M | C12 H8 | Acenaphthylene. |
| 2 | 158.0828 | M | 13 C6 12 C6 H8 | 13 C6-Acenaphthylene. |
| 2 | 154.078 | M | C12 H10 | Acenaphthene. |
| 2 | 160.078 | M | 13 C6 12 C6 H10 | 13 C6-Acenaphthene. |
| 2 | 166.078 | M | C13 H10 | Fluorene. |
| 169.988 | QC | PFK/FC43. | ||
| 2 | 172.0984 | M | 13 C6 12 C7 H10 | 13 C6-Fluorene. |
| 3 | 178.078 | M | C14 H10 | Phenanthrene. |
| 3 | 184.0984 | M | 13 C6 12 C8 H10 | 13 C6-Phenanthrene. |
| 3 | 178.078 | M | C14 H10 | Anthracene. |
| 3 | 184.078 | M | 13 C6 12 C8 H10 | 13 C6-Anthracene. |
| 3 | 202.078 | M | C16 H10 | Fluoranthene. |
| 204.9888 | QC | PFK. | ||
| 3 | 208.0984 | M | 13 C6 12 C10 H10 | 13 C6-Fluoranthene. |
| 4 | 202.078 | M | C16 H10 | Pyrene. |
| 4 | 205.078 | M | 13 C3 12 C13 H10 | 13 C3-Pyrene. |
| 213.9898 | QC | FC43. | ||
| 218.9856 | LOCK | FC43. | ||
| 4 | 228.0936 | M | C18 H12 | Benz[a]anthracene. |
| 230.9856 | LOCK | PFK. | ||
| 4 | 234.114 | M | 13 C6 C12 H12 | 13 C6-Benz[a]anthracene. |
| 4 | 228.0936 | M | C18 H12 | Chrysene. |
| 4 | 234.114 | M | 13 C6 12 C12 H12 | 13 C6-Chrysene. |
| 4 | 252.0936 | M | C20 H12 | Benzo[b]fluoranthene. |
| 4 | 258.114 | M | 13 C6 12 C14 H12 | 13 C6-Benzo[b]fluoranthene. |
| 4 | 252.32 | M | C20 H12 | Benzo[k]fluoranthene. |
| 4 | 258.114 | M | 13 C6 12 C14 H12 | 13 C6-Benzo[k]fluoranthene. |
| 5 | 252.0936 | M | C20 H12 | Benzo[e]pyrene. |
| 5 | 256.1072 | M | 13 C4 12 C16 H12 | 13 C4-Benzo[e]pyrene. |
| 5 | 256.1072 | M | 13 C4 12 C16 H12 | 13 C4-Benzo[a]pyrene. |
| 5 | 252.0936 | M | C20 H12 | Benzo[a]pyrene. |
| 5 | 252.0936 | M | C20 H12 | Perylene. |
| 5 | 264.1692 | M | C20 D12 | d12-Perylene. |
| 268.9824 | QC | PFK. | ||
| 263.9871 | LOCK | FC43. | ||
| 6 | 276.0936 | M | C22 H12 | Indeno[1,2,3-cd]pyrene. |
| 6 | 282.114 | M | 13 C6 12 C16 H12 | 13 C6-Indeno[1,2,3,cd]pyrene. |
| 5 | 278.1092 | M | C22 H14 | Dibenz[a,h]anthracene. |
| 280.9824 | LOCK | PFK. | ||
| 5 | 284.1296 | M | 13 C6 12 C16 H14 | 13 C6-Dibenz[a,h]anthracene. |
| 6 | 276.0936 | M | C22 H12 | Benzo[g,h,i]perylene. |
| 6 | 288.1344 | M | 13 C12 12 C10 H12 | 13 C12-Benzo[g,h,i]perylene. |
| 313.9839 | QC | FC43. | ||
| a Isotopic masses used for accurate mass calculation: 1 H = 1.0078, 12 C = 12.0000, 13 C = 13.0034, 2 H = 2.0141. | ||||
| b LOCK = Lock-Mass Ion PFK or FC43. QC = Quality Control Check Ion. |
| Chlorine substitution |
Mass a | Ion type b | Elemental composition | Target analyte | Chlorine substitution |
Mass a | Ion type b | Elemental composition | Target analyte |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Fn-1; Cl-1 |
188.0393 | M | 12 C12 H9 35 Cl | Cl-1 PCB | Fn-5; Cl-5,6,7 |
323.8834 | M | 12 C12 H5 35 Cl5 | Cl-5 PCB. |
| 190.0363 | M+2 | 12 C12 H9 37 Cl | Cl-1 PCB | 325.8804 | M+2 | 12 C12 H5 35 Cl4 37 Cl | Cl-5 PCB. | ||
| 200.0795 | M | 13 C12 H9 35 Cl | 13 C12 Cl-1 PCB | 327.8775 | M+4 | 12 C12 H5 35 Cl3 37 Cl2 | Cl-5 PCB. | ||
| 202.0766 | M+2 | 12 C12 H9 37 Cl | 13 C12 Cl-1 PCB | 337.9207 | M+2 | 13 C12 H5 35 Cl4 37 Cl | 13 C12 Cl-5 PCB. | ||
| 218.9856 | LOCK | C4 F9 | PFK | 339.9178 | M+4 | 13 C12 H5 35 Cl3 37 Cl2 | 13 C12 Cl-5 PCB. | ||
| Fn-2;
Cl-2,3 |
222.0003 | M | 12 C12 H8 35 Cl2 | Cl-2 PCB | 354.9792 | LOCK | C9 F13 | PFK. | |
| 223.9974 | M+2 | 12 C12 H8 35 Cl37 Cl | Cl-2 PCB | 359.8415 | M+2 | 12 C12 H4 35 Cl5 37 Cl | Cl-6 PCB. | ||
| 225.9944 | M+4 | 12 C12 H8 37 Cl2 | Cl-2 PCB | 361.8385 | M+4 | 12 C12 H4 35 Cl4 37 Cl2 | Cl-6 PCB. | ||
| 234.0406 | M | 13 C12 H8 35 Cl2 | 13 C12 Cl-2 PCB | 363.8356 | M+6 | 12 C12 H4 35 Cl3 37 Cl3 | Cl-6 PCB. | ||
| 236.0376 | M+2 | 13 C12 H8 35 Cl37 Cl | 13 C12 Cl-2 PCB | 371.8817 | M+2 | 13 C12 H4 35 Cl5 37 Cl | 13 C12 Cl-6 PCB. | ||
| 242.9856 | LOCK | C4 F9 | PFK | 373.8788 | M+4 | 13 C12 H4 35 Cl4 37 Cl2 | 13 C12 Cl-6 PCB. | ||
| 255.9613 | M | 12 C12 H7 35 Cl3 | Cl-3 PCB | 393.8025 | M+2 | 12 C12 H3 35 Cl6 37 Cl | Cl-7 PCB. | ||
| 257.9584 | M+2 | 12 C12 H7 35 Cl2 37 Cl | Cl-3 PCB | 395.7995 | M+4 | 12 C12 H3 35 Cl5 37 Cl2 | Cl-7 PCB. | ||
| 268.0016 | M | 13 C12 H7 35 Cl3 | 13 C12 Cl-3 PCB | 397.7966 | M+6 | 12 C12 H3 35 Cl4 37 Cl3 | 37 Cl3 Cl-7 PCB. | ||
| 269.9986 | M+2 | 13 C12 H7 35 Cl2 37 Cl | 13 C12 Cl-3 PCB | 405.8428 | M+2 | 13 C12 H3 35 Cl6 37 Cl | 13 C12 Cl-7 PCB. | ||
| Fn-3;
Cl-3,4,5 |
255.9613 | M | 12 C12 H7 35 Cl3 | Cl-3 PCB | 407.8398 | M+4 | 13 C12 H3 35 Cl5 37 Cl2 | 13 C12 Cl-7 PCB. | |
| 257.9584 | M+2 | 12 C12 H7 35 Cl2 37 Cl | Cl-3 PCB | 454.9728 | QC | C11 F17 | PFK. | ||
| 259.9554 | M+4 | 12 C12 H7 35 Cl37 Cl2 | Cl-3 PCB | Fn-6;
Cl-7,8,9,10 |
393.8025 | M+2 | 12 C12 H3 35 Cl6 37 Cl | Cl-7 PCB. | |
| 268.0016 | M | 13 C12 H7 35 Cl3 | 13 C12 Cl-3 PCB | 395.7995 | M+4 | 12 C12 H3 35 Cl5 37 Cl2 | Cl-7 PCB. | ||
| 269.9986 | M+2 | 13 C12 H7 35 Cl2 37 Cl | 13 C12 Cl-3 PCB | 397.7966 | M+6 | 12 C12 H3 35 Cl4 37 Cl3 | Cl-7 PCB. | ||
| 280.9825 | LOCK | C6 F11 | PFK | 405.8428 | M+2 | 13 C12 H3 35 Cl6 37 Cl | 13 C12 Cl-7 PCB. | ||
| 289.9224 | M | 12 C12 H6 35 Cl4 | Cl-4 PCB | 407.8398 | M+4 | 13 C12 H3 35 Cl5 37 Cl2 | 13 C12 Cl-7 PCB. | ||
| 291.9194 | M+2 | 12 C12 H6 35 Cl3 37 Cl | Cl-4 PCB | 427.7635 | M+2 | 12 C12 H2 35 Cl7 37 Cl | Cl-8 PCB. | ||
| 293.9165 | M+4 | 12 C12 H6 35 Cl2 37 Cl2 | Cl-4 PCB | 429.7606 | M+4 | 12 C12 H2 35 Cl6 37 Cl2 | Cl-8 PCB. | ||
| 301.9626 | M | 13 C12 H6 35 Cl4 | 13 C12 Cl-4 PCB | 431.7576 | M+6 | 12 C12 H2 35 Cl5 37 Cl3 | Cl-8 PCB. | ||
| 303.9597 | M+2 | 13 C12 H6 35 Cl3 37 Cl | 13 C12 Cl-4 PCB | 439.8038 | M+2 | 13 C12 H2 35 Cl7 37 Cl | 13 C12 Cl-8 PCB. | ||
| 323.8834 | M | 12 C12 H5 35 Cl5 | Cl-5 PCB | 441.8008 | M+4 | 13 C12 H2 35 Cl6 37 Cl2 | 13 C12 Cl-8 PCB. | ||
| 325.8804 | M+2 | 12 C12 H5 35 Cl4 37 Cl | Cl-5 PCB | 454.9728 | QC | C11 F17 | PFK. | ||
| 327.8775 | M+4 | 12 C12 H5 35 Cl3 37 Cl2 | Cl-5 PCB | 427.7635 | M+2 | 12 C12 H2 35 Cl7 37 Cl | Cl-8 PCB. | ||
| 337.9207 | M+2 | 13 C12 H5 35 Cl4 37 Cl | 13 C12 Cl-5 PCB | 429.7606 | M+4 | 12 C12 H2 35 Cl6 37 Cl2 | Cl-8 PCB. | ||
| 339.9178 | M+4 | 13 C12 H5 35 Cl3 37 Cl2 | 13 C12 Cl-5 PCB | 431.7576 | M+6 | 12 C12 H2 35 Cl5 37 Cl3 | Cl-8 PCB. | ||
| Fn-4;
Cl-4,5,6 |
289.9224 | M | 12 C12 H6 35 Cl4 | Cl-4 PCB | 439.8038 | M+2 | 13 C12 H2 35 Cl7 37 Cl | 13 C12 Cl-8 PCB. | |
| 291.9194 | M+2 | 12 C12 H6 35 Cl3 37 Cl | Cl-4 PCB | 441.8008 | M+4 | 13 C12 H2 35 Cl6 37 Cl2 | 13 C12 Cl-8 PCB. | ||
| 293.9165 | M+4 | 12 C12 H6 35 Cl2 37 Cl2 | Cl-4 PCB | 442.9728 | QC | C10 F17 | PFK. | ||
| 301.9626 | M+2 | 13 C12 H6 35 Cl3 37 Cl | 13 C12 Cl-4 PCB | 454.9728 | LOCK | C11 F17 | PFK. | ||
| 303.9597 | M+4 | 13 C12 H6 35 Cl2 37 Cl2 | 13 C12 Cl-4 PCB | 461.7246 | M+2 | 12 C12 H1 35 Cl8 37 Cl | Cl-9 PCB. | ||
| 323.8834 | M | 12 C12 H5 35 Cl5 | Cl-5 PCB | 463.7216 | M+4 | 12 C12 H1 35 Cl7 37 Cl2 | Cl-9 PCB. | ||
| 325.8804 | M+2 | 12 C12 H5 35 Cl4 37 Cl | Cl-5 PCB | 465.7187 | M+6 | 12 C12 H1 35 Cl6 37 Cl3 | Cl-9 PCB. | ||
| 327.8775 | M+4 | 12 C12 H5 35 Cl3 37 Cl2 | Cl-5 PCB | 473.7648 | M+2 | 13 C12 H1 35 Cl8 37 Cl | 13 C12 Cl-9 PCB. | ||
| 330.9792 | LOCK | C7 F15 | PFK | 475.7619 | M+4 | 13 C12 H1 35 Cl7 37 Cl2 | 13 C12 Cl-9 PCB. | ||
| 337.9207 | M+2 | 13 C12 H5 35 Cl4 37 Cl | 13 C12 Cl-5 PCB | 495.6856 | M+2 | 13 C12 H4 5 Cl9 37 Cl | Cl-10 PCB. | ||
| 339.9178 | M+4 | 13 C12 H5 35 Cl3 37 Cl2 | 13 C12 Cl-5 PCB | 499.6797 | M+6 | 12 C12 H4 35 Cl8 37 Cl2 | Cl-10 PCB. | ||
| 359.8415 | M+2 | 13 C12 H4 35 Cl5 37 Cl | Cl-6 PCB | 501.6767 | M+8 | 12 C12 H4 35 Cl7 37 Cl3 | Cl-10 PCB. | ||
| 361.8385 | M+4 | 13 C12 H4 35 Cl4 37 Cl2 | Cl-6 PCB | 507.7258 | M+2 | 13 C12 H4 35 Cl9 37 Cl | 13 C12 Cl-10 PCB. | ||
| 363.8356 | M+6 | 12 C12 H4 35 Cl3 37 Cl3 | Cl-6 PCB | 509.7229 | M+4 | 13 C12 H4 35 Cl8 37 Cl2 | 13 C12 Cl-10 PCB. | ||
| 371.8817 | M+2 | 13 C12 H4 35 Cl5 37 Cl | 13 C12 Cl-6 PCB | 511.7199 | M+6 | 13 C12 H4 35 Cl7 37 Cl3 | 13 C12 Cl-10 PCB. | ||
| 373.8788 | M+4 | 13 C12 H4 35 Cl4 37 Cl2 | 13 C12 Cl-6 PCB | ||||||
| a Isotopic masses used for accurate mass calculation: 1 H = 1.0078, 12 C = 12.0000, 13 C = 13.0034, 35 Cl = 34.9689, 37 Cl = 36.9659, 19 F = 18.9984. An interference with PFK m/z 223.9872 may preclude meeting 10:1 S/N for the DiCB congeners at optional Cal 1 level (Table 23-11). If this interference occurs, 10:1 S/N must be met at the Cal 2 level. | |||||||||
| b LOCK = Lock-Mass Ion PFK or FC43. QC = Quality Control Check Ion. |
| Compound | pg/µL in final extract b | Spike recovery |
|---|---|---|
| Pre-sampling Adsorbent Standard | ||
| 13 C12-1,2,3,4-TeCDD | 50 | 70-130% |
| 13 C12-1,2,3,4,7-PeCDD | 50 | 70-130% |
| 13 C12-1,2,3,4,6-PeCDF | 50 | 70-130% |
| 13 C12-1,2,3,4,6,9-HxCDF | 50 | 70-130% |
| 13 C12-1,2,3,4,6,8,9-HpCDF | 50 | 70-130% |
| Pre-extraction Filter Recovery Standard | ||
| 13 C12-1,2,7,8-TeCDF | 50 | 70-130% |
| 13 C12-1,2,3,4,6,8-HxCDD | 50 | 70-130% |
| Pre-extraction Standard | ||
| 13 C12-2,3,7,8-TeCDD | 50 | 20-130% |
| 13 C12-2,3,7,8-TeCDF | 50 | 20-130% |
| 13 C12-1,2,3,7,8-PeCDD | 50 | 20-130% |
| 13 C12-1,2,3,7,8-PeCDF | 50 | 20-130% |
| 13 C12-2,3,4,7,8-PeCDF | 50 | 20-130% |
| 13 C12-1,2,3,4,7,8-HxCDD | 50 | 20-130% |
| 13 C12-1,2,3,6,7,8-HxCDD | 50 | 20-130% |
| 13 C12-1,2,3,7,8,9-HxCDD | 50 | 20-130% |
| 13 C12-1,2,3,4,7,8-HxCDF | 50 | 20-130% |
| 13 C12-1,2,3,6,7,8-HxCDF | 50 | 20-130% |
| 13 C12-2,3,4,6,7,8-HxCDF | 50 | 20-130% |
| 13 C12-1,2,3,7,8,9-HxCDF | 50 | 20-130% |
| 13 C12-1,2,3,4,6,7,8-HpCDD | 50 | 20-130% |
| 13 C12-1,2,3,4,6,7,8-HpCDF | 50 | 20-130% |
| 13 C12-1,2,3,4,7,8,9-HpCDF | 50 | 20-130% |
| 13 C12-OCDD | 100 | 20-130% |
| 13 C12-OCDF | 100 | 20-130% |
| Pre-analysis Standard | ||
| 13 C12-1,3,6,8-TeCDD | 50 | S/N≥10 |
| 13 C12-1,2,3,4-TeCDF | 50 | S/N≥10 |
| 13 C12-1,2,3,4,6,7-HxCDD | 50 | S/N≥10 |
| 13 C12-1,2,3,4,6,7,9-HpCDD | 50 | S/N≥10 |
| Alternate Recovery Standard | ||
| 13 C12-1,3,7,8-TeCDD | 50 | 20-130% |
| 13 C12-1,2,4,7,8-PeCDD | 50 | 20-130% |
| a Changes in the amounts of labeled standards added to the sample or its representative extract will necessitate an adjustment of the calibration solutions to prevent the introduction of inconsistencies. Spike concentration assumes 1 µL sample injection volume for analysis or the injection volume for calibration standards and samples is the same. | ||
| b Labeled standard concentrations are recommendations (equivalent mass per sample of 25 pg pre-extraction standard, as an example, based on a 200 µL extract volume split in half before cleanup with a 20 µL aliquot of a 500 pg/µL spiking solution). Recommendations are based on assumption that half of the extract will be archived before cleanup. Spike levels may be adjusted for different split levels. | ||
| Note: all standards used should be reported. |
| Compound | pg/µL in final extract b | Spike recovery |
|---|---|---|
| Pre-sampling Adsorbent Standard | ||
| 13 C6-Benzo[c]fluorene | 100 | 70-130% |
| 13 C12-Benzo[j]fluoranthene | 100 | 70-130% |
| Pre-extraction Filter Recovery Standard | ||
| d10-Anthracene | 100 | 70-130% |
| Pre-extraction Standard | ||
| 13 C6-Naphthalene | 100 | 20-130% |
| 13 C6-2-Methylnaphthalene | 100 | 20-130% |
| 13 C6-Acenaphthylene | 100 | 20-130% |
| 13 C6-Acenaphthene | 100 | 20-130% |
| 13 C6-Fluorene | 100 | 20-130% |
| 13 C6-Phenanthrene | 100 | 20-130% |
| 13 C6-Anthracene | 100 | 20-130% |
| 13 C6-Fluoranthene | 100 | 20-130% |
| 13 C3-Pyrene | 100 | 20-130% |
| 13 C6-Benz[a]anthracene | 100 | 20-130% |
| 13 C6-Chrysene | 100 | 20-130% |
| 13 C6-Benzo[b]fluoranthene | 100 | 20-130% |
| 13 C6-Benzo[k]fluoranthene | 100 | 20-130% |
| 13 C4-Benzo[e]pyrene | 100 | 20-130% |
| 13 C4-Benzo[a]pyrene | 100 | 20-130% |
| d12-Perylene | 100 | 20-130% |
| 13 C6-Indeno[1,2,3-cd]pyrene | 100 | 20-130% |
| 13 C6-Dibenz[a,h]anthracene | 100 | 20-130% |
| 13 C12-Benzo[g,h,i]perylene | 100 | 20-130% |
| Pre-analysis Standard | ||
| d10-Acenaphthene | 100 | S/N≥10 |
| d10-Pyrene | 100 | S/N≥10 |
| d12-Benzo[e]pyrene | 100 | S/N≥10 |
| a Changes in the amounts of labeled standards added to the sample or its representative extract will necessitate an adjustment of the calibration solutions to prevent the introduction of inconsistencies. | ||
| b Labeled standard concentrations are recommendations (equivalent mass per sample of 25 pg pre-extraction standard, as an example, based on a 200 µL extract volume split in half before cleanup with a 20 µL aliquot of a 1000 pg/µL spiking solution). Recommendations are based on assumption that half of the extract will be archived before cleanup. Spike levels may be adjusted for different split levels. | ||
| Note: all standards used should be reported. |
| Compound | BZ No.b | pg/µL in final extract c | Spike recovery |
|---|---|---|---|
| Pre-sampling Adsorbent Standard | |||
| 13 C12-3,3′-DiCB | 11L | 100 | 70-130% |
| 13 C12-2,4′,5-TrCB | 31L | 100 | 70-130% |
| 13 C12-2,2′,3,5′,6-PeCB | 95L | 100 | 70-130% |
| 13 C12-2,2′,4,4′,5,5′-HxCB | 153L | 100 | 70-130% |
| Pre-extraction Filter Recovery Standard | |||
| 13 C12-2,3,3′,4,5,5′-HxCB | 159L | 100 | 70-130% |
| Pre-extraction Standard | |||
| 13 C12-2-MoCB (WDC) | 1L | 100 | 20-145% |
| 13 C12-4-MoCB (WDC) | 3L | 100 | 20-145% |
| 13 C12-2,2′-DiCB (WDC) | 4L | 100 | 20-145% |
| 13 C12-4,4′-DiCB (WDC) | 15L | 100 | 20-145% |
| 13 C12-2,2′,6-TrCB (WDC) | 19L | 100 | 20-145% |
| 13 C12-3,4′,4′-TrCB (WDC) | 37L | 100 | 20-145% |
| 13 C12-2,2′,6,6′-TeCB (WDC) | 54L | 100 | 20-145% |
| 13 C12-3,3′,4,4′-TeCB (WDC) (WHOT) (NOAAT) | 77L | 100 | 20-145% |
| 13 C12-3,4,4′,5-TeCB (WHOT) | 81L | 100 | 20-145% |
| 13 C12-2,2′,4,6,6′-PeCB (WDC) | 104L | 100 | 20-145% |
| 13 C12-2,3,3′,4,4′-PeCB (WHOT) | 105L | 100 | 20-145% |
| 13 C12-2,3,4,4′,5-PeCB (WHO) | 114L | 100 | 20-145% |
| 13 C12-2,3′,4,4′,5-PeCB (WHOT) | 118L | 100 | 20-145% |
| 13 C12-2′,3,4,4′,5-PeCB (WHOT) | 123L | 100 | 20-145% |
| 13 C12-3,3′,4,4′,5-PeCB (WDC) (WHOT) | 126L | 100 | 20-145% |
| 13 C12-2,2′,4,4′,6,6′-HxCB (WDC) | 155L | 100 | 20-145% |
| 13 C12-2,3,3′,4,4′,5-HxCB (WHOT) | 156L | 100 | 20-145% |
| 13 C12-2,3,3′,4,4′,5′-HxCB (WHOT) | 157L | 100 | 20-145% |
| 13 C12-2,3′,4,4′,5,5′-HxCB (WHOT) | 167L | 100 | 20-145% |
| 13 C12-3,3′,4,4′,5,5′-HxCB (WDC) (WHOT) (NOAAT) | 169L | 100 | 20-145% |
| 13 C12-2,2′,3,3′,4,4′,5′-HpCB (NOAAT) | 170L | 100 | 20-145% |
| 13 C12-2,2′,3,4,4′,5,5′-HpCB (NOAAT) | 180L | 100 | 20-145% |
| 13 C12-2,2′,3,4′,5,6,6′-HpCB (WDC) | 188L | 100 | 20-145% |
| 13 C12-2,3,3′,4,4′,5,5′-HpCB (WDC) (WHOT) | 189L | 100 | 20-145% |
| 13 C12-2,2′,3′,3′,5,5′,6,6′-OcCB (WDC) | 202L | 100 | 20-145% |
| 13 C12-2,3′,3′,4,4′,5,5′,6-OcCB (WDC) | 205L | 100 | 20-145% |
| 13 C12-2,2′,3,3′,4,4′,5,5′,6-NoCB (WDC) | 206L | 100 | 20-145% |
| 13 C12-2,2′,3,3′,4,5,5′,6,6′-NoCB (WDC) | 208L | 100 | 20-145% |
| 13 C12-DeCB (WDC) | 209L | 100 | 20-145% |
| Pre-analysis Standard | |||
| 13 C12-2,5-DiCB | 9L | 100 | S/N≥10 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,5,5′-TeCB (NOAAT) | 52L | 100 | S/N≥10 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,4,5,5′-PeCB (NOAAT) | 101L | 100 | S/N≥10 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,3,4,4′,5′-HxCB (NOAAT) | 138L | 100 | S/N≥10 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,3,3′,4,4′,5,5′-OcCB | 194L | 100 | S/N≥10 |
| Optional Cleanup Standard | |||
| 13 C12-2-MoCB (NOAAT) | 28L | 100 | 20-130% |
| 13 C12-2,2′,4,5,5′-PeCB | 111L | 100 | 20-130% |
| 13 C12-2,2′,3,3′,5,5′,6,6′-OcCB | 178L | 100 | 20-130% |
| Alternate Recovery Standard | |||
| 13 C12-2,3′,4′,5-TeCB | 70L | 100 | 20-130% |
| 13 C12-2,3,4,4′-TeCB | 60L | 100 | 20-130% |
| 13 C12-3,3′,4,5,5′-PeCB | 127L | 100 | 20-130% |
| a Changes in the amounts of spike standards added to the sample or its representative extract will necessitate an adjustment of the calibration solutions to prevent the introduction of inconsistencies. | |||
| b BZ No.: Ballschmiter and Zell 1980, or IUPAC number. | |||
| c Labeled standard concentrations are recommendations (equivalent mass per sample of 25 pg pre-extraction standard, as an example, based on a 200 µL extract volume split in half before cleanup with a 20 µL aliquot of a 1000 pg/µL spiking solution). Recommendations are based on assumption that half of the extract will be archived before cleanup. Spike levels may be adjusted for different split levels. | |||
| NOAAT = PCB considered toxic by the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration. | |||
| WHOT = PCB considered toxic by the World Health Organization. | |||
| Note: all standards used should be reported. |
| Sample type | PCDD/PCDF | PAH | PCB |
|---|---|---|---|
| Field Storage and Shipping Conditions | |||
| All Field Samples | ≤20 °C, (68 °F) | ≤20 °C, (68 °F) | ≤20 °C, (68 °F). |
| Laboratory Storage Conditions | |||
| Sampling Train Rinses and Filters | ≤6 °C (43 °F) | ≤6 °C (43 °F) | ≤6 °C (43 °F). |
| Adsorbent | ≤6 °C (43 °F) | ≤6 °C (43 °F) | ≤6 °C (43 °F). |
| Extract and Archive | <26 °C (79 °F) c | <−10 °C (14 °F) | <−10 °C (14 °F). |
| Laboratory Hold Times | |||
| Extract and Archive | One year | 45 Days | One year. |
| a Samples and extracts must be stored in the dark. | |||
| b Hold times begin from the time the laboratory receives the sample. | |||
| c Room temperature is acceptable if PCDD/PCDF are the only target compounds. | |||
| Note: Hold times for PCDD/PCDF and PCB are recommendations. |
| Standard compound | Cal 1 (optional) |
Cal 2 | Cal 3 | Cal 4 | Cal 5 | Cal 6 | Cal 7 (optional) |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Target (Unlabeled) Analytes | 0.50 | 1.0 | 5.0 | 10.0 | 25 | 50 | 100 |
| Pre-sampling Adsorbent Standard | 50 | 50 | 50 | 50 | 50 | 50 | 50 |
| Pre-extraction Filter Recovery Standard | 50 | 50 | 50 | 50 | 50 | 50 | 50 |
| Pre-extraction Standard (13 C12-OCDD, 13 C12-OCDF−100 pg/µL) | 50 | 50 | 50 | 50 | 50 | 50 | 50 |
| Pre-analysis Standard | 50 | 50 | 50 | 50 | 50 | 50 | 50 |
| Alternate Recovery Standard | 50 | 50 | 50 | 50 | 50 | 50 | 50 |
| a Assumes 1 µL injection volume or the injection volume for standards and samples is the same. |
| Standard compound | Cal 1 (optional) |
Cal 2 | Cal 3 | Cal 4 | Cal 5 | Cal 6 | Cal 7 (optional) |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Target (Unlabeled) Analytes | 1 | 2 | 4 | 20 | 80 | 400 | 1,000 |
| Pre-sampling Adsorbent Standard | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 |
| Pre-extraction Filter Recovery Standard | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 |
| Pre-extraction Standard | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 |
| Pre-analysis Standard | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 |
| a Assumes 1 µL injection volume. |
| Standard compound | Cal 1 (optional) |
Cal 2 | Cal 3 | Cal 4 | Cal 5 | Cal 6 | Cal 7 (optional) |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Target (Unlabeled) Analytes | 0.50 | 1 | 5 | 10 | 50 | 400 | 2,000 |
| Pre-sampling Adsorbent Standard | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 |
| Pre-extraction Filter Recovery Standard | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 |
| Pre-extraction Standard | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 |
| Pre-analysis Standard | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 |
| Alternate Standard | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 |
| a Assumes 1 µL injection volume. |
| Analyte group | Initial calibration RRF RSD |
Continuing calibration RRF compared to ICAL RRF (PD) |
|---|---|---|
| Native (Unlabeled) Analytes | 10 | 25 |
| Pre-sampling Adsorbent Standard | 20 | 25 |
| Pre-extraction Filter Recovery Standard | 20 | 25 |
| Pre-extraction Standard | 20 | 30 |
| Alternative Recovery Standard | 20 | 30 |
| Number of chlorine atoms | Ion type | Theoretical ratio | Lower control limit | Upper control limit |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | M/M+2 | 3.13 | 2.66 | 3.60 |
| 2 | M/M+2 | 1.56 | 1.33 | 1.79 |
| 3 | M/M+2 | 1.04 | 0.88 | 1.20 |
| 4 | M/M+2 | 0.77 | 0.65 | 0.89 |
| 5 | M+2/M+4 | 1.55 | 1.32 | 1.78 |
| 6 | M+2/M+4 | 1.24 | 1.05 | 1.43 |
| 6 a | M/M+2 | 0.51 | 0.43 | 0.59 |
| 7 | M+2/M+4 | 1.05 | 0.89 | 1.21 |
| 7 b | M/M+2 | 0.44 | 0.37 | 0.51 |
| 8 | M+2/M+4 | 0.89 | 0.76 | 1.02 |
| 9 | M+2/M+4 | 0.77 | 0.65 | 0.89 |
| 10 | M+4/M+6 | 1.16 | 0.99 | 1.33 |
| a Used only for 13 C-HxCDF. | ||||
| b Used only for 13 C-HpCDF. |
| Column parameter | PCDD/PCDF | PAH | PCB |
|---|---|---|---|
| Injector temperature | 250 °C | 320 °C | 270 °C. |
| Initial oven temperature | 100 °C | 100 °C | 100 °C. |
| Initial hold time (minutes) | 2 | 2 | 2. |
| Temperature program | 100 to 190 °C at 40 °C/min, then 190 to 300 °C at 3 °C/min | 100 to 300 °C at 8 °C/min | 100 to 150 °C at 15 °C/min, then 150 to 290 °C at 2.5 °C/min. |
| PCB Congener | BZ No.a | Labeled analog | BZ No. |
|---|---|---|---|
| 2,4′-DiCB (NOAAT) | 8 | 13 C12-2,2′-DiCB | 4L |
| 2,2′,5-TrCB (NOAAT) | 18 | 13 C12-2,2′,6-TrCB | 19L |
| 2,4,4′-TrCB (NOAAT) | 28 | 13 C12-2,2′,6-TrCB | 19L |
| 2,2′,3,5′-TeCB (NOAAT) | 52 | 13 C12-2,2′,6,6′-TeCB | 54L |
| 2,2′,5,5′-TeCB (NOAAT) | 52 | 13 C12-2,2′,6,6′-TeCB | 54L |
| 2,3′,4,4′-TeCB (NOAAT) | 66 | 13 C12-2,2′,6,6′-TeCB | 54L |
| 3,3′,4,4′-TeCB (NOAAT) (WHOT) | 77 | 13 C12-3,3′,4,4′-TeCB | 77L |
| 3,4,4′,5-TeCB (WHOT) | 81 | 13 C12-3,4,4″,5-TeCB | 81L |
| 2,2′,4,5,5′-PeCB (NOAAT) | 101 | 13 C12-2,2′,4,5,5′-PeCB | 104L |
| 2,3,3′,4,4′-PeCB (NOAAT) (WHOT) | 105 | 13 C12-2,3,3′,4,4′-PeCB | 105L |
| 2,3,4,4′,5-PeCB (WHOT) | 114 | 13 C12-2,3,4,4′,5-PeCB | 114L |
| 2,3′,4,4′,5-PeCB (WHOT) | 118 | 13 C12-2,3′,4,4′,5-PeCB | 118L |
| 2′,3,4,4′,5-PeCB (WHOT) | 123 | 13 C12-2′,3,4,4′,5-PeCB | 123L |
| 3,3′,4,4′,5-PeCB (NOAAT) (WHOT) | 126 | 13 C12-3,3′,4,4′,5-PeCB | 126L |
| 2,2′,3,3′,4,4′-HxCB (NOAAT) | 128 | 13 C12-2,2′,4,4′,6,6′-HxCB | 155L |
| 2,2′,3,4,4′,5′-HxCB (NOAAT) | 138 | 13 C12-2,2′,4,4′,6,6′-HxCB | 155L |
| 2,2′,4,4′,5,5′-HxCB (NOAAT) | 153 | 13 C12-2,2′,4,4′,6,6′-HxCB | 155L |
| 2,3,3′,4,4′,5-HxCB (WHOT) | 156 | 13 C12-2,3,3′,4,4′,5-HxCB | 156L |
| 2,3,3′,4,4′,5′-HxCB (WHOT) | 157 | 13 C12-2,3,3′,4,4′,5′-HxCB | 157L |
| 2,3′,4,4′,5,5′-HxCB (WHOT) | 167 | 13 C12-2,3′,4,4′,5,5′-HxCB | 167L |
| 3,3′,4,4′,5,5′-HxCB (NOAAT) (WHOT) | 169 | 13 C12-3,3′,4,4′,5,5′-HxCB | 169L |
| 2,2′,3,3′,4,4′,5-HpCB (NOAAT) | 170 | 13 C12-2,2′,3,3′,4,4′,5′-HpCB | 170L |
| 2,2′,3,4,4′,5,5′-HpCB (NOAAT) | 180 | 13 C12-2,2′,3,4,4′,5,5′-HpCB | 180L |
| 2,2′,3,4′,5,5′,6-HpCB (NOAAT) | 187 | 13 C12-2,2′,3,4′,5,6,6′-HpCB | 188L |
| 2,3,3′,4,4′,5,5′-HpCB (WHOT) | 189 | 13 C12-2,3,3′,4,4′,5,5′-HpCB | 189L |
| 2,2′,3,3′,4,4′,5,6-OcCB (NOAAT) | 195 | 13 C12-2,2′ 3,3′,5,5′,6,6′-OcCB | 202L |
| 2,2′,3,3′,4,4′,5,5′,6-NoCB (NOAAT) | 206 | 13 C12-2,2′,3,3′,4,4′,5,5′,6-NoCB | 206L |
| 2,2′,3,3′,4,4′,5,5′,6,6′-DeCB (NOAAT) | 209 | 13 C12-DeCB | 209L |
| a BZ No.: Ballschmiter and Zell 1980, or IUPAC number. | |||
| b Assignments assume the use of the SPB-Octyl column. In the event you choose another column, you may select the labeled standard having the same number of chlorine substituents and the closest retention time to the target analyte in question as the labeled standard to use for quantitation. | |||
| NOAAT = PCB considered toxic by the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration. | |||
| WHOT = PCB considered toxic by the World Health Organization. |
| Section | Requirement | Specification and frequency | Acceptance criteria |
|---|---|---|---|
| 9.3.5 | Demonstration of low system background | Analyze an LMB after the highest calibration standard Note: If an automated extraction system is used, an LMB must be extracted on each port |
Confirm that the LMB is free from contamination as defined in Section 13.1. |
| 9.3.7 | Determination of MDL | Prepare, extract, and analyze 7 replicate spiked samples (spiked within 2 to 10 times of the expected MDL) and 7 LMBs See 40 CFR Part 136 Appendix B |
See MDL confirmation. |
| 9.3.8 | MDL confirmation | Prepare, extract, and analyze a spiked sample (spiked at the MDL) | Confirm that the target compounds meet the qualitative identification criteria in Section 11.4.3.4 of this method. |
| 9.3.9 | Demonstration of precision | Prepare, extract, and analyze 7 replicate spiked samples (spiked near mid-range) | Percent relative standard deviation must be ≤20%. |
| 9.3.10 | Demonstration of accuracy | Calculate mean recovery for replicate spiked samples in Section 9.3.9 | Mean recovery within 70-130% of true value. |
| 9.3.2 | Lowest Calibration Concentration Confirmation | Establish a target concentration for the lowest calibration based on the intended use of the method | Upper PIR ≤150%. Lower PIR ≥50%. |
| 9.3.6 | Calibration Verification | Analyze a mid-level QCS | Within limits in Section 13.11. |
Figure 23-1. Method 23 Sampling Train
Figure 23-2. Condenser and Adsorbent Module
Figure 23-3. Soxhlet/Dean-Stark Extractor
Figure 23-4. Sample Preparation Flow Chart
Appendix A to Method 23
| Pre-extraction standard | BZ b No. | Unlabeled target analyte | BZ b No. | Pre-extraction standard | BZ b No. | Unlabeled target analyte | BZ b No. |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| MoCB | DiCB | ||||||
| 13 C12-2-MoCB | 1L | 2-MoCB | 1 | 13 C12-2,2′-DiCB | 4L | 2,2′-DiCB | 4 |
| 13 C12-2-MoCB | 1L | 3-MoCB | 2 | 13 C12-2,2′-DiCB | 4L | 2,3-DiCB | 5 |
| 13 C12-4-MoCB | 3L | 4-MoCB | 3 | 13 C12-2,2′-DiCB | 4L | 2,3′-DiCB | 6 |
| 13 C12-2,2′-DiCB | 4L | 2,4-DiCB | 7 | ||||
| 13 C12-2,2′-DiCB | 4L | 2,4′-DiCB | 8 | ||||
| 13 C12-2,2′-DiCB | 4L | 2,5-DiCB | 9 | ||||
| 13 C12-2,2′-DiCB | 4L | 2,6-DiCB | 10 | ||||
| 13 C12-2,2′-DiCB | 4L | 3,3′-DiCB | 11 | ||||
| 13 C12-2,2′-DiCB | 4L | 3,4-DiCB | 12 | ||||
| 13 C12-2,2′-DiCB | 4L | 3,4′-DiCB | 13 | ||||
| 13 C12-2,2′-DiCB | 4L | 3,5-DiCB | 14 | ||||
| 13 C12-4,4′-DiCB | 15L | 4,4′-DiCB | 15 | ||||
| TrCB | |||||||
| 13 C12-2,2′,6-TrCB | 19L | 2,2′,3-TrCB | 16 | 13 C12-3,4,4′-TrCB | 19L | 2,4,4′-TrCB | 28 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,6-TrCB | 19L | 2,2′,4-TrCB | 17 | 13 C12-3,4,4′-TrCB | 19L | 2,4,5-TrCB | 29 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,6-TrCB | 19L | 2,2′,5-TrCB | 18 | 13 C12-3,4,4′-TrCB | 19L | 2,4,6-TrCB | 30 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,6-TrCB | 19L | 2,2′,6-TrCB | 19 | 13 C12-3,4,4′-TrCB | 19L | 2,4′,5-TrCB | 31 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,6-TrCB | 19L | 2,3,3′-TrCB | 20 | 13 C12-3,4,4′-TrCB | 19L | 2,4′,6-TrCB | 32 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,6-TrCB | 19L | 2,3,4-TrCB | 21 | 13 C12-3,4,4′-TrCB | 19L | 2′,3,4-TrCB | 33 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,6-TrCB | 19L | 2,3,4′-TrCB | 22 | 13 C12-3,4,4′-TrCB | 19L | 2′,3,5-TrCB | 34 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,6-TrCB | 19L | 2,3,5- TrCB | 23 | 13 C12-3,4,4′-TrCB | 19L | 3,3′,4-TrCB | 35 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,6-TrCB | 19L | 2,3,6- TrCB | 23 | 13 C12-3,4,4′-TrCB | 19L | 3,3′,5-TrCB | 36 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,6-TrCB | 19L | 2,3′,4-TrCB | 25 | 13 C12-3,4′,4′-TrCB | 37L | 3,4,4′-TrCB | 37 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,6-TrCB | 19L | 2,3′,5-TrCB | 26 | 13 C12-3,4′,4′-TrCB | 37L | 3,4,5-TrCB | 38 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,6-TrCB | 19L | 2,3′,6-TrCB | 27 | 13 C12-3,4′,4′-TrCB | 37L | 3,4′,5-TrCB | 39 |
| TeCB | |||||||
| 13 C12-2,2′,6,6′-TeCB | 54L | 2,2′,3,3′-TeCB | 40 | 13 C12-2,2′,6,6′-TeCB | 54L | 2,3,4,5-TeCB | 61 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,6,6′-TeCB | 54L | 2,2′,3,4-TeCB | 41 | 13 C12-2,2′,6,6′-TeCB | 54L | 2,3,4,6-TeCB | 62 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,6,6′-TeCB | 54L | 2,2′,3,4′-TeCB | 42 | 13 C12-2,2′,6,6′-TeCB | 54L | 2,3,4′,5-TeCB | 63 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,6,6′-TeCB | 54L | 2,2′,3,5-TeCB | 43 | 13 C12-2,2′,6,6′-TeCB | 54L | 2,3,4′,6-TeCB | 64 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,6,6′-TeCB | 54L | 2,2′,3,5′-TeCB | 44 | 13 C12-2,2′,6,6′-TeCB | 54L | 2,3,5,6-TeCB | 65 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,6,6′-TeCB | 54L | 2,2′,3,6-TeCB | 45 | 13 C12-2,2′,6,6′-TeCB | 54L | 2,3′,4,4′-TeCB | 66 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,6,6′-TeCB | 54L | 2,2′,3,6′-TeCB | 46 | 13 C12-2,2′,6,6′-TeCB | 54L | 2,3′,4,5-TeCB | 67 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,6,6′-TeCB | 54L | 2,2′,4,4′-TeCB | 47 | 13 C12-2,2′,6,6′-TeCB | 54L | 2,3′,4,5′-TeCB | 68 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,6,6′-TeCB | 54L | 2,2′,4,5-TeCB | 48 | 13 C12-2,2′,6,6′-TeCB | 54L | 2,3′,4,6-TeCB | 69 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,6,6′-TeCB | 54L | 2,2′,4,5′-TeCB | 49 | 13 C12-2,2′,6,6′-TeCB | 54L | 2,3′,4′,5-TeCB | 70 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,6,6′-TeCB | 54L | 2,2′,4,6-TeCB | 50 | 13 C12-2,2′,6,6′-TeCB | 54L | 2,3′,4′,6-TeCB | 71 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,6,6′-TeCB | 54L | 2,2′,4,6′-TeCB | 51 | 13 C12-2,2′,6,6′-TeCB | 54L | 2,3′,5,5′-TeCB | 72 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,6,6′-TeCB | 54L | 2,2′,5,5′-TeCB | 52 | 13 C12-2,2′,6,6′-TeCB | 54L | 2,3′,5′,6-TeCB | 73 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,6,6′-TeCB | 54L | 2,2′,5,6′-TeCB | 53 | 13 C12-2,2′,6,6′-TeCB | 54L | 2,4,4′,5-TeCB | 74 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,6,6′-TeCB | 54L | 2,2′,6,6′-TeCB | 54 | 13 C12-2,2′,6,6′-TeCB | 54L | 2,4,4′,6-TeCB | 75 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,6,6′-TeCB | 54L | 2,3,3′,4′-TeCB | 55 | 13 C12-2,2′,6,6′-TeCB | 54L | 2′,3,4,5-TeCB | 76 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,6,6′-TeCB | 54L | 2,3,3′,4′-TeCB | 56 | 13 C12-3,3′,4,4′-TeCB | 77L | 3,3′,4,4′-TeCB | 77 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,6,6′-TeCB | 54L | 2,3,3′,5-TeCB | 57 | 13 C12-3,3′,4,4′-TeCB | 77L | 3,3′,4,5-TeCB | 78 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,6,6′-TeCB | 54L | 2,3,3′,5′-TeCB | 58 | 13 C12-3,3′,4,4′-TeCB | 77L | 3,3′,4,5′-TeCB | 79 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,6,6′-TeCB | 54L | 2,3,3′,6-TeCB | 59 | 13 C12-3,3′,4,4′-TeCB | 77L | 3,3′,5,5′-TeCB | 80 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,6,6′-TeCB | 54L | 2,3,4,4′-TeCB | 60 | 13 C12-3,4,4′,5-TeCB | 81L | 3,4,4′,5-TeCB | 81 |
| PeCB | |||||||
| 13 C12-2,2′,4,6,6′-PeCB | 104L | 2,2′,3,3′,4-PeCB | 82 | 13 C12-2,3,3′,4,4′-PeCB | 105L | 2,3,3′,4,4′-PeCB | 105 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,4,6,6′-PeCB | 104L | 2,2′,3,3′,5-PeCB | 83 | 13 C12-2,3,3′,4,4′-PeCB | 105L | 2,3,3′,4,5-PeCB | 106 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,4,6,6′-PeCB | 104L | 2,2′,3,3′,6-PeCB | 84 | 13 C12-2,3,3′,4,4′-PeCB | 105L | 2,3,3′,4′,5-PeCB | 107 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,4,6,6′-PeCB | 104L | 2,2′,3,4,4′-PeCB | 85 | 13 C12-2,3,3′,4,4′-PeCB | 105L | 2,3,3′,4,5′-PeCB | 108 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,4,6,6′-PeCB | 104L | 2,2′,3,4,5-PeCB | 86 | 13 C12-2,3,3′,4,4′-PeCB | 105L | 2,3,3′,4,6-PeCB | 109 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,4,6,6′-PeCB | 104L | 2,2′,3,4,5′-PeCB | 87 | 13 C12-2,3,3′,4,4′-PeCB | 105L | 2,3,3′,4′,6-PeCB | 110 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,4,6,6′-PeCB | 104L | 2,2′,3,4,6-PeCB | 88 | 13 C12-2,3,3′,4,4′-PeCB | 105L | 2,3,3′,5,5′-PeCB | 111 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,4,6,6′-PeCB | 104L | 2,2′,3,4,6′-PeCB | 89 | 13 C12-2,3,3′,4,4′-PeCB | 105L | 2,3,3′,5,6-PeCB | 112 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,4,6,6′-PeCB | 104L | 2,2′,3,4′,5-PeCB | 90 | 13 C12-2,3,3′,4,4′-PeCB | 105L | 2,3,3′,5′,6-PeCB | 113 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,4,6,6′-PeCB | 104L | 2,2′,3,4′,6-PeCB | 91 | 13 C12-2,3,4,4′,5-PeCB | 114L | 2,3,4,4′,5-PeCB | 114 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,4,6,6′-PeCB | 104L | 2,2′,3,5,5′-PeCB | 92 | 13 C12-2,3,4,4′,5-PeCB | 114L | 2,3,4,4′,6-PeCB | 115 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,4,6,6′-PeCB | 104L | 2,2′,3,5,6-PeCB | 93 | 13 C12-2,3,4,4′,5-PeCB | 114L | 2,3,4,5,6-PeCB | 116 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,4,6,6′-PeCB | 104L | 2,2′,3,5,6′-PeCB | 94 | 13 C12-2,3,4,4′,5-PeCB | 114L | 2,3,4′,5,6-PeCB | 117 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,4,6,6′-PeCB | 104L | 2,2′,3,5′,6-PeCB | 95 | 13 C12-2,3′,4,4′,5-PeCB | 118L | 2,3′,4,4′,5-PeCB | 118 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,4,6,6′-PeCB | 104L | 2,2′,3,6,6′-PeCB | 96 | 13 C12-2,3′,4,4′,5-PeCB | 118L | 2,3′,4,4′,6-PeCB | 119 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,4,6,6′-PeCB | 104L | 2,2′,3′,4,5-PeCB | 97 | 13 C12-2,3′,4,4′,5-PeCB | 118L | 2,3′,4,5,5′-PeCB | 120 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,4,6,6′-PeCB | 104L | 2,2′,3′,4,6-PeCB | 98 | 13 C12-2,3′,4,4′,5-PeCB | 118L | 2,3′,4,5,′6-PeCB | 121 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,4,6,6′-PeCB | 104L | 2,2′,4,4′,5-PeCB | 99 | 13 C12-2,3′,4,4′,5-PeCB | 118L | 2′,3,3′,4,5-PeCB | 122 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,4,6,6′-PeCB | 104L | 2,2′,4,4′,6-PeCB | 100 | 13 C12-2′,3,4,4′,5-PeCB | 123L | 2′,3,4,4′,5-PeCB | 123 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,4,6,6′-PeCB | 104L | 2,2′,4,5,5′-PeCB | 101 | 13 C12-2′,3,4,4′,5-PeCB | 123L | 2′,3,4,5,5′-PeCB | 124 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,4,6,6′-PeCB | 104L | 2,2′,4,5,6′-PeCB | 102 | 13 C12-2′,3,4,4′,5-PeCB | 123L | 2′,3,4,5,6′-PeCB | 125 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,4,6,6′-PeCB | 104L | 2,2′,4,5,′6-PeCB | 103 | 13 C12-3,3′,4,4′,5-PeCB | 126L | 3,3′,4,4′,5-PeCB | 126 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,4,6,6′-PeCB | 104L | 2,2′,4,6,6′-PeCB | 104 | 13 C12-3,3′,4,4′,5-PeCB | 126L | 3,3′,4,5,5′-PeCB | 127 |
| HxCB | |||||||
| 13 C12-2,2′,4,4′,6,6′-HxCB | 155L | 2,2′,3,3′,4,4′-HxCB | 128 | 13 C12-2,2′,4,4′,6,6′-HxCB | 155L | 2,2′,3,4′,5′,6-HxCB | 149 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,4,4′,6,6′-HxCB | 155L | 2,2′,3,3′,4,5-HxCB | 129 | 13 C12-2,2′,4,4′,6,6′-HxCB | 155L | 2,2′,3,4′,6,6′-HxCB | 150 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,4,4′,6,6′-HxCB | 155L | 2,2′,3,3′,4,5′-HxCB | 130 | 13 C12-2,2′,4,4′,6,6′-HxCB | 155L | 2,2′,3,5,5′,6-HxCB | 151 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,4,4′,6,6′-HxCB | 155L | 2,2′,3,3′,4,6-HxCB | 131 | 13 C12-2,2′,4,4′,6,6′-HxCB | 155L | 2,2′,3,5,6,6′-HxCB | 152 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,4,4′,6,6′-HxCB | 155L | 2,2′,3,3′,4,6′-HxCB | 132 | 13 C12-2,2′,4,4′,6,6′-HxCB | 155L | 2,2′,4,4′,5,5′-HxCB | 153 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,4,4′,6,6′-HxCB | 155L | 2,2′,3,3′,5,5′-HxCB | 133 | 13 C12-2,2′,4,4′,6,6′-HxCB | 155L | 2,2′,4,4′,5′,6-HxCB | 154 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,4,4′,6,6′-HxCB | 155L | 2,2′,3,3′,5,6-HxCB | 134 | 13 C12-2,2′,4,4′,6,6′-HxCB | 155L | 2,2′,4,4′,6,6′-HxCB | 155 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,4,4′,6,6′-HxCB | 155L | 2,2′,3,3′,5,6′-HxCB | 135 | 13 C12-2,3,3′,4,4′,5- HxCB | 156L | 2,3,3′,4,4′,5-HxCB | 156 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,4,4′,6,6′-HxCB | 155L | 2,2′,3,3′,6,6′-HxCB | 136 | 13 C12-2,3,3′,4,4′,5′-HxCB | 157L | 2,3,3′,4,4′,5′-HxCB | 157 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,4,4′,6,6′-HxCB | 155L | 2,2′,3,4,4′,5-HxCB | 137 | 13 C12-2,3,3′,4,4′,5′-HxCB | 157L | 2,3,3′,4,4′,6-HxCB | 158 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,4,4′,6,6′-HxCB | 155L | 2,2′,3,4,4′,5′-HxCB | 138 | 13 C12-2,3,3′,4,4′,5′-HxCB | 157L | 2,3,3′,4,5,5′-HxCB | 158 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,4,4′,6,6′-HxCB | 155L | 2,2′,3,4,4′,6-HxCB | 139 | 13 C12-2,3,3′,4,4′,5′-HxCB | 157L | 2,3,3′,4,5,6-HxCB | 160 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,4,4′,6,6′-HxCB | 155L | 2,2′,3,4,4′,6′-HxCB | 140 | 13 C12-2,3,3′,4,4′,5′-HxCB | 157L | 2,3,3′,4,5′,6-HxCB | 161 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,4,4′,6,6′-HxCB | 155L | 2,2′,3,4,5,5′-HxCB | 141 | 13 C12-2,3,3′,4,4′,5′-HxCB | 157L | 2,3,3′,4′,5,5′-HxCB | 162 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,4,4′,6,6′-HxCB | 155L | 2,2′,3,4,5,6-HxCB | 142 | 13 C12-2,3,3′,4,4′,5′-HxCB | 157L | 2,3,3′,4′,5,6-HxCB | 163 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,4,4′,6,6′-HxCB | 155L | 2,2′,3,4,5,6′-HxCB | 143 | 13 C12-2,3,3′,4,4′,5′-HxCB | 157L | 2,3,3′,4′,5′,6-HxCB | 164 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,4,4′,6,6′-HxCB | 155L | 2,2′,3,4,5′,6-HxCB | 144 | 13 C12-2,3,3′,4,4′,5′-HxCB | 157L | 2,3,3′,5,5′,6-HxCB | 165 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,4,4′,6,6′-HxCB | 155L | 2,2′,3,4,6,6′-HxCB | 145 | 13 C12-2,3,3′,4,4′,5′-HxCB | 157L | 2,3,4,4′,5,6-HxCB | 166 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,4,4′,6,6′-HxCB | 155L | 2,2′,3,4′,5,5′-HxCB | 146 | 13 C12-2,3′,4,4′,5,5′-HxCB | 167L | 2,3′,4,4′,5,5′-HxCB | 167 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,4,4′,6,6′-HxCB | 155L | 2,2′,3,4′,5,6-HxCB | 147 | 13 C12-2,3′,4,4′,5,5′-HxCB | 167L | 2,3′,4,4′,5′,6-HxCB | 168 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,4,4′,6,6′-HxCB | 155L | 2,2′,3,4′,5,6′-HxCB | 148 | 13 C12-3,3′,4,4′,5,5′-HxCB | 169L | 3,3′,4,4′,5,5′-HxCB | 169 |
| HpCB | |||||||
| 13 C12-2,2′,3,4′,5,6,6′-HpCB | 188L | 2,2′,3,3′,4,4′,5-HpCB | 170 | 13 C12-2,2′,3,4′,5,6,6′-HpCB | 188L | 2,2′,3,4,4′,5,6′-HpCB | 182 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,3,4′,5,6,6′-HpCB | 188L | 2,2′,3,3′,4,4′,6-HpCB | 171 | 13 C12-2,2′,3,4′,5,6,6′-HpCB | 188L | 2,2′,3,4,4′,5′,6-HpCB | 183 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,3,4′,5,6,6′-HpCB | 188L | 2,2′,3,3′,4,5,5′-HpCB | 172 | 13 C12-2,2′,3,4′,5,6,6′-HpCB | 188L | 2,2′,3,4,4′,5′,6-HpCB | 184 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,3,4′,5,6,6′-HpCB | 188L | 2,2′,3,3′,4,5,6-HpCB | 173 | 13 C12-2,2′,3,4′,5,6,6′-HpCB | 188L | 2,2′,3,4,4′,6,6′-HpCB | 185 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,3,4′,5,6,6′-HpCB | 188L | 2,2′,3,3′,4,5,6′-HpCB | 174 | 13 C12-2,2′,3,4′,5,6,6′-HpCB | 188L | 2,2′,3,4,5,5′,6-HpCB | 186 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,3,4′,5,6,6′-HpCB | 188L | 2,2′,3,3′,4,5′,6-HpCB | 175 | 13 C12-2,2′,3,4′,5,6,6′-HpCB | 188L | 2,2′,3,4′,5,5′,6-HpCB | 187 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,3,4′,5,6,6′-HpCB | 188L | 2,2′,3,3′,4,6,6′-HpCB | 176 | 13 C12-2,2′,3,4′,5,6,6′-HpCB | 188L | 2,2′,3,4′,5,6,6′-HpCB | 188 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,3,4′,5,6,6′-HpCB | 188L | 2,2′,3,3′,4′,5,6-HpCB | 177 | 13 C12-2,3,3′,4,4′,5,5′-HpCB | 189L | 2,3,3′,4,4′,5,5′-HpCB | 189 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,3,4′,5,6,6′-HpCB | 188L | 2,2′,3,3′,5,5′,6-HpCB | 178 | 13 C12-2,3,3′,4,4′,5,5′-HpCB | 189L | 2,3,3′,4,4′,5,6-HpCB | 190 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,3,4′,5,6,6′-HpCB | 188L | 2,2′,3,3′,5,6,6′-HpCB | 179 | 13 C12-2,3,3′,4,4′,5,5′-HpCB | 189L | 2,3,3′,4,4′,5′,6-HpCB | 191 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,3,4′,5,6,6′-HpCB | 188L | 2,2′,3,4,4′,5,5′-HpCB | 180 | 13 C12-2,3,3′,4,4′,5,5′-HpCB | 189L | 2,3,3′,4,5,5′,6-HpCB | 192 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,3,4′,5,6,6′-HpCB | 188L | 2,2′,3,4,4′,5,6-HpCB | 181 | 13 C12-2,3,3′,4,4′,5,5′-HpCB | 189L | 2,3,3′,4′,5,5′,6-HpCB | 193 |
| OcCB | NoCB | ||||||
| 13 C12-2,2′,3,3′,5,5′,6,6′-OcCB | 202L | 2,2′,3,3′,4,4′,5,5′-OcCB | 194 | 13 C12-2,2′,3,3′,4,4′,5,5′,6-NoCB | 206L | 2,2′,3,3′,4,4′,5,5′,6-NoCB | 206 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,3,3′,5,5′,6,6′-OcCB | 202L | 2,2′,3,3′,4,4′,5,6-OcCB | 195 | 13 C12-2,2′,3,3′,4,4′,5,5′,6-NoCB | 206L | 2,2′,3,3′,4,4′,5,6,6′-NoCB | 207 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,3,3′,5,5′,6,6′-OcCB | 202L | 2,2′,3,3′,4,4′,5,6′-OcCB | 196 | 13 C12-2,2′,3,3′,4,5,5′,6,6′-NoCB | 208L | 2,2′,3,3′,4,5,5′,6,6′- NoCB | 208 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,3,3′,5,5′,6,6′-OcCB | 202L | 2,2′,3,3′,4,4′,6,6′-OcCB | 197 | DeCB | |||
| 13 C12-2,2′,3,3′,5,5′,6,6′-OcCB | 202L | 2,2′,3,3′,4,5,5′,6-OcCB | 198 | 13 C12-DeCB | 209L | 2,2′,3,3′,4,4′,5,5′,6,6′-DeCB | 209 |
| 13 C12-2,2′,3,3′,5,5′,6,6′-OcCB | 202L | 2,2′,3,3′,4,5,5′,6′-OcCB | 199 | ||||
| 13 C12-2,2′,3,3′,5,5′,6,6′-OcCB | 202L | 2,2′,3,3′,4,5,6,6′-OcCB | 200 | ||||
| 13 C12-2,2′,3,3′,5,5′,6,6′-OcCB | 202L | 2,2′,3,3′,4,5′,6,6′-OcCB | 201 | ||||
| 13 C12-2,2′,3,3′,5,5′,6,6′-OcCB | 202L | 2,2′,3,3′,5,5′,6,6′-OcCB | 202 | ||||
| 13 C12-2,3′,3′,4,4′,5,5′,6-OcCB | 205L | 2,2′,3,4,4′,5,5′,6-OcCB | 203 | ||||
| 13 C12-2,3′,3′,4,4′,5,5′,6-OcCB | 205L | 2,2′,3,4,4′,5,6,6′-OcCB | 204 | ||||
| 13 C12-2,3′,3′,4,4′,5,5′,6-OcCB | 205L | 2,3,3′,4,4′,5,5′,6-OcCB | 205 | ||||
| a Assignments assume the use of the SPB-Octyl column. In the event you choose another column, you may select the labeled standard having the same number of chlorine substituents and the closest retention time to the target analyte in question as the labeled standard to use for quantitation. | |||||||
| b BZ No.: Ballschmiter and Zell 1980, also referred to as IUPAC number. |
Appendix B to Method 23
Preparation of XAD-2 Adsorbent Resin
1.0 Scope and Application
XAD-2® resin, as supplied by the original manufacturer, is impregnated with a bicarbonate solution to inhibit microbial growth during storage. Remove both the salt solution and any residual extractable chemicals used in the polymerization process before use. Prepare the resin by a series of water and organic extractions, followed by careful drying.
2.0 Extraction
2.1 You may perform the extraction using a Soxhlet extractor or other apparatus that generates resin meeting the requirements in Section 13.1 of Method 23. Use an all-glass thimble containing an extra-coarse frit for extraction of the resin. The frit is recessed 10-15 mm above a crenellated ring at the bottom of the thimble to facilitate drainage. Because the resin floats on methylene chloride, carefully retain the resin in the extractor cup with a glass wool plug and stainless-steel screen. This process involves sequential extraction with the following recommended solvents in the listed order.
• Water initial rinse: Place resin in a suitable container, soak for approximately 5 min with Type II water, remove fine floating resin particles and discard the water. Fill with Type II water a second time, let stand overnight, remove fine floating resin particles, and discard the water.
• Hot water: Extract with water for 8 hr.
• Methyl alcohol: Extract for 22 hr.
• Methylene chloride: Extract for 22 hr.
• Toluene: Extract for 22 hr.
• Methylene chloride: Extract for 22 hr.
Note: You may store the resin in a sealed glass container filled with toluene prior to the final toluene extraction. It may be necessary to repeat the final methylene chloride extractions to meet the cleanliness requirements in Section 13.1 of Method 23.
2.2 You may use alternative extraction procedures to clean large batches of resin. Any size extractor may be constructed; the choice depends on the needs of the sampling programs. The resin is held in a glass or stainless-steel cylinder between a pair of coarse and fine screens. Spacers placed under the bottom screen allow for even distribution of clean solvent. Clean solvent is circulated through the resin for extraction. A flow rate is maintained upward through the resin to allow maximum solvent contact and prevent channeling.
2.2.1 Experience has shown that 1 mL/g of resin extracted is the minimum necessary to extract and clean the resin. The aqueous rinse is critical to the subsequent organic rinses and may be accomplished by simply flushing the canister with about 1 liter of distilled water for every 25 g of resin. A small pump may be useful for pumping the water through the canister. You should perform the water extraction at the rate of about 20 to 40 mL/min.
2.2.2 All materials of construction are glass, PTFE, or stainless steel. Pumps, if used, should not contain extractable materials.
3.0 Drying
3.1 Dry the adsorbent of extraction solvent before use. This section provides a recommended procedure to dry adsorbent that is wet with solvent. However, you may use other procedures if the cleanliness requirements in Section 13.1 of Method 23 are met.
3.2 Drying Column. A simple column with suitable retainers will hold all the XAD-2 from the extractor or the Soxhlet extractor, as shown in Figure B-1, with sufficient space for drying the bed while generating a minimum backpressure in the column.
3.3 Drying Procedure: Dry the adsorbent using clean inert gas. Liquid nitrogen from a standard commercial liquid nitrogen cylinder has proven to be a reliable source of large volumes of gas free from organic contaminants. You may use high-purity tank nitrogen to dry the resin. However, you should pass the high-purity nitrogen through a bed of activated charcoal approximately 150 mL in volume prior to entering the drying apparatus.
3.3.1 Connect the gas vent of a liquid nitrogen cylinder or the exit of the activated carbon scrubber to the column by a length of precleaned copper tubing (e.g., 0.95 cm ID) coiled to pass through a heat source. A convenient heat source is a water bath heated from a steam line. The final nitrogen temperature should only be warm to the touch and not over 40 °C.
3.3.2 Allow the methylene chloride to drain from the resin prior to placing the resin in the drying apparatus.
3.3.3 Flow nitrogen through the drying apparatus at a rate that does not fluidize or agitate the resin. Continue the nitrogen flow until the residual solvent is removed.
Note: Experience has shown that about 500 g of resin may be dried overnight by consuming a full 160-L cylinder of liquid nitrogen.
Figure B-1. XAD-2 fluidized-bed drying apparatus
Method 24—Determination of Volatile Matter Content, Water Content, Density, Volume Solids, and Weight Solids of Surface Coatings
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Analytes.
| Analyte | CAS No. |
|---|---|
| Volatile organic compounds Water | No CAS Number assigned 7732-18-5 |
1.2 Applicability. This method is applicable for the determination of volatile matter content, water content, density, volume solids, and weight solids of paint, varnish, lacquer, or other related surface coatings.
1.3 Precision and Bias. Intra-and inter-laboratory analytical precision statements are presented in section 13.1. No bias has been identified.
2.0 Summary of Method
2.1 Standard methods are used to determine the volatile matter content, water content, density, volume solids, and weight solids of paint, varnish, lacquer, or other related surface coatings.
3.0 Definitions
3.1 Waterborne coating means any coating which contains more than 5 percent water by weight in its volatile fraction.
3.2 Multicomponent coatings are coatings that are packaged in two or more parts, which are combined before application. Upon combination a coreactant from one part of the coating chemically reacts, at ambient conditions, with a coreactant from another part of the coating.
3.3 Ultraviolet (UV) radiation-cured coatings are coatings which contain unreacted monomers that are polymerized by exposure to ultraviolet light.
4.0 Interferences [Reserved]
5.0 Safety
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health practices and to determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to performing this test method.
5.2 Hazardous Components. Several of the compounds that may be contained in the coatings analyzed by this method may be irritating or corrosive to tissues (e.g., heptane) or may be toxic (e.g., benzene, methyl alcohol). Nearly all are fire hazards. Appropriate precautions can be found in reference documents, such as Reference 3 of section 16.0.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
The equipment and supplies specified in the ASTM methods listed in sections 6.1 through 6.6 (incorporated by reference—see § 60.17 for acceptable versions of the methods) are required:
6.1 ASTM D 1475-60, 80, or 90, Standard Test Method for Density of Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and Related Products.
6.2 ASTM D 2369-81, 87, 90, 92, 93, 95, or 10. Standard Test Method for Volatile Content of Coatings.
6.3 ASTM D 3792-79 or 91, Standard Test Method for Water Content of Water Reducible Paints by Direct Injection into a Gas Chromatograph.
6.4 ASTM D 4017-81, 90, or 96a, Standard Test Method for Water in Paints and Paint Materials by the Karl Fischer Titration Method.
6.5 ASTM 4457-85 91, Standard Test Method for Determination of Dichloromethane and 1,1,1-Trichloroethane in Paints and Coatings by Direct Injection into a Gas Chromatograph.
6.6 ASTM D 5403-93, Standard Test Methods for Volatile Content of Radiation Curable Materials.
6.7 ASTM D 6419-00, Test Method for Volatile Content of Sheet-Fed and Coldset Web Offset Printing Inks.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
7.1 The reagents and standards specified in the ASTM methods listed in sections 6.1 through 6.6 are required.
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport
8.1 Follow the sample collection, preservation, storage, and transport procedures described in Reference 1 of section 16.0.
9.0 Quality Control
9.1 Reproducibility
9.2 Confidence Limits for Waterborne Coatings. Because of the inherent increased imprecision in the determination of the VOC content of waterborne coatings as the weight percent of water increases, measured parameters for waterborne coatings are replaced with appropriate confidence limits (Section 12.6). These confidence limits are based on measured parameters and inter-laboratory precision statements.
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
10.1 Perform the calibration and standardization procedures specified in the ASTM methods listed in sections 6.1 through 6.6.
11.0 Analytical Procedure
Additional guidance can be found in Reference 2 of section 16.0.
11.1 Non Thin-film Ultraviolet Radiation-cured (UV radiation-cured) Coatings.
11.1.1 Volatile Content. Use the procedure in ASTM D 5403 to determine the volatile matter content of the coating except the curing test described in NOTE 2 of ASTM D 5403 is required.
11.1.2 Water Content. To determine water content, follow section 11.3.2.
11.1.3 Coating Density. To determine coating density, follow section 11.3.3.
11.1.4 Solids Content. To determine solids content, follow section 11.3.4.
11.1.5 To determine if a coating or ink can be classified as a thin-film UV cured coating or ink, use the equation in section 12.2. If C is less than 0.2 g and A is greater than or equal to 225 cm 2 (35 in 2) then the coating or ink is considered a thin-film UV radiation-cured coating and ASTM D 5403 is not applicable.
11.2 Multi-component Coatings.
11.2.1 Sample Preparation.
11.2.1.1 Prepare about 100 ml of sample by mixing the components in a storage container, such as a glass jar with a screw top or a metal can with a cap. The storage container should be just large enough to hold the mixture. Combine the components (by weight or volume) in the ratio recommended by the manufacturer. Tightly close the container between additions and during mixing to prevent loss of volatile materials. However, most manufacturers mixing instructions are by volume. Because of possible error caused by expansion of the liquid when measuring the volume, it is recommended that the components be combined by weight. When weight is used to combine the components and the manufacturer's recommended ratio is by volume, the density must be determined by section 11.3.3.
11.2.1.2 Immediately after mixing, take aliquots from this 100 ml sample for determination of the total volatile content, water content, and density.
11.2.2 Volatile Content. To determine total volatile content, use the apparatus and reagents described in ASTM D2369 (incorporated by reference; see § 60.17 for the approved versions of the standard), respectively, and use the following procedures:
11.2.2.1 Weigh and record the weight of an aluminum foil weighing dish. Add 3 ±1 ml of suitable solvent as specified in ASTM D2369 to the weighing dish. Using a syringe as specified in ASTM D2369, weigh to 1 mg, by difference, a sample of coating into the weighing dish. For coatings believed to have a volatile content less than 40 weight percent, a suitable size is 0.3 + 0.10 g, but for coatings believed to have a volatile content greater than 40 weight percent, a suitable size is 0.5 ±0.1 g.
11.2.2.2 Heat the aluminum foil dishes containing the dispersed specimens in the forced draft oven for 60 min at 110 ±5 °C (230 ±9 °F). Caution—provide adequate ventilation, consistent with accepted laboratory practice, to prevent solvent vapors from accumulating to a dangerous level.
11.2.2.3 Remove the dishes from the oven, place immediately in a desiccator, cool to ambient temperature, and weigh to within 1 mg.
11.2.2.4 Run analyses in pairs (duplicate sets) for each coating mixture until the criterion in section 11.4 is met. Calculate WV following Equation 24-2 and record the arithmetic average.
11.2.3 Water Content. To determine water content, follow section 11.3.2.
11.2.4 Coating Density. To determine coating density, follow section 11.3.3.
11.2.5 Solids Content. To determine solids content, follow section 11.3.4.
11.2.6 Exempt Solvent Content. To determine the exempt solvent content, follow section 11.3.5.
11.3 Water-or Solvent-borne coatings.
11.3.1 Volatile Content. Use the procedure in ASTM D 2369 to determine the volatile matter content (may include water) of the coating.
11.3.1.1 Record the following information:
W1 = weight of dish and sample before heating, g
W2 = weight of dish and sample after heating, g
W3 = sample weight, g.
11.3.1.2 Calculate the weight fraction of the volatile matter (Wv) for each analysis as shown in section 12.3.
11.3.1.3 Run duplicate analyses until the difference between the two values in a set is less than or equal to the intra-laboratory precision statement in section 13.1.
11.3.1.4 Record the arithmetic average (Wv).
11.3.2 Water Content. For waterborne coatings only, determine the weight fraction of water (Ww) using either ASTM D 3792 or ASTM D 4017.
11.3.2.1 Run duplicate analyses until the difference between the two values in a set is less than or equal to the intra-laboratory precision statement in section 13.1.
11.3.2.2 Record the arithmetic average (ww).
11.3.3 Coating Density. Determine the density (Dc, kg/l) of the surface coating using the procedure in ASTM D 1475.
11.3.3.1 Run duplicate analyses until each value in a set deviates from the mean of the set by no more than the intra-laboratory precision statement in section 13.1.
11.3.3.2 Record the arithmetic average (Dc).
11.3.4 Solids Content. Determine the volume fraction (Vs) solids of the coating by calculation using the manufacturer's formulation.
11.3.5 Exempt Solvent Content. Determine the weight fraction of exempt solvents (WE) by using ASTM Method D4457. Run a duplicate set of determinations and record the arithmetic average (WE).
11.4 Sample Analysis Criteria. For Wv and Ww, run duplicate analyses until the difference between the two values in a set is less than or equal to the intra-laboratory precision statement for that parameter. For Dc, run duplicate analyses until each value in a set deviates from the mean of the set by no more than the intra-laboratory precision statement. If, after several attempts, it is concluded that the ASTM procedures cannot be used for the specific coating with the established intra-laboratory precision (excluding UV radiation-cured coatings), the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) will assume responsibility for providing the necessary procedures for revising the method or precision statements upon written request to: Director, Emissions, Monitoring, and Analysis Division, MD-14, Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, NC 27711.
12.0 Calculations and Data Analysis
12.1 Nomenclature.
A = Area of substrate, cm 2, (in 2).
C = Amount of coating or ink added to the substrate, g.
Dc = Density of coating or ink, g/cm 3 (g/in 3).
F = Manufacturer's recommended film thickness, cm (in).
Wo = Weight fraction of nonaqueous volatile matter, g/g.
Ws = Weight fraction of solids, g/g.
Wv = Weight fraction of the volatile matter, g/g.
Ww = Weight fraction of the water, g/g.
12.2 To determine if a coating or ink can be classified as a thin-film UV cured coating or ink, use the following equation:
12.3 Calculate Wv for each analysis as shown below:
12.4 Nonaqueous Volatile Matter.
12.4.1 Solvent-borne Coatings.
12.4.2 Waterborne Coatings.
12.4.3 Coatings Containing Exempt Solvents.
12.5 Weight Fraction Solids.
12.6 Confidence Limit Calculations for Waterborne Coatings. To calculate the lower confidence limit, subtract the appropriate inter-laboratory precision value from the measured mean value for that parameter. To calculate the upper confidence limit, add the appropriate inter-laboratory precision value to the measured mean value for that parameter. For Wv and Dc, use the lower confidence limits; for Ww, use the upper confidence limit. Because Ws is calculated, there is no adjustment for this parameter.
13.0 Method Performance
13.1 Analytical Precision Statements. The intra-and inter-laboratory precision statements are given in Table 24-1 in section 17.0.
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 References
Same as specified in section 6.0, with the addition of the following:
1. Standard Procedure for Collection of Coating and Ink Samples for Analysis by Reference Methods 24 and 24A. EPA-340/1-91-010. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Stationary Source Compliance Division, Washington, D.C. September 1991.
2. Standard Operating Procedure for Analysis of Coating and Ink Samples by Reference Methods 24 and 24A.
EPA-340/1-91-011. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Stationary Source Compliance Division, Washington, D.C. September 1991.
3. Handbook of Hazardous Materials: Fire, Safety, Health. Alliance of American Insurers. Schaumberg, IL. 1983.
17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
| Intra-laboratory | Inter-laboratory | |
|---|---|---|
| Volatile matter content, Wv | ±0.015 Wv | ±0.047 Wv |
| Water content, Ww | ±0.029 Ww | ±0.075 Ww |
| Density, Dc | ±0.001 kg/l | ±0.002 kg/l |
Method 24A—Determination of Volatile Matter Content and Density of Publication Rotogravure Inks and Related Publication Rotogravure Coatings
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Analytes.
| Analyte | CAS No. |
|---|---|
| Volatile organic compounds (VOC) | No CAS number assigned. |
1.2 Applicability. This method is applicable for the determination of the VOC content and density of solvent-borne (solvent-reducible) publication rotogravure inks and related publication rotogravure coatings.
2.0 Summary of Method
2.1 Separate procedures are used to determine the VOC weight fraction and density of the ink or related coating and the density of the solvent in the ink or related coating. The VOC weight fraction is determined by measuring the weight loss of a known sample quantity which has been heated for a specified length of time at a specified temperature. The density of both the ink or related coating and solvent are measured by a standard procedure. From this information, the VOC volume fraction is calculated.
3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
4.0 Interferences [Reserved]
5.0 Safety
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This test method does not purport to address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health practices and to determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to performing this test method.
5.2 Hazardous Components. Some of the compounds that may be contained in the inks or related coatings analyzed by this method may be irritating or corrosive to tissues or may be toxic. Nearly all are fire hazards. Appropriate precautions can be found in reference documents, such as Reference 6 of section 16.0.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
The following equipment and supplies are required for sample analysis:
6.1 Weighing Dishes. Aluminum foil, 58 mm (2.3 in.) in diameter by 18 mm (0.7 in.) high, with a flat bottom. There must be at least three weighing dishes per sample.
6.2 Disposable Syringe. 5 ml.
6.3 Analytical Balance. To measure to within 0.1 mg.
6.4 Oven. Vacuum oven capable of maintaining a temperature of 120 ±2 °C (248 ±4 °F) and an absolute pressure of 510 ±51 mm Hg (20 ±2 in. Hg) for 4 hours. Alternatively, a forced draft oven capable of maintaining a temperature of 120 ±2 °C (248 ±4 °F) for 24 hours.
6.5 The equipment and supplies specified in ASTM D 1475-60, 80, or 90 (incorporated by reference—see § 60.17).
7.0 Reagents and Standards
7.1 The reagents and standards specified in ASTM D 1475-60, 80, or 90 are required.
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport
8.1 Follow the sample collection, preservation, storage, and transport procedures described in Reference 4 of section 16.0.
9.0 Quality Control [Reserved]
10.0 Calibration and Standardization [Reserved]
11.0 Analytical Procedure
Additional guidance can be found in Reference 5 of section 16.0.
11.1 VOC Weight Fraction. Shake or mix the ink or related coating sample thoroughly to assure that all the solids are completely suspended. Label and weigh to the nearest 0.1 mg a weighing dish and record this weight (Mx1). Using a 5 ml syringe, without a needle, extract an aliquot from the ink or related coating sample. Weigh the syringe and aliquot to the nearest 0.1 mg and record this weight (Mcy1). Transfer 1 to 3 g of the aliquot to the tared weighing dish. Reweigh the syringe and remaining aliquot to the nearest 0.1 mg and record this weight (Mcy2). Heat the weighing dish with the transferred aliquot in a vacuum oven at an absolute pressure of 510 ±51 mm Hg (20 ±2 in. Hg) and a temperature of 120 ±2 °C (248 ±4 °F) for 4 hours. Alternatively, heat the weighing dish with the transferred aliquot in a forced draft oven at a temperature of 120 ±2 °C for 24 hours. After the weighing dish has cooled, reweigh it to the nearest 0.1 mg and record the weight (Mx2). Repeat this procedure two times for each ink or related coating sample, for a total of three samples.
11.2 Ink or Related Coating Density. Determine the density of the ink or related coating (Dc) according to the procedure outlined in ASTM D 1475. Make a total of three determinations for each ink or related coating sample. Report the ink or related coating density as the arithmetic average (Dc) of the three determinations.
11.3 Solvent Density. Determine the density of the solvent (Do) according to the procedure outlined in ASTM D 1475. Make a total of three determinations for each ink or related coating sample. Report the solvent density as the arithmetic average (Do) of the three determinations.
12.0 Calculations and Data Analysis
12.1 VOC Weight Fraction. For each determination, calculate the volatile organic content weight fraction (Wo) using the following equation:
Make a total of three determinations. Report the VOC weight fraction as the arithmetic average (W o) of the three determinations.
12.2 VOC Volume Fraction. Calculate the volume fraction volatile organic content (Vo) using the following equation:
13.0 Method Performance [Reserved]
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 References
1. Standard Test Method for Density of Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and Related Products. ASTM Designation D 1475.
2. Teleconversation. Wright, Chuck, Inmont Corporation with Reich, R., A., Radian Corporation. September 25, 1979, Gravure Ink Analysis.
3. Teleconversation. Oppenheimer, Robert, Gravure Research Institute with Burt, Rick, Radian Corporation, November 5, 1979, Gravure Ink Analysis.
4. Standard Procedure for Collection of Coating and Ink Samples for Analysis by Reference Methods 24 and 24A. EPA-340/1-91-010. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Stationary Source Compliance Division, Washington, D.C. September 1991.
5. Standard Operating Procedure for Analysis of Coating and Ink Samples by Reference Methods 24 and 24A. EPA-340/1-91-011. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Stationary Source Compliance Division, Washington, D.C. September 1991.
6. Handbook of Hazardous Materials: Fire, Safety, Health. Alliance of American Insurers. Schaumberg, IL. 1983.
17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data [Reserved]
Method 25—Determination of Total Gaseous Nonmethane Organic Emissions as Carbon
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Analytes.
| Analyte | CAS No. | Sensitivity |
|---|---|---|
| Total gaseous nonmethane organic compounds (TGNMO) | N/A | Dependent upon analytical equipment. |
1.2 Applicability.
1.2.1 This method is applicable for the determination of volatile organic compounds (VOC) (measured as total gaseous nonmethane organics (TGNMO) and reported as carbon) in stationary source emissions. This method is not applicable for the determination of organic particulate matter.
1.2.2 This method is not the only method that applies to the measurement of VOC. Costs, logistics, and other practicalities of source testing may make other test methods more desirable for measuring VOC contents of certain effluent streams. Proper judgment is required in determining the most applicable VOC test method. For example, depending upon the molecular composition of the organics in the effluent stream, a totally automated semicontinuous nonmethane organics (NMO) analyzer interfaced directly to the source may yield accurate results. This approach has the advantage of providing emission data semicontinuously over an extended time period.
1.2.3 Direct measurement of an effluent with a flame ionization detector (FID) analyzer may be appropriate with prior characterization of the gas stream and knowledge that the detector responds predictably to the organic compounds in the stream. If present, methane (CH4) will, of course, also be measured. The FID can be used under any of the following limited conditions: (1) Where only one compound is known to exist; (2) when the organic compounds consist of only hydrogen and carbon; (3) where the relative percentages of the compounds are known or can be determined, and the FID responses to the compounds are known; (4) where a consistent mixture of the compounds exists before and after emission control and only the relative concentrations are to be assessed; or (5) where the FID can be calibrated against mass standards of the compounds emitted (solvent emissions, for example).
1.2.4 Another example of the use of a direct FID is as a screening method. If there is enough information available to provide a rough estimate of the analyzer accuracy, the FID analyzer can be used to determine the VOC content of an uncharacterized gas stream. With a sufficient buffer to account for possible inaccuracies, the direct FID can be a useful tool to obtain the desired results without costly exact determination.
1.2.5 In situations where a qualitative/quantitative analysis of an effluent stream is desired or required, a gas chromatographic FID system may apply. However, for sources emitting numerous organics, the time and expense of this approach will be formidable.
2.0 Summary of Method
2.1 An emission sample is withdrawn from the stack at a constant rate through a heated filter and a chilled condensate trap by means of an evacuated sample tank. After sampling is completed, the TGNMO are determined by independently analyzing the condensate trap and sample tank fractions and combining the analytical results. The organic content of the condensate trap fraction is determined by oxidizing the NMO to carbon dioxide (CO2) and quantitatively collecting in the effluent in an evacuated vessel; then a portion of the CO2 is reduced to CH4 and measured by an FID. The organic content of the sample tank fraction is measured by injecting a portion of the sample into a gas chromatographic column to separate the NMO from carbon monoxide (CO), CO2, and CH4; the NMO are oxidized to CO2, reduced to CH4, and measured by an FID. In this manner, the variable response of the FID associated with different types of organics is eliminated.
3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
4.0 Interferences
4.1 Carbon Dioxide and Water Vapor. When carbon dioxide (CO2) and water vapor are present together in the stack, they can produce a positive bias in the sample. The magnitude of the bias depends on the concentrations of CO2 and water vapor. As a guideline, multiply the CO2 concentration, expressed as volume percent, times the water vapor concentration. If this product does not exceed 100, the bias can be considered insignificant. For example, the bias is not significant for a source having 10 percent CO2 and 10 percent water vapor, but it might be significant for a source having 10 percent CO2 and 20 percent water vapor.
4.2. Particulate Matter. Collection of organic particulate matter in the condensate trap would produce a positive bias. A filter is included in the sampling equipment to minimize this bias.
5.0 Safety
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to performing this test method.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
6.1 Sample Collection. The sampling system consists of a heated probe, heated filter, condensate trap, flow control system, and sample tank (see Figure 25-1). The TGNMO sampling equipment can be constructed from commercially available components and components fabricated in a machine shop. The following equipment is required:
6.1.1 Heated Probe. 6.4-mm ( 1/4-in.) OD stainless steel tubing with a heating system capable of maintaining a gas temperature at the exit end of at least 129 °C (265 °F). The probe shall be equipped with a temperature sensor at the exit end to monitor the gas temperature. A suitable probe is shown in Figure 25-1. The nozzle is an elbow fitting attached to the front end of the probe while the temperature sensor is inserted in the side arm of a tee fitting attached to the rear of the probe. The probe is wrapped with a suitable length of high temperature heating tape, and then covered with two layers of glass cloth insulation and one layer of aluminum foil or an equivalent wrapping.
6.1.2 Filter Holder. 25-mm ( 15/16-in.) ID Gelman filter holder with 303 stainless steel body and 316 stainless steel support screen with the Viton O-ring replaced by a Teflon O-ring.
6.1.3 Filter Heating System.
6.1.3.1 A metal box consisting of an inner and an outer shell separated by insulating material with a heating element in the inner shell capable of maintaining a gas temperature at the filter of 121 ±3 °C (250 ±5 °F). The heating box shall include temperature sensors to monitor the gas temperature immediately upstream and immediately downstream of the filter.
6.1.3.2 A suitable heating box is shown in Figure 25-2. The outer shell is a metal box that measures 102 mm × 280 mm × 292 mm (4 in. × 11 in. × 11 1/2 in.), while the inner shell is a metal box measuring 76 mm × 229 mm × 241 mm (3 in. × 9 in. × 9 1/2 in.). The inner box is supported by 13-mm ( 1/2-in.) phenolic rods. The void space between the boxes is filled with ceramic fiber insulation which is sealed in place by means of a silicon rubber bead around the upper sides of the box. A removable lid made in a similar manner, with a 25-mm (1-in.) gap between the parts is used to cover the heating chamber. The inner box is heated with a 250-watt cartridge heater, shielded by a stainless steel shroud. The heater is regulated by a thermostatic temperature controller which is set to maintain a gas temperature of 121 °C (250 °F) as measured by the temperature sensor upstream of the filter.
6.1.4 Condensate Trap. 9.5-mm ( 3/8-in.) OD 316 stainless steel tubing bent into a U-shape. Exact dimensions are shown in Figure 25-3. The tubing shall be packed with coarse quartz wool, to a density of approximately 0.11 g/cm 3 before bending. While the condensate trap is packed with dry ice in the Dewar, an ice bridge may form between the arms of the condensate trap making it difficult to remove the condensate trap. This problem can be prevented by attaching a steel plate between the arms of the condensate trap in the same plane as the arms to completely fill the intervening space.
6.1.5 Valve. Stainless steel control valve for starting and stopping sample flow.
6.1.6 Metering Valve. Stainless steel valve for regulating the sample flow rate through the sample train.
6.1.7 Rate Meter. Rotameter, or equivalent, capable of measuring sample flow in the range of 60 to 100 cm 3/min (0.13 to 0.21 ft 3/hr).
6.1.8 Sample Tank. Stainless steel or aluminum tank with a minimum volume of 4 liters (0.14 ft 3).
6.1.9 Mercury Manometer. U-tube manometer or absolute pressure gauge capable of measuring pressure to within 1 mm Hg in the range of 0 to 900 mm.
6.1.10 Vacuum Pump. Capable of evacuating to an absolute pressure of 10 mm Hg.
6.2 Condensate Recovery. The system for the recovery of the organics captured in the condensate trap consists of a heat source, an oxidation catalyst, a nondispersive infrared (NDIR) analyzer, and an intermediate collection vessel (ICV). Figure 25-4 is a schematic of a typical system. The system shall be capable of proper oxidation and recovery, as specified in section 10.1.1. The following major components are required:
6.2.1 Heat Source. Sufficient to heat the condensate trap (including probe) to a temperature of 200 °C (390 °F). A system using both a heat gun and an electric tube furnace is recommended.
6.2.2 Heat Tape. Sufficient to heat the connecting tubing between the water trap and the oxidation catalyst to 100 °C (212 °F).
6.2.3 Oxidation Catalyst. A suitable length of 9.5 mm ( 3/8-in.) OD Inconel 600 tubing packed with 15 cm (6 in.) of 3.2 mm ( 3/8-in.) diameter 19 percent chromia on alumina pellets. The catalyst material is packed in the center of the catalyst tube with quartz wool packed on either end to hold it in place.
6.2.4 Water Trap. Leak-proof, capable of removing moisture from the gas stream.
6.2.5 Syringe Port. A 6.4-mm ( 1/4-in.) OD stainless steel tee fitting with a rubber septum placed in the side arm.
6.2.6 NDIR Detector. Capable of indicating CO2 concentration in the range of zero to 5 percent, to monitor the progress of combustion of the organic compounds from the condensate trap.
6.2.7 Flow-Control Valve. Stainless steel, to maintain the trap conditioning system near atmospheric pressure.
6.2.8 Intermediate Collection Vessel. Stainless steel or aluminum, equipped with a female quick connect. Tanks with nominal volumes of at least 6 liters (0.2 ft 3) are recommended.
6.2.9 Mercury Manometer. Same as described in section 6.1.9.
6.2.10 Syringe. 10-ml gas-tight glass syringe equipped with an appropriate needle.
6.2.11 Syringes. 10-µl and 50-µl liquid injection syringes.
6.2.12 Liquid Sample Injection Unit. 316 Stainless steel U-tube fitted with an injection septum (see Figure 25-7).
6.3 Analysis.
6.3.1 NMO Analyzer. The NMO analyzer is a gas chromatograph (GC) with backflush capability for NMO analysis and is equipped with an oxidation catalyst, reduction catalyst, and FID. Figures 25-5 and 25-6 are schematics of a typical NMO analyzer. This semicontinuous GC/FID analyzer shall be capable of: (1) Separating CO, CO2, and CH4 from NMO, (2) reducing the CO2 to CH4 and quantifying as CH4, and (3) oxidizing the NMO to CO2, reducing the CO2 to CH4 and quantifying as CH4, according to section 10.1.2. The analyzer consists of the following major components:
6.3.1.1 Oxidation Catalyst. A suitable length of 9.5-mm ( 3/8-in.) OD Inconel 600 tubing packed with 5.1 cm (2 in.) of 19 percent chromia on 3.2-mm ( 1/8-in.) alumina pellets. The catalyst material is packed in the center of the tube supported on either side by quartz wool. The catalyst tube must be mounted vertically in a 650 °C (1200 °F) furnace. Longer catalysts mounted horizontally may be used, provided they can meet the specifications of section 10.1.2.1.
6.3.1.2 Reduction Catalyst. A 7.6-cm (3-in.) length of 6.4-mm ( 1/4-in.) OD Inconel tubing fully packed with 100-mesh pure nickel powder. The catalyst tube must be mounted vertically in a 400 °C (750 °F) furnace.
6.3.1.3 Separation Column(s). A 30-cm (1-ft) length of 3.2-mm ( 1/8-in.) OD stainless steel tubing packed with 60/80 mesh Unibeads 1S followed by a 61-cm (2-ft) length of 3.2-mm ( 1/8-in.) OD stainless steel tubing packed with 60/80 mesh Carbosieve G. The Carbosieve and Unibeads columns must be baked separately at 200 °C (390 °F) with carrier gas flowing through them for 24 hours before initial use.
6.3.1.4 Sample Injection System. A single 10-port GC sample injection valve or a group of valves with sufficient ports fitted with a sample loop properly sized to interface with the NMO analyzer (1-cc loop recommended).
6.3.1.5 FID. An FID meeting the following specifications is required:
6.3.1.5.1 Linearity. A linear response (±5 percent) over the operating range as demonstrated by the procedures established in section 10.1.2.3.
6.3.1.5.2 Range. A full scale range of 10 to 50,000 ppm CH4. Signal attenuators shall be available to produce a minimum signal response of 10 percent of full scale.
6.3.1.6 Data Recording System. Analog strip chart recorder or digital integration system compatible with the FID for permanently recording the analytical results.
6.3.2 Barometer. Mercury, aneroid, or other barometer capable of measuring atmospheric pressure to within 1 mm Hg.
6.3.3 Temperature Sensor. Capable of measuring the laboratory temperature within 1 °C (2 °F).
6.3.4 Vacuum Pump. Capable of evacuating to an absolute pressure of 10 mm Hg.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
7.1 Sample Collection. The following reagents are required for sample collection:
7.1.1 Dry Ice. Solid CO2, crushed.
7.1.2 Coarse Quartz Wool. 8 to 15 um.
7.1.3 Filters. Glass fiber filters, without organic binder, exhibiting at least 99.95 percent efficiency (<0.05 percent penetration) on 0.3 micron dioctyl phthalate smoke particles. The filter efficiency test shall be conducted in accordance with ASTM Method D2986-71, 78, or 95a (incorporated by reference—see § 60.17). Test data from the supplier's quality control program are sufficient for this purpose.
7.2 NMO Analysis. The following gases are required for NMO analysis:
7.2.1 Carrier Gases. Helium (He) and oxygen (O2) containing less than 1 ppm CO2 and less than 0.1 ppm hydrocarbon.
7.2.2 Fuel Gas. Hydrogen (H2), at least 99.999 percent pure.
7.2.3 Combustion Gas. Either air (less than 0.1 ppm total hydrocarbon content) or O2 (purity 99.99 percent or greater), as required by the detector.
7.3 Condensate Analysis. The following are required for condensate analysis:
7.3.1 Gases. Containing less than 1 ppm carbon.
7.3.1.1 Air.
7.3.1.2 Oxygen.
7.3.2 Liquids. To conform to the specifications established by the Committee on Analytical Reagents of the American Chemical Society.
7.3.2.1 Hexane.
7.3.2.2 Decane.
7.4 Calibration. For all calibration gases, the manufacturer must recommend a maximum shelf life for each cylinder (i.e., the length of time the gas concentration is not expected to change more than ±5 percent from its certified value). The date of gas cylinder preparation, certified organic concentration, and recommended maximum shelf life must be affixed to each cylinder before shipment from the gas manufacturer to the buyer. The following calibration gases are required:
7.4.1 Oxidation Catalyst Efficiency Check Calibration Gas. Gas mixture standard with nominal concentration of 1 percent methane in air.
7.4.2 FID Linearity and NMO Calibration Gases. Three gas mixture standards with nominal propane concentrations of 20 ppm, 200 ppm, and 3000 ppm, in air.
7.4.3 CO2 Calibration Gases. Three gas mixture standards with nominal CO2 concentrations of 50 ppm, 500 ppm, and 1 percent, in air.
7.4.4 NMO Analyzer System Check Calibration Gases. Four calibration gases are needed as follows:
7.4.4.1 Propane Mixture. Gas mixture standard containing (nominal) 50 ppm CO, 50 ppm CH4, 1 percent CO2, and 20 ppm C3H8, prepared in air.
7.4.4.2 Hexane. Gas mixture standard containing (nominal) 50 ppm hexane in air.
7.4.4.3 Toluene. Gas mixture standard containing (nominal) 20 ppm toluene in air.
7.4.4.4 Methanol. Gas mixture standard containing (nominal) 100 ppm methanol in air.
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Transport, and Storage
8.1 Sampling Equipment Preparation.
8.1.1 Condensate Trap Cleaning. Before its initial use and after each use, a condensate trap should be thoroughly cleaned and checked to ensure that it is not contaminated. Both cleaning and checking can be accomplished by installing the trap in the condensate recovery system and treating it as if it were a sample. The trap should be heated as described in section 11.1.3. A trap may be considered clean when the CO2 concentration in its effluent gas drops below 10 ppm. This check is optional for traps that most recently have been used to collect samples which were then recovered according to the procedure in section 11.1.3.
8.1.2 Sample Tank Evacuation and Leak-Check. Evacuate the sample tank to 10 mm Hg absolute pressure or less. Then close the sample tank valve, and allow the tank to sit for 60 minutes. The tank is acceptable if a change in tank vacuum of less than 1 mm Hg is noted. The evacuation and leak-check may be conducted either in the laboratory or the field.
8.1.3 Sampling Train Assembly. Just before assembly, measure the tank vacuum using a mercury manometer. Record this vacuum, the ambient temperature, and the barometric pressure at this time. Close the sample tank valve and assemble the sampling system as shown in Figure 25-1. Immerse the condensate trap body in dry ice at least 30 minutes before commencing sampling to improve collection efficiency. The point where the inlet tube joins the trap body should be 2.5 to 5 cm (1 to 2 in.) above the top of the dry ice.
8.1.4 Pretest Leak-Check. A pretest leak-check is required. Calculate or measure the approximate volume of the sampling train from the probe tip to the sample tank valve. After assembling the sampling train, plug the probe tip, and make certain that the sample tank valve is closed. Turn on the vacuum pump, and evacuate the sampling system from the probe tip to the sample tank valve to an absolute pressure of 10 mm Hg or less. Close the purge valve, turn off the pump, wait a minimum period of 10 minutes, and recheck the indicated vacuum. Calculate the maximum allowable pressure change based on a leak rate of 1 percent of the sampling rate using Equation 25-1, section 12.2. If the measured pressure change exceeds the allowable, correct the problem and repeat the leak-check before beginning sampling.
8.2 Sample Collection.
8.2.1 Unplug the probe tip, and place the probe into the stack such that the probe is perpendicular to the duct or stack axis; locate the probe tip at a single preselected point of average velocity facing away from the direction of gas flow. For stacks having a negative static pressure, seal the sample port sufficiently to prevent air in-leakage around the probe. Set the probe temperature controller to 129 °C (265 °F) and the filter temperature controller to 121 °C (250 °F). Allow the probe and filter to heat for about 30 minutes before purging the sample train.
8.2.2 Close the sample valve, open the purge valve, and start the vacuum pump. Set the flow rate between 60 and 100 cm 3/min (0.13 and 0.21 ft 3/hr), and purge the train with stack gas for at least 10 minutes.
8.2.3 When the temperatures at the exit ends of the probe and filter are within the corresponding specified ranges, check the dry ice level around the condensate trap, and add dry ice if necessary. Record the clock time. To begin sampling, close the purge valve and stop the pump. Open the sample valve and the sample tank valve. Using the flow control valve, set the flow through the sample train to the proper rate. Adjust the flow rate as necessary to maintain a constant rate (±10 percent) throughout the duration of the sampling period. Record the sample tank vacuum and flowmeter setting at 5-minute intervals. (See Figure 25-8.) Select a total sample time greater than or equal to the minimum sampling time specified in the applicable subpart of the regulations; end the sampling when this time period is reached or when a constant flow rate can no longer be maintained because of reduced sample tank vacuum.
8.3 Sample Recovery. After sampling is completed, close the flow control valve, and record the final tank vacuum; then record the tank temperature and barometric pressure. Close the sample tank valve, and disconnect the sample tank from the sample system. Disconnect the condensate trap at the inlet to the rate meter, and tightly seal both ends of the condensate trap. Do not include the probe from the stack to the filter as part of the condensate sample.
8.4 Sample Storage and Transport. Keep the trap packed in dry ice until the samples are returned to the laboratory for analysis. Ensure that run numbers are identified on the condensate trap and the sample tank(s).
9.0 Quality Control
| Section | Quality control measure | Effect |
|---|---|---|
| 10.1.1 | Initial performance check of condensate recovery apparatus | Ensure acceptable condensate recovery efficiency. |
| 10.1.2, 10.2 | NMO analyzer initial and daily performance checks | Ensure precision of analytical results. |
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
10.1 Initial Performance Checks.
10.1.1 Condensate Recovery Apparatus. Perform these tests before the system is first placed in operation, after any shutdown of 6 months or more, and after any major modification of the system, or at the frequency recommended by the manufacturer.
10.1.1.1 Carrier Gas and Auxiliary O2 Blank Check. Analyze each new tank of carrier gas or auxiliary O2 with the NMO analyzer to check for contamination. Treat the gas cylinders as noncondensible gas samples, and analyze according to the procedure in section 11.2.3. Add together any measured CH4, CO, CO2, or NMO. The total concentration must be less than 5 ppm.
10.1.1.2 Oxidation Catalyst Efficiency Check.
10.1.1.2.1 With a clean condensate trap installed in the recovery system or a 1/8″ stainless steel connector tube, replace the carrier gas cylinder with the high level methane standard gas cylinder (Section 7.4.1). Set the four-port valve to the recovery position, and attach an ICV to the recovery system. With the sample recovery valve in vent position and the flow-control and ICV valves fully open, evacuate the manometer or gauge, the connecting tubing, and the ICV to 10 mm Hg absolute pressure. Close the flow-control and vacuum pump valves.
10.1.1.2.2 After the NDIR response has stabilized, switch the sample recovery valve from vent to collect. When the manometer or pressure gauge begins to register a slight positive pressure, open the flow-control valve. Keep the flow adjusted such that the pressure in the system is maintained within 10 percent of atmospheric pressure. Continue collecting the sample in a normal manner until the ICV is filled to a nominal gauge pressure of 300 mm Hg. Close the ICV valve, and remove the ICV from the system. Place the sample recovery valve in the vent position, and return the recovery system to its normal carrier gas and normal operating conditions. Analyze the ICV for CO2 using the NMO analyzer; the catalyst efficiency is acceptable if the CO2 concentration is within 2 percent of the methane standard concentration.
10.1.1.3 System Performance Check. Construct a liquid sample injection unit similar in design to the unit shown in Figure 25-7. Insert this unit into the condensate recovery and conditioning system in place of a condensate trap, and set the carrier gas and auxiliary O2 flow rates to normal operating levels. Attach an evacuated ICV to the system, and switch from system vent to collect. With the carrier gas routed through the injection unit and the oxidation catalyst, inject a liquid sample (see sections 10.1.1.3.1 to 10.1.1.3.4) into the injection port. Operate the trap recovery system as described in section 11.1.3. Measure the final ICV pressure, and then analyze the vessel to determine the CO2 concentration. For each injection, calculate the percent recovery according to section 12.7. Calculate the relative standard deviation for each set of triplicate injections according to section 12.8. The performance test is acceptable if the average percent recovery is 100 ±5 percent and the relative standard deviation is less than 2 percent for each set of triplicate injections.
10.1.1.3.1 50 µl hexane.
10.1.1.3.2 10 µl hexane.
10.1.1.3.3 50 µl decane.
10.1.1.3.4 10 µl decane.
10.1.2 NMO Analyzer. Perform these tests before the system is first placed in operation, after any shutdown longer than 6 months, and after any major modification of the system.
10.1.2.1 Oxidation Catalyst Efficiency Check. Turn off or bypass the NMO analyzer reduction catalyst. Make triplicate injections of the high level methane standard (Section 7.4.1). The oxidation catalyst operation is acceptable if the FID response is less than 1 percent of the injected methane concentration.
10.1.2.2 Reduction Catalyst Efficiency Check. With the oxidation catalyst unheated or bypassed and the heated reduction catalyst bypassed, make triplicate injections of the high level methane standard (Section 7.4.1). Repeat this procedure with both catalysts operative. The reduction catalyst operation is acceptable if the responses under both conditions agree within 5 percent of their average.
10.1.2.3 NMO Analyzer Linearity Check Calibration. While operating both the oxidation and reduction catalysts, conduct a linearity check of the analyzer using the propane standards specified in section 7.4.2. Make triplicate injections of each calibration gas. For each gas (i.e., each set of triplicate injections), calculate the average response factor (area/ppm C) for each gas, as well as and the relative standard deviation (according to section 12.8). Then calculate the overall mean of the response factor values. The instrument linearity is acceptable if the average response factor of each calibration gas is within 2.5 percent of the overall mean value and if the relative standard deviation gas is less than 2 percent of the overall mean value. Record the overall mean of the propane response factor values as the NMO calibration response factor (RFNMO). Repeat the linearity check using the CO2 standards specified in section 7.4.3. Make triplicate injections of each gas, and then calculate the average response factor (area/ppm C) for each gas, as well as the overall mean of the response factor values. Record the overall mean of the response factor values as the CO2 calibration response factor (RFCO2). The RFCO2 must be within 10 percent of the RFNMO.
10.1.2.4 System Performance Check. Check the column separation and overall performance of the analyzer by making triplicate injections of the calibration gases listed in section 7.4.4. The analyzer performance is acceptable if the measured NMO value for each gas (average of triplicate injections) is within 5 percent of the expected value.
10.2 NMO Analyzer Daily Calibration. The following calibration procedures shall be performed before and immediately after the analysis of each set of samples, or on a daily basis, whichever is more stringent:
10.2.1 CO2 Response Factor. Inject triplicate samples of the high level CO2 calibration gas (Section 7.4.3), and calculate the average response factor. The system operation is adequate if the calculated response factor is within 5 percent of the RFCO2 calculated during the initial performance test (Section 10.1.2.3). Use the daily response factor (DRFCO2) for analyzer calibration and the calculation of measured CO2 concentrations in the ICV samples.
10.2.2 NMO Response Factors. Inject triplicate samples of the mixed propane calibration cylinder gas (Section 7.4.4.1), and calculate the average NMO response factor. The system operation is adequate if the calculated response factor is within 10 percent of the RFNMO calculated during the initial performance test (Section 10.1.2.4). Use the daily response factor (DRFNMO) for analyzer calibration and calculation of NMO concentrations in the sample tanks.
10.3 Sample Tank and ICV Volume. The volume of the gas sampling tanks used must be determined. Determine the tank and ICV volumes by weighing them empty and then filled with deionized distilled water; weigh to the nearest 5 g, and record the results. Alternatively, measure the volume of water used to fill them to the nearest 5 ml.
11.0 Analytical Procedure
11.1 Condensate Recovery. See Figure 25-9. Set the carrier gas flow rate, and heat the catalyst to its operating temperature to condition the apparatus.
11.1.1 Daily Performance Checks. Each day before analyzing any samples, perform the following tests:
11.1.1.1 Leak-Check. With the carrier gas inlets and the sample recovery valve closed, install a clean condensate trap in the system, and evacuate the system to 10 mm Hg absolute pressure or less. Monitor the system pressure for 10 minutes. The system is acceptable if the pressure change is less than 2 mm Hg.
11.1.1.2 System Background Test. Adjust the carrier gas and auxiliary oxygen flow rate to their normal values of 100 cc/min and 150 cc/min, respectively, with the sample recovery valve in vent position. Using a 10-ml syringe, withdraw a sample from the system effluent through the syringe port. Inject this sample into the NMO analyzer, and measure the CO2 content. The system background is acceptable if the CO2 concentration is less than 10 ppm.
11.1.1.3 Oxidation Catalyst Efficiency Check. Conduct a catalyst efficiency test as specified in section 10.1.1.2. If the criterion of this test cannot be met, make the necessary repairs to the system before proceeding.
11.1.2 Condensate Trap CO2 Purge and Sample Tank Pressurization.
11.1.2.1 After sampling is completed, the condensate trap will contain condensed water and organics and a small volume of sampled gas. This gas from the stack may contain a significant amount of CO2 which must be removed from the condensate trap before the sample is recovered. This is accomplished by purging the condensate trap with zero air and collecting the purged gas in the original sample tank.
11.1.2.2 Begin with the sample tank and condensate trap from the test run to be analyzed. Set the four-port valve of the condensate recovery system in the CO2 purge position as shown in Figure 25-9. With the sample tank valve closed, attach the sample tank to the sample recovery system. With the sample recovery valve in the vent position and the flow control valve fully open, evacuate the manometer or pressure gauge to the vacuum of the sample tank. Next, close the vacuum pump valve, open the sample tank valve, and record the tank pressure.
11.1.2.3 Attach the dry ice-cooled condensate trap to the recovery system, and initiate the purge by switching the sample recovery valve from vent to collect position. Adjust the flow control valve to maintain atmospheric pressure in the recovery system. Continue the purge until the CO2 concentration of the trap effluent is less than 5 ppm. CO2 concentration in the trap effluent should be measured by extracting syringe samples from the recovery system and analyzing the samples with the NMO analyzer. This procedure should be used only after the NDIR response has reached a minimum level. Using a 10-ml syringe, extract a sample from the syringe port prior to the NDIR, and inject this sample into the NMO analyzer.
11.1.2.4 After the completion of the CO2 purge, use the carrier gas bypass valve to pressurize the sample tank to approximately 1,060 mm Hg absolute pressure with zero air.
11.1.3 Recovery of the Condensate Trap Sample (See Figure 25-10).
11.1.3.1 Attach the ICV to the sample recovery system. With the sample recovery valve in a closed position, between vent and collect, and the flow control and ICV valves fully open, evacuate the manometer or gauge, the connecting tubing, and the ICV to 10 mm Hg absolute pressure. Close the flow-control and vacuum pump valves.
11.1.3.2 Begin auxiliary oxygen flow to the oxidation catalyst at a rate of 150 cc/min, then switch the four-way valve to the trap recovery position and the sample recovery valve to collect position. The system should now be set up to operate as indicated in Figure 25-10. After the manometer or pressure gauge begins to register a slight positive pressure, open the flow control valve. Adjust the flow-control valve to maintain atmospheric pressure in the system within 10 percent.
11.1.3.3 Remove the condensate trap from the dry ice, and allow it to warm to ambient temperature while monitoring the NDIR response. If, after 5 minutes, the CO2 concentration of the catalyst effluent is below 10,000 ppm, discontinue the auxiliary oxygen flow to the oxidation catalyst. Begin heating the trap by placing it in a furnace preheated to 200 °C (390 °F). Once heating has begun, carefully monitor the NDIR response to ensure that the catalyst effluent concentration does not exceed 50,000 ppm. Whenever the CO2 concentration exceeds 50,000 ppm, supply auxiliary oxygen to the catalyst at the rate of 150 cc/min. Begin heating the tubing that connected the heated sample box to the condensate trap only after the CO2 concentration falls below 10,000 ppm. This tubing may be heated in the same oven as the condensate trap or with an auxiliary heat source such as a heat gun. Heating temperature must not exceed 200 °C (390 °F). If a heat gun is used, heat the tubing slowly along its entire length from the upstream end to the downstream end, and repeat the pattern for a total of three times. Continue the recovery until the CO2 concentration drops to less than 10 ppm as determined by syringe injection as described under the condensate trap CO2 purge procedure (Section 11.1.2).
11.1.3.4 After the sample recovery is completed, use the carrier gas bypass valve to pressurize the ICV to approximately 1060 mm Hg absolute pressure with zero air.
11.2 Analysis. Once the initial performance test of the NMO analyzer has been successfully completed (see section 10.1.2) and the daily CO2 and NMO response factors have been determined (see section 10.2), proceed with sample analysis as follows:
11.2.1 Operating Conditions. The carrier gas flow rate is 29.5 cc/min He and 2.2 cc/min O2. The column oven is heated to 85 °C (185 °F). The order of elution for the sample from the column is CO, CH4, CO2, and NMO.
11.2.2 Analysis of Recovered Condensate Sample. Purge the sample loop with sample, and then inject the sample. Under the specified operating conditions, the CO2 in the sample will elute in approximately 100 seconds. As soon as the detector response returns to baseline following the CO2 peak, switch the carrier gas flow to backflush, and raise the column oven temperature to 195 °C (380 °F) as rapidly as possible. A rate of 30 °C/min (90 °F) has been shown to be adequate. Record the value obtained for the condensible organic material (Ccm) measured as CO2 and any measured NMO. Return the column oven temperature to 85 °C (185 °F) in preparation for the next analysis. Analyze each sample in triplicate, and report the average Ccm.
11.2.3 Analysis of Sample Tank. Perform the analysis as described in section 11.2.2, but record only the value measured for NMO (Ctm).
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
Carry out the calculations, retaining at least one extra significant figure beyond that of the acquired data. Round off figures after final calculations. All equations are written using absolute pressure; absolute pressures are determined by adding the measured barometric pressure to the measured gauge or manometer pressure.
12.1 Nomenclature.
C = TGNMO concentration of the effluent, ppm C equivalent.
Cc = Calculated condensible organic (condensate trap) concentration of the effluent, ppm C equivalent.
Ccm = Measured concentration (NMO analyzer) for the condensate trap ICV, ppm CO2.
Ct = Calculated noncondensible organic concentration (sample tank) of the effluent, ppm C equivalent.
Ctm = Measured concentration (NMO analyzer) for the sample tank, ppm NMO.
F = Sampling flow rate, cc/min.
L = Volume of liquid injected, µl.
M = Molecular weight of the liquid injected, g/g-mole.
Mc = TGNMO mass concentration of the effluent, mg C/dsm 3.
N = Carbon number of the liquid compound injected (N = 12 for decane, N = 6 for hexane).
n = Number of data points.
Pf = Final pressure of the intermediate collection vessel, mm Hg absolute.
Pb = Barometric pressure, cm Hg.
Pti = Gas sample tank pressure before sampling, mm Hg absolute.
Pt = Gas sample tank pressure after sampling, but before pressurizing, mm Hg absolute.
Ptf = Final gas sample tank pressure after pressurizing, mm Hg absolute.
q = Total number of analyzer injections of intermediate collection vessel during analysis (where k = injection number, 1 * * * q).
r = Total number of analyzer injections of sample tank during analysis (where j = injection number, 1 * * * r).
r = Density of liquid injected, g/cc.
Tf = Final temperature of intermediate collection vessel, °K.
Tti = Sample tank temperature before sampling, °K.
Tt = Sample tank temperature at completion of sampling, °K.
Ttf = Sample tank temperature after pressurizing, °K.
V = Sample tank volume, m 3.
Vt = Sample train volume, cc.
Vv = Intermediate collection vessel volume, m 3.
Vs = Gas volume sampled, dsm 3.
xi = Individual measurements.
x = Mean value.
ΔP = Allowable pressure change, cm Hg.
Θ = Leak-check period, min.
12.2 Allowable Pressure Change. For the pretest leak-check, calculate the allowable pressure change using Equation 25-1:
12.3 Sample Volume. For each test run, calculate the gas volume sampled using Equation 25-2:
12.4 Noncondensible Organics. For each sample tank, determine the concentration of nonmethane organics (ppm C) using Equation 25-3:
12.5 Condensible Organics. For each condensate trap determine the concentration of organics (ppm C) using Equation 25-4:
12.6 TGNMO Mass Concentration. Determine the TGNMO mass concentration as carbon for each test run, using Equation 25-5:
12.7 Percent Recovery. Calculate the percent recovery for the liquid injections to the condensate recovery and conditioning system using Equation 25-6:
where K = 1.604 (°K)(g-mole)(%)/(mm Hg)(ml)(m 3)(ppm).
12.8 Relative Standard Deviation. Use Equation 25-7 to calculate the relative standard deviation (RSD) of percent recovery and analyzer linearity.
12.9 Record and Report Initial Method Checks as follows:
12.9.1 Calibration and Linearity Check Gas Certifications (sections 7.2 and 7.4 of this method).
12.9.2 Condensate Trap Blank Check (section 8.1.1 of this method).
12.9.3 Pretest Leak-Check (section 8.1.4 of this method).
12.9.4 Condensate Recovery Apparatus (section 10.1.1 of this method).
12.9.5 Carrier Gas and Auxiliary O2 Blank Check (section 10.1.1.1 of this method).
12.9.6 Oxidation Catalyst Efficiency Check (section 10.1.1.2 of this method).
12.9.7 System Performance Check (section 10.1.1.3 of this method).
12.9.8 Oxidation Catalyst Efficiency Check (section 10.1.2.1 of this method).
12.9.9 Reduction Catalyst Efficiency Check (section 10.1.2.2 of this method).
12.9.10 NMO Analyzer Linearity Check Calibration (section 10.1.2.3 of this method).
12.9.11 NMO Analyzer Daily Calibration (section 10.2 of this method).
12.9.12 Condensate Recovery (section 11.1 of this method).
12.9.13 Daily Performance Checks (section 11.1.1 of this method).
12.9.14 Leak-Check (section 11.1.1.1 of this method).
12.9.15 System Background Test (section 11.1.1.2 of this method).
12.9.16 Oxidation Catalyst Efficiency Check (section 11.1.1.3 of this method).
13.0 Method Performance
13.1 Range. The minimum detectable limit of the method has been determined to be 50 parts per million by volume (ppm). No upper limit has been established.
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 References
1. Salo, A.E., S. Witz, and R.D. MacPhee. Determination of Solvent Vapor Concentrations by Total Combustion Analysis: A Comparison of Infrared with Flame Ionization Detectors. Paper No. 75-33.2. (Presented at the 68th Annual Meeting of the Air Pollution Control Association. Boston, MA. June 15-20, 1975.) 14 p.
2. Salo, A.E., W.L. Oaks, and R.D. MacPhee. Measuring the Organic Carbon Content of Source Emissions for Air Pollution Control. Paper No. 74-190. (Presented at the 67th Annual Meeting of the Air Pollution Control Association. Denver, CO. June 9-13, 1974.) 25 p.
17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
Method 25A—Determination of Total Gaseous Organic Concentration Using a Flame Ionization Analyzer
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Analytes.
| Analyte | CAS No. | Sensitivity |
|---|---|---|
| Total Organic Compounds | N/A | <2% of span. |
1.2 Applicability. This method is applicable for the determination of total gaseous organic concentration of vapors consisting primarily of alkanes, alkenes, and/or arenes (aromatic hydrocarbons). The concentration is expressed in terms of propane (or other appropriate organic calibration gas) or in terms of carbon.
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant sampling methods.
2.0 Summary of Method
2.1 A gas sample is extracted from the source through a heated sample line and glass fiber filter to a flame ionization analyzer (FIA). Results are reported as volume concentration equivalents of the calibration gas or as carbon equivalents.
3.0 Definitions
3.1 Calibration drift means the difference in the measurement system response to a mid-level calibration gas before and after a stated period of operation during which no unscheduled maintenance, repair, or adjustment took place.
3.2 Calibration error means the difference between the gas concentration indicated by the measurement system and the know concentration of the calibration gas.
3.3 Calibration gas means a known concentration of a gas in an appropriate diluent gas.
3.4 Measurement system means the total equipment required for the determination of the gas concentration. The system consists of the following major subsystems:
3.4.1 Sample interface means that portion of a system used for one or more of the following: sample acquisition, sample transportation, sample conditioning, or protection of the analyzer(s) from the effects of the stack effluent.
3.4.2 Organic analyzer means that portion of the measurement system that senses the gas to be measured and generates an output proportional to its concentration.
3.5 Response time means the time interval from a step change in pollutant concentration at the inlet to the emission measurement system to the time at which 95 percent of the corresponding final value is reached as displayed on the recorder.
3.6 Span Value means the upper limit of a gas concentration measurement range that is specified for affected source categories in the applicable part of the regulations. The span value is established in the applicable regulation and is usually 1.5 to 2.5 times the applicable emission limit. If no span value is provided, use a span value equivalent to 1.5 to 2.5 times the expected concentration. For convenience, the span value should correspond to 100 percent of the recorder scale.
3.7 Zero drift means the difference in the measurement system response to a zero level calibration gas before or after a stated period of operation during which no unscheduled maintenance, repair, or adjustment took place.
4.0 Interferences [Reserved]
5.0 Safety
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to performing this test method. The analyzer users manual should be consulted for specific precautions to be taken with regard to the analytical procedure.
5.2 Explosive Atmosphere. This method is often applied in highly explosive areas. Caution and care should be exercised in choice of equipment and installation.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
6.1 Measurement System. Any measurement system for total organic concentration that meets the specifications of this method. A schematic of an acceptable measurement system is shown in Figure 25A-1. All sampling components leading to the analyzer shall be heated ≥110 °C (220 °F) throughout the sampling period, unless safety reasons are cited (Section 5.2) The essential components of the measurement system are described below:
6.1.1 Organic Concentration Analyzer. A flame ionization analyzer (FIA) capable of meeting or exceeding the specifications of this method. The flame ionization detector block shall be heated >120 °C (250 °F).
6.1.2 Sample Probe. Stainless steel, or equivalent, three-hole rake type. Sample holes shall be 4 mm (0.16-in.) in diameter or smaller and located at 16.7, 50, and 83.3 percent of the equivalent stack diameter. Alternatively, a single opening probe may be used so that a gas sample is collected from the centrally located 10 percent area of the stack cross-section.
6.1.3 Heated Sample Line. Stainless steel or Teflon” tubing to transport the sample gas to the analyzer. The sample line should be heated (≥110 °C) to prevent any condensation.
6.1.4 Calibration Valve Assembly. A three-way valve assembly to direct the zero and calibration gases to the analyzers is recommended. Other methods, such as quick-connect lines, to route calibration gas to the analyzers are applicable.
6.1.5 Particulate Filter. An in-stack or an out-of-stack glass fiber filter is recommended if exhaust gas particulate loading is significant. An out-of-stack filter should be heated to prevent any condensation.
6.1.6 Recorder. A strip-chart recorder, analog computer, or digital recorder for recording measurement data. The minimum data recording requirement is one measurement value per minute.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
7.1 Calibration Gases. The calibration gases for the gas analyzer shall be propane in air or propane in nitrogen. Alternatively, organic compounds other than propane can be used; the appropriate corrections for response factor must be made. Calibration gases shall be prepared in accordance with the procedure listed in Citation 2 of section 16. Additionally, the manufacturer of the cylinder should provide a recommended shelf life for each calibration gas cylinder over which the concentration does not change more than ±2 percent from the certified value. For calibration gas values not generally available (i.e., organics between 1 and 10 percent by volume), alternative methods for preparing calibration gas mixtures, such as dilution systems (Test Method 205, 40 CFR Part 51, Appendix M), may be used with prior approval of the Administrator.
7.1.1 Fuel. A 40 percent H2/60 percent N2 gas mixture is recommended to avoid an oxygen synergism effect that reportedly occurs when oxygen concentration varies significantly from a mean value.
7.1.2 Zero Gas. High purity air with less than 0.1 part per million by volume (ppmv) of organic material (propane or carbon equivalent) or less than 0.1 percent of the span value, whichever is greater.
7.1.3 Low-level Calibration Gas. An organic calibration gas with a concentration equivalent to 25 to 35 percent of the applicable span value.
7.1.4 Mid-level Calibration Gas. An organic calibration gas with a concentration equivalent to 45 to 55 percent of the applicable span value.
7.1.5 High-level Calibration Gas. An organic calibration gas with a concentration equivalent to 80 to 90 percent of the applicable span value.
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport
8.1 Selection of Sampling Site. The location of the sampling site is generally specified by the applicable regulation or purpose of the test (i.e., exhaust stack, inlet line, etc.). The sample port shall be located to meet the testing requirements of Method 1.
8.2 Location of Sample Probe. Install the sample probe so that the probe is centrally located in the stack, pipe, or duct and is sealed tightly at the stack port connection.
8.3 Measurement System Preparation. Prior to the emission test, assemble the measurement system by following the manufacturer's written instructions for preparing sample interface and the organic analyzer. Make the system operable (Section 10.1).
8.4 Calibration Error Test. Immediately prior to the test series (within 2 hours of the start of the test), introduce zero gas and high-level calibration gas at the calibration valve assembly. Adjust the analyzer output to the appropriate levels, if necessary. Calculate the predicted response for the low-level and mid-level gases based on a linear response line between the zero and high-level response. Then introduce low-level and mid-level calibration gases successively to the measurement system. Record the analyzer responses for low-level and mid-level calibration gases and determine the differences between the measurement system responses and the predicted responses. These differences must be less than 5 percent of the respective calibration gas value. If not, the measurement system is not acceptable and must be replaced or repaired prior to testing. No adjustments to the measurement system shall be conducted after the calibration and before the drift check (Section 8.6.2). If adjustments are necessary before the completion of the test series, perform the drift checks prior to the required adjustments and repeat the calibration following the adjustments. If multiple electronic ranges are to be used, each additional range must be checked with a mid-level calibration gas to verify the multiplication factor.
8.5 Response Time Test. Introduce zero gas into the measurement system at the calibration valve assembly. When the system output has stabilized, switch quickly to the high-level calibration gas. Record the time from the concentration change to the measurement system response equivalent to 95 percent of the step change. Repeat the test three times and average the results.
8.6 Emission Measurement Test Procedure.
8.6.1 Organic Measurement. Begin sampling at the start of the test period, recording time and any required process information as appropriate. In particulate, note on the recording chart, periods of process interruption or cyclic operation.
8.6.2 Drift Determination. Immediately following the completion of the test period and hourly during the test period, reintroduce the zero and mid-level calibration gases, one at a time, to the measurement system at the calibration valve assembly. (Make no adjustments to the measurement system until both the zero and calibration drift checks are made.) Record the analyzer response. If the drift values exceed the specified limits, invalidate the test results preceding the check and repeat the test following corrections to the measurement system. Alternatively, recalibrate the test measurement system as in section 8.4 and report the results using both sets of calibration data (i.e., data determined prior to the test period and data determined following the test period).
9.0 Quality Control
| Method section | Quality control measure | Effect |
|---|---|---|
| 8.4 | Zero and calibration drift tests | Ensures that bias introduced by drift in the measurement system output during the run is no greater than 3 percent of span. |
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
10.1 FIA equipment can be calibrated for almost any range of total organic concentrations. For high concentrations of organics (>1.0 percent by volume as propane), modifications to most commonly available analyzers are necessary. One accepted method of equipment modification is to decrease the size of the sample to the analyzer through the use of a smaller diameter sample capillary. Direct and continuous measurement of organic concentration is a necessary consideration when determining any modification design.
11.0 Analytical Procedure
The sample collection and analysis are concurrent for this method (see section 8.0).
12.0 Calculations and Data Analysis
12.1 Determine the average organic concentration in terms of ppmv as propane or other calibration gas. The average shall be determined by integration of the output recording over the period specified in the applicable regulation. If results are required in terms of ppmv as carbon, adjust measured concentrations using Equation 25A-1.
Where:
Cc = Organic concentration as carbon, ppmv.
Cmeas = Organic concentration as measured, ppmv.
K = Carbon equivalent correction factor.
= 2 for ethane.
= 3 for propane.
= 4 for butane.
= Appropriate response factor for other organic calibration gases.
13.0 Method Performance
13.1 Measurement System Performance Specifications.
13.1.1 Zero Drift. Less than ±3 percent of the span value.
13.1.2 Calibration Drift. Less than ±3 percent of span value.
13.1.3 Calibration Error. Less than ±5 percent of the calibration gas value.
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 References
1. Measurement of Volatile Organic Compounds—Guideline Series. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Research Triangle Park, NC. Publication No. EPA-450/2-78-041. June 1978. p. 46-54.
2. EPA Traceability Protocol for Assay and Certification of Gaseous Calibration Standards. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Quality Assurance and Technical Support Division. Research Triangle Park, N.C. September 1993.
3. Gasoline Vapor Emission Laboratory Evaluation—Part 2. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards. Research Triangle Park, NC. EMB Report No. 75-GAS-6. August 1975.
17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
Method 25B—Determination of Total Gaseous Organic Concentration Using a Nondispersive Infrared Analyzer
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Analytes.
| Analyte | CAS No. | Sensitivity |
|---|---|---|
| Total Organic Compounds | N/A | <2% of span. |
1.2 Applicability. This method is applicable for the determination of total gaseous organic concentration of vapors consisting primarily of alkanes. Other organic materials may be measured using the general procedure in this method, the appropriate calibration gas, and an analyzer set to the appropriate absorption band.
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant sampling methods.
2.0 Summary of Method
A gas sample is extracted from the source through a heated sample line, if necessary, and glass fiber filter to a nondispersive infrared analyzer (NDIR). Results are reported as volume concentration equivalents of the calibration gas or as carbon equivalents.
3.0 Definitions
Same as Method 25A, section 3.0.
4.0 Interferences [Reserved]
5.0 Safety
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to performing this test method. The analyzer users manual should be consulted for specific precautions to be taken with regard to the analytical procedure.
5.2 Explosive Atmosphere. This method is often applied in highly explosive areas. Caution and care should be exercised in choice of equipment and installation.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
Same as Method 25A, section 6.0, with the exception of the following:
6.1 Organic Concentration Analyzer. A nondispersive infrared analyzer designed to measure alkane organics and capable of meeting or exceeding the specifications in this method.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
Same as Method 25A, section 7.1. No fuel gas is required for an NDIR.
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport
Same as Method 25A, section 8.0.
9.0 Quality Control
Same as Method 25A, section 9.0.
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
Same as Method 25A, section 10.0.
11.0 Analytical Procedure
The sample collection and analysis are concurrent for this method (see section 8.0).
12.0 Calculations and Data Analysis
Same as Method 25A, section 12.0.
13.0 Method Performance [Reserved]
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 References
Same as Method 25A, section 16.0.
17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data [Reserved]
Method 25C—Determination of Nonmethane Organic Compounds (NMOC) in Landfill Gases
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Analytes.
| Analyte | CAS No. |
|---|---|
| Nonmethane organic compounds (NMOC) | No CAS number assigned. |
1.2 Applicability. This method is applicable to the sampling and measurement of NMOC as carbon in landfill gases (LFG).
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant sampling methods.
2.0 Summary of Method
2.1 A sample probe that has been perforated at one end is driven or augured to a depth of 0.9 m (3 ft) below the bottom of the landfill cover. A sample of the landfill gas is extracted with an evacuated cylinder. The NMOC content of the gas is determined by injecting a portion of the gas into a gas chromatographic column to separate the NMOC from carbon monoxide (CO), carbon dioxide (CO2), and methane (CH4); the NMOC are oxidized to CO2, reduced to CH4, and measured by a flame ionization detector (FID). In this manner, the variable response of the FID associated with different types of organics is eliminated.
3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
4.0 Interferences [Reserved]
5.0 Safety
5.1 Since this method is complex, only experienced personnel should perform this test. LFG contains methane, therefore explosive mixtures may exist on or near the landfill. It is advisable to take appropriate safety precautions when testing landfills, such as refraining from smoking and installing explosion-proof equipment.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
6.1 Sample Probe. Stainless steel, with the bottom third perforated. Teflon probe liners and sampling lines are also allowed. Non-perforated probes are allowed as long as they are withdrawn to create a gap equivalent to having the bottom third perforated. The sample probe must be capped at the bottom and must have a threaded cap with a sampling attachment at the top. The sample probe must be long enough to go through and extend no less than 0.9 m (3 ft) below the landfill cover. If the sample probe is to be driven into the landfill, the bottom cap should be designed to facilitate driving the probe into the landfill.
6.2 Sampling Train.
6.2.1 Rotameter with Flow Control Valve. Capable of measuring a sample flow rate of 100 ±10 ml/min. The control valve must be made of stainless steel.
6.2.2 Sampling Valve. Stainless steel.
6.2.3 Pressure Gauge. U-tube mercury manometer, or equivalent, capable of measuring pressure to within 1 mm Hg (0.5 in H2O) in the range of 0 to 1,100 mm Hg (0 to 590 in H2O).
6.2.4 Sample Tank. Stainless steel or aluminum cylinder, equipped with a stainless steel sample tank valve.
6.3 Vacuum Pump. Capable of evacuating to an absolute pressure of 10 mm Hg (5.4 in H2O).
6.4 Purging Pump. Portable, explosion proof, and suitable for sampling NMOC.
6.5 Pilot Probe Procedure. The following are needed only if the tester chooses to use the procedure described in section 8.2.1.
6.5.1 Pilot Probe. Tubing of sufficient strength to withstand being driven into the landfill by a post driver and an outside diameter of at least 6 mm (0.25 in.) smaller than the sample probe. The pilot probe shall be capped on both ends and long enough to go through the landfill cover and extend no less than 0.9 m (3 ft) into the landfill.
6.5.2 Post Driver and Compressor. Capable of driving the pilot probe and the sampling probe into the landfill. The Kitty Hawk portable post driver has been found to be acceptable.
6.6 Auger Procedure. The following are needed only if the tester chooses to use the procedure described in section 8.2.2.
6.6.1 Auger. Capable of drilling through the landfill cover and to a depth of no less than 0.9 m (3 ft) into the landfill.
6.6.2 Pea Gravel.
6.6.3 Bentonite.
6.7 NMOC Analyzer, Barometer, Thermometer, and Syringes. Same as in sections 6.3.1, 6.3.2, 6.33, and 6.2.10, respectively, of Method 25.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
7.1 NMOC Analysis. Same as in Method 25, section 7.2.
7.2 Calibration. Same as in Method 25, section 7.4, except omit section 7.4.3.
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport
8.1 Sample Tank Evacuation and Leak-Check. Conduct the sample tank evacuation and leak-check either in the laboratory or the field. Connect the pressure gauge and sampling valve to the sample tank. Evacuate the sample tank to 10 mm Hg (5.4 in H2O) absolute pressure or less. Close the sampling valve, and allow the tank to sit for 30 minutes. The tank is acceptable if no change more than ±2 mm is noted. Include the results of the leak-check in the test report.
8.2 Sample Probe Installation. The tester may use the procedure in section 8.2.1 or 8.2.2.
8.2.1 Pilot Probe Procedure. Use the post driver to drive the pilot probe at least 0.9 m (3 ft) below the landfill cover. Alternative procedures to drive the probe into the landfill may be used subject to the approval of the Administrator's designated representative.
8.2.1.1 Remove the pilot probe and drive the sample probe into the hole left by the pilot probe. The sample probe shall extend at least 0.9 m (3 ft) below the landfill cover and shall protrude about 0.3 m (1 ft) above the landfill cover. Seal around the sampling probe with bentonite and cap the sampling probe with the sampling probe cap.
8.2.2 Auger Procedure. Use an auger to drill a hole to at least 0.9 m (3 ft) below the landfill cover. Place the sample probe in the hole and backfill with pea gravel to a level 0.6 m (2 ft) from the surface. The sample probe shall protrude at least 0.3 m (1 ft) above the landfill cover. Seal the remaining area around the probe with bentonite. Allow 24 hours for the landfill gases to equilibrate inside the augured probe before sampling.
8.2.3 Driven Probes. Closed-point probes may be driven directly into the landfill in a single step. This method may not require backfilling if the probe is adequately sealed by its insertion. Unperforated probes that are inserted in this manner and withdrawn at a distance from a detachable tip to create an open space are also acceptable.
8.3 Sample Train Assembly. Just before assembling the sample train, measure the sample tank vacuum using the pressure gauge. Record the vacuum, the ambient temperature, and the barometric pressure at this time. Assemble the sampling probe purging system as shown in Figure 25C-1.
8.4 Sampling Procedure. Open the sampling valve and use the purge pump and the flow control valve to evacuate at least two sample probe volumes from the system at a flow rate of 500 ml/min or less. Close the sampling valve and replace the purge pump with the sample tank apparatus as shown in Figure 25C-2. Open the sampling valve and the sample tank valve and, using the flow control valve, sample at a flow rate of 500 ml/min or less until either a constant flow rate can no longer be maintained because of reduced sample tank vacuum or the appropriate composite volume is attained. Disconnect the sampling tank apparatus and pressurize the sample cylinder to approximately 1,060 mm Hg (567 in. H2O) absolute pressure with helium, and record the final pressure. Alternatively, the sample tank may be pressurized in the lab.
8.4.1 The following restrictions apply to compositing samples from different probe sites into a single cylinder: (1) Individual composite samples per cylinder must be of equal volume; this must be verified by recording the flow rate, sampling time, vacuum readings, or other appropriate volume measuring data, (2) individual composite samples must have a minimum volume of 1 liter unless data is provided showing smaller volumes can be accurately measured, and (3) composite samples must not be collected using the final cylinder vacuum as it diminishes to ambient pressure.
8.4.2 Use Method 3C to determine the percent N2 and O2 in each cylinder. The presence of N2 and O2 indicate either infiltration of ambient air into the landfill gas sample or an inappropriate testing site has been chosen where anaerobic decomposition has not begun. The landfill gas sample is acceptable if the concentration of N2 is less than 20 percent. Alternatively, the oxygen content of each cylinder must be less than 5 percent. Landfills with 3-year average annual rainfalls equal to or less than 20 inches annual rainfalls samples are acceptable when the N2 to O2 concentration ratio is greater than 3.71.
9.0 Quality Control
9.1 Miscellaneous Quality Control Measures.
| Section | Quality control measure | Effect |
|---|---|---|
| 8.4.2 | Verify that landfill gas sample contains less than 20 percent N2 or 5 percent O2. Landfills with 3-year average annual rainfalls equal to or less than 20 inches annual rainfalls samples are acceptable when the N2 to O2 concentration ratio is greater than 3.71 | Ensures that ambient air was not drawn into the landfill gas sample and gas was sampled from an appropriate location. |
| 10.1, 10.2 | NMOC analyzer initial and daily performance checks | Ensures precision of analytical results. |
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
10.1 Initial NMOC Analyzer Performance Test. Same as in Method 25, section 10.1, except omit the linearity checks for CO2 standards.
10.2 NMOC Analyzer Daily Calibration.
10.2.1 NMOC Response Factors. Same as in Method 25, section 10.2.2.
10.3 Sample Tank Volume. The volume of the gas sampling tanks must be determined. Determine the tank volumes by weighing them empty and then filled with deionized water; weigh to the nearest 5 g, and record the results. Alternatively, measure the volume of water used to fill them to the nearest 5 ml.
11.0 Analytical Procedures
11.1 The oxidation, reduction, and measurement of NMOC's is similar to Method 25. Before putting the NMOC analyzer into routine operation, conduct an initial performance test. Start the analyzer, and perform all the necessary functions in order to put the analyzer into proper working order. Conduct the performance test according to the procedures established in section 10.1. Once the performance test has been successfully completed and the NMOC calibration response factor has been determined, proceed with sample analysis as follows:
11.1.1 Daily Operations and Calibration Checks. Before and immediately after the analysis of each set of samples or on a daily basis (whichever occurs first), conduct a calibration test according to the procedures established in section 10.2. If the criteria of the daily calibration test cannot be met, repeat the NMOC analyzer performance test (Section 10.1) before proceeding.
11.1.2 Operating Conditions. Same as in Method 25, section 11.2.1.
11.1.3 Analysis of Sample Tank. Purge the sample loop with sample, and then inject the sample. Under the specified operating conditions, the CO2 in the sample will elute in approximately 100 seconds. As soon as the detector response returns to baseline following the CO2 peak, switch the carrier gas flow to backflush, and raise the column oven temperature to 195 °C (383 °F) as rapidly as possible. A rate of 30 °C/min (54 °F/min) has been shown to be adequate. Record the value obtained for any measured NMOC. Return the column oven temperature to 85 °C (185 °F) in preparation for the next analysis. Analyze each sample in triplicate, and report the average as Ctm.
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
12.1 Nomenclature
Bw = Moisture content in the sample, fraction.
CN2 = N2 concentration in the landfill gas sample.
CmN2 = Measured N2 concentration, diluted landfill gas sample.
CmOx = Measured Oxygen concentration, fraction in landfill gas.
COx = Oxygen concentration in the diluted sample gas.
Ct = Calculated NMOC concentration, ppmv C equivalent.
Ctm = Measured NMOC concentration, ppmv C equivalent.
Pb = Barometric pressure, mm Hg.
Pt = Gas sample tank pressure after sampling, but before pressurizing, mm Hg absolute.
Ptf = Final gas sample tank pressure after pressurizing, mm Hg absolute.
Pti = Gas sample tank pressure after evacuation, mm Hg absolute.
Pw = Vapor pressure of H2O (from Table 25C-1), mm Hg.
r = Total number of analyzer injections of sample tank during analysis (where j = injection number, 1 . . . r).
Tt = Sample tank temperature at completion of sampling, °K.
Tti = Sample tank temperature before sampling, °K.
Ttf = Sample tank temperature after pressuring, °K.
12.2 Water Correction. Use Table 25C-1 (Section 17.0), the LFG temperature, and barometric pressure at the sampling site to calculate Bw.
12.3 Nitrogen Concentration in the landfill gas. Use equation 25C-2 to calculate the measured concentration of nitrogen in the original landfill gas.
12.4 Oxygen Concentration in the landfill gas. Use equation 25C-3 to calculate the measured concentration of oxygen in the original landfill gas.
12.5 You must correct the NMOC Concentration for the concentration of nitrogen or oxygen based on which gas or gases passes the requirements in section 9.1 or based on the 3-year average annual rainfall based on the closest NOAA land-based station.
12.5.1 NMOC Concentration with nitrogen correction. Use Equation 25C-4 to calculate the concentration of NMOC for each sample tank when the nitrogen concentration is less than 20 percent.
12.5.2 NMOC Concentration with oxygen correction. Use Equation 25C-5 to calculate the concentration of NMOC for each sample tank if the landfill gas oxygen is less than 5 percent and the landfill gas nitrogen concentration is greater than 20 percent, or 3-year average annual rainfall based annual rainfall of less than 20 inches.
13.0 Method Performance [Reserved]
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 References
1. Salo, Albert E., Samuel Witz, and Robert D. MacPhee. Determination of Solvent Vapor Concentrations by Total Combustion Analysis: A Comparison of Infrared with Flame Ionization Detectors. Paper No. 75-33.2. (Presented at the 68th Annual Meeting of the Air Pollution Control Association. Boston, Massachusetts. June 15-20, 1975.) 14 p.
2. Salo, Albert E., William L. Oaks, and Robert D. MacPhee. Measuring the Organic Carbon Content of Source Emissions for Air Pollution Control. Paper No. 74-190. (Presented at the 67th Annual Meeting of the Air Pollution Control Association. Denver, Colorado. June 9-13, 1974.) 25 p.
17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
| Temperature, °C | Vapor Pressure of H2 O, mm Hg | Temperature, °C | Vapor Pressure of H2 O, mm Hg |
|---|---|---|---|
| 4 | 6.1 | 18 | 15.5 |
| 6 | 7.0 | 20 | 17.5 |
| 8 | 8.0 | 22 | 19.8 |
| 10 | 9.2 | 24 | 22.4 |
| 12 | 10.5 | 26 | 25.2 |
| 14 | 12.0 | 28 | 28.3 |
| 16 | 13.6 | 30 | 31.8 |
Method 25D—Determination of the Volatile Organic Concentration of Waste Samples
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Analyte. Volatile Organic Compounds. No CAS No. assigned.
1.2 Applicability. This method is applicable for determining the volatile organic (VO) concentration of a waste sample.
2.0 Summary of Method
2.1 Principle. A sample of waste is obtained at a point which is most representative of the unexposed waste (where the waste has had minimum opportunity to volatilize to the atmosphere). The sample is suspended in an organic/aqueous matrix, then heated and purged with nitrogen for 30 min. in order to separate certain organic compounds. Part of the sample is analyzed for carbon concentration, as methane, with an FID, and part of the sample is analyzed for chlorine concentration, as chloride, with an ELCD. The VO concentration is the sum of the carbon and chlorine content of the sample.
3.0 Definitions
3.1 Well-mixed in the context of this method refers to turbulent flow which results in multiple-phase waste in effect behaving as single-phase waste due to good mixing.
4.0 Interferences [Reserved]
5.0 Safety
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health practices and to determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to performing this test method.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
6.1 Sampling. The following equipment is required:
6.1.1 Sampling Tube. Flexible Teflon, 0.25 in. ID (6.35 mm).
6.1.2 Sample Container. Borosilicate glass, 40-mL, and a Teflon-lined screw cap capable of forming an air tight seal.
6.1.3 Cooling Coil. Fabricated from 0.25 in (6.35 mm). ID 304 stainless steel tubing with a thermocouple at the coil outlet.
6.2 Analysis. The following equipment is required.
6.2.1 Purging Apparatus. For separating the VO from the waste sample. A schematic of the system is shown in Figure 25D-1. The purging apparatus consists of the following major components.
6.2.1.1 Purging Flask. A glass container to hold the sample while it is heated and purged with dry nitrogen. The cap of the purging flask is equipped with three fittings: one for a purging lance (fitting with the #7 Ace-thread), one for the Teflon exit tubing (side fitting, also a #7 Ace-thread), and a third (a 50-mm Ace-thread) to attach the base of the purging flask as shown in Figure 25D-2. The base of the purging flask is a 50-mm ID (2 in) cylindrical glass tube. One end of the tube is open while the other end is sealed. Exact dimensions are shown in Figure 25D-2.
6.2.1.2 Purging Lance. Glass tube, 6-mm OD (0.2 in) by 30 cm (12 in) long. The purging end of the tube is fitted with a four-arm bubbler with each tip drawn to an opening 1 mm (0.04 in) in diameter. Details and exact dimensions are shown in Figure 25D-2.
6.2.1.3 Coalescing Filter. Porous fritted disc incorporated into a container with the same dimensions as the purging flask. The details of the design are shown in Figure 25D-3.
6.2.1.4 Constant Temperature Chamber. A forced draft oven capable of maintaining a uniform temperature around the purging flask and coalescing filter of 75 ±2 °C (167 ±3.6 °F).
6.2.1.5 Three-way Valve. Manually operated, stainless steel. To introduce calibration gas into system.
6.2.1.6 Flow Controllers. Two, adjustable. One capable of maintaining a purge gas flow rate of 6 ±0.06 L/min (0.2 ±0.002 ft 3/min) The other capable of maintaining a calibration gas flow rate of 1-100 mL/min (0.00004-0.004 ft 3/min).
6.2.1.7 Rotameter. For monitoring the air flow through the purging system (0-10 L/min)(0-0.4 ft 3/min).
6.2.1.8 Sample Splitters. Two heated flow restrictors (placed inside oven or heated to 120 ±10 °C (248 ±18 °F) ). At a purge rate of 6 L/min (0.2 ft 3/min), one will supply a constant flow to the first detector (the rest of the flow will be directed to the second sample splitter). The second splitter will split the analytical flow between the second detector and the flow restrictor. The approximate flow to the FID will be 40 mL/min (0.0014 ft 3/min) and to the ELCD will be 15 mL/min (0.0005 ft 3/min), but the exact flow must be adjusted to be compatible with the individual detector and to meet its linearity requirement. The two sample splitters will be connected to each other by 1/8′ OD (3.175 mm) stainless steel tubing.
6.2.1.9 Flow Restrictor. Stainless steel tubing, 1/8′ OD (3.175 mm), connecting the second sample splitter to the ice bath. Length is determined by the resulting pressure in the purging flask (as measured by the pressure gauge). The resulting pressure from the use of the flow restrictor shall be 6-7 psig.
6.2.1.10 Filter Flask. With one-hole stopper. Used to hold ice bath. Excess purge gas is vented through the flask to prevent condensation in the flowmeter and to trap volatile organic compounds.
6.2.1.11 Four-way Valve. Manually operated, stainless steel. Placed inside oven, used to bypass purging flask.
6.2.1.12 On/Off Valves. Two, stainless steel. One heat resistant up to 130 °C (266 °F) and placed between oven and ELCD. The other a toggle valve used to control purge gas flow.
6.2.1.13 Pressure Gauge. Range 0-40 psi. To monitor pressure in purging flask and coalescing filter.
6.2.1.14 Sample Lines. Teflon, 1/4′ OD (6.35 mm), used inside the oven to carry purge gas to and from purging chamber and to and from coalescing filter to four-way valve. Also used to carry sample from four-way valve to first sample splitter.
6.2.1.15 Detector Tubing. Stainless steel, 1/8′ OD (3.175 mm), heated to 120 ±10 °C (248 ±18 °F) . Used to carry sample gas from each sample splitter to a detector. Each piece of tubing must be wrapped with heat tape and insulating tape in order to insure that no cold spots exist. The tubing leading to the ELCD will also contain a heat-resistant on-off valve (Section 6.2.1.12) which shall also be wrapped with heat-tape and insulation.
6.2.2 Volatile Organic Measurement System. Consisting of an FID to measure the carbon concentration of the sample and an ELCD to measure the chlorine concentration.
6.2.2.1 FID. A heated FID meeting the following specifications is required.
6.2.2.1.1 Linearity. A linear response (±5 percent) over the operating range as demonstrated by the procedures established in section 10.1.1.
6.2.2.1.2 Range. A full scale range of 50 pg carbon/sec to 50 µg carbon/sec. Signal attenuators shall be available to produce a minimum signal response of 10 percent of full scale.
6.2.2.1.3 Data Recording System. A digital integration system compatible with the FID for permanently recording the output of the detector. The recorder shall have the capability to start and stop integration at points selected by the operator or it shall be capable of the “integration by slices” technique (this technique involves breaking down the chromatogram into smaller increments, integrating the area under the curve for each portion, subtracting the background for each portion, and then adding all of the areas together for the final area count).
6.2.2.2 ELCD. An ELCD meeting the following specifications is required. 1-propanol must be used as the electrolyte. The electrolyte flow through the conductivity cell shall be 1 to 2 mL/min (0.00004 to 0.00007 ft 3/min).
6.2.2.2.1 Linearity. A linear response (±10 percent) over the response range as demonstrated by the procedures in section 10.1.2.
6.2.2.2.2 Range. A full scale range of 5.0 pg/sec to 500 ng/sec chloride. Signal attenuators shall be available to produce a minimum signal response of 10 percent of full scale.
6.2.2.2.3 Data Recording System. A digital integration system compatible with the output voltage range of the ELCD. The recorder must have the capability to start and stop integration at points selected by the operator or it shall be capable of performing the “integration by slices” technique.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
7.1 Sampling.
7.1.1 Polyethylene Glycol (PEG). Ninety-eight percent pure with an average molecular weight of 400. Before using the PEG, remove any organic compounds that might be detected as volatile organics by heating it to 120 °C (248 °F) and purging it with nitrogen at a flow rate of 1 to 2 L/min (0.04 to 0.07 ft 3/min) for 2 hours. The cleaned PEG must be stored under a 1 to 2 L/min (0.04 to 0.07 ft 3/min) nitrogen purge until use. The purge apparatus is shown in Figure 25D-4.
7.2 Analysis.
7.2.1 Sample Separation. The following are required for the sample purging step.
7.2.1.1 PEG. Same as section 7.1.1.
7.2.1.2 Purge Gas. Zero grade nitrogen (N2), containing less than 1 ppm carbon.
7.2.2 Volatile Organics Measurement. The following are required for measuring the VO concentration.
7.2.2.1 Hydrogen (H2). Zero grade H2, 99.999 percent pure.
7.2.2.2 Combustion Gas. Zero grade air or oxygen as required by the FID.
7.2.2.3 Calibration Gas. Pressurized gas cylinder containing 10 percent propane and 1 percent 1,1-dichloroethylene by volume in nitrogen.
7.2.2.4 Water. Deionized distilled water that conforms to American Society for Testing and Materials Specification D 1193-74, Type 3, is required for analysis. At the option of the analyst, the KMnO4 test for oxidizable organic matter may be omitted when high concentrations are not expected to be present.
7.2.2.5 1-Propanol. ACS grade or better. Electrolyte Solution. For use in the ELCD.
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport
8.1 Sampling.
8.1.1 Sampling Plan Design and Development. Use the procedures in chapter nine of Reference 1 in section 16 as guidance in developing a sampling plan.
8.1.2 Single Phase or Well-mixed Waste.
8.1.2.1 Install a sampling tap to obtain the sample at a point which is most representative of the unexposed waste (where the waste has had minimum opportunity to volatilize to the atmosphere). Assemble the sampling apparatus as shown in Figure 25D-5.
8.1.2.2 Prepare the sampling containers as follows: Pour 30 mL of clean PEG into the container. PEG will reduce but not eliminate the loss of organics during sample collection. Weigh the sample container with the screw cap, the PEG, and any labels to the nearest 0.01 g and record the weight (mst). Store the containers in an ice bath until 1 hour before sampling (PEG will solidify at ice bath temperatures; allow the containers to reach room temperature before sampling).
8.1.2.3 Begin sampling by purging the sample lines and cooling coil with at least four volumes of waste. Collect the purged material in a separate container and dispose of it properly.
8.1.2.4 After purging, stop the sample flow and direct the sampling tube to a preweighed sample container, prepared as described in section 8.1.2.2. Keep the tip of the tube below the surface of the PEG during sampling to minimize contact with the atmosphere. Sample at a flow rate such that the temperature of the waste is less than 10 °C (50 °F). Fill the sample container and immediately cap it (within 5 seconds) so that a minimum headspace exists in the container. Store immediately in a cooler and cover with ice.
8.1.3 Multiple-phase Waste. Collect a 10 g sample of each phase of waste generated using the procedures described in section 8.1.2 or 8.1.5. Each phase of the waste shall be analyzed as a separate sample. Calculate the weighted average VO concentration of the waste using Equation 25D-13 (Section 12.14).
8.1.4 Solid waste. Add approximately 10 g of the solid waste to a container prepared in the manner described in section 8.1.2.2, minimizing headspace. Cap and chill immediately.
8.1.5 Alternative to Tap Installation. If tap installation is impractical or impossible, fill a large, clean, empty container by submerging the container into the waste below the surface of the waste. Immediately fill a container prepared in the manner described in section 8.1.2.2 with approximately 10 g of the waste collected in the large container. Minimize headspace, cap and chill immediately.
8.1.6 Alternative sampling techniques may be used upon the approval of the Administrator.
8.2 Sample Recovery.
8.2.1 Assemble the purging apparatus as shown in Figures 25D-1 and 25D-2. The oven shall be heated to 75 ±2 °C (167 ±3.6 °F). The sampling lines leading from the oven to the detectors shall be heated to 120 ±10 °C (248 ±18 °F) with no cold spots. The flame ionization detector shall be operated with a heated block. Adjust the purging lance so that it reaches the bottom of the chamber.
8.2.2 Remove the sample container from the cooler, and wipe the exterior of the container to remove any extraneous ice, water, or other debris. Reweigh the sample container to the nearest 0.01 g, and record the weight (msf). Pour the contents of the sample container into the purging flask, rinse the sample container three times with a total of 20 mL of PEG (since the sample container originally held 30 mL of PEG, the total volume of PEG added to the purging flask will be 50 mL), transferring the rinsings to the purging flask after each rinse. Cap purging flask between rinses. The total volume of PEG in the purging flask shall be 50 mL. Add 50 mL of water to the purging flask.
9.0 Quality Control
9.1 Quality Control Samples. If audit samples are not available, prepare and analyze the two types of quality control samples (QCS) listed in Sections 9.1.1 and 9.1.2. Before placing the system in operation, after a shutdown of greater than six months, and after any major modifications, analyze each QCS in triplicate. For each detector, calculate the percent recovery by dividing measured concentration by theoretical concentration and multiplying by 100. Determine the mean percent recovery for each detector for each QCS triplicate analysis. The RSD for any triplicate analysis shall be ≤10 percent. For QCS 1 (methylene chloride), the percent recovery shall be ≥90 percent for carbon as methane, and ≥55 percent for chlorine as chloride. For QCS 2 (1,3-dichloro-2-propanol), the percent recovery shall be ≤15 percent for carbon as methane, and ≤6 percent for chlorine as chloride. If the analytical system does not meet the above-mentioned criteria for both detectors, check the system parameters (temperature, system pressure, purge rate, etc.), correct the problem, and repeat the triplicate analysis of each QCS.
9.1.1 QCS 1, Methylene Chloride. Prepare a stock solution by weighing, to the nearest 0.1 mg, 55 µL of HPLC grade methylene chloride in a tared 5 mL volumetric flask. Record the weight in milligrams, dilute to 5 mL with cleaned PEG, and inject 100 µL of the stock solution into a sample prepared as a water blank (50 mL of cleaned PEG and 60 mL of water in the purging flask). Analyze the QCS according to the procedures described in sections 10.2 and 10.3, excluding section 10.2.2. To calculate the theoretical carbon concentration (in mg) in QCS 1, multiply mg of methylene chloride in the stock solution by 3.777 × 10−3. To calculate the theoretical chlorine concentration (in mg) in QCS 1, multiply mg of methylene chloride in the stock solution by 1.670 × 10−2.
9.1.2 QCS 2, 1,3-dichloro-2-propanol. Prepare a stock solution by weighing, to the nearest 0.1 mg, 60 µL of high purity grade 1,3-dichloro-2-propanol in a tared 5 mL volumetric flask. Record the weight in milligrams, dilute to 5 mL with cleaned PEG, and inject 100 µL of the stock solution into a sample prepared as a water blank (50 mL of cleaned PEG and 60 mL of water in the purging flask). Analyze the QCS according to the procedures described in sections 10.2 and 10.3, excluding section 10.2.2. To calculate the theoretical carbon concentration (in mg) in QCS 2, multiply mg of 1,3-dichloro-2-propanol in the stock solution by 7.461 × 10−3. To calculate the theoretical chlorine concentration (in mg) in QCS 2, multiply mg of 1,3-dichloro-2-propanol in the stock solution by 1.099 × 10−2.
9.1.3 Routine QCS Analysis. For each set of compliance samples (in this context, set is per facility, per compliance test), analyze one QCS 1 and one QCS 2 sample. The percent recovery for each sample for each detector shall be ±13 percent of the mean recovery established for the most recent set of QCS triplicate analysis (Section 9.4). If the sample does not meet this criteria, check the system components and analyze another QCS 1 and 2 until a single set of QCS meet the ±13 percent criteria.
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
10.1 Initial Performance Check of Purging System. Before placing the system in operation, after a shutdown of greater than six months, after any major modifications, and at least once per month during continuous operation, conduct the linearity checks described in sections 10.1.1 and 10.1.2. Install calibration gas at the three-way calibration gas valve. See Figure 25D-1.
10.1.1 Linearity Check Procedure. Using the calibration standard described in section 7.2.2.3 and by varying the injection time, it is possible to calibrate at multiple concentration levels. Use Equation 25D-3 to calculate three sets of calibration gas flow rates and run times needed to introduce a total mass of carbon, as methane, (mc) of 1, 5, and 10 mg into the system (low, medium and high FID calibration, respectively). Use Equation 25D-4 to calculate three sets of calibration gas flow rates and run times needed to introduce a total chloride mass (mch) of 1, 5, and 10 mg into the system (low, medium and high ELCD calibration, respectively). With the system operating in standby mode, allow the FID and the ELCD to establish a stable baseline. Set the secondary pressure regulator of the calibration gas cylinder to the same pressure as the purge gas cylinder and set the proper flow rate with the calibration flow controller (see Figure 25D-1). The calibration gas flow rate can be measured with a flowmeter attached to the vent position of the calibration gas valve. Set the four-way bypass valve to standby position so that the calibration gas flows through the coalescing filter only. Inject the calibration gas by turning the calibration gas valve from vent position to inject position. Continue the calibration gas flow for the appropriate period of time before switching the calibration valve to vent position. Continue recording the response of the FID and the ELCD for 5 min after switching off calibration gas flow. Make triplicate injections of all six levels of calibration.
10.1.2 Linearity Criteria. Calculate the average response factor (Equations 25D-5 and 25D-6) and the relative standard deviation (RSD) (Equation 25D-10) at each level of the calibration curve for both detectors. Calculate the overall mean of the three response factor averages for each detector. The FID linearity is acceptable if each response factor is within 5 percent of the overall mean and if the RSD for each set of triplicate injections is less than 5 percent. The ELCD linearity is acceptable if each response factor is within 10 percent of the overall mean and if the RSD for each set of triplicate injections is less than 10 percent. Record the overall mean value of the response factors for the FID and the ELCD. If the calibration for either the FID or the ELCD does not meet the criteria, correct the detector/system problem and repeat sections 10.1.1 and 10.1.2.
10.2 Daily Calibrations.
10.2.1 Daily Linearity Check. Follow the procedures outlined in section 10.1.1 to analyze the medium level calibration for both the FID and the ELCD in duplicate at the start of the day. Calculate the response factors and the RSDs for each detector. For the FID, the calibration is acceptable if the average response factor is within 5 percent of the overall mean response factor (Section 10.1.2) and if the RSD for the duplicate injection is less than 5 percent. For the ELCD, the calibration is acceptable if the average response factor is within 10 percent of the overall mean response factor (Section 10.1.2) and if the RSD for the duplicate injection is less than 10 percent. If the calibration for either the FID or the ELCD does not meet the criteria, correct the detector/system problem and repeat sections 10.1.1 and 10.1.2.
10.2.2 Calibration Range Check.
10.2.2.1 If the waste concentration for either detector falls below the range of calibration for that detector, use the procedure outlined in section 10.1.1 to choose two calibration points that bracket the new target concentration. Analyze each of these points in triplicate (as outlined in section 10.1.1) and use the criteria in section 10.1.2 to determine the linearity of the detector in this “mini-calibration” range.
10.2.2.2 After the initial linearity check of the mini-calibration curve, it is only necessary to test one of the points in duplicate for the daily calibration check (in addition to the points specified in section 10.2.1). The average daily mini-calibration point should fit the linearity criteria specified in section 10.2.1. If the calibration for either the FID or the ELCD does not meet the criteria, correct the detector/system problem and repeat the calibration procedure mentioned in the first paragraph of section 10.2.2. A mini-calibration curve for waste concentrations above the calibration curve for either detector is optional.
10.3 Analytical Balance. Calibrate against standard weights.
11.0 Analysis
11.1 Sample Analysis.
11.1.1 Turn on the constant temperature chamber and allow the temperature to equilibrate at 75 ±2 °C (167 ±3.6 °F). Turn the four-way valve so that the purge gas bypasses the purging flask, the purge gas flowing through the coalescing filter and to the detectors (standby mode). Turn on the purge gas. Allow both the FID and the ELCD to warm up until a stable baseline is achieved on each detector. Pack the filter flask with ice. Replace ice after each run and dispose of the waste water properly. When the temperature of the oven reaches 75 ±2 °C (167 ±3.6 °F), start both integrators and record baseline. After 1 min, turn the four-way valve so that the purge gas flows through the purging flask, to the coalescing filter and to the sample splitters (purge mode). Continue recording the response of the FID and the ELCD. Monitor the readings of the pressure gauge and the rotameter. If the readings fall below established setpoints, stop the purging, determine the source of the leak, and resolve the problem before resuming. Leaks detected during a sampling period invalidate that sample.
11.1.2 As the purging continues, monitor the output of the detectors to make certain that the analysis is proceeding correctly and that the results are being properly recorded. Every 10 minutes read and record the purge flow rate, the pressure and the chamber temperature. Continue the purging for 30 minutes.
11.1.3 For each detector output, integrate over the entire area of the peak starting at 1 minute and continuing until the end of the run. Subtract the established baseline area from the peak area. Record the corrected area of the peak. See Figure 25D-6 for an example integration.
11.2 Water Blank. A water blank shall be analyzed for each batch of cleaned PEG prepared. Transfer about 60 mL of water into the purging flask. Add 50 mL of the cleaned PEG to the purging flask. Treat the blank as described in sections 8.2 and 8.3, excluding section 8.2.2. Calculate the concentration of carbon and chlorine in the blank sample (assume 10 g of waste as the mass). A VO concentration equivalent to ≤10 percent of the applicable standard may be subtracted from the measured VO concentration of the waste samples. Include all blank results and documentation in the test report.
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
12.1 Nomenclature.
Ab = Area under the water blank response curve, counts.
Ac = Area under the calibration response curve, counts.
As = Area under the sample response curve, counts.
C = Concentration of volatile organics in the sample, ppmw.
Cc = Concentration of carbon, as methane, in the calibration gas, mg/L.
Cch = Concentration of chloride in the calibration gas, mg/L.
Cj = VO concentration of phase j, ppmw.
DRt = Average daily response factor of the FID, mg CH4/counts.
Drth = Average daily response factor of the ELCD, mg Cl−/counts.
Fj = Weight fraction of phase j present in the waste.
mc = Mass of carbon, as methane, in a calibration run, mg.
mch = Mass of chloride in a calibration run, mg.
ms = Mass of the waste sample, g.
msc = Mass of carbon, as methane, in the sample, mg.
msf = Mass of sample container and waste sample, g.
msh = Mass of chloride in the sample, mg.
mst = Mass of sample container prior to sampling, g.
mVO = Mass of volatile organics in the sample, mg.
n = Total number of phases present in the waste.
Pp = Percent propane in calibration gas (L/L).
Pvc = Percent 1,1-dichloroethylene in calibration gas (L/L).
Qc = Flow rate of calibration gas, L/min.
tc = Length of time standard gas is delivered to the analyzer, min.
W = Weighted average VO concentration, ppmw.
12.2 Concentration of Carbon, as Methane, in the Calibration Gas.
12.3 Concentration of Chloride in the Calibration Gas.
12.4 Mass of Carbon, as Methane, in a Calibration Run.
12.5 Mass of Chloride in a Calibration Run.
12.6 FID Response Factor, mg/counts.
12.7 ELCD Response Factor, mg/counts.
12.8 Mass of Carbon in the Sample.
12.9 Mass of Chloride in the Sample.
12.10 Mass of Volatile Organics in the Sample.
12.11 Relative Standard Deviation.
12.12 Mass of Sample.
12.13 Concentration of Volatile Organics in Waste.
12.14 Weighted Average VO Concentration of Multi-phase Waste.
13.0 Method Performance [Reserved]
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 References
1. “Test Methods for Evaluating Solid Waste, Physical/Chemistry Methods”, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Publication SW-846, 3rd Edition, November 1986 as amended by Update I, November 1990.
17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
Method 25E—Determination of Vapor Phase Organic Concentration in Waste Samples
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Applicability. This method is applicable for determining the vapor pressure of waste cited by an applicable regulation.
1.2 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant sampling methods.
2.0 Summary of Method
2.1 The headspace vapor of the sample is analyzed for carbon content by a headspace analyzer, which uses an FID.
3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
4.0 Interferences
4.1 The analyst shall select the operating parameters best suited to the requirements for a particular analysis. The analyst shall produce confirming data through an adequate supplemental analytical technique and have the data available for review by the Administrator.
5.0 Safety [Reserved]
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
6.1 Sampling. The following equipment is required:
6.1.1 Sample Containers. Vials, glass, with butyl rubber septa, Perkin-Elmer Corporation Numbers 0105-0129 (glass vials), B001-0728 (gray butyl rubber septum, plug style), 0105-0131 (butyl rubber septa), or equivalent. The seal must be made from butyl rubber. Silicone rubber seals are not acceptable.
6.1.2 Vial Sealer. Perkin-Elmer Number 105-0106, or equivalent.
6.1.3 Gas-Tight Syringe. Perkin-Elmer Number 00230117, or equivalent.
6.1.4 The following equipment is required for sampling.
6.1.4.1 Tap.
6.1.4.2 Tubing. Teflon, 0.25-in. ID.
6.1.4.3 Cooling Coil. Stainless steel (304), 0.25 in.-ID, equipped with a thermocouple at the coil outlet.
6.2 Analysis. The following equipment is required.
6.2.1 Balanced Pressure Headspace Sampler. Perkin-Elmer HS-6, HS-100, or equivalent, equipped with a glass bead column instead of a chromatographic column.
6.2.2 FID. An FID meeting the following specifications is required.
6.2.2.1 Linearity. A linear response (±5 percent) over the operating range as demonstrated by the procedures established in section 10.2.
6.2.2.2 Range. A full scale range of 1 to 10,000 parts per million (ppm) propane (C3H8). Signal attenuators shall be available to produce a minimum signal response of 10 percent of full scale.
6.2.3 Data Recording System. Analog strip chart recorder or digital integration system compatible with the FID for permanently recording the output of the detector.
6.2.4 Temperature Sensor. Capable of reading temperatures in the range of 30 to 60 °C (86 to 140 °F) with an accuracy of ±0.1 °C (±0.2 °F).
7.0 Reagents and Standards
7.1 Analysis. The following items are required for analysis.
7.1.1 Hydrogen (H2). Zero grade hydrogen, as required by the FID.
7.1.2 Carrier Gas. Zero grade nitrogen, containing less than 1 ppm carbon (C) and less than 1 ppm carbon dioxide.
7.1.3 Combustion Gas. Zero grade air or oxygen as required by the FID.
7.2 Calibration and Linearity Check.
7.2.1 Stock Cylinder Gas Standard. 100 percent propane. The manufacturer shall: (a) Certify the gas composition to be accurate to ±3 percent or better (see section 7.2.1.1); (b) recommend a maximum shelf life over which the gas concentration does not change by greater than ±5 percent from the certified value; and (c) affix the date of gas cylinder preparation, certified propane concentration, and recommended maximum shelf life to the cylinder before shipment to the buyer.
7.2.1.1 Cylinder Standards Certification. The manufacturer shall certify the concentration of the calibration gas in the cylinder by (a) directly analyzing the cylinder and (b) calibrating his analytical procedure on the day of cylinder analysis. To calibrate his analytical procedure, the manufacturer shall use, as a minimum, a three-point calibration curve.
7.2.1.2 Verification of Manufacturer's Calibration Standards. Before using, the manufacturer shall verify each calibration standard by (a) comparing it to gas mixtures prepared in accordance with the procedure described in section 7.1 of Method 106 of Part 61, Appendix B, or by (b) calibrating it against Standard Reference Materials (SRM's) prepared by the National Bureau of Standards, if such SRM's are available. The agreement between the initially determined concentration value and the verification concentration value must be within ±5 percent. The manufacturer must reverify all calibration standards on a time interval consistent with the shelf life of the cylinder standards sold.
8.0 Sampling Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport
8.1 Install a sampling tap to obtain a sample at a point which is most representative of the unexposed waste (where the waste has had minimum opportunity to volatilize to the atmosphere). Assemble the sampling apparatus as shown in Figure 25E-1.
8.2 Begin sampling by purging the sample lines and cooling coil with at least four volumes of waste. Collect the purged material in a separate container and dispose of it properly.
8.3 After purging, stop the sample flow and transfer the Teflon sampling tube to a sample container. Sample at a flow rate such that the temperature of the waste is <10 °C (<50 °F). Fill the sample container halfway (±5 percent) and cap it within 5 seconds. Store immediately in a cooler and cover with ice.
8.4 Alternative sampling techniques may be used upon the approval of the Administrator.
9.0 Quality Control
9.1 Miscellaneous Quality Control Measures.
| Section | Quality control measure | Effect |
|---|---|---|
| 10.2, 10.3 | FID calibration and response check | Ensure precision of analytical results. |
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
10.1 Use the procedures in sections 10.2 to calibrate the headspace analyzer and FID and check for linearity before the system is first placed in operation, after any shutdown longer than 6 months, and after any modification of the system.
10.2 Calibration and Linearity. Use the procedures in section 10 of Method 18 of Part 60, Appendix A, to prepare the standards and calibrate the flowmeters, using propane as the standard gas. Fill the calibration standard vials halfway (±5 percent) with deionized water. Purge and fill the airspace with calibration standard. Prepare a minimum of three concentrations of calibration standards in triplicate at concentrations that will bracket the applicable cutoff. For a cutoff of 5.2 kPa (0.75 psi), prepare nominal concentrations of 30,000, 50,000, and 70,000 ppm as propane. For a cutoff of 27.6 kPa (4.0 psi), prepare nominal concentrations of 200,000, 300,000, and 400,000 ppm as propane.
10.2.1 Use the procedures in section 11.3 to measure the FID response of each standard. Use a linear regression analysis to calculate the values for the slope (k) and the y-intercept (b). Use the procedures in sections 12.3 and 12.2 to test the calibration and the linearity.
10.3 Daily FID Calibration Check. Check the calibration at the beginning and at the end of the daily runs by using the following procedures. Prepare 2 calibration standards at the nominal cutoff concentration using the procedures in section 10.2. Place one at the beginning and one at the end of the daily run. Measure the FID response of the daily calibration standard and use the values for k and b from the most recent calibration to calculate the concentration of the daily standard. Use an equation similar to 25E-2 to calculate the percent difference between the daily standard and Cs. If the difference is within 5 percent, then the previous values for k and b can be used. Otherwise, use the procedures in section 10.2 to recalibrate the FID.
11.0 Analytical Procedures
11.1 Allow one hour for the headspace vials to equilibrate at the temperature specified in the regulation. Allow the FID to warm up until a stable baseline is achieved on the detector.
11.2 Check the calibration of the FID daily using the procedures in section 10.3.
11.3 Follow the manufacturer's recommended procedures for the normal operation of the headspace sampler and FID.
11.4 Use the procedures in sections 12.4 and 12.5 to calculate the vapor phase organic vapor pressure in the samples.
11.5 Monitor the output of the detector to make certain that the results are being properly recorded.
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
12.1 Nomenclature.
A = Measurement of the area under the response curve, counts.
b = y-intercept of the linear regression line.
Ca = Measured vapor phase organic concentration of sample, ppm as propane.
Cma = Average measured vapor phase organic concentration of standard, ppm as propane.
Cm = Measured vapor phase organic concentration of standard, ppm as propane.
Cs = Calculated standard concentration, ppm as propane.
k = Slope of the linear regression line.
Pbar = Atmospheric pressure at analysis conditions, mm Hg (in. Hg).
P* = Organic vapor pressure in the sample, kPa (psi).
PD = Percent difference between the average measured vapor phase organic concentration (Cm) and the calculated standard concentration (Cs).
RSD = Relative standard deviation.
β = 1.333 × 10−7 kPa/[(mm Hg)(ppm)], (4.91 × 10−7 psi/[(in. Hg)(ppm)])
12.2 Linearity. Use the following equation to calculate the measured standard concentration for each standard vial.
12.2.1 Calculate the average measured standard concentration (Cma) for each set of triplicate standards and use the following equation to calculate PD between Cma and Cs. The instrument linearity is acceptable if the PD is within five for each standard.
12.3. Relative Standard Deviation (RSD). Use the following equation to calculate the RSD for each triplicate set of standards.
The calibration is acceptable if the RSD is within five for each standard concentration.
12.4 Concentration of organics in the headspace. Use the following equation to calculate the concentration of vapor phase organics in each sample.
12.5 Vapor Pressure of Organics in the Headspace Sample. Use the following equation to calculate the vapor pressure of organics in the sample.
13.0 Method Performance [Reserved]
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 References
1. Salo, Albert E., Samuel Witz, and Robert D. MacPhee. “Determination of Solvent Vapor Concentrations by Total Combustion Analysis: a Comparison of Infared with Flame Ionization Detectors. Paper No. 75-33.2. (Presented at the 68th Annual Meeting of the Air Pollution Control Association. Boston, Massachusetts.
2. Salo, Albert E., William L. Oaks, and Robert D. MacPhee. “Measuring the Organic Carbon Content of Source Emissions for Air Pollution Control. Paper No. 74-190. (Presented at the 67th Annual Meeting of the Air Pollution Control Association. Denver, Colorado. June 9-13, 1974.) p. 25.
17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
[36 FR 24877, Dec. 23, 1971]
Appendix A-8 to Part 60—Test Methods 26 through 30B
Method 26—Determination of Hydrogen Chloride Emissions From Stationary Sources
Method 26A—Determination of hydrogen halide and halogen emissions from stationary sources—isokinetic method
Method 27—Determination of vapor tightness of gasoline delivery tank using pressure-vacuum test
Method 28—Certification and auditing of wood heaters
Method 28A—Measurement of air to fuel ratio and minimum achievable burn rates for wood-fired appliances
Method 29—Determination of metals emissions from stationary sources
The test methods in this appendix are referred to in § 60.8 (Performance Tests) and § 60.11 (Compliance With Standards and Maintenance Requirements) of 40 CFR part 60, subpart A (General Provisions). Specific uses of these test methods are described in the standards of performance contained in the subparts, beginning with Subpart D.
Within each standard of performance, a section title “Test Methods and Procedures” is provided to: (1) Identify the test methods to be used as reference methods to the facility subject to the respective standard and (2) identify any special instructions or conditions to be followed when applying a method to the respective facility. Such instructions (for example, establish sampling rates, volumes, or temperatures) are to be used either in addition to, or as a substitute for procedures in a test method. Similarly, for sources subject to emission monitoring requirements, specific instructions pertaining to any use of a test method as a reference method are provided in the subpart or in Appendix B.
Inclusion of methods in this appendix is not intended as an endorsement or denial of their applicability to sources that are not subject to standards of performance. The methods are potentially applicable to other sources; however, applicability should be confirmed by careful and appropriate evaluation of the conditions prevalent at such sources.
The approach followed in the formulation of the test methods involves specifications for equipment, procedures, and performance. In concept, a performance specification approach would be preferable in all methods because this allows the greatest flexibility to the user. In practice, however, this approach is impractical in most cases because performance specifications cannot be established. Most of the methods described herein, therefore, involve specific equipment specifications and procedures, and only a few methods in this appendix rely on performance criteria.
Minor changes in the test methods should not necessarily affect the validity of the results and it is recognized that alternative and equivalent methods exist. section 60.8 provides authority for the Administrator to specify or approve (1) equivalent methods, (2) alternative methods, and (3) minor changes in the methodology of the test methods. It should be clearly understood that unless otherwise identified all such methods and changes must have prior approval of the Administrator. An owner employing such methods or deviations from the test methods without obtaining prior approval does so at the risk of subsequent disapproval and retesting with approved methods.
Within the test methods, certain specific equipment or procedures are recognized as being acceptable or potentially acceptable and are specifically identified in the methods. The items identified as acceptable options may be used without approval but must be identified in the test report. The potentially approvable options are cited as “subject to the approval of the Administrator” or as “or equivalent.” Such potentially approvable techniques or alternatives may be used at the discretion of the owner without prior approval. However, detailed descriptions for applying these potentially approvable techniques or alternatives are not provided in the test methods. Also, the potentially approvable options are not necessarily acceptable in all applications. Therefore, an owner electing to use such potentially approvable techniques or alternatives is responsible for: (1) assuring that the techniques or alternatives are in fact applicable and are properly executed; (2) including a written description of the alternative method in the test report (the written method must be clear and must be capable of being performed without additional instruction, and the degree of detail should be similar to the detail contained in the test methods); and (3) providing any rationale or supporting data necessary to show the validity of the alternative in the particular application. Failure to meet these requirements can result in the Administrator's disapproval of the alternative.
Method 26—Determination of Hydrogen Halide and Halogen Emissions From Stationary Sources Non-Isokinetic Method
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Analytes.
| Analytes | CAS No. |
|---|---|
| Hydrogen Chloride (HCl) | 7647-01-0 |
| Hydrogen Bromide (HBr) | 10035-10-6 |
| Hydrogen Fluoride (HF) | 7664-39-3 |
| Chlorine (Cl2) | 7882-50-5 |
| Bromine (Br2) | 7726-95-6 |
1.2 Applicability. This method is applicable for determining emissions of hydrogen halides (HX) (HCl, HBr, and HF) and halogens (X2) (Cl2 and Br2) from stationary sources when specified by the applicable subpart. Sources, such as those controlled by wet scrubbers, that emit acid particulate matter must be sampled using Method 26A.
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant sampling methods.
2.0 Summary of Method
2.1 An integrated sample is extracted from the source and passed through a prepurged heated probe and filter into dilute sulfuric acid and dilute sodium hydroxide solutions which collect the gaseous hydrogen halides and halogens, respectively. The filter collects particulate matter including halide salts but is not routinely recovered and analyzed. The hydrogen halides are solubilized in the acidic solution and form chloride (Cl−), bromide (Br−), and fluoride (F−) ions. The halogens have a very low solubility in the acidic solution and pass through to the alkaline solution where they are hydrolyzed to form a proton (H + ), the halide ion, and the hypohalous acid (HClO or HBrO). Sodium thiosulfate is added in excess to the alkaline solution to assure reaction with the hypohalous acid to form a second halide ion such that 2 halide ions are formed for each molecule of halogen gas. The halide ions in the separate solutions are measured by ion chromatography (IC).
3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
4.0 Interferences
4.1 Volatile materials, such as chlorine dioxide (ClO2) and ammonium chloride (NH4Cl), which produce halide ions upon dissolution during sampling are potential interferents. Interferents for the halide measurements are the halogen gases which disproportionate to a hydrogen halide and a hydrohalous acid upon dissolution in water. However, the use of acidic rather than neutral or basic solutions for collection of the hydrogen halides greatly reduces the dissolution of any halogens passing through this solution.
4.2 The simultaneous presence of HBr and CL2 may cause a positive bias in the HCL result with a corresponding negative bias in the Cl2 result as well as affecting the HBr/Br2 split.
4.3 High concentrations of nitrogen oxides (NOX) may produce sufficient nitrate (NO3− to interfere with measurements of very low Br− levels.
4.4 A glass wool plug should not be used to remove particulate matter since a negative bias in the data could result.
4.5 There is anecdotal evidence that HF may be outgassed from new teflon components. If HF is a target analyte, then preconditioning of new teflon components, by heating should be considered.
5.0 Safety
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user to establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations before performing this test method.
5.2 Corrosive Reagents. The following reagents are hazardous. Personal protective equipment and safe procedures are useful in preventing chemical splashes. If contact occurs, immediately flush with copious amounts of water for at least 15 minutes. Remove clothing under shower and decontaminate. Treat residual chemical burns as thermal burns.
5.2.1 Sodium Hydroxide (NaOH). Causes severe damage to eyes and skin. Inhalation causes irritation to nose, throat, and lungs. Reacts exothermically with limited amounts of water.
5.2.2 Sulfuric Acid (H2SO4). Rapidly destructive to body tissue. Will cause third degree burns. Eye damage may result in blindness. Inhalation may be fatal from spasm of the larynx, usually within 30 minutes. May cause lung tissue damage with edema. 1 mg/m 3 for 8 hours will cause lung damage or, in higher concentrations, death. Provide ventilation to limit inhalation. Reacts violently with metals and organics.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
6.1 Sampling. The sampling train is shown in Figure 26-1, and component parts are discussed below.
6.1.1 Probe. Borosilicate glass, approximately 3/8-in. (9-mm) I.D. with a heating system capable of maintaining a probe gas temperature during sampling between 120 and 134 °C (248 and 273 °F) to prevent moisture condensation; or Teflon where stack probes are below 210 °C. If HF is a target analyte, then preconditioning of new teflon components by heating should be considered to prevent potential HF outgassing. A Teflon-glass filter in a mat configuration should be installed to remove particulate matter from the gas stream.
6.1.2 Three-way Stopcock. A borosilicate-glass three-way stopcock with a heating system to prevent moisture condensation. The heated stopcock should connect to the outlet of the heated filter and the inlet of the first impinger. The heating system should be capable of preventing condensation up to the inlet of the first impinger. Silicone grease may be used, if necessary, to prevent leakage.
6.1.3 Impingers. Four 30-ml midget impingers with leak-free glass connectors. Silicone grease may be used, if necessary, to prevent leakage. For sampling at high moisture sources or for sampling times greater than one hour, a midget impinger with a shortened stem (such that the gas sample does not bubble through the collected condensate) should be used in front of the first impinger.
6.1.4 Drying Tube or Impinger. Tube or impinger, of Mae West design, filled with 6- to 16-mesh indicating type silica gel, or equivalent, to dry the gas sample and to protect the dry gas meter and pump. If the silica gel has been used previously, dry at 175 °C (350 °F) for 2 hours. New silica gel may be used as received. Alternatively, other types of desiccants (equivalent or better) may be used.
6.1.5 Heating System. Any heating system capable of maintaining a temperature around the probe and filter holder between 120 and 134 °C (248 and 273 °F) during sampling, or such other temperature as specified by an applicable subpart of the standards or approved by the Administrator for a particular application.
6.1.6 Filter Holder and Support. The filter holder shall be made of Teflon or quartz. The filter support shall be made of Teflon. All Teflon filter holders and supports are available from Savillex Corp., 5325 Hwy 101, Minnetonka, MN 55345.
6.1.7 Sample Line. Leak-free, with compatible fittings to connect the last impinger to the needle valve.
6.1.8 Rate Meter. Rotameter, or equivalent, capable of measuring flow rate to within 2 percent of the selected flow rate of 2 liters/min (0.07 ft 3/min).
6.1.9 Purge Pump, Purge Line, Drying Tube, Needle Valve, and Rate Meter. Pump capable of purging the sampling probe at 2 liters/min, with drying tube, filled with silica gel or equivalent, to protect pump, and a rate meter capable of measuring 0 to 5 liters/min (0.2 ft 3/min).
6.1.10 Stopcock Grease, Valve, Pump, Volume Meter, Barometer, and Vacuum Gauge. Same as in Method 6, sections 6.1.1.4, 6.1.1.7, 6.1.1.8, 6.1.1.10, 6.1.2, and 6.1.3.
6.1.11 Temperature Measuring Devices. Temperature sensors to monitor the temperature of the probe and to monitor the temperature of the sampling system from the outlet of the probe to the inlet of the first impinger.
6.1.12 Ice Water Bath. To minimize loss of absorbing solution.
6.2 Sample Recovery.
6.2.1 Wash Bottles. Polyethylene or glass, 500-ml or larger, two.
6.2.2 Storage Containers. 100- or 250-ml, high-density polyethylene or glass sample storage containers with Teflon screw cap liners to store impinger samples.
6.3 Sample Preparation and Analysis. The materials required for volumetric dilution and chromatographic analysis of samples are described below.
6.3.1 Volumetric Flasks. Class A, 100-ml size.
6.3.2 Volumetric Pipets. Class A, assortment. To dilute samples to the calibration range of the ion chromatograph.
6.3.3 Ion Chromatograph (IC). Suppressed or non-suppressed, with a conductivity detector and electronic integrator operating in the peak area mode. Other detectors, strip chart recorders, and peak height measurements may be used.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
7.1 Sampling.
7.1.1 Filter. A 25-mm (1 in) (or other size) Teflon glass mat, Pallflex TX40HI75 (Pallflex Inc., 125 Kennedy Drive, Putnam, CT 06260). This filter is in a mat configuration to prevent fine particulate matter from entering the sampling train. Its composition is 75% Teflon/25% borosilicate glass. Other filters may be used, but they must be in a mat (as opposed to a laminate) configuration and contain at least 75% Teflon. For practical rather than scientific reasons, when the stack gas temperature exceeds 210 °C (410 °F) and the HCl concentration is greater than 20 ppm, a quartz-fiber filter may be used since Teflon becomes unstable above this temperature.
7.1.2 Water. Deionized, distilled water that conforms to American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM) Specification D 1193-77 or 91, Type 3 (incorporated by reference—see § 60.17).
7.1.3 Acidic Absorbing Solution, 0.1 N Sulfuric Acid (H2SO4). To prepare 100 ml of the absorbing solution for the front impinger pair, slowly add 0.28 ml of concentrated H2SO4 to about 90 ml of water while stirring, and adjust the final volume to 100 ml using additional water. Shake well to mix the solution.
7.1.4 Silica Gel. Indicating type, 6 to 16 mesh. If previously used, dry at 180 °C (350 °F) for 2 hours. New silica gel may be used as received. Alternatively, other types of desiccants may be used, subject to the approval of the Administrator.
7.1.5 Alkaline Adsorbing Solution, 0.1 N Sodium Hydroxide (NaOH). To prepare 100 ml of the scrubber solution for the third and fourth impinger, dissolve 0.40 g of solid NaOH in about 90 ml of water, and adjust the final solution volume to 100 ml using additional water. Shake well to mix the solution.
7.1.6 Sodium Thiosulfate (Na2S2O3 5 H2O)
7.2 Sample Preparation and Analysis.
7.2.1 Water. Same as in section 7.1.2.
7.2.2 Absorbing Solution Blanks. A separate blank solution of each absorbing reagent should be prepared for analysis with the field samples. Dilute 30 ml of each absorbing solution to approximately the same final volume as the field samples using the blank sample of rinse water.
7.2.3 Halide Salt Stock Standard Solutions. Prepare concentrated stock solutions from reagent grade sodium chloride (NaCl), sodium bromide (NaBr), and sodium fluoride (NaF). Each must be dried at 110 °C (230 °F) for two or more hours and then cooled to room temperature in a desiccator immediately before weighing. Accurately weigh 1.6 to 1.7 g of the dried NaCl to within 0.1 mg, dissolve in water, and dilute to 1 liter. Calculate the exact Cl− concentration using Equation 26-1 in section 12.2. In a similar manner, accurately weigh and solubilize 1.2 to 1.3 g of dried NaBr and 2.2 to 2.3 g of NaF to make 1-liter solutions. Use Equations 26-2 and 26-3 in section 12.2, to calculate the Br− and F− concentrations. Alternately, solutions containing a nominal certified concentration of 1000 mg/l NaCl are commercially available as convenient stock solutions from which standards can be made by appropriate volumetric dilution. Refrigerate the stock standard solutions and store no longer than one month.
7.2.4 Chromatographic Eluent. Effective eluents for nonsuppressed IC using a resin-or silica-based weak ion exchange column are a 4 mM potassium hydrogen phthalate solution, adjusted to pH 4.0 using a saturated sodium borate solution, and a 4 mM 4-hydroxy benzoate solution, adjusted to pH 8.6 using 1 N NaOH. An effective eluent for suppressed ion chromatography is a solution containing 3 mM sodium bicarbonate and 2.4 mM sodium carbonate. Other dilute solutions buffered to a similar pH and containing no interfering ions may be used. When using suppressed ion chromatography, if the “water dip” resulting from sample injection interferes with the chloride peak, use a 2 mM NaOH/2.4 mM sodium bicarbonate eluent.
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport
8.1 Sampling.
8.1.1 Preparation of Collection Train. Prepare the sampling train as follows: Pour 15 ml of the acidic absorbing solution into each one of the first pair of impingers, and 15 ml of the alkaline absorbing solution into each one of the second pair of impingers. Connect the impingers in series with the knockout impinger first, if used, followed by the two impingers containing the acidic absorbing solution and the two impingers containing the alkaline absorbing solution. Place a fresh charge of silica gel, or equivalent, in the drying tube or impinger at the end of the impinger train.
8.1.2 Adjust the probe temperature and the temperature of the filter and the stopcock (i.e., the heated area in Figure 26-1) to a temperature sufficient to prevent water condensation. This temperature must be maintained between 120 and 134 °C (248 and 273 °F). The temperature should be monitored throughout a sampling run to ensure that the desired temperature is maintained. It is important to maintain a temperature around the probe and filter in this range since it is extremely difficult to purge acid gases off these components. (These components are not quantitatively recovered and, hence, any collection of acid gases on these components would result in potential under reporting of these emissions. The applicable subparts may specify alternative higher temperatures.)
8.1.3 Leak-Check Procedure.
8.1.3.1 Sampling Train. A leak-check prior to the sampling run is optional; however, a leak-check after the sampling run is mandatory. The leak-check procedure is as follows: Temporarily attach a suitable [e.g., 0-40 cc/min (0-2.4 in 3/min)] rotameter to the outlet of the dry gas meter and place a vacuum gauge at or near the probe inlet. Plug the probe inlet, pull a vacuum of at least 250 mm Hg (10 in. Hg), and note the flow rate as indicated by the rotameter. A leakage rate not in excess of 2 percent of the average sampling rate is acceptable.
8.1.3.2 Pump. It is suggested (not mandatory) that the pump be leak-checked separately, either prior to or after the sampling run. If done prior to the sampling run, the pump leak-check shall precede the leak-check of the sampling train described immediately above; if done after the sampling run, the pump leak-check shall follow the train leak-check. To leak-check the pump, proceed as follows: Disconnect the drying tube from the probe-impinger assembly. Place a vacuum gauge at the inlet to either the drying tube or pump, pull a vacuum of 250 mm (10 in) Hg, plug or pinch off the outlet of the flow meter, and then turn off the pump. The vacuum should remain stable for at least 30 sec. Other leak-check procedures may be used, subject to the approval of the Administrator, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency.
8.1.4 Purge Procedure. Immediately before sampling, connect the purge line to the stopcock, and turn the stopcock to permit the purge pump to purge the probe (see Figure 1A of Figure 26-1). Turn on the purge pump, and adjust the purge rate to 2 liters/min (0.07 ft 3/min). Purge for at least 5 minutes before sampling.
8.1.5 Sample Collection. Turn on the sampling pump, pull a slight vacuum of approximately 25 mm Hg (1 in Hg) on the impinger train, and turn the stopcock to permit stack gas to be pulled through the impinger train (see Figure 1C of Figure 26-1). Adjust the sampling rate to 2 liters/min, as indicated by the rate meter, and maintain this rate to within 10 percent during the entire sampling run. Take readings of the dry gas meter volume and temperature, rate meter, and vacuum gauge at least once every five minutes during the run. A sampling time of one hour is recommended. Shorter sampling times may introduce a significant negative bias in the HCl concentration. At the conclusion of the sampling run, remove the train from the stack, cool, and perform a leak-check as described in section 8.1.3.1.
8.2 Sample Recovery.
8.2.1 Disconnect the impingers after sampling. Quantitatively transfer the contents of the acid impingers and the knockout impinger, if used, to a leak-free storage bottle. Add the water rinses of each of these impingers and connecting glassware to the storage bottle.
8.2.2 Repeat this procedure for the alkaline impingers and connecting glassware using a separate storage bottle. Add 25 mg of sodium thiosulfate per the product of ppm of halogen anticipated to be in the stack gas times the volume (dscm) of stack gas sampled (0.7 mg per ppm-dscf).
8.2.3 Save portions of the absorbing reagents (0.1 N H2SO4 and 0.1 N NaOH) equivalent to the amount used in the sampling train (these are the absorbing solution blanks described in section 7.2.2); dilute to the approximate volume of the corresponding samples using rinse water directly from the wash bottle being used. Add the same amount of sodium thiosulfate solution to the 0.1 N NaOH absorbing solution blank. Also, save a portion of the rinse water used to rinse the sampling train. Place each in a separate, prelabeled storage bottle. The sample storage bottles should be sealed, shaken to mix, and labeled. Mark the fluid level.
8.3 Sample Preparation for Analysis. Note the liquid levels in the storage bottles and confirm on the analysis sheet whether or not leakage occurred during transport. If a noticeable leakage has occurred, either void the sample or use methods, subject to the approval of the Administrator, to correct the final results. Quantitatively transfer the sample solutions to 100-ml volumetric flasks, and dilute to 100 ml with water.
9.0 Quality Control [Reserved]
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
10.1 Volume Metering System, Temperature Sensors, Rate Meter, and Barometer. Same as in Method 6, sections 10.1, 10.2, 10.3, and 10.4.
10.2 Ion Chromatograph.
10.2.1 To prepare the calibration standards, dilute given amounts (1.0 ml or greater) of the stock standard solutions to convenient volumes, using 0.1 N H2SO4 or 0.1 N NaOH, as appropriate. Prepare at least four calibration standards for each absorbing reagent containing the appropriate stock solutions such that they are within the linear range of the field samples.
10.2.2 Using one of the standards in each series, ensure adequate baseline separation for the peaks of interest.
10.2.3 Inject the appropriate series of calibration standards, starting with the lowest concentration standard first both before and after injection of the quality control check sample, reagent blanks, and field samples. This allows compensation for any instrument drift occurring during sample analysis. The values from duplicate injections of these calibration samples should agree within 5 percent of their mean for the analysis to be valid.
10.2.4 Determine the peak areas, or heights, for the standards and plot individual values versus halide ion concentrations in µg/ml.
10.2.5 Draw a smooth curve through the points. Use linear regression to calculate a formula describing the resulting linear curve.
11.0 Analytical Procedures
11.1 Sample Analysis.
11.1.1 The IC conditions will depend upon analytical column type and whether suppressed or non-suppressed IC is used. An example chromatogram from a non-suppressed system using a 150-mm Hamilton PRP-X100 anion column, a 2 ml/min flow rate of a 4 mM 4-hydroxy benzoate solution adjusted to a pH of 8.6 using 1 N NaOH, a 50 µl sample loop, and a conductivity detector set on 1.0 µS full scale is shown in Figure 26-2.
11.1.2 Before sample analysis, establish a stable baseline. Next, inject a sample of water, and determine if any Cl−, Br−, or F− appears in the chromatogram. If any of these ions are present, repeat the load/injection procedure until they are no longer present. Analysis of the acid and alkaline absorbing solution samples requires separate standard calibration curves; prepare each according to section 10.2. Ensure adequate baseline separation of the analyses.
11.1.3 Between injections of the appropriate series of calibration standards, inject in duplicate the reagent blanks, quality control sample, and the field samples. Measure the areas or heights of the Cl−, Br−, and F− peaks. Use the mean response of the duplicate injections to determine the concentrations of the field samples and reagent blanks using the linear calibration curve. The values from duplicate injections should agree within 5 percent of their mean for the analysis to be valid. If the values of duplicate injections are not within 5 percent of the mean, the duplicate injections shall be repeated and all four values used to determine the average response. Dilute any sample and the blank with equal volumes of water if the concentration exceeds that of the highest standard.
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
12.1 Nomenclature.
BX− = Mass concentration of applicable absorbing solution blank, µg halide ion (Cl−, Br−, F−) /ml, not to exceed 1 µg/ml which is 10 times the published analytical detection limit of 0.1 µg/ml.
C = Concentration of hydrogen halide (HX) or halogen (X2), dry basis, mg/dscm.
K = 10−3 mg/µg.
KHCl = 1.028 (µg HCl/µg-mole)/(µg Cl−/µg-mole).
KHBr = 1.013 (µg HBr/µg-mole)/(µg Br−/µg-mole).
KHF = 1.053 (µg HF/µg-mole)/(µg F−/µg-mole).
mHX = Mass of HCl, HBr, or HF in sample, µg.
mX2 = Mass of Cl2 or Br2 in sample, µg.
SX− = Analysis of sample, µg halide ion (Cl−, Br−, F−)/ml.
Vm(std) = Dry gas volume measured by the dry gas meter, corrected to standard conditions, dscm.
Vs = Volume of filtered and diluted sample, ml.
12.2 Calculate the exact Cl−, Br−, and F− concentration in the halide salt stock standard solutions using the following equations.
12.3 Sample Volume, Dry Basis, Corrected to Standard Conditions. Calculate the sample volume using Eq. 6-1 of Method 6.
12.4 Total µg HCl, HBr, or HF Per Sample.
12.5 Total µg Cl2 or Br2 Per Sample.
12.6 Concentration of Hydrogen Halide or Halogen in Flue Gas.
13.0 Method Performance
13.1 Precision and Bias. The within-laboratory relative standard deviations are 6.2 and 3.2 percent at HCl concentrations of 3.9 and 15.3 ppm, respectively. The method does not exhibit a bias to Cl2 when sampling at concentrations less than 50 ppm.
13.2 Sample Stability. The collected Cl−samples can be stored for up to 4 weeks.
13.3 Detection Limit. A typical IC instrumental detection limit for Cl− is 0.2 µg/ml. Detection limits for the other analyses should be similar. Assuming 50 ml liquid recovered from both the acidified impingers, and the basic impingers, and 0.12 dscm (4.24 dscf) of stack gas sampled, then the analytical detection limit in the stack gas would be about 0.05 ppm for HCl and Cl2, respectively.
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 Alternative Procedures
Method 26A. Method 26A, which uses isokinetic sampling equipment, is an acceptable alternative to Method 26.
17.0 References
1. Steinsberger, S. C. and J. H. Margeson, “Laboratory and Field Evaluation of a Methodology for Determination of Hydrogen Chloride Emissions from Municipal and Hazardous Waste Incinerators,” U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Office of Research and Development, Report No. 600/3-89/064, April 1989. Available from the National Technical Information Service, Springfield, VA 22161 as PB89220586/AS.
2. State of California, Air Resources Board, Method 421, “Determination of Hydrochloric Acid Emissions from Stationary Sources,” March 18, 1987.
3. Cheney, J.L. and C.R. Fortune. Improvements in the Methodology for Measuring Hydrochloric Acid in Combustion Source Emissions. J. Environ. Sci. Health. A19(3): 337-350. 1984.
4. Stern, D. A., B. M. Myatt, J. F. Lachowski, and K. T. McGregor. Speciation of Halogen and Hydrogen Halide Compounds in Gaseous Emissions. In: Incineration and Treatment of Hazardous Waste: Proceedings of the 9th Annual Research Symposium, Cincinnati, Ohio, May 2-4, 1983. Publication No. 600/9-84-015. July 1984. Available from National Technical Information Service, Springfield, VA 22161 as PB84-234525.
5. Holm, R. D. and S. A. Barksdale. Analysis of Anions in Combustion Products. In: Ion Chromatographic Analysis of Environmental Pollutants. E. Sawicki, J. D. Mulik, and E. Wittgenstein (eds.). Ann Arbor, Michigan, Ann Arbor Science Publishers. 1978. pp. 99-110.
18.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
Method 26A—Determination of Hydrogen Halide and Halogen Emissions From Stationary Sources Isokinetic Method
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Analytes.
| Analytes | CAS No. |
|---|---|
| Hydrogen Chloride (HCl) | 7647-01-0 |
| Hydrogen Bromide (HBr) | 10035-10-6 |
| Hydrogen Fluoride (HF) | 7664-39-3 |
| Chlorine (Cl2) | 7882-50-5 |
| Bromine (Br2) | 7726-95-6 |
1.2 This method is applicable for determining emissions of hydrogen halides (HX) [HCl, HBr, and HF] and halogens (X2) [Cl2 and Br2] from stationary sources when specified by the applicable subpart. This method collects the emission sample isokinetically and is therefore particularly suited for sampling at sources, such as those controlled by wet scrubbers, emitting acid particulate matter (e.g., hydrogen halides dissolved in water droplets).
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant sampling methods.
2.0 Summary of Method
2.1 Principle. Gaseous and particulate pollutants are withdrawn isokinetically from the source and collected in an optional cyclone, on a filter, and in absorbing solutions. The cyclone collects any liquid droplets and is not necessary if the source emissions do not contain them; however, it is preferable to include the cyclone in the sampling train to protect the filter from any liquid present. The filter collects particulate matter including halide salts but is not routinely recovered or analyzed. Acidic and alkaline absorbing solutions collect the gaseous hydrogen halides and halogens, respectively. Following sampling of emissions containing liquid droplets, any halides/halogens dissolved in the liquid in the cyclone and on the filter are vaporized to gas and collected in the impingers by pulling conditioned ambient air through the sampling train. The hydrogen halides are solubilized in the acidic solution and form chloride (Cl−), bromide (Br−), and fluoride (F−) ions. The halogens have a very low solubility in the acidic solution and pass through to the alkaline solution where they are hydrolyzed to form a proton (H + ), the halide ion, and the hypohalous acid (HClO or HBrO). Sodium thiosulfate is added to the alkaline solution to assure reaction with the hypohalous acid to form a second halide ion such that 2 halide ions are formed for each molecule of halogen gas. The halide ions in the separate solutions are measured by ion chromatography (IC). If desired, the particulate matter recovered from the filter and the probe is analyzed following the procedures in Method 5.
3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
4.0 Interferences
4.1 Volatile materials, such as chlorine dioxide (ClO2) and ammonium chloride (NH4Cl), which produce halide ions upon dissolution during sampling are potential interferents. Interferents for the halide measurements are the halogen gases which disproportionate to a hydrogen halide and a hypohalous acid upon dissolution in water. The use of acidic rather than neutral or basic solutions for collection of the hydrogen halides greatly reduces the dissolution of any halogens passing through this solution.
4.2 The simultaneous presence of both HBr and Cl2 may cause a positive bias in the HCl result with a corresponding negative bias in the Cl2 result as well as affecting the HBr/Br2 split.
4.3 High concentrations of nitrogen oxides (NOX) may produce sufficient nitrate (NO3−) to interfere with measurements of very low Br− levels. Dissociating chloride salts (e.g., ammonium chloride) at elevated temperatures interfere with halogen acid measurement in this method. Maintaining particulate probe/filter temperatures between 120 °C and 134 °C (248 °F and 273 °F) minimizes this interference.
4.4 There is anecdotal evidence that HF may be outgassed from new Teflon components. If HF is a target analyte then preconditioning of new Teflon components, by heating, should be considered.
5.0 Safety
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user to establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations before performing this test method.
5.2 Corrosive Reagents. The following reagents are hazardous. Personal protective equipment and safe procedures are useful in preventing chemical splashes. If contact occurs, immediately flush with copious amounts of water for at least 15 minutes. Remove clothing under shower and decontaminate. Treat residual chemical burns as thermal burns.
5.2.1 Sodium Hydroxide (NaOH). Causes severe damage to eyes and skin. Inhalation causes irritation to nose, throat, and lungs. Reacts exothermically with limited amounts of water.
5.2.2 Sulfuric Acid (H2SO4). Rapidly destructive to body tissue. Will cause third degree burns. Eye damage may result in blindness. Inhalation may be fatal from spasm of the larynx, usually within 30 minutes. May cause lung tissue damage with edema. 1 mg/m 3 for 8 hours will cause lung damage or, in higher concentrations, death. Provide ventilation to limit inhalation. Reacts violently with metals and organics.
6.0. Equipment and Supplies
6.1 Sampling. The sampling train is shown in Figure 26A-1; the apparatus is similar to the Method 5 train where noted as follows:
6.1.1 Probe Nozzle. Borosilicate or quartz glass; constructed and calibrated according to Method 5, sections 6.1.1.1 and 10.1, and coupled to the probe liner using a Teflon union; a stainless steel nut is recommended for this union. When the stack temperature exceeds 210 °C (410 °F), a one-piece glass nozzle/liner assembly must be used.
6.1.2 Probe Liner. Same as Method 5, section 6.1.1.2, except metal liners shall not be used. Water-cooling of the stainless steel sheath is recommended at temperatures exceeding 500 °C (932 °F). Teflon may be used in limited applications where the minimum stack temperature exceeds 120 °C (250 °F) but never exceeds the temperature where Teflon is estimated to become unstable [approximately 210 °C (410 °F)].
6.1.3 Pitot Tube, Differential Pressure Gauge, Filter Heating System, Filter Temperature Sensor with a glass or Teflon encasement, Metering System, Barometer, Gas Density Determination Equipment. Same as Method 5, sections 6.1.1.3, 6.1.1.4, 6.1.1.6, 6.1.1.7, 6.1.1.9, 6.1.2, and 6.1.3.
6.1.4 Cyclone (Optional). Glass or Teflon. Use of the cyclone is required only when the sample gas stream is saturated with moisture; however, the cyclone is recommended to protect the filter from any liquid droplets present.
6.1.5 Filter Holder. Borosilicate or quartz glass, or Teflon filter holder, with a Teflon filter support and a sealing gasket. The sealing gasket shall be constructed of Teflon or equivalent materials. The holder design shall provide a positive seal against leakage at any point along the filter circumference. The holder shall be attached immediately to the outlet of the cyclone.
6.1.6 Impinger Train. The following system shall be used to determine the stack gas moisture content and to collect the hydrogen halides and halogens: five or six impingers connected in series with leak-free ground glass fittings or any similar leak-free noncontaminating fittings. The first impinger shown in Figure 26A-1 (knockout or condensate impinger) is optional and is recommended as a water knockout trap for use under high moisture conditions. If used, this impinger should be constructed as described below for the alkaline impingers, but with a shortened stem, and should contain 50 ml of 0.1 N H2SO4. The following two impingers (acid impingers which each contain 100 ml of 0.1 N H2SO4) shall be of the Greenburg-Smith design with the standard tip (Method 5, section 6.1.1.8). The next two impingers (alkaline impingers which each contain 100 ml of 0.1 N NaOH) and the last impinger (containing silica gel) shall be of the modified Greenburg-Smith design (Method 5, section 6.1.1.8). The condensate, acid, and alkaline impingers shall contain known quantities of the appropriate absorbing reagents. The last impinger shall contain a known weight of silica gel or equivalent desiccant. Teflon impingers are an acceptable alternative.
6.1.7 Heating System. Any heating system capable of maintaining a temperature around the probe and filter holder between 120 and 134 °C (248 to 273 °F) during sampling, or such other temperature as specified by an applicable subpart of the standards or approved by the Administrator for a particular application.
6.1.8 Ambient Air Conditioning Tube (Optional). Tube tightly packed with approximately 150 g of fresh 8 to 20 mesh sodium hydroxide-coated silica, or equivalent, (Ascarite II has been found suitable) to dry and remove acid gases from the ambient air used to remove moisture from the filter and cyclone, when the cyclone is used. The inlet and outlet ends of the tube should be packed with at least 1-cm thickness of glass wool or filter material suitable to prevent escape of fines. Fit one end with flexible tubing, etc. to allow connection to probe nozzle following the test run.
6.2 Sample Recovery.
6.2.1 Probe-Liner and Probe-Nozzle Brushes, Wash Bottles, Petri Dishes, Graduated Cylinder and/or Balance, and Rubber Policeman. Same as Method 5, sections 6.2.1, 6.2.2, 6.2.4, 6.2.5, and 6.2.7.
6.2.2 Plastic Storage Containers. Screw-cap polypropylene or polyethylene containers to store silica gel. High-density polyethylene bottles with Teflon screw cap liners to store impinger reagents, 1-liter.
6.2.3 Funnels. Glass or high-density polyethylene, to aid in sample recovery.
6.2.4 Sample Storage Containers. High-density polyethylene or glass sample storage containers with Teflon screw cap liners to store impinger samples.
6.3 Sample Preparation and Analysis.
6.3.1 Volumetric Flasks. Class A, various sizes.
6.3.2 Volumetric Pipettes. Class A, assortment. To dilute samples to calibration range of the ion chromatograph (IC).
6.3.3 Ion Chromatograph (IC). Suppressed or nonsuppressed, with a conductivity detector and electronic integrator operating in the peak area mode. Other detectors, a strip chart recorder, and peak heights may be used.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
7.1 Sampling.
7.1.1 Filter. Teflon mat (e.g., Pallflex TX40HI45) filter. When the stack gas temperature exceeds 210 °C (410 °F) a quartz fiber filter may be used.
7.1.2 Water. Deionized, distilled water that conforms to American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM) Specification D 1193-77 or 91, Type 3 (incorporated by reference—see § 60.17).
7.1.3 Acidic Absorbing Solution, 0.1 N Sulfuric Acid (H2SO4). To prepare 1 L, slowly add 2.80 ml of concentrated 17.9 M H2SO4 to about 900 ml of water while stirring, and adjust the final volume to 1 L using additional water. Shake well to mix the solution.
7.1.4 Silica Gel, Crushed Ice, and Stopcock Grease. Same as Method 5, sections 7.1.2, 7.1.4, and 7.1.5, respectively.
7.1.5 Alkaline Absorbing Solution, 0.1 N Sodium Hydroxide (NaOH). To prepare 1 L, dissolve 4.00 g of solid NaOH in about 900 ml of water and adjust the final volume to 1 L using additional water. Shake well to mix the solution.
7.1.6 Sodium Thiosulfate, (Na2S2O33.5 H2O).
7.2 Sample Preparation and Analysis.
7.2.1 Water. Same as in section 7.1.2.
7.2.2 Absorbing Solution Blanks. A separate blank solution of each absorbing reagent should be prepared for analysis with the field samples. Dilute 200 ml of each absorbing solution (250 ml of the acidic absorbing solution, if a condensate impinger is used) to the same final volume as the field samples using the blank sample of rinse water. If a particulate determination is conducted, collect a blank sample of acetone.
7.2.3 Halide Salt Stock Standard Solutions. Prepare concentrated stock solutions from reagent grade sodium chloride (NaCl), sodium bromide (NaBr), and sodium fluoride (NaF). Each must be dried at 110 °C (230 °F) for two or more hours and then cooled to room temperature in a desiccator immediately before weighing. Accurately weigh 1.6 to 1.7 g of the dried NaCl to within 0.1 mg, dissolve in water, and dilute to 1 liter. Calculate the exact Cl−concentration using Equation 26A-1 in section 12.2. In a similar manner, accurately weigh and solubilize 1.2 to 1.3 g of dried NaBr and 2.2 to 2.3 g of NaF to make 1-liter solutions. Use Equations 26A-2 and 26A-3 in section 12.2, to calculate the Br−and F−concentrations. Alternately, solutions containing a nominal certified concentration of 1000 mg/L NaCl are commercially available as convenient stock solutions from which standards can be made by appropriate volumetric dilution. Refrigerate the stock standard solutions and store no longer than one month.
7.2.4 Chromatographic Eluent. Same as Method 26, section 7.2.4.
7.2.5 Water. Same as section 7.1.1.
7.2.6 Acetone. Same as Method 5, section 7.2.
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport
8.1 Sampling.
8.1.1 Pretest Preparation. Follow the general procedure given in Method 5, section 8.1, except the filter need only be desiccated and weighed if a particulate determination will be conducted.
8.1.2 Preliminary Determinations. Same as Method 5, section 8.2.
8.1.3 Preparation of Sampling Train. Follow the general procedure given in Method 5, section 8.1.3, except for the following variations: Add 50 ml of 0.1 N H2SO4 to the condensate impinger, if used. Place 100 ml of 0.1 N H2SO4 in each of the next two impingers. Place 100 ml of 0.1 N NaOH in each of the following two impingers. Finally, transfer approximately 200-300 g of preweighed silica gel from its container to the last impinger. Set up the train as in Figure 26A-1. When used, the optional cyclone is inserted between the probe liner and filter holder and located in the heated filter box.
8.1.4 Leak-Check Procedures. Follow the leak-check procedures given in Method 5, sections 8.4.2 (Pretest Leak-Check), 8.4.3 (Leak-Checks During the Sample Run), and 8.4.4 (Post-Test Leak-Check).
8.1.5 Sampling Train Operation. Follow the general procedure given in Method 5, Section 8.5. It is important to maintain a temperature around the probe, filter (and cyclone, if used) between 120 and 134 °C (248 and 273 °F) since it is extremely difficult to purge acid gases off these components. (These components are not quantitatively recovered and hence any collection of acid gases on these components would result in potential under reporting these emissions. The applicable subparts may specify alternative higher temperatures.) For each run, record the data required on a data sheet such as the one shown in Method 5, Figure 5-3. If the condensate impinger becomes too full, it may be emptied, recharged with 50 ml of 0.1 N H2SO4, and replaced during the sample run. The condensate emptied must be saved and included in the measurement of the volume of moisture collected and included in the sample for analysis. The additional 50 ml of absorbing reagent must also be considered in calculating the moisture. Before the sampling train integrity is compromised by removing the impinger, conduct a leak-check as described in Method 5, section 8.4.2.
8.1.6 Post-Test Moisture Removal (Optional). When the optional cyclone is included in the sampling train or when liquid is visible on the filter at the end of a sample run even in the absence of a cyclone, perform the following procedure. Upon completion of the test run, connect the ambient air conditioning tube at the probe inlet and operate the train with the filter heating system between 120 and 134 °C (248 and 273 °F) at a low flow rate (e.g., ΔH = 1 in. H2O) to vaporize any liquid and hydrogen halides in the cyclone or on the filter and pull them through the train into the impingers. After 30 minutes, turn off the flow, remove the conditioning tube, and examine the cyclone and filter for any visible liquid. If liquid is visible, repeat this step for 15 minutes and observe again. Keep repeating until the cyclone is dry.
8.2 Sample Recovery. Allow the probe to cool. When the probe can be handled safely, wipe off all the external surfaces of the tip of the probe nozzle and place a cap loosely over the tip to prevent gaining or losing particulate matter. Do not cap the probe tip tightly while the sampling train is cooling down because this will create a vacuum in the filter holder, drawing water from the impingers into the holder. Before moving the sampling train to the cleanup site, remove the probe from the sample train, wipe off any silicone grease, and cap the open outlet of the impinger train, being careful not to lose any condensate that might be present. Wipe off any silicone grease and cap the filter or cyclone inlet. Remove the umbilical cord from the last impinger and cap the impinger. If a flexible line is used between the first impinger and the filter holder, disconnect it at the filter holder and let any condensed water drain into the first impinger. Wipe off any silicone grease and cap the filter holder outlet and the impinger inlet. Ground glass stoppers, plastic caps, serum caps, Teflon tape, Parafilm, or aluminum foil may be used to close these openings. Transfer the probe and filter/impinger assembly to the cleanup area. This area should be clean and protected from the weather to minimize sample contamination or loss. Inspect the train prior to and during disassembly and note any abnormal conditions. Treat samples as follows:
8.2.1 Container No. 1 (Optional; Filter Catch for Particulate Determination). Same as Method 5, section 8.7.6.1, Container No. 1.
8.2.2 Container No. 2 (Optional; Front-Half Rinse for Particulate Determination). Same as Method 5, section 8.7.6.2, Container No. 2.
8.2.3 Container No. 3 (Knockout and Acid Impinger Catch for Moisture and Hydrogen Halide Determination). Disconnect the impingers. Measure the liquid in the acid and knockout impingers to ±1 ml by using a graduated cylinder or by weighing it to ±0.5 g by using a balance. Record the volume or weight of liquid present. This information is required to calculate the moisture content of the effluent gas. Quantitatively transfer this liquid to a leak-free sample storage container. Rinse these impingers and connecting glassware including the back portion of the filter holder (and flexible tubing, if used) with water and add these rinses to the storage container. Seal the container, shake to mix, and label. The fluid level should be marked so that if any sample is lost during transport, a correction proportional to the lost volume can be applied. Retain rinse water and acidic absorbing solution blanks to be analyzed with the samples.
8.2.4 Container No. 4 (Alkaline Impinger Catch for Halogen and Moisture Determination). Measure and record the liquid in the alkaline impingers as described in section 8.2.3. Quantitatively transfer this liquid to a leak-free sample storage container. Rinse these two impingers and connecting glassware with water and add these rinses to the container. Add 25 mg of sodium thiosulfate per ppm halogen anticipated to be in the stack gas multiplied by the volume (dscm) of stack gas sampled (0.7 mg/ppm-dscf). Seal the container, shake to mix, and label; mark the fluid level. Retain alkaline absorbing solution blank to be analyzed with the samples.
8.2.5 Container No. 5 (Silica Gel for Moisture Determination). Same as Method 5, section 8.7.6.3, Container No. 3.
8.2.6 Container Nos. 6 through 9 (Reagent Blanks). Save portions of the absorbing reagents (0.1 N H2SO4 and 0.1 N NaOH) equivalent to the amount used in the sampling train; dilute to the approximate volume of the corresponding samples using rinse water directly from the wash bottle being used. Add the same ratio of sodium thiosulfate solution used in container No. 4 to the 0.1 N NaOH absorbing reagent blank. Also, save a portion of the rinse water alone and a portion of the acetone equivalent to the amount used to rinse the front half of the sampling train. Place each in a separate, prelabeled sample container.
8.2.7 Prior to shipment, recheck all sample containers to ensure that the caps are well-secured. Seal the lids of all containers around the circumference with Teflon tape. Ship all liquid samples upright and all particulate filters with the particulate catch facing upward.
9.0 Quality Control
9.1 Miscellaneous Quality Control Measures.
| Section | Quality control measure | Effect |
|---|---|---|
| 8.1.4, 10.1 | Sampling equipment leak-check and calibration | Ensure accurate measurement of stack gas flow rate, sample volume. |
9.2 Volume Metering System Checks. Same as Method 5, section 9.2.
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
10.1 Probe Nozzle, Pitot Tube Assembly, Dry Gas Metering System, Probe Heater, Temperature Sensors, Leak-Check of Metering System, and Barometer. Same as Method 5, sections 10.1, 10.2, 10.3, 10.4, 10.5, 8.4.1, and 10.6, respectively.
10.2 Ion Chromatograph.
10.2.1 To prepare the calibration standards, dilute given amounts (1.0 ml or greater) of the stock standard solutions to convenient volumes, using 0.1 N H2SO4 or 0.1 N NaOH, as appropriate. Prepare at least four calibration standards for each absorbing reagent containing the three stock solutions such that they are within the linear range of the field samples.
10.2.2 Using one of the standards in each series, ensure adequate baseline separation for the peaks of interest.
10.2.3 Inject the appropriate series of calibration standards, starting with the lowest concentration standard first both before and after injection of the quality control check sample, reagent blanks, and field samples. This allows compensation for any instrument drift occurring during sample analysis. The values from duplicate injections of these calibration samples should agree within 5 percent of their mean for the analysis to be valid.
10.2.4 Determine the peak areas, or height, of the standards and plot individual values versus halide ion concentrations in µg/ml.
10.2.5 Draw a smooth curve through the points. Use linear regression to calculate a formula describing the resulting linear curve.
11.0 Analytical Procedures
11.1 Sample Analysis.
11.1.1 The IC conditions will depend upon analytical column type and whether suppressed or non-suppressed IC is used. An example chromatogram from a non-suppressed system using a 150-mm Hamilton PRP-X100 anion column, a 2 ml/min flow rate of a 4 mM 4-hydroxy benzoate solution adjusted to a pH of 8.6 using 1 N NaOH, a 50 µl sample loop, and a conductivity detector set on 1.0 µS full scale is shown in Figure 26-2.
11.1.2 Before sample analysis, establish a stable baseline. Next, inject a sample of water, and determine if any Cl−, Br−, or F− appears in the chromatogram. If any of these ions are present, repeat the load/injection procedure until they are no longer present. Analysis of the acid and alkaline absorbing solution samples requires separate standard calibration curves; prepare each according to section 10.2. Ensure adequate baseline separation of the analyses.
11.1.3 Between injections of the appropriate series of calibration standards, inject in duplicate the reagent blanks, quality control sample, and the field samples. Measure the areas or heights of the Cl−, Br−, and F− peaks. Use the mean response of the duplicate injections to determine the concentrations of the field samples and reagent blanks using the linear calibration curve. The values from duplicate injections should agree within 5 percent of their mean for the analysis to be valid. If the values of duplicate injections are not within 5 percent of the mean, the duplicator injections shall be repeated and all four values used to determine the average response. Dilute any sample and the blank with equal volumes of water if the concentration exceeds that of the highest standard.
11.2 Container Nos. 1 and 2 and Acetone Blank (Optional; Particulate Determination). Same as Method 5, sections 11.2.1 and 11.2.2, respectively.
11.3 Container No. 5. Same as Method 5, section 11.2.3 for silica gel.
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
12.1 Nomenclature. Same as Method 5, section 12.1. In addition:
BX− = Mass concentration of applicable absorbing solution blank, µg halide ion (Cl−, Br−, F−)/ml, not to exceed 1 µg/ml which is 10 times the published analytical detection limit of 0.1 µg/ml. (It is also approximately 5 percent of the mass concentration anticipated to result from a one hour sample at 10 ppmv HCl.)
C = Concentration of hydrogen halide (HX) or halogen (X2), dry basis, mg/dscm.
K = 10−3 mg/µg.
KHCl = 1.028 (µg HCl/µg-mole)/(µg Cl−/µg-mole).
KHBr = 1.013 (µg HBr/µg-mole)/(µg Br−/µg-mole).
KHF = 1.053 (µg HF/µg-mole)/(µg F−/µg-mole).
mHX = Mass of HCl, HBr, or HF in sample, ug.
mX2 = Mass of Cl2 or Br2 in sample, ug.
SX− = Analysis of sample, ug halide ion (Cl−, Br−, F−)/ml.
Vs = Volume of filtered and diluted sample, ml.
12.2 Calculate the exact Cl−, Br−, and F− concentration in the halide salt stock standard solutions using the following equations.
12.3 Average Dry Gas Meter Temperature and Average Orifice Pressure Drop. See data sheet (Figure 5-3 of Method 5).
12.4 Dry Gas Volume. Calculate Vm(std) and adjust for leakage, if necessary, using the equation in section 12.3 of Method 5.
12.5 Volume of Water Vapor and Moisture Content. Calculate the volume of water vapor Vw(std) and moisture content Bws from the data obtained in this method (Figure 5-3 of Method 5); use Equations 5-2 and 5-3 of Method 5.
12.6 Isokinetic Variation and Acceptable Results. Use Method 5, section 12.11.
12.7 Acetone Blank Concentration, Acetone Wash Blank Residue Weight, Particulate Weight, and Particulate Concentration. For particulate determination.
12.8 Total µg HCl, HBr, or HF Per Sample.
12.9 Total µg Cl2 or Br2 Per Sample.
12.10 Concentration of Hydrogen Halide or Halogen in Flue Gas.
12.11 Stack Gas Velocity and Volumetric Flow Rate. Calculate the average stack gas velocity and volumetric flow rate, if needed, using data obtained in this method and the equations in sections 12.3 and 12.4 of Method 2.
13.0 Method Performance
13.1 Precision and Bias. The method has a possible measurable negative bias below 20 ppm HCl perhaps due to reaction with small amounts of moisture in the probe and filter. Similar bias for the other hydrogen halides is possible.
13.2 Sample Stability. The collected Cl-samples can be stored for up to 4 weeks for analysis for HCl and Cl2.
13.3 Detection Limit. A typical analytical detection limit for HCl is 0.2 µg/ml. Detection limits for the other analyses should be similar. Assuming 300 ml of liquid recovered for the acidified impingers and a similar amounts recovered from the basic impingers, and 1 dscm of stack gas sampled, the analytical detection limits in the stack gas would be about 0.04 ppm for HCl and Cl2, respectively.
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 References
1. Steinsberger, S. C. and J. H. Margeson. Laboratory and Field Evaluation of a Methodology for Determination of Hydrogen Chloride Emissions from Municipal and Hazardous Waste Incinerators. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Office of Research and Development. Publication No. 600/3-89/064. April 1989. Available from National Technical Information Service, Springfield, VA 22161 as PB89220586/AS.
2. State of California Air Resources Board. Method 421—Determination of Hydrochloric Acid Emissions from Stationary Sources. March 18, 1987.
3. Cheney, J.L. and C.R. Fortune. Improvements in the Methodology for Measuring Hydrochloric Acid in Combustion Source Emissions. J. Environ. Sci. Health. A19(3): 337-350. 1984.
4. Stern, D.A., B.M. Myatt, J.F. Lachowski, and K.T. McGregor. Speciation of Halogen and Hydrogen Halide Compounds in Gaseous Emissions. In: Incineration and Treatment of Hazardous Waste: Proceedings of the 9th Annual Research Symposium, Cincinnati, Ohio, May 2-4, 1983. Publication No. 600/9-84-015. July 1984. Available from National Technical Information Service, Springfield, VA 22161 as PB84-234525.
5. Holm, R.D. and S.A. Barksdale. Analysis of Anions in Combustion Products. In: Ion Chromatographic Analysis of Environmental Pollutants, E. Sawicki, J.D. Mulik, and E. Wittgenstein (eds.). Ann Arbor, Michigan, Ann Arbor Science Publishers. 1978. pp. 99-110.
17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
Method 27—Determination of Vapor Tightness of Gasoline Delivery Tank Using Pressure Vacuum Test
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Applicability. This method is applicable for the determination of vapor tightness of a gasoline delivery collection equipment.
2.0 Summary of Method
2.1 Pressure and vacuum are applied alternately to the compartments of a gasoline delivery tank and the change in pressure or vacuum is recorded after a specified period of time.
3.0 Definitions
3.1 Allowable pressure change (Δp) means the allowable amount of decrease in pressure during the static pressure test, within the time period t, as specified in the appropriate regulation, in mm H2O.
3.2 Allowable vacuum change (Δv) means the allowable amount of decrease in vacuum during the static vacuum test, within the time period t, as specified in the appropriate regulation, in mm H2O.
3.3 Compartment means a liquid-tight division of a delivery tank.
3.4 Delivery tank means a container, including associated pipes and fittings, that is attached to or forms a part of any truck, trailer, or railcar used for the transport of gasoline.
3.5 Delivery tank vapor collection equipment means any piping, hoses, and devices on the delivery tank used to collect and route gasoline vapors either from the tank to a bulk terminal vapor control system or from a bulk plant or service station into the tank.
3.6 Gasoline means a petroleum distillate or petroleum distillate/alcohol blend having a Reid vapor pressure of 27.6 kilopascals or greater which is used as a fuel for internal combustion engines.
3.7 Initial pressure (Pi) means the pressure applied to the delivery tank at the beginning of the static pressure test, as specified in the appropriate regulation, in mm H2O.
3.8 Initial vacuum (Vi) means the vacuum applied to the delivery tank at the beginning of the static vacuum test, as specified in the appropriate regulation, in mm H3.
3.9 Time period of the pressure or vacuum test (t) means the time period of the test, as specified in the appropriate regulation, during which the change in pressure or vacuum is monitored, in minutes.
4.0 Interferences [Reserved]
5.0 Safety
5.1 Gasoline contains several volatile organic compounds (e.g., benzene and hexane) which presents a potential for fire and/or explosions. It is advisable to take appropriate precautions when testing a gasoline vessel's vapor tightness, such as refraining from smoking and using explosion-proof equipment.
5.2 This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to performing this test method
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
The following equipment and supplies are required for testing:
6.1 Pressure Source. Pump or compressed gas cylinder of air or inert gas sufficient to pressurize the delivery tank to 500 mm (20 in.) H2O above atmospheric pressure.
6.2 Regulator. Low pressure regulator for controlling pressurization of the delivery tank.
6.3 Vacuum Source. Vacuum pump capable of evacuating the delivery tank to 250 mm (10 in.) H2O below atmospheric pressure.
6.4 Pressure-Vacuum Supply Hose.
6.5 Manometer. Liquid manometer, or equivalent instrument, capable of measuring up to 500 mm (20 in.) H2O gauge pressure with ±2.5 mm (0.1 in.) H2O precision.
6.6 Pressure-Vacuum Relief Valves. The test apparatus shall be equipped with an inline pressure-vacuum relief valve set to activate at 675 mm (26.6 in.) H2O above atmospheric pressure or 250 mm (10 in.) H2O below atmospheric pressure, with a capacity equal to the pressurizing or evacuating pumps.
6.7 Test Cap for Vapor Recovery Hose. This cap shall have a tap for manometer connection and a fitting with shut-off valve for connection to the pressure-vacuum supply hose.
6.8 Caps for Liquid Delivery Hoses.
7.0 Reagents and Standards [Reserved]
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport
8.1 Pretest Preparations.
8.1.1 Summary. Testing problems may occur due to the presence of volatile vapors and/or temperature fluctuations inside the delivery tank. Under these conditions, it is often difficult to obtain a stable initial pressure at the beginning of a test, and erroneous test results may occur. To help prevent this, it is recommended that prior to testing, volatile vapors be removed from the tank and the temperature inside the tank be allowed to stabilize. Because it is not always possible to completely attain these pretest conditions, a provision to ensure reproducible results is included. The difference in results for two consecutive runs must meet the criteria in sections 8.2.2.5 and 8.2.3.5.
8.1.2 Emptying of Tank. The delivery tank shall be emptied of all liquid.
8.1.3 Purging of Vapor. As much as possible the delivery tank shall be purged of all volatile vapors by any safe, acceptable method. One method is to carry a load of non-volatile liquid fuel, such as diesel or heating oil, immediately prior to the test, thus flushing out all the volatile gasoline vapors. A second method is to remove the volatile vapors by blowing ambient air into each tank compartment for at least 20 minutes. This second method is usually not as effective and often causes stabilization problems, requiring a much longer time for stabilization during the testing.
8.1.4 Temperature Stabilization. As much as possible, the test shall be conducted under isothermal conditions. The temperature of the delivery tank should be allowed to equilibrate in the test environment. During the test, the tank should be protected from extreme environmental and temperature variability, such as direct sunlight.
8.2 Test Procedure.
8.2.1 Preparations.
8.2.1.1 Open and close each dome cover.
8.2.1.2 Connect static electrical ground connections to the tank. Attach the liquid delivery and vapor return hoses, remove the liquid delivery elbows, and plug the liquid delivery fittings.
8.2.1.3 Attach the test cap to the end of the vapor recovery hose.
8.2.1.4 Connect the pressure-vacuum supply hose and the pressure-vacuum relief valve to the shut-off valve. Attach a manometer to the pressure tap.
8.2.1.5 Connect compartments of the tank internally to each other if possible. If not possible, each compartment must be tested separately, as if it were an individual delivery tank.
8.2.2 Pressure Test.
8.2.2.1 Connect the pressure source to the pressure-vacuum supply hose.
8.2.2.2 Open the shut-off valve in the vapor recovery hose cap. Apply air pressure slowly, pressurize the tank to Pi, the initial pressure specified in the regulation.
8.2.2.3 Close the shut-off and allow the pressure in the tank to stabilize, adjusting the pressure if necessary to maintain pressure of Pi. When the pressure stabilizes, record the time and initial pressure.
8.2.2.4 At the end of the time period (t) specified in the regulation, record the time and final pressure.
8.2.2.5 Repeat steps 8.2.2.2 through 8.2.2.4 until the change in pressure for two consecutive runs agrees within 12.5 mm (0.5 in.) H2O. Calculate the arithmetic average of the two results.
8.2.2.6 Compare the average measured change in pressure to the allowable pressure change, Δp, specified in the regulation. If the delivery tank does not satisfy the vapor tightness criterion specified in the regulation, repair the sources of leakage, and repeat the pressure test until the criterion is met.
8.2.2.7 Disconnect the pressure source from the pressure-vacuum supply hose, and slowly open the shut-off valve to bring the tank to atmospheric pressure.
8.2.3 Vacuum Test.
8.2.3.1 Connect the vacuum source to the pressure-vacuum supply hose.
8.2.3.2 Open the shut-off valve in the vapor recovery hose cap. Slowly evacuate the tank to Vi, the initial vacuum specified in the regulation.
8.2.3.3 Close the shut-off valve and allow the pressure in the tank to stabilize, adjusting the pressure if necessary to maintain a vacuum of Vi. When the pressure stabilizes, record the time and initial vacuum.
8.2.3.4 At the end of the time period specified in the regulation (t), record the time and final vacuum.
8.2.3.5 Repeat steps 8.2.3.2 through 8.2.3.4 until the change in vacuum for two consecutive runs agrees within 12.5 mm (0.5 in.) H2O. Calculate the arithmetic average of the two results.
8.2.3.6 Compare the average measured change in vacuum to the allowable vacuum change, Δv, as specified in the regulation. If the delivery tank does not satisfy the vapor tightness criterion specified in the regulation, repair the sources of leakage, and repeat the vacuum test until the criterion is met.
8.2.3.7 Disconnect the vacuum source from the pressure-vacuum supply hose, and slowly open the shut-off valve to bring the tank to atmospheric pressure.
8.2.4 Post-Test Clean-up. Disconnect all test equipment and return the delivery tank to its pretest condition.
9.0 Quality Control
| Section(s) | Quality control measure | Effect |
|---|---|---|
| 8.2.2.5, 8.3.3.5 | Repeat test procedures until change in pressure or vacuum for two consecutive runs agrees within ±12.5 mm (0.5 in.) H2 O | Ensures data precision. |
10.0 Calibration and Standardization [Reserved]
11.0 Analytical Procedures [Reserved]
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations [Reserved]
13.0 Method Performance
13.1 Precision. The vapor tightness of a gasoline delivery tank under positive or negative pressure, as measured by this method, is precise within 12.5 mm (0.5 in.) H2O
13.2 Bias. No bias has been identified.
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 Alternative Procedures
16.1 The pumping of water into the bottom of a delivery tank is an acceptable alternative to the pressure source described above. Likewise, the draining of water out of the bottom of a delivery tank may be substituted for the vacuum source. Note that some of the specific step-by-step procedures in the method must be altered slightly to accommodate these different pressure and vacuum sources.
16.2 Techniques other than specified above may be used for purging and pressurizing a delivery tank, if prior approval is obtained from the Administrator. Such approval will be based upon demonstrated equivalency with the above method.
17.0 References [Reserved]
18.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data [Reserved]
Method 28—Certification and Auditing of Wood Heaters
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Analyte. Particulate matter (PM). No CAS number assigned.
1.2 Applicability. This method is applicable for the certification and auditing of wood heaters, including pellet burning wood heaters.
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant sampling methods.
2.0 Summary of Method
2.1 Particulate matter emissions are measured from a wood heater burning a prepared test fuel crib in a test facility maintained at a set of prescribed conditions. Procedures for determining burn rates and particulate emission rates and for reducing data are provided.
3.0 Definitions
3.1 2 × 4 or 4 × 4 means two inches by four inches or four inches by four inches (50 mm by 100 mm or 100 mm by 100 mm), as nominal dimensions for lumber.
3.2 Burn rate means the rate at which test fuel is consumed in a wood heater. Measured in kilograms or lbs of wood (dry basis) per hour (kg/hr or lb/hr).
3.3 Certification or audit test means a series of at least four test runs conducted for certification or audit purposes that meets the burn rate specifications in section 8.4.
3.4 Firebox means the chamber in the wood heater in which the test fuel charge is placed and combusted.
3.5 Height means the vertical distance extending above the loading door, if fuel could reasonably occupy that space, but not more than 2 inches above the top (peak height) of the loading door, to the floor of the firebox (i.e., below a permanent grate) if the grate allows a 1-inch diameter piece of wood to pass through the grate, or, if not, to the top of the grate. Firebox height is not necessarily uniform but must account for variations caused by internal baffles, air channels, or other permanent obstructions.
3.6 Length means the longest horizontal fire chamber dimension that is parallel to a wall of the chamber.
3.7 Pellet burning wood heater means a wood heater which meets the following criteria: (1) The manufacturer makes no reference to burning cord wood in advertising or other literature, (2) the unit is safety listed for pellet fuel only, (3) the unit operating and instruction manual must state that the use of cordwood is prohibited by law, and (4) the unit must be manufactured and sold including the hopper and auger combination as integral parts.
3.8 Secondary air supply means an air supply that introduces air to the wood heater such that the burn rate is not altered by more than 25 percent when the secondary air supply is adjusted during the test run. The wood heater manufacturer can document this through design drawings that show the secondary air is introduced only into a mixing chamber or secondary chamber outside the firebox.
3.9 Test facility means the area in which the wood heater is installed, operated, and sampled for emissions.
3.10 Test fuel charge means the collection of test fuel pieces placed in the wood heater at the start of the emission test run.
3.11 Test fuel crib means the arrangement of the test fuel charge with the proper spacing requirements between adjacent fuel pieces.
3.12 Test fuel loading density means the weight of the as-fired test fuel charge per unit volume of usable firebox.
3.13 Test fuel piece means the 2 × 4 or 4 × 4 wood piece cut to the length required for the test fuel charge and used to construct the test fuel crib.
3.14 Test run means an individual emission test which encompasses the time required to consume the mass of the test fuel charge.
3.15 Usable firebox volume means the volume of the firebox determined using its height, length, and width as defined in this section.
3.16 Width means the shortest horizontal fire chamber dimension that is parallel to a wall of the chamber.
3.17 Wood heater means an enclosed, woodburning appliance capable of and intended for space heating or domestic water heating, as defined in the applicable regulation.
4.0 Interferences [Reserved]
5.0 Safety
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health practices and to determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to performing this test method.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
Same as section 6.0 of either Method 5G or Method 5H, with the addition of the following:
6.1 Insulated Solid Pack Chimney. For installation of wood heaters. Solid pack insulated chimneys shall have a minimum of 2.5 cm (1 in.) solid pack insulating material surrounding the entire flue and possess a label demonstrating conformance to U.L. 103 (incorporated by reference—see § 60.17).
6.2 Platform Scale and Monitor. For monitoring of fuel load weight change. The scale shall be capable of measuring weight to within 0.05 kg (0.1 lb) or 1 percent of the initial test fuel charge weight, whichever is greater.
6.3 Wood Heater Temperature Monitors. Seven, each capable of measuring temperature to within 1.5 percent of expected absolute temperatures.
6.4 Test Facility Temperature Monitor. A thermocouple located centrally in a vertically oriented 150 mm (6 in.) long, 50 mm (2 in.) diameter pipe shield that is open at both ends, capable of measuring temperature to within 1.5 percent of expected temperatures.
6.5 Balance (optional). Balance capable of weighing the test fuel charge to within 0.05 kg (0.1 lb).
6.6 Moisture Meter. Calibrated electrical resistance meter for measuring test fuel moisture to within 1 percent moisture content.
6.7 Anemometer. Device capable of detecting air velocities less than 0.10 m/sec (20 ft/min), for measuring air velocities near the test appliance.
6.8 Barometer. Mercury, aneroid or other barometer capable of measuring atmospheric pressure to within 2.5 mm Hg (0.1 in. Hg).
6.9 Draft Gauge. Electromanometer or other device for the determination of flue draft or static pressure readable to within 0.50 Pa (0.002 in. H2O).
6.10 Humidity Gauge. Psychrometer or hygrometer for measuring room humidity.
6.11 Wood Heater Flue.
6.11.1 Steel flue pipe extending to 2.6 ±0.15 m (8.5 ±0.5 ft) above the top of the platform scale, and above this level, insulated solid pack type chimney extending to 4.6 ±0.3 m (15 ±1 ft) above the platform scale, and of the size specified by the wood heater manufacturer. This applies to both freestanding and insert type wood heaters.
6.11.2 Other chimney types (e.g., solid pack insulated pipe) may be used in place of the steel flue pipe if the wood heater manufacturer's written appliance specifications require such chimney for home installation (e.g., zero clearance wood heater inserts). Such alternative chimney or flue pipe must remain and be sealed with the wood heater following the certification test.
6.12 Test Facility. The test facility shall meet the following requirements during testing:
6.12.1 The test facility temperature shall be maintained between 18 and 32 °C (65 and 90 °F) during each test run.
6.12.2 Air velocities within 0.6 m (2 ft) of the test appliance and exhaust system shall be less than 0.25 m/sec (50 ft/min) without fire in the unit.
6.12.3 The flue shall discharge into the same space or into a space freely communicating with the test facility. Any hood or similar device used to vent combustion products shall not induce a draft greater than 1.25 Pa (0.005 in. H2O) on the wood heater measured when the wood heater is not operating.
6.12.4 For test facilities with artificially induced barometric pressures (e.g., pressurized chambers), the barometric pressure in the test facility shall not exceed 775 mm Hg (30.5 in. Hg) during any test run.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
Same as section 6.0 of either Method 5G or Method 5H, with the addition of the following:
7.1 Test Fuel. The test fuel shall conform to the following requirements:
7.1.1 Fuel Species. Untreated, air-dried, Douglas fir lumber. Kiln-dried lumber is not permitted. The lumber shall be certified C grade (standard) or better Douglas fir by a lumber grader at the mill of origin as specified in the West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau Standard No. 16 (incorporated by reference—see § 60.17).
7.1.2 Fuel Moisture. The test fuel shall have a moisture content range between 16 to 20 percent on a wet basis (19 to 25 percent dry basis). Addition of moisture to previously dried wood is not allowed. It is recommended that the test fuel be stored in a temperature and humidity-controlled room.
7.1.3 Fuel Temperature. The test fuel shall be at the test facility temperature of 18 to 32 °C (65 to 90 °F).
7.1.4 Fuel Dimensions. The dimensions of each test fuel piece shall conform to the nominal measurements of 2 × 4 and 4 × 4 lumber. Each piece of test fuel (not including spacers) shall be of equal length, except as necessary to meet requirements in section 8.8, and shall closely approximate 5/6 the dimensions of the length of the usable firebox. The fuel piece dimensions shall be determined in relation to the appliance's firebox volume according to guidelines listed below:
7.1.4.1 If the usable firebox volume is less than or equal to 0.043 m 3 (1.5 ft 3), use 2 × 4 lumber.
7.1.4.2 If the usable firebox volume is greater than 0.043 m 3 (1.5 ft 3) and less than or equal to 0.085 m 3 (3.0 ft 3), use 2 × 4 and 4 × 4 lumber. About half the weight of the test fuel charge shall be 2 × 4 lumber, and the remainder shall be 4 × 4 lumber.
7.1.4.3 If the usable firebox volume is greater than 0.085 m 3 (3.0 ft 3), use 4 × 4 lumber.
7.2 Test Fuel Spacers. Air-dried, Douglas fir lumber meeting the requirements outlined in sections 7.1.1 through 7.1.3. The spacers shall be 130 × 40 × 20 mm (5 × 1.5 × 0.75 in.).
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport
8.1 Test Run Requirements.
8.1.1 Burn Rate Categories. One emission test run is required in each of the following burn rate categories:
| Category 1 | Category 2 | Category 3 | Category 4 |
|---|---|---|---|
| <0.80 | 0.80 to 1.25 | 1.25 to 1.90 | Maximum. |
| (<1.76) | (1.76 to 2.76) | (2.76 to 4.19) | burn rate. |
8.1.1.1 Maximum Burn Rate. For Category 4, the wood heater shall be operated with the primary air supply inlet controls fully open (or, if thermostatically controlled, the thermostat shall be set at maximum heat output) during the entire test run, or the maximum burn rate setting specified by the manufacturer's written instructions.
8.1.1.2 Other Burn Rate Categories. For burn rates in Categories 1 through 3, the wood heater shall be operated with the primary air supply inlet control, or other mechanical control device, set at a predetermined position necessary to obtain the average burn rate required for the category.
8.1.1.3 Alternative Burn Rates for Burn Rate Categories 1 and 2.
8.1.1.3.1 If a wood heater cannot be operated at a burn rate below 0.80 kg/hr (1.76 lb/hr), two test runs shall be conducted with burn rates within Category 2. If a wood heater cannot be operated at a burn rate below 1.25 kg/hr (2.76 lb/hr), the flue shall be dampered or the air supply otherwise controlled in order to achieve two test runs within Category 2.
8.1.1.3.2 Evidence that a wood heater cannot be operated at a burn rate less than 0.80 kg/hr shall include documentation of two or more attempts to operate the wood heater in burn rate Category 1 and fuel combustion has stopped, or results of two or more test runs demonstrating that the burn rates were greater than 0.80 kg/hr when the air supply controls were adjusted to the lowest possible position or settings. Stopped fuel combustion is evidenced when an elapsed time of 30 minutes or more has occurred without a measurable (<0.05 kg (0.1 lb) or 1.0 percent, whichever is greater) weight change in the test fuel charge. See also section 8.8.3. Report the evidence and the reasoning used to determine that a test in burn rate Category 1 cannot be achieved; for example, two unsuccessful attempts to operate at a burn rate of 0.4 kg/hr are not sufficient evidence that burn rate Category 1 cannot be achieved.
8.2 Catalytic Combustor and Wood Heater Aging. The catalyst-equipped wood heater or a wood heater of any type shall be aged before the certification test begins. The aging procedure shall be conducted and documented by a testing laboratory accredited according to procedures in § 60.535 of 40 CFR part 60.
8.2.1 Catalyst-equipped Wood Heater. Operate the catalyst-equipped wood heater using fuel meeting the specifications outlined in sections 7.1.1 through 7.1.3, or cordwood with a moisture content between 15 and 25 percent on a wet basis. Operate the wood heater at a medium burn rate (Category 2 or 3) with a new catalytic combustor in place and in operation for at least 50 hours. Record and report hourly catalyst exit temperature data (Section 8.6.2) and the hours of operation.
8.2.2 Non-Catalyst Wood Heater. Operate the wood heater using the fuel described in section 8.4.1 at a medium burn rate for at least 10 hours. Record and report the hours of operation.
8.3 Pretest Recordkeeping. Record the test fuel charge dimensions and weights, and wood heater and catalyst descriptions as shown in the example in Figure 28-1.
8.4 Wood Heater Installation. Assemble the wood heater appliance and parts in conformance with the manufacturer's written installation instructions. Place the wood heater centrally on the platform scale and connect the wood heater to the flue described in section 6.11. Clean the flue with an appropriately sized, wire chimney brush before each certification test.
8.5 Wood Heater Temperature Monitors.
8.5.1 For catalyst-equipped wood heaters, locate a temperature monitor (optional) about 25 mm (1 in.) upstream of the catalyst at the centroid of the catalyst face area, and locate a temperature monitor (mandatory) that will indicate the catalyst exhaust temperature. This temperature monitor is centrally located within 25 mm (1 in.) downstream at the centroid of catalyst face area. Record these locations.
8.5.2 Locate wood heater surface temperature monitors at five locations on the wood heater firebox exterior surface. Position the temperature monitors centrally on the top surface, on two sidewall surfaces, and on the bottom and back surfaces. Position the monitor sensing tip on the firebox exterior surface inside of any heat shield, air circulation walls, or other wall or shield separated from the firebox exterior surface. Surface temperature locations for unusual design shapes (e.g., spherical, etc.) shall be positioned so that there are four surface temperature monitors in both the vertical and horizontal planes passing at right angles through the centroid of the firebox, not including the fuel loading door (total of five temperature monitors).
8.6 Test Facility Conditions.
8.6.1 Locate the test facility temperature monitor on the horizontal plane that includes the primary air intake opening for the wood heater. Locate the temperature monitor 1 to 2 m (3 to 6 ft) from the front of the wood heater in the 90° sector in front of the wood heater.
8.6.2 Use an anemometer to measure the air velocity. Measure and record the room air velocity before the pretest ignition period (Section 8.7) and once immediately following the test run completion.
8.6.3 Measure and record the test facility's ambient relative humidity, barometric pressure, and temperature before and after each test run.
8.6.4 Measure and record the flue draft or static pressure in the flue at a location no greater than 0.3 m (1 ft) above the flue connector at the wood heater exhaust during the test run at the recording intervals (Section 8.8.2).
8.7 Wood Heater Firebox Volume.
8.7.1 Determine the firebox volume using the definitions for height, width, and length in section 3. Volume adjustments due to presence of firebrick and other permanent fixtures may be necessary. Adjust width and length dimensions to extend to the metal wall of the wood heater above the firebrick or permanent obstruction if the firebrick or obstruction extending the length of the side(s) or back wall extends less than one-third of the usable firebox height. Use the width or length dimensions inside the firebrick if the firebrick extends more than one-third of the usable firebox height. If a log retainer or grate is a permanent fixture and the manufacturer recommends that no fuel be placed outside the retainer, the area outside of the retainer is excluded from the firebox volume calculations.
8.7.2 In general, exclude the area above the ash lip if that area is less than 10 percent of the usable firebox volume. Otherwise, take into account consumer loading practices. For instance, if fuel is to be loaded front-to-back, an ash lip may be considered usable firebox volume.
8.7.3 Include areas adjacent to and above a baffle (up to two inches above the fuel loading opening) if four inches or more horizontal space exist between the edge of the baffle and a vertical obstruction (e.g., sidewalls or air channels).
8.8 Test Fuel Charge.
8.8.1 Prepare the test fuel pieces in accordance with the specifications outlined in sections 7.1 and 7.2. Determine the test fuel moisture content with a calibrated electrical resistance meter or other equivalent performance meter. If necessary, convert fuel moisture content values from dry basis (%Md) to wet basis (%Mw) in section 12.2 using Equation 28-1. Determine fuel moisture for each fuel piece (not including spacers) by averaging at least three moisture meter readings, one from each of three sides, measured parallel to the wood grain. Average all the readings for all the fuel pieces in the test fuel charge. If an electrical resistance type meter is used, penetration of insulated electrodes shall be one-fourth the thickness of the test fuel piece or 19 mm (0.75 in.), whichever is greater. Measure the moisture content within a 4-hour period prior to the test run. Determine the fuel temperature by measuring the temperature of the room where the wood has been stored for at least 24 hours prior to the moisture determination.
8.8.2 Attach the spacers to the test fuel pieces with uncoated, ungalvanized nails or staples as illustrated in Figure 28-2. Attachment of spacers to the top of the test fuel piece(s) on top of the test fuel charge is optional.
8.8.3 To avoid stacking difficulties, or when a whole number of test fuel pieces does not result, all piece lengths shall be adjusted uniformly to remain within the specified loading density. The shape of the test fuel crib shall be geometrically similar to the shape of the firebox volume without resorting to special angular or round cuts on the individual fuel pieces.
8.8.4 The test fuel loading density shall be 112 ±11.2 kg/m 3 (7 ±0.7 lb/ft3) of usable firebox volume on a wet basis.
8.9 Sampling Equipment. Prepare the sampling equipment as defined by the selected method (i.e., either Method 5G or Method 5H). Collect one particulate emission sample for each test run.
8.10 Secondary Air Adjustment Validation.
8.10.1 If design drawings do not show the introduction of secondary air into a chamber outside the firebox (see “secondary air supply” under section 3.0, Definitions), conduct a separate test of the wood heater's secondary air supply. Operate the wood heater at a burn rate in Category 1 (Section 8.1.1) with the secondary air supply operated following the manufacturer's written instructions. Start the secondary air validation test run as described in section 8.8.1, except no emission sampling is necessary and burn rate data shall be recorded at 5-minute intervals.
8.10.2 After the start of the test run, operate the wood heater with the secondary air supply set as per the manufacturer's instructions, but with no adjustments to this setting. After 25 percent of the test fuel has been consumed, adjust the secondary air supply controls to another setting, as per the manufacturer's instructions. Record the burn rate data (5-minute intervals) for 20 minutes following the air supply adjustment.
8.10.3 Adjust the air supply control(s) to the original position(s), operate at this condition for at least 20 minutes, and repeat the air supply adjustment procedure above. Repeat the procedure three times at equal intervals over the entire burn period as defined in section 8.8. If the secondary air adjustment results in a burn rate change of more than an average of 25 percent between the 20-minute periods before and after the secondary adjustments, the secondary air supply shall be considered a primary air supply, and no adjustment to this air supply is allowed during the test run.
8.10.4 The example sequence below describes a typical secondary air adjustment validation check. The first cycle begins after at least 25 percent of the test fuel charge has been consumed.
Cycle 1
Part 1, sec air adjusted to final position—20 min
Part 2, sec air adjusted to final position—20 min
Part 3, sec air adjusted to final position—20 min
Cycle 2
Part 1, sec air adjusted to final position—20 min
Part 2, sec air adjusted to final position—20 min
Part 3, sec air adjusted to final position—20 min
Cycle 3
Part 1, sec air adjusted to final position—20 min
Part 2, sec air adjusted to final position—20 min
Part 3, sec air adjusted to final position—20 min
Note that the cycles may overlap; that is, Part 3 of Cycle 1 may coincide in part or in total with Part 1 of Cycle 2. The calculation of the secondary air percent effect for this example is as follows:
8.11 Pretest Ignition. Build a fire in the wood heater in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions.
8.11.1 Pretest Fuel Charge. Crumpled newspaper loaded with kindling may be used to help ignite the pretest fuel. The pretest fuel, used to sustain the fire, shall meet the same fuel requirements prescribed in section 7.1. The pretest fuel charge shall consist of whole 2 × 4's that are no less than 1/3 the length of the test fuel pieces. Pieces of 4 × 4 lumber in approximately the same weight ratio as for the test fuel charge may be added to the pretest fuel charge.
8.11.2 Wood Heater Operation and Adjustments. Set the air inlet supply controls at any position that will maintain combustion of the pretest fuel load. At least one hour before the start of the test run, set the air supply controls at the approximate positions necessary to achieve the burn rate desired for the test run. Adjustment of the air supply controls, fuel addition or subtractions, and coalbed raking shall be kept to a minimum but are allowed up to 15 minutes prior to the start of the test run. For the purposes of this method, coalbed raking is the use of a metal tool (poker) to stir coals, break burning fuel into smaller pieces, dislodge fuel pieces from positions of poor combustion, and check for the condition of uniform charcoalization. Record all adjustments made to the air supply controls, adjustments to and additions or subtractions of fuel, and any other changes to wood heater operations that occur during pretest ignition period. Record fuel weight data and wood heater temperature measurements at 10-minute intervals during the hour of the pretest ignition period preceding the start of the test run. During the 15-minute period prior to the start of the test run, the wood heater loading door shall not be open more than a total of 1 minute. Coalbed raking is the only adjustment allowed during this period.
8.11.3 The weight of pretest fuel remaining at the start of the test run is determined as the difference between the weight of the wood heater with the remaining pretest fuel and the tare weight of the cleaned, dry wood heater with or without dry ash or sand added consistent with the manufacturer's instructions and the owner's manual. The tare weight of the wood heater must be determined with the wood heater (and ash, if added) in a dry condition.
8.12 Test Run. Complete a test run in each burn rate category, as follows:
8.12.1 Test Run Start.
8.12.1.1 When the kindling and pretest fuel have been consumed to leave a fuel weight between 20 and 25 percent of the weight of the test fuel charge, record the weight of the fuel remaining and start the test run. Record and report any other criteria, in addition to those specified in this section, used to determine the moment of the test run start (e.g., firebox or catalyst temperature), whether such criteria are specified by the wood heater manufacturer or the testing laboratory. Record all wood heater individual surface temperatures, catalyst temperatures, any initial sampling method measurement values, and begin the particulate emission sampling. Within 1 minute following the start of the test run, open the wood heater door, load the test fuel charge, and record the test fuel charge weight. Recording of average, rather than individual, surface temperatures is acceptable for tests conducted in accordance with § 60.533(o)(3)(i) of 40 CFR part 60.
8.12.1.2 Position the fuel charge so that the spacers are parallel to the floor of the firebox, with the spacer edges abutting each other. If loading difficulties result, some fuel pieces may be placed on edge. If the usable firebox volume is between 0.043 and 0.085 m 3 (1.5 and 3.0 ft 3), alternate the piece sizes in vertical stacking layers to the extent possible. For example, place 2 × 4's on the bottom layer in direct contact with the coal bed and 4 × 4's on the next layer, etc. (See Figure 28-3). Position the fuel pieces parallel to each other and parallel to the longest wall of the firebox to the extent possible within the specifications in section 8.8.
8.12.1.3 Load the test fuel in appliances having unusual or unconventional firebox design maintaining air space intervals between the test fuel pieces and in conformance with the manufacturer's written instructions. For any appliance that will not accommodate the loading arrangement specified in the paragraph above, the test facility personnel shall contact the Administrator for an alternative loading arrangement.
8.12.1.4 The wood heater door may remain open and the air supply controls adjusted up to five minutes after the start of the test run in order to make adjustments to the test fuel charge and to ensure ignition of the test fuel charge has occurred. Within the five minutes after the start of the test run, close the wood heater door and adjust the air supply controls to the position determined to produce the desired burn rate. No other adjustments to the air supply controls or the test fuel charge are allowed (except as specified in sections 8.12.3 and 8.12.4) after the first five minutes of the test run. Record the length of time the wood heater door remains open, the adjustments to the air supply controls, and any other operational adjustments.
8.12.2 Data Recording. Record on a data sheet similar to that shown in Figure 28-4, at intervals no greater than 10 minutes, fuel weight data, wood heater individual surface and catalyst temperature measurements, other wood heater operational data (e.g., draft), test facility temperature and sampling method data.
8.12.3 Test Fuel Charge Adjustment. The test fuel charge may be adjusted (i.e., repositioned) once during a test run if more than 60 percent of the initial test fuel charge weight has been consumed and more than 10 minutes have elapsed without a measurable (<0.05 kg (0.1 lb) or 1.0 percent, whichever is greater) weight change. The time used to make this adjustment shall be less than 15 seconds.
8.12.4 Air Supply Adjustment. Secondary air supply controls may be adjusted once during the test run following the manufacturer's written instructions (see section 8.10). No other air supply adjustments are allowed during the test run. Recording of wood heater flue draft during the test run is optional for tests conducted in accordance with § 60.533(o)(3)(i) of 40 CFR part 60.
8.12.5 Auxiliary Wood Heater Equipment Operation. Heat exchange blowers sold with the wood heater shall be operated during the test run following the manufacturer's written instructions. If no manufacturer's written instructions are available, operate the heat exchange blower in the “high” position. (Automatically operated blowers shall be operated as designed.) Shaker grates, by-pass controls, or other auxiliary equipment may be adjusted only one time during the test run following the manufacturer's written instructions.
Record all adjustments on a wood heater operational written record.
8.13 Test Run Completion. Continue emission sampling and wood heater operation for 2 hours. The test run is completed when the remaining weight of the test fuel charge is 0.00 kg (0.0 lb). End the test run when the scale has indicated a test fuel charge weight of 0.00 kg (0.0 lb) or less for 30 seconds. At the end of the test run, stop the particulate sampling, and record the final fuel weight, the run time, and all final measurement values.
8.14 Wood Heater Thermal Equilibrium. The average of the wood heater surface temperatures at the end of the test run shall agree with the average surface temperature at the start of the test run to within 70 °C (126 °F).
8.15 Consecutive Test Runs. Test runs on a wood heater may be conducted consecutively provided that a minimum one-hour interval occurs between test runs.
8.16 Additional Test Runs. The testing laboratory may conduct more than one test run in each of the burn rate categories specified in section 8.1.1. If more than one test run is conducted at a specified burn rate, the results from at least two-thirds of the test runs in that burn rate category shall be used in calculating the weighted average emission rate (see section 12.2). The measurement data and results of all test runs shall be reported regardless of which values are used in calculating the weighted average emission rate (see note in section 8.1).
9.0 Quality Control
Same as section 9.0 of either Method 5G or Method 5H.
10.0 Calibration and Standardizations
Same as section 10.0 of either Method 5G or Method 5H, with the addition of the following:
10.1 Platform Scale. Perform a multi-point calibration (at least five points spanning the operational range) of the platform scale before its initial use. The scale manufacturer's calibration results are sufficient for this purpose. Before each certification test, audit the scale with the wood heater in place by weighing at least one calibration weight (Class F) that corresponds to between 20 percent and 80 percent of the expected test fuel charge weight. If the scale cannot reproduce the value of the calibration weight within 0.05 kg (0.1 lb) or 1 percent of the expected test fuel charge weight, whichever is greater, recalibrate the scale before use with at least five calibration weights spanning the operational range of the scale.
10.2 Balance (optional). Calibrate as described in section 10.1.
10.3 Temperature Monitor. Calibrate as in Method 2, section 4.3, before the first certification test and semiannually thereafter.
10.4 Moisture Meter. Calibrate as per the manufacturer's instructions before each certification test.
10.5 Anemometer. Calibrate the anemometer as specified by the manufacturer's instructions before the first certification test and semiannually thereafter.
10.6 Barometer. Calibrate against a mercury barometer before the first certification test and semiannually thereafter.
10.7 Draft Gauge. Calibrate as per the manufacturer's instructions; a liquid manometer does not require calibration.
10.8 Humidity Gauge. Calibrate as per the manufacturer's instructions before the first certification test and semiannually thereafter.
11.0 Analytical Procedures
Same as section 11.0 of either Method 5G or Method 5H.
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
Same as section 12.0 of either Method 5G or Method 5H, with the addition of the following:
12.1 Nomenclature.
BR = Dry wood burn rate, kg/hr (lb/hr)
Ei = Emission rate for test run, i, from Method 5G or 5H, g/hr (lb/hr)
Ew = Weighted average emission rate, g/hr (lb/hr)
ki = Test run weighting factor = Pi + 1 − Pi−1
%Md = Fuel moisture content, dry basis, percent.
%Mw = Average moisture in test fuel charge, wet basis, percent.
n = Total number of test runs.
Pi = Probability for burn rate during test run, i, obtained from Table 28-1. Use linear interpolation to determine probability values for burn rates between those listed on the table.
Wwd = Total mass of wood burned during the test run, kg (lb).
12.2 Wet Basis Fuel Moisture Content.
12.3 Weighted Average Emission Rate. Calculate the weighted average emission rate (Ew) using Equation 28-1:
12.3.1 Example Calculation of Weighted Average Emission Rate.
| Burn rate category | Test No. |
Burn rate (Dry-kg/hr) |
Emissions (g/hr) |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | 1 | 0.65 | 5.0 |
| 21 | 2 | 0.85 | 6.7 |
| 2 | 3 | 0.90 | 4.7 |
| 2 | 4 | 1.00 | 5.3 |
| 3 | 5 | 1.45 | 3.8 |
| 4 | 6 | 2.00 | 5.1 |
| 1 As permitted in section 6.6, this test run may be omitted from the calculation of the weighted average emission rate because three runs were conducted for this burn rate category. |
| Test No. | Burn rate | Pi | Ei | Ki |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 0 | 0.000 | |||
| 1 | 0.65 | 0.121 | 5.0 | 0.300 |
| 2 | 0.90 | 0.300 | 4.7 | 0.259 |
| 3 | 1.00 | 0.380 | 5.3 | 0.422 |
| 4 | 1.45 | 0.722 | 3.8 | 0.532 |
| 5 | 2.00 | 0.912 | 5.1 | 0.278 |
| 6 | 1.000 | |||
| K1 = P2 − P0 = 0.300 − 0 = 0.300 | ||||
| K2 = P3 − P1 = 0.381 − 0.121 = 0.259 | ||||
| K3 = P4 − P2 = 0.722 − 0.300 = 0.422 | ||||
| K4 = P5 − P3 = 0.912 − 0.380 = 0.532 | ||||
| K5 = P6 − P4 = 1.000 − 0.722 = 0.278 |
Weighted Average Emission Rate, Ew, Calculation
12.4 Average Wood Heater Surface Temperatures. Calculate the average of the wood heater surface temperatures for the start of the test run (Section 8.12.1) and for the test run completion (Section 8.13). If the two average temperatures do not agree within 70 °C (125 °F), report the test run results, but do not include the test run results in the test average. Replace such test run results with results from another test run in the same burn rate category.
12.5 Burn Rate. Calculate the burn rate (BR) using Equation 28-3:
12.6 Reporting Criteria. Submit both raw and reduced test data for wood heater tests.
12.6.1 Suggested Test Report Format.
12.6.1.1 Introduction.
12.6.1.1.1 Purpose of test-certification, audit, efficiency, research and development.
12.6.1.1.2 Wood heater identification-manufacturer, model number, catalytic/noncatalytic, options.
12.6.1.1.3 Laboratory-name, location (altitude), participants.
12.6.1.1.4 Test information-date wood heater received, date of tests, sampling methods used, number of test runs.
12.6.1.2 Summary and Discussion of Results
12.6.1.2.1 Table of results (in order of increasing burn rate)-test run number, burn rate, particulate emission rate, efficiency (if determined), averages (indicate which test runs are used).
12.6.1.2.2 Summary of other data-test facility conditions, surface temperature averages, catalyst temperature averages, pretest fuel weights, test fuel charge weights, run times.
12.6.1.2.3 Discussion-Burn rate categories achieved, test run result selection, specific test run problems and solutions.
12.6.1.3 Process Description.
12.6.1.3.1 Wood heater dimensions-volume, height, width, lengths (or other linear dimensions), weight, volume adjustments.
12.6.1.3.2 Firebox configuration-air supply locations and operation, air supply introduction location, refractory location and dimensions, catalyst location, baffle and by-pass location and operation (include line drawings or photographs).
12.6.1.3.3 Process operation during test-air supply settings and adjustments, fuel bed adjustments, draft.
12.6.1.3.4 Test fuel-test fuel properties (moisture and temperature), test fuel crib description (include line drawing or photograph), test fuel loading density.
12.6.1.4 Sampling Locations.
12.6.1.4.1 Describe sampling location relative to wood heater. Include drawing or photograph.
12.6.1.5 Sampling and Analytical Procedures
12.6.1.5.1 Sampling methods-brief reference to operational and sampling procedures and optional and alternative procedures used.
12.6.1.5.2 Analytical methods-brief description of sample recovery and analysis procedures.
12.6.1.6 Quality Control and Assurance Procedures and Results
12.6.1.6.1 Calibration procedures and results-certification procedures, sampling and analysis procedures.
12.6.1.6.2 Test method quality control procedures-leak-checks, volume meter checks, stratification (velocity) checks, proportionality results.
12.6.1.7 Appendices
12.6.1.7.1 Results and Example Calculations. Complete summary tables and accompanying examples of all calculations.
12.6.1.7.2 Raw Data. Copies of all uncorrected data sheets for sampling measurements, temperature records and sample recovery data. Copies of all pretest burn rate and wood heater temperature data.
12.6.1.7.3 Sampling and Analytical Procedures. Detailed description of procedures followed by laboratory personnel in conducting the certification test, emphasizing particular parts of the procedures differing from the methods (e.g., approved alternatives).
12.6.1.7.4 Calibration Results. Summary of all calibrations, checks, and audits pertinent to certification test results with dates.
12.6.1.7.5 Participants. Test personnel, manufacturer representatives, and regulatory observers.
12.6.1.7.6 Sampling and Operation Records. Copies of uncorrected records of activities not included on raw data sheets (e.g., wood heater door open times and durations).
12.6.1.7.7 Additional Information. Wood heater manufacturer's written instructions for operation during the certification test.
12.6.2.1 Wood Heater Identification. Report wood heater identification information. An example data form is shown in Figure 28-4.
12.6.2.2 Test Facility Information. Report test facility temperature, air velocity, and humidity information. An example data form is shown on Figure 28-4.
12.6.2.3 Test Equipment Calibration and Audit Information. Report calibration and audit results for the platform scale, test fuel balance, test fuel moisture meter, and sampling equipment including volume metering systems and gaseous analyzers.
12.6.2.4 Pretest Procedure Description. Report all pretest procedures including pretest fuel weight, burn rates, wood heater temperatures, and air supply settings. An example data form is shown on Figure 28-4.
12.6.2.5 Particulate Emission Data. Report a summary of test results for all test runs and the weighted average emission rate. Submit copies of all data sheets and other records collected during the testing. Submit examples of all calculations.
13.0 Method Performance [Reserved]
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 Alternative Procedures
16.1 Pellet Burning Heaters. Certification testing requirements and procedures for pellet burning wood heaters are identical to those for other wood heaters, with the following exceptions:
16.1.1 Test Fuel Properties. The test fuel shall be all wood pellets with a moisture content no greater than 20 percent on a wet basis (25 percent on a dry basis). Determine the wood moisture content with either ASTM D 2016-74 or 83, (Method A), ASTM D 4444-92, or ASTM D 4442-84 or 92 (all noted ASTM standards are incorporated by reference—see § 60.17).
16.1.2 Test Fuel Charge Specifications. The test fuel charge size shall be as per the manufacturer's written instructions for maintaining the desired burn rate.
16.1.3 Wood Heater Firebox Volume. The firebox volume need not be measured or determined for establishing the test fuel charge size. The firebox dimensions and other heater specifications needed to identify the heater for certification purposes shall be reported.
16.1.4 Heater Installation. Arrange the heater with the fuel supply hopper on the platform scale as described in section 8.6.1.
16.1.5 Pretest Ignition. Start a fire in the heater as directed by the manufacturer's written instructions, and adjust the heater controls to achieve the desired burn rate. Operate the heater at the desired burn rate for at least 1 hour before the start of the test run.
16.1.6 Test Run. Complete a test run in each burn rate category as follows:
16.1.6.1 Test Run Start. When the wood heater has operated for at least 1 hour at the desired burn rate, add fuel to the supply hopper as necessary to complete the test run, record the weight of the fuel in the supply hopper (the wood heater weight), and start the test run. Add no additional fuel to the hopper during the test run.
Record all the wood heater surface temperatures, the initial sampling method measurement values, the time at the start of the test, and begin the emission sampling. Make no adjustments to the wood heater air supply or wood supply rate during the test run.
16.1.6.2 Data Recording. Record the fuel (wood heater) weight data, wood heater temperature and operational data, and emission sampling data as described in section 8.12.2.
16.1.6.3 Test Run Completion. Continue emission sampling and wood heater operation for 2 hours. At the end of the test run, stop the particulate sampling, and record the final fuel weight, the run time, and all final measurement values, including all wood heater individual surface temperatures.
16.1.7 Calculations. Determine the burn rate using the difference between the initial and final fuel (wood heater) weights and the procedures described in section 12.4. Complete the other calculations as described in section 12.0.
17.0 References
Same as Method 5G, with the addition of the following:
1. Radian Corporation. OMNI Environmental Services, Inc., Cumulative Probability for a Given Burn Rate Based on Data Generated in the CONEG and BPA Studies. Package of materials submitted to the Fifth Session of the Regulatory Negotiation Committee, July 16-17, 1986.
18.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
| Burn rate (kg/hr-dry) |
Cumulative probability (P) |
Burn rate (kg/hr-dry) |
Cumulative probability (P) |
Burn rate (kg/hr-dry) |
Cumulative probability (P) |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 0.00 | 0.000 | 1.70 | 0.840 | 3.40 | 0.989 |
| 0.05 | 0.002 | 1.75 | 0.857 | 3.45 | 0.989 |
| 0.10 | 0.007 | 1.80 | 0.875 | 3.50 | 0.990 |
| 0.15 | 0.012 | 1.85 | 0.882 | 3.55 | 0.991 |
| 0.20 | 0.016 | 1.90 | 0.895 | 3.60 | 0.991 |
| 0.25 | 0.021 | 1.95 | 0.906 | 3.65 | 0.992 |
| 0.30 | 0.028 | 2.00 | 0.912 | 3.70 | 0.992 |
| 0.35 | 0.033 | 2.05 | 0.920 | 3.75 | 0.992 |
| 0.40 | 0.041 | 2.10 | 0.925 | 3.80 | 0.993 |
| 0.45 | 0.054 | 2.15 | 0.932 | 3.85 | 0.994 |
| 0.50 | 0.065 | 2.20 | 0.936 | 3.90 | 0.994 |
| 0.55 | 0.086 | 2.25 | 0.940 | 3.95 | 0.994 |
| 0.60 | 0.100 | 2.30 | 0.945 | 4.00 | 0.994 |
| 0.65 | 0.121 | 2.35 | 0.951 | 4.05 | 0.995 |
| 0.70 | 0.150 | 2.40 | 0.956 | 4.10 | 0.995 |
| 0.75 | 0.185 | 2.45 | 0.959 | 4.15 | 0.995 |
| 0.80 | 0.220 | 2.50 | 0.964 | 4.20 | 0.995 |
| 0.85 | 0.254 | 2.55 | 0.968 | 4.25 | 0.995 |
| 0.90 | 0.300 | 2.60 | 0.972 | 4.30 | 0.996 |
| 0.95 | 0.328 | 2.65 | 0.975 | 4.35 | 0.996 |
| 1.00 | 0.380 | 2.70 | 0.977 | 4.40 | 0.996 |
| 1.05 | 0.407 | 2.75 | 0.979 | 4.45 | 0.996 |
| 1.10 | 0.460 | 2.80 | 0.980 | 4.50 | 0.996 |
| 1.15 | 0.490 | 2.85 | 0.981 | 4.55 | 0.996 |
| 1.20 | 0.550 | 2.90 | 0.982 | 4.60 | 0.996 |
| 1.25 | 0.572 | 2.95 | 0.984 | 4.65 | 0.996 |
| 1.30 | 0.620 | 3.00 | 0.984 | 4.70 | 0.996 |
| 1.35 | 0.654 | 3.05 | 0.985 | 4.75 | 0.997 |
| 1.40 | 0.695 | 3.10 | 0.986 | 4.80 | 0.997 |
| 1.45 | 0.722 | 3.15 | 0.987 | 4.85 | 0.997 |
| 1.50 | 0.750 | 3.20 | 0.987 | 4.90 | 0.997 |
| 1.55 | 0.779 | 3.25 | 0.988 | 4.95 | 0.997 |
| 1.60 | 0.800 | 3.30 | 0.988 | ≥5.00 | 1.000 |
| 1.65 | 0.825 | 3.35 | 0.989 |
Method 28A—Measurement of Air- to-Fuel Ratio and Minimum Achievable Burn Rates for Wood-Fired Appliances
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Analyte. Particulate matter (PM). No CAS number assigned.
1.2 Applicability. This method is applicable for the measurement of air-to-fuel ratios and minimum achievable burn rates, for determining whether a wood-fired appliance is an affected facility, as specified in 40 CFR 60.530.
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant sampling methods.
2.0 Summary of Method
2.1 A gas sample is extracted from a location in the stack of a wood-fired appliance while the appliance is operating at a prescribed set of conditions. The gas sample is analyzed for carbon dioxide (CO2), oxygen (O2), and carbon monoxide (CO). These stack gas components are measured for determining the dry molecular weight of the exhaust gas. Total moles of exhaust gas are determined stoichiometrically. Air-to-fuel ratio is determined by relating the mass of dry combustion air to the mass of dry fuel consumed.
3.0 Definitions
Same as Method 28, section 3.0, with the addition of the following:
3.1 Air-to-fuel ratio means the ratio of the mass of dry combustion air introduced into the firebox to the mass of dry fuel consumed (grams of dry air per gram of dry wood burned).
4.0 Interferences [Reserved]
5.0 Safety
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health practices and to determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to performing this test method.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
6.1 Test Facility. Insulated Solid Pack Chimney, Platform Scale and Monitor, Test Facility Temperature Monitor, Balance, Moisture Meter, Anemometer, Barometer, Draft Gauge, Humidity Gauge, Wood Heater Flue, and Test Facility. Same as Method 28, sections 6.1, 6.2, and 6.4 to 6.12, respectively.
6.2 Sampling System. Probe, Condenser, Valve, Pump, Rate Meter, Flexible Bag, Pressure Gauge, and Vacuum Gauge. Same as Method 3, sections 6.2.1 to 6.2.8, respectively. Alternatively, the sampling system described in Method 5H, section 6.1 may be used.
6.3 Exhaust Gas Analysis. Use one or both of the following:
6.3.1 Orsat Analyzer. Same as Method 3, section 6.1.3
6.3.2 Instrumental Analyzers. Same as Method 5H, sections 6.1.3.4 and 6.1.3.5, for CO2 and CO analyzers, except use a CO analyzer with a range of 0 to 5 percent and use a CO2 analyzer with a range of 0 to 5 percent. Use an O2 analyzer capable of providing a measure of O2 in the range of 0 to 25 percent by volume at least once every 10 minutes.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
7.1 Test Fuel and Test Fuel Spacers. Same as Method 28, sections 7.1 and 7.2, respectively.
7.2 Cylinder Gases. For each of the three analyzers, use the same concentration as specified in sections 7.2.1, 7.2.2, and 7.2.3 of Method 6C.
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport
8.1 Wood Heater Air Supply Adjustments.
8.1.1 This section describes how dampers are to be set or adjusted and air inlet ports closed or sealed during Method 28A tests. The specifications in this section are intended to ensure that affected facility determinations are made on the facility configurations that could reasonably be expected to be employed by the user. They are also intended to prevent circumvention of the standard through the addition of an air port that would often be blocked off in actual use. These specifications are based on the assumption that consumers will remove such items as dampers or other closure mechanism stops if this can be done readily with household tools; that consumers will block air inlet passages not visible during normal operation of the appliance using aluminum tape or parts generally available at retail stores; and that consumers will cap off any threaded or flanged air inlets. They also assume that air leakage around glass doors, sheet metal joints or through inlet grilles visible during normal operation of the appliance would not be further blocked or taped off by a consumer.
8.1.2 It is not the intention of this section to cause an appliance that is clearly designed, intended, and, in most normal installations, used as a fireplace to be converted into a wood heater for purposes of applicability testing. Such a fireplace would be identifiable by such features as large or multiple glass doors or panels that are not gasketed, relatively unrestricted air inlets intended, in large part, to limit smoking and fogging of glass surfaces, and other aesthetic features not normally included in wood heaters.
8.1.3 Adjustable Air Supply Mechanisms. Any commercially available flue damper, other adjustment mechanism or other air inlet port that is designed, intended or otherwise reasonably expected to be adjusted or closed by consumers, installers, or dealers and which could restrict air into the firebox shall be set so as to achieve minimum air into the firebox (i.e., closed off or set in the most closed position).
8.1.3.1 Flue dampers, mechanisms and air inlet ports which could reasonably be expected to be adjusted or closed would include:
8.1.3.1.1 All internal or externally adjustable mechanisms (including adjustments that affect the tightness of door fittings) that are accessible either before and/or after installation.
8.1.3.1.2 All mechanisms, other inlet ports, or inlet port stops that are identified in the owner's manual or in any dealer literature as being adjustable or alterable. For example, an inlet port that could be used to provide access to an outside air duct but which is identified as being closable through use of additional materials whether or not they are supplied with the facility.
8.1.3.1.3 Any combustion air inlet port or commercially available flue damper or mechanism stop, which would readily lend itself to closure by consumers who are handy with household tools by the removal of parts or the addition of parts generally available at retail stores (e.g., addition of a pipe cap or plug, addition of a small metal plate to an inlet hole on a nondecorative sheet metal surface, or removal of riveted or screwed damper stops).
8.1.3.1.4 Any flue damper, other adjustment mechanisms or other air inlet ports that are found and documented in several (e.g., a number sufficient to reasonably conclude that the practice is not unique or uncommon) actual installations as having been adjusted to a more closed position, or closed by consumers, installers, or dealers.
8.1.4 Air Supply Adjustments During Test. The test shall be performed with all air inlets identified under this section in the closed or most closed position or in the configuration which otherwise achieves the lowest air inlet (i.e., greatest blockage).
8.1.5 Notwithstanding section 8.1.1, any flue damper, adjustment mechanism, or air inlet port (whether or not equipped with flue dampers or adjusting mechanisms) that is visible during normal operation of the appliance and which could not reasonably be closed further or blocked except through means that would significantly degrade the aesthetics of the facility (e.g., through use of duct tape) will not be closed further or blocked.
8.2 Sampling System.
8.2.1 Sampling Location. Same as Method 5H, section 8.1.2.
8.2.2 Sampling System Set Up. Set up the sampling equipment as described in Method 3, section 8.1.
8.3 Wood Heater Installation, Test Facility Conditions, Wood Heater Firebox Volume, and Test Fuel Charge. Same as Method 28, sections 8.4 and 8.6 to 8.8, respectively.
8.4 Pretest Ignition. Same as Method 28, section 8.11. Set the wood heater air supply settings to achieve a burn rate in Category 1 or the lowest achievable burn rate (see section 8.1).
8.5 Test Run. Same as Method 28, section 8.12. Begin sample collection at the start of the test run as defined in Method 28, section 8.12.1.
8.5.1 Gas Analysis.
8.5.1.1 If Method 3 is used, collect a minimum of two bag samples simultaneously at a constant sampling rate for the duration of the test run. A minimum sample volume of 30 liters (1.1 ft 3) per bag is recommended.
8.5.1.2 If instrumental gas concentration measurement procedures are used, conduct the gas measurement system performance tests, analyzer calibration, and analyzer calibration error check outlined in Method 6C, sections 8.2.3, 8.2.4, 8.5, and 10.0, respectively. Sample at a constant rate for the duration of the test run.
8.5.2 Data Recording. Record wood heater operational data, test facility temperature, sample train flow rate, and fuel weight data at intervals of no greater than 10 minutes.
8.5.3 Test Run Completion. Same as Method 28, section 8.13.
9.0 Quality Control
9.1 Data Validation. The following quality control procedure is suggested to provide a check on the quality of the data.
9.1.1 Calculate a fuel factor, Fo, using Equation 28A-1 in section 12.2.
9.1.2 If CO is present in quantities measurable by this method, adjust the O2 and CO2 values before performing the calculation for Fo as shown in section 12.3 and 12.4.
9.1.3 Compare the calculated Fo factor with the expected Fo range for wood (1.000-1.120). Calculated Fo values beyond this acceptable range should be investigated before accepting the test results. For example, the strength of the solutions in the gas analyzer and the analyzing technique should be checked by sampling and analyzing a known concentration, such as air. If no detectable or correctable measurement error can be identified, the test should be repeated. Alternatively, determine a range of air-to-fuel ratio results that could include the correct value by using an Fo value of 1.05 and calculating a potential range of CO2 and O2 values. Acceptance of such results will be based on whether the calculated range includes the exemption limit and the judgment of the Administrator.
9.2 Method 3 Analyses. Compare the results of the analyses of the two bag samples. If all the gas components (O2, CO, and CO2) values for the two analyses agree within 0.5 percent (e.g., 6.0 percent O2 for bag 1 and 6.5 percent O2 for bag 2, agree within 0.5 percent), the results of the bag analyses may be averaged for the calculations in section 12. If the analysis results do not agree within 0.5 percent for each component, calculate the air-to-fuel ratio using both sets of analyses and report the results.
10.0 Calibration and Standardization [Reserved]
11.0 Analytical Procedures
11.1 Method 3 Integrated Bag Samples. Within 4 hours after the sample collection, analyze each bag sample for percent CO2, O2, and CO using an Orsat analyzer as described in Method 3, section 11.0.
11.2 Instrumental Analyzers. Average the percent CO2, CO, and O2 values for the test run.
12.0 Data Analyses and Calculations
Carry out calculations, retaining at least one extra significant figure beyond that of the acquired data. Round off figure after the final calculation. Other forms of the equations may be used as long as they give equivalent results.
12.1 Nomenclature.
Md = Dry molecular weight, g/g-mole (lb/lb-mole).
NT = Total gram-moles of dry exhaust gas per kg of wood burned (lb-moles/lb).
%CO2 = Percent CO2 by volume (dry basis).
%CO = Percent CO by volume (dry basis).
%N2 = Percent N2 by volume (dry basis).
%O2 = Percent O2 by volume (dry basis).
YHC = Assumed mole fraction of HC (dry as CH4) = 0.0088 for catalytic wood heaters; = 0.0132 for noncatalytic wood heaters. = 0.0080 for pellet-fired wood heaters.
YCO = Measured mole fraction of CO (e.g., 1 percent CO = .01 mole fraction), g/g-mole (lb/lb-mole).
YCO2 = Measured mole fraction of COCO2 (e.g., 10 percent CO2 = .10 mole fraction), g/g-mole (lb/lb-mole).
0.280 = Molecular weight of N2 or CO, divided by 100.
0.320 = Molecular weight of O2 divided by 100.
0.440 = Molecular weight of CO2 divided by 100.
20.9 = Percent O2 by volume in ambient air.
42.5 = Gram-moles of carbon in 1 kg of dry wood assuming 51 percent carbon by weight dry basis (.0425 lb/lb-mole).
510 = Grams of carbon in exhaust gas per kg of wood burned.
1,000 = Grams in 1 kg.
12.2 Fuel Factor. Use Equation 28A-1 to calculate the fuel factor.
12. 3 Adjusted %CO2. Use Equation 28A-2 to adjust CO2 values if measurable CO is present.
12.4 Adjusted %O2. Use Equation 28A-3 to adjust O2 value if measurable CO is present.
12.5 Dry Molecular Weight. Use Equation 28A-4 to calculate the dry molecular weight of the stack gas.
12.6 Dry Moles of Exhaust Gas. Use Equation 28A-5 to calculate the total moles of dry exhaust gas produced per kilogram of dry wood burned.
12.7 Air-to-Fuel Ratio. Use Equation 28A-6 to calculate the air-to-fuel ratio on a dry mass basis.
12.8 Burn Rate. Calculate the fuel burn rate as in Method 28, section 12.4.
13.0 Method Performance [Reserved]
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 References
Same as section 16.0 of Method 3 and section 17 of Method 5G.
17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data [Reserved]
Test Method 28R for Certification and Auditing of Wood Heaters
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 This test method applies to certification and auditing of wood-fired room heaters and fireplace inserts.
1.2 The test method covers the fueling and operating protocol for measuring particulate emissions, as well as determining burn rates, heat output and efficiency.
1.3 Particulate emissions are measured by the dilution tunnel method as specified in ASTM E2515-11 Standard Test Method for Determination of Particulate Matter Emissions Collected in a Dilution Tunnel (IBR, see § 60.17). Upon request, four-inch filters may be used. Upon request, Teflon membrane filters or Teflon-coated glass fiber filters may be used.
2.0 Procedures
2.1 This method incorporates the provisions of ASTM E2780-10 (IBR, see § 60.17) except as follows:
2.1.1 The burn rate categories, low burn rate requirement, and weightings in Method 28 shall be used.
2.1.2 The startup procedures shall be the same as in Method 28.
2.1.3 Manufacturers shall not specify a smaller volume of the firebox for testing than the full usable firebox.
2.1.4 Prior to testing, the heater must be operated for a minimum of 50 hours using a medium burn rate. The conditioning may be at the manufacturer's facility prior to the certification test. If the conditioning is at the certification test laboratory, the pre-burn for the first test can be included as part of the conditioning requirement.
2.2 Manufacturers may use ASTM E871-82 (reapproved 2013) (IBR, see § 60.17) as an alternative to the procedures in Method 5H or Method 28 for determining total weight basis moisture in the analysis sample of particulate wood fuel.
Test Method 28WHH for Measurement of Particulate Emissions and Heating Efficiency of Wood-Fired Hydronic Heating Appliances
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 This test method applies to wood-fired hydronic heating appliances. The units typically transfer heat through circulation of a liquid heat exchange media such as water or a water-antifreeze mixture.
1.2 The test method measures particulate emissions and delivered heating efficiency at specified heat output rates based on the appliance's rated heating capacity.
1.3 Particulate emissions are measured by the dilution tunnel method as specified in ASTM E2515-11 Standard Test Method for Determination of Particulate Matter Emissions Collected in a Dilution Tunnel (IBR, see § 60.17). Upon request, four-inch filters may be used. Upon request, Teflon membrane filters or Teflon-coated glass fiber filters may be used. Delivered efficiency is measured by determining the heat output through measurement of the flow rate and temperature change of water circulated through a heat exchanger external to the appliance and determining the input from the mass of dry wood fuel and its higher heating value. Delivered efficiency does not attempt to account for pipeline loss.
1.4 Products covered by this test method include both pressurized and non-pressurized heating appliances intended to be fired with wood. These products are wood-fired hydronic heating appliances that the manufacturer specifies for indoor or outdoor installation. They are often connected to a heat exchanger by insulated pipes and normally include a pump to circulate heated liquid. They are used to heat structures such as homes, barns and greenhouses and can heat domestic hot water, spas or swimming pools.
1.5 Distinguishing features of products covered by this standard include:
1.5.1 Manufacturer specifies for indoor or outdoor installation.
1.5.2 A firebox with an access door for hand loading of fuel.
1.5.3 Typically, an aquastat that controls combustion air supply to maintain the liquid in the appliance within a predetermined temperature range provided sufficient fuel is available in the firebox.
1.5.4 A chimney or vent that exhausts combustion products from the appliance.
1.6 The values stated are to be regarded as the standard whether in I-P or SI units. The values given in parentheses are for information only.
2.0 Summary of Method and References
2.1 Particulate matter emissions are measured from a wood-fired hydronic heating appliance burning a prepared test fuel crib in a test facility maintained at a set of prescribed conditions. Procedures for determining burn rates, and particulate emissions rates and for reducing data are provided.
2.2 Referenced Documents
2.2.1 EPA Standards
2.2.1.1 Method 28 Certification and Auditing of Wood Heaters
2.2.2 Other Standards
2.2.2.1 ASTM E2515-11—Standard Test Method for Determination of Particulate Matter Emissions Collected in a Dilution Tunnel (IBR, see § 60.17).
2.2.2.2 CSA-B415.1-10 Performance Testing of Solid-Fuel-Burning Heating Appliances (IBR, see § 60.17).
3.0 Terminology
3.1 Definitions.
3.1.1 Hydronic Heating—A heating system in which a heat source supplies energy to a liquid heat exchange media such as water that is circulated to a heating load and returned to the heat source through pipes.
3.1.2 Aquastat—A control device that opens or closes a circuit to control the rate of fuel consumption in response to the temperature of the heating media in the heating appliance.
3.1.3 Delivered Efficiency—The percentage of heat available in a test fuel charge that is delivered to a simulated heating load as specified in this test method.
3.1.4 Manufacturer's Rated Heat Output Capacity—The value in Btu/hr (MJ/hr) that the manufacturer specifies that a particular model of hydronic heating appliance is capable of supplying at its design capacity as verified by testing, in accordance with Section 13.
3.1.5 Burn Rate—The rate at which test fuel is consumed in an appliance. Measured in pounds (lbs) or kilograms of wood (dry basis) per hour (lb/hr or kg/hr).
3.1.6 Firebox—The chamber in the appliance in which the test fuel charge is placed and combusted.
3.1.7 Test Fuel Charge—The collection of test fuel layers placed in the appliance at the start of the emission test run.
3.1.8 Test Fuel Layer—Horizontal arrangement of test fuel units.
3.1.9 Test Fuel Unit—One or more test fuel pieces with 3/4 inch (19 mm) spacers attached to the bottom and to one side. If composed of multiple test fuel pieces, the bottom spacer may be one continuous piece.
3.1.10 Test Fuel Piece—A single 4 × 4 (4 ±0.25 inches by 4 ±0.25 inches) [100 ±6 mm by 100 ±6 mm] white or red oak wood piece cut to the length required.
3.1.11 Test Run—An individual emission test that encompasses the time required to consume the mass of the test fuel charge.
3.1.12 Overall Efficiency (SLM)—The efficiency for each test run as determined using the CSA B415.1-10 (IBR, see § 60.17) stack loss method.
3.1.13 Thermopile—A device consisting of a number of thermocouples connected in series, used for measuring differential temperature.
4.0 Summary of Test Method
4.1 Dilution Tunnel. Emissions are determined using the “dilution tunnel” method specified in ASTM E2515-11 Standard Test Method for Determination of Particulate Matter Emissions Collected in a Dilution Tunnel (IBR, see § 60.17). The flow rate in the dilution tunnel is maintained at a constant level throughout the test cycle and accurately measured. Samples of the dilution tunnel flow stream are extracted at a constant flow rate and drawn through high efficiency filters. The filters are dried and weighed before and after the test to determine the emissions catch and this value is multiplied by the ratio of tunnel flow to filter flow to determine the total particulate emissions produced in the test cycle.
4.2 Efficiency. The efficiency test procedure takes advantage of the fact that this type of appliance delivers heat through circulation of the heated liquid (water) from the appliance to a remote heat exchanger and back to the appliance. Measurements of the water temperature difference as it enters and exits the heat exchanger along with the measured flow rate allow for an accurate determination of the useful heat output of the appliance. The input is determined by weight of the test fuel charge, adjusted for moisture content, multiplied by the higher heating value. Additional measurements of the appliance weight and temperature at the beginning and end of a test cycle are used to correct for heat stored in the appliance. Overall efficiency (SLM) is determined using the CSA B415.1-10 (IBR, see § 60.17) stack loss method for data quality assurance purposes.
4.3 Operation. Appliance operation is conducted on a hot-to-hot test cycle meaning that the appliance is brought to operating temperature and a coal bed is established prior to the addition of the test fuel charge and measurements are made for each test fuel charge cycle. The measurements are made under constant heat draw conditions within predetermined ranges. No attempt is made to modulate the heat demand to simulate an indoor thermostat cycling on and off in response to changes in the indoor environment. Four test categories are used. These are:
4.3.1 Category I: A heat output of 15 percent or less of manufacturer's rated heat output capacity.
4.3.2 Category II: A heat output of 16 percent to 24 percent of manufacturer's rated heat output capacity.
4.3.3 Category III: A heat output of 25 percent to 50 percent of manufacturer's rated heat output capacity.
4.3.4 Category IV: Manufacturer's rated heat output capacity.
5.0 Significance and Use
5.1 The measurement of particulate matter emission rates is an important test method widely used in the practice of air pollution control.
5.1.1 These measurements, when approved by state or federal agencies, are often required for the purpose of determining compliance with regulations and statutes.
5.1.2 The measurements made before and after design modifications are necessary to demonstrate the effectiveness of design changes in reducing emissions and make this standard an important tool in manufacturers' research and development programs.
5.2 Measurement of heating efficiency provides a uniform basis for comparison of product performance that is useful to the consumer. It is also required to relate emissions produced to the useful heat production.
5.3 This is a laboratory method and is not intended to be fully representative of all actual field use. It is recognized that users of hand-fired, wood-burning equipment have a great deal of influence over the performance of any wood-burning appliance. Some compromises in realism have been made in the interest of providing a reliable and repeatable test method.
6.0 Test Equipment
6.1 Scale. A platform scale capable of weighing the appliance under test and associated parts and accessories when completely filled with water to an accuracy of ±1.0 pound (±0.5 kg).
6.2 Heat Exchanger. A water-to-water heat exchanger capable of dissipating the expected heat output from the system under test.
6.3 Water Temperature Difference Measurement. A Type—T 'special limits' thermopile with a minimum of 5 pairs of junctions shall be used to measure the temperature difference in water entering and leaving the heat exchanger. The temperature difference measurement uncertainty of this type of thermopile is equal to or less than ±0.50 °F (±0.25 °C). Other temperature measurement methods may be used if the temperature difference measurement uncertainty is equal to or less than ±0.50 °F (±0.25 °C).
6.4 Water Flow Meter. A water flow meter shall be installed in the inlet to the load side of the heat exchanger. The flow meter shall have an accuracy of ±1 percent of measured flow.
6.4.1 Optional—Appliance Side Water Flow Meter. A water flow meter with an accuracy of ±1 percent of the flow rate is recommended to monitor supply side water flow rate.
6.5 Optional Recirculation Pump. Circulating pump used during test to prevent stratification of liquid being heated.
6.6 Water Temperature Measurement—Thermocouples or other temperature sensors to measure the water temperature at the inlet and outlet of the load side of the heat exchanger. Must meet the calibration requirements specified in section 10.1.
6.7 Wood Moisture Meter—Calibrated electrical resistance meter capable of measuring test fuel moisture to within 1 percent moisture content. Must meet the calibration requirements specified in section 10.4.
6.8 Flue Gas Temperature Measurement—Must meet the requirements of CSA B415.1-10 (IBR, see § 60.17), clause 6.2.2.
6.9 Test Room Temperature Measurement—Must meet the requirements of CSA B415.1-10 (IBR, see § 60.17), clause 6.2.1.
6.10 Flue Gas Composition Measurement—Must meet the requirements of CSA B415.1-10 (IBR, see § 60.17), clauses 6.3.1 through 6.3.3.
7.0 Safety
7.1 These tests involve combustion of wood fuel and substantial release of heat and products of combustion. The heating system also produces large quantities of very hot water and the potential for steam production and system pressurization. Appropriate precautions must be taken to protect personnel from burn hazards and respiration of products of combustion.
8.0 Sampling, Test Specimens and Test Appliances
8.1 Test specimens shall be supplied as complete appliances including all controls and accessories necessary for installation in the test facility. A full set of specifications and design and assembly drawings shall be provided when the product is to be placed under certification of a third-party agency. The manufacturer's written installation and operating instructions are to be used as a guide in the set-up and testing of the appliance.
9.0 Preparation of Test Equipment
9.1 The appliance is to be placed on a scale capable of weighing the appliance fully loaded with a resolution of ±1.0 lb (0.5 kg).
9.2 The appliance shall be fitted with the type of chimney recommended or provided by the manufacturer and extending to 15 ±0.5 feet (4.6 ±0.15 m) from the upper surface of the scale. If no flue or chimney system is recommended or provided by the manufacturer, connect the appliance to a flue of a diameter equal to the flue outlet of the appliance. The flue section from the appliance flue collar to 8 ±0.5 feet above the scale shall be single wall stove pipe and the remainder of the flue shall be double wall insulated class A chimney.
9.3 Optional Equipment Use
9.3.1 A recirculation pump may be installed between connections at the top and bottom of the appliance to minimize thermal stratification if specified by the manufacturer. The pump shall not be installed in such a way as to change or affect the flow rate between the appliance and the heat exchanger.
9.3.2 If the manufacturer specifies that a thermal control valve or other device be installed and set to control the return water temperature to a specific set point, the valve or other device shall be installed and set per the manufacturer's written instructions.
9.4 Prior to filling the tank, weigh and record the appliance mass.
9.5 Heat Exchanger
9.5.1 Plumb the unit to a water-to-water heat exchanger with sufficient capacity to draw off heat at the maximum rate anticipated. Route hoses, electrical cables, and instrument wires in a manner that does not influence the weighing accuracy of the scale as indicated by placing dead weights on the platform and verifying the scale's accuracy.
9.5.2 Locate thermocouples to measure the water temperature at the inlet and outlet of the load side of the heat exchanger.
9.5.3 Install a thermopile meeting the requirements of section 6.3 to measure the water temperature difference between the inlet and outlet of the load side of the heat exchanger.
9.5.4 Install a calibrated water flow meter in the heat exchanger load side supply line. The water flow meter is to be installed on the cooling water inlet side of the heat exchanger so that it will operate at the temperature at which it is calibrated.
9.5.5 Place the heat exchanger in a box with 2 in. (50 mm) of expanded polystyrene (EPS) foam insulation surrounding it to minimize heat losses from the heat exchanger.
9.5.6 The reported efficiency and heat output rate shall be based on measurements made on the load side of the heat exchanger.
9.5.7 Temperature instrumentation per section 6.6 shall be installed in the appliance outlet and return lines. The average of the outlet and return water temperature on the supply side of the system shall be considered the average appliance temperature for calculation of heat storage in the appliance (TFavg and TIavg). Installation of a water flow meter in the supply side of the system is optional.
9.6 Fill the system with water. Determine the total weight of the water in the appliance when the water is circulating. Verify that the scale indicates a stable weight under operating conditions. Make sure air is purged properly.
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
10.1 Water Temperature Sensors. Temperature measuring equipment shall be calibrated before initial use and at least semi-annually thereafter. Calibrations shall be in compliance with National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) Monograph 175, Standard Limits of Error.
10.2 Heat Exchanger Load Side Water Flow Meter.
10.2.1 The heat exchanger load side water flow meter shall be calibrated within the flow range used for the test run using NIST traceable methods. Verify the calibration of the water flow meter before and after each test run and at least once during each test run by comparing the water flow rate indicated by the flow meter to the mass of water collected from the outlet of the heat exchanger over a timed interval. Volume of the collected water shall be determined based on the water density calculated from section 13, Eq. 8, using the water temperature measured at the flow meter. The uncertainty in the verification procedure used shall be 1 percent or less. The water flow rate determined by the collection and weighing method shall be within 1 percent of the flow rate indicated by the water flow meter.
10.3 Scales. The scales used to weigh the appliance and test fuel charge shall be calibrated using NIST traceable methods at least once every 6 months.
10.4 Moisture Meter. The moisture meter shall be calibrated per the manufacturer's instructions and checked before each use.
10.5 Flue Gas Analyzers—In accordance with CSA B415.1-10 (IBR, see § 60.17), clause 6.8.
11.0 Conditioning
11.1 Prior to testing, the appliance is to be operated for a minimum of 50 hours using a medium heat draw rate. The conditioning may be at the manufacturer's facility prior to the certification test. If the conditioning is at the certification test laboratory, the pre-burn for the first test can be included as part of the conditioning requirement. If conditioning is included in pre-burn, then the appliance shall be aged with fuel meeting the specifications outlined in sections 12.2 with a moisture content between 19 and 25 percent on a dry basis. Operate the appliance at a medium burn rate (Category II or III) for at least 10 hours for noncatalytic appliances and 50 hours for catalytic appliances. Record and report hourly flue gas exit temperature data and the hours of operation. The aging procedure shall be conducted and documented by a testing laboratory.
12.0 Procedure
12.1 Appliance Installation. Assemble the appliance and parts in conformance with the manufacturer's written installation instructions. Clean the flue with an appropriately sized, wire chimney brush before each certification test series.
12.2 Fuel. Test fuel charge fuel shall be red (Quercus ruba L.) or white (Quercus alba) oak 19 to 25 percent moisture content on a dry basis. Piece length shall be 80 percent of the firebox depth rounded down to the nearest 1 inch (25mm) increment. For example, if the firebox depth is 46 inches (1168mm) the 4 × 4 piece length would be 36 inches (46 inches × 0.8 = 36.8 inches rounded down to 36 inches). Pieces are to be placed in the firebox parallel to the longest firebox dimension. For fireboxes with sloped surfaces that create a non-uniform firebox length, the piece length shall be adjusted for each layer based on 80 percent of the length at the level where the layer is placed. Pieces are to be spaced 3/4 inches (19 mm) apart on all faces. The first fuel layer may be assembled using fuel units consisting of multiple 4 × 4s consisting of single pieces with bottom and side spacers of 3 or more pieces if needed for a stable layer. The second layer may consist of fuel units consisting of no more than two pieces with spacers attached on the bottom and side. The top two layers of the fuel charge must consist of single pieces unless the fuel charge is only three layers. In that instance only the top layer must consist of single units. Three-quarter inch (19 mm) by 1.5 inch (38 mm) spacers shall be attached to the bottom of piece to maintain a 3/4 inch (19 mm) separation. When a layer consists of two or more units of 4 × 4s an additional 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick by 1.5 inch (38 mm) wide spacer shall be attached to the vertical face of each end of one 4 × 4, such that the 3/4 inch (19 mm) space will be maintained when two 4 × 4 units or pieces are loaded side by side. In cases where a layer contains an odd number of 4 × 4s one piece shall not be attached, but shall have spacers attached in a manner that will provide for the 3/4 inch (19 mm) space to be maintained (See Figure 1). Spacers shall be attached perpendicular to the length of the 4 × 4s such that the edge of the spacer is 1 ± 0.25 inch from the end of the 4 × 4s in the previous layers. Spacers shall be red or white oak and will be attached with either nails (non-galvanized), brads or oak dowels. The use of kiln-dried wood is not allowed.
12.2.1 Using a fuel moisture meter as specified in section 6.7 of the test method, determine the fuel moisture for each test fuel piece used for the test fuel load by averaging at least five fuel moisture meter readings measured parallel to the wood grain. Penetration of the moisture meter insulated electrodes for all readings shall be 1/4 the thickness of the fuel piece or 19 mm ( 3/4 in.), whichever is lesser. One measurement from each of three sides shall be made at approximately 3 inches from each end and the center. Two additional measurements shall be made centered between the other three locations. Each individual moisture content reading shall be in the range of 18 to 28 percent on a dry basis. The average moisture content of each piece of test fuel shall be in the range of 19 to 25 percent. It is not required to measure the moisture content of the spacers. Moisture shall not be added to previously dried fuel pieces except by storage under high humidity conditions and temperature up to 100 °F. Fuel moisture shall be measured within 4 hours of using the fuel for a test.
12.2.2 Firebox Volume. Determine the firebox volume in cubic feet. Firebox volume shall include all areas accessible through the fuel loading door where firewood could reasonably be placed up to the horizontal plane defined by the top of the loading door. A drawing of the firebox showing front, side and plan views or an isometric view with interior dimensions shall be provided by the manufacturer and verified by the laboratory. Calculations for firebox volume from computer aided design (CAD) software programs are acceptable and shall be included in the test report if used. If the firebox volume is calculated by the laboratory the firebox drawings and calculations shall be included in the test report.
12.2.3 Test Fuel Charge. Test fuel charges shall be determined by multiplying the firebox volume by 10 pounds (4.54 kg) per ft 3 (28L), or a higher load density as recommended by the manufacturer's printed operating instructions, of wood (as used wet weight). Select the number of pieces of standard fuel that most nearly match this target weight. This is the standard fuel charge for all tests. For example, if the firebox loading area volume is 10 ft 3 (280L) and the firebox depth is 46 inches (1168 mm), test fuel charge target is 100 lbs (45 kg) minimum and the piece length is 36 inches (914 mm). If eight 4 × 4s, 36 inches long weigh 105 lbs (48 kg), use 8 pieces for each test fuel charge. All test fuel charges will be of the same configuration.
12.3 Sampling Equipment. Prepare the particulate emission sampling equipment as defined by ASTM E2515-11 Standard Test Method for Determination of Particulate Matter Emissions Collected in a Dilution Tunnel (IBR, see § 60.17). Upon request, four-inch filters may be used. Upon request, Teflon membrane filters or Teflon-coated glass fiber filters may be used.
12.4 Appliance Startup. The appliance shall be fired with wood fuel of any species, size and moisture content at the laboratories' discretion to bring it up to operating temperature. Operate the appliance until the water is heated to the upper operating control limit and has cycled at least two times. Then remove all unburned fuel, zero the scale and verify the scales accuracy using dead weights.
12.4.1 Pretest Burn Cycle. Reload appliance with oak wood and allow it to burn down to the specified coal bed weight. The pretest burn cycle fuel charge weight shall be within ±10 percent of the test fuel charge weight. Piece size and length shall be selected such that charcoalization is achieved by the time the fuel charge has burned down to the required coal bed weight. Pieces with a maximum thickness of approximately 2 inches have been found to be suitable. Charcoalization is a general condition of the test fuel bed evidenced by an absence of large pieces of burning wood in the coal bed and the remaining fuel pieces being brittle enough to be broken into smaller charcoal pieces with a metal poker. Manipulations to the fuel bed prior to the start of the test run are to be done to achieve charcoalization while maintaining the desired heat output rate. During the pre-test burn cycle and at least one hour prior to starting the test run, adjust water flow to the heat exchanger to establish the target heat draw for the test. For the first test run the heat draw rate shall be equal to the manufacturer's rated heat output capacity.
12.4.1.1 Allowable Adjustments. Fuel addition or subtractions, and coal bed raking shall be kept to a minimum but are allowed up to 15 minutes prior to the start of the test run. For the purposes of this method, coal bed raking is the use of a metal tool (poker) to stir coals, break burning fuel into smaller pieces, dislodge fuel pieces from positions of poor combustion, and check for the condition of charcoalization. Record all adjustments to and additions or subtractions of fuel, and any other changes to the appliance operations that occur during pretest ignition period. During the 15-minute period prior to the start of the test run, the wood heater loading door shall not be open more than a total of 1 minute. Coal bed raking is the only adjustment allowed during this period.
12.4.2 Coal Bed Weight. The appliance is to be loaded with the test fuel charge when the coal bed weight is between 10 percent and 20 percent of the test fuel charge weight. Coals may be raked as necessary to level the coal bed but may only be raked and stirred once between 15 to 20 minutes prior to the addition of the test fuel charge.
12.5 Test Runs. For all test runs, the return water temperature to the hydronic heater must be equal to or greater than 120 °F. Aquastat or other heater output control device settings that are adjustable shall be set using manufacturer specifications, either as factory set or in accordance with the owner's manual, and shall remain the same for all burn categories.
Complete a test run in each heat output rate category, as follows:
12.5.1 Test Run Start. Once the appliance is operating normally and the pretest coal bed weight has reached the target value per section 12.4.2, tare the scale and load the full test charge into the appliance. Time for loading shall not exceed 5 minutes. The actual weight of the test fuel charge shall be measured and recorded within 30 minutes prior to loading. Start all sampling systems.
12.5.1.1 Record all water temperatures, differential water temperatures and water flow rates at time intervals of one minute or less.
12.5.1.2 Record particulate emissions data per the requirements of ASTM E2515 (IBR, see § 60.17).
12.5.1.3 Record data needed to determine overall efficiency (SLM) per the requirements of CSA B415.1-10 (IBR, see § 60.17), clauses 6.2.1, 6.2.2, 6.3, 8.5.7, 10.4.3 (a), 10.4.3(f), and 13.7.9.3
12.5.1.3.1 Measure and record the test room air temperature in accordance with the requirements of CSA B415.1-10 (IBR, see § 60.17), clauses 6.2.1, 8.5.7 and 10.4.3 (g).
12.5.1.3.2 Measure and record the flue gas temperature in accordance with the requirements of CSA B415.1-10 (IBR, see § 60.17), clauses 6.2.2, 8.5.7 and 10.4.3 (f).
12.5.1.3.3 Determine and record the carbon monoxide (CO) and carbon dioxide (CO2) concentrations in the flue gas in accordance with CSA B415.1-10 (IBR, see § 60.17), clauses 6.3, 8.5.7 and 10.4.3 (i) and (j).
12.5.1.3.4 Measure and record the test fuel weight per the requirements of CSA B415.1-10 (IBR, see § 60.17), clauses 8.5.7 and 10.4.3 (h).
12.5.1.3.5 Record the test run time per the requirements of CSA B415.1-10 (IBR, see § 60.17), clauses 10.4.3 (a).
12.5.1.4 Monitor the average heat output rate on the load side of the heat exchanger. If the heat output rate gets close to the upper or lower limit of the target range (±5 percent) adjust the water flow through the heat exchanger to compensate. Make changes as infrequently as possible while maintaining the target heat output rate. The first test run shall be conducted at the Category IV heat output rate to validate that the appliance is capable of producing the manufacturer's rated heat output capacity.
12.5.2 Test Fuel Charge Adjustment. It is acceptable to adjust the test fuel charge (i.e., reposition) once during a test run if more than 60 percent of the initial test fuel charge weight has been consumed and more than 10 minutes have elapsed without a measurable (1 lb or 0. 5 kg) weight change while the operating control is in the demand mode. The time used to make this adjustment shall be less than 60 seconds.
12.5.3 Test Run Completion. The test run is completed when the remaining weight of the test fuel charge is 0.0 lb (0.0 kg). End the test run when the scale has indicated a test fuel charge weight of 0.0 lb (0.0 kg) or less for 30 seconds.
12.5.3.1 At the end of the test run, stop the particulate sampling train and overall efficiency (SLM) measurements, and record the run time, and all final measurement values.
12.5.4 Heat Output Capacity Validation. The first test run must produce a heat output rate that is within 10 percent of the manufacturer's rated heat output capacity (Category IV) throughout the test run and an average heat output rate within 5 percent of the manufacturer's rated heat output capacity. If the appliance is not capable of producing a heat output within these limits, the manufacturer's rated heat output capacity is considered not validated and testing is to be terminated. In such cases, the tests may be restarted using a lower heat output capacity if requested by the manufacturer.
12.5.5 Additional Test Runs. Using the manufacturer's rated heat output capacity as a basis, conduct a test for additional heat output categories as specified in section 4.3. It is not required to run these tests in any particular order.
12.5.6 Alternative Heat Output Rate for Category I. If an appliance cannot be operated in the Category I heat output range due to stopped combustion, two test runs shall be conducted at heat output rates within Category II, provided that the completed test run burn rate is no greater than the burn rate expected in home use. If this rate cannot be achieved, the test is not valid.
When the alternative heat output rate is used, the weightings for the weighted averages indicated in Table 2 shall be the average of the Category I and II weightings and shall be applied to both Category II results. The two completed runs in Category II will be deemed to meet the requirement for runs completed in both Category I and Category II. Appliances that are not capable of operation within Category II (<25 percent of maximum) cannot be evaluated by this test method. The test report must include full documentation and discussion of the attempted runs, completed rums and calculations.
12.5.6.1 Stopped Fuel Combustion. Evidence that an appliance cannot be operated at a Category I heat output rate due to stopped fuel combustion shall include documentation of two or more attempts to operate the appliance in burn rate Category I and fuel combustion has stopped prior to complete consumption of the test fuel charge. Stopped fuel combustion is evidenced when an elapsed time of 60 minutes or more has occurred without a measurable (1 lb or 0.5 kg) weight change in the test fuel charge while the appliance operating control is in the demand mode. Report the evidence and the reasoning used to determine that a test in burn rate Category I cannot be achieved. For example, two unsuccessful attempts to operate at an output rate of 10 percent of the rated output capacity are not sufficient evidence that burn rate Category I cannot be achieved. Note that section 12.5.6 requires that the completed test run burn rate can be no greater than the burn rate expected in home use. If this rate cannot be achieved, the test is not valid.
12.5.7 Appliance Overheating. Appliances shall be capable of operating in all heat output categories without overheating to be rated by this test method. Appliance overheating occurs when the rate of heat withdrawal from the appliance is lower than the rate of heat production when the unit control is in the idle mode. This condition results in the water in the appliance continuing to increase in temperature well above the upper limit setting of the operating control. Evidence of overheating includes: 1 hour or more of appliance water temperature increase above the upper temperature set-point of the operating control, exceeding the temperature limit of a safety control device (independent from the operating control), boiling water in a non-pressurized system or activation of a pressure or temperature relief valve in a pressurized system.
12.6 Additional Test Runs. The testing laboratory may conduct more than one test run in each of the heat output categories specified in section 4.3.1. If more than one test run is conducted at a specified heat output rate, the results from at least two-thirds of the test runs in that heat output rate category shall be used in calculating the weighted average emission rate (See section 14.1.14). The measurement data and results of all test runs shall be reported regardless of which values are used in calculating the weighted average emission rate.
13.0 Calculation of Results
13.1 Nomenclature
ET—Total particulate emissions for the full test run as determined per ASTM E2515-11 (IBR, see § 60.17) in grams
Eg/MJ—Emissions rate in grams per megajoule of heat output
Elb/mmBtu output—Emissions rate in pounds per million Btu of heat output
Eg/kg—Emissions factor in grams per kilogram of dry fuel burned
Eg/hr—Emissions factor in grams per hour
HHV—Higher heating value of fuel = 8600 Btu/lb (19.990 MJ/kg)
LHV—Lower heating value of fuel = 7988 Btu/lb (18.567 MJ/kg)
ΔT—Temperature difference between water entering and exiting the heat exchanger
Qout—Total heat output in BTU's (megajoules)
Qin—Total heat input available in test fuel charge in BTU (megajoules)
M—Mass flow rate of water in lb/min (kg/min)
Vi—Volume of water indicated by a totalizing flow meter at the ith reading in gallons (liters)
Vf—Volumetric flow rate of water in heat exchange system in gallons per minute (liters/min)
Θ—Total length of test run in hours
ti—Data sampling interval in minutes
ηdel—Delivered heating efficiency in percent
Fi—Weighting factor for heat output category i (See Table 2)
T1—Temperature of water at the inlet on the supply side of the heat exchanger
T2—Temperature of the water at the outlet on the supply side of the heat exchanger
T3—Temperature of water at the inlet to the load side of the heat exchanger
TIavg—Average temperature of the appliance and water at start of the test
TFavg—Average temperature of the appliance and water at the end of the test
MC—Fuel moisture content in percent dry basis
MCi—Average moisture content of individual 4 × 4 fuel pieces in percent dry basis
MCsp—Moisture content of spacers assumed to be 10 percent dry basis
σ—Density of water in pounds per gallon
Cp—Specific heat of water in Btu/lb, °F
Csteel—Specific heat of steel (0.1 Btu/lb, ºF)
Wfuel—Fuel charge weight in pounds (kg)
Wi—Weight of individual fuel 4 × 4 pieces in pounds (kg)
Wsp—Weight of all spacers used in a fuel load in pounds (kg)
Wapp—Weight of empty appliance in pounds
Wwa—Weight of water in supply side of the system in pounds
13.2 After the test is completed, determine the particulate emissions ET in accordance with ASTM E2515-11 (IBR, see § 60.17).
13.3 Determine Average Fuel Load Moisture Content
13.4 Determine heat input
13.5 Determine Heat Output and Efficiency
13.5.1 Determine heat output as:
Qout = Σ [Heat output determined for each sampling time interval] + Change in heat stored in the appliance.
Mi = Mass flow rate = gal/min × density of water (lb/gal) = lb/min
Csteel = 0.1 Btu/lb, ° F
13.5.2 Determine heat output rate as:
13.5.3 Determine emission rates and emission factors as:
13.5.4 Determine delivered efficiency as:
13.5.5 Determine ηSLM—Overall Efficiency (SLM) using Stack Loss
For determination of the average overall thermal efficiency (ηSLM) for the test run, use the data collected over the full test run and the calculations in accordance with CSA B415.1-10 (IBR, see § 60.17), clause 13.7 except for 13.7.2 (e), (f), (g), and (h), use the following average fuel properties for oak: percent C = 50.0, percent H = 6.6, percent O = 43.2, percent ash = 0.2 percent. The averaging period for determination of efficiency by the stack loss method allows averaging over 10 minute time periods for flue gas temperature, flue gas CO2, and flue gas CO for the determination of the efficiency. However, under some cycling conditions the “on” period may be short relative to this 10 minute period. For this reason, during cycling operation the averaging period for these parameters may not be longer than the burner on period divided by 10. The averaging period need not be shorter than one minute. During the off period, under cycling operation, the averaging periods specified may be used. Where short averaging times are used, however, the averaging period for fuel consumption may still be at 10 minutes. This average wood consumption rate shall be applied to all of the smaller time intervals included.
13.5.5.1 Whenever the CSA B415.1-10 (IBR, see § 60.17) overall efficiency is found to be lower than the overall efficiency based on load side measurements, as determined by Eq. 16 of this method, section 14.1.7 of the test report must include a discussion of the reasons for this result.
13.6 Weighted Average Emissions and Efficiency
13.6.1 Determine the weighted average emission rate and delivered efficiency from the individual tests in the specified heat output categories. The weighting factors (Fi) are derived from an analysis of ASHRAE bin data which provides details of normal building heating requirements in terms of percent of design capacity and time in a particular capacity range—or “bin”—over the course of a heating season. The values used in this method represent an average of data from several cities located in the northern United States.
13.7 Average Heat Output (Qout-8hr) and Efficiency ((ηavg-8hr) for 8 hour burn time.
13.7.1 Units tested under this standard typically require infrequent fuelling, 8 to 12 hours intervals being typical. Rating unit's based on an average output sustainable over an 8 hour duration will assist consumers in appropriately sizing units to match the theoretical heat demand of their application.
13.7.2 Calculations:
Where:
Y1 = Test duration just above 8 hrs
Y2 = Test duration just below 8 hrs
X1 = Actual load for duration Y1
X2 = Actual load for duration Y2
ηdel1 = Average delivered efficiency for duration Y1
ηdel2 = Average delivered efficiency for duration Y2
13.7.2.1 Determine the test durations and actual load for each category as recorded in Table 1A.
13.7.2.2 Determine the data point that has the nearest duration greater than 8 hrs.
X1 = Actual load,
Y1 = Test duration, and
ηdel1 = Average delivered efficiency for this data point
13.7.2.3 Determine the data point that has the nearest duration less than 8 hours.
X2 = Actual load,
Y2 = Test duration, and
ηdel2 = Average delivered efficiency for this data point
13.7.2.4 Example:
| (Btu/Hr) | (Hr) | (%) |
|---|---|---|
| 1 15,000 | 10.2 | 70.0 |
| 2 26,000 | 8.4 | 75.5 |
| 3 50,000 | 6.4 | 80.1 |
| 4 100,000 | 4.7 | 80.9 |
Category 2 duration is just above 8 hours, therefore: X1 = 26,000 Btu/hr, ηdel1 = 75.5% and Y1 = 8.4 hrs
Category 3 duration is just below 8 hours, therefore: X2 = 50,000 Btu/hr, ηdel2 = 80.1% and Y2 = 6.4 hrs
Qout-8hr = 26,000 + {(8—8.4) × [(50,000—26,000)/(6.4—8.4)]} = 30,800 BTU/hr
ηavg-8hr = 75.5 + {(8—8.4) × [(80.1—75.5)/(6.4—8.4)]} = 76.4%
13.8 Carbon Monoxide Emissions
For each minute of the test period, the carbon monoxide emissions rate (g/min) shall be calculated as:
Total CO emissions for each of the four test periods (CO_1, CO_2, CO_3, CO_4) shall be calculated as the sum of the emissions rates for each of the 1-minute intervals. Total CO emissions for the test run, COT, shall be calculated as the sum of CO_1, CO_2, CO_3 and CO_4.
14.0 Report
14.1.1 The report shall include the following.
14.1.2 Name and location of the laboratory conducting the test.
14.1.3 A description of the appliance tested and its condition, date of receipt and dates of tests.
14.1.4 A statement that the test results apply only to the specific appliance tested.
14.1.5 A statement that the test report shall not be reproduced except in full, without the written approval of the laboratory.
14.1.6 A description of the test procedures and test equipment including a schematic or other drawing showing the location of all required test equipment. Also, a description of test fuel sourcing, handling and storage practices shall be included.
14.1.7 Details of deviations from, additions to or exclusions from the test method, and their data quality implications on the test results (if any), as well as information on specific test conditions, such as environmental conditions.
14.1.8 A list of participants and observers present for the tests.
14.1.9 Data and drawings indicating the fire box size and location of the fuel charge.
14.1.10 Drawings and calculations used to determine firebox volume.
14.1.11 Information for each test run fuel charge including piece size, moisture content, and weight.
14.1.12 All required data for each test run shall be provided in spreadsheet format. Formulae used for all calculations shall be accessible for review.
14.1.13 Test run duration for each test.
14.1.14 Calculated results for delivered efficiency at each burn rate and the weighted average emissions reported as total emissions in grams, pounds per mm Btu of delivered heat, grams per MJ of delivered heat, grams per kilogram of dry fuel and grams per hour. Results shall be reported for each heat output category and the weighted average.
14.1.15 Tables 1A, 1B, 1C and Table 2 must be used for presentation of results in test reports.
14.1.16 A statement of the estimated uncertainty of measurement of the emissions and efficiency test results.
14.1.17 Raw data, calibration records, and other relevant documentation shall be retained by the laboratory for a minimum of 7 years.
15.0 Precision and Bias
15.1 Precision—It is not possible to specify the precision of the procedure in Method 28WHH because the appliance operation and fueling protocols and the appliances themselves produce variable amounts of emissions and cannot be used to determine reproducibility or repeatability of this measurement method.
15.2 Bias—No definitive information can be presented on the bias of the procedure in Method 28WHH for measuring solid fuel burning hydronic heater emissions because no material having an accepted reference value is available.
16.0 Keywords
16.1 Solid fuel, hydronic heating appliances, wood-burning hydronic heaters.
Test Method 28WHH for Certification of Cord Wood-Fired Hydronic Heating Appliances With Partial Thermal Storage: Measurement of Particulate Matter (PM) and Carbon Monoxide (CO) Emissions and Heating Efficiency of Wood-Fired Hydronic Heating Appliances With Partial Thermal Storage
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 This test method applies to wood-fired hydronic heating appliances with heat storage external to the appliance. The units typically transfer heat through circulation of a liquid heat exchange media such as water or a water-antifreeze mixture. Throughout this document, the term “water” will be used to denote any of the heat transfer liquids approved for use by the manufacturer.
1.2 The test method measures PM and CO emissions and delivered heating efficiency at specified heat output rates referenced against the appliance's rated heating capacity as specified by the manufacturer and verified under this test method.
1.3 PM emissions are measured by the dilution tunnel method as specified in the EPA Method 28WHH and the standards referenced therein with the exceptions noted in section 12.5.9. Delivered efficiency is measured by determining the fuel energy input and appliance output. Heat output is determined through measurement of the flow rate and temperature change of water circulated through a heat exchanger external to the appliance and the increase in energy of the external storage. Heat input is determined from the mass of dry wood fuel and its higher heating value (HHV). Delivered efficiency does not attempt to account for pipeline loss.
1.4 Products covered by this test method include both pressurized and non-pressurized hydronic heating appliances intended to be fired with wood and for which the manufacturer specifies for indoor or outdoor installation. The system, which includes the heating appliance and external storage, is commonly connected to a heat exchanger by insulated pipes and normally includes a pump to circulate heated liquid. These systems are used to heat structures such as homes, barns and greenhouses. They also provide heat for domestic hot water, spas and swimming pools.
1.5 Distinguishing features of products covered by this standard include:
1.5.1 The manufacturer specifies the application for either indoor or outdoor installation.
1.5.2 A firebox with an access door for hand loading of fuel.
1.5.3 Typically an aquastat mounted as part of the appliance that controls combustion air supply to maintain the liquid in the appliance within a predetermined temperature range provided sufficient fuel is available in the firebox. The appliance may be equipped with other devices to control combustion.
1.5.4 A chimney or vent that exhausts combustion products from the appliance.
1.5.5 A liquid storage system, typically water, which is not large enough to accept all of the heat produced when a full load of wood is burned and the storage system starts a burn cycle at 125 °F.
1.5.6 The heating appliances require external thermal storage and these units will only be installed as part of a system which includes thermal storage. The manufacturer specifies the minimum amount of thermal storage required. However, the storage system shall be large enough to ensure that the boiler (heater) does not cycle, slumber, or go into an off-mode when operated in a Category III load condition (See section 4.3).
1.6 The values stated are to be regarded as the standard whether in I-P or SI units. The values given in parentheses are for information only.
2.0 Summary of Method and References
2.1 PM and CO emissions are measured from a wood-fired hydronic heating appliance burning a prepared test fuel charge in a test facility maintained at a set of prescribed conditions. Procedures for determining heat output rates, PM and CO emissions, and efficiency and for reducing data are provided.
2.2 Referenced Documents
2.2.1 EPA Standards
2.2.1.1 Method 28 Certification and Auditing of Wood Heaters
2.2.1.2 Method 28WHH Measurement of Particulate Emissions and Heating Efficiency of Wood-Fired Hydronic Heating Appliances and the Standards Referenced therein.
2.2.2 Other Standards
2.2.2.1 CSA-B415.1-10 Performance Testing of Solid-Fuel-Burning Heating Appliances
3.0 Terminology
3.1 Definitions
3.1.1 Hydronic Heating—A heating system in which a heat source supplies energy to a liquid heat exchange media such as water that is circulated to a heating load and returned to the heat source through pipes.
3.1.2 Aquastat—A control device that opens or closes a circuit to control the rate of fuel consumption in response to the temperature of the heating media in the heating appliance.
3.1.3 Delivered Efficiency—The percentage of heat available in a test fuel charge that is delivered to a simulated heating load or the storage system as specified in this test method.
3.1.4 Emission Factor—The emission of a pollutant expressed in mass per unit of energy (typically) output from the boiler/heater.
3.1.5 Emission Index—The emission of a pollutant expressed in mass per unit mass of fuel used.
3.1.6 Emission Rate—The emission of a pollutant expressed in mass per unit time
3.1.7 Manufacturer's Rated Heat Output Capacity—The value in Btu/hr (MJ/hr) that the manufacturer specifies that a particular model of hydronic heating appliance is capable of supplying at its design capacity as verified by testing, in accordance with section 12.5.4.
3.1.8 Heat Output Rate—The average rate of energy output from the appliance during a specific test period in Btu/hr (MJ/hr).
3.1.9 Firebox—The chamber in the appliance in which the test fuel charge is placed and combusted.
3.1.10 NIST—National Institute of Standards and Technology.
3.1.11 Test Fuel Charge—The collection of test fuel placed in the appliance at the start of the emission test run.
3.1.12 Test Run—An individual emission test which encompasses the time required to consume the mass of the test fuel charge. The time of the test run also considers the time for the energy to be drawn from the thermal storage.
3.1.13 Test Run Under “Cold-to-Cold” Condition—Under this test condition the test fuel is added into an empty chamber along with kindling and ignition materials (paper). The boiler/heater at the start of this test is typically 125° to 130 °F.
3.1.14 Test Run Under “Hot-to-Hot” Condition—Under this test condition the test fuel is added onto a still-burning bed of charcoals produced in a pre-burn period. The boiler/heater water is near its operating control limit at the start of the test.
3.1.15 Overall Efficiency, also known as Stack Loss Efficiency—The efficiency for each test run as determined using the CSA B415.1-10 (IBR, see § 60.17) stack loss method (SLM).
3.1.16 Phases of a Burn Cycle—The “startup phase” is defined as the period from the start of the test until 15 percent of the test fuel charge is consumed. The “steady-state phase” is defined as the period from the end of the startup phase to a point at which 80 percent of the test fuel charge is consumed. The “end phase” is defined as the time from the end of the steady-state period to the end of the test.
3.1.17 Thermopile—A device consisting of a number of thermocouples connected in series, used for measuring differential temperature.
3.1.18 Slumber Mode—This is a mode in which the temperature of the water in the boiler/heater has exceeded the operating control limit and the control has changed the boiler/heater fan speed, dampers, and/or other operating parameters to minimize the heat output of the boiler/heater.
4.0 Summary of Test Method
4.1 Dilution Tunnel. Emissions are determined using the “dilution tunnel” method specified in EPA Method 28WHH and the standards referenced therein. The flow rate in the dilution tunnel is maintained at a constant level throughout the test cycle and accurately measured. Samples of the dilution tunnel flow stream are extracted at a constant flow rate and drawn through high efficiency filters. The filters are dried and weighed before and after the test to determine the emissions collected and this value is multiplied by the ratio of tunnel flow to filter flow to determine the total particulate emissions produced in the test cycle.
4.2 Efficiency. The efficiency test procedure takes advantage of the fact that this type of system delivers heat through circulation of the heated liquid (water) from the system to a remote heat exchanger (e.g. baseboard radiators in a room) and back to the system. Measurements of the cooling water temperature difference as it enters and exits the test system heat exchanger along with the measured flow rate allow for an accurate determination of the useful heat output of the appliance. Also included in the heat output is the change in the energy content in the storage system during a test run. Energy input to the appliance during the test run is determined by weight of the test fuel charge, adjusted for moisture content, multiplied by the higher heating value. Additional measurements of the appliance weight and temperature at the beginning and end of a test cycle are used to correct for heat stored in the appliance. Overall efficiency (SLM) is determined using the CSA B415.1-10 (IBR, see § 60.17) stack loss method for data quality assurance purposes.
4.3 Operation. Four test categories are defined for use in this method. These are:
4.3.1 Category I: A heat output of 15 percent or less of manufacturer's rated heat output capacity.
4.3.2 Category II: A heat output of 16 percent to 24 percent of manufacturer's rated heat output capacity.
4.3.3 Category III: A heat output of 25 percent to 50 percent of manufacturer's rated heat output capacity.
4.3.4 Category IV: Manufacturer's Rated Heat Output Capacity. These heat output categories refer to the output from the system by way of the load heat exchanger installed for the test. The output from just the boiler/heater part of the system may be higher for all or part of a test, as part of this boiler/heater output goes to storage.
For the Category III and IV runs, appliance operation is conducted on a hot-to-hot test cycle meaning that the appliance is brought to operating temperature and a coal bed is established prior to the addition of the test fuel charge and measurements are made for each test fuel charge cycle. The measurements are made under constant heat draw conditions within pre-determined ranges. No attempt is made to modulate the heat demand to simulate an indoor thermostat cycling on and off in response to changes in the indoor environment.
For the Category I and II runs, the unit is tested with a “cold start.” At the manufacturer's option, the Category II and III runs may be waived and it may be assumed that the particulate emission values and efficiency values determined in the startup, steady-state, and end phases of Category I are applicable in Categories II and III for the purpose of determining the annual averages in lb/mmBtu and g/MJ (See section 13). For the annual average in g/hr, the length of time for stored heat to be drawn from thermal storage shall be determined for the test load requirements of the respective category.
All test operations and measurements shall be conducted by personnel of the laboratory responsible for the submission of the test report.
5.0 Significance and Use
5.1 The measurement of particulate matter emission and CO rates is an important test method widely used in the practice of air pollution control.
5.1.1 These measurements, when approved by state or federal agencies, are often required for the purpose of determining compliance with regulations and statutes.
5.1.2 The measurements made before and after design modifications are necessary to demonstrate the effectiveness of design changes in reducing emissions and make this standard an important tool in manufacturers' research and development programs.
5.2 Measurement of heating efficiency provides a uniform basis for comparison of product performance that is useful to the consumer. It is also required to relate emissions produced to the useful heat production.
5.3 This is a laboratory method and is not intended to be fully representative of all actual field use. It is recognized that users of hand-fired, wood-burning equipment have a great deal of influence over the performance of any wood-burning appliance. Some compromises in realism have been made in the interest of providing a reliable and repeatable test method.
6.0 Test Equipment
6.1 Scale. A platform scale capable of weighing the boiler/heater under test and associated parts and accessories when completely filled with water to an accuracy of ±1.0 pound (±0.5 kg) and a readout resolution of ±0.2 pound (±0.1 kg).
6.2 Heat Exchanger. A water-to-water heat exchanger capable of dissipating the expected heat output from the system under test.
6.3 Water Temperature Difference Measurement. A Type—T 'special limits' thermopile with a minimum of 5 pairs of junctions shall be used to measure the temperature difference in water entering and leaving the heat exchanger. The temperature difference measurement uncertainty of this type of thermopile is equal to or less than ±0.50 °F (±0.25 °C). Other temperature measurement methods may be used if the temperature difference measurement uncertainty is equal to or less than ±0.50 °F (±0.25 °C). This measurement uncertainty shall include the temperature sensor, sensor well arrangement, piping arrangements, lead wire, and measurement/recording system. The response time of the temperature measurement system shall be less than half of the time interval at which temperature measurements are recorded.
6.4 Water Flow Meter. A water flow meter shall be installed in the inlet to the load side of the heat exchanger. The flow meter shall have an accuracy of ±1 percent of measured flow.
6.4.1 Optional—Appliance Side Water Flow Meter. A water flow meter with an accuracy of ±1 percent of the flow rate is recommended to monitor supply side water flow rate.
6.5 Optional Recirculation Pump. Circulating pump used during test to prevent stratification, in the boiler/heater, of liquid being heated.
6.6 Water Temperature Measurement. Thermocouples or other temperature sensors to measure the water temperature at the inlet and outlet of the load side of the heat exchanger must meet the calibration requirements specified in 10.1 of this method.
6.7 Lab Scale. For measuring the moisture content of wood slices as part of the overall wood moisture determination. Accuracy of ±0.01 pounds.
6.8 Flue Gas Temperature Measurement. Must meet the requirements of CSA B415.1-10 (IBR, see § 60.17), clause 6.2.2.
6.9 Test Room Temperature Measurement. Must meet the requirements of CSA B415.1-10 (IBR, see § 60.17), clause 6.2.1.
6.10 Flue Gas Composition Measurement. Must meet the requirements of CSA B415.1-10 (IBR, see § 60.17), clauses 6.3.1 through 6.3.3.
6.11 Dilution Tunnel CO Measurement. In parallel with the flue gas composition measurements, the CO concentration in the dilution tunnel shall also be measured and reported at time intervals not to exceed one minute. This analyzer shall meet the zero and span drift requirements of CSA B415.1-10 (IBR, see § 60.17). In addition the measurement repeatability shall be better than ±15 ppm over the range of CO levels observed in the dilution tunnel.
7.0 Safety
7.1 These tests involve combustion of wood fuel and substantial release of heat and products of combustion. The heating system also produces large quantities of very hot water and the potential for steam production and system pressurization. Appropriate precautions must be taken to protect personnel from burn hazards and respiration of products of combustion.
8.0 Sampling, Test Specimens and Test Appliances
8.1 Test specimens shall be supplied as complete appliances, as described in marketing materials, including all controls and accessories necessary for installation in the test facility. A full set of specifications, installation and operating instructions, and design and assembly drawings shall be provided when the product is to be placed under certification of a third-party agency. The manufacturer's written installation and operating instructions are to be used as a guide in the set-up and testing of the appliance and shall be part of the test record.
8.2 The size, connection arrangement, and control arrangement for the thermal storage shall be as specified in the manufacturer's documentation. It is not necessary to use the specific storage system that the boiler/heater will be marketed with. However, the capacity of the system used in the test cannot be greater than that specified as the minimum allowable for the boiler/heater.
8.3 All system control settings shall be the as-shipped, default settings. These default settings shall be the same as those communicated in a document to the installer or end user. These control settings and the documentation of the control settings as to be provided to the installer or end user shall be part of the test record.
8.4 Where the manufacturer defines several alternatives for the connection and loading arrangement, one shall be defined in the appliance documentation as the default or standard installation. It is expected that this will be the configuration for use with a simple baseboard heating system. This is the configuration to be followed for these tests. The manufacturer's documentation shall define the other arrangements as optional or alternative arrangements.
9.0 Preparation of Test Equipment
9.1 The appliance is to be placed on a scale capable of weighing the appliance fully loaded with a resolution of ±0.2 lb (0.1 kg).
9.2 The appliance shall be fitted with the type of chimney recommended or provided by the manufacturer and extending to 15 ±0.5 feet (4.6 ±0.15 m) from the upper surface of the scale. If no flue or chimney system is recommended or provided by the manufacturer, connect the appliance to a flue of a diameter equal to the flue outlet of the appliance. The flue section from the appliance flue collar to 8 ±0.5 feet above the scale shall be single wall stove pipe and the remainder of the flue shall be double wall insulated class A chimney.
9.3 Optional Equipment Use
9.3.1 A recirculation pump may be installed between connections at the top and bottom of the appliance to minimize thermal stratification if specified by the manufacturer. The pump shall not be installed in such a way as to change or affect the flow rate between the appliance and the heat exchanger.
9.3.2 If the manufacturer specifies that a thermal control valve or other device be installed and set to control the return water temperature to a specific set point, the valve or other device shall be installed and set per the manufacturer's written instructions.
9.4 Prior to filling the boiler/heater with water, weigh and record the appliance mass.
9.5 Heat Exchanger
9.5.1 Plumb the unit to a water-to-water heat exchanger with sufficient capacity to draw off heat at the maximum rate anticipated. Route hoses and electrical cables and instrument wires in a manner that does not influence the weighing accuracy of the scale as indicated by placing dead weights on the platform and verifying the scale's accuracy.
9.5.2 Locate thermocouples to measure the water temperature at the inlet and outlet of the load side of the heat exchanger.
9.5.3 Install a thermopile (or equivalent instrumentation) meeting the requirements of section 6.3 to measure the water temperature difference between the inlet and outlet of the load side of the heat exchanger
9.5.4 Install a calibrated water flow meter in the heat exchanger load side supply line. The water flow meter is to be installed on the cooling water inlet side of the heat exchanger so that it will operate at the temperature at which it is calibrated.
9.5.5 Place the heat exchanger in a box with 2 in. (50 mm) of expanded polystyrene (EPS) foam insulation surrounding it to minimize heat losses from the heat exchanger.
9.5.6 The reported efficiency and heat output rate shall be based on measurements made on the load side of the heat exchanger.
9.5.7 Temperature instrumentation per section 6.6 shall be installed in the appliance outlet and return lines. The average of the outlet and return water temperature on the supply side of the system shall be considered the average appliance temperature for calculation of heat storage in the appliance (TFavg and TIavg). Installation of a water flow meter in the supply side of the system is optional.
9.6 Storage Tank. The storage tank shall include a destratification pump as illustrated in Figure 1. The pump will draw from the bottom of the tank and return to the top as illustrated. Temperature sensors (TS1 and TS2 in Figure 1) shall be included to measure the temperature in the recirculation loop. The valve plan in Figure 1 allows the tank recirculation loop to operate and the boiler/heater-to-heat exchanger loop to operate at the same time but in isolation. This would typically be done before the start of a test or following completion of a test to determine the end of test average tank temperature. The nominal flow rate in the storage tank recirculation loop can be estimated based on pump manufacturers' performance curves and any significant restriction in the recirculation loop.
9.7 Fill the system with water. Determine the total weight of the water in the appliance when the water is circulating. Verify that the scale indicates a stable weight under operating conditions. Make sure air is purged properly.
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
10.1 Water Temperature Sensors. Temperature measuring equipment shall be calibrated before initial use and at least semi-annually thereafter. Calibrations shall be in compliance with National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) Monograph 175, Standard Limits of Error.
10.2 Heat Exchanger Load Side Water Flow Meter.
10.2.1 The heat exchanger load side water flow meter shall be calibrated within the flow range used for the test run using NIST-traceable methods. Verify the calibration of the water flow meter before and after each test run and at least once during each test run by comparing the water flow rate indicated by the flow meter to the mass of water collected from the outlet of the heat exchanger over a timed interval. Volume of the collected water shall be determined based on the water density calculated from section 13, Eq. 12, using the water temperature measured at the flow meter. The uncertainty in the verification procedure used shall be 1 percent or less. The water flow rate determined by the collection and weighing method shall be within 1 percent of the flow rate indicated by the water flow meter.
10.3 Scales. The scales used to weigh the appliance and test fuel charge shall be calibrated using NIST-traceable methods at least once every 6 months.
10.4 Flue Gas Analyzers—In accordance with CSA B415.1-10 (IBR, see § 60.17), clause 6.8.
11.0 Conditioning
11.1 Prior to testing, an appliance is to be operated for a minimum of 50 hours using a medium heat draw rate. The conditioning may be at the manufacturer's facility prior to the certification test. If the conditioning is at the certification test laboratory, the pre-burn for the first test can be included as part of the conditioning requirement. If conditioning is included in pre-burn, then the appliance shall be aged with fuel meeting the specifications outlined in section 12.2 with a moisture content between 19 and 25 percent on a dry basis. Operate the appliance at a medium heat output rate (Category II or III) for at least 10 hours for non-catalytic appliances and 50 hours for catalytic appliances. Record and report hourly flue gas exit temperature data and the hours of operation. The aging procedure shall be conducted and documented by a testing laboratory.
12.0 Procedure
12.1 Appliance Installation. Assemble the appliance and parts in conformance with the manufacturer's written installation instructions. Clean the flue with an appropriately sized, wire chimney brush before each certification test series.
12.2 Fuel. Test fuel charge fuel shall be red (Quercus ruba L.) or white (Quercus Alba) oak 19 to 25 percent moisture content on a dry basis. Piece length shall be 80 percent of the firebox depth rounded down to the nearest 1 inch (25mm) increment. For example, if the firebox depth is 46 inches (1168mm) the piece length would be 36 inches (46 inches × 0.8 = 36.8 inches, rounded down to 36 inches). Pieces are to be placed in the firebox parallel to the longest firebox dimension. For fireboxes with sloped surfaces that create a non-uniform firebox length, the piece length shall be adjusted for each layer based on 80 percent of the length at the level where the layer is placed. The test fuel shall be cord wood with cross section dimensions and weight limits as defined in CSA B415.1-10 (IBR, see § 60.17), section 8.3, Table 4. The use of dimensional lumber is not allowed.
12.2.1 Select three pieces of cord wood from the same batch of wood as the test fuel and the same weight as the average weight of the pieces in the test load ±1.0 lb. From each of these three pieces, cut three slices. Each slice shall be 1/2 inch to 3/4 inch thick. One slice shall be cut across the center of the length of the piece. The other two slices shall be cut half way between the center and the end. Immediately measure the mass of each piece in pounds. Dry each slice in an oven at 220 °F for 24 hours or until no further weight change occurs. The slices shall be arranged in the oven so as to provide separation between faces. Remove from the oven and measure the mass of each piece again as soon as practical, in pounds.
The moisture content of each slice, on a dry basis, shall be calculated as:
Where:
WSliceWet = weight of the slice before drying in pounds
WSliceDry = weight of the slice after drying in pounds
MCSlice = moisture content of the slice in % dry basis
The average moisture content of the entire test load (MC) shall be determined using Eq. 6. Each individual slice shall have a moisture content in the range of 18 percent to 28 percent on a dry basis. The average moisture content for the test fuel load shall be in the range of 19 percent to 25 percent. Moisture shall not be added to previously dried fuel pieces except by storage under high humidity conditions and temperature up to 100 °F. Fuel moisture measurement shall begin within 4 hours of using the fuel batch for a test. Use of a pin-type meter to estimate the moisture content prior to a test is recommended.
12.2.2 Firebox Volume. Determine the firebox volume in cubic feet. Firebox volume shall include all areas accessible through the fuel loading door where firewood could reasonably be placed up to the horizontal plane defined by the top of the loading door. A drawing of the firebox showing front, side and plan views or an isometric view with interior dimensions shall be provided by the manufacturer and verified by the laboratory. Calculations for firebox volume from computer aided design (CAD) software programs are acceptable and shall be included in the test report if used. If the firebox volume is calculated by the laboratory the firebox drawings and calculations shall be included in the test report.
12.2.3 Test Fuel charge. Test fuel charges shall be determined by multiplying the firebox volume by 10 pounds (4.54 kg) per ft 3 (28L), or a higher load density as recommended by the manufacturer's printed operating instructions, of wood (as used wet weight). Select the number of pieces of cord wood that most nearly match this target weight. However, the test fuel charge cannot be less than the target of 10 pounds (4.54 kg) per ft 3 (28L).
12.3 Sampling Equipment. Prepare the particulate emission sampling equipment as defined by EPA Method 28WHH and the standards referenced therein.
12.4 Appliance Startup. The appliance shall be fired with wood fuel of any species, size and moisture content, at the laboratory's discretion, to bring it up to operating temperature. Operate the appliance until the water is heated to the upper operating control limit and has cycled at least two times. Then remove all unburned fuel, zero the scale and verify the scales accuracy using dead weights.
12.4.1 Startup Procedure for Category III and IV Test Runs, “Hot-to-Hot.”
12.4.1.1 Pretest t Burn Cycle. Following appliance startup (section 12.4), reload appliance with oak cord wood and allow it to burn down to the specified coal bed weight. The pre-test burn cycle fuel charge weight shall be within ±10 percent of the test fuel charge weight. Piece size and length shall be selected such that charcoalization is achieved by the time the fuel charge has burned down to the required coal bed weight. Pieces with a maximum thickness of approximately 2 inches have been found to be suitable. Charcoalization is a general condition of the test fuel bed evidenced by an absence of large pieces of burning wood in the coal bed and the remaining fuel pieces being brittle enough to be broken into smaller charcoal pieces with a metal poker. Manipulations to the fuel bed prior to the start of the test run are to be done to achieve charcoalization while maintaining the desired heat output rate. During the pre-test burn cycle and at least one hour prior to starting the test run, adjust water flow to the heat exchanger to establish the target heat draw for the test. For the first test run the heat draw rate shall be equal to the manufacturer's rated heat output capacity.
12.4.1.2 Allowable Adjustments. Fuel addition or subtractions, and coal bed raking shall be kept to a minimum but are allowed up to 15 minutes prior to the start of the test run. For the purposes of this method, coal bed raking is the use of a metal tool (poker) to stir coals, break burning fuel into smaller pieces, dislodge fuel pieces from positions of poor combustion, and check for the condition of charcoalization. Record all adjustments to and additions or subtractions of fuel, and any other changes to the appliance operations that occur during pretest ignition period. During the 15-minute period prior to the start of the test run, the wood heater loading door shall not be open more than a total of 1 minute. Coal bed raking is the only adjustment allowed during this period.
12.4.1.3 Coal Bed Weight. The appliance is to be loaded with the test fuel charge when the coal bed weight is between 10 percent and 20 percent of the test fuel charge weight. Coals may be raked as necessary to level the coal bed but may only be raked and stirred once between 15 to 20 minutes prior to the addition of the test fuel charge.
12.4.1.4 Storage. The Category III and IV test runs may be done either with or without the thermal storage. If thermal storage is used, the initial temperature of the storage must be 125 °F or greater at the start of the test. The storage may be heated during the pre-test burn cycle or it may be heated by external means. If thermal storage is used, prior to the start of the test run, the storage tank destratification pump, shown in Figure 1, shall be operated until the total volume pumped exceeds 1.5 times the tank volume and the difference between the temperature at the top and bottom of the storage tank (TS1 and TS2) is less than 1 °F. These two temperatures shall then be recorded to determine the starting average tank temperature. The total volume pumped may be based on the nominal flow rate of the destratification pump (See section 9.6). If the Category III and IV runs are done with storage, it is recognized that during the last hour of the pre-burn cycle the storage tank must be mixed to achieve a uniform starting temperature and cannot receive heat from the boiler/heater during this time. During this time period, the boiler/heater might cycle or go into a steady reduced output mode. (Note—this would happen, for example, in a Category IV run if the actual maximum output of the boiler/heater exceed the manufacturer's rated output.) A second storage tank may be used temporarily to enable the boiler/heater to operate during this last hour of the pre-burn period as it will during the test period. The temperature of this second storage tank is not used in the calculations but the return water to the boiler/heater (after mixing device if used) must be 125 °F or greater.
12.4.2 Startup Procedure for Category I and II Test Runs, “Cold-to-Cold.”
12.4.2.1 Initial Temperatures. This test shall be started with both the boiler/heater and the storage at a minimum temperature of 125 °F. The boiler/heater maximum temperature at the start of this test shall be 135 °F. The boiler/heater and storage may be heated through a pre-burn or it may be heated by external means.
12.4.2.2 Firebox Condition at Test Start. Prior to the start of this test remove all ash and charcoal from the combustion chamber(s). The loading of the test fuel and kindling should follow the manufacturer's recommendations, subject to the following constraints: Up to 10 percent kindling and paper may be used which is in addition to the fuel load. Further, up to 10 percent of the fuel load (i.e., included in the 10 lb/ft 3) may be smaller than the main fuel. This startup fuel shall still be larger than 2 inches.
12.4.2.3 Storage. The Category I and II test runs shall be done with thermal storage. The initial temperature of the storage must be 125 °F or greater at the start of the test. The storage may be heated during the pre-test burn cycle or it may be heated by external means. Prior to the start of the test run, the storage tank destratification pump, shown in Figure 1, shall be operated until the total volume pumped exceeds 1.5 times the tank volume and the difference between the temperature at the top and bottom of the storage tank (TS1 and TS2) is less than 1 °F. These two temperatures shall then be recorded to determine the starting average tank temperature. The total volume pumped may be based on the nominal flow rate of the destratification pump (See section 9.6).
12.5 Test Runs. For all test runs, the return water temperature to the hydronic heater must be equal to or greater than 120 °F (this is lower than the initial tank temperature to allow for any pipeline losses). Where the storage system is used, flow of water from the boiler/heater shall be divided between the storage tank and the heat exchanger such that the temperature change of the circulating water across the heat exchanger shall be 30 ±5 °F, averaged over the entire test run. This is typically adjusted using the system valves.
Complete a test run in each heat output rate category, as follows:
12.5.1 Test Run Start. For Category III and IV runs: Once the appliance is operating normally and the pretest coal bed weight has reached the target value per section 12.4.1, tare the scale and load the full test charge into the appliance. Time for loading shall not exceed 5 minutes. The actual weight of the test fuel charge shall be measured and recorded within 30 minutes prior to loading. Start all sampling systems.
For Category I and II runs: Once the appliance has reached the starting temperature, tare the scale and load the full test charge, including kindling into the appliance. The actual weight of the test fuel charge shall be measured and recorded within 30 minutes prior to loading. Light the fire following the manufacturer's written normal startup procedure. Start all sampling systems.
12.5.1.1 Record all water temperatures, differential water temperatures and water flow rates at time intervals of one minute or less.
12.5.1.2 Record particulate emissions data per the requirements of EPA Method 28WHH and the standards referenced therein.
12.5.1.3 Record data needed to determine overall efficiency (SLM) per the requirements of CSA B415.1-10 (IBR, see § 60.17) clauses 6.2.1, 6.2.2, 6.3, 8.5.7, 10.4.3(a), 10.4.3(f), and 13.7.9.3
12.5.1.3.1 Measure and record the test room air temperature in accordance with the requirements of CSA B415.1-10 (IBR, see § 60.17), clauses 6.2.1, 8.5.7 and 10.4.3(g).
12.5.1.3.2 Measure and record the flue gas temperature in accordance with the requirements of CSA B415.1-10 (IBR, see § 60.17), clauses 6.2.2, 8.5.7 and 10.4.3(f).
12.5.1.3.3 Determine and record the carbon monoxide (CO) and carbon dioxide (CO2) concentrations in the flue gas in accordance with CSA B415.1-10 (IBR, see § 60.17), clauses 6.3, 8.5.7 and 10.4.3(i) and (j).
12.5.1.3.4 Measure and record the test fuel weight per the requirements of CSA B415.1-10 (IBR, see § 60.17), clauses 8.5.7 and 10.4.3(h).
12.5.1.3.5 Record the test run time per the requirements of CSA B415.1-10 (IBR, see § 60.17), clause 10.4.3(a).
12.5.1.3.6 Record and document all settings and adjustments, if any, made to the boiler/heater as recommended/required by manufacturer's instruction manual for different combustion conditions or heat loads. These may include temperature setpoints, under and over-fire air adjustment, or other adjustments that could be made by an operator to optimize or alter combustion. All such settings shall be included in the report for each test run.
12.5.1.4 Monitor the average heat output rate on the load side of the heat exchanger based on water temperatures and flow. If the heat output rate over a 10 minute averaging period gets close to the upper or lower limit of the target range (±5 percent), adjust the water flow through the heat exchanger to compensate. Make changes as infrequently as possible while maintaining the target heat output rate. The first test run shall be conducted at the Category IV heat output rate to validate that the appliance is capable of producing the manufacturer's rated heat output capacity.
12.5.2 Test Fuel Charge Adjustment. It is acceptable to adjust the test fuel charge (i.e., reposition) once during a test run if more than 60 percent of the initial test fuel charge weight has been consumed and more than 10 minutes have elapsed without a measurable (1 lb or 0.5 kg) weight change while the operating control is in the demand mode. The time used to make this adjustment shall be less than 60 seconds.
12.5.3 Test Run Completion. For the Category III and IV, “hot-to-hot” test runs, the test run is completed when the remaining weight of the test fuel charge is 0.0 lb (0.0 kg). (WFuelBurned = Wfuel) End the test run when the scale has indicated a test fuel charge weight of 0.0 lb (0.0 kg) or less for 30 seconds.
For the Category I and II “cold-to-cold” test runs, the test run is completed; and the end of a test is defined at the first occurrence of any one of the following:
(a) The remaining weight of the test fuel charge is less than 1 percent of the total test fuel weight (WFuelBurned > 0.99 · Wfuel);
(b) The automatic control system on the boiler/heater switches to an off mode. In this case, the boiler/heater fan (if used) is typically stopped and all air flow dampers are closed by the control system. Note that this off mode cannot be an “overheat” or emergency shutdown which typically requires a manual reset; or
(c) If the boiler/heater does not have an automatic off mode: After 90 percent of the fuel load has been consumed and the scale has indicated a rate of change of the test fuel charge of less than 1.0 lb/hr for a period of 10 minutes or longer. Note—this is not considered “stopped fuel combustion,” See section 12.5.6.1.
12.5.3.1 At the end of the test run, stop the particulate sampling train and overall efficiency (SLM) measurements, and record the run time, and all final measurement values.
12.5.3.2 At the end of the test run, continue to operate the storage tank destratification pump until the total volume pumped exceeds 1.5 times the tank volume. The maximum average of the top and bottom temperatures measured after this time may be taken as the average tank temperature at the end of the tests (TFSavg, See section 13.1). The total volume pumped may be based on the nominal flow rate of the destratification pump (See section 9.6).
12.5.3.3 For the Category I and II test runs, there is a need to determine the energy content of the unburned fuel remaining in the chamber if the remaining mass in the chamber is greater than 1 percent of the test fuel weight. Following the completion of the test, as soon as safely practical, this remaining fuel is removed from the chamber, separated from the remaining ash and weighed. This separation could be implemented with a slotted “scoop” or similar tool. A 1/4 inch opening size in the separation tool shall be used to separate the ash and charcoal. This separated char is assigned a heating value of 12,500 Btu/lb.
12.5.4 Heat Output Capacity Validation. The first test run must produce a heat output rate that is within 10 percent of the manufacturer's rated heat output capacity (Category IV) throughout the test run and an average heat output rate within 5 percent of the manufacturer's rated heat output capacity. If the appliance is not capable of producing a heat output within these limits, the manufacturer's rated heat output capacity is considered not validated and testing is to be terminated. In such cases, the tests may be restarted using a lower heat output capacity if requested by the manufacturer. Alternatively, during the Category IV run, if the rated output cannot be maintained for a 15 minute interval, the manufacturer may elect to reduce the rated output to match the test and complete the Category IV run on this basis. The target outputs for Categories I, II, and III shall then be recalculated based on this change in rated output capacity.
12.5.5 Additional Test Runs. Using the manufacturer's rated heat output capacity as a basis, conduct a test for additional heat output categories as specified in section 4.3. It is not required to run these tests in any particular order.
12.5.6 Alternative Heat Output Rate for Category I. If an appliance cannot be operated in the Category I heat output range due to stopped combustion, two test runs shall be conducted at heat output rates within Category II. When this is the case, the weightings for the weighted averages indicated in section 14.1.15 shall be the average of the Category I and II weighting's and shall be applied to both Category II results. Appliances that are not capable of operation within Category II (<25 percent of maximum) cannot be evaluated by this test method.
12.5.6.1 Stopped Fuel Combustion. Evidence that an appliance cannot be operated at a Category I heat output rate due to stopped fuel combustion shall include documentation of two or more attempts to operate the appliance in heat output rate Category I and fuel combustion has stopped prior to complete consumption of the test fuel charge. Stopped fuel combustion is evidenced when an elapsed time of 60 minutes or more has occurred without a measurable (1 lb or 0.5 kg) weight change in the test fuel charge while the appliance operating control is in the demand mode. Report the evidence and the reasoning used to determine that a test in heat output rate Category I cannot be achieved. For example, two unsuccessful attempts to operate at an output rate of 10 percent of the rated output capacity are not sufficient evidence that heat output rate Category I cannot be achieved.
12.5.7 Appliance Overheating. Appliances with their associated thermal storage shall be capable of operating in all heat output categories without overheating to be rated by this test method. Appliance overheating occurs when the rate of heat withdrawal from the appliance is lower than the rate of heat production when the unit control is in the idle mode. This condition results in the water in the appliance continuing to increase in temperature well above the upper limit setting of the operating control. Evidence of overheating includes: 1 hour or more of appliance water temperature increase above the upper temperature set-point of the operating control, exceeding the temperature limit of a safety control device (independent from the operating control—typically requires manual reset), boiling water in a non-pressurized system or activation of a pressure or temperature relief valve in a pressurized system.
12.5.8 Option to Eliminate Tests in Category II and III. Following successful completion of a test run in Category I, the manufacturer may eliminate the Category II and III tests. For the purpose of calculating the annual averages for particulates and efficiency, the values obtained in the Category I run shall be assumed to apply also to Category II and Category III. It is envisioned that this option would be applicable to systems which have sufficient thermal storage such that the fuel load in the Category I test can be completely consumed without the system reaching its upper operating temperature limit. In this case, the boiler/heater would likely be operating at maximum thermal output during the entire test and this output rate may be higher than the manufacturer's rated heat output capacity. The Category II and III runs would then be the same as the Category I run. It may be assumed that the particulate emission values and efficiency values determined in the startup, steady-state, and end phases of Category I are applicable in Categories II and III, for the purpose of determining the annual averages in lb/mmBtu and g/MJ (See section 13). For the annual average in g/hr, the length of time for stored heat to be drawn from thermal storage shall be determined for the test load requirements of the respective category.
12.5.9 Modification to Measurement Procedure in EPA Method 28WHH to Determine Emissions Separately During the Startup, Steady-State and End Phases. With one of the two particulate sampling trains used, filter changes shall be made at the end of the startup phase and the steady-state phase (See section 3.0). This shall be done to determine the particulate emission rate and particulate emission index for the startup, steady-state, and end phases individually. For this one train, the particulates measured during each of these three phases shall be added together to also determine the particulate emissions for the whole run.
12.5.10 Modification to Measurement Procedure in EPA Method 28WHH and the Standards Referenced therein on Averaging Period for Determination of Efficiency by the Stack Loss Method. The methods currently defined in Method 28WHH allow averaging over 10-minute time periods for flue gas temperature, flue gas CO2, and flue gas CO for the determination of the efficiency with the stack loss method. However, under some cycling conditions the “on” period may be short relative to this 10-minute period. For this reason, during cycling operation the averaging period for these parameters may not be longer than the burner on period divided by 10. The averaging period need not be shorter than one minute. During the off period, under cycling operation, averaging periods as specified in EPA Method 28WHH and the standards referenced therein, may be used. Where short averaging times are used, however, the averaging period for fuel consumption may still be at 10 minutes. This average wood consumption rate shall be applied to all of the smaller time intervals included.
12.6 Additional Test Runs. The testing laboratory may conduct more than one test run in each of the heat output categories specified in section 4.3. If more than one test run is conducted at a specified heat output rate, the results from at least two-thirds of the test runs in that heat output rate category shall be used in calculating the weighted average emission rate. The measurement data and results of all test runs shall be reported regardless of which values are used in calculating the weighted average emission rate.
13.0 Calculation of Results
13.1 Nomenclature
COs—Carbon monoxide measured in the dilution tunnel at arbitrary time in ppm dry basis.
COg/min—Carbon monoxide emission rate in g/min.
COT—Total carbon monoxide emission for the full test run in grams.
CO__1—Startup period carbon monoxide emissions in grams.
CO__2—Steady-state period carbon monoxide emission in grams.
CO__3—End period carbon monoxide emission in grams.
ET—Total particulate emissions for the full test run as determined per EPA Method 28WHH and the standards referenced therein in grams.
E1—Startup period particulate emissions in grams.
E2—Steady-state period particulate emissions in grams.
E3—End period particulate emissions in grams.
E1__g/kg—Startup period particulate emission index in grams per kg fuel.
E2__g/kg—Steady-state period particulate emission index in grams per kg fuel.
E3__g/kg—End period particulate emission index in grams per kg fuel.
E1__g/hr—Startup period particulate emission rate in grams per hour.
E2__g/hr—Steady-state period particulate emission rate in grams per hour.
E3__g/hr—End period particulate emission rate in grams per hour.
Eg/MJ—Emission rate in grams per MJ of heat output.
Elb/mmBtu output—Emissions rate in pounds per million Btu of heat output.
Eg/kg—Emissions factor in grams per kilogram of dry fuel burned.
Eg/hr—Emission factor in grams per hour.
HHV—Higher heating value of fuel = 8600 Btu/lb (19.990 MJ/kg).
LHV—Lower heating value of fuel = 7988 Btu/lb (18.567 MJ/kg).
ΔT—Temperature difference between cooling water entering and exiting the heat exchanger.
Qout—Total heat output in Btu (MJ).
Qin—Total heat input available in test fuel charge in Btu's (MJ).
Qstd—Volumetric flow rate in dilution tunnel in dscfm.
M—Mass flow rate of water in lb/min (kg/min).
Vi—Volume of water indicated by a totalizing flow meter at the ith reading in gallons (liters).
Vf—Volumetric flow rate of water in heat exchange system in gallons per minute (liters/min).
Θ—Total length of burn period in hours (Θ1 + Θ2 + Θ3).
Θ1—Length of time of the startup period in hours.
Θ2—Length of time of the steady-state period in hours.
Θ3—Length of time of the end period in hours.
Θ4—Length of time for stored heat to be used following a burn period in hours.
ti—Data sampling interval in minutes.
ηdel—Delivered heating efficiency in percent.
Fi—Weighting factor for heat output category i. (See Table 2.)
T1—Temperature of water at the inlet on the supply side of the heat exchanger, °F.
T2—Temperature of the water at the outlet on the supply side of the heat exchanger, °F.
T3—Temperature of cooling water at the inlet to the load side of the heat exchanger, °F.
T4—Temperature of cooling water at the outlet of the load side of the heat exchanger, °F.
T5—Temperature of the hot water supply as it leaves the boiler/heater, °F.
T6—Temperature of return water as it enters the boiler/heater, °F.
T7—Temperature in the boiler/heater optional destratification loop at the top of the boiler/heater, °F.
T8—Temperature in the boiler/heater optional destratification loop at the bottom of the boiler/heater, °F.
TIavg—Average temperature of the appliance and water at start of the test.
TFavg—Average temperature of the appliance and water at the end of the test.
TIS1—Temperature at the inlet to the storage system at the start of the test.
TIS2—Temperature at the outlet from the storage system at the start of the test.
TFS1—Temperature at the inlet to the storage system at the end of the test.
TFS2—Temperature at the outlet from the storage system at the end of the test.
TISavg—Average temperature of the storage system at the start of the test.
TFSavg—Average temperature of the storage system at the end of the test.
MC—Fuel moisture content in percent dry basis.
σ—Density of water in pounds per gallon.
σInitial—Density of water in the boiler/heater system at the start of the test in pounds per gallons.
σboiler/heater—Density of water in the boiler/heater system at an arbitrary time during the test in pounds per gallon.
Cp—Specific heat of water in Btu/lb, °F.
Csteel—Specific heat of steel (0.1 Btu/lb, °F).
Vboiler/heater—total volume of water in the boiler/heater system on the weight scale in gallons.
Wfuel—Fuel charge weight, as-fired or “wet”, in pounds (kg).
Wfuel__1—Fuel consumed during the startup period in pounds (kg).
Wfuel__2—Fuel consumed during the steady state period in pounds (kg).
Wfuel__3—Fuel consumed during the end period in pounds (kg).
WFuelBurned—Weight of fuel that has been burned from the start of the test to an arbitrary time, including the needed correction for the change in density and weight of the water in the boiler/heater system on the scale in pounds (kg).
WRemainingFuel—Weight of unburned fuel separated from the ash at the end of a test. Useful only for Category I and Category II tests.
Wapp—Weight of empty appliance in pounds (kg).
Wwat—Weight of water in supply side of the system in pounds (kg).
WScaleInitial—Weight reading on the scale at the start of the test, just after the test load has been added in pounds (kg).
WScale—Reading of the weight scale at an arbitrary time during the test run in pounds (kg).
WStorageTank—Weight of the storage tank empty in pounds (kg).
WWaterStorage—Weight of the water in the storage tank at TISavg in pounds (kg).
13.2 After the test is completed, determine the particulate emissions ET in accordance with EPA Method 28WHH and the standards referenced therein.
13.3 Determination of the weight of fuel that has been burned at an arbitrary time.
For the purpose of tracking the consumption of the test fuel load during a test run the following may be used to calculate the weight of fuel that burned since the start of the test:
Water density, σ, is calculated using Equation 12.
13.4 Determine Average Fuel Load Moisture Content.
13.5 Determine Heat Input.
13.5.1 Correction to Qin for the Category I and II tests, where there is greater than 1 percent of the test fuel charge in the chamber at the end of the test period.
13.6 Determine Heat Output, Efficiency, and Emissions.
13.6.1 Determine heat output as:
Qout = Σ [Heat output determined for each sampling time interval] + Change in heat stored in the appliance + Change in heat in storage tank.
Csteel = 0.1 Btu/lb, -° F.
13.6.2 Determine Heat Output Rate Over Burn Period (Θ1 + Θ2 + Θ3) as:
13.6.3 Determine Emission Rates and Emission Factors as:
If thermal storage is not used in a Category III or IV run, then Θ4 = 0.
E1__g/kg = E1/(Wfuel__1/(1 + MC/100)), g/dry kg.
E2__g/kg = E2/(Wfuel__2/(1 + MC/100)), g/dry kg.
E3__g/kg = E3/(Wfuel__3/(1 + MC/100)), g/dry kg.
E1__g/hr = E1/Θ1, g/hr.
E2__g/hr = E2/Θ2, g/hr.
E3__g/hr = E3/Θ3, g/hr.
13.6.4 Determine delivered efficiency as:
13.6.5 Determine ηSLM—Overall Efficiency, also known as Stack Loss Efficiency, using stack loss method (SLM).
For determination of the average overall thermal efficiency (ηSLM) for the test run, use the data collected over the full test run and the calculations in accordance with CSA B415.1-10 (IBR, see § 60.17), clause 13.7 except for 13.7.2(e), (f), (g), and (h), use the following average fuel properties for oak: %C = 50.0, %H = 6.6, %O = 43.2, %Ash = 0.2.
13.6.5.1 Whenever the CSA B415.1-10 (IBR, see § 60.17) overall efficiency is found to be lower than the overall efficiency based on load side measurements, as determined by Eq. 22 of this method, section 14.1.7 of the test report must include a discussion of the reasons for this result. For a test where the CSA B415.1-10 overall efficiency SLM is less than 2 percentage points lower than the overall efficiency based on load side measurements, the efficiency based on load side measurements shall be considered invalid. [Note on the rationale for the 2 percentage points limit. The SLM method does not include boiler/heater jacket losses and, for this reason, should provide an efficiency which is actually higher than the efficiency based on the energy input and output measurements or “delivered efficiency.” A delivered efficiency that is higher than the efficiency based on the SLM could be considered suspect. A delivered efficiency greater than 2 percentage points higher than the efficiency based on the SLM, then, clearly indicates a measurement error.]
13.6.6 Carbon Monoxide Emissions
For each minute of the test period, the carbon monoxide emission rate shall be calculated as:
Total CO emissions for each of the three test periods (CO__1, CO__2, CO__3) shall be calculated as the sum of the emission rates for each of the 1-minute intervals. Total CO emission for the test run, COT, shall be calculated as the sum of CO__1, CO__2, and CO__3.
13.7 Weighted Average Emissions and Efficiency.
13.7.1 Determine the weighted average emission rate and delivered efficiency from the individual tests in the specified heat output categories. The weighting factors (Fi) are derived from an analysis of ASHRAE bin data which provides details of normal building heating requirements in terms of percent of design capacity and time in a particular capacity range—or “bin”—over the course of a heating season. The values used in this method represent an average of data from several cities located in the northern United States.
If, as discussed in section 12.5.8, the option to eliminate tests in Category II and III is elected, the values of efficiency and particulate emission rate as measured in Category I, shall be assigned also to Category II and III for the purpose of determining the annual averages.
14.0 Report
14.1.1 The report shall include the following:
14.1.2 Name and location of the laboratory conducting the test.
14.1.3 A description of the appliance tested and its condition, date of receipt and dates of tests.
14.1.4 A description of the minimum amount of external thermal storage that is required for use with this system. This shall be specified both in terms of volume in gallons and stored energy content in Btu with a storage temperature ranging from 125 °F to the manufacturer's specified setpoint temperature.
14.1.5 A statement that the test results apply only to the specific appliance tested.
14.1.6 A statement that the test report shall not be reproduced except in full, without the written approval of the laboratory.
14.1.7 A description of the test procedures and test equipment including a schematic or other drawing showing the location of all required test equipment. Also, a description of test fuel sourcing, handling and storage practices shall be included.
14.1.8 Details of deviations from, additions to or exclusions from the test method, and their data quality implications on the test results (if any), as well as information on specific test conditions, such as environmental conditions.
14.1.9 A list of participants and their roles and observers present for the tests.
14.1.10 Data and drawings indicating the fire box size and location of the fuel charge.
14.1.11 Drawings and calculations used to determine firebox volume.
14.1.12 Information for each test run fuel charge including piece size, moisture content and weight.
14.1.13 All required data and applicable blanks for each test run shall be provided in spreadsheet format both in the printed report and in a computer file such that the data can be easily analyzed and calculations easily verified. Formulas used for all calculations shall be accessible for review.
14.1.14 For each test run, Θ1,Θ2, Θ3, the total CO and particulate emission for each of these three periods, and Θ4.
14.1.15 Calculated results for delivered efficiency at each heat output rate and the weighted average emissions reported as total emissions in grams, pounds per mm Btu of delivered heat, grams per MJ of delivered heat, grams per kilogram of dry fuel and grams per hour. Results shall be reported for each heat output category and the weighted average.
14.1.16 Tables 1A, 1B, 1C, 1D, 1E and Table 2 must be used for presentation of results in test reports.
14.1.17 A statement of the estimated uncertainty of measurement of the emissions and efficiency test results.
14.1.18 A plot of CO emission rate in grams/minute vs. time, based on 1 minute averages, for the entire test period, for each run.
14.1.19 A plot of estimated boiler/heater energy release rate in Btu/hr based on 10 minute averages, for the entire test period, for each run. This will be calculated from the fuel used, the wood heating value and moisture content, and the SLM efficiency during each 10 minute period.
14.1.20 Raw data, calibration records, and other relevant documentation shall be retained by the laboratory for a minimum of 7 years.
15.0 Precision and Bias
15.1 Precision—It is not possible to specify the precision of the procedure in this test method because the appliance operation and fueling protocols and the appliances themselves produce variable amounts of emissions and cannot be used to determine reproducibility or repeatability of this test method.
15.2 Bias—No definitive information can be presented on the bias of the procedure in this test method for measuring solid fuel burning hydronic heater emissions because no material having an accepted reference value is available.
16.0 Keywords
16.1 Solid fuel, hydronic heating appliances, wood-burning hydronic heaters, partial thermal storage.
Method 29—Determination of Metals Emissions From Stationary Sources
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Analytes.
| Analyte | CAS No. |
|---|---|
| Antimony (Sb) | 7440-36-0 |
| Arsenic (As) | 7440-38-2 |
| Barium (Ba) | 7440-39-3 |
| Beryllium (Be) | 7440-41-7 |
| Cadmium (Cd) | 7440-43-9 |
| Chromium (Cr) | 7440-47-3 |
| Cobalt (Co) | 7440-48-4 |
| Copper (Cu) | 7440-50-8 |
| Lead (Pb) | 7439-92-1 |
| Manganese (Mn) | 7439-96-5 |
| Mercury (Hg) | 7439-97-6 |
| Nickel (Ni) | 7440-02-0 |
| Phosphorus (P) | 7723-14-0 |
| Selenium (Se) | 7782-49-2 |
| Silver (Ag) | 7440-22-4 |
| Thallium (Tl) | 7440-28-0 |
| Zinc (Zn) | 7440-66-6 |
1.2 Applicability. This method is applicable to the determination of metals emissions from stationary sources. This method may be used to determine particulate emissions in addition to the metals emissions if the prescribed procedures and precautions are followed.
1.2.1 Hg emissions can be measured, alternatively, using EPA Method 101A of Appendix B, 40 CFR Part 61. Method 101-A measures only Hg but it can be of special interest to sources which need to measure both Hg and Mn emissions.
2.0 Summary of Method
2.1 Principle. A stack sample is withdrawn isokinetically from the source, particulate emissions are collected in the probe and on a heated filter, and gaseous emissions are then collected in an aqueous acidic solution of hydrogen peroxide (analyzed for all metals including Hg) and an aqueous acidic solution of potassium permanganate (analyzed only for Hg). The recovered samples are digested, and appropriate fractions are analyzed for Hg by cold vapor atomic absorption spectroscopy (CVAAS) and for Sb, As, Ba, Be, Cd, Cr, Co, Cu, Pb, Mn, Ni, P, Se, Ag, Tl, and Zn by inductively coupled argon plasma emission spectroscopy (ICAP) or atomic absorption spectroscopy (AAS). Graphite furnace atomic absorption spectroscopy (GFAAS) is used for analysis of Sb, As, Cd, Co, Pb, Se, and Tl if these elements require greater analytical sensitivity than can be obtained by ICAP. If one so chooses, AAS may be used for analysis of all listed metals if the resulting in-stack method detection limits meet the goal of the testing program. Similarly, inductively coupled plasma-mass spectroscopy (ICP-MS) may be used for analysis of Sb, As, Ba, Be, Cd, Cr, Co, Cu, Pb, Mn, Ni, Ag, Tl and Zn.
3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
4.0 Interferences
4.1 Iron (Fe) can be a spectral interference during the analysis of As, Cr, and Cd by ICAP. Aluminum (Al) can be a spectral interference during the analysis of As and Pb by ICAP. Generally, these interferences can be reduced by diluting the analytical sample, but such dilution raises the in-stack detection limits. Background and overlap corrections may be used to adjust for spectral interferences. Refer to Method 6010 of Reference 2 in section 16.0 or the other analytical methods used for details on potential interferences to this method. For all GFAAS analyses, use matrix modifiers to limit interferences, and matrix match all standards.
5.0 Safety
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health practices and to determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to performing this test method.
5.2 Corrosive Reagents. The following reagents are hazardous. Personal protective equipment and safe procedures are useful in preventing chemical splashes. If contact occurs, immediately flush with copious amounts of water at least 15 minutes. Remove clothing under shower and decontaminate. Treat residual chemical burn as thermal burn.
5.2.1 Nitric Acid (HNO3). Highly corrosive to eyes, skin, nose, and lungs. Vapors cause bronchitis, pneumonia, or edema of lungs. Reaction to inhalation may be delayed as long as 30 hours and still be fatal. Provide ventilation to limit exposure. Strong oxidizer. Hazardous reaction may occur with organic materials such as solvents.
5.2.2 Sulfuric Acid (H2SO4). Rapidly destructive to body tissue. Will cause third degree burns. Eye damage may result in blindness. Inhalation may be fatal from spasm of the larynx, usually within 30 minutes. May cause lung tissue damage with edema. 1 mg/m 3 for 8 hours will cause lung damage or, in higher concentrations, death. Provide ventilation to limit inhalation. Reacts violently with metals and organics.
5.2.3 Hydrochloric Acid (HC1). Highly corrosive liquid with toxic vapors. Vapors are highly irritating to eyes, skin, nose, and lungs, causing severe damage. May cause bronchitis, pneumonia, or edema of lungs. Exposure to concentrations of 0.13 to 0.2 percent can be lethal to humans in a few minutes. Provide ventilation to limit exposure. Reacts with metals, producing hydrogen gas.
5.2.4 Hydrofluoric Acid (HF). Highly corrosive to eyes, skin, nose, throat, and lungs. Reaction to exposure may be delayed by 24 hours or more. Provide ventilation to limit exposure.
5.2.5 Hydrogen Peroxide (H2O2). Irritating to eyes, skin, nose, and lungs. 30% H2O2 is a strong oxidizing agent. Avoid contact with skin, eyes, and combustible material. Wear gloves when handling.
5.2.6 Potassium Permanganate (KMnO4). Caustic, strong oxidizer. Avoid bodily contact with.
5.2.7 Potassium Persulfate. Strong oxidizer. Avoid bodily contact with. Keep containers well closed and in a cool place.
5.3 Reaction Pressure. Due to the potential reaction of the potassium permanganate with the acid, there could be pressure buildup in the acidic KMnO4 absorbing solution storage bottle. Therefore these bottles shall not be fully filled and shall be vented to relieve excess pressure and prevent explosion potentials. Venting is required, but not in a manner that will allow contamination of the solution. A No. 70-72 hole drilled in the container cap and Teflon liner has been used.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
6.1 Sampling. A schematic of the sampling train is shown in Figure 29-1. It has general similarities to the Method 5 train.
6.1.1 Probe Nozzle (Probe Tip) and Borosilicate or Quartz Glass Probe Liner. Same as Method 5, sections 6.1.1.1 and 6.1.1.2, except that glass nozzles are required unless alternate tips are constructed of materials that are free from contamination and will not interfere with the sample. If a probe tip other than glass is used, no correction to the sample test results to compensate for the nozzle's effect on the sample is allowed. Probe fittings of plastic such as Teflon, polypropylene, etc. are recommended instead of metal fittings to prevent contamination. If one chooses to do so, a single glass piece consisting of a combined probe tip and probe liner may be used.
6.1.2 Pitot Tube and Differential Pressure Gauge. Same as Method 2, sections 6.1 and 6.2, respectively.
6.1.3 Filter Holder. Glass, same as Method 5, section 6.1.1.5, except use a Teflon filter support or other non-metallic, non-contaminating support in place of the glass frit.
6.1.4 Filter Heating System. Same as Method 5, section 6.1.1.6.
6.1.5 Condenser. Use the following system for condensing and collecting gaseous metals and determining the moisture content of the stack gas. The condensing system shall consist of four to seven impingers connected in series with leak-free ground glass fittings or other leak-free, non-contaminating fittings. Use the first impinger as a moisture trap. The second impinger (which is the first HNO3/H2O2 impinger) shall be identical to the first impinger in Method 5. The third impinger (which is the second HNO3/H2O2 impinger) shall be a Greenburg Smith impinger with the standard tip as described for the second impinger in Method 5, section 6.1.1.8. The fourth (empty) impinger and the fifth and sixth (both acidified KMnO4) impingers are the same as the first impinger in Method 5. Place a temperature sensor capable of measuring to within 1 °C (2 °F) at the outlet of the last impinger. If no Hg analysis is planned, then the fourth, fifth, and sixth impingers are not used.
6.1.6 Metering System, Barometer, and Gas Density Determination Equipment. Same as Method 5, sections 6.1.1.9, 6.1.2, and 6.1.3, respectively.
6.1.7 Teflon Tape. For capping openings and sealing connections, if necessary, on the sampling train.
6.2 Sample Recovery. Same as Method 5, sections 6.2.1 through 6.2.8 (Probe-Liner and Probe-Nozzle Brushes or Swabs, Wash Bottles, Sample Storage Containers, Petri Dishes, Glass Graduated Cylinder, Plastic Storage Containers, Funnel and Rubber Policeman, and Glass Funnel), respectively, with the following exceptions and additions:
6.2.1 Non-metallic Probe-Liner and Probe-Nozzle Brushes or Swabs. Use non-metallic probe-liner and probe-nozzle brushes or swabs for quantitative recovery of materials collected in the front-half of the sampling train.
6.2.2 Sample Storage Containers. Use glass bottles (see section 8.1 of this Method) with Teflon-lined caps that are non-reactive to the oxidizing solutions, with capacities of 1000- and 500-ml, for storage of acidified KMnO4—containing samples and blanks. Glass or polyethylene bottles may be used for other sample types.
6.2.3 Graduated Cylinder. Glass or equivalent.
6.2.4 Funnel. Glass or equivalent.
6.2.5 Labels. For identifying samples.
6.2.6 Polypropylene Tweezers and/or Plastic Gloves. For recovery of the filter from the sampling train filter holder.
6.3 Sample Preparation and Analysis.
6.3.1 Volumetric Flasks, 100-ml, 250-ml, and 1000-ml. For preparation of standards and sample dilutions.
6.3.2 Graduated Cylinders. For preparation of reagents.
6.3.3 Parr Bombs or Microwave Pressure Relief Vessels with Capping Station (CEM Corporation model or equivalent). For sample digestion.
6.3.4 Beakers and Watch Glasses. 250-ml beakers, with watch glass covers, for sample digestion.
6.3.5 Ring Stands and Clamps. For securing equipment such as filtration apparatus.
6.3.6 Filter Funnels. For holding filter paper.
6.3.7 Disposable Pasteur Pipets and Bulbs.
6.3.8 Volumetric Pipets.
6.3.9 Analytical Balance. Accurate to within 0.1 mg.
6.3.10 Microwave or Conventional Oven. For heating samples at fixed power levels or temperatures, respectively.
6.3.11 Hot Plates.
6.3.12 Atomic Absorption Spectrometer (AAS). Equipped with a background corrector.
6.3.12.1 Graphite Furnace Attachment. With Sb, As, Cd, Co, Pb, Se, and Tl hollow cathode lamps (HCLs) or electrodeless discharge lamps (EDLs). Same as Reference 2 in section 16.0. Methods 7041 (Sb), 7060 (As), 7131 (Cd), 7201 (Co), 7421 (Pb), 7740 (Se), and 7841 (Tl).
6.3.12.2 Cold Vapor Mercury Attachment. With a mercury HCL or EDL, an air recirculation pump, a quartz cell, an aerator apparatus, and a heat lamp or desiccator tube. The heat lamp shall be capable of raising the temperature at the quartz cell by 10 °C above ambient, so that no condensation forms on the wall of the quartz cell. Same as Method 7470 in Reference 2 in section 16.0. See note 2: section 11.1.3 for other acceptable approaches for analysis of Hg in which analytical detection limits of 0.002 ng/ml were obtained.
6.3.13 Inductively Coupled Argon Plasma Spectrometer. With either a direct or sequential reader and an alumina torch. Same as EPA Method 6010 in Reference 2 in section 16.0.
6.3.14 Inductively Coupled Plasma-Mass Spectrometer.
Same as EPA Method 6020 in Reference 2 in section 16.0.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
7.1 Unless otherwise indicated, it is intended that all reagents conform to the specifications established by the Committee on Analytical Reagents of the American Chemical Society, where such specifications are available. Otherwise, use the best available grade.
7.2 Sampling Reagents.
7.2.1 Sample Filters. Without organic binders. The filters shall contain less than 1.3 µg/in. 2 of each of the metals to be measured. Analytical results provided by filter manufacturers stating metals content of the filters are acceptable. However, if no such results are available, analyze filter blanks for each target metal prior to emission testing. Quartz fiber filters meeting these requirements are recommended. However, if glass fiber filters become available which meet these requirements, they may be used. Filter efficiencies and unreactiveness to sulfur dioxide (SO2) or sulfur trioxide (SO3) shall be as described in section 7.1.1 of Method 5.
7.2.2 Water. To conform to ASTM Specification D1193-77 or 91, Type II (incorporated by reference—see § 60.17). If necessary, analyze the water for all target metals prior to field use. All target metals should be less than 1 ng/ml.
7.2.3 HNO3, Concentrated. Baker Instra-analyzed or equivalent.
7.2.4 HCl, Concentrated. Baker Instra-analyzed or equivalent.
7.2.5 H2O2, 30 Percent (V/V).
7.2.6 KMnO4.
7.2.7 H2SO4, Concentrated.
7.2.8 Silica Gel and Crushed Ice. Same as Method 5, sections 7.1.2 and 7.1.4, respectively.
7.3 Pretest Preparation of Sampling Reagents.
7.3.1 HNO3/H2O2 Absorbing Solution, 5 Percent HNO3/10 Percent H2O2. Add carefully with stirring 50 ml of concentrated HNO3 to a 1000-ml volumetric flask containing approximately 500 ml of water, and then add carefully with stirring 333 ml of 30 percent H2O2. Dilute to volume with water. Mix well. This reagent shall contain less than 2 ng/ml of each target metal.
7.3.2 Acidic KMnO4 Absorbing Solution, 4 Percent KMnO4 (W/V), 10 Percent H2SO4 (V/V). Prepare fresh daily. Mix carefully, with stirring, 100 ml of concentrated H2SO4 into approximately 800 ml of water, and add water with stirring to make a volume of 1 liter: this solution is 10 percent H2SO4 (V/V). Dissolve, with stirring, 40 g of KMnO4 into 10 percent H2SO4 (V/V) and add 10 percent H2SO4 (V/V) with stirring to make a volume of 1 liter. Prepare and store in glass bottles to prevent degradation. This reagent shall contain less than 2 ng/ml of Hg.
Precaution: To prevent autocatalytic decomposition of the permanganate solution, filter the solution through Whatman 541 filter paper.
7.3.3 HNO3, 0.1 N. Add with stirring 6.3 ml of concentrated HNO3 (70 percent) to a flask containing approximately 900 ml of water. Dilute to 1000 ml with water. Mix well. This reagent shall contain less than 2 ng/ml of each target metal.
7.3.4 HCl, 8 N. Carefully add with stirring 690 ml of concentrated HCl to a flask containing 250 ml of water. Dilute to 1000 ml with water. Mix well. This reagent shall contain less than 2 ng/ml of Hg.
7.4 Glassware Cleaning Reagents.
7.4.1 HNO3, Concentrated. Fisher ACS grade or equivalent.
7.4.2 Water. To conform to ASTM Specifications D1193, Type II.
7.4.3 HNO3, 10 Percent (V/V). Add with stirring 500 ml of concentrated HNO3 to a flask containing approximately 4000 ml of water. Dilute to 5000 ml with water. Mix well. This reagent shall contain less than 2 ng/ml of each target metal.
7.5 Sample Digestion and Analysis Reagents. The metals standards, except Hg, may also be made from solid chemicals as described in Reference 3 in section 16.0. Refer to References 1, 2, or 5 in section 16.0 for additional information on Hg standards. The 1000 µg/ml Hg stock solution standard may be made according to section 7.2.7 of Method 101A.
7.5.1 HCl, Concentrated.
7.5.2 HF, Concentrated.
7.5.3 HNO3, Concentrated. Baker Instra-analyzed or equivalent.
7.5.4 HNO3, 50 Percent (V/V). Add with stirring 125 ml of concentrated HNO3 to 100 ml of water. Dilute to 250 ml with water. Mix well. This reagent shall contain less than 2 ng/ml of each target metal.
7.5.5 HNO3, 5 Percent (V/V). Add with stirring 50 ml of concentrated HNO3 to 800 ml of water. Dilute to 1000 ml with water. Mix well. This reagent shall contain less than 2 ng/ml of each target metal.
7.5.6 Water. To conform to ASTM Specifications D1193, Type II.
7.5.7 Hydroxylamine Hydrochloride and Sodium Chloride Solution. See Reference 2 In section 16.0 for preparation.
7.5.8 Stannous Chloride. See Reference 2 in section 16.0 for preparation.
7.5.9 KMnO4, 5 Percent (W/V). See Reference 2 in section 16.0 for preparation.
7.5.10 H2SO4, Concentrated.
7.5.11 Potassium Persulfate, 5 Percent (W/V). See Reference 2 in section 16.0 for preparation.
7.5.12 Nickel Nitrate, Ni(N03) 2 6H20.
7.5.13 Lanthanum Oxide, La203.
7.5.14 Hg Standard (AAS Grade), 1000 µg/ml.
7.5.15 Pb Standard (AAS Grade), 1000 µg/ml.
7.5.16 As Standard (AAS Grade), 1000 µg/ml.
7.5.17 Cd Standard (AAS Grade), 1000 µg/ml.
7.5.18 Cr Standard (AAS Grade), 1000 µg/ml.
7.5.19 Sb Standard (AAS Grade), 1000 µg/ml.
7.5.20 Ba Standard (AAS Grade), 1000 µg/ml.
7.5.21 Be Standard (AAS Grade), 1000 µg/ml.
7.5.22 Co Standard (AAS Grade), 1000 µg/ml.
7.5.23 Cu Standard (AAS Grade), 1000 µg/ml.
7.5.24 Mn Standard (AAS Grade), 1000 µg/ml.
7.5.25 Ni Standard (AAS Grade), 1000 µg/ml.
7.5.26 P Standard (AAS Grade), 1000 µg/ml.
7.5.27 Se Standard (AAS Grade), 1000 µg/ml.
7.5.28 Ag Standard (AAS Grade), 1000 µg/ml.
7.5.29 Tl Standard (AAS Grade), 1000 µg/ml.
7.5.30 Zn Standard (AAS Grade), 1000 µg/ml.
7.5.31 Al Standard (AAS Grade), 1000 µg/ml.
7.5.32 Fe Standard (AAS Grade), 1000 µg/ml.
7.5.33 Hg Standards and Quality Control Samples. Prepare fresh weekly a 10 µg/ml intermediate Hg standard by adding 5 ml of 1000 µg/ml Hg stock solution prepared according to Method 101A to a 500-ml volumetric flask; dilute with stirring to 500 ml by first carefully adding 20 ml of 15 percent HNO3 and then adding water to the 500-ml volume. Mix well. Prepare a 200 ng/ml working Hg standard solution fresh daily: add 5 ml of the 10 µg/ml intermediate standard to a 250-ml volumetric flask, and dilute to 250 ml with 5 ml of 4 percent KMnO4, 5 ml of 15 percent HNO3, and then water. Mix well. Use at least five separate aliquots of the working Hg standard solution and a blank to prepare the standard curve. These aliquots and blank shall contain 0.0, 1.0, 2.0, 3.0, 4.0, and 5.0 ml of the working standard solution containing 0, 200, 400, 600, 800, and 1000 ng Hg, respectively. Prepare quality control samples by making a separate 10 µg/ml standard and diluting until in the calibration range.
7.5.34 ICAP Standards and Quality Control Samples. Calibration standards for ICAP analysis can be combined into four different mixed standard solutions as follows:
| Solution | Elements |
|---|---|
| I | As, Be, Cd, Mn, Pb, Se, Zn. |
| II | Ba, Co, Cu, Fe. |
| III | Al, Cr, Ni. |
| IV | Ag, P, Sb, Tl. |
Prepare these standards by combining and diluting the appropriate volumes of the 1000 µg/ml solutions with 5 percent HNO3. A minimum of one standard and a blank can be used to form each calibration curve. However, prepare a separate quality control sample spiked with known amounts of the target metals in quantities in the mid-range of the calibration curve. Suggested standard levels are 25 µg/ml for Al, Cr and Pb, 15 µg/ml for Fe, and 10 µg/ml for the remaining elements. Prepare any standards containing less than 1 µg/ml of metal on a daily basis. Standards containing greater than 1 µg/ml of metal should be stable for a minimum of 1 to 2 weeks. For ICP-MS, follow Method 6020 in EPA Publication SW-846 Third Edition (November 1986) including updates I, II, IIA, IIB and III, as incorporated by reference in § 60.17(i).
7.5.35 GFAAS Standards. Sb, As, Cd, Co, Pb, Se, and Tl. Prepare a 10 µg/ml standard by adding 1 ml of 1000 µg/ml standard to a 100-ml volumetric flask. Dilute with stirring to 100 ml with 10 percent HNO3. For GFAAS, matrix match the standards. Prepare a 100 ng/ml standard by adding 1 ml of the 10 µg/ml standard to a 100-ml volumetric flask, and dilute to 100 ml with the appropriate matrix solution. Prepare other standards by diluting the 100 ng/ml standards. Use at least five standards to make up the standard curve. Suggested levels are 0, 10, 50, 75, and 100 ng/ml. Prepare quality control samples by making a separate 10 µg/ml standard and diluting until it is in the range of the samples. Prepare any standards containing less than 1 µg/ml of metal on a daily basis. Standards containing greater than 1 µg/ml of metal should be stable for a minimum of 1 to 2 weeks.
7.5.36 Matrix Modifiers.
7.5.36.1 Nickel Nitrate, 1 Percent (V/V). Dissolve 4.956 g of Ni(N03)2·6H20 or other nickel compound suitable for preparation of this matrix modifier in approximately 50 ml of water in a 100-ml volumetric flask. Dilute to 100 ml with water.
7.5.36.2 Nickel Nitrate, 0.1 Percent (V/V). Dilute 10 ml of 1 percent nickel nitrate solution to 100 ml with water. Inject an equal amount of sample and this modifier into the graphite furnace during GFAAS analysis for As.
7.5.36.3 Lanthanum. Carefully dissolve 0.5864 g of La203 in 10 ml of concentrated HN03, and dilute the solution by adding it with stirring to approximately 50 ml of water. Dilute to 100 ml with water, and mix well. Inject an equal amount of sample and this modifier into the graphite furnace during GFAAS analysis for Pb.
7.5.37 Whatman 40 and 541 Filter Papers (or equivalent). For filtration of digested samples.
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Transport, and Storage
8.1 Sampling. The complexity of this method is such that, to obtain reliable results, both testers and analysts must be trained and experienced with the test procedures, including source sampling; reagent preparation and handling; sample handling; safety equipment and procedures; analytical calculations; reporting; and the specific procedural descriptions throughout this method.
8.1.1 Pretest Preparation. Follow the same general procedure given in Method 5, section 8.1, except that, unless particulate emissions are to be determined, the filter need not be desiccated or weighed. First, rinse all sampling train glassware with hot tap water and then wash in hot soapy water. Next, rinse glassware three times with tap water, followed by three additional rinses with water. Then soak all glassware in a 10 percent (V/V) nitric acid solution for a minimum of 4 hours, rinse three times with water, rinse a final time with acetone, and allow to air dry. Cover all glassware openings where contamination can occur until the sampling train is assembled for sampling.
8.1.2 Preliminary Determinations. Same as Method 5, section 8.1.2.
8.1.3 Preparation of Sampling Train.
8.1.3.1 Set up the sampling train as shown in Figure 29-1. Follow the same general procedures given in Method 5, section 8.3, except place 100 ml of the HNO3/H2O2 solution (Section 7.3.1 of this method) in each of the second and third impingers as shown in Figure 29-1. Place 100 ml of the acidic KMnO4 absorbing solution (Section 7.3.2 of this method) in each of the fifth and sixth impingers as shown in Figure 29-1, and transfer approximately 200 to 300 g of pre-weighed silica gel from its container to the last impinger. Alternatively, the silica gel may be weighed directly in the impinger just prior to final train assembly.
8.1.3.2 Based on the specific source sampling conditions, the use of an empty first impinger can be eliminated if the moisture to be collected in the impingers will be less than approximately 100 ml.
8.1.3.3 If Hg analysis will not be performed, the fourth, fifth, and sixth impingers as shown in Figure 29-1 are not required.
8.1.3.4 To insure leak-free sampling train connections and to prevent possible sample contamination problems, use Teflon tape or other non-contaminating material instead of silicone grease.
Precaution: Exercise extreme care to prevent contamination within the train. Prevent the acidic KMnO4 from contacting any glassware that contains sample material to be analyzed for Mn. Prevent acidic H2O2 from mixing with the acidic KMnO4.
8.1.4 Leak-Check Procedures. Follow the leak-check procedures given in Method 5, section 8.4.2 (Pretest Leak-Check), section 8.4.3 (Leak-Checks During the Sample Run), and section 8.4.4 (Post-Test Leak-Checks).
8.1.5 Sampling Train Operation. Follow the procedures given in Method 5, section 8.5. When sampling for Hg, use a procedure analogous to that described in section 8.1 of Method 101A, 40 CFR Part 61, Appendix B, if necessary to maintain the desired color in the last acidified permanganate impinger. For each run, record the data required on a data sheet such as the one shown in Figure 5-3 of Method 5.
8.1.6 Calculation of Percent Isokinetic. Same as Method 5, section 12.11.
8.2 Sample Recovery.
8.2.1 Begin cleanup procedures as soon as the probe is removed from the stack at the end of a sampling period. The probe should be allowed to cool prior to sample recovery. When it can be safely handled, wipe off all external particulate matter near the tip of the probe nozzle and place a rinsed, non-contaminating cap over the probe nozzle to prevent losing or gaining particulate matter. Do not cap the probe tip tightly while the sampling train is cooling; a vacuum can form in the filter holder with the undesired result of drawing liquid from the impingers onto the filter.
8.2.2 Before moving the sampling train to the cleanup site, remove the probe from the sampling train and cap the open outlet. Be careful not to lose any condensate that might be present. Cap the filter inlet where the probe was fastened. Remove the umbilical cord from the last impinger and cap the impinger. Cap the filter holder outlet and impinger inlet. Use non-contaminating caps, whether ground-glass stoppers, plastic caps, serum caps, or Teflon ® tape to close these openings.
8.2.3 Alternatively, the following procedure may be used to disassemble the train before the probe and filter holder/oven are completely cooled: Initially disconnect the filter holder outlet/impinger inlet and loosely cap the open ends. Then disconnect the probe from the filter holder or cyclone inlet and loosely cap the open ends. Cap the probe tip and remove the umbilical cord as previously described.
8.2.4 Transfer the probe and filter-impinger assembly to a cleanup area that is clean and protected from the wind and other potential causes of contamination or loss of sample. Inspect the train before and during disassembly and note any abnormal conditions. Take special precautions to assure that all the items necessary for recovery do not contaminate the samples. The sample is recovered and treated as follows (see schematic in Figures 29-2a and 29-2b):
8.2.5 Container No. 1 (Sample Filter). Carefully remove the filter from the filter holder and place it in its labeled petri dish container. To handle the filter, use either acid-washed polypropylene or Teflon coated tweezers or clean, disposable surgical gloves rinsed with water and dried. If it is necessary to fold the filter, make certain the particulate cake is inside the fold. Carefully transfer the filter and any particulate matter or filter fibers that adhere to the filter holder gasket to the petri dish by using a dry (acid-cleaned) nylon bristle brush. Do not use any metal-containing materials when recovering this train. Seal the labeled petri dish.
8.2.6 Container No. 2 (Acetone Rinse). Perform this procedure only if a determination of particulate emissions is to be made. Quantitatively recover particulate matter and any condensate from the probe nozzle, probe fitting, probe liner, and front half of the filter holder by washing these components with a total of 100 ml of acetone, while simultaneously taking great care to see that no dust on the outside of the probe or other surfaces gets in the sample. The use of exactly 100 ml is necessary for the subsequent blank correction procedures. Distilled water may be used instead of acetone when approved by the Administrator and shall be used when specified by the Administrator; in these cases, save a water blank and follow the Administrator's directions on analysis.
8.2.6.1 Carefully remove the probe nozzle, and clean the inside surface by rinsing with acetone from a wash bottle while brushing with a non-metallic brush. Brush until the acetone rinse shows no visible particles, then make a final rinse of the inside surface with acetone.
8.2.6.2 Brush and rinse the sample exposed inside parts of the probe fitting with acetone in a similar way until no visible particles remain. Rinse the probe liner with acetone by tilting and rotating the probe while squirting acetone into its upper end so that all inside surfaces will be wetted with acetone. Allow the acetone to drain from the lower end into the sample container. A funnel may be used to aid in transferring liquid washings to the container. Follow the acetone rinse with a non-metallic probe brush. Hold the probe in an inclined position, squirt acetone into the upper end as the probe brush is being pushed with a twisting action three times through the probe. Hold a sample container underneath the lower end of the probe, and catch any acetone and particulate matter which is brushed through the probe until no visible particulate matter is carried out with the acetone or until none remains in the probe liner on visual inspection. Rinse the brush with acetone, and quantitatively collect these washings in the sample container. After the brushing, make a final acetone rinse of the probe as described above.
8.2.6.3 It is recommended that two people clean the probe to minimize sample losses. Between sampling runs, keep brushes clean and protected from contamination. Clean the inside of the front-half of the filter holder by rubbing the surfaces with a non-metallic brush and rinsing with acetone. Rinse each surface three times or more if needed to remove visible particulate. Make a final rinse of the brush and filter holder. After all acetone washings and particulate matter have been collected in the sample container, tighten the lid so that acetone will not leak out when shipped to the laboratory. Mark the height of the fluid level to determine whether or not leakage occurred during transport. Clearly label the container to identify its contents.
8.2.7 Container No. 3 (Probe Rinse). Keep the probe assembly clean and free from contamination during the probe rinse. Rinse the probe nozzle and fitting, probe liner, and front-half of the filter holder thoroughly with a total of 100 ml of 0.1 N HNO3, and place the wash into a sample storage container. Perform the rinses as applicable and generally as described in Method 12, section 8.7.1. Record the volume of the rinses. Mark the height of the fluid level on the outside of the storage container and use this mark to determine if leakage occurs during transport. Seal the container, and clearly label the contents. Finally, rinse the nozzle, probe liner, and front-half of the filter holder with water followed by acetone, and discard these rinses.
8.2.8 Container No. 4 (Impingers 1 through 3, Moisture Knockout Impinger, when used, HNO3/H2O2 Impingers Contents and Rinses). Due to the potentially large quantity of liquid involved, the tester may place the impinger solutions from impingers 1 through 3 in more than one container, if necessary. Measure the liquid in the first three impingers to within 0.5 ml using a graduated cylinder. Record the volume. This information is required to calculate the moisture content of the sampled flue gas. Clean each of the first three impingers, the filter support, the back half of the filter housing, and connecting glassware by thoroughly rinsing with 100 ml of 0.1 N HNO3 using the procedure as applicable in Method 12, section 8.7.3.
8.2.9 Container Nos. 5A (0.1 N HNO3), 5B (KMnO4/H2SO4 absorbing solution), and 5C (8 N HCl rinse and dilution).
8.2.9.1 When sampling for Hg, pour all the liquid from the impinger (normally impinger No. 4) that immediately preceded the two permanganate impingers into a graduated cylinder and measure the volume to within 0.5 ml. This information is required to calculate the moisture content of the sampled flue gas. Place the liquid in Container No. 5A. Rinse the impinger with exactly 100 ml of 0.1 N HNO3 and place this rinse in Container No. 5A.
8.2.9.2 Pour all the liquid from the two permanganate impingers into a graduated cylinder and measure the volume to within 0.5 ml. This information is required to calculate the moisture content of the sampled flue gas. Place this acidic KMnO4 solution into Container No. 5B. Using a total of exactly 100 ml of fresh acidified KMnO4 solution for all rinses (approximately 33 ml per rinse), rinse the two permanganate impingers and connecting glassware a minimum of three times. Pour the rinses into Container No. 5B, carefully assuring transfer of all loose precipitated materials from the two impingers. Similarly, using 100 ml total of water, rinse the permanganate impingers and connecting glass a minimum of three times, and pour the rinses into Container 5B, carefully assuring transfer of any loose precipitated material. Mark the height of the fluid level, and clearly label the contents. Read the Precaution: in section 7.3.2.
8.2.9.3 Wash the two permanganate impingers with 25 ml of 8 N HCl, and place the wash in a separate sample container labeled No. 5C containing 200 ml of water. First, place 200 ml of water in the container. Then wash the impinger walls and stem with the 8 N HCl by turning the impinger on its side and rotating it so that the HCl contacts all inside surfaces. Use a total of only 25 ml of 8 N HCl for rinsing both permanganate impingers combined. Rinse the first impinger, then pour the actual rinse used for the first impinger into the second impinger for its rinse. Finally, pour the 25 ml of 8 N HCl rinse carefully into the container with the 200 ml of water. Mark the height of the fluid level on the outside of the container in order to determine if leakage occurs during transport.
8.2.10 Container No. 6 (Silica Gel). Note the color of the indicating silica gel to determine whether it has been completely spent and make a notation of its condition. Transfer the silica gel from its impinger to its original container and seal it. The tester may use a funnel to pour the silica gel and a rubber policeman to remove the silica gel from the impinger. The small amount of particles that might adhere to the impinger wall need not be removed. Do not use water or other liquids to transfer the silica gel since weight gained in the silica gel impinger is used for moisture calculations. Alternatively, if a balance is available in the field, record the weight of the spent silica gel (or silica gel plus impinger) to the nearest 0.5 g.
8.2.11 Container No. 7 (Acetone Blank). If particulate emissions are to be determined, at least once during each field test, place a 100-ml portion of the acetone used in the sample recovery process into a container labeled No. 7. Seal the container.
8.2.12 Container No. 8A (0.1 N HNO3 Blank). At least once during each field test, place 300 ml of the 0.1 N HNO3 solution used in the sample recovery process into a container labeled No. 8A. Seal the container.
8.2.13 Container No. 8B (Water Blank). At least once during each field test, place 100 ml of the water used in the sample recovery process into a container labeled No. 8B. Seal the container.
8.2.14 Container No. 9 (5 Percent HNO3/10 Percent H2O2 Blank). At least once during each field test, place 200 ml of the 5 Percent HNO3/10 Percent H2O2 solution used as the nitric acid impinger reagent into a container labeled No. 9. Seal the container.
8.2.15 Container No. 10 (Acidified KMnO4 Blank). At least once during each field test, place 100 ml of the acidified KMnO4 solution used as the impinger solution and in the sample recovery process into a container labeled No. 10. Prepare the container as described in section 8.2.9.2. Read the Precaution: in section 7.3.2 and read the note in section 8.2.9.2.
8.2.16 Container No. 11 (8 N HCl Blank). At least once during each field test, place 200 ml of water into a sample container labeled No. 11. Then carefully add with stirring 25 ml of 8 N HCl. Mix well and seal the container.
8.2.17 Container No. 12 (Sample Filter Blank). Once during each field test, place into a petri dish labeled No. 12 three unused blank filters from the same lot as the sampling filters. Seal the petri dish.
8.3 Sample Preparation. Note the level of the liquid in each of the containers and determine if any sample was lost during shipment. If a noticeable amount of leakage has occurred, either void the sample or use methods, subject to the approval of the Administrator, to correct the final results. A diagram illustrating sample preparation and analysis procedures for each of the sample train components is shown in Figure 29-3.
8.3.1 Container No. 1 (Sample Filter).
8.3.1.1 If particulate emissions are being determined, first desiccate the filter and filter catch without added heat (do not heat the filters to speed the drying) and weigh to a constant weight as described in section 11.2.1 of Method 5.
8.3.1.2 Following this procedure, or initially, if particulate emissions are not being determined in addition to metals analysis, divide the filter with its filter catch into portions containing approximately 0.5 g each. Place the pieces in the analyst's choice of either individual microwave pressure relief vessels or Parr Bombs. Add 6 ml of concentrated HNO3 and 4 ml of concentrated HF to each vessel. For microwave heating, microwave the samples for approximately 12 to 15 minutes total heating time as follows: heat for 2 to 3 minutes, then turn off the microwave for 2 to 3 minutes, then heat for 2 to 3 minutes, etc., continue this alternation until the 12 to 15 minutes total heating time are completed (this procedure should comprise approximately 24 to 30 minutes at 600 watts). Microwave heating times are approximate and are dependent upon the number of samples being digested simultaneously. Sufficient heating is evidenced by sorbent reflux within the vessel. For conventional heating, heat the Parr Bombs at 140 °C (285 °F) for 6 hours. Then cool the samples to room temperature, and combine with the acid digested probe rinse as required in section 8.3.3.
8.3.1.3 If the sampling train includes an optional glass cyclone in front of the filter, prepare and digest the cyclone catch by the procedures described in section 8.3.1.2 and then combine the digestate with the digested filter sample.
8.3.2 Container No. 2 (Acetone Rinse). Note the level of liquid in the container and confirm on the analysis sheet whether or not leakage occurred during transport. If a noticeable amount of leakage has occurred, either void the sample or use methods, subject to the approval of the Administrator, to correct the final results. Measure the liquid in this container either volumetrically within 1 ml or gravimetrically within 0.5 g. Transfer the contents to an acid-cleaned, tared 250-ml beaker and evaporate to dryness at ambient temperature and pressure. If particulate emissions are being determined, desiccate for 24 hours without added heat, weigh to a constant weight according to the procedures described in section 11.2.1 of Method 5, and report the results to the nearest 0.1 mg. Redissolve the residue with 10 ml of concentrated HNO3. Quantitatively combine the resultant sample, including all liquid and any particulate matter, with Container No. 3 before beginning section 8.3.3.
8.3.3 Container No. 3 (Probe Rinse). Verify that the pH of this sample is 2 or lower. If it is not, acidify the sample by careful addition with stirring of concentrated HNO3 to pH 2. Use water to rinse the sample into a beaker, and cover the beaker with a ribbed watch glass. Reduce the sample volume to approximately 20 ml by heating on a hot plate at a temperature just below boiling. Digest the sample in microwave vessels or Parr Bombs by quantitatively transferring the sample to the vessel or bomb, carefully adding the 6 ml of concentrated HNO3, 4 ml of concentrated HF, and then continuing to follow the procedures described in section 8.3.1.2. Then combine the resultant sample directly with the acid digested portions of the filter prepared previously in section 8.3.1.2. The resultant combined sample is referred to as “Sample Fraction 1”. Filter the combined sample using Whatman 541 filter paper. Dilute to 300 ml (or the appropriate volume for the expected metals concentration) with water. This diluted sample is “Analytical Fraction 1”. Measure and record the volume of Analytical Fraction 1 to within 0.1 ml. Quantitatively remove a 50-ml aliquot and label as “Analytical Fraction 1B”. Label the remaining 250-ml portion as “Analytical Fraction 1A”. Analytical Fraction 1A is used for ICAP or AAS analysis for all desired metals except Hg. Analytical Fraction 1B is used for the determination of front-half Hg.
8.3.4 Container No. 4 (Impingers 1-3). Measure and record the total volume of this sample to within 0.5 ml and label it “Sample Fraction 2”. Remove a 75- to 100-ml aliquot for Hg analysis and label the aliquot “Analytical Fraction 2B”. Label the remaining portion of Container No. 4 as “Sample Fraction 2A”. Sample Fraction 2A defines the volume of Analytical Fraction 2A prior to digestion. All of Sample Fraction 2A is digested to produce “Analytical Fraction 2A”. Analytical Fraction 2A defines the volume of Sample Fraction 2A after its digestion and the volume of Analytical Fraction 2A is normally 150 ml. Analytical Fraction 2A is analyzed for all metals except Hg. Verify that the pH of Sample Fraction 2A is 2 or lower. If necessary, use concentrated HNO3 by careful addition and stirring to lower Sample Fraction 2A to pH 2. Use water to rinse Sample Fraction 2A into a beaker and then cover the beaker with a ribbed watchglass. Reduce Sample Fraction 2A to approximately 20 ml by heating on a hot plate at a temperature just below boiling. Then follow either of the digestion procedures described in sections 8.3.4.1 or 8.3.4.2.
8.3.4.1 Conventional Digestion Procedure. Add 30 ml of 50 percent HNO3, and heat for 30 minutes on a hot plate to just below boiling. Add 10 ml of 3 percent H2O2 and heat for 10 more minutes. Add 50 ml of hot water, and heat the sample for an additional 20 minutes. Cool, filter the sample, and dilute to 150 ml (or the appropriate volume for the expected metals concentrations) with water. This dilution produces Analytical Fraction 2A. Measure and record the volume to within 0.1 ml.
8.3.4.2 Microwave Digestion Procedure. Add 10 ml of 50 percent HNO3 and heat for 6 minutes total heating time in alternations of 1 to 2 minutes at 600 Watts followed by 1 to 2 minutes with no power, etc., similar to the procedure described in section 8.3.1. Allow the sample to cool. Add 10 ml of 3 percent H2O2 and heat for 2 more minutes. Add 50 ml of hot water, and heat for an additional 5 minutes. Cool, filter the sample, and dilute to 150 ml (or the appropriate volume for the expected metals concentrations) with water. This dilution produces Analytical Fraction 2A. Measure and record the volume to within 0.1 ml.
8.3.5 Container No. 5A (Impinger 4), Container Nos. 5B and 5C (Impingers 5 and 6). Keep the samples in Containers Nos. 5A, 5B, and 5C separate from each other. Measure and record the volume of 5A to within 0.5 ml. Label the contents of Container No. 5A to be Analytical Fraction 3A. To remove any brown MnO2 precipitate from the contents of Container No. 5B, filter its contents through Whatman 40 filter paper into a 500 ml volumetric flask and dilute to volume with water. Save the filter for digestion of the brown MnO2 precipitate. Label the 500 ml filtrate from Container No. 5B to be Analytical Fraction 3B. Analyze Analytical Fraction 3B for Hg within 48 hours of the filtration step. Place the saved filter, which was used to remove the brown MnO2 precipitate, into an appropriately sized vented container, which will allow release of any gases including chlorine formed when the filter is digested. In a laboratory hood which will remove any gas produced by the digestion of the MnO2, add 25 ml of 8 N HCl to the filter and allow to digest for a minimum of 24 hours at room temperature. Filter the contents of Container No. 5C through a Whatman 40 filter into a 500-ml volumetric flask. Then filter the result of the digestion of the brown MnO2 from Container No. 5B through a Whatman 40 filter into the same 500-ml volumetric flask, and dilute and mix well to volume with water. Discard the Whatman 40 filter. Mark this combined 500-ml dilute HCl solution as Analytical Fraction 3C.
8.3.6 Container No. 6 (Silica Gel). Weigh the spent silica gel (or silica gel plus impinger) to the nearest 0.5 g using a balance.
9.0 Quality Control
9.1 Field Reagent Blanks, if analyzed. Perform the digestion and analysis of the blanks in Container Nos. 7 through 12 that were produced in sections 8.2.11 through 8.2.17, respectively. For Hg field reagent blanks, use a 10 ml aliquot for digestion and analysis.
9.1.1 Digest and analyze one of the filters from Container No. 12 per section 8.3.1, 100 ml from Container No. 7 per section 8.3.2, and 100 ml from Container No. 8A per section 8.3.3. This step produces blanks for Analytical Fractions 1A and 1B.
9.1.2 Combine 100 ml of Container No. 8A with 200 ml from Container No. 9, and digest and analyze the resultant volume per section 8.3.4. This step produces blanks for Analytical Fractions 2A and 2B.
9.1.3 Digest and analyze a 100-ml portion of Container No. 8A to produce a blank for Analytical Fraction 3A.
9.1.4 Combine 100 ml from Container No. 10 with 33 ml from Container No. 8B to produce a blank for Analytical Fraction 3B. Filter the resultant 133 ml as described for Container No. 5B in section 8.3.5, except do not dilute the 133 ml. Analyze this blank for Hg within 48 hr of the filtration step, and use 400 ml as the blank volume when calculating the blank mass value. Use the actual volumes of the other analytical blanks when calculating their mass values.
9.1.5 Digest the filter that was used to remove any brown MnO2 precipitate from the blank for Analytical Fraction 3B by the same procedure as described in section 8.3.5 for the similar sample filter. Filter the digestate and the contents of Container No. 11 through Whatman 40 paper into a 500-ml volumetric flask, and dilute to volume with water. These steps produce a blank for Analytical Fraction 3C.
9.1.6 Analyze the blanks for Analytical Fraction Blanks 1A and 2A per section 11.1.1 and/or section 11.1.2. Analyze the blanks for Analytical Fractions 1B, 2B, 3A, 3B, and 3C per section 11.1.3. Analysis of the blank for Analytical Fraction 1A produces the front-half reagent blank correction values for the desired metals except for Hg; Analysis of the blank for Analytical Fraction 1B produces the front-half reagent blank correction value for Hg. Analysis of the blank for Analytical Fraction 2A produces the back-half reagent blank correction values for all of the desired metals except for Hg, while separate analyses of the blanks for Analytical Fractions 2B, 3A, 3B, and 3C produce the back-half reagent blank correction value for Hg.
9.2 Quality Control Samples. Analyze the following quality control samples.
9.2.1 ICAP and ICP-MS Analysis. Follow the respective quality control descriptions in section 8 of Methods 6010 and 6020 in EPA Publication SW-846 Third Edition (November 1986) including updates I, II, IIA, IIB and III, as incorporated by reference in § 60.17(i). For the purposes of a source test that consists of three sample runs, modify those requirements to include the following: two instrument check standard runs, two calibration blank runs, one interference check sample at the beginning of the analysis (analyze by Method of Standard Additions unless within 25 percent), one quality control sample to check the accuracy of the calibration standards (required to be within 25 percent of calibration), and one duplicate analysis (required to be within 20 percent of average or repeat all analyses).
9.2.2 Direct Aspiration AAS and/or GFAAS Analysis for Sb, As, Ba, Be, Cd, Cu, Cr, Co, Pb, Ni, Mn, Hg, P, Se, Ag, Tl, and Zn. Analyze all samples in duplicate. Perform a matrix spike on at least one front-half sample and one back-half sample, or one combined sample. If recoveries of less than 75 percent or greater than 125 percent are obtained for the matrix spike, analyze each sample by the Method of Standard Additions. Analyze a quality control sample to check the accuracy of the calibration standards. If the results are not within 20 percent, repeat the calibration.
9.2.3 CVAAS Analysis for Hg. Analyze all samples in duplicate. Analyze a quality control sample to check the accuracy of the calibration standards (if not within 15 percent, repeat calibration). Perform a matrix spike on one sample (if not within 25 percent, analyze all samples by the Method of Standard Additions). Additional information on quality control can be obtained from Method 7470 in EPA Publication SW-846 Third Edition (November 1986) including updates I, II, IIA, IIB and III, as incorporated by reference in § 60.17(i), or in Standard Methods for Water and Wastewater Method 303F.
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
10.1 Sampling Train Calibration. Calibrate the sampling train components according to the indicated sections of Method 5: Probe Nozzle (Section 10.1); Pitot Tube (Section 10.2); Metering System (Section 10.3); Probe Heater (Section 10.4); Temperature Sensors (Section 10.5); Leak-Check of the Metering System (Section 8.4.1); and Barometer (Section 10.6).
10.2 Inductively Coupled Argon Plasma Spectrometer Calibration. Prepare standards as outlined in section 7.5. Profile and calibrate the instrument according to the manufacturer's recommended procedures using those standards. Check the calibration once per hour. If the instrument does not reproduce the standard concentrations within 10 percent, perform the complete calibration procedures. Perform ICP-MS analysis by following Method 6020 in EPA Publication SW-846 Third Edition (November 1986) including updates I, II, IIA, IIB and III, as incorporated by reference in § 60.17(i).
10.3 Atomic Absorption Spectrometer—Direct Aspiration AAS, GFAAS, and CVAAS analyses. Prepare the standards as outlined in section 7.5 and use them to calibrate the spectrometer. Calibration procedures are also outlined in the EPA methods referred to in Table 29-2 and in Method 7470 in EPA Publication SW-846 Third Edition (November 1986) including updates I, II, IIA, IIB and III, as incorporated by reference in § 60.17(i), or in Standard Methods for Water and Wastewater Method 303F (for Hg). Run each standard curve in duplicate and use the mean values to calculate the calibration line. Recalibrate the instrument approximately once every 10 to 12 samples.
10.4 Field Balance Calibration Check. Check the calibration of the balance used to weigh impingers with a weight that is at least 500g or within 50g of a loaded impinger. The weight must be ASTM E617-13 “Standard Specification for Laboratory Weights and Precision Mass Standards” (incorporated by reference-see 40 CFR 60.17) Class 6 (or better). Daily before use, the field balance must measure the weight within ±0.5g of the certified mass. If the daily balance calibration check fails, perform corrective measures and repeat the check before using balance.
10.5 Analytical Balance Calibration. Perform a multipoint calibration (at least five points spanning the operational range) of the analytical balance before the first use, and semiannually thereafter. The calibration of the analytical balance must be conducted using ASTM E617-13 “Standard Specification for Laboratory Weights and Precision Mass Standards” (incorporated by reference—see 40 CFR 60.17) Class 2 (or better) tolerance weights. Audit the balance each day it is used for gravimetric measurements by weighing at least one ASTM E617-13 Class 2 tolerance (or better) calibration weight that corresponds to 50 to 150 percent of the weight of one filter or between 1g and 5g. If the scale cannot reproduce the value of the calibration weight to within 0.5 mg of the certified mass, perform corrective measures, and conduct the multipoint calibration before use.
11.0 Analytical Procedure
11.1 Sample Analysis. For each sampling train sample run, seven individual analytical samples are generated; two for all desired metals except Hg, and five for Hg. A schematic identifying each sample container and the prescribed analytical preparation and analysis scheme is shown in Figure 29-3. The first two analytical samples, labeled Analytical Fractions 1A and 1B, consist of the digested samples from the front-half of the train. Analytical Fraction 1A is for ICAP, ICP-MS or AAS analysis as described in sections 11.1.1 and 11.1.2, respectively. Analytical Fraction 1B is for front-half Hg analysis as described in section 11.1.3. The contents of the back-half of the train are used to prepare the third through seventh analytical samples. The third and fourth analytical samples, labeled Analytical Fractions 2A and 2B, contain the samples from the moisture removal impinger No. 1, if used, and HNO3/H2O2 impingers Nos. 2 and 3. Analytical Fraction 2A is for ICAP, ICP-MS or AAS analysis for target metals, except Hg. Analytical Fraction 2B is for analysis for Hg. The fifth through seventh analytical samples, labeled Analytical Fractions 3A, 3B, and 3C, consist of the impinger contents and rinses from the empty impinger No. 4 and the H2SO4/KMnO4 Impingers Nos. 5 and 6. These analytical samples are for analysis for Hg as described in section 11.1.3. The total back-half Hg catch is determined from the sum of Analytical Fractions 2B, 3A, 3B, and 3C. Analytical Fractions 1A and 2A can be combined proportionally prior to analysis.
11.1.1 ICAP and ICP-MS Analysis. Analyze Analytical Fractions 1A and 2A by ICAP using Method 6010 or Method 200.7 (40 CFR 136, Appendix C). Calibrate the ICAP, and set up an analysis program as described in Method 6010 or Method 200.7. Follow the quality control procedures described in section 9.2.1. Recommended wavelengths for analysis are as shown in Table 29-2. These wavelengths represent the best combination of specificity and potential detection limit. Other wavelengths may be substituted if they can provide the needed specificity and detection limit, and are treated with the same corrective techniques for spectral interference. Initially, analyze all samples for the target metals (except Hg) plus Fe and Al. If Fe and Al are present, the sample might have to be diluted so that each of these elements is at a concentration of less than 50 ppm so as to reduce their spectral interferences on As, Cd, Cr, and Pb. Perform ICP-MS analysis by following Method 6020 in EPA Publication SW-846 Third Edition (November 1986) including updates I, II, IIA, IIB and III, as incorporated by reference in § 60.17(i).
11.1.2 AAS by Direct Aspiration and/or GFAAS. If analysis of metals in Analytical Fractions 1A and 2A by using GFAAS or direct aspiration AAS is needed, use Table 29-3 to determine which techniques and procedures to apply for each target metal. Use Table 29-3, if necessary, to determine techniques for minimization of interferences. Calibrate the instrument according to section 10.3 and follow the quality control procedures specified in section 9.2.2.
11.1.3 CVAAS Hg analysis. Analyze Analytical Fractions 1B, 2B, 3A, 3B, and 3C separately for Hg using CVAAS following the method outlined in Method 7470 in EPA Publication SW-846 Third Edition (November 1986) including updates I, II, IIA, IIB and III, as incorporated by reference in § 60.17(i), or in Standard Methods for Water and Wastewater Analysis, 15th Edition, Method 303F, or, optionally using note no. 2 at the end of this section. Set up the calibration curve (zero to 1000 ng) as described in Method 7470 or similar to Method 303F using 300-ml BOD bottles instead of Erlenmeyers. Perform the following for each Hg analysis. From each original sample, select and record an aliquot in the size range from 1 ml to 10 ml. If no prior knowledge of the expected amount of Hg in the sample exists, a 5 ml aliquot is suggested for the first dilution to 100 ml (see note no. 1 at end of this section). The total amount of Hg in the aliquot shall be less than 1 µg and within the range (zero to 1000 ng) of the calibration curve. Place the sample aliquot into a separate 300-ml BOD bottle, and add enough water to make a total volume of 100 ml. Next add to it sequentially the sample digestion solutions and perform the sample preparation described in the procedures of Method 7470 or Method 303F. (See note no. 2 at the end of this section). If the maximum readings are off-scale (because Hg in the aliquot exceeded the calibration range; including the situation where only a 1-ml aliquot of the original sample was digested), then dilute the original sample (or a portion of it) with 0.15 percent HNO3 (1.5 ml concentrated HNO3 per liter aqueous solution) so that when a 1- to 10-ml aliquot of the “0.15 HNO3 percent dilution of the original sample” is digested and analyzed by the procedures described above, it will yield an analysis within the range of the calibration curve.
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
12.1 Nomenclature.
A = Analytical detection limit, µg/ml.
B = Liquid volume of digested sample prior to aliquotting for analysis, ml.
C = Stack sample gas volume, dsm 3.
Ca1 = Concentration of metal in Analytical Fraction 1A as read from the standard curve, µg/ml.
Ca2 = Concentration of metal in Analytical Fraction 2A as read from the standard curve, (µg/ml).
Cs = Concentration of a metal in the stack gas, mg/dscm.
D = In-stack detection limit, µg/m 3.
Fa = Aliquot factor, volume of Sample Fraction 2 divided by volume of Sample Fraction 2A (see section 8.3.4.)
Fd = Dilution factor (Fd = the inverse of the fractional portion of the concentrated sample in the solution actually used in the instrument to produce the reading Ca1. For example, if a 2 ml aliquot of Analytical Fraction 1A is diluted to 10 ml to place it in the calibration range, Fd = 5).
Hgbh = Total mass of Hg collected in the back-half of the sampling train, µg.
Hgbh2 = Total mass of Hg collected in Sample Fraction 2, µg.
Hgbh3(A,B,C) = Total mass of Hg collected separately in Fraction 3A, 3B, or 3C, µg.
Hgbhb = Blank correction value for mass of Hg detected in back-half field reagent blanks, µg.
Hgfh = Total mass of Hg collected in the front-half of the sampling train (Sample Fraction 1), µg.
Hgfhb = Blank correction value for mass of Hg detected in front-half field reagent blank, µg.
Hgt = Total mass of Hg collected in the sampling train, µg.
Mbh = Total mass of each metal (except Hg) collected in the back-half of the sampling train (Sample Fraction 2), µg.
Mbhb = Blank correction value for mass of metal detected in back-half field reagent blank, µg.
Mfh = Total mass of each metal (except Hg) collected in the front half of the sampling train (Sample Fraction 1), µg.
Mfhb = Blank correction value for mass of metal detected in front-half field reagent blank, µg.
Mt = Total mass of each metal (separately stated for each metal) collected in the sampling train, µg.
Mt = Total mass of that metal collected in the sampling train, µg; (substitute Hgt for Mt for the Hg calculation).
Qbh2 = Quantity of Hg, µg, TOTAL in the ALIQUOT of Analytical Fraction 2B selected for digestion and analysis .
Qbh3(A,B,C) = Quantity of Hg, µg, TOTAL, separately, in the ALIQUOT of Analytical Fraction 3A, 3B, or 3C selected for digestion and analysis (see notes in sections 12.7.1 and 12.7.2 describing the quantity “Q” and calculate similarly).
Qfh = Quantity of Hg, µg, TOTAL in the ALIQUOT of Analytical Fraction 1B selected for digestion and analysis.
Va = Total volume of digested sample solution (Analytical Fraction 2A), ml (see section 8.3.4.1 or 8.3.4.2, as applicable).
Vf1B = Volume of aliquot of Analytical Fraction 1B analyzed, ml.
Vf2B = Volume of Analytical Fraction 2B analyzed, ml.
Vf3(A,B,C) = Volume, separately, of Analytical Fraction 3A, 3B, or 3C analyzed, ml (see previous notes in sections 12.7.1 and 12.7.2, describing the quantity “V” and calculate similarly).
Vm(std) = Volume of gas sample as measured by the dry gas meter, corrected to dry standard conditions, dscm.
Vsoln,1 = Total volume of digested sample solution (Analytical Fraction 1), ml.
Vsoln,1 = Total volume of Analytical Fraction 1, ml.
Vsoln,2 = Total volume of Sample Fraction 2, ml.
Vsoln,3(A,B,C) = Total volume, separately, of Analytical Fraction 3A, 3B, or 3C, ml.
K4 = 10−3 mg/µg.
12.2 Dry Gas Volume. Using the data from this test, calculate Vm(std), the dry gas sample volume at standard conditions as outlined in section 12.3 of Method 5.
12.3 Volume of Water Vapor and Moisture Content. Using the total volume of condensate collected during the source sampling, calculate the volume of water vapor Vw(std) and the moisture content Bws of the stack gas. Use Equations 5-2 and 5-3 of Method 5.
12.4 Stack Gas Velocity. Using the data from this test and Equation 2-9 of Method 2, calculate the average stack gas velocity.
12.5 In-Stack Detection Limits. Calculate the in-stack method detection limits shown in Table 29-4 using the conditions described in section 13.3.1 as follows:
12.6 Metals (Except Hg) in Source Sample.
12.6.1 Analytical Fraction 1A, Front-Half, Metals (except Hg). Calculate separately the amount of each metal collected in Sample Fraction 1 of the sampling train using the following equation:
12.6.2 Analytical Fraction 2A, Back-Half, Metals (except Hg). Calculate separately the amount of each metal collected in Fraction 2 of the sampling train using the following equation:
12.6.3 Total Train, Metals (except Hg). Calculate the total amount of each of the quantified metals collected in the sampling train as follows:
12.7 Hg in Source Sample.
12.7.1 Analytical Fraction 1B; Front-Half Hg. Calculate the amount ofHg collected in the front-half, Sample Fraction 1, of the sampling train by using Equation 29-5:
12.7.2 Analytical Fractions 2B, 3A, 3B, and 3C; Back Half Hg.
12.7.2.1 Calculate the amount of Hg collected in Sample Fraction 2 by using Equation 29-6:
12.7.2.2 Calculate each of the back-half Hg values for Analytical Fractions 3A, 3B, and 3C by using Equation 29-7:
12.7.2.3 Calculate the total amount of Hg collected in the back-half of the sampling train by using Equation 29-8:
12.7.3 Total Train Hg Catch. Calculate the total amount of Hg collected in the sampling train by using Equation 29-9:
12.8 Individual Metal Concentrations in Stack Gas. Calculate the concentration of each metal in the stack gas (dry basis, adjusted to standard conditions) by using Equation 29-10:
12.9 Isokinetic Variation and Acceptable Results. Same as Method 5, sections 12.11 and 12.12, respectively.
13.0 Method Performance
13.1 Range. For the analysis described and for similar analyses, the ICAP response is linear over several orders of magnitude. Samples containing metal concentrations in the nanograms per ml (ng/ml) to micrograms per ml (µg/ml) range in the final analytical solution can be analyzed using this method. Samples containing greater than approximately 50 µg/ml As, Cr, or Pb should be diluted to that level or lower for final analysis. Samples containing greater than approximately 20 µg/ml of Cd should be diluted to that level before analysis.
13.2 Analytical Detection Limits.
13.2.1 ICAP analytical detection limits for the sample solutions (based on SW-846, Method 6010) are approximately as follows: Sb (32 ng/ml), As (53 ng/ml), Ba (2 ng/ml), Be (0.3 ng/ml), Cd (4 ng/ml), Cr (7 ng/ml), Co (7 ng/ml), Cu (6 ng/ml), Pb (42 ng/ml), Mn (2 ng/ml), Ni (15 ng/ml), P (75 ng/ml), Se (75 ng/ml), Ag (7 ng/ml), Tl (40 ng/ml), and Zn (2 ng/ml). ICP-MS analytical detection limits (based on SW-846, Method 6020) are lower generally by a factor of ten or more. Be is lower by a factor of three. The actual sample analytical detection limits are sample dependent and may vary due to the sample matrix.
13.2.2 The analytical detection limits for analysis by direct aspiration AAS (based on SW-846, Method 7000 series) are approximately as follows: Sb (200 ng/ml), As (2 ng/ml), Ba (100 ng/ml), Be (5 ng/ml), Cd (5 ng/ml), Cr (50 ng/ml), Co (50 ng/ml), Cu (20 ng/ml), Pb (100 ng/ml), Mn (10 ng/ml), Ni (40 ng/ml), Se (2 ng/ml), Ag (10 ng/ml), Tl (100 ng/ml), and Zn (5 ng/ml).
13.2.3 The detection limit for Hg by CVAAS (on the resultant volume of the digestion of the aliquots taken for Hg analyses) can be approximately 0.02 to 0.2 ng/ml, depending upon the type of CVAAS analytical instrument used. 13.2.4 The use of GFAAS can enhance the detection limits compared to direct aspiration AAS as follows: Sb (3 ng/ml), As (1 ng/ml), Be (0.2 ng/ml), Cd (0.1 ng/ml), Cr (1 ng/ml), Co (1 ng/ml), Pb (1 ng/ml), Se (2 ng/ml), and Tl (1 ng/ml).
13.3 In-stack Detection Limits.
13.3.1 For test planning purposes in-stack detection limits can be developed by using the following information: (1) The procedures described in this method, (2) the analytical detection limits described in section 13.2 and in SW-846,(3) the normal volumes of 300 ml (Analytical Fraction 1) for the front-half and 150 ml (Analytical Fraction 2A) for the back-half samples, and (4) a stack gas sample volume of 1.25 m 3. The resultant in-stack method detection limits for the above set of conditions are presented in Table 29-1 and were calculated by using Eq. 29-1 shown in section 12.5.
13.3.2 To ensure optimum precision/resolution in the analyses, the target concentrations of metals in the analytical solutions should be at least ten times their respective analytical detection limits. Under certain conditions, and with greater care in the analytical procedure, these concentrations can be as low as approximately three times the respective analytical detection limits without seriously impairing the precision of the analyses. On at least one sample run in the source test, and for each metal analyzed, perform either repetitive analyses, Method of Standard Additions, serial dilution, or matrix spike addition, etc., to document the quality of the data.
13.3.3 Actual in-stack method detection limits are based on actual source sampling parameters and analytical results as described above. If required, the method in-stack detection limits can be improved over those shown in Table 29-1 for a specific test by either increasing the sampled stack gas volume, reducing the total volume of the digested samples, improving the analytical detection limits, or any combination of the three. For extremely low levels of Hg only, the aliquot size selected for digestion and analysis can be increased to as much as 10 ml, thus improving the in-stack detection limit by a factor of ten compared to a 1 ml aliquot size.
13.3.3.1 A nominal one hour sampling run will collect a stack gas sampling volume of about 1.25 m 3. If the sampling time is increased to four hours and 5 m 3 are collected, the in-stack method detection limits would be improved by a factor of four compared to the values shown in Table 29-1.
13.3.3.2 The in-stack detection limits assume that all of the sample is digested and the final liquid volumes for analysis are the normal values of 300 ml for Analytical Fraction 1, and 150 ml for Analytical Fraction 2A. If the volume of Analytical Fraction 1 is reduced from 300 to 30 ml, the in-stack detection limits for that fraction of the sample would be improved by a factor of ten. If the volume of Analytical Fraction 2A is reduced from 150 to 25 ml, the in-stack detection limits for that fraction of the sample would be improved by a factor of six. Matrix effect checks are necessary on sample analyses and typically are of much greater significance for samples that have been concentrated to less than the normal original sample volume. Reduction of Analytical Fractions 1 and 2A to volumes of less than 30 and 25 ml, respectively, could interfere with the redissolving of the residue and could increase interference by other compounds to an intolerable level.
13.3.3.3 When both of the modifications described in sections 13.3.3.1 and 13.3.3.2 are used simultaneously on one sample, the resultant improvements are multiplicative. For example, an increase in stack gas volume by a factor of four and a reduction in the total liquid sample digested volume of both Analytical Fractions 1 and 2A by a factor of six would result in an improvement by a factor of twenty-four of the in-stack method detection limit.
13.4 Precision. The precision (relative standard deviation) for each metal detected in a method development test performed at a sewage sludge incinerator were found to be as follows:
Sb (12.7 percent), As (13.5 percent), Ba (20.6 percent), Cd (11.5 percent), Cr (11.2 percent), Cu (11.5 percent), Pb (11.6 percent), P (14.6 percent), Se (15.3 percent), Tl (12.3 percent), and Zn (11.8 percent). The precision for Ni was 7.7 percent for another test conducted at a source simulator. Be, Mn, and Ag were not detected in the tests. However, based on the analytical detection limits of the ICAP for these metals, their precisions could be similar to those for the other metals when detected at similar levels.
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 Alternative Procedures
16.1 Alternative Analyzer. Samples may also be analyzed by cold vapor atomic fluorescence spectrometry.
16.2 [Reserved]
17.0 References
1. Method 303F in Standard Methods for the Examination of Water Wastewater, 15th Edition, 1980. Available from the American Public Health Association, 1015 18th Street N.W., Washington, D.C. 20036.
2. EPA Methods 6010, 6020, 7000, 7041, 7060, 7131, 7421, 7470, 7740, and 7841, Test Methods for Evaluating Solid Waste: Physical/Chemical Methods. SW-846, Third Edition, November 1986, with updates I, II, IIA, IIB and III. Office of Solid Waste and Emergency Response, U. S. Environmental Protection Agency, Washington, DC 20460.
3. EPA Method 200.7, Code of Federal Regulations, Title 40, Part 136, Appendix C. July 1, 1987.
4. EPA Methods 1 through 5, Code of Federal Regulations, Title 40, Part 60, Appendix A, July 1, 1991.
5. EPA Method 101A, Code of Federal Regulations, Title 40, Part 61, Appendix B, July 1, 1991.
18.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
| Metal | Front-half: probe and filter |
Back-half: impinters 1-3 | Back-half: impringers 4-6 a |
Total train |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Antimony | 1 7.7 (0.7) | 1 3.8 (0.4) | 1 11.5 (1.1) | |
| Arsenic | 1 12.7 (0.3) | 1 6.4 (0.1) | 1 19.1 (0.4) | |
| Barium | 0.5 | 0.3 | 0.8 | |
| Beryllium | 1 0.07 (0.05) | 1 0.04 (0.03) | 1 0.11 (0.08) | |
| Cadmium | 1 1.0 (0.02) | 1 0.5 (0.01) | 1 1.5 (0.03) | |
| Chromium | 1 1.7 (0.2) | 1 0.8 (0.1) | 1 2.5 (0.3) | |
| Cobalt | 1 1.7 (0.2) | 1 0.8 (0.1) | 1 2.5 (0.3) | |
| Copper | 1.4 | 0.7 | 2.1 | |
| Lead | 1 10.1 (0.2) | 1 5.0 (0.1) | 1 15.1 (0.3) | |
| Manganese | 1 0.5 (0.2) | 1 0.2 (0.1) | 1 0.7 (0.3) | |
| Mercury | 2 0.06 | 2 0.3 | 2 0.2 | 2 0.56 |
| Nickel | 3.6 | 1.8 | 5.4 | |
| Phosphorus | 18 | 9 | 27 | |
| Selenium | 1 18 (0.5) | 1 9 (0.3) | 1 27 (0.8) | |
| Silver | 1.7 | 0.9 (0.7) | 2.6 | |
| Thallium | 1 9.6 (0.2) | 1 4.8 (0.1) | 1 14.4 (0.3) | |
| Zinc | 0.5 | 0.3 | 0.8 | |
| a Mercury analysis only. | ||||
| 1 Detection limit when analyzed by ICAP or GFAAS as shown in parentheses (see section 11.1.2). | ||||
| 2 Detection limit when anaylzed by CVAAS, estimated for Back-half and Total Train. See sections 13.2 and 11.1.3. Note: Actual method in-stack detection limits may vary from these values, as described in section 13.3.3. |
| Analyte | Wavelength (nm) |
|---|---|
| Aluminum (Al) | 308.215 |
| Antimony (Sb) | 206.833 |
| Arsenic (As) | 193.696 |
| Barium (Ba) | 455.403 |
| Beryllium (Be) | 313.042 |
| Cadmium (Cd) | 226.502 |
| Chromium (Cr) | 267.716 |
| Cobalt (Co) | 228.616 |
| Copper (Cu) | 328.754 |
| Iron (Fe) | 259.940 |
| Lead (Pb) | 220.353 |
| Manganese (Mn) | 257.610 |
| Nickel (Ni) | 231.604 |
| Phosphorus (P) | 214.914 |
| Selenium (Se) | 196.026 |
| Silver (Ag) | 328.068 |
| Thallium (T1) | 190,864 |
| Zinc (Zn) | 213,856 |
| Metal | Technique | SW-846 1 Methods No. |
Wavelength (nm) |
Interferences | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Cause | Minimization | ||||
| Fe | Aspiration | 7380 | 248.3 | Contamination | Great care taken to avoid contamination. |
| Pb | Aspiration | 7420 | 283.3 | 217.0 nm alternate | Background correction required. |
| Pb | Furnace | 7421 | 283.3 | Poor recoveries | Matrix modifier, add 10 µl of phosphorus acid to 1 ml of prepared sample in sampler cup. |
| Mn | Aspiration | 7460 | 279.5 | 403.1 nm alternate | Background correction required. |
| Ni | Aspiration | 7520 | 232.0 | 352.4 nm alternate Fe, Co, and Cr Nonlinear response |
Background correction required. Matrix matching or nitrous-oxide/acetylene flame Sample dilution or use 352.3 nm line |
| Se | Furnace | 7740 | 196.0 | Volatility | Spike samples and reference materials and add nickel nitrate to minimize volatilization. |
| Adsorption & scatter | Background correction is required and Zeeman background correction can be useful. | ||||
| Ag | Aspiration | 7760 | 328.1 | Adsorption & scatter AgCl insoluble | Background correction is required. Avoid hydrochloric acid unless silver is in solution as a chloride complex. Sample and standards monitored for aspiration rate. |
| Tl | Aspiration | 7840 | 276.8 | Background correction is required. Hydrochloric acid should not be used. | |
| Tl | Furnace | 7841 | 276.8 | Hydrochloric acid or chloride | Background correction is required. Verify that losses are not occurring for volatilization by spiked samples or standard addition; Palladium is a suitable matrix modifier. |
| Zn | Aspiration | 7950 | 213.9 | High Si, Cu, & P Contamination | Strontium removes Cu and phosphate. Great care taken to avoid contamination. |
| Sb | Aspiration | 7040 | 217.6 | 1000 mg/ml Pb, Ni, Cu, or acid | Use secondary wavelength of 231.1 nm; match sample & standards acid concentration or use nitrous oxide/acetylene flame. |
| Sb | Furnace | 7041 | 217.6 | High Pb | Secondary wavelength or Zeeman correction. |
| As | Furnace | 7060 | 193.7 | Arsenic Volatilization Aluminum | Spike samples and add nickel nitrate solution to digestates prior to analysis. Use Zeeman background correction. |
| Ba | Aspiration | 7080 | 553.6 | ||
| Calcium | |||||
| Barium Ionization | High hollow cathode current and narrow band set. 2 ml of KCl per 100 m1 of sample. |
||||
| Be | Aspiration | 7090 | 234.9 | 500 ppm Al. High Mg and Si | Add 0.1% fluoride. |
| Be | Furnace | 7091 | 234.9 | Be in optical path | Optimize parameters to minimize effects. |
| Cd | Aspiration | 7130 | 228.8 | Absorption and light scattering | Background correction is required. |
| Cd | Furnace | 7131 | 228.8 | As above Excess Chloride Pipet Tips |
As above. Ammonium phosphate used as a matrix modifier. Use cadmium-free tips. |
| Cr | Aspiration | 7190 | 357.9 | Alkali metal | KCl ionization suppressant in samples and standards—Consult mfgs' literature. |
| Co | Furnace | 7201 | 240.7 | Excess chloride | Use Method of Standard Additions. |
| Cr | Furnace | 7191 | 357.9 | 200 mg/L Ca and P | All calcium nitrate for a know constant effect and to eliminate effect of phosphate. |
| Cu | Aspiration | 7210 | 324.7 | Absorption and Scatter | Consult manufacturer's manual. |
| 1 Refer to EPA publication SW-846 (Reference 2 in section 16.0). |
Method 30A—Determination of Total Vapor Phase Mercury Emissions From Stationary Sources (Instrumental Analyzer Procedure)
1.0 Scope and Application
What Is Method 30A?
Method 30A is a procedure for measuring total vapor phase mercury (Hg) emissions from stationary sources using an instrumental analyzer. This method is particularly appropriate for performing emissions testing and for conducting relative accuracy test audits (RATAs) of mercury continuous emissions monitoring systems (Hg CEMS) and sorbent trap monitoring systems at coal-fired combustion sources. Quality assurance and quality control requirements are included to assure that you, the tester, collect data of known and acceptable quality for each testing site. This method does not completely describe all equipment, supplies, and sampling procedures and analytical procedures you will need but refers to other test methods for some of the details. Therefore, to obtain reliable results, you should also have a thorough knowledge of these additional methods which are also found in appendices A-1 and A-3 to this part:
(a) Method 1—Sample and Velocity Traverses for Stationary Sources.
(b) Method 4—Determination of Moisture Content in Stack Gases.
1.1 Analytes. What does this method determine? This method is designed to measure the mass concentration of total vapor phase Hg in flue gas, which represents the sum of elemental Hg (Hg 0) and oxidized forms of Hg (Hg+2), in mass concentration units of micrograms per cubic meter (µg/m 3).
| Analyte | CAS No. | Sensitivity |
|---|---|---|
| Elemental Hg (Hg0) | 7439-97-6 | Typically <2% of Calibration Span. |
| Oxidized Hg (Hg+2) | (Same). |
1.2 Applicability. When is this method required? Method 30A is offered as a reference method for emission testing and for RATAs of Hg CEMS and sorbent trap monitoring systems at coal-fired boilers. Method 30A may also be specified for other source categories in the future, either by New Source Performance Standards (NSPS), National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAP), emissions trading programs, State Implementation Plans (SIP), or operating permits that require measurement of Hg concentrations in stationary source emissions to determine compliance with an applicable emission standard or limit, or to conduct RATAs of Hg CEMS and sorbent trap monitoring systems.
1.3 Data Quality Objectives (DQO). How good must my collected data be? Method 30A has been designed to provide data of high and known quality for Hg emission testing and for relative accuracy testing of Hg monitoring systems including Hg CEMS and sorbent trap monitoring systems. In these and other applications, the principle objective is to ensure the accuracy of the data at the actual emission levels encountered. To meet this objective, calibration standards prepared according to an EPA traceability protocol must be used and measurement system performance tests are required.
2.0 Summary of Method
In this method, a sample of the effluent gas is continuously extracted and conveyed to an analyzer capable of measuring the total vapor phase Hg concentration. Elemental and oxidized mercury (i.e., Hg 0 and Hg+2) may be measured separately or simultaneously but, for purposes of this method, total vapor phase Hg is the sum of Hg 0 and Hg+2. You must meet the performance requirements of this method (i.e., system calibration, interference testing, dynamic spiking, and system integrity/drift checks) to validate your data. The dynamic spiking requirement is deferred until January 1, 2009.
3.0 Definitions
3.1 Calibration Curve means the relationship between an analyzer's response to the injection of a series of calibration gases and the actual concentrations of those gases.
3.2 Calibration Gas means a gas standard containing Hg 0 or HgCl2 at a known concentration that is produced and certified in accordance with an EPA traceability protocol for certification of Hg calibration standards.
3.2.1 Zero Gas means a calibration gas with a concentration that is below the level detectable by the measurement system.
3.2.2 Low-Level Gas means a calibration gas with a concentration that is 10 to 30 percent of the calibration span.
3.2.3 Mid-Level Gas means a calibration gas with a concentration that is 40 to 60 percent of the calibration span.
3.2.4 High-Level Gas means a calibration gas whose concentration is equal to the calibration span.
3.3 Converter means a device that reduces oxidized mercury (Hg+2) to elemental mercury (Hg 0).
3.4 Calibration Span means the upper limit of valid instrument response during sampling. To the extent practicable the measured emissions are to be between 10 and 100 percent of the selected calibration span (i.e., the measured emissions should be within the calibrated range determined by the Low- and High-Level gas standards). It is recommended that the calibration span be at least twice the native concentration to accommodate the dynamic spiking procedure.
3.5 Centroidal Area means the central area that has the same shape as the stack or duct cross section and is no greater than one percent of the stack or duct total cross-sectional area.
3.6 Data Recorder means the equipment that permanently records the concentrations reported by the analyzer.
3.7 Drift Check means the test to determine the difference between the measurement system readings obtained in a post-run system integrity check and the prior pre-run system integrity check at a specific calibration gas concentration level (i.e., zero, mid-level, or high-level).
3.8 Dynamic Spiking means a procedure in which a known mass or concentration of vapor phase HgCl2 is injected into the probe sample gas stream at a known flow rate, in order to assess the effects of the flue gas matrix on the accuracy of the measurement system.
3.9 Gas Analyzer means the equipment that detects the total vapor phase Hg being measured and generates an output proportional to its concentration.
3.10 Interference Test means the test to detect analyzer responses to compounds other than Hg, usually gases present in the measured gas stream, that are not adequately accounted for in the calibration procedure and may cause measurement bias.
3.11 Measurement System means all of the equipment used to determine the Hg concentration. The measurement system may generally include the following major subsystems: sample acquisition, Hg+2 to Hg 0 converter, sample transport, sample conditioning, flow control/gas manifold, gas analyzer, and data recorder.
3.12 Native Concentration means the total vapor phase Hg concentration in the effluent gas stream.
3.13 NIST means the National Institute of Standards and Technology, located in Gaithersburg, Maryland.
3.14 Response Time means the time it takes for the measurement system, while operating normally at its target sample flow rate or dilution ratio, to respond to a known step change in gas concentration (from a low-level to a high-level gas) and to read within 5 percent of the stable high-level gas response.
3.15 Run means a series of gas samples taken successively from the stack or duct. A test normally consists of a specific number of runs.
3.16 System Calibration Error means the difference between the measured concentration of a low-, mid-, or high-level Hg 0 calibration gas and the certified concentration of the gas when it is introduced in system calibration mode.
3.17 System Calibration Mode means introducing the calibration gases into the measurement system at the probe, upstream of all sample conditioning components.
3.18 Test refers to the series of runs required by the applicable regulation.
4.0 Interferences
Interferences will vary among instruments and potential instrument-specific spectral and matrix interferences must be evaluated through the interference test and the dynamic spiking tests.
5.0 Safety
What safety measures should I consider when using this method?
This method may require you to work with hazardous materials and in hazardous conditions. You are encouraged to establish safety procedures before using the method. Among other precautions, you should become familiar with the safety recommendations in the gas analyzer user's manual. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) regulations concerning use of compressed gas cylinders and noxious gases may apply.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
6.1 What do I need for the measurement system? This method is intended to be applicable to multiple instrumental technologies. You may use any equipment and supplies that meet the following specifications.
6.1.1 All wetted sampling system components, including probe components prior to the point at which the calibration gas is introduced, must be chemically inert to all Hg species. Materials such as perfluoroalkoxy (PFA) Teflon TM, quartz, treated stainless steel (SS) are examples of such materials. [Note: These materials of construction are required because components prior to the calibration gas injection point are not included in the system calibration error, system integrity, and interference tests.]
6.1.2 The interference, system calibration error, system integrity, drift and dynamic spiking test criteria must all be met by the system used.
6.1.3 The system must be capable of measuring and controlling sample flow rate.
6.1.4 All system components prior to the Hg+2 to Hg 0 converter must be maintained at a sample temperature above the acid gas dew point.
6.2 Measurement System Components. Figure 30A-1 in section 17.0 is an example schematic of a Method 30A measurement system.
6.2.1 Sample Probe. The probe must be made of the appropriate materials as noted in section 6.1.1, heated when necessary (see section 6.1.4), configured with ports for introduction of calibration and spiking gases, and of sufficient length to traverse all of the sample points.
6.2.2 Filter or Other Particulate Removal Device. The filter or other particulate removal device is considered to be a part of the measurement system, must be made of appropriate materials as noted in section 6.1.1, and must be included in all system tests.
6.2.3 Sample Line. The sample line that connects the probe to the converter, conditioning system and analyzer must be made of appropriate materials as noted in section 6.1.1.
6.2.4 Conditioning Equipment. For dry basis measurements, a condenser, dryer or other suitable device is required to remove moisture continuously from the sample gas. Any equipment needed to heat the probe, or sample line to avoid condensation prior to the moisture removal component is also required. For wet basis systems, you must keep the sample above its dew point either by: (1) Heating the sample line and all sample transport components up to the inlet of the analyzer (and, for hot-wet extractive systems, also heating the analyzer) or (2) by diluting the sample prior to analysis using a dilution probe system. The components required to do either of the above are considered to be conditioning equipment.
6.2.5 Sampling Pump. A pump is needed to push or pull the sample gas through the system at a flow rate sufficient to minimize the response time of the measurement system. If a mechanical sample pump is used and its surfaces are in contact with the sample gas prior to detection, the pump must be leak free and must be constructed of a material that is non-reactive to the gas being sampled (see section 6.1.1). For dilution-type measurement systems, an ejector pump (eductor) may be used to create a sufficient vacuum that sample gas will be drawn through a critical orifice at a constant rate. The ejector pump may be constructed of any material that is non-reactive to the gas being sampled.
6.2.6 Calibration Gas System(s). One or more systems may be needed to introduce calibration gases into the measurement system. A system should be able to flood the sampling probe sufficiently to prevent entry of gas from the effluent stream.
6.2.7 Dynamic Spiking Port. For the purposes of the dynamic spiking procedure described in section 8.2.7, the measurement system must be equipped with a port to allow introduction of the dynamic spike gas stream with the sample gas stream, at a point as close as possible to the inlet of the probe so as to ensure adequate mixing. The same port used for system calibrations and calibration error checks may be used for dynamic spiking purposes.
6.2.8 Sample Gas Delivery. The sample line may feed directly to a converter, to a by-pass valve (for speciating systems), or to a sample manifold. All valve and/or manifold components must be made of material that is non-reactive to the gas sampled and the calibration gas, and must be configured to safely discharge any excess gas.
6.2.9 Hg Analyzer. An instrument is required that continuously measures the total vapor phase Hg in the gas stream and meets the applicable specifications in section 13.0.
6.2.10 Data Recorder. A recorder, such as a computerized data acquisition and handling system (DAHS), digital recorder, strip chart, or data logger, is required for recording measurement data.
6.3 Moisture Measurement System. If correction of the measured Hg emissions for moisture is required (see section 8.5), either Method 4 in appendix A-3 to this part or other moisture measurement methods approved by the Administrator will be needed to measure stack gas moisture content.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
7.1 Calibration Gases. What calibration gases do I need? You will need calibration gases of known concentrations of Hg 0 and HgCl2. Special reagents and equipment may be required to prepare the HgCl 2 gas standards (e.g., a NIST-traceable solution of HgCl2 and a gas generator equipped with mass flow controllers).
The following calibration gas concentrations are required:
7.1.1 High-Level Gas. Equal to the selected calibration span.
7.1.2 Mid-Level Gas. 40 to 60 percent of the calibration span.
7.1.3 Low-Level Gas. 10 to 30 percent of the calibration span.
7.1.4 Zero Gas. No detectable Hg.
7.1.5 Dynamic Spike Gas. The exact concentration of the HgCl2 calibration gas used to perform the pre-test dynamic spiking procedure described in section 8.2.7 depends on the native Hg concentration in the stack The spike gas must produce a spiked sample concentration above the native concentration, as specified in section 8.2.7.2.2.
7.2 Interference Test. What reagents do I need for the interference test? Use the appropriate test gases listed in Table 30A-3 in section 17.0 (i.e., the potential interferents for the source to be tested, as identified by the instrument manufacturer) to conduct the interference check. These gases need not be of protocol gas quality.
8.0 Sample Collection
Emission Test Procedure
Figure 30A-2 in section 17.0 presents an overview of the test procedures required by this method. Since you may choose different options to comply with certain performance criteria, you must identify the specific options and associated frequencies you select and document your results in regard to the performance criteria.
8.1 Selection of Sampling Sites and Sampling Points. What sampling site and sampling points do I select?
8.1.1 When this method is used solely for Hg emission testing (e.g., to determine compliance with an emission standard or limit), use twelve sampling points located according to Table 1-1 or Table 1-2 of Method 1 in appendix A-1 to this part. Alternatively, you may conduct a stratification test as described in section 8.1.3 to determine the number and location of the sampling points.
8.1.2 When this method is used for relative accuracy testing of a Hg CEMS or sorbent trap monitoring system, follow the sampling site selection and sampling point layout procedures for gas monitor RATA testing described in the appropriate performance specification or applicable regulation (e.g., Performance Specification 2, section 8.1.3 of appendix B to this part or section 6.5.6 of appendix A to part 75 of this chapter), with one exception. If you elect to perform stratification testing as part of the sampling point selection process, perform the testing in accordance with section 8.1.3 of this method (see also “Summary Table of QA/QC Requirements” in section 9.0).
8.1.3 Determination of Stratification. If you elect to perform stratification testing as part of the sampling point selection process and the test results show your effluent gas stream to be unstratified or minimally stratified, you may be allowed to sample at fewer points or at different points than would otherwise be required.
8.1.3.1 Test Procedure. To test for stratification, use a probe of appropriate length to measure the total vapor phase Hg concentration at twelve traverse points located according to Table 1-1 or Table 1-2 of Method 1 in appendix A-1 to this part. Alternatively, for a sampling location where stratification is expected (e.g., after a wet scrubber or at a point where dissimilar gas streams are combined together), if a 12-point Hg stratification test has been previously performed at that location and the results of the test showed the location to be minimally stratified or unstratified according to the criteria in section 8.1.3.2, you may perform an abbreviated 3-point or 6-point Hg stratification test at the points specified in section 6.5.6.2(a) of appendix A to part 75 of this chapter in lieu of performing the 12-point test. Sample for a minimum of twice the system response time (see section 8.2.6) at each traverse point. Calculate the individual point and mean Hg concentrations.
8.1.3.2 Acceptance Criteria and Sampling Point Location.
8.1.3.2.1 If the Hg concentration at each traverse point differs from the mean concentration for all traverse points by no more than: (a) ±5 percent of the mean concentration; or (b) ±0.2 µg/m 3 (whichever is less restrictive), the gas stream is considered to be unstratified and you may collect samples from a single point that most closely matches the mean.
8.1.3.2.2 If the 5 percent or 0.2 µg/m 3 criterion in section 8.1.3.2.1 is not met, but the Hg concentration at each traverse point differs from the mean concentration for all traverse points by no more than: (a)±10 percent of the mean; or (b)±0.5 µg/m 3 (whichever is less restrictive), the gas stream is considered to be minimally stratified, and you may take samples from three points, provided the points are located on the measurement line exhibiting the highest average Hg concentration during the stratification test. If the stack diameter (or equivalent diameter, for a rectangular stack or duct) is greater than 2.4 meters (7.8 ft), locate the three sampling points at 0.4, 1.0, and 2.0 meters from the stack or duct wall. Alternatively, if a RATA required by part 75 of this chapter is being conducted, you may locate the three points at 4.4, 14.6, and 29.6 percent of the duct diameter, in accordance with Method 1 in appendix A-1 to this part. For stack or duct diameters of 2.4 meters (7.8 ft) or less, locate the three sampling points at 16.7, 50.0, and 83.3 percent of the measurement line.
8.1.3.2.3 If the gas stream is found to be stratified because the 10 percent or 0.5 µg/m 3 criterion in section 8.1.3.2.2 is not met, then either locate three sampling points at 16.7, 50.0, and 83.3 percent of the measurement line that exhibited the highest average Hg concentration during the stratification test, or locate twelve traverse points for the test in accordance with Table 1-1 or Table 1-2 of Method 1 in appendix A-1 to this part; or, if a RATA required by part 75 of this chapter is being conducted, locate six Method 1 points along the measurement line that exhibited the highest average Hg concentration.
8.1.3.3 Temporal Variations. Temporal variations in the source Hg concentration during a stratification test may complicate the determination of stratification. If temporal variations are a concern, you may use the following procedure to normalize the stratification test data. A second Hg measurement system, i.e., either an installed Hg CEMS or another Method 30A system, is required to perform this procedure. Position the sampling probe of the second Hg measurement system at a fixed point in the stack or duct, at least one meter from the stack or duct wall. Then, each time that the Hg concentration is measured at one of the stratification test points, make a concurrent measurement of Hg concentration at the fixed point. Normalize the Hg concentration measured at each traverse point, by multiplying it by the ratio of CF,avg to CF, where CF is the corresponding fixed-point Hg concentration measurement, and CF,avg is the average of all of the fixed-point measurements over the duration of the stratification test. Evaluate the results of the stratification test according to section 8.1.3.2, using the normalized Hg concentrations.
8.1.3.4 Stratification Testing Exemption. Stratification testing need not be performed at a test location where it would otherwise be required to justify using fewer sample points or different sample points, if the owner or operator documents that the Hg concentration in the stack gas is expected to be 3 µg/m 3 or less at the time of a Hg monitoring system RATA or an Hg emissions test. To demonstrate that a particular test location qualifies for the stratification testing exemption, representative Hg emissions data must be collected just prior to the RATA or emissions test. At least one hour of Hg concentration data is required for the demonstration. The data used for the demonstration shall be recorded at process operating conditions that closely approximate the operating conditions that will exist during the RATA or emissions test. It is recommended that collection of the demonstration data be integrated with the on-site pretest procedures required by the reference method being used for the RATA or emissions test (whether this method or another approved Hg reference method is used). Quality-assured data from an installed Hg monitoring system may also be used for the demonstration. If a particular test location qualifies for the stratification testing exemption, sampling shall be performed at three points, as described in section 8.1.3.2.2 of this method. The owner or operator shall fully document the method used to collect the demonstration data and shall keep this documentation on file with the data from the associated RATA or Hg emissions test.
8.1.3.5 Interim Alternative Stratification Test Procedures. In the time period between the effective date of this method and January 1, 2009, you may follow one of the following two procedures. Substitute a stratification test for sulfur dioxide (SO2) for the Hg stratification test described in section 8.1.3.1. If this option is chosen, follow the test procedures in section 6.5.6.1 of appendix A to part 75 of this chapter. Evaluate the test results and determine the sampling point locations according to section 6.5.6.3 of appendix A to part 75 of this chapter. If the sampling location is found to be minimally stratified or unstratified for SO2, it shall be considered minimally stratified or unstratified for Hg. Alternatively, you may forgo stratification testing, assume the gas stream is minimally stratified, and sample at three points as described in section 8.1.3.2.2 of this method.
8.2 Initial Measurement System Performance Tests. What initial performance criteria must my system meet before I begin sampling? Before measuring emissions, perform the following procedures:
(a) Interference Test;
(b) Calibration Gas Verification;
(c) Measurement System Preparation;
(d) 3-Point System Calibration Error Test;
(e) System Integrity Check;
(f) Measurement System Response Time Test; and
(g) Dynamic Spiking Test.
8.2.1 Interference Test (Optional). Your measurement system should be free of known interferences. It is recommended that you conduct this interference test of your measurement system prior to its initial use in the field to verify that the candidate test instrument is free from inherent biases or interferences resulting from common combustion emission constituents. If you have multiple measurement systems with components of the same make and model numbers, you need only perform this interference check on one system and you may also rely on an interference test conducted by the manufacturer on a system having components of the same make and model(s) of the system that you use. The interference test procedure is found in section 8.6 of this method.
8.2.2 Calibration Gas Verification. How must I verify the concentrations of my calibration gases?
8.2.2.1 Cylinder Gas Standards. When cylinder gas standards are used for Hg 0, obtain a certificate from the gas manufacturer and confirm that the documentation includes all information required by an EPA traceability protocol (see section 16). Confirm that the manufacturer certification is complete and current. Ensure that the calibration gas certifications have not expired.
8.2.2.2 Other Calibration Standards. All other calibration standards for HgCl2 and Hg 0, such as gas generators, must meet the requirements of an EPA traceability protocol (see section 16), and the certification procedures must be fully documented in the test report.
8.2.2.3 Calibration Span. Select the calibration span (i.e., high-level gas concentration) so that the measured source emissions are 10 to 100 percent of the calibration span. This requirement is waived for applications in which the Hg concentrations are consistently below 1 µg/m 3; however, the calibration span for these low-concentration applications shall not exceed 5 µg/m 3.
8.2.3 Measurement System Preparation. How do I prepare my measurement system for use? Assemble, prepare, and precondition the measurement system according to your standard operating procedure. Adjust the system to achieve the correct sampling rate or dilution ratio (as applicable). Then, conduct a 3-point system calibration error test using Hg 0 as described in section 8.2.4, an initial system integrity check using HgCl2 and a zero gas as described in section 8.2.5, and a pre-test dynamic spiking test as described in section 8.2.7.
8.2.4 System Calibration Error Test. Conduct a 3-point system calibration error test before the first test run. Use Hg 0 standards for this test. Introduce the low-, mid-, and high-level calibration gases in any order, in system calibration mode, unless you desire to determine the system response time during this test, in which case, inject the gases such that the high-level injection directly follows the low-level injection. For non-dilution systems, you may adjust the system to maintain the correct flow rate at the analyzer during the test, but you may not make adjustments for any other purpose. For dilution systems, you must operate the measurement system at the appropriate dilution ratio during all system calibration error checks, and you may make only the adjustments necessary to maintain the proper ratio. After each gas injection, wait until a stable response has been obtained. Record the analyzer's final, stable response to each calibration gas on a form similar to Table 30A-1 in section 17.0. For each calibration gas, calculate the system calibration error using Equation 30A-1 in section 12.2. The calibration error specification in section 13.1 must be met for the low-, mid-, and high-level gases. If the calibration error specification is not met for all three gases, take corrective action and repeat the test until an acceptable 3-point calibration is achieved.
8.2.5 System Integrity Check. Perform a two-point system integrity check before the first test run. Use the zero gas and either the mid- or high-level HgCl2 calibration gas for the check, whichever one best represents the total vapor phase Hg concentration levels in the stack. Record the data on a form similar to Table 30A-2 in section 17.0. The system integrity check specification in section 13.2 must be met for both the zero gas and the mid- or high-level gas. If the system integrity specification is not met for both gases, take corrective action and repeat the test until an acceptable system integrity check is achieved.
8.2.6 Measurement System Response Time. The measurement system response time is used to determine the minimum sampling time for each sampling point and is equal to the time that is required for the measured Hg concentration to increase from the stable low-level calibration gas response to a value within 5 percent of the stable high-level calibration gas response during the system calibration error test in section 8.2.4. Round off the measured system response time to the nearest minute.
8.2.7 Dynamic Spiking Test. You must perform dynamic spiking prior to the first test run to validate your test data. The purpose of this procedure is to demonstrate that the site-specific flue gas matrix does not adversely affect the accuracy of the measurement system. The specifications in section 13.5 must be met to validate your data. If these specifications are not met for the pre-test dynamic spiking, you may not proceed with the test until satisfactory results are obtained. For the time period between the effective date of this method and January 1, 2009, the dynamic spiking requirement is waived.
8.2.7.1 How do I perform dynamic spiking? Dynamic spiking is a gas phase application of the method of standard additions, which involves injecting a known quantity of Hg into the measurement system upstream of all sample conditioning components, similar to system calibration mode, except the probe is not flooded and the resulting sample stream includes both effluent gas and the spike gas. You must follow a written procedure that details how the spike is added to the system, how the spike dilution factor (DF) is measured, and how the Hg concentration data are collected and processed.
8.2.7.2 Spiking Procedure Requirements.
8.2.7.2.1 Spiking Gas Requirements. The spike gas must also be a HgCl2 calibration gas certified by an EPA traceability protocol. You must choose concentrations that can produce the target levels while being injected at a volumetric flow rate that is ≤20 percent of the total volumetric flow rate through the measurement system (i.e., sample flow rate plus spike gas flow rate).
8.2.7.2.2 Target Spiking Level. The target level for spiking must be 150 to 200 percent of the native Hg concentration; however, if the native Hg concentration is <1 µg/m 3, set the target level to add between 1 and 4 µg/m 3 Hg+2 to the native concentration. Use Equation 30A-5 in section 12.5 to calculate the acceptable range of spike gas concentrations at the target level. Then select a spike gas concentration in that range.
8.2.7.2.3 Spike Injections. You must inject spikes in such a manner that the spiking does not alter the total volumetric sample system flow rate and dilution ratio (if applicable). You must collect at least 3 data points, and the relative standard deviation (RSD) specification in section 13.5 must be met. Each data point represents a single spike injection, and pre- and post-injection measurements of the native Hg concentration (or diluted native concentration, as applicable) are required for each spike injection.
8.2.7.2.4 Spike Dilution Factor (DF). For each spike injection, DF, the dilution factor must be determined. DF is the ratio of the total volumetric flow rate of gas through the measurement system to the spike gas flow rate. This factor must be ≥5. The spiking mass balance calculation is directly dependent on the accuracy of the DF determination. As a result, high accuracy total volumetric flow rate and spike gas flowrate measurements are required. These flow rates may be determined by direct or indirect measurement. Calibrated flow meters, venturies, orifices or tracer gas measurements are examples of potential flow measurement techniques.
8.2.7.2.5 Concentrations. The measurement system must record total vapor phase Hg concentrations continuously during the dynamic spiking procedure. It is possible that dynamic spiking at a level close to 200 percent of the native Hg concentration may cause the measured Hg concentration to exceed the calibration span value. Avoid this by choosing a lower spiking level or by recalibration at a higher span. The measurements shall not exceed 120 percent of the calibration span. The “baseline” measurements made between spikes may represent the native Hg concentration (if spike gas flow is stopped between injections) or the native Hg concentration diluted by blank or carrier gas flowing at the same rate as the spike gas (if gas flow cannot be stopped between injections). Each baseline measurement must include at least 4 readings or 1 minute (whichever is greater) of stable responses. Use Equation 30A-10 or 30A-11 in section 12.10 (as applicable) to convert baseline measurements to native concentration.
8.2.7.2.6 Recovery. Calculate spike recoveries using Equation 30A-7 in section 12.7. Mass recoveries may be calculated from stable responses based on injected mass flows or from integrated response peaks based on total mass injected. Calculate the mean and RSD for the three (or more) spike injections and compare to the specifications in section 13.5.
8.2.7.2.7 Error Adjustment Option. You may adjust the measurement data collected during dynamic spiking for the system calibration error using Equation 30A-3 in section 12. To do this, perform the initial system integrity check prior to the dynamic spiking test, and perform another system integrity check following the dynamic spiking test and before the first test run. If you choose this option, you must apply Equation 30A-3 to both the spiked sample concentration measurement (Css) and the baseline or native concentration measurement (Cnative), each substituted in place of Cavg in the equation.
8.2.7.3 Example Spiking Procedure Using a Hot Vapor Calibration Source Generator.
(a) Introduce the spike gas into the probe using a hot vapor calibration source generator and a solution of HgCl2 in dilute HC1 and HNO3. The calibrator uses a mass flow controller (accurate within 2 percent) to measure the gas flow, and the solution feed is measured using a top-loading balance accurate to 0.01g. The challenges of injecting oxidized Hg may make it impractical to stop the flow of gas between spike injections. In this case, operate the hot vapor calibration source generator continuously during the spiking procedure, swapping blank solutions for HgCl2 solutions when switching between spiking and baseline measurements.
(b) If applicable, monitor the measurement system to make sure the total sampling system flow rate and the sample dilution ratio do not change during this procedure. Record all data on a data sheet similar to Table 30A-5 in section 17.0. If the Hg measurement system design makes it impractical to measure the total volumetric flow rate through the system, use a spike gas that includes a tracer for measuring the dilution factor, DF (see Equation 30A-9 in section 12.9). Allow the measurements to stabilize between each spike injection, average the pre- and post-injection baseline measurements, and calculate the native concentration. If this measurement shifts by more than 5 percent during any injection, it may be necessary to discard that data point and repeat the injection to achieve the required RSD among the injections. If the spikes persistently show poor repeatability, or if the recoveries are not within the range specified in section 13.5, take corrective action.
8.2.8 Run Validation. How do I confirm that each run I conduct is valid?
8.2.8.1 System Integrity Checks.
(a) Before and after each test run, perform a two-point system integrity check using the same procedure as the initial system integrity check described in section 8.2.5. You may use data from that initial system integrity check as the pre-run data for the first test run, provided it is the most recent system integrity check done before the first run. You may also use the results of a successful post-run system integrity check as the pre-run data for the next test run. Do not make any adjustments to the measurement system during these checks, other than to maintain the target calibration gas flow rate and the proper dilution ratio.
(b) As a time-saving alternative, you may, at the risk of invalidating multiple test runs, skip one or more integrity checks during a test day. Provided there have been no auto-calibrations or other instrument alterations, a single integrity check may suffice as a post-run check to validate (or invalidate) as many consecutive test runs as can be completed during a single test day. All subsequent test days must begin with a pre-run system integrity check subject to the same performance criteria and corrective action requirements as a post-run system integrity check.
(c) Each system integrity check must meet the criteria for system integrity checks in section 13.2. If a post-run system integrity check is failed, all test runs since the last passed system integrity check are invalid. If a post-run or a pre-run system integrity check is failed, you must take corrective action and pass another 3-point Hg 0 system calibration error test (Section 8.2.4) followed by another system integrity check before conducting any additional test runs. Record the results of the pre- and post-run system integrity checks on a form similar to Table 30A-2 in section 17.0.
8.2.8.2 Drift Check. Using the data from the successful pre- and post-run system integrity checks, calculate the zero and upscale drift, using Equation 30A-2 in section 12.3. Exceeding the section 13.3 specification does not invalidate the run, but corrective action must be taken and a new 3-point Hg 0 system calibration error test and a system integrity check must be passed before any more runs are made.
8.3 Dilution-Type Systems—Special Considerations. When a dilution-type measurement system is used, there are three important considerations that must be taken into account to ensure the quality of the emissions data. First, the critical orifice size and dilution ratio must be selected properly so that the sample dew point will be below the sample line and analyzer temperatures. Second, a high-quality, accurate dilution controller must be used to maintain the correct dilution ratio during sampling. The dilution controller should be capable of monitoring the dilution air pressure, orifice upstream pressure, eductor vacuum, and sample flow rates. Third, differences between the molecular weight of calibration gas mixtures, dilution air, and the stack gas molecular weight must be considered because these can affect the dilution ratio and introduce measurement bias.
8.4 Sampling.
(a) Position the probe at the first sampling point. Allow the system to flush and equilibrate for at least two times the measurement system response time before recording any data. Then, traverse and record measurements at all required sampling points. Sample at each traverse point for an equal length of time, maintaining the appropriate sample flow rate or dilution ratio (as applicable). For all Hg instrumental method systems, the minimum sampling time at each sampling point must be at least two times the system response time, but not less than 10 minutes. For concentrating systems, the minimum sampling time must also include at least 4 concentration measurement cycles.
(b) After recording data for the appropriate period of time at the first traverse point, you may move the sample probe to the next point and continue recording, omitting the requirement to allow the system to equilibrate for two times the system response time before recording data at the subsequent traverse points. You must, however, sample at this and all subsequent traverse points for the required minimum amount of time specified in this section. If you must remove the probe from the stack for any reason, you must again allow the sampling system to equilibrate for at least two times the system response time prior to resuming data recording.
(c) If at any point the measured Hg concentration exceeds the calibration span value, you must at a minimum identify and report this as a deviation from the method. Depending on the data quality objectives of the test, this event may require corrective action before proceeding. If the average Hg concentration for any run exceeds the calibration span value, the run is invalidated.
8.5 Moisture Correction. If the moisture basis (wet or dry) of the measurements made with this method is different from the moisture basis of either: (1) The applicable emission limit; or (2) a Hg CEMS or sorbent trap monitoring system being evaluated for relative accuracy, you must determine the moisture content of the flue gas and correct the measured gas concentrations to a dry basis using Method 4 in appendix A-3 of this part or other appropriate methods, subject to the approval of the Administrator.
8.6 Optional Interference Test Procedure.
(a) Select an appropriate calibration span that reflects the source(s) to be tested and perform the interference check at 40 percent of the lowest calibration span value anticipated, e.g., 10 µg/m 3. Alternatively, successfully conducting the interference test at an absolute Hg concentration of 2 µg/m 3 will demonstrate performance for an equivalent calibration span of 5 µg/m 3, the lowest calibration span allowed for Method 30A testing. Therefore, performing the interference test at the 2 µ/m 3 level will serve to demonstrate acceptable performance for all calibration spans greater than or equal to 5 µg/m 3.
(b) Introduce the interference test gases listed in Table 30A-3 in section 17.0 into the measurement system separately or as a mixture. The interference test gases HCl and NO must be introduced as a mixture. The interference test gases must be introduced into the sampling system at the probe such that the interference gas mixtures pass through all filters, scrubbers, conditioners, and other components as would be configured for normal sampling.
(c) The interference test must be performed using HgCl2, and each interference test gas (or gas mixture) must be evaluated in triplicate. This is accomplished by measuring the Hg response first with only the HgCl2 gas present and then when adding the interference test gas(es) while maintaining the HgCl2 concentration of the test stream constant. It is important that the equipment used to conduct the interference test be of sufficient quality so as to be capable of blending the HgCl2 and interference gases while maintaining the Hg concentration constant. Gas blending system or manifolds may be used.
(d) The duration of each test should be for a sufficient period of time to ensure the Hg measurement system surfaces are conditioned and a stable output is obtained. Measure the Hg response of the analyzer to these gases in µg/m3. Record the responses and determine the overall interference response using Table 30A-4 in section 17.0 and the equations presented in section 12.11. The specification in section 13.4 must be met.
(e) A copy of these data, including the date completed and a signed certification, must be included with each test report. The intent of this test is that the interference test results are intended to be valid for the life of the system. As a result, the Hg measurement system should be operated and tested in a configuration consistent with the configuration that will be used for field applications. However, if the system used for field testing is not consistent with the system that was interference-tested, the interference test must be repeated before it is used for any field applications. Examples of such conditions include, but are not limited to: major changes in dilution ratio (for dilution based systems), changes in catalyst materials, changes in filtering device design or materials, changes in probe design or configuration, and changes in gas conditioning materials or approaches.
9.0 Quality Control
What quality control measures must I take?
The table which follows is a summary of the mandatory, suggested, and alternative quality assurance and quality control measures and the associated frequency and acceptance criteria. All of the QC data, along with the run data, must be documented and included in the test report.
| Status 1 | Process or element | QA/QC specification | Acceptance criteria | Checking frequency |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| S | Identify Data User | Regulatory Agency or other primary end user of data | Before designing test. | |
| M | Analyzer Design | Analyzer range | Sufficiently >high-level gas to allow determination of system calibration error | |
| S | Analyzer resolution or sensitivity | <2.0 % of full-scale range | Manufacturer design. | |
| S | Interference response | Overall response ≤3% of calibration span Alternatively, overall response ≤0.3 µg/m3 |
||
| M | Calibration Gases | Traceability protocol | Validation of concentration required | |
| M | High-level Hg0 gas | Equal to the calibration span | Each calibration error test. | |
| M | Mid-level Hg0 gas | 40 to 60% of calibration span | Each calibration error test. | |
| M | Low-level Hg0 gas | 10 to 30% of calibration span | Each calibration error test. | |
| M | High-level HgCl2 gas | Equal to the calibration span | Each system integrity check (if it better represents Cnative than the mid level gas). | |
| M | Mid-level HgCl2 | 40 to 60% of calibration span | Each system gas integrity check (if it better represents Cnative than the high level gas). | |
| M | Zero gas | Each system integrity check. | ||
| M | Dynamic spike gas (Cnative ≥1 µg/m3) | A high-concentration HgCl2 gas, used to produce a spiked sample concentration that is 150 to 200% of the native concentration | Pre-test; dynamic spiking not required until 1/1/09. | |
| M | Dynamic spike gas (Cnative <1 µg/m3) | A high-concentration HgCl2 gas, used to produce a spiked sample concentration that is 1 to 2 µg/m3 above the native concentration | Pre-test; dynamic spiking not required until 1/1/09. | |
| S | Data Recorder Design | Data resolution | ≤0.5% of full-scale | Manufacturer design. |
| M | Sample Extraction | Probe material | Inert to sample constituents (e.g., PFA Teflon, or quartz if stack >500 °F) | Each run. |
| M | Sample Extraction | Probe, filter and sample line temperature | For dry-basis analyzers, keep sample above the dew point, by heating prior to moisture removal For wet-basis analyzers, keep sample above dew point at all times, by heating or dilution |
Each run. |
| M | Sample Extraction | Calibration valve material | Inert to sample constituents (e.g., PFA Teflon or PFA Teflon coated) | Each test. |
| S | Sample Extraction | Sample pump material | Inert to sample constituents | Each test. |
| M | Sample Extraction | Manifold material | Inert to sample constituents | Each test. |
| M | Particulate Removal | Filter inertness | Pass calibration error check | Each calibration error check. |
| M | System Calibration Performance | System calibration error (CE) test | CE ≤5.0 % of the calibration span for the low-, mid-or high-level Hg0 calibration gas Alternative specification: ≤0.5 µg/m3 absolute difference between system response and reference value |
Before initial run and after a failed system integrity check or drift test. |
| M | System Calibration Performance | System integrity check | Error ≤5.0% of the calibration span for the zero and mid- or high-level HgCl2 calibration gas Alternative specification: ≤0.5 µg/m3 absolute difference between system response and reference value |
Before initial run, after each run, at the beginning of subsequent test days, and after a failed system integrity check or drift test. |
| M | System Performance | System response time | Used to determine minimum sampling time per point | During initial 3-point system calibration error test. |
| M | System Performance | Drift | ≤3.0% of calibration span for the zero and mid- or high-level gas Alternative specification: ≤0.3 µg/m3 absolute difference between pre- and post-run system calibration error percentages. |
At least once per test day. |
| M | System Performance | Minimum sampling time | The greater of two times the system response time or 10 minutes. Concentrating systems must also include at least 4 cycles | Each sampling point. |
| M | System Performance | Percentage spike recovery and relative standard deviation | Percentage spike recovery, at the target level: 100 ±10% Relative standard deviation: ≤5 percent Alternative specification: absolute difference between calculated and measured spike values ≤0.5 µg/m3 |
Before initial run; dynamic spiking not required until 1/1/09. |
| M | Sample Point Selection | Number and Location of Sample Points | For emission testing applications, use 12 points, located according to Method 1 in appendix A-1 to this part, unless the results of a stratification test allow fewer points to be used | Prior to first run. |
| For Part 60 RATAs, follow the procedures in Performance Specification 2, section 8.1.3, and for Part 75 RATAs, follow the procedures in section 6.5.6 of appendix A to Part 75. That is: | ||||
| • At any test location, you may use 3 sample points located at 16.7, 50.0, and 83.3% of a “long” measurement line passing through the centroidal area; or | ||||
| • At any test location, you may use 6 sample points along a diameter, located according to Method 1 (Part 75 RATAs, only); or | ||||
| • At a location where stratification is not expected and the measurement line is >2.4 m (7.8 ft), you may use 3 sample points located along a “short” measurement line at 0.4, 1.0, and 2.0 m from the stack or duct wall or, for Part 75 only, sample points may be located at 4.4, 14.6, and 29.6% of the measurement line; or | ||||
| • After a wet scrubber or at a point where dissimilar gas streams are combined, either locate 3 sample points along the “long” measurement line or locate 6 Method 1 points along a diameter (Part 75, only), unless the results of a stratification test allow you to use a “short” 3-point measurement line or to sample at a single point | ||||
| • If it can be demonstrated that stack gas concentration is ≤3 µg/m3, then the test site is exempted from stratification testing. Use the 3-point “short” measurement line if the stack diameter is >2.4 m (7.8 ft) and the 3-point “long” line for stack diameters ≤2.4 m (7.8 ft) | ||||
| A | Sample Point Selection | Stratification Test (See section 8.1.3). | If the Hg concentration2 at each traverse point during the stratification test is: • Within ±5% of mean, use 1-point sampling (at the point closest to the mean); or • Not within ±5% of mean, but is within ±10% of mean, use 3-point sampling. Locate points according to section 8.1.3.2.2 of this method. Alternatively, if the Hg concentration at each point is: • Within ±0.2 µg/m3 of mean, use 1-point sampling (at the point closest to the mean); or • Not within ±0.2 µg/m3 of mean, but is within ±0.5 µg/m3 of mean, use 3-point sampling. Locate points according to section 8.1.3.2.2 of this method. |
Prior to first run. Prior to 1/1/09, you may (1) forgo stratification testing and use 3 sampling points (as per section 8.1.3.2.2) or (2) perform a SO2 stratification test (see sections 6.5.6.1 and 6.5.6.3 of appendix A to part 75), in lieu of a Hg stratification test. If the test location is unstratified or minimally stratified for SO2, it can be considered unstratified or minimally stratified for Hg also. |
| M | Data Recording | Frequency | Once per cycle | During run. |
| S | Data Parameters | Sample concentration and calibration span | All analyzer readings during each run within calibration span | Each run. |
| M | Data Parameters | Sample concentration and calibration span | All analyzer readings during dynamic spiking tests within 120% of calibration span | Each spike injection. |
| M | Data Parameters | Sample concentration and calibration span | Average Hg concentration for the run ≤calibration span | Each run. |
| 1 M = Mandatory; S = Suggested; A = Alternative. | ||||
| 2 These may either be the unadjusted Hg concentrations or concentrations normalized to account for temporal variations. |
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
What measurement system calibrations are required?
Your analyzer must be calibrated with Hg° standards. The initial 3-point system calibration error test described in section 8.2.4 is required before you start the test. Also, prior to and following test runs, the two-point system integrity checks described in sections 8.2.5 and 8.2.8 are required. On and after January 1, 2009, the pre-test dynamic spiking procedure described in section 8.2.7 is also required to verify that the accuracy of the measurement system is suitable and not adversely affected by the flue gas matrix.
11.0 Analytical Procedures
Because sample collection and analysis are performed together (see section 8), additional discussion of the analytical procedure is not necessary.
12.0 Calculations and Data Analysis
You must follow the procedures for calculations and data analysis listed in this section.
12.1 Nomenclature. The terms used in the equations are defined as follows:
Bws = Moisture content of sample gas as measured by Method 4 in Appendix A-3 to this part, percent/100.
Cavg = Average unadjusted Hg concentration for the test run, as indicated by the data recorder µg/m 3.
C baseline = Average Hg concentration measured before and after dynamic spiking injections, µg/m 3.
Cd = Hg concentration, dry basis, µg/m 3.
Cdif = Absolute value of the difference between the measured Hg concentrations of the reference HgCl2 calibration gas, with and without the individual or combined interference gases, µg/m 3.
Cdif avg = Average of the 3 absolute values of the difference between the measured Hg concentrations of the reference HgCl2 calibration gas, with and without the individual or combined interference gases, µg/m 3.
Cgas = Average Hg concentration in the effluent gas for the test run, adjusted for system calibration error, µg/m 3.
Cint = Measured Hg concentration of the reference HgCl2 calibration gas plus the individual or combined interference gases, µg/m 3.
Cm = Average of pre- and post-run system integrity check responses for the upscale (i.e., mid- or high-level) calibration gas, µg/m 3.
Cma = Actual concentration of the upscale (i.e., mid- or high-level) calibration gas used for the system integrity checks, µg/m 3.
C0 = Average of pre- and post-run system integrity check responses from the zero gas, µg/m 3.
Cnative = Vapor phase Hg concentration in the source effluent, µg/m 3.
Cref = Measured Hg concentration of the reference HgCl2 calibration gas alone, in the interference test, µg/m 3.
Cs = Measured concentration of a calibration gas (zero-, low-, mid-, or high-level), when introduced in system calibration mode, µg/m 3.
Cspike = Actual Hg concentration of the spike gas, µg/m 3.
C*spike = Hg concentration of the spike gas required to achieve a certain target value for the spiked sample Hg concentration, µg/m 3.
Css = Measured Hg concentration of the spiked sample at the target level, µg/m 3.
C*ss = Expected Hg concentration of the spiked sample at the target level, µg/m 3.
Ctarget = Target Hg concentration of the spiked sample, µg/m 3.
CTnative = Measured tracer gas concentration present in native effluent gas, ppm.
CTdir = Tracer gas concentration injected with spike gas, ppm.
CTv = Diluted tracer gas concentration measured in a spiked sample, ppm.
Cv = Certified Hg° or HgCl2 concentration of a calibration gas (zero, low, mid, or high), µg/m 3.
Cw = Hg concentration measured under moist sample conditions, wet basis, µg/m 3.
CS = Calibration span, µg/m 3.
D = Zero or upscale drift, percent of calibration span.
DF = Dilution factor of the spike gas, dimensionless.
I = Interference response, percent of calibration span.
Qprobe = Total flow rate of the stack gas sample plus the spike gas, liters/min.
Qspike = Flow rate of the spike gas, liters/min.
Ri = Individual injection spike recovery, %.
R = Mean value of spike recoveries at a particular target level, %.
RSD = Relative standard deviation, %;.
SCE = System calibration error, percent of calibration span.
SCEi = Pre-run system calibration error during the two-point system integrity check, percent of calibration span.
SCEf = Post-run system calibration error during the two-point system integrity check, percent of calibration span.
12.2 System Calibration Error. Use Equation 30A-1 to calculate the system calibration error. Equation 30A-1 applies to: 3-point system calibration error tests performed with Hg° standards; and pre- and post-run two-point system integrity checks performed with HgCl2.
12.3 Drift Assessment. Use Equation 30A-2 to separately calculate the zero and upscale drift for each test run.
12.3 Effluent Hg Concentration. For each test run, calculate Cavg, the arithmetic average of all valid Hg concentration values recorded during the run. Then, adjust the value of Cavg for system calibration error, using Equation 30A-3.
12.4 Moisture Correction. Use Equation 30A-4a if your measurements need to be corrected to a dry basis.
Use Equation 30A-4b if your measurements need to be corrected to a wet basis.
12.5 Dynamic Spike Gas Concentrations. Use Equation 30A-5 to determine the spike gas concentration needed to produce a spiked sample with a certain “target” Hg concentration.
12.6 Spiked Sample Concentration. Use Equation 30A-6 to determine the expected or theoretical Hg concentration of a spiked sample.
12.7 Spike Recovery. Use Equation 30A-7 to calculate the percentage recovery of each spike.
12.8 Relative Standard Deviation. Use Equation 30A-8 to calculate the relative standard deviation of the individual percentage spike recovery values from the mean.
12.9 Spike Dilution Factor. Use Equation 30A-9 to calculate the spike dilution factor, using either direct flow measurements or tracer gas measurements.
12.10 Native Concentration. For spiking procedures that inject blank or carrier gases (at the spiking flow rate, Qspike) between spikes, use Equation 30A-10 to calculate the native concentration.
For spiking procedures that halt all injections between spikes, the native concentration equals the average baseline concentration (see Equation 30A-11).
12.11 Overall Interference Response. Use equation 30A-12 to calculate the overall interference response.
Where, for each interference gas (or mixture):
13.0 Method Performance
13.1 System Calibration Error Test. This specification applies to the 3-point system calibration error tests using Hg 0. At each calibration gas level tested (low-, mid-, or high-level), the calibration error must be within ±5.0 percent of the calibration span. Alternatively, the results are acceptable if | Cs − Cv | ≤0.5 µg/m 3.
13.2 System Integrity Checks. This specification applies to all pre- and post-run 2-point system integrity checks using HgCl2 and zero gas. At each calibration gas level tested (zero and mid- or high-level), the error must be within ±5.0 percent of the calibration span. Alternatively, the results are acceptable if | Cs − Cv | ≤0.5 µg/m 3.
13.3 Drift. For each run, the low-level and upscale drift must be less than or equal to 3.0 percent of the calibration span. The drift is also acceptable if the pre- and post-run system integrity check responses do not differ by more than 0.3 µg/m 3 (i.e., | Cs post-run − Cs pre-run | ≤0.3 µg/m 3).
13.4 Interference Test. Summarize the results following the format contained in Table 30A-4. For each interference gas (or mixture), calculate the mean difference between the measurement system responses with and without the interference test gas(es). The overall interference response for the analyzer that was used for the test (calculated according to Equation 30A-12), must not be greater than 3.0 percent of the calibration span used for the test (see section 8.6). The results of the interference test are also acceptable if the sum of the absolute average differences for all interference gases (i.e., Σ Cdif avg) does not exceed 0.3 µg/m 3.
13.5 Dynamic Spiking Test. For the pre-test dynamic spiking, the mean value of the percentage spike recovery must be 100 ±10 percent. In addition, the relative standard deviation (RSD) of the individual percentage spike recovery values from the mean must be ≤5.0 percent. Alternatively, if the mean percentage recovery is not met, the results are acceptable if the absolute difference between the theoretical spiked sample concentration (see section 12.6) and the actual average value of the spiked sample concentration is ≤0.5 µg/m 3.
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 References
1. EPA Traceability Protocol for Qualification and Certification of Elemental Mercury Gas Generators, expected publication date December 2008, see www.epa.gov/ttn/emc.
2. EPA Traceability Protocol for Qualification and Certification of Oxidized Mercury Gas Generators, expected publication date December 2008, see www.epa.gov/ttn/emc.
3. EPA Traceability Protocol for Assay and Certification of Gaseous Calibration Standards, expected revision publication date December 2008, see www.epa.gov/ttn/emc.
17.0 Figures and Tables
| Potential interferent gas 1 | Concentration, tentative—(balance N2) |
|---|---|
| CO2 | 15% ±1% CO2 |
| CO | 100 ±20 ppm |
| HCl 2 | 100 ±20 ppm |
| NO 2 | 250 ±50 ppm |
| SO2 | 200 ±20 ppm |
| O2 | 3% ±1% O2 |
| H2 O | 10% ±1% H2 O |
| Nitrogen | Balance |
| Other | |
| 1 Any of these specific gases can be tested at a lower level if the manufacturer has provided reliable means for limiting or scrubbing that gas to a specified level. | |
| 2 HCl and NO must be tested as a mixture. |
Method 30B—Determination of Total Vapor Phase Mercury Emissions From Coal-Fired Combustion Sources Using Carbon Sorbent Traps
1.0 Scope and Application
What is Method 30B?
Method 30B is a procedure for measuring total vapor phase mercury (Hg) emissions from coal-fired combustion sources using sorbent trap sampling and an extractive or thermal analytical technique. This method is only intended for use only under relatively low particulate conditions (e.g., sampling after all pollution control devices). Quality assurance and quality control requirements are included to assure that you, the tester, collect data of known and acceptable quality for each testing program. This method does not completely describe all equipment, supplies, and sampling and analytical procedures you will need, but instead refers to other test methods for some of the details. Therefore, to obtain reliable results, you should also have a thorough knowledge of these additional methods which are found in Appendices A-1 and A-3 to this part:
(a) Method 1—Sample and Velocity Traverses for Stationary Sources.
(b) Method 4—Determination of Moisture Content in Stack Gases.
(c) Method 5—Determination of Particulate Matter Emissions from Stationary Sources
1.1 Analytes. What does this method determine? This method is designed to measure the mass concentration of total vapor phase Hg in flue gas, including elemental Hg (Hg 0) and oxidized forms of Hg (Hg+2), in micrograms per dry standard cubic meter (µg/dscm).
| Analyte | CAS No. | Analytical range and sensitivity |
|---|---|---|
| Elemental Hg (Hg 0 ) | 7439-97-6 | Typically 0.1 µg/dscm to >50 µg/dscm. |
| Oxidized Hg (Hg+2) | (Same) |
1.2 Applicability. When is this method required? Method 30B is a reference method for relative accuracy test audits (RATAs) of vapor phase Hg CEMS and sorbent trap monitoring systems installed at coal-fired boilers and is also appropriate for Hg emissions testing at such boilers. It is intended for use only under relatively low particulate conditions (i.e., sampling after all pollution control devices); in cases where significant amounts of particle-bound Hg may be present, an isokinetic sampling method for Hg should be used. Method 30B may also be specified by New Source Performance Standards (NSPS), National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAP), emissions trading programs, State Implementation Plans (SIPs), and operating permits that require measurement of Hg concentrations in stationary source emissions, either to determine compliance with an applicable emission standard or limit, or to conduct RATAs of Hg CEMS and sorbent trap monitoring systems.
1.3 Data Quality Objectives (DQO). How good must my collected data be? Method 30B has been designed to provide data of high and known quality for Hg emissions testing and for RATA testing of Hg monitoring systems, including CEMS and sorbent trap monitors. In these and other applications, the principal objective is to ensure the accuracy of the data at the actual emissions levels and in the actual emissions matrix encountered. To meet this objective, NIST-traceable calibration standards must be used and method performance tests are required.
2.0 Summary of Method
Known volumes of flue gas are extracted from a stack or duct through paired, in-stack sorbent media traps at an appropriate flow rate. Collection of mercury on the sorbent media in the stack mitigates potential loss of mercury during transport through a probe/sample line. For each test run, paired train sampling is required to determine measurement precision and verify acceptability of the measured emissions data. A field recovery test which assesses recovery of an elemental Hg spike to determine measurement bias is also used to verify data acceptability. The sorbent traps are recovered from the sampling system, prepared for analysis as needed, and analyzed by any suitable determinative technique that can meet the performance criteria.
3.0 Definitions
3.1 Analytical System is the combined equipment and apparatus used to perform sample analyses. This includes any associated sample preparation apparatus e.g., digestion equipment, spiking systems, reduction devices, etc., as well as analytical instrumentation such as UV AA and UV AF cold vapor analyzers.
3.2 Calibration Standards are the Hg containing solutions prepared from NIST traceable standards and are used to directly calibrate analytical systems.
3.3 Independent Calibration Standard is a NIST traceable standard obtained from a source or supplier independent of that for the calibration standards and is used to confirm the integrity of the calibration standards used.
3.4 Method Detection Limit (MDL) is the lowest mass of Hg greater than zero that can be estimated and reported by your candidate analytical technique. The MDL is statistically derived from replicate low level measurements near your analytical instrument's detection level.
3.5 NIST means the National Institute of Standards and Technology, located in Gaithersburg, Maryland.
3.6 Run means a series of gas samples taken successively from the stack or duct. A test normally consists of a specific number of runs.
3.7 Sorbent Trap means a cartridge or sleeve containing a sorbent media (typically activated carbon treated with iodine or some other halogen) with multiple sections separated by an inert material such as glass wool. These sorbent traps are optimized for the quantitative capture of elemental and oxidized forms of Hg and can be analyzed by multiple techniques.
3.8 Test refers to the series of runs required by the applicable regulation.
3.9 Thermal Analysis means an analytical technique where the contents of the sorbent traps are analyzed using a thermal technique (desorption or combustion) to release the captured Hg in a detectable form for quantification.
3.10 Wet Analysis means an analytical technique where the contents of the sorbent tube are first leached or digested to quantitatively transfer the captured Hg to liquid solution for subsequent analysis.
4.0 Interferences
Interferences may result from the sorbent trap material used as well as from the measurement environment itself. The iodine present on some sorbent traps may impart a negative measurement bias. High levels of sulfur trioxide (SO3) are also suspected to compromise the performance of sorbent trap Hg capture. These, and other, potential interferences are assessed by performing the analytical matrix interference, Hg 0 and HgCl2 analytical bias and field recovery tests.
5.0 Safety
What safety measures should I consider when using this method? This method may require you to work with hazardous materials and in hazardous conditions. You are encouraged to establish safety procedures before using the method. Among other precautions, you should become familiar with the safety recommendations in the gas analyzer user's manual. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) regulations concerning use of compressed gas cylinders and noxious gases may apply.
5.1 Site Hazards. Prior to applying these procedures/specifications in the field, the potential hazards at the test site should be considered; advance coordination with the site is critical to understand the conditions and applicable safety policies. At a minimum, portions of the sampling system will be hot, requiring appropriate gloves, long sleeves, and caution in handling this equipment.
5.2 Laboratory Safety. Policies should be in place to minimize risk of chemical exposure and to properly handle waste disposal in the laboratory. Personnel shall wear appropriate laboratory attire according to a Chemical Hygiene Plan established by the laboratory.
5.3 Reagent Toxicity/Carcinogenicity. The toxicity and carcinogenicity of any reagents used must be considered. Depending upon the sampling and analytical technologies selected, this measurement may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment and this method does not address all of the safety problems associated with implementing this approach. It is the responsibility of the user to establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicable regulatory limitations prior to performance. Any chemical should be regarded as a potential health hazard and exposure to these compounds should be minimized. Chemists should refer to the Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for each chemical used.
5.4 Waste Disposal. Any waste generated by this procedure must be disposed of according to a hazardous materials management plan that details and tracks various waste streams and disposal procedures.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
The following list is presented as an example of key equipment and supplies likely required to measure vapor-phase Hg using a sorbent trap sampling system. It is recognized that additional equipment and supplies may be needed. Collection of paired samples is required.
6.1 Sorbent Trap Sampling System. A typical sorbent trap sampling system is shown in Figure 30B-1 in section 17.0. The sorbent trap sampling system shall include the following components:
6.1.1 Sorbent Traps. The sorbent media used to collect Hg must be configured in a trap with at least two distinct segments or sections, connected in series, that are amenable to separate analyses. section 1 is designated for primary capture of gaseous Hg. section 2 is designated as a backup section for determination of vapor phase Hg breakthrough. Each sorbent trap must be inscribed or otherwise permanently marked with a unique identification number, for tracking purposes. The sorbent media may be any collection material (e.g., carbon, chemically-treated filter, etc.) capable of quantitatively capturing and recovering for subsequent analysis, all gaseous forms of Hg in the emissions from the intended application. Selection of the sorbent media shall be based on the material's ability to achieve the performance criteria contained in this method as well as the sorbent's vapor phase Hg capture efficiency for the emissions matrix and the expected sampling duration at the test site. The sorbent media must be obtained from a source that can demonstrate their quality assurance and quality control (see section 7.2). The paired sorbent traps are supported on a probe (or probes) and inserted directly into the flue gas stream.
6.1.2 Sampling Probe Assembly. Each probe assembly shall have a leak-free attachment to the sorbent trap(s). Each sorbent trap must be mounted at the entrance of or within the probe such that the gas sampled enters the trap directly. Each probe/sorbent trap assembly must be heated to a temperature sufficient to prevent liquid condensation in the sorbent trap(s). Auxiliary heating is required only where the stack temperature is too low to prevent condensation. Use a calibrated thermocouple to monitor the stack temperature. A single probe capable of operating the paired sorbent traps may be used. Alternatively, individual probe/sorbent trap assemblies may be used, provided that the individual sorbent traps are co-located to ensure representative Hg monitoring.
6.1.3 Moisture Removal Device. A moisture removal device or system shall be used to remove water vapor from the gas stream prior to entering dry gas flow metering devices.
6.1.4 Vacuum Pump. Use a leak-tight, vacuum pump capable of operating within the system's flow range.
6.1.5 Gas Flow Meter. A gas flow meter (such as a dry gas meter, thermal mass flow meter, or other suitable measurement device) shall be used to determine the total sample volume on a dry basis, in units of standard cubic meters. The meter must be sufficiently accurate to measure the total sample volume to within 2 percent and must be calibrated at selected flow rates across the range of sample flow rates at which the sampling train will be operated. The gas flow meter shall be equipped with any necessary auxiliary measurement devices (e.g., temperature sensors, pressure measurement devices) needed to correct the sample volume to standard conditions.
6.1.6 Sample Flow Rate Meter and Controller. Use a flow rate indicator and controller for maintaining necessary sampling flow rates.
6.1.7 Temperature Sensor. Same as section 6.1.1.7 of Method 5 in Appendix A-3 to this part.
6.1.8 Barometer. Same as section 6.1.2 of Method 5 in Appendix A-3 to this part.
6.1.9 Data Logger (optional). Device for recording associated and necessary ancillary information (e.g., temperatures, pressures, flow, time, etc.).
6.2 Gaseous Hg 0 Sorbent Trap Spiking System. A known mass of gaseous Hg 0 must be either present on or spiked onto the first section of sorbent traps in order to perform the Hg 0 and HgCl2 analytical bias test and the field recovery study. Any approach capable of quantitatively delivering known masses of Hg 0 onto sorbent traps is acceptable. Several spiking technologies or devices are available to meet this objective. Their practicality is a function of Hg mass spike levels. For low levels, NIST-certified or NIST-traceable gas generators or tanks may be suitable. An alternative system, capable of delivering almost any mass required, makes use of NIST-certified or NIST-traceable Hg salt solutions (e.g., HgCl2, Hg(NO3)2). With this system, an aliquot of known volume and concentration is added to a reaction vessel containing a reducing agent (e.g., stannous chloride); the Hg salt solution is reduced to Hg 0 and purged onto the sorbent trap using an impinger sparging system. When available, information on example spiking systems will be posted at http://www.epa.gov/ttn/emc.
6.3 Sample Analysis Equipment. Any analytical system capable of quantitatively recovering and quantifying total Hg from the sorbent media selected is acceptable provided that the analysis can meet the performance criteria described in this method. Example recovery techniques include acid leaching, digestion, and thermal desorption/direct combustion. Example analytical techniques include, but are not limited to, ultraviolet atomic fluorescence (UV AF), ultraviolet atomic absorption (UV AA) with and without gold trapping, and X-ray fluorescence (XRF) analysis.
6.3 Moisture Measurement System. If correction of the measured Hg emissions for moisture is required (see section 8.3.3.7), either Method 4 in Appendix A-3 to this part or other moisture measurement methods approved by the Administrator will be needed to measure stack gas moisture content.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
7.1 Reagents and Standards. Only NIST-certified or NIST-traceable calibration standards, standard reference materials, and reagents shall be used for the tests and procedures required by this method.
7.2 Sorbent Trap Media. The sorbent trap media shall be prepared such that the material used for testing is of known and acceptable quality. Sorbent supplier quality assurance/quality control measures to ensure appropriate and consistent performance such as sorptive capacity, uniformity of preparation treatments, and background levels shall be considered.
8.0 Sample Collection and Handling
This section presents the sample collection and handling procedures along with the pretest and on-site performance tests required by this method. Since you may choose different options to comply with certain performance criteria, each test report must identify the specific options selected and document the results with respect to the performance criteria of this method.
8.1 Selection of Sampling Sites and Sampling Points. What sampling site and sampling points do I select? Same as section 8.1 of Method 30A of this appendix.
8.2 Measurement System Performance Tests. What performance criteria must my measurement system meet? The following laboratory and field procedures and associated criteria of this section are designed to ensure (1) selection of a sorbent and analytical technique combination capable of quantitative collection and analysis of gaseous Hg, (2) collection of an adequate amount of Hg on each sorbent trap during field tests, and (3) adequate performance of the method for each test program: The primary objectives of these performance tests are to characterize and verify the performance of your intended analytical system and associated sampling and analytical procedures, and to define the minimum amount of Hg (as the sample collection target) that can be quantified reliably.
(a) Analytical Matrix Interference Test;
(b) Determination of Minimum Sample Mass;
(c) Hg 0 and HgCl2 Analytical Bias Test;
(d) Determination of Nominal Sample Volume;
(e) Field Recovery Test.
8.2.1 Analytical Matrix Interference Test and Minimum Sample Dilution.
(a) The analytical matrix interference test is a laboratory procedure. It is required only if you elect to use a liquid digestion analytical approach and needs to be performed only once for each sorbent material used. The purpose of the test is to verify the presence or absence of known and potential analytical matrix interferences, including the potential negative bias associated with iodine common to many sorbent trap materials. The analytical matrix interference test determines the minimum dilution (if any) necessary to mitigate matrix effects on the sample digestate solutions.
(b) The result of the analytical matrix interference test, i.e., the minimum sample dilution required (if any) for all sample analyses, is used to establish the minimum sample mass needed for the Hg 0 and HgCl2 analytical bias test and to determine the nominal sample volume for a test run. The analytical matrix interference test is sorbent material-specific and shall be performed for each sorbent material you intend to use for field sampling and analysis. The test shall be performed using a mass of sorbent material comparable to the sorbent mass typically used in the first section of the trap for sampling. Similar sorbent materials from different sources of supply are considered to be different materials and must be tested individually. You must conduct the analytical matrix interference test for each sorbent material prior to the analysis of field samples.
8.2.1.1 Analytical Matrix Interference Test Procedures. Digest and prepare for analysis a representative mass of sorbent material (unsampled) according to your intended laboratory techniques for field samples. Analyze the digestate according to your intended analytical conditions at the least diluted level you intend to use for sample analysis (e.g., undiluted, 1 in 10 dilution, etc.). Determine the Hg concentration of the undiluted digestate solution. Prepare a series of solutions with a fixed final volume containing graduated aliquots of the sample digestate and, a fixed aliquot of a calibration standard (with the balance being Hg-free reagent or H20) to establish solutions of varied digestate dilution ratio (e.g., 1:2, 1:5, 1:10, 1:100, etc.—see example in section 8.2.1.3, below). One of these solutions should contain only the aliquot of the calibration standard in Hg-free reagent or H2O. This will result in a series of solutions where the amount of Hg is held relatively constant and only the volume of digestate diluted is varied. Analyze each of these solutions following intended sample analytical procedures and conditions, determining the concentration for each solution.
8.2.1.2 Analytical Matrix Interference Test Acceptance Criteria. Compare the measured concentration of each solution containing digestate to the measured concentration of the digestate-free solution. The lowest dilution ratio of any solution having a Hg concentration within ±5 percent of the digestate-free solution is the minimum dilution ratio required for analysis of all samples. If you desire to measure the digestate without dilution, the ±5 percent criterion must be met at a dilution ratio of at least 9:10 (i.e., ≥90% digestate).
8.2.1.3 Example Analytical Matrix Interference Test. An example analytical matrix interference test is presented below. Additional information on the conduct of the analytical matrix interference test will be posted at http://www.epa.gov/ttn/emc. Determine the most sensitive working range for the analyzer to be used. This will be a narrow range of concentrations. Digest and prepare for analysis a representative mass of sorbent material (unsampled) according to your intended laboratory techniques for sample preparation and analysis. Prepare a calibration curve for the most sensitive analytical region, e.g., 0.0, 0.5, 1.0, 3.0, 5.0, 10 ppb. Using the highest calibration standard, e.g., 10.0 ppb, prepare a series of solutions by adding successively smaller increments of the digestate to a fixed volume of the calibration standard and bringing each solution to a final fixed volume with mercury-free deionized water (diH2O). To 2.0 ml of the calibration standard add 18.0, 10.0, 4.0, 2.0, 1.0, 0.2, and 0.0 ml of the digestate. Bring the final volume of each solution to a total volume of 20 ml by adding 0.0, 8.0, 14.0, 16.0, 17.0, 17.8, and 18.0 ml of diH2O. This will yield solutions with dilution ratios of 9:10, 1:2, 1:5, 1:10, 1:20, 1:100, and 0:10, respectively. Determine the Hg concentration of each solution. The dilution ratio of any solution having a concentration that is within ±5 percent of the concentration of the solution containing 0.0 ml of digestate is an acceptable dilution ratio for analyzing field samples. If more than one solution meets this criterion, the one with the lowest dilution ratio is the minimum dilution required for analysis of field samples. If the 9:10 dilution meets this criterion, then no sample dilution is required.
8.2.2 Determination of Minimum Sample Mass. The minimum mass of Hg that must be collected per sample must be determined. This information is necessary in order to effectively perform the Hg 0 and HgCl2 Analytical Bias Test, to estimate target sample volumes/sample times for test runs, and to ensure the quality of the measurements. The determination of minimum sample mass is a direct function of analytical technique, measurement sensitivity, dilutions, etc. This determination is required for all analytical techniques. Based on the analytical approach you employ, you should determine the most sensitive calibration range. Based on a calibration point within that range, you must consider all sample treatments (e.g., dilutions) to determine the mass of sample that needs to be collected to ensure that all sample analyses fall within your calibration curve.
8.2.2.1 Determination of Minimum Calibration Concentration or Mass. Based on your instrument's sensitivity and linearity, determine the calibration concentrations or masses that make up a representative low level calibration range. Verify that you are able to meet the multipoint calibration performance criteria in section 11.0 of this method. Select a calibration concentration or mass that is no less than 2 times the lowest concentration or mass in your calibration curve. The lowest point in your calibration curve must be at least 5, and preferably 10, times the Method Detection Limit (MDL), which is the minimum amount of the analyte that can be detected and reported. The MDL must be determined at least once for the analytical system using an MDL study such as that found in section 15.0 to Method 301 of appendix A to part 63 of this chapter.
8.2.2.2 Determination of Minimum Sample Mass. Based on your minimum calibration concentration or mass and other sample treatments including, but not limited to, final digestate volume and minimum sample dilution, determine the minimum sample mass. Consideration should also be given to the Hg levels expected to be measured in section 2 of the sorbent traps and to the breakthrough criteria presented in Table 9-1.
8.2.2.2.1 Example Determination of Minimum Sample Mass for Thermal Desorption Analysis. A thermal analysis system has been calibrated at five Hg mass levels: 10 ng, 20 ng, 50 ng, 100 ng, 200 ng, and shown to meet the calibration performance criteria in this method. Based on 2 times the lowest point in the calibration curve, 20 ng is selected as the minimum calibration mass. Because the entire sample is analyzed and there are no dilutions involved, the minimum sample mass is also 20 ng.
8.2.2.2.2 Example Determination of Minimum Sample Mass for Acid Leachate/Digestate Analysis. A cold vapor analysis system has been calibrated at four Hg concentration levels: 2 ng/L, 5 ng, 10 ng/L, 20 ng/L, and shown to meet the calibration performance criteria in this method. Based on 2 times the lowest point in the calibration curve, 4 ng/L was selected as the minimum calibration concentration. The final sample volume of a digestate is nominally 50 ml (0.05 L) and the minimum dilution necessary was determined to be 1:100 by the Analytical Matrix Interference Test of section 8.2.1. The following calculation would be used to determine the minimum sample mass.
Minimum sample mass = (4 ng/L) × (0.05 L) × (100) = 20 ng
8.2.3 Hg 0 and HgCl2 Analytical Bias Test. Before analyzing any field samples, the laboratory must demonstrate the ability to recover and accurately quantify Hg 0 and HgCl2 from the chosen sorbent media by performing the following analytical bias test for sorbent traps spiked with Hg 0 and HgCl2. The analytical bias test is performed at a minimum of two distinct sorbent trap Hg loadings that will: (1) Represent the lower and upper bound of sample Hg loadings for application of the analytical technique to the field samples, and (2) be used for data validation.
8.2.3.1 Hg 0 and HgCl2 Analytical Bias Test Procedures. Determine the lower and upper bound mass loadings. The minimum sample mass established in section 8.2.2.2 can be used for the lower bound Hg mass loading although lower Hg loading levels are acceptable. The upper bound Hg loading level should be an estimate of the greatest mass loading that may result as a function of stack concentration and volume sampled. As previously noted, this test defines the bounds that actual field samples must be within in order to be valid.
8.2.3.1.1 Hg 0 Analytical Bias Test. Analyze the front section of three sorbent traps containing Hg 0 at the lower bound mass loading level and the front section of three sorbent traps containing Hg 0 at the upper bound mass loading level. In other words, analyze each mass loading level in triplicate. You may refer to section 6.2 for spiking guidance. Prepare and analyze each spiked trap, using the same techniques that will be used to prepare and analyze the field samples. The average recovery for the three traps at each mass loading level must be between 90 and 110 percent. If multiple types of sorbent media are to be analyzed, a separate analytical bias test is required for each sorbent material.
8.2.3.1.2 HgCl2 Analytical Bias Test. Analyze the front section of three sorbent traps containing HgCl2 at the lower bound mass loading level and the front section of three traps containing HgCl2 at the upper bound mass loading level. HgCl2 can be spiked as a gas, or as a liquid solution containing HgCl2. However the liquid volume spiked must be <100 µL. Prepare and analyze each spiked trap, using the techniques that will be used to prepare and analyze the field samples. The average recovery for three traps at each spike concentration must be between 90 and 110 percent. Again, if multiple types of sorbent media are to be analyzed, a separate analytical bias test is required for each sorbent material.
8.2.4 Determination of Target Sample Volume. The target sample volume is an estimate of the sample volume needed to ensure that valid emissions data are collected (i.e., that sample mass Hg loadings fall within the analytical calibration curve and are within the upper and lower bounds set by the analytical bias tests). The target sample volume and minimum sample mass can also be determined by performing a diagnostic test run prior to initiation of formal testing.
If the minimum sample mass is 50 ng and the concentration of mercury in the stack gas is estimated to be 2 µg/m 3 (ng/L) then the following calculation would be used to determine the target sample volume:
Target Sample Volume = (50 ng) / (2 ng/L) = 25 L
8.2.5 Determination of Sample Run Time. Sample run time will be a function of minimum sample mass (see section 8.2.2), target sample volume and nominal equipment sample flow rate. The minimum sample run time for conducting relative accuracy test audits of Hg monitoring systems is 30 minutes and for emissions testing to characterize an emission source is 1 hour. The target sample run time can be calculated using the following example.
If the target sample volume has been determined to be 25 L, then the following formula would be used to determine the sampling time necessary to acquire 25 L of gas when sampling at a rate of 0.4 L/min.
Sampling time (min) = 25 L / 0.4 L/min = 63 minutes
8.2.6 Field Recovery Test. The field recovery test provides a test program-specific verification of the performance of the combined sampling and analytical approach. Three sets of paired samples, one of each pair which is spiked with a known level of Hg, are collected and analyzed and the average recovery of the spiked samples is used to verify performance of the measurement system under field conditions during that test program. The conduct of this test requires an estimate or confirmation of the stack Hg concentrations at the time of testing.
8.2.6.1 Calculation of Pre-sampling Spiking Level. Determine the sorbent trap spiking level for the field recovery test using estimates of the stack Hg concentration, the target sample flow rate, and the planned sample duration. First, determine the Hg mass expected to be collected in section 1 of the sorbent trap. The pre-sampling spike must be within 50 to 150 percent of this expected mass.
For an expected stack Hg concentration of 5 ug/m 3 (ng/L) a target sample rate of 0.40 liters/min, and a sample duration of 1 hour:
(0.40 L/min) * (60 min) * (5ng/L) = 120 ng
A Hg spike of 60 to 180 ng (50-150% of 120 ng) would be appropriate.
8.2.6.2 Procedures. Set up two identical sampling trains. One of the sampling trains shall be designated the spiked train and the other the unspiked train. Spike Hg 0 onto the front section of the sorbent trap in the spiked train before sampling. The mass of Hg spiked shall be 50 to 150 percent of the mass expected to be collected with the unspiked train. Sample the stack gas with the two trains simultaneously using the same procedures as for the field samples (see section 8.3). The total sample volume must be within ±20 percent of the target sample volume for the field sample test runs. Analyze the sorbent traps from the two trains utilizing the same analytical procedures and instrumentation as for the field samples (see section 11.0). Determine the fraction of spiked Hg recovered (R) using the equations in section 12.7. Repeat this procedure for a total of three runs. Report the individual R values in the test report; the average of the three R values must be between 85 and 115 percent.
8.3 Sampling. This section describes the procedures and criteria for collecting the field samples for analysis. As noted in section 8.2.6, the field recovery test samples are also collected using these procedures.
8.3.1 Pre-test leak check. Perform a leak check of the sampling system with the sorbent traps in place. For each of the paired sampling trains, draw a vacuum in the train, and adjust the vacuum to ∼15″ Hg; and, using the gas flow meter, determine leak rate. The leak rate for an individual train must not exceed 4 percent of the target sampling rate. Once the leak check passes this criterion, carefully release the vacuum in the sample train, then seal the sorbent trap inlet until the probe is ready for insertion into the stack or duct.
8.3.2 Determination of Flue Gas Characteristics. Determine or measure the flue gas measurement environment characteristics (gas temperature, static pressure, gas velocity, stack moisture, etc.) in order to determine ancillary requirements such as probe heating requirements (if any), initial sampling rate, moisture management, etc.
8.3.3 Sample Collection
8.3.3.1 Remove the plug from the end of each sorbent trap and store each plug in a clean sorbent trap storage container. Remove the stack or duct port cap and insert the probe(s). Secure the probe(s) and ensure that no leakage occurs between the duct and environment.
8.3.3.2 Record initial data including the sorbent trap ID, date, and the run start time.
8.3.3.3 Record the initial gas flow meter reading, stack temperature, meter temperatures (if needed), and any other appropriate information, before beginning sampling. Begin sampling and target a sampling flow rate similar to that for the field recovery test. Then, at regular intervals (≤5 minutes) during the sampling period, record the date and time, the sample flow rate, the gas meter reading, the stack temperature, the flow meter temperatures (if using a dry gas meter), temperatures of heated equipment such as the vacuum lines and the probes (if heated), and the sampling system vacuum readings. Adjust the sampling flow rate as necessary to maintain the initial sample flow rate. Ensure that the total volume sampled for each run is within 20 percent of the total volume sampled for the field recovery test.
8.3.3.4 Data Recording. Obtain and record any essential operating data for the facility during the test period, e.g., the barometric pressure must be obtained for correcting sample volume to standard conditions when using a dry gas meter. At the end of the data collection period, record the final gas flow meter reading and the final values of all other essential parameters.
8.3.3.5 Post-Test Leak Check. When sampling is completed, turn off the sample pump, remove the probe(s) with sorbent traps from the port, and carefully seal the end of each sorbent trap. Perform another leak check of each sampling train with the sorbent trap in place, at the maximum vacuum reached during the sampling period. Record the leakage rates and vacuums. The leakage rate for each train must not exceed 4 percent of the average sampling rate for the data collection period. Following each leak check, carefully release the vacuum in the sample train.
8.3.3.6 Sample Recovery. Recover each sampled sorbent trap by removing it from the probe and sealing both ends. Wipe any deposited material from the outside of the sorbent trap. Place the sorbent trap into an appropriate sample storage container and store/preserve in appropriate manner (see section 8.3.3.8).
8.3.3.7 Stack Gas Moisture Determination. If the moisture basis of the measurements made with this method (dry) is different from the moisture basis of either: (1) the applicable emission limit; or (2) a Hg CEMS being evaluated for relative accuracy, you must determine the moisture content of the flue gas and correct for moisture using Method 4 in appendix A-3 to this part. If correction of the measured Hg concentrations for moisture is required, at least one Method 4 moisture determination shall be made during each test run.
8.3.3.8 Sample Handling, Preservation, Storage, and Transport. While the performance criteria of this approach provides for verification of appropriate sample handling, it is still important that the user consider, determine and plan for suitable sample preservation, storage, transport, and holding times for these measurements. Therefore, procedures in ASTM D6911-15 “Standard Guide for Packaging and Shipping Environmental Samples for Laboratory Analysis” (incorporated by reference-see 40 CFR 60.17) shall be followed for all samples, where appropriate. To avoid Hg contamination of the samples, special attention should be paid to cleanliness during transport, field handling, sampling, recovery, and laboratory analysis, as well as during preparation of the sorbent cartridges. Collection and analysis of blank samples (e.g., reagent, sorbent, field, etc.) is useful in verifying the absence or source of contaminant Hg.
8.3.3.9 Sample Custody. Proper procedures and documentation for sample chain of custody are critical to ensuring data integrity. The chain of custody procedures in ASTM D4840-99 “Standard Guide for Sampling Chain-of-Custody Procedures” shall be followed for all samples (including field samples and blanks).
9.0 Quality Assurance and Quality Control
Table 9-1 summarizes the QA/QC performance criteria that are used to validate the Hg emissions data from Method 30B sorbent trap measurement systems.
| QA/QC test or specification | Acceptance criteria | Frequency | Consequences if not met |
|---|---|---|---|
| Gas flow meter calibration (At 3 settings or points) | Calibration factor (Yi) at each flow rate must be within ±2% of the average value (Y) | Prior to initial use and when post-test check is not within ±5% of Y | Recalibrate at 3 points until the acceptance criteria are met. |
| Gas flow meter post-test calibration check (Single-point) | Calibration factor (Yi) must be within ±5% of the Y value from the most recent 3-point calibration | After each field test. For mass flow meters, must be done on-site, using stack gas | Recalibrate gas flow meter at 3 points to determine a new value of Y. For mass flow meters, must be done on-site, using stack gas. Apply the new Y value to the field test data. |
| Temperature sensor calibration | Absolute temperature measures by sensor within ±1.5% of a reference sensor | Prior to initial use and before each test thereafter | Recalibrate; sensor may not be used until specification is met. |
| Barometer calibration | Absolute pressure measured by instrument within ±10 mm Hg of reading with a mercury barometer or NIST traceable barometer | Prior to initial use and before each test thereafter | Recalibrate; instrument may not be used until specification is met. |
| Pre-test leak check | ≤4% of target sampling rate | Prior to sampling | Sampling shall not commence until the leak check is passed. |
| Post-test leak check | ≤4% of average sampling rate | After sampling | Sample invalidated.* |
| Analytical matrix interference test (wet chemical analysis, only) | Establish minimum dilution (if any) needed to eliminate sorbent matrix interferences | Prior to analyzing any field samples; repeat for each type of sorbent used | Field sample results not validated. |
| Analytical bias test | Average recovery between 90% and 110% for Hg0 and HgCl2 at each of the 2 spike concentration levels | Prior to analyzing field samples and prior to use of new sorbent media | Field samples shall not be analyzed until the percent recovery criteria has been met. |
| Multipoint analyzer calibration | Each analyzer reading within ±10% of true value and r2≥0.99 | On the day of analysis, before analyzing any samples | Recalibrate until successful. |
| Analysis of independent calibration standard | Within ±10% of true value | Following daily calibration, prior to analyzing field samples | Recalibrate and repeat independent standard analysis until successful. |
| Analysis of continuing calibration verification standard (CCVS) | Within ±10% of true value | Following daily calibration, after analyzing ≤10 field samples, and at end of each set of analyses | Recalibrate and repeat independent standard analysis, reanalyze samples until successful, if possible; for destructive techniques, samples invalidated. |
| Test run total sample volume | Within ±20% of total volume sampled during field recovery test | Each individual sample | Sample invalidated. |
| Sorbent trap section 2 breakthrough | For compliance/emissions testing: | Every sample | Sample invalidated.* |
| ≤10% of section 1 Hg mass for Hg concentrations >1 µg/dscm; | |||
| ≤20% of section 1 Hg mass for Hg concentrations ≤1 µg/dscm | |||
| ≤50% of section 1 Hg mass if the stack Hg concentration is ≤30% of the Hg concentration that is equivalent to the applicable emission limit | |||
| For relative accuracy testing: | |||
| ≤10% of section 1 Hg mass for Hg concentrations >1 µg/dscm; | |||
| ≤20% of section 1 Hg mass for Hg concentrations ≤1 µg/dscm and >0.5 µg/dscm; | |||
| ≤50% of section 1 Hg mass for Hg concentrations ≤0.5 µg/dscm >0.1 µg/dscm; | |||
| no criterion for Hg concentrations ≤0.1 µg/dscm (must meet all other QA/QC specifications) | |||
| Paired sorbent trap agreement | ≤10% Relative Deviation (RD) mass for Hg concentrations >1 µg/dscm; | Every run | Run invalidated.* |
| ≤20% RD or ≤0.2 µg/dscm absolute difference for Hg concentrations ≤1 µg/dscm | |||
| Sample analysis | Within valid calibration range (within calibration curve) | All Section 1 samples where stack Hg concentration is ≥0.02 µg/dscm except in case where stack Hg concentration is ≤30% of the applicable emission limit | Reanalyze at more concentrated level if possible, samples invalidated if not within calibrated range. |
| Sample analysis | Within bounds of Hg0 and HgCl2 Analytical Bias Test | All Section 1 samples where stack Hg concentration is ≥0.5 µg/dscm | Expand bounds of Hg0 and HgCl2 Analytical Bias Test; if not successful, samples invalidated. |
| Field recovery test | Average recovery between 85% and 115% for Hg0 | Once per field test | Field sample runs not validated without successful field recovery test. |
| * And data from the pair of sorbent traps are also invalidated. |
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
10.1 Only NIST-certified and NIST-traceable calibration standards (i.e., calibration gases, solutions, etc.) shall be used for the spiking and analytical procedures in this method.
10.2 Gas Flow Meter Calibration.
10.2.1 Preliminaries. The manufacturer or equipment supplier of the gas flow meter should perform all necessary set-up, testing, programming, etc., and should provide the end user with any necessary instructions, to ensure that the meter will give an accurate readout of dry gas volume in standard cubic meters for this method.
10.2.2 Initial Calibration. Prior to its initial use, a calibration of the gas flow meter shall be performed. The initial calibration may be done by the manufacturer, by the equipment supplier, or by the end user. If the flow meter is volumetric in nature (e.g., a dry gas meter), the manufacturer or end user may perform a direct volumetric calibration using any gas. For a mass flow meter, the manufacturer, equipment supplier, or end user may calibrate the meter using either: (1) A bottled gas mixture containing 12 ±0.5% CO2, 7 ±0.5% O2, and balance N2 (when this method is applied to coal-fired boilers); (2) a bottled gas mixture containing CO2, O2, and N2 in proportions representative of the expected stack gas composition; or (3) the actual stack gas.
10.2.2.1 Initial Calibration Procedures. Determine an average calibration factor (Y) for the gas flow meter by calibrating it at three sample flow rate settings covering the range of sample flow rates at which the sampling system will be operated. You may either follow the procedures in section 10.3.1 of Method 5 in appendix A-3 to this part or in section 16 of Method 5 in appendix A-3 to this part. If a dry gas meter is being calibrated, use at least five revolutions of the meter at each flow rate.
10.2.2.2 Alternative Initial Calibration Procedures. Alternatively, you may perform the initial calibration of the gas flow meter using a reference gas flow meter (RGFM). The RGFM may be: (1) A wet test meter calibrated according to section 10.3.1 of Method 5 in appendix A-3 to this part; (2) a gas flow metering device calibrated at multiple flow rates using the procedures in section 16 of Method 5 in appendix A-3 to this part; or (3) a NIST-traceable calibration device capable of measuring volumetric flow to an accuracy of 1 percent. To calibrate the gas flow meter using the RGFM, proceed as follows: While the Method 30B sampling system is sampling the actual stack gas or a compressed gas mixture that simulates the stack gas composition (as applicable), connect the RGFM to the discharge of the system. Care should be taken to minimize the dead volume between the gas flow meter being tested and the RGFM. Concurrently measure dry stack gas volume with the RGFM and the flow meter being calibrated for at least 10 minutes at each of three flow rates covering the typical range of operation of the sampling system. For each set of concurrent measurements, record the total sample volume, in units of dry standard cubic meters (dscm), measured by the RGFM and the gas flow meter being tested.
10.2.2.3 Initial Calibration Factor. Calculate an individual calibration factor Yi at each tested flow rate from section 10.2.2.1 or 10.2.2.2 of this method (as applicable) by taking the ratio of the reference sample volume to the sample volume recorded by the gas flow meter. Average the three Yi values, to determine Y, the calibration factor for the flow meter. Each of the three individual values of Yi must be within ±0.02 of Y. Except as otherwise provided in sections 10.2.2.4 and 10.2.2.5 of this method, use the average Y value from the initial 3-point calibration to adjust subsequent gas volume measurements made with the gas flow meter.
10.2.2.4 Pretest On-Site Calibration Check (Optional). For a mass flow meter, if the most recent 3-point calibration of the flow meter was performed using a compressed gas mixture, you may want to conduct the following on-site calibration check prior to testing, to ensure that the flow meter will accurately measure the volume of the stack gas: While sampling stack gas, check the calibration of the flow meter at one intermediate flow rate setting representative of normal operation of the sampling system. If the pretest calibration check shows that the value of Yi, the calibration factor at the tested flow rate, differs from the current value of Y by more than 5 percent, perform a full 3-point recalibration of the meter using stack gas to determine a new value of Y, and (except as otherwise provided in section 10.2.2.5 of this method) apply the new Y value to the data recorded during the field test.
10.2.2.5 Post-Test Calibration Check. Check the calibration of the gas flow meter following each field test at one intermediate flow rate setting, either at, or in close proximity to, the average sample flow rate during the field test. For dry gas meters, ensure at least three revolutions of the meter during the calibration check. For mass flow meters, this check must be performed before leaving the test site, while sampling stack gas. If a one-point calibration check shows that the value of Yi at the tested flow rate differs by more than 5 percent from the current value of Y, repeat the full 3-point calibration procedure to determine a new value of Y, and apply the new Y value to the gas volume measurements made with the gas flow meter during the field test that was just completed. For mass flow meters, perform the 3-point recalibration while sampling stack gas.
10.3 Thermocouples and Other Temperature Sensors. Use the procedures and criteria in Section 10.3 of Method 2 in appendix A-1 to this part to calibrate in-stack temperature sensors and thermocouples. Dial thermometers shall be calibrated against mercury-in-glass thermometers or equivalent. Calibrations must be performed prior to initial use and before each field test thereafter. At each calibration point, the absolute temperature measured by the temperature sensor must agree to within ±1.5 percent of the temperature measured with the reference sensor, otherwise the sensor may not continue to be used.
10.4 Barometer. Calibrate against a mercury barometer or other NIST-traceable barometer as per Section 10.6 of Method 5 in appendix A-3 to this part. Calibration must be performed prior to initial use and before each test program, and the absolute pressure measured by the barometer must agree to within ±10 mm Hg of the pressure measured by the mercury or other NIST-traceable barometer, otherwise the barometer may not continue to be used.
10.5 Other Sensors and Gauges. Calibrate all other sensors and gauges according to the procedures specified by the instrument manufacturer(s).
10.6 Analytical System Calibration. See section 11.1 of this method.
11.0 Analytical Procedures
The analysis of Hg in the field and quality control samples may be conducted using any instrument or technology capable of quantifying total Hg from the sorbent media and meeting the performance criteria in this method. Because multiple analytical approaches, equipment and techniques are appropriate for the analysis of sorbent traps, it is not possible to provide detailed, technique-specific analytical procedures. As they become available, detailed procedures for a variety of candidate analytical approaches will be posted at http://www.epa.gov/ttn/emc.
11.1 Analytical System Calibration. Perform a multipoint calibration of the analyzer at three or more upscale points over the desired quantitative range (multiple calibration ranges shall be calibrated, if necessary). The field samples analyzed must fall within a calibrated, quantitative range and meet the performance criteria specified below. For samples suitable for aliquotting, a series of dilutions may be needed to ensure that the samples fall within a calibrated range. However, for sorbent media samples consumed during analysis (e.g., when using thermal desorption techniques), extra care must be taken to ensure that the analytical system is appropriately calibrated prior to sample analysis. The calibration curve range(s) should be determined such that the levels of Hg mass expected to be collected and measured will fall within the calibrated range. The calibration curve may be generated by directly introducing standard solutions into the analyzer or by spiking the standards onto the sorbent media and then introducing into the analyzer after preparing the sorbent/standard according to the particular analytical technique. For each calibration curve, the value of the square of the linear correlation coefficient, i.e., r 2, must be ≥0.99, and the analyzer response must be within ±10 percent of the reference value at each upscale calibration point. Calibrations must be performed on the day of the analysis, before analyzing any of the samples. Following calibration, an independent standard shall be analyzed. The measured value of the independently prepared standard must be within ±10 percent of the expected value.
11.2 Sample Preparation. Carefully separate the sections of each sorbent trap. Combine for analysis all materials associated with each section; any supporting substrate that the sample gas passes through prior to entering a media section (e.g., glass wool separators, acid gas traps, etc.) must be analyzed with that segment.
11.3 Field Sample Analyses. Analyze the sorbent trap samples following the same procedures that were used for conducting the Hg 0 and HgCl2 analytical bias tests. The individual sections of the sorbent trap and their respective components must be analyzed separately (i.e., section 1 and its components, then section 2 and its components). All sorbent trap section 1 sample analyses must be within the calibrated range of the analytical system as specified in Table 9-1. For wet analyses, the sample can simply be diluted to fall within the calibrated range. However, for the destructive thermal analyses, samples that are not within the calibrated range cannot be re-analyzed. As a result, the sample cannot be validated, and another sample must be collected. It is strongly suggested that the analytical system be calibrated over multiple ranges so that thermally analyzed samples fall within the calibrated range. The total mass of Hg measured in each sorbent trap section 1 must also fall within the lower and upper mass limits established during the initial Hg 0 and HgCl2 analytical bias test. If a sample is analyzed and found to fall outside of these limits, it is acceptable for an additional Hg 0 and HgCl2 analytical bias test to be performed that now includes this level. However, some samples (e.g., the mass collected in trap section 2), may have Hg levels so low that it may not be possible to quantify them in the analytical system's calibrated range. Because a reliable estimate of these low-level Hg measurements is necessary to fully validate the emissions data, the MDL (see section 8.2.2.1 of this method) is used to establish the minimum amount that can be detected and reported. If the measured mass or concentration is below the lowest point in the calibration curve and above the MDL, the analyst must estimate the mass or concentration of the sample based on the analytical instrument response relative to an additional calibration standard at a concentration or mass between the MDL and the lowest point in the calibration curve. This is accomplished by establishing a response factor (e.g., area counts per Hg mass or concentration) and estimating the amount of Hg present in the sample based on the analytical response and this response factor.
The analysis of a particular sample results in a measured mass above the MDL, but below the lowest point in the calibration curve which is 10 ng. An MDL of 1.3 ng Hg has been established by the MDL study. A calibration standard containing 5 ng of Hg is analyzed and gives an analytical response of 6,170 area counts, which equates to a response factor of 1,234 area counts/ng Hg. The analytical response for the sample is 4,840 area counts. Dividing the analytical response for the sample (4,840 area counts) by the response factor gives 3.9 ng Hg, which is the estimated mass of Hg in the sample.
11.4 Analysis of Continuing Calibration Verification Standard (CCVS). After no more than 10 samples and at the end of each set of analyses, a continuing calibration verification standard must be analyzed. The measured value of the continuing calibration standard must be within ±10 percent of the expected value.
11.5 Blanks. The analysis of blanks is optional. The analysis of blanks is useful to verify the absence of, or an acceptable level of, Hg contamination. Blank levels should be considered when quantifying low Hg levels and their potential contribution to meeting the sorbent trap section 2 breakthrough requirements; however, correcting sorbent trap results for blank levels is prohibited.
12.0 Calculations and Data Analysis
You must follow the procedures for calculation and data analysis listed in this section.
12.1 Nomenclature. The terms used in the equations are defined as follows:
B = Breakthrough (%).
Bws = Moisture content of sample gas as measured by Method 4, percent/100.
Ca = Concentration of Hg for the sample collection period, for sorbent trap “a” (µg/dscm).
Cb = Concentration of Hg for the sample collection period, for sorbent trap “b” (µg/dscm).
Cd = Hg concentration, dry basis (µg/dscm).
Crec = Concentration of spiked compound measured (µg/m 3).
Cw = Hg concentration, wet basis (µg/m 3).
m1 = Mass of Hg measured on sorbent trap section 1 (µg).
m2 = Mass of Hg measured on sorbent trap section 2 (µg).
mrecovered = Mass of spiked Hg recovered in Analytical Bias or Field Recovery Test (µg).
ms = Total mass of Hg measured on spiked trap in Field Recovery Test (µg).
mspiked = Mass of Hg spiked in Analytical Bias or Field Recovery Test (µg).
mu = Total mass of Hg measured on unspiked trap in Field Recovery Test (µg).
R = Percentage of spiked mass recovered (%).
RD = Relative deviation between the Hg concentrations from traps “a” and “b” (%).
vs = Volume of gas sampled, spiked trap in Field Recovery Test (dscm).
Vt = Total volume of dry gas metered during the collection period (dscm); for the purposes of this method, standard temperature and pressure are defined as 20 °C and 760 mm Hg, respectively.
vu = Volume of gas sampled, unspiked trap in Field Recovery Test (dscm).
12.2 Calculation of Spike Recovery (Analytical Bias Test). Calculate the percent recovery of Hg 0 and HgCl2 using Equation 30B-1.
12.3 Calculation of Breakthrough. Use Equation 30B-2 to calculate the percent breakthrough to the second section of the sorbent trap.
12.4 Calculation of Hg Concentration. Calculate the Hg concentration measured with sorbent trap “a”, using Equation 30B-3.
For sorbent trap “b”, replace “Ca ” with “Cb ” in Equation 30B-3. Report the average concentration, i.e., 1/2 (Ca + Cb).
12.5 Moisture Correction. Use Equation 30B-4 if your measurements need to be corrected to a wet basis.
12.6 Calculation of Paired Trap Agreement. Calculate the relative deviation (RD) between the Hg concentrations measured with the paired sorbent traps using Equation 30B-5.
12.7 Calculation of Measured Spike Hg Concentration (Field Recovery Test). Calculate the measured spike concentration using Equation 30B-6.
Then calculate the spiked Hg recovery, R, using Equation 30B-7.
13.0 Method Performance
How do I validate my data? Measurement data are validated using initial, one-time laboratory tests coupled with test program-specific tests and procedures. The analytical matrix interference test and the Hg 0 and HgCl2 analytical bias test described in section 8.2 are used to verify the appropriateness of the selected analytical approach(es) as well as define the valid working ranges for sample analysis. The field recovery test serves to verify the performance of the combined sampling and analysis as applied for each test program. Field test samples are validated by meeting the above requirements as well as meeting specific sampling requirements (i.e., leak checks, paired train agreement, total sample volume agreement with field recovery test samples) and analytical requirements (i.e., valid calibration curve, continuing calibration performance, sample results within calibration curve and bounds of Hg 0 and HgCl2 analytical bias test). Complete data validation requirements are summarized in Table 9-1.
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 References
1. EPA Traceability Protocol for Qualification and Certification of Elemental Mercury Gas Generators, expected publication date December 2008, see www.epa.gov/ttn/emc.
2. EPA Traceability Protocol for Qualification and Certification of Oxidized Mercury Gas Generators, expected publication date December 2008, see www.epa.gov/ttn/emc.
3. EPA Traceability Protocol for Assay and Certification of Gaseous Calibration Standards, expected revision publication date December 2008, see www.epa.gov/ttn/emc.
17.0 Figures and Tables
[36 FR 24877, Dec. 23, 1971]
Appendix B to Part 60—Performance Specifications
Performance Specification 1—Specifications and test procedures for continuous opacity monitoring systems in stationary sources
Performance Specification 2—Specifications and Test Procedures for SO2 and NOX Continuous Emission Monitoring Systems in Stationary Sources
Performance Specification 3—Specifications and Test Procedures for O2 and CO2 Continuous Emission Monitoring Systems in Stationary Sources
Performance Specification 4—Specifications and Test Procedures for Carbon Monoxide Continuous Emission Monitoring Systems in Stationary Sources
Performance Specification 4A—Specifications and Test Procedures for Carbon Monoxide Continuous Emission Monitoring Systems in Stationary Sources
Performance Specification 4B—Specifications and Test Procedures for Carbon Monoxide and Oxygen Continuous Monitoring Systems in Stationary Sources
Performance Specification 5—Specifications and Test Procedures for TRS Continuous Emission Monitoring Systems in Stationary Sources
Performance Specification 6—Specifications and Test Procedures for Continuous Emission Rate Monitoring Systems in Stationary Sources
Performance Specification 7—Specifications and Test Procedures for Hydrogen Sulfide Continuous Emission Monitoring Systems in Stationary Sources
Performance Specification 8—Performance Specifications for Volatile Organic Compound Continuous Emission Monitoring Systems in Stationary Sources
Performance Specification 8A—Specifications and Test Procedures for Total Hydrocarbon Continuous Monitoring Systems in Stationary Sources
Performance Specification 9—Specifications and Test Procedures for Gas Chromatographic Continuous Emission Monitoring Systems in Stationary Sources
Performance Specification 11—Specifications and Test Procedures for Particulate Matter Continuous Emission Monitoring Systems at Stationary Sources
Performance Specification 12A—Specifications and Text Procedures for Total Vapor Phase Mercury Continuous Emission Monitoring Systems in Stationary Sources
Performance Specification 12B—Specifications and Test Procedures for Monitoring Total Vapor Phase Mercury Emissions From Stationary Sources Using A Sorbent Trap Monitoring System
Performance Specification 15—Performance Specification for Extractive FTIR Continuous Emissions Monitor Systems in Stationary Sources
Performance Specification 16—Specifications and Test Procedures for Predictive Emission Monitoring Systems in Stationary Sources
Performance Specification 17 [Reserved]
Performance Specification 18—Performance Specifications and Test Procedures for Gaseous Hydrogen Chloride (HCl) Continuous Emission Monitoring Systems at Stationary Sources
PS-18—Appendix A Standard Addition Procedures
Performance Specification 19—Performance Specifications and Test Procedures for Ethylene Oxide (ETO) Continuous Emission Monitoring Systems
Performance Specification 1—Specifications and Test Procedures for Continuous Opacity Monitoring Systems in Stationary Sources
1.0 What Is the Purpose and Applicability of Performance Specification 1?
Performance Specification 1 (PS-1) provides (1) requirements for the design, performance, and installation of a continuous opacity monitoring system (COMS) and (2) data computation procedures for evaluating the acceptability of a COMS. It specifies activities for two groups (1) the owner or operator and (2) the opacity monitor manufacturer.
1.1 Measurement Parameter. PS-1 covers the instrumental measurement of opacity caused by attenuation of projected light due to absorption and scatter of the light by particulate matter in the effluent gas stream.
1.2 What COMS must comply with PS-1? If you are an owner or operator of a facility with a COMS as a result of this Part, then PS-1 applies to your COMS if one of the following is true:
(1) Your facility has a new COMS installed after February 6, 2001; or
(2) Your COMS is replaced, relocated, or substantially refurbished (in the opinion of the regulatory authority) after February 6, 2001; or
(3) Your COMS was installed before February 6, 2001 and is specifically required by regulatory action other than the promulgation of PS-1 to be recertified.
If you are an opacity monitor manufacturer, then paragraph 8.2 applies to you.
1.3 Does PS-1 apply to a facility with an applicable opacity limit less than 10 percent? If you are an owner or operator of a facility with a COMS as a result of this Part and the applicable opacity limit is less than 10 percent, then PS-1 applies to your COMS as described in section 1.2; taking into account (through statistical procedures or otherwise) the uncertainties associated with opacity measurements, and following the conditions for attenuators selection for low opacity applications as outlined in section 8.1(3)(ii). At your option, you, the source owner or operator, may select to establish a reduced full scale range of no less than 50 percent opacity instead of the 80 percent as prescribed in section 3.5, if the applicable opacity limit for your facility is less than 10 percent. The EPA recognizes that reducing the range of the analyzer to 50 percent does not necessarily result in any measurable improvement in measurement accuracy at opacity levels less than 10 percent; however, it may allow improved chart recorder interpretation.
1.4 What data uncertainty issues apply to COMS data? The measurement uncertainties associated with COMS data result from several design and performance factors including limitations on the availability of calibration attenuators for opacities less than about 6 percent (3 percent for single-pass instruments), calibration error tolerances, zero and upscale drift tolerances, and allowance for dust compensation that are significant relative to low opacity levels. The full scale requirements of this PS may also contribute to measurement uncertainty for opacity measurements where the applicable limits are below 10 percent opacity.
2.0 What Are the Basic Requirements of PS-1?
PS-1 requires (1) opacity monitor manufacturers comply with a comprehensive series of design and performance specifications and test procedures to certify opacity monitoring equipment before shipment to the end user, (2) the owner or operator to follow installation guidelines, and (3) the owner or operator to conduct a set of field performance tests that confirm the acceptability of the COMS after it is installed.
2.1 ASTM D6216-20 (IBR, see § 60.17) is the reference for design specifications, manufacturer's performance specifications, and test procedures. The opacity monitor manufacturer must periodically select and test an opacity monitor, that is representative of a group of monitors produced during a specified period or lot, for conformance with the design specifications in ASTM D6216-20. The opacity monitor manufacturer must test each opacity monitor for conformance with the manufacturer's performance specifications in ASTM D6216-20. Note: If the initial certification of the opacity monitor occurred before May 30, 2023, using D6216-98, D6216-03, D6216-07, or D6216-12, it is not necessary to recertify using D6216-20.
2.2 section 8.1(2) provides guidance for locating an opacity monitor in vertical and horizontal ducts. You are encouraged to seek approval for the opacity monitor location from the appropriate regulatory authority prior to installation.
2.3 After the COMS is installed and calibrated, the owner or operator must test the COMS for conformance with the field performance specifications in PS-1.
3.0 What Special Definitions Apply to PS-1?
3.1 All definitions and discussions from section 3 of ASTM D6216-20 are applicable to PS-1.
3.2 Centroid Area. A concentric area that is geometrically similar to the stack or duct cross-section and is no greater than 1 percent of the stack or duct cross-sectional area.
3.3 Data Recorder. That portion of the installed COMS that provides a permanent record of the opacity monitor output in terms of opacity. The data recorder may include automatic data reduction capabilities.
3.4 External Audit Device. The inherent design, equipment, or accommodation of the opacity monitor allowing the independent assessment of the COMS's calibration and operation.
3.5 Full Scale. The maximum data display output of the COMS. For purposes of recordkeeping and reporting, full scale will be greater than 80 percent opacity.
3.6 Operational Test Period. A period of time (168 hours) during which the COMS is expected to operate within the established performance specifications without any unscheduled maintenance, repair, or adjustment.
3.7 Primary Attenuators. Those devices (glass or grid filter that reduce the transmission of light) calibrated according to procedures in section 7.1.
3.8 Secondary Attenuators. Those devices (glass or grid filter that reduce the transmission of light) calibrated against primary attenuators according to procedures in section 7.2.
3.9 System Response Time. The amount of time the COMS takes to display 95 percent of a step change in opacity on the COMS data recorder.
4.0 Interferences. Water Droplets
5.0 What Do I Need To Know To Ensure the Safety of Persons Using PS-1?
The procedures required under PS-1 may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. PS-1 does not purport to address all of the safety problems associated with these procedures. Before performing these procedures, you must establish appropriate safety and health practices, and you must determine the applicable regulatory limitations. You should consult the COMS user's manual for specific precautions to take.
6.0 What Equipment and Supplies Do I Need?
6.1 Continuous Opacity Monitoring System. You, as owner or operator, are responsible for purchasing an opacity monitor that meets the specifications of ASTM D6216-20, including a suitable data recorder or automated data acquisition handling system. Example data recorders include an analog strip chart recorder or more appropriately an electronic data acquisition and reporting system with an input signal range compatible with the analyzer output.
6.2 Calibration Attenuators. You, as owner or operator, are responsible for purchasing a minimum of three calibration attenuators that meet the requirements of PS-1. Calibration attenuators are optical filters with neutral spectral characteristics. Calibration attenuators must meet the requirements in section 7 and must be of sufficient size to attenuate the entire light beam received by the detector of the COMS. For transmissometers operating over a narrow bandwidth (e.g., laser), a calibration attenuator's value is determined for the actual operating wavelengths of the transmissometer. Some filters may not be uniform across the face. If errors result in the daily calibration drift or calibration error test, you may want to examine the across-face uniformity of the filter.
6.3 Calibration Spectrophotometer. Whoever calibrates the attenuators must have a spectrophotometer that meets the following minimum design specifications:
| Parameter | Specification |
|---|---|
| Wavelength range | 300-800 nm. |
| Detector angle of view | <10°. |
| Accuracy | <0.5% transmittance, NIST traceable calibration. |
7.0 What Reagents and Standards Do I Need?
You will need to use attenuators (i.e., neutral density filters) to check the daily calibration drift and calibration error of a COMS. Attenuators are designated as either primary or secondary based on how they are calibrated.
7.1 Attenuators are designated primary in one of two ways:
(1) They are calibrated by NIST; or
(2) They are calibrated on a 6-month frequency through the assignment of a luminous transmittance value in the following manner:
(i) Use a spectrophotometer meeting the specifications of section 6.3 to calibrate the required filters. Verify the spectrophotometer calibration through use of a NIST 930D Standard Reference Material (SRM). A SRM 930D consists of three neutral density glass filters and a blank, each mounted in a cuvette. The wavelengths and temperature to be used in the calibration are listed on the NIST certificate that accompanies the reported values. Determine and record a transmittance of the SRM values at the NIST wavelengths (three filters at five wavelengths each for a total of 15 determinations). Calculate a percent difference between the NIST certified values and the spectrophotometer response. At least 12 of the 15 differences (in percent) must be within ±0.5 percent of the NIST SRM values. No difference can be greater than ±1.0 percent. Recalibrate the SRM or service the spectrophotometer if the calibration results fail the criteria.
(ii) Scan the filter to be tested and the NIST blank from wavelength 380 to 780 nm, and record the spectrophotometer percent transmittance responses at 10 nm intervals. Test in this sequence: blank filter, tested filter, tested filter rotated 90 degrees in the plane of the filter, blank filter. Calculate the average transmittance at each 10 nm interval. If any pair of the tested filter transmittance values (for the same filter and wavelength) differ by more than ±0.25 percent, rescan the tested filter. If the filter fails to achieve this tolerance, do not use the filter in the calibration tests of the COMS.
(iii) Correct the tested filter transmittance values by dividing the average tested filter transmittance by the average blank filter transmittance at each 10 nm interval.
(iv) Calculate the weighted (to the response of the human eye), tested filter transmittance by multiplying the transmittance value by the corresponding response factor shown in table 1-1, to obtain the Source C Human Eye Response.
(v) Recalibrate the primary attenuators semi-annually if they are used for the required calibration error test. Recalibrate the primary attenuators annually if they are used only for calibration of secondary attenuators.
7.2 Attenuators are designated secondary if the filter calibration is done using a laboratory-based transmissometer. Conduct the secondary attenuator calibration using a laboratory-based transmissometer calibrated as follows:
(i) Use at least three primary filters of nominal luminous transmittance 50, 70 and 90 percent, calibrated as specified in section 7.1(2)(i), to calibrate the laboratory-based transmissometer. Determine and record the slope of the calibration line using linear regression through zero opacity. The slope of the calibration line must be between 0.99 and 1.01, and the laboratory-based transmissometer reading for each primary filter must not deviate by more than ±2 percent from the linear regression line. If the calibration of the laboratory-based transmissometer yields a slope or individual readings outside the specified ranges, secondary filter calibrations cannot be performed. Determine the source of the variations (either transmissometer performance or changes in the primary filters) and repeat the transmissometer calibration before proceeding with the attenuator calibration.
(ii) Immediately following the laboratory-based transmissometer calibration, insert the secondary attenuators and determine and record the percent effective opacity value per secondary attenuator from the calibration curve (linear regression line).
(iii) Recalibrate the secondary attenuators semi-annually if they are used for the required calibration error test.
8.0 What Performance Procedures Are Required To Comply With PS-1?
Procedures to verify the performance of the COMS are divided into those completed by the owner or operator and those completed by the opacity monitor manufacturer.
8.1 What procedures must I follow as the Owner or Operator?
(1) You must purchase an opacity monitor that complies with ASTM D6216-20 and obtain a certificate of conformance from the opacity monitor manufacturer.
(2) You must install the opacity monitor at a location where the opacity measurements are representative of the total emissions from the affected facility. You must meet this requirement by choosing a measurement location and a light beam path as follows:
(i) Measurement Location. Select a measurement location that is (1) at least 4 duct diameters downstream from all particulate control equipment or flow disturbance, (2) at least 2 duct diameters upstream of a flow disturbance, (3) where condensed water vapor is not present, and (4) accessible in order to permit maintenance. Alternatively, you may select a measurement location specified in paragraph 8.1(2)(ii) or 8.1(2)(iii).
(ii) Light Beam Path. Select a light beam path that passes through the centroidal area of the stack or duct. Also, you must follow these additional requirements or modifications for these measurement locations:
| If your measurement location is in a: | And is: | Then use a light beam path that is: |
|---|---|---|
| 1. Straight vertical section of stack or duct | Less than 4 equivalent diameters downstream from a bend | In the plane defined by the upstream bend (see figure 1-1). |
| 2. Straight vertical section of stack or duct | Less than 4 equivalent diameters upstream from a bend | In the plane defined by the downstream bend (see figure 1-2). |
| 3. Straight vertical section of stack or duct | Less than 4 equivalent diameters downstream and is also less than 1 diameter upstream from a bend | In the plane defined by the upstream bend (see figure 1-3). |
| 4. Horizontal section of stack or duct | At least 4 equivalent diameters downstream from a vertical bend | In the horizontal plane that is between 1/3 and 1/2 the distance up the vertical axis from the bottom of the duct (see figure 1-4). |
| 5. Horizontal section of duct | Less than 4 equivalent diameters downstream from a vertical bend | In the horizontal plane that is between 1/2 and 2/3 the distance up the vertical axis from the bottom of the duct for upward flow in the vertical section, and is between 1/3 and 1/2 the distance up the vertical axis from the bottom of the duct for downward flow (figure 1-5). |
(iii) Alternative Locations and Light Beam Paths. You may select locations and light beam paths, other than those cited in section 8.1(2)(ii) of this method, if you demonstrate, to the satisfaction of the Administrator or delegated agent, that the average opacity measured at the alternative location or path is equivalent to the opacity as measured at a location meeting the criteria of sections 8.1(2)(i) and (ii) of this method. The opacity at the alternative location is considered equivalent if (1) the average opacity value measured at the alternative location is within ±10 percent of the average opacity value measured at the location meeting the installation criteria, and (2) the difference between any two average opacity values is less than 2 percent opacity (absolute). You use the following procedure to conduct this demonstration: simultaneously measure the opacities at the two locations or paths for a minimum period of time (e.g., 180-minutes) covering the range of normal operating conditions and compare the results. You may use alternative procedures for determining acceptable locations if those procedures are approved by the Administrator.
(3) Field Audit Performance Tests. After you install the COMS, you must perform the following procedures and tests on the COMS.
(i) Optical Alignment Assessment. Verify and record that all alignment indicator devices show proper alignment. A clear indication of alignment is one that is objectively apparent relative to reference marks or conditions.
(ii) Calibration Error Check. Conduct a three-point calibration error test using three calibration attenuators that produce outlet pathlength corrected, single-pass opacity values shown in ASTM D6216-20, section 7.5. If your applicable limit is less than 10 percent opacity, use attenuators as described in ASTM D6216-20, section 7.5 for applicable standards of 10 to 19 percent opacity. Confirm the external audit device produces the proper zero value on the COMS data recorder. Separately, insert each calibration attenuators (low, mid, and high-level) into the external audit device. While inserting each attenuator, (1) ensure that the entire light beam passes through the attenuator, (2) minimize interference from reflected light, and (3) leave the attenuator in place for at least two times the shortest recording interval on the COMS data recorder. Make a total of five nonconsecutive readings for each attenuator. At the end of the test, correlate each attenuator insertion to the corresponding value from the data recorder. Subtract the single-pass calibration attenuator values corrected to the stack exit conditions from the COMS responses. Calculate the arithmetic mean difference, standard deviation, and confidence coefficient of the five measurements value using equations 1-3, 1-4, and 1-5 of this method. Calculate the calibration error as the sum of the absolute value of the mean difference and the 95 percent confidence coefficient for each of the three test attenuators using equation 1-6 of this method. Report the calibration error test results for each of the three attenuators.
(iii) System Response Time Check. Using a high-level calibration attenuator, alternately insert the filter five times and remove it from the external audit device. For each filter insertion and removal, measure the amount of time required for the COMS to display 95 percent of the step change in opacity on the COMS data recorder. For the upscale response time, measure the time from insertion to display of 95 percent of the final, steady upscale reading. For the downscale response time, measure the time from removal to display 5 percent of the initial upscale reading. Calculate the mean of the five upscale response time measurements and the mean of the five downscale response time measurements. Report both the upscale and downscale response times.
(iv) Averaging Period Calculation and Recording Check. After the calibration error check, conduct a check of the averaging period calculation (e.g., 6-minute integrated average). Consecutively insert each of the calibration error check attenuators (low, mid, and high-level) into the external audit device for a period of two times the averaging period plus 1 minute (e.g., 13 minutes for a 6-minute averaging period). Compare the path length corrected opacity value of each attenuator to the valid average value calculated by the COMS data recording device for that attenuator.
(4) Operational Test Period. Before conducting the operational testing, you must have successfully completed the field audit tests described in sections 8.1(3)(i) through 8.1(3)(iv). Then, you operate the COMS for an initial 168-hour test period while the source is operating under normal operating conditions. If normal operations contain routine source shutdowns, include the source's down periods in the 168-hour operational test period. However, you must ensure that the following minimum source operating time is included in the operational test period: (1) For a batch operation, the operational test period must include at least one full cycle of batch operation during the 168-hour period unless the batch operation is longer than 168 hours or (2) for continuous operating processes, the unit must be operating for at least 50 percent of the 168-hour period. Except during times of instrument zero and upscale calibration drift checks, you must analyze the effluent gas for opacity and produce a permanent record of the COMS output. During this period, you may not perform unscheduled maintenance, repair, or adjustment to the COMS. Automatic zero and calibration adjustments (i.e., intrinsic adjustments), made by the COMS without operator intervention or initiation, are allowable at any time. At the end of the operational test period, verify and record that the COMS optical alignment is still correct. If the test period is interrupted because of COMS failure, record the time when the failure occurred. After the failure is corrected, you restart the 168-hour period and tests from the beginning (0-hour). During the operational test period, perform the following test procedures:
(i) Zero Calibration Drift Test. At the outset of the 168-hour operational test period and at each 24-hour interval, the automatic calibration check system must initiate the simulated zero device to allow the zero drift to be determined. Record the COMS response to the simulated zero device. After each 24-hour period, subtract the COMS zero reading from the nominal value of the simulated zero device to calculate the 24-hour zero drift (ZD). At the end of the 168-hour period, calculate the arithmetic mean, standard deviation, and confidence coefficient of the 24-hour ZDs using equations 1-3, 1-4, and 1-5. Calculate the sum of the absolute value of the mean and the absolute value of the confidence coefficient using equation 1-6, and report this value as the 24-hour ZD error.
(ii) Upscale Calibration Drift Test. At each 24-hour interval after the simulated zero device value has been checked, check and record the COMS response to the upscale calibration device. After each 24-hour period, subtract the COMS upscale reading from the nominal value of the upscale calibration device to calculate the 24-hour calibration drift (CD). At the end of the 168-hour period, calculate the arithmetic mean, standard deviation, and confidence coefficient of the 24-hour CD using equations 1-3, 1-4, and 1-5. Calculate the sum of the absolute value of the mean and the absolute value of the confidence coefficient using equation 1-6, and report this value as the 24-hour CD error.
(5) Retesting. If the COMS fails to meet the specifications for the tests conducted under the operational test period, make the necessary corrections and restart the operational test period. Depending on the opinion of the enforcing agency, you may have to repeat some or all of the field audit tests.
8.2 What are the responsibilities of the Opacity Monitor Manufacturer?
You, the manufacturer, must carry out the following activities:
(1) Conduct the verification procedures for design specifications in section 6 of ASTM D6216-20.
(2) Conduct the verification procedures for performance specifications in section 7 of ASTM D6216-20.
(3) Provide to the owner or operator a report of the opacity monitor's conformance to the design and performance specifications required in sections 6 and 7 of ASTM D6216-20 in accordance with the reporting requirements of section 9 in ASTM D6216-20.
9.0 What quality control measures are required by PS-1?
Opacity monitor manufacturers must initiate a quality program following the requirements of ASTM D6216-20, section 8. The quality program must include (1) a quality system and (2) a corrective action program.
10.0 Calibration and Standardization [Reserved]
11.0 Analytical Procedure [Reserved]
12.0 What Calculations Are Needed for PS-1?
12.1 Desired Attenuator Values. Calculate the desired attenuator value corrected to the emission outlet pathlength as follows:
Where:
OP1 = Nominal opacity value of required low-, mid-, or high-range calibration attenuators.
OP2 = Desired attenuator opacity value from ASTM D6216-20, section 7.5 at the opacity limit required by the applicable subpart of this part.
L1 = Monitoring pathlength.
L2 = Emission outlet pathlength.
12.2 Luminous Transmittance Value of a Filter. Calculate the luminous transmittance of a filter as follows:
Where:
LT = Luminous transmittance
Ti = Weighted tested filter transmittance.
12.3 Arithmetic Mean. Calculate the arithmetic mean of a data set as follows:
Where:
12.4 Standard Deviation. Calculate the standard deviation as follows:
Where:
Sd = Standard deviation of a data set.
12.5 Confidence Coefficient. Calculate the 2.5 percent error confidence coefficient (one-tailed) as follows:
Where:
CC = Confidence coefficient
t0.975 = t − value (see table 1-2).
12.6 Calibration Error. Calculate the error (calibration error, zero drift error, and calibration drift error) as follows:
Where:
Er = Error.
12.7 Conversion of Opacity Values for Monitor Pathlength to Emission Outlet Pathlength. When the monitor pathlength is different from the emission outlet pathlength, use either of the following equations to convert from one basis to the other (this conversion may be automatically calculated by the monitoring system):
Where:
Op1 = Opacity of the effluent based upon L1.
Op2 = Opacity of the effluent based upon L2.
L1 = Monitor pathlength.
L2 = Emission outlet pathlength.
OD1 = Optical density of the effluent based upon L1.
OD2 = Optical density of the effluent based upon L2.
12.8 Mean Response Wavelength. Calculate the mean of the effective spectral response curve from the individual responses at the specified wavelength values as follows:
Where:
L = mean of the effective spectral response curve
Li = The specified wavelength at which the response gi is calculated at 20 nm intervals.
gi = The individual response value at Li.
13.0 What Specifications Does a COMS Have to Meet for Certification?
A COMS must meet the following design, manufacturer's performance, and field audit performance specifications:
Note: If the initial certification of the opacity monitor occurred before November 14, 2018 using D6216-98, D6216-03, or D6216-07, it is not necessary to recertify using D6216-12.A. COMS must meet the following design, manufacturer's performance, and field audit performance specifications.
13.1 Design Specifications. The opacity monitoring equipment must comply with the design specifications of ASTM D6216-20.
13.2 Manufacturer's Performance Specifications. The opacity monitor must comply with the manufacturer's performance specifications of ASTM D6216-20.
13.3 Field Audit Performance Specifications. The installed COMS must comply with the following performance specifications:
(1) Optical Alignment. Objectively indicate proper alignment relative to reference marks (e.g., bull's-eye) or conditions.
(2) Calibration Error. The calibration error must be ≤3 percent opacity for each of the three calibration attenuators.
(3) System Response Time. The COMS upscale and downscale response times must be ≤10 seconds as measured at the COMS data recorder.
(4) Averaging Period Calculation and Recording. The COMS data recorder must average and record each calibration attenuator value to within ±2 percent opacity of the certified value of the attenuator.
(5) Operational Test Period. The COMS must be able to measure and record opacity and to perform daily calibration drift assessments for 168 hours without unscheduled maintenance, repair, or adjustment.
(6) Zero and Upscale Calibration Drift Error. The COMS zero and upscale calibration drift error must not exceed 2 percent opacity over a 24 hour period.
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 Which references are relevant to this method?
1. Experimental Statistics. Department of Commerce. National Bureau of Standards Handbook 91. Paragraph 3-3.1.4. 1963. 3-31 p.
2. Performance Specifications for Stationary Source Monitoring Systems for Gases and Visible Emissions, EPA-650/2-74-013, January 1974, U. S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, NC.
3. Koontz, E.C., Walton, J. Quality Assurance Programs for Visible Emission Evaluations. Tennessee Division of Air Pollution Control. Nashville, TN. 78th Meeting of the Air Pollution Control Association. Detroit, MI. June 16-21, 1985.
4. Evaluation of Opacity CEMS Reliability and Quality Assurance Procedures. Volume 1. U. S. Environmental Protection Agency. Research Triangle Park, NC. EPA-340/1-86-009a.
5. Nimeroff, I. “Colorimetry Precision Measurement and Calibration.” NBS Special Publication 300. Volume 9. June 1972.
6. Technical Assistance Document: Performance Audit Procedures for Opacity Monitors. U. S. Environmental Protection Agency. Research Triangle Park, NC. EPA-600/8-87-025. April 1987.
7. Technical Assistance Document: Performance Audit Procedures for Opacity Monitors. U. S. Environmental Protection Agency. Research Triangle Park, NC. EPA-450/4-92-010. April 1992.
8. ASTM D6216-20: Standard Practice for Opacity Monitor Manufacturers to Certify Conformance with Design and Performance Specifications. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). September 2020.
17.0 What tables and diagrams are relevant to this method?
17.1 Reference Tables.
| Wavelength nanometers |
Weighting factor a |
Wavelength nanometers |
Weighting factor a |
|---|---|---|---|
| 380 | 0 | 590 | 6627 |
| 390 | 0 | 600 | 5316 |
| 400 | 2 | 610 | 4176 |
| 410 | 9 | 620 | 3153 |
| 420 | 37 | 630 | 2190 |
| 430 | 122 | 640 | 1443 |
| 440 | 262 | 650 | 886 |
| 450 | 443 | 660 | 504 |
| 460 | 694 | 670 | 259 |
| 470 | 1058 | 680 | 134 |
| 480 | 1618 | 690 | 62 |
| 490 | 2358 | 700 | 29 |
| 500 | 3401 | 720 | 14 |
| 510 | 4833 | 720 | 6 |
| 520 | 6462 | 730 | 3 |
| 530 | 7934 | 740 | 2 |
| 540 | 9194 | 750 | 1 |
| 550 | 9832 | 760 | 1 |
| 560 | 9841 | 770 | 0 |
| 570 | 9147 | 780 | 0 |
| 580 | 7992 | ||
| 1 Total of weighting factors = 100,000. |
| n a | t 0.975 | n a | t 0.975 | n a | t 0.975 |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 2 | 12.706 | 7 | 2.447 | 12 | 2.201 |
| 3 | 4.303 | 8 | 2.365 | 13 | 2.179 |
| 4 | 3.182 | 9 | 2.306 | 14 | 2.160 |
| 5 | 2.776 | 10 | 2.262 | 15 | 2.145 |
| 6 | 2.571 | 11 | 2.228 | 16 | 2.131 |
| a The values in this table are already corrected for n-1 degrees of freedom. Use n equal to the number of individual values. |
17.2 Diagrams.
Performance Specification 2—Specifications and Test Procedures for SO2 and NOX Continuous Emission Monitoring Systems in Stationary Sources
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Analytes
| Analyte | CAS Nos. |
|---|---|
| Sulfur Dioxide (SO2) | 7449-09-5 |
| Nitrogen Oxides (NOX) | 10102-44-0 (NO2), 10024-97-2 (NO) |
1.2 Applicability.
1.2.1 This specification is for evaluating the acceptability of SO2 and NOX continuous emission monitoring systems (CEMS) at the time of installation or soon after and whenever specified in the regulations. The CEMS may include, for certain stationary sources, a diluent (O2 or CO2) monitor.
1.2.2 This specification is not designed to evaluate the installed CEMS performance over an extended period of time nor does it identify specific calibration techniques and other auxiliary procedures to assess the CEMS performance. The source owner or operator is responsible to calibrate, maintain, and operate the CEMS properly. The Administrator may require, under section 114 of the Act, the operator to conduct CEMS performance evaluations at other times besides the initial test to evaluate the CEMS performance. See 40 CFR Part 60, § 60.13(c).
2.0 Summary of Performance Specification
Procedures for measuring CEMS relative accuracy and calibration drift are outlined. CEMS installation and measurement location specifications, equipment specifications, performance specifications, and data reduction procedures are included. Conformance of the CEMS with the Performance Specification is determined.
3.0 Definitions
3.1 Calibration Drift (CD) means the difference in the CEMS output readings from the established reference value after a stated period of operation during which no unscheduled maintenance, repair, or adjustment took place.
3.2 Centroidal Area means a concentric area that is geometrically similar to the stack or duct cross section and is no greater than l percent of the stack or duct cross-sectional area.
3.3 Continuous Emission Monitoring System means the total equipment required for the determination of a gas concentration or emission rate. The sample interface, pollutant analyzer, diluent analyzer, and data recorder are the major subsystems of the CEMS.
3.4 Data Recorder means that portion of the CEMS that provides a permanent record of the analyzer output. The data recorder may include automatic data reduction capabilities.
3.5 Diluent Analyzer means that portion of the CEMS that senses the diluent gas (i.e., CO2 or O2) and generates an output proportional to the gas concentration.
3.6 Path CEMS means a CEMS that measures the gas concentration along a path greater than 10 percent of the equivalent diameter of the stack or duct cross section.
3.7 Point CEMS means a CEMS that measures the gas concentration either at a single point or along a path equal to or less than 10 percent of the equivalent diameter of the stack or duct cross section.
3.8 Pollutant Analyzer means that portion of the CEMS that senses the pollutant gas and generates an output proportional to the gas concentration.
3.9 Relative Accuracy (RA) means the absolute mean difference between the gas concentration or emission rate determined by the CEMS and the value determined by the reference method (RM), plus the 2.5 percent error confidence coefficient of a series of tests, divided by the mean of the RM tests or the applicable emission limit.
3.10 Sample Interface means that portion of the CEMS used for one or more of the following: sample acquisition, sample delivery, sample conditioning, or protection of the monitor from the effects of the stack effluent.
3.11 Span Value means the calibration portion of the measurement range as specified in the applicable regulation or other requirement. If the span is not specified in the applicable regulation or other requirement, then it must be a value approximately equivalent to two times the emission standard. For spans less than 500 ppm, the span value may either be rounded upward to the next highest multiple of 10 ppm, or to the next highest multiple of 100 ppm such that the equivalent emission concentration is not less than 30 percent of the selected span value.
4.0 Interferences [Reserved]
5.0 Safety
The procedures required under this performance specification may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This performance specification may not address all of the safety problems associated with these procedures. It is the responsibility of the user to establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicable regulatory limitations prior to performing these procedures. The CEMS user's manual and materials recommended by the reference method should be consulted for specific precautions to be taken.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
6.1 CEMS Equipment Specifications.
6.1.1 Data Recorder. The portion of the CEMS that provides a record of analyzer output. The data recorder may record other pertinent data such as effluent flow rates, various instrument temperatures or abnormal CEMS operation. The data recorder output range must include the full range of expected concentration values in the gas stream to be sampled including zero and span values.
6.1.2 The CEMS design should also allow the determination of calibration drift at the zero and span values. If this is not possible or practical, the design must allow these determinations to be conducted at a low-level value (zero to 20 percent of the span value) and at a value between 50 and 100 percent of the span value. In special cases, the Administrator may approve a single-point calibration drift determination.
6.2 Other equipment and supplies, as needed by the applicable reference method(s) (see section 8.4.2 of this Performance Specification), may be required.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
7.1 Reference Gases, Gas Cells, or Optical Filters. As specified by the CEMS manufacturer for calibration of the CEMS (these need not be certified).
7.2 Reagents and Standards. May be required as needed by the applicable reference method(s) (see section 8.4.2 of this Performance Specification).
8.0 Performance Specification Test Procedure
8.1 Installation and Measurement Location Specifications.
8.1.1 CEMS Installation. Install the CEMS at an accessible location where the pollutant concentration or emission rate measurements are directly representative or can be corrected so as to be representative of the total emissions from the affected facility or at the measurement location cross section. Then select representative measurement points or paths for monitoring in locations that the CEMS will pass the RA test (see section 8.4). If the cause of failure to meet the RA test is determined to be the measurement location and a satisfactory correction technique cannot be established, the Administrator may require the CEMS to be relocated. Suggested measurement locations and points or paths that are most likely to provide data that will meet the RA requirements are listed below.
8.1.2 CEMS Measurement Location. It is suggested that the measurement location be (1) at least two equivalent diameters downstream from the nearest control device, the point of pollutant generation, or other point at which a change in the pollutant concentration or emission rate may occur and (2) at least a half equivalent diameter upstream from the effluent exhaust or control device.
8.1.2.1 Point CEMS. It is suggested that the measurement point be (1) no less than 1.0 meter (3.3 ft) from the stack or duct wall or (2) within or centrally located over the centroidal area of the stack or duct cross section.
8.1.2.2 Path CEMS. It is suggested that the effective measurement path (1) be totally within the inner area bounded by a line 1.0 meter (3.3 ft) from the stack or duct wall, or (2) have at least 70 percent of the path within the inner 50 percent of the stack or duct cross-sectional area, or (3) be centrally located over any part of the centroidal area.
8.1.3 Reference Method Measurement Location and Traverse Points.
8.1.3.1 Select, as appropriate, an accessible RM measurement point at least two equivalent diameters downstream from the nearest control device, the point of pollutant generation, or other point at which a change in the pollutant concentration or emission rate may occur, and at least a half equivalent diameter upstream from the effluent exhaust or control device. When pollutant concentration changes are due solely to diluent leakage (e.g., air heater leakages) and pollutants and diluents are simultaneously measured at the same location, a half diameter may be used in lieu of two equivalent diameters. The CEMS and RM locations need not be the same.
8.1.3.2 Select traverse points that assure acquisition of representative samples over the stack or duct cross section. The minimum requirements are as follows: Establish a “measurement line” that passes through the centroidal area and in the direction of any expected stratification. If this line interferes with the CEMS measurements, displace the line up to 30 cm (12 in.) (or 5 percent of the equivalent diameter of the cross section, whichever is less) from the centroidal area. Locate three traverse points at 16.7, 50.0, and 83.3 percent of the measurement line. If the measurement line is longer than 2.4 meters (7.8 ft) and pollutant stratification is not expected, the three traverse points may be located on the line at 0.4, 1.2, and 2.0 meters from the stack or duct wall. This option must not be used after wet scrubbers or at points where two streams with different pollutant concentrations are combined. If stratification is suspected, the following procedure is suggested. For rectangular ducts, locate at least nine sample points in the cross section such that sample points are the centroids of similarly-shaped, equal area divisions of the cross section. Measure the pollutant concentration, and, if applicable, the diluent concentration at each point using appropriate reference methods or other appropriate instrument methods that give responses relative to pollutant concentrations. Then calculate the mean value for all sample points. For circular ducts, conduct a 12-point traverse (i.e., six points on each of the two perpendicular diameters) locating the sample points as described in 40 CFR 60, Appendix A, Method 1. Perform the measurements and calculations as described above. Determine if the mean pollutant concentration is more than 10% different from any single point. If so, the cross section is considered to be stratified, and the tester may not use the alternative traverse point locations (...0.4, 1.2, and 2.0 meters from the stack or duct wall.) but must use the three traverse points at 16.7, 50.0, and 83.3 percent of the entire measurement line. Other traverse points may be selected, provided that they can be shown to the satisfaction of the Administrator to provide a representative sample over the stack or duct cross section. Conduct all necessary RM tests within 3 cm (1.2 in.) of the traverse points, but no closer than 3 cm (1.2 in.) to the stack or duct wall.
8.2 Pretest Preparation. Install the CEMS, prepare the RM test site according to the specifications in section 8.1, and prepare the CEMS for operation according to the manufacturer's written instructions.
8.3 Calibration Drift Test Procedure.
8.3.1 CD Test Period. While the affected facility is operating, determine the magnitude of the CD once each day (at 24-hour intervals) for 7 consecutive calendar days according to the procedure given in sections 8.3.2 through 8.3.4. Alternatively, the CD test may be conducted over 7 consecutive unit operating days.
8.3.2 The purpose of the CD measurement is to verify the ability of the CEMS to conform to the established CEMS calibration used for determining the emission concentration or emission rate. Therefore, if periodic automatic or manual adjustments are made to the CEMS zero and calibration settings, conduct the CD test immediately before these adjustments, or conduct it in such a way that the CD can be determined.
8.3.3 Conduct the CD test at the two points specified in section 6.1.2 of this method. Introduce to the CEMS the reference gases, gas cells, or optical filters (these need not be certified). When using reference gases, introduce the reference gas prior to any sample conditioning or filtration equipment and ensure that it passes through all filters, scrubbers, conditioners, and other monitor components used during normal sampling. The reference gas should pass through as much of the sampling probe as practical. Record the CEMS response and subtract this value from the reference value (see example data sheet in figure 2-1 of this method).
8.4 Relative Accuracy Test Procedure.
8.4.1 RA Test Period. Conduct the RA test according to the procedure given in sections 8.4.2 through 8.4.6 while the affected facility is operating at more than 50 percent of normal load, or as specified in an applicable subpart. The RA test may be conducted during the CD test period.
8.4.2 Reference Methods. Unless otherwise specified in an applicable subpart of the regulations, Methods 3B, 4, 6, and 7, or their approved alternatives, are the reference methods for diluent (O2 and CO2), moisture, SO2, and NOX, respectively.
8.4.3 Sampling Strategy for RM Tests. Conduct the RM tests in such a way that they will yield results representative of the emissions from the source and can be correlated to the CEMS data. It is preferable to conduct the diluent (if applicable), moisture (if needed), and pollutant measurements simultaneously. However, diluent and moisture measurements that are taken within an hour of the pollutant measurements may be used to calculate dry pollutant concentration and emission rates. In order to correlate the CEMS and RM data properly, note the beginning and end of each RM test period of each run (including the exact time of day) on the CEMS chart recordings or other permanent record of output. Use the following strategies for the RM tests:
8.4.3.1 For integrated samples (e.g., Methods 6 and Method 4), make a sample traverse of at least 21 minutes, sampling for an equal time at each traverse point (see section 8.1.3.2 for discussion of traverse points.
8.4.3.2 For grab samples (e.g., Method 7), take one sample at each traverse point, scheduling the grab samples so that they are taken simultaneously (within a 3-minute period) or at an equal interval of time apart over the span of time the CEM pollutant is measured. A test run for grab samples must be made up of at least three separate measurements.
8.4.4 Number of RM Tests. Conduct a minimum of nine sets of all necessary RM test runs.
8.4.5 Correlation of RM and CEMS Data. Correlate the CEMS and the RM test data as to the time and duration by first determining from the CEMS final output (the one used for reporting) the integrated average pollutant concentration or emission rate for each pollutant RM test period. Consider system response time, if important, and confirm that the pair of results are on a consistent moisture, temperature, and diluent concentration basis. Then, compare each integrated CEMS value against the corresponding average RM value. Use the following guidelines to make these comparisons.
8.4.5.1 If the RM has an integrated sampling technique, make a direct comparison of the RM results and CEMS integrated average value.
8.4.5.2 If the RM has a grab sampling technique, first average the results from all grab samples taken during the test run, and then compare this average value against the integrated value obtained from the CEMS chart recording or output during the run. If the pollutant concentration is varying with time over the run, the arithmetic average of the CEMS value recorded at the time of each grab sample may be used.
8.4.6 Calculate the mean difference between the RM and CEMS values in the units of the emission standard, the standard deviation, the confidence coefficient, and the relative accuracy according to the procedures in section 12.0.
8.5 Reporting. At a minimum (check with the appropriate regional office, State, or Local agency for additional requirements, if any), summarize in tabular form the results of the CD tests and the RA tests or alternative RA procedure, as appropriate. Include all data sheets, calculations, charts (records of CEMS responses), cylinder gas concentration certifications, and calibration cell response certifications (if applicable) necessary to confirm that the performance of the CEMS met the performance specifications.
9.0 Quality Control [Reserved]
10.0 Calibration and Standardization [Reserved]
11.0 Analytical Procedure
Sample collection and analysis are concurrent for this Performance Specification (see section 8.0). Refer to the RM for specific analytical procedures.
12.0 Calculations and Data Analysis
Summarize the results on a data sheet similar to that shown in Figure 2-2 (in section 18.0).
12.1 All data from the RM and CEMS must be on a consistent dry basis and, as applicable, on a consistent diluent basis and in the units of the emission standard. Correct the RM and CEMS data for moisture and diluent as follows:
12.1.1 Moisture Correction (as applicable). Correct each wet RM run for moisture with the corresponding Method 4 data; correct each wet CEMS run using the corresponding CEMS moisture monitor date using Equation 2-1.
12.1.2 Correction to Units of Standard (as applicable). Correct each dry RM run to the units of the emission standard with the corresponding Method 3B data; correct each dry CEMS run using the corresponding CEMS diluent monitor data as follows:
12.1.2.1 Correct to Diluent Basis. The following is an example of concentration (ppm) correction to 7% oxygen.
The following is an example of mass/gross calorific value (lbs/million Btu) correction.
lbs/MMBtu = Conc(dry) (F-factor) (20.9/20.9-%02)
12.2 Arithmetic Mean. Calculate the arithmetic mean of the difference, d, of a data set as follows:
Where:
n = Number of data points.
12.3 Standard Deviation. Calculate the standard deviation, Sd, as follows:
12.4 Confidence Coefficient. Calculate the 2.5 percent error confidence coefficient (one-tailed), CC, as follows:
Where:
t 0.975 = t-value (see Table 2-1).
12.5 Relative Accuracy. Calculate the RA, expressed as a percentage, of a set of data as follows:
Where:
|d | = Absolute value of the mean differences (from equation 2-3 of this method).
|CC| = Absolute value of the confidence coefficient (from equation 2-3 of this method).
RM = Average RM value. In cases where the average emissions for the test are less than 50 percent of the applicable emission standard, substitute the applicable emission standard value in the denominator of equation 2-6 of this method in place of the average RM value. In all other cases, use RM.
13.0 Method Performance
13.1 Calibration Drift Performance Specification. The CEMS calibration must not drift or deviate from the reference value of the gas cylinder, gas cell, or optical filter by more than 2.5 percent of the span value. If the CEMS includes pollutant and diluent monitors, the CD must be determined separately for each in terms of concentrations (See Performance Specification 3 for the diluent specifications), and none of the CDs may exceed the specification.
13.2 Relative Accuracy Performance Specification.
| Calculate . . . | RA criteria (%) |
|
|---|---|---|
| If average emissions during the RATA are ≥50% of emission standard | Use Eq. 2-6, with RM in the denominator | ≤20.0 |
| If average emissions during the RATA are <50% of emission standard | Use Eq. 2-6, emission standard in the denominator | ≤10.0 |
| For SO2 emission standards ≤130 but ≥86 ng/J (0.30 and 0.20 lb/million Btu) | Use Eq. 2-6, emission standard in the denominator | ≤15.0 |
| For SO2 emission standards <86 ng/J (0.20 lb/million Btu) | Use Eq. 2-6, emission standard in the denominator | ≤20.0 |
13.3 For instruments that use common components to measure more than one effluent gas constituent, all channels must simultaneously pass the RA requirement, unless it can be demonstrated that any adjustments made to one channel did not affect the others.
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 Alternative Procedures
Paragraphs 60.13(j)(1) and (2) of 40 CFR part 60 contain criteria for which the reference method procedure for determining relative accuracy (see section 8.4 of this Performance Specification) may be waived and the following procedure substituted.
16.1 Conduct a complete CEMS status check following the manufacturer's written instructions. The check should include operation of the light source, signal receiver, timing mechanism functions, data acquisition and data reduction functions, data recorders, mechanically operated functions (mirror movements, zero pipe operation, calibration gas valve operations, etc.), sample filters, sample line heaters, moisture traps, and other related functions of the CEMS, as applicable. All parts of the CEMS shall be functioning properly before proceeding to the alternative RA procedure.
16.2 Alternative RA Procedure.
16.2.1 Challenge each monitor (both pollutant and diluent, if applicable) with cylinder gases of known concentrations or calibration cells that produce known responses at two measurement points within the ranges shown in Table 2-2 (Section 18).
16.2.2 Use a separate cylinder gas (for point CEMS only) or calibration cell (for path CEMS or where compressed gas cylinders can not be used) for measurement points 1 and 2. Challenge the CEMS and record the responses three times at each measurement point. The Administrator may allow dilution of cylinder gas using the performance criteria in Test Method 205, 40 CFR Part 51, Appendix M. Use the average of the three responses in determining relative accuracy.
16.2.3 Operate each monitor in its normal sampling mode as nearly as possible. When using cylinder gases, pass the cylinder gas through all filters, scrubbers, conditioners, and other monitor components used during normal sampling and as much of the sampling probe as practical. When using calibration cells, the CEMS components used in the normal sampling mode should not be by-passed during the RA determination. These include light sources, lenses, detectors, and reference cells. The CEMS should be challenged at each measurement point for a sufficient period of time to assure adsorption-desorption reactions on the CEMS surfaces have stabilized.
16.2.4 Use cylinder gases that have been certified by comparison to National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) gaseous standard reference material (SRM) or NIST/EPA approved gas manufacturer's certified reference material (CRM) (See Reference 2 in section 17.0) following EPA Traceability Protocol Number 1 (See Reference 3 in section 17.0). As an alternative to Protocol Number 1 gases, CRM's may be used directly as alternative RA cylinder gases. A list of gas manufacturers that have prepared approved CRM's is available from EPA at the address shown in Reference 2. Procedures for preparation of CRM's are described in Reference 2.
16.2.5 Use calibration cells certified by the manufacturer to produce a known response in the CEMS. The cell certification procedure shall include determination of CEMS response produced by the calibration cell in direct comparison with measurement of gases of known concentration. This can be accomplished using SRM or CRM gases in a laboratory source simulator or through extended tests using reference methods at the CEMS location in the exhaust stack. These procedures are discussed in Reference 4 in section 17.0. The calibration cell certification procedure is subject to approval of the Administrator.
16.3 The differences between the known concentrations of the cylinder gases and the concentrations indicated by the CEMS are used to assess the accuracy of the CEMS. The calculations and limits of acceptable relative accuracy are as follows:
16.3.1 For pollutant CEMS:
Where:
d = Average difference between responses and the concentration/responses (see section 16.2.2).
AC = The known concentration/response of the cylinder gas or calibration cell.
16.3.2 For diluent CEMS:
RA= d; ≤0.7 percent O2 or CO2, as applicable.
17.0 References
1. Department of Commerce. Experimental Statistics. Handbook 91. Washington, D.C. p. 3-31, paragraphs 3-3.1.4.
2. “A Procedure for Establishing Traceability of Gas Mixtures to Certain National Bureau of Standards Standard Reference Materials.” Joint publication by NBS and EPA. EPA 600/7-81-010. Available from U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Quality Assurance Division (MD-77), Research Triangle Park, North Carolina 27711.
3. “Traceability Protocol for Establishing True Concentrations of Gases Used for Calibration and Audits of Continuous Source Emission Monitors. (Protocol Number 1).” June 1978. Protocol Number 1 is included in the Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement Systems, Volume III, Stationary Source Specific Methods. EPA-600/4-77-027b. August 1977.
4. “Gaseous Continuous Emission Monitoring Systems—Performance Specification Guidelines for SO2, NOX, CO2, O2, and TRS.” EPA-450/3-82-026. Available from the U.S. EPA, Emission Measurement Center, Emission Monitoring and Data Analysis Division (MD-19), Research Triangle Park, North Carolina 27711.
18.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
| n a | t0.975 | n a | t0.975 | n a | t0.975 |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 2 | 12.706 | 7 | 2.447 | 12 | 2.201 |
| 3 | 4.303 | 8 | 2.365 | 13 | 2.179 |
| 4 | 3.182 | 9 | 2.306 | 14 | 2.160 |
| 5 | 2.776 | 10 | 2.262 | 15 | 2.145 |
| 6 | 2.571 | 11 | 2.228 | 16 | 2.131 |
| a The values in this table are already corrected for n−1 degrees of freedom. Use n equal to the number of individual values. |
| Measurement point | Pollutant monitor | Diluent monitor for | |
|---|---|---|---|
| CO2 | O2 | ||
| 1 | 20-30% of span value | 5-8% by volume | 4-6% by volume. |
| 2 | 50-60% of span value | 10-14% by volume | 8-12% by volume. |
| a For Steam generators. |
| b Average of three samples. |
| c Make sure that RM and CEMS data are on a consistent basis, either wet or dry. |
Performance Specification 3—Specifications and Test Procedures for O2 and CO2 Continuous Emission Monitoring Systems in Stationary Sources
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Analytes.
| Analytes | CAS No. |
|---|---|
| Carbon Dioxide (CO2) | 124-38-9 |
| Oxygen (O2) | 7782-44-7 |
1.2 Applicability.
1.2.1 This specification is for evaluating acceptability of O2 and CO2 continuous emission monitoring systems (CEMS) at the time of installation or soon after and whenever specified in an applicable subpart of the regulations. This specification applies to O2 or CO2 monitors that are not included under Performance Specification 2 (PS 2).
1.2.2 This specification is not designed to evaluate the installed CEMS performance over an extended period of time, nor does it identify specific calibration techniques and other auxiliary procedures to assess the CEMS performance. The source owner or operator, is responsible to calibrate, maintain, and operate the CEMS properly. The Administrator may require, under section 114 of the Act, the operator to conduct CEMS performance evaluations at other times besides the initial test to evaluate the CEMS performance. See 40 CFR part 60, section 60.13(c).
1.2.3 The definitions, installation and measurement location specifications, calculations and data analysis, and references are the same as in PS 2, sections 3, 8.1, 12, and 17, respectively, and also apply to O2 and CO2 CEMS under this specification. The performance and equipment specifications and the relative accuracy (RA) test procedures for O2 and CO2 CEMS do not differ from those for SO2 and NOX CEMS (see PS 2), except as noted below.
2.0 Summary of Performance Specification
The RA and calibration drift (CD) tests are conducted to determine conformance of the CEMS to the specification.
3.0 Definitions
Same as in section 3.0 of PS 2.
4.0 Interferences [Reserved]
5.0 Safety
This performance specification may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This performance specification may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user to establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicable regulatory limitations prior to performing this performance specification. The CEMS users manual should be consulted for specific precautions to be taken with regard to the analytical procedures.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
Same as section 6.0 of PS2.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
Same as section 7.0 of PS2.
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport
8.1 Relative Accuracy Test Procedure. Sampling Strategy for reference method (RM) Tests, Correlation of RM and CEMS Data, and Number of RM Tests. Same as PS 2, sections 8.4.3, 8.4.5, and 8.4.4, respectively.
8.2 Reference Method. Unless otherwise specified in an applicable subpart of the regulations, Method 3B or other approved alternative is the RM for O2 or CO2.
9.0 Quality Control [Reserved]
10.0 Calibration and Standardization [Reserved]
11.0 Analytical Procedure
Sample collection and analyses are concurrent for this performance specification (see section 8). Refer to the RM for specific analytical procedures.
12.0 Calculations and Data Analysis
Calculate the RA using equations 3-1 and 3-2. Summarize the results on a data sheet similar to that shown in Figure 2.2 of PS2.
13.0 Method Performance
13.1 Calibration Drift Performance Specification. The CEMS calibration must not drift by more than 0.5 percent O2 or CO2 from the reference value of the gas, gas cell, or optical filter.
13.2 CEMS Relative Accuracy Performance Specification. The RA of the CEMS must be no greater than 20.0 percent of the mean value of the reference method (RM) data when calculated using equation 3-1. The results are also acceptable if the result of Equation 3-2 is less than or equal to 1.0 percent O2 (or CO2).
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 References
Same as in section 17.0 of PS 2.
17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data [Reserved]
Performance Specification 4—Specifications and Test Procedures for Carbon Monoxide Continuous Emission Monitoring Systems in Stationary Sources
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Analytes.
| Analyte | CAS No. |
|---|---|
| Carbon Monoxide (CO) | 630-08-0 |
1.2 Applicability.
1.2.1 This specification is for evaluating the acceptability of carbon monoxide (CO) continuous emission monitoring systems (CEMS) at the time of installation or soon after and whenever specified in an applicable subpart of the regulations. This specification was developed primarily for CEMS having span values of 1,000 ppmv CO.
1.2.2 This specification is not designed to evaluate the installed CEMS performance over an extended period of time nor does it identify specific calibration techniques and other auxiliary procedures to assess CEMS performance. The source owner or operator, is responsible to calibrate, maintain, and operate the CEMS. The Administrator may require, under section 114 of the Act, the source owner or operator to conduct CEMS performance evaluations at other times besides the initial test to evaluate the CEMS performance. See 40 CFR part 60, section 60.13(c).
1.2.3 The definitions, performance specification test procedures, calculations, and data analysis procedures for determining calibration drift (CD) and relative accuracy (RA) of Performance Specification 2 (PS 2), sections 3, 8.0, and 12, respectively, apply to this specification.
2.0 Summary of Performance Specification
The CD and RA tests are conducted to determine conformance of the CEMS to the specification.
3.0 Definitions
Same as in section 3.0 of PS 2.
4.0 Interferences [Reserved]
5.0 Safety
This performance specification may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This performance specification may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user to establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicable regulatory limitations prior to performing this performance specification. The CEMS users manual should be consulted for specific precautions to be taken with regard to the analytical procedures.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
Same as section 6.0 of PS 2.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
Same as section 7.0 of PS 2.
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport
8.1 Relative Accuracy Test Procedure. Sampling Strategy for reference method (RM) Tests, Number of RM Tests, and Correlation of RM and CEMS Data are the same as PS 2, sections 8.4.3, 8.4.4, and 8.4.5, respectively.
8.2 Reference Methods. Unless otherwise specified in an applicable subpart of the regulation, Method 10, 10A, 10B or other approved alternative are the RM for this PS.
9.0 Quality Control [Reserved]
10.0 Calibration and Standardization [Reserved]
11.0 Analytical Procedure
Sample collection and analysis are concurrent for this performance specification (see section 8.0). Refer to the RM for specific analytical procedures.
12.0 Calculations and Data Analysis
Same as section 12.0 of PS 2.
13.0 Method Performance
13.1 Calibration Drift. The CEMS calibration must not drift or deviate from the reference value of the calibration gas, gas cell, or optical filter by more than 5 percent of the established span value for 6 out of 7 test days (e.g., the established span value is 1000 ppm for Subpart J affected facilities).
13.2 Relative Accuracy. The RA of the CEMS must be no greater than 10 percent when the average RM value is used to calculate RA or 5 percent when the applicable emission standard is used to calculate RA.
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 Alternative Procedures [Reserved]
17.0 References
1. Ferguson, B.B., R.E. Lester, and W.J. Mitchell. Field Evaluation of Carbon Monoxide and Hydrogen Sulfide Continuous Emission Monitors at an Oil Refinery. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Research Triangle Park, N.C. Publication No. EPA-600/4-82-054. August 1982. 100 p.
2. “Gaseous Continuous Emission Monitoring Systems—Performance Specification Guidelines for SO2, NOX, CO2, O2, and TRS.” EPA-450/3-82-026. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Technical Support Division (MD-19), Research Triangle Park, NC 27711.
3. Repp, M. Evaluation of Continuous Monitors for Carbon Monoxide in Stationary Sources. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Research Triangle Park, N.C. Publication No. EPA-600/2-77-063. March 1977. 155 p.
4. Smith, F., D.E. Wagoner, and R.P. Donovan. Guidelines for Development of a Quality Assurance Program: Volume VIII—Determination of CO Emissions from Stationary Sources by NDIR Spectrometry. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Research Triangle Park, N.C. Publication No. EPA-650/4-74-005-h. February 1975. 96 p.
18.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
Same as section 18.0 of PS 2.
Performance Specification 4A—Specifications and Test Procedures for Carbon Monoxide Continuous Emission Monitoring Systems in Stationary Sources
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Analytes.
| Analyte | CAS No. |
|---|---|
| Carbon Monoxide (CO) | 630-80-0 |
1.2 Applicability.
1.2.1 This specification is for evaluating the acceptability of carbon monoxide (CO) continuous emission monitoring systems (CEMS) at the time of installation or soon after and whenever specified in an applicable subpart of the regulations. This specification was developed primarily for CEMS that comply with low emission standards (less than 200 ppmv).
1.2.2 This specification is not designed to evaluate the installed CEMS performance over an extended period of time nor does it identify specific calibration techniques and other auxiliary procedures to assess CEMS performance. The source owner or operator is responsible to calibrate, maintain, and operate the CEMS. The Administrator may require, under section 114 of the Act, the source owner or operator to conduct CEMS performance evaluations at other times besides the initial test to evaluate CEMS performance. See 40 CFR Part 60, section 60.13(c).
1.2.3 The definitions, performance specification, test procedures, calculations and data analysis procedures for determining calibration drifts (CD) and relative accuracy (RA), of Performance Specification 2 (PS 2), sections 3, 8.0, and 12, respectively, apply to this specification.
2.0 Summary of Performance Specification
The CD and RA tests are conducted to determine conformance of the CEMS to the specification.
3.0 Definitions
Same as in section 3.0 of PS 2.
4.0 Interferences [Reserved]
5.0 Safety
This performance specification may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This performance specification may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user to establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicable regulatory limitations prior to performing this performance specification. The CEMS users manual should be consulted for specific precautions to be taken with regard to the analytical procedures.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
Same as section 6.0 of PS 2 with the following additions.
6.1 Data Recorder Scale.
6.1.1 This specification is the same as section 6.1 of PS 2. The CEMS shall be capable of measuring emission levels under normal conditions and under periods of short-duration peaks of high concentrations. This dual-range capability may be met using two separate analyzers (one for each range) or by using dual-range units which have the capability of measuring both levels with a single unit. In the latter case, when the reading goes above the full-scale measurement value of the lower range, the higher-range operation shall be started automatically. The CEMS recorder range must include zero and a high-level value. Under applications of consistent low emissions, a single-range analyzer is allowed provided normal and spike emissions can be quantified. In this case, set an appropriate high-level value to include all emissions.
6.1.2 For the low-range scale of dual-range units, the high-level value shall be between 1.5 times the pollutant concentration corresponding to the emission standard level and the span value. For the high-range scale, the high-level value shall be set at 2000 ppm, as a minimum, and the range shall include the level of the span value. There shall be no concentration gap between the low-and high-range scales.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
Same as section 7.0 of PS 2.
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport
8.1 Relative Accuracy Test Procedure. Sampling Strategy for reference method (RM) Tests, Number of RM Tests, and Correlation of RM and CEMS Data are the same as PS 2, sections 8.4.3, 8.4.4, and 8.4.5, respectively.
8.2 Reference Methods. Unless otherwise specified in an applicable subpart of the regulation, Methods 10, 10A, 10B, or other approved alternative is the RM for this PS. When evaluating nondispersive infrared CEMS using Method 10 as the RM, the alternative interference trap specified in section 16.0 of Method 10 shall be used.
8.3 Response Time Test Procedure. The response time test applies to all types of CEMS, but will generally have significance only for extractive systems. The entire system is checked with this procedure including applicable sample extraction and transport, sample conditioning, gas analyses, and data recording.
8.3.1 Introduce zero gas into the system. When the system output has stabilized (no change greater than 1 percent of full scale for 30 sec), introduce an upscale calibration gas and wait for a stable value. Record the time (upscale response time) required to reach 95 percent of the final stable value. Next, reintroduce the zero gas and wait for a stable reading before recording the response time (downscale response time). Repeat the entire procedure until you have three sets of data to determine the mean upscale and downscale response times. The slower or longer of the two means is the system response time.
8.4 Interference Check. The CEMS must be shown to be free from the effects of any interferences.
9.0 Quality Control [Reserved]
10.0 Calibration and Standardization [Reserved]
11.0 Analytical Procedure
Sample collection and analysis are concurrent for this performance specification (see section 8.0). Refer to the RM for specific analytical procedures.
12.0 Calculations and Data Analysis. Same as section 12.0 of PS 2
13.0 Method Performance
13.1 Calibration Drift. The CEMS calibration must not drift or deviate from the reference value of the calibration gas, gas cell, or optical filter by more than 5 percent of the established span value for 6 out of 7 test days.
13.2 Relative Accuracy. The RA of the CEMS must be no greater than 10 percent when the average RM value is used to calculate RA, 5 percent when the applicable emission standard is used to calculate RA, or within 5 ppmv when the RA is calculated as the absolute average difference between the RM and CEMS plus the 2.5 percent confidence coefficient.
13.3 Response Time. The CEMS response time shall not exceed 240 seconds to achieve 95 percent of the final stable value.
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 Alternative Procedures
16.1 Under conditions where the average CO emissions are less than 10 percent of the standard and this is verified by Method 10, a cylinder gas audit may be performed in place of the RA test to determine compliance with these limits. In this case, the cylinder gas shall contain CO in 12 percent carbon dioxide as an interference check. If this option is exercised, Method 10 must be used to verify that emission levels are less than 10 percent of the standard.
17.0 References
Same as section 17 of PS 4.
18.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
Same as section 18.0 of PS 2.
Performance Specification 4B—Specifications and Test Procedures for Carbon Monoxide and Oxygen Continuous Monitoring Systems in Stationary Sources
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1. Analytes.
| Analyte | CAS No. |
|---|---|
| Carbon Monoxide (CO) | 630-08-0 |
| Oxygen (O2) | 7782-44-7 |
1.2. Applicability.
1.2.1. This specification is to be used for evaluating the acceptability of carbon monoxide (CO) and oxygen (O2) continuous emission monitoring systems (CEMS) at the time of or soon after installation and whenever specified in this part. The CEMS may include, for certain stationary sources, (a) flow monitoring equipment to allow measurement of the dry volume of stack effluent sampled, and (b) an automatic sampling system.
1.2.2. This specification is not designed to evaluate the installed CEMS' performance over an extended period of time, nor does it identify specific calibration techniques and auxiliary procedures to assess the CEMS' performance. The source owner or operator, however, is responsible to properly calibrate, maintain, and operate the CEMS. To evaluate the CEMS' performance, the Administrator may require, under section 114 of the Act, the operator to conduct CEMS performance evaluations at times other than the initial test.
1.2.3. The definitions, installation, and measurement location specifications, test procedures, data reduction procedures, reporting requirements, and bibliography are the same as in Performance Specification (PS) 3 (for O2) and PS 4A (for CO) of this appendix except as otherwise noted in this specification.
2.0 Summary of Performance Specification
Installation and measurement location specifications, performance specifications, test procedures, and data reduction procedures are included in this specification. Reference method tests, calibration error tests, calibration drift tests, and interferant tests are conducted to determine conformance of the CEMS with the specification.
3.0 Definitions
The definitions are the same as in section 3.0 of PS 2 with the following definitions added:
3.1. Continuous Emission Monitoring System (CEMS). This definition is the same as section 3.0 of PS 2 with the following addition. A continuous monitor is one in which the sample to be analyzed passes the measurement section of the analyzer without interruption.
3.2. Response Time (RT). The time interval between the start of a step change in the system input and when the pollutant analyzer output reaches 95 percent of the final value.
3.3. Calibration Error (CE). The difference between the concentration indicated by the CEMS and the known concentration generated by a calibration source when the entire CEMS, including the sampling interface is challenged. A CE test procedure is performed to document the accuracy and linearity of the CEMS over the entire measurement range.
4.0 Interferences [Reserved]
5.0 Safety
This performance specification may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This performance specification may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user to establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicable regulatory limitations prior to performing this performance specification. The CEMS user's manual should be consulted for specific precautions to be taken with regard to the analytical procedures.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
Same as section 6.0 of PS 2, except for the following:
6.1 Data Recorder Scale. For O2, same as specified in PS 3, except that the span must be 25 percent. The span of the O2 may be higher if the O2 concentration at the sampling point can be greater than 25 percent. For CO, same as specified in PS 4A, except that the low-range span must be 200 ppm and the high range span must be 3000 ppm. In addition, the scale for both CEMS must record all readings within a measurement range with a resolution of 0.5 percent.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport
8.1. Installation and Measurement Location Specifications.
8.1.1. The CEMS Installation. This specification is the same as section 8.1.1 of PS 2 with the following additions. Both the CO and O2 monitors should be installed at the same general location. If this is not possible, they may be installed at different locations if the effluent gases at both sample locations are not stratified and there is no in-leakage of air between sampling locations.
8.1.2. Measurement Location. Same as section 8.1.2 of PS 2.
8.1.2.1. Point CEMS. The measurement point should be within or centrally located over the centroidal area of the stack or duct cross section.
8.1.2.2. Path CEMS. The effective measurement path should: (1) have at least 70 percent of the path within the inner 50 percent of the stack or duct cross sectional area, or (2) be centrally located over any part of the centroidal area.
8.1.3. Reference Method (RM) Measurement Location and Traverse Points.
This specification is the same as section 8.1.3 of PS 2 with the following additions. When pollutant concentration changes are due solely to diluent leakage and CO and O2 are simultaneously measured at the same location, one half diameter may be used in place of two equivalent diameters.
8.2 Pretest Preparation. Install the CEMS, prepare the RM test site according to the specifications in section 8.1 of this method, and prepare the CEMS for operation according to the manufacturer's written instructions.
8.3 Stratification Test Procedure. Stratification is defined as the difference in excess of 10 percent between the average concentration in the duct or stack and the concentration at any point more than 1.0 meter from the duct or stack wall. To determine whether effluent stratification exists, a dual probe system should be used to determine the average effluent concentration while measurements at each traverse point are being made. One probe, located at the stack or duct centroid, is used as a stationary reference point to indicate change in the effluent concentration over time. The second probe is used for sampling at the traverse points specified in method 1 in appendix A to this part. The monitoring system samples sequentially at the reference and traverse points throughout the testing period for five minutes at each point.
8.4 Calibration Drift (CD) Test Procedure. Same as section 8.3 in PS 2.
8.5 Calibration Error Test Procedure. Challenge each monitor (both low and high range CO and O2) with zero gas and EPA Protocol 1 cylinder gases at three measurement points within the ranges specified in table 4B-1 of this method (in section 18.0).
Operate each monitor in its normal sampling mode as nearly as possible. The calibration gas must be injected into the sample system as close to the sampling probe outlet as practical and should pass through all CEMS components used during normal sampling. Challenge the CEMS three non-consecutive times at each measurement point and record the responses. The duration of each gas injection should be sufficient to ensure that the CEMS surfaces are conditioned.
8.6 Response Time Test Procedure. Same as section 8.3 in PS 4A and must be carried out for both the CO and O2 monitors.
8.7 Relative Accuracy Test Procedure. Sampling Strategy for Reference Method (RM) Tests, Number of RM Tests, and Correlation of RM and CEMS Data are the same as PS 2, sections 8.4.3, 8.4.4, and 8.4.5, respectively.
9.0 Quality Control [Reserved]
10.0 Calibration and Standardization [Reserved]
11.0 Analytical Procedure
Sample collection and analysis are concurrent for this performance specification (see section 8.0 of this method). Refer to the RM for specific analytical procedures.
12.0 Calculation and Data Analysis
Summarize the results on a data sheet as shown in figure 4B-1 of this method (in section 18.0).
Calibration Error (CE) is the average the differences between the instrument response and the certified cylinder gas value for each gas. Calculate the CE results for the CO monitor according to:
Where:
d = mean difference between the CEMS response and the known reference concentration, and
FS = span value.
The CE for the O2 monitor is the average percent O2 difference between the O2 monitor and the certified cylinder gas value for each gas.
13.0 Method Performance
13.1. Calibration Drift Performance Specification. For O2, same as specified in PS 3. For CO, the same as specified in PS 4A except that the CEMS calibration must not drift from the reference value of the calibration standard by more than 3 percent of the span value on either the high or low range.
13.2. Calibration Error (CE) Performance Specification. The mean difference between the CEMS and reference values at all three test points (see table 4B-1 of this method) must be no greater than 5 percent of span value for CO monitors and 0.5 percent for O2 monitors.
13.3. Response Time Performance Specification. The response time for the CO or O2 monitor must not exceed 240 seconds.
13.4. Relative Accuracy (RA) Performance Specification. For O2, same as specified in PS 3. For CO, the same as specified in PS 4A.
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 Alternative Procedure
Alternative RA Procedure. Under some operating conditions, it may not be possible to obtain meaningful results using the RA test procedure. This includes conditions where consistent, very low CO emission or low CO emissions interrupted periodically by short duration, high level spikes are observed. It may be appropriate in these circumstances to waive the RA test and substitute the following procedure.
Conduct a complete CEMS status check following the manufacturer's written instructions. The check should include operation of the light source, signal receiver, timing mechanism functions, data acquisition and data reduction functions, data recorders, mechanically operated functions, sample filters, sample line heaters, moisture traps, and other related functions of the CEMS, as applicable. All parts of the CEMS must be functioning properly before the RA requirement can be waived. The instrument must also successfully pass the CE and CD specifications. Substitution of the alternate procedure requires approval of the Regional Administrator.
17.0 Reference
1. 40 CFR part 266, appendix IX, section 2, “Performance Specifications for Continuous Emission Monitoring Systems.”
18.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
| Measurement point | CO low range
(ppm) |
CO high range
(ppm) |
O2
(%) |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | 0-40 | 0-600 | 0-2 |
| 2 | 60-80 | 900-1,200 | 8-10 |
| 3 | 140-160 | 2,100-2,400 | 14-16 |
| Run No. | Calibration value | Monitor
response |
Difference | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Zero | Mid | High | |||
| 1—Zero | |||||
| 2—Mid | |||||
| 3—High | |||||
| 4—Mid | |||||
| 5—Zero | |||||
| 6—High | |||||
| 7—Zero | |||||
| 8—Mid | |||||
| 9—High | |||||
| Mean Difference = | |||||
| Calibration Error = | % | % | % |
Performance Specification 5—Specifications and Test Procedures for TRS Continuous Emission Monitoring Systems in Stationary Sources
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Analytes.
| Analyte | CAS No. |
|---|---|
| Total Reduced Sulfur (TRS) | NA |
1.2 Applicability. This specification is for evaluating the applicability of TRS continuous emission monitoring systems (CEMS) at the time of installation or soon after and whenever specified in an applicable subpart of the regulations. The CEMS may include oxygen monitors which are subject to Performance Specification 3 (PS 3).
1.3 The definitions, performance specification, test procedures, calculations and data analysis procedures for determining calibration drifts (CD) and relative accuracy (RA) of PS 2, sections 3.0, 8.0, and 12.0, respectively, apply to this specification.
2.0 Summary of Performance Specification
The CD and RA tests are conducted to determine conformance of the CEMS to the specification.
3.0 Definitions
Same as in section 3.0 of PS 2.
4.0 Interferences [Reserved]
5.0 Safety
This performance specification may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This performance specification may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user to establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicable regulatory limitations prior to performing this performance specification. The CEMS user's manual should be consulted for specific precautions to be taken with regard to the analytical procedures.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
Same as section 6.0 of PS 2.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
Same as section 7.0 of PS 2.
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport
8.1 Relative Accuracy Test Procedure. Sampling Strategy for reference method (RM) Tests, Number of RM Tests, and Correlation of RM and CEMS Data are the same as PS 2, sections 8.4.3, 8.4.4, and 8.4.5, respectively.
8.2 Reference Methods. Unless otherwise specified in the applicable subpart of the regulations, Method 16, Method 16A, 16B or other approved alternative is the RM for TRS.
9.0 Quality Control [Reserved]
10.0 Calibration and Standardization [Reserved]
11.0 Analytical Procedure
Sample collection and analysis are concurrent for this performance specification (see section 8.0). Refer to the reference method for specific analytical procedures.
12.0 Calculations and Data Analysis
Same as section 12.0 of PS 2.
13.0 Method Performance
13.1 Calibration Drift. The CEMS detector calibration must not drift or deviate from the reference value of the calibration gas by more than 5 percent of the established span value for 6 out of 7 test days. This corresponds to 1.5 ppm drift for Subpart BB sources where the span value is 30 ppm. If the CEMS includes pollutant and diluent monitors, the CD must be determined separately for each in terms of concentrations (see PS 3 for the diluent specifications).
13.2 Relative Accuracy. The RA of the CEMS must be no greater than 20 percent when the average RM value is used to calculate RA or 10 percent when the applicable emission standard is used to calculate RA.
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 Alternative Procedures [Reserved]
17.0 References
1. Department of Commerce. Experimental Statistics, National Bureau of Standards, Handbook 91. 1963. Paragraphs 3-3.1.4, p. 3-31.
2. A Guide to the Design, Maintenance and Operation of TRS Monitoring Systems. National Council for Air and Stream Improvement Technical Bulletin No. 89. September 1977.
3. Observation of Field Performance of TRS Monitors on a Kraft Recovery Furnace. National Council for Air and Stream Improvement Technical Bulletin No. 91. January 1978.
18.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
Same as section 18.0 of PS 2.
Performance Specification 6—Specifications and Test Procedures for Continuous Emission Rate Monitoring Systems in Stationary Sources
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Applicability. This specification is used for evaluating the acceptability of continuous emission rate monitoring systems (CERMSs).
1.2 The installation and measurement location specifications, performance specification test procedure, calculations, and data analysis procedures, of Performance Specifications (PS 2), sections 8.0 and 12, respectively, apply to this specification.
2.0 Summary of Performance Specification
The calibration drift (CD) and relative accuracy (RA) tests are conducted to determine conformance of the CERMS to the specification.
3.0 Definitions
The definitions are the same as in section 3 of PS 2, except this specification refers to the continuous emission rate monitoring system rather than the continuous emission monitoring system. The following definitions are added:
3.1 Continuous Emission Rate Monitoring System (CERMS). The total equipment required for the determining and recording the pollutant mass emission rate (in terms of mass per unit of time).
3.2 Flow Rate Sensor. That portion of the CERMS that senses the volumetric flow rate and generates an output proportional to that flow rate. The flow rate sensor shall have provisions to check the CD for each flow rate parameter that it measures individually (e.g., velocity, pressure).
4.0 Interferences [Reserved]
5.0 Safety
This performance specification may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This performance specification may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user to establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicable regulatory limitations prior to performing this performance specification. The CERMS users manual should be consulted for specific precautions to be taken with regard to the analytical procedures.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
Same as section 6.0 of PS 2.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
Same as section 7.0 of PS 2.
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport
8.1 Calibration Drift Test Procedure.
8.1.1 The CD measurements are to verify the ability of the CERMS to conform to the established CERMS calibrations used for determining the emission rate. Therefore, if periodic automatic or manual adjustments are made to the CERMS zero and calibration settings, conduct the CD tests immediately before these adjustments, or conduct them in such a way that CD can be determined.
8.1.2 Conduct the CD tests for pollutant concentration at the two values specified in section 6.1.2 of PS 2. For other parameters that are selectively measured by the CERMS (e.g., velocity, pressure, flow rate), use two analogous values (e.g., Low: 0-20% of full scale, High: 50-100% of full scale). Introduce to the CERMS the reference signals (these need not be certified). Record the CERMS response to each and subtract this value from the respective reference value (see example data sheet in Figure 6-1).
8.2 Relative Accuracy Test Procedure.
8.2.1 Sampling Strategy for reference method (RM) Tests, Correlation of RM and CERMS Data, and Number of RM Tests are the same as PS 2, sections 8.4.3, 8.4.5, and 8.4.4, respectively. Summarize the results on a data sheet. An example is shown in Figure 6-1. The RA test may be conducted during the CD test period.
8.2.2 Reference Methods. Unless otherwise specified in the applicable subpart of the regulations, the RM for the pollutant gas is the Appendix A method that is cited for compliance test purposes, or its approved alternatives. Methods 2, 2A, 2B, 2C, or 2D, as applicable, are the RMs for the determination of volumetric flow rate.
9.0 Quality Control [Reserved]
10.0 Calibration and Standardization [Reserved]
11.0 Analytical Procedure
Same as section 11.0 of PS 2.
12.0 Calculations and Data Analysis
Same as section 12.0 of PS 2.
13.0 Method Performance
13.1 Calibration Drift. Since the CERMS includes analyzers for several measurements, the CD shall be determined separately for each analyzer in terms of its specific measurement. The calibration for each analyzer associated with the measurement of flow rate shall not drift or deviate from each reference value of flow rate by more than 3 percent of the respective high-level reference value over the CD test period (e.g., seven-day) associated with the pollutant analyzer. The CD specification for each analyzer for which other PSs have been established (e.g., PS 2 for SO2 and NOX), shall be the same as in the applicable PS.
13.2 CERMS Relative Accuracy. Calculate the CERMS Relative Accuracy (RA) expressed as a percentage using equation 2-6 of section 12 of PS 2. The RA of the CERMS shall be no greater than 20.0 percent in terms of the units of the emission standard. If the average emissions for the test are less than 50 percent of the applicable emission standard, you may elect to substitute the applicable emission standard value in the denominator of equation 2-6 in place of the average RM value; in this case, the RA of the CERMS shall be no greater than 10.0 percent consistent with section 13.2 of PS 2.
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 Alternative Procedures
Same as in section 16.0 of PS 2.
17.0 References
1. Brooks, E.F., E.C. Beder, C.A. Flegal, D.J. Luciani, and R. Williams. Continuous Measurement of Total Gas Flow Rate from Stationary Sources. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Research Triangle Park, North Carolina. Publication No. EPA-650/2-75-020. February 1975. 248 p.
18.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
| Run No. | Date and time | Emission rate (kg/hr)a | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| CERMS | RMs | Difference (RMs-CERMS) |
||
| 1 | ||||
| 2 | ||||
| 3 | ||||
| 4 | ||||
| 5 | ||||
| 6 | ||||
| 7 | ||||
| 8 | ||||
| 9 | ||||
| a The RMs and CERMS data as corrected to a consistent basis (i.e., moisture, temperature, and pressure conditions). |
Figure 6-1—Emission Rate Determinations
Performance Specification 7—Specifications and Test Procedures for Hydrogen Sulfide Continuous Emission Monitoring Systems in Stationary Sources
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Analytes.
| Analyte | CAS No. |
|---|---|
| Hydrogen Sulfide | 7783-06-4 |
1.2 Applicability.
1.2.1 This specification is to be used for evaluating the acceptability of hydrogen sulfide (H2S) continuous emission monitoring systems (CEMS) at the time of or soon after installation and whenever specified in an applicable subpart of the regulations.
1.2.2 This specification is not designed to evaluate the installed CEMS performance over an extended period of time nor does it identify specific calibration techniques and other auxiliary procedures to assess CEMS performance. The source owner or operator, however, is responsible to calibrate, maintain, and operate the CEMS. To evaluate CEMS performance, the Administrator may require, under section 114 of the Act, the source owner or operator to conduct CEMS performance evaluations at other times besides the initial test. See section 60.13(c).
2.0 Summary
Calibration drift (CD) and relative accuracy (RA) tests are conducted to determine that the CEMS conforms to the specification.
3.0 Definitions
Same as section 3.0 of PS 2.
4.0 Interferences [Reserved]
5.0 Safety
The procedures required under this performance specification may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This performance specification may not address all of the safety problems associated with these procedures. It is the responsibility of the user to establish appropriate safety problems associated with these procedures. It is the responsibility of the user to establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the application regulatory limitations prior to performing these procedures. The CEMS user's manual and materials recommended by the reference method should be consulted for specific precautions to be taken.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
6.1 Instrument Zero and Span. This specification is the same as section 6.1 of PS 2.
6.2 Calibration Drift. The CEMS calibration must not drift or deviate from the reference value of the calibration gas or reference source by more than 5 percent of the established span value for 6 out of 7 test days (e.g., the established span value is 300 ppm for Subpart J fuel gas combustion devices).
6.3 Relative Accuracy. The RA of the CEMS must be no greater than 20 percent when the average reference method (RM) value is used to calculate RA or 10 percent when the applicable emission standard is used to calculate RA.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
Same as section 7.0 of PS 2.
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport.
8.1 Installation and Measurement Location Specification. Same as section 8.1 of PS 2.
8.2 Pretest Preparation. Same as section 8.2 of PS 2.
8.3 Calibration Drift Test Procedure. Same as section 8.3 of PS 2.
8.4 Relative Accuracy Test Procedure.
8.4.1 Sampling Strategy for RM Tests, Number of RM Tests, Correlation of RM and CEMS Data, and Calculations. These are the same as that in PS-2, Sections 8.4.3 (except as specified below), 8.4.4, 8.4.5, and 8.4.6, respectively.
8.4.2 Reference Methods. Unless otherwise specified in an applicable subpart of the regulation, Methods 11, 15, and 16 may be used for the RM for this PS.
8.4.2.1 Sampling Time Per Run—Method 11. A sampling run, when Method 11 (integrated sampling) is used, shall consist of a single measurement for at least 10 minutes and 0.010 dscm (0.35 dscf). Each sample shall be taken at approximately 30-minute intervals.
8.4.2.2 Sampling Time Per Run—Methods 15 and 16. The sampling run shall consist of two injections equally spaced over a 30-minute period following the procedures described in the particular method. Note: Caution! Heater or non-approved electrical probes should not be used around explosive or flammable sources.
8.5 Reporting. Same as section 8.5 of PS 2.
9.0 Quality Control [Reserved]
10.0 Calibration and Standardizations [Reserved]
11.0 Analytical Procedures
Sample Collection and analysis are concurrent for this PS (see section 8.0). Refer to the RM for specific analytical procedures.
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
Same as section 12.0 of PS 2.
13.0 Method Performance [Reserved]
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 References
1. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Standards of Performance for New Stationary Sources; Appendix B; Performance Specifications 2 and 3 for SO2, NOX, CO2, and O2 Continuous Emission Monitoring Systems; Final Rule. 48 CFR 23608. Washington, D.C. U.S. Government Printing Office. May 25, 1983.
2. U.S. Government Printing Office. Gaseous Continuous Emission Monitoring Systems—Performance Specification Guidelines for SO2, NOX, CO2, O2, and TRS. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Washington, D.C. EPA-450/3-82-026. October 1982. 26 p.
3. Maines, G.D., W.C. Kelly (Scott Environmental Technology, Inc.), and J.B. Homolya. Evaluation of Monitors for Measuring H2S in Refinery Gas. Prepared for the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Research Triangle Park, N.C. Contract No. 68-02-2707. 1978. 60 p.
4. Ferguson, B.B., R.E. Lester (Harmon Engineering and Testing), and W.J. Mitchell. Field Evaluation of Carbon Monoxide and Hydrogen Sulfide Continuous Emission Monitors at an Oil Refinery. Prepared for the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Research Triangle Park, N.C. Publication No. EPA-600/4-82-054. August 1982. 100 p.
5. Letter to RAMCON Environmental Corp. from Robert Kellam, December 27, 1992.
17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
Same as section 18.0 of PS 2.
Performance Specification 8—Performance Specifications for Volatile Organic Compound Continuous Emission Monitoring Systems in Stationary Sources
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Analytes. Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs).
1.2 Applicability.
1.2.1 This specification is to be used for evaluating a continuous emission monitoring system (CEMS) that measures a mixture of VOC's and generates a single combined response value. The VOC detection principle may be flame ionization (FI), photoionization (PI), non-dispersive infrared absorption (NDIR), or any other detection principle that is appropriate for the VOC species present in the emission gases and that meets this performance specification. The performance specification includes procedures to evaluate the acceptability of the CEMS at the time of or soon after its installation and whenever specified in emission regulations or permits. This specification is not designed to evaluate the installed CEMS performance over an extended period of time, nor does it identify specific calibration techniques and other auxiliary procedures to assess the CEMS performance. The source owner or operator, however, is responsible to calibrate, maintain, and operate the CEMS properly. To evaluate the CEMS performance, the Administrator may require, under section 114 of the Act, the operator to conduct CEMS performance evaluations in addition to the initial test. See section 60.13(c).
1.2.2 In most emission circumstances, most VOC monitors can provide only a relative measure of the total mass or volume concentration of a mixture of organic gases, rather than an accurate quantification. This problem is removed when an emission standard is based on a total VOC measurement as obtained with a particular detection principle. In those situations where a true mass or volume VOC concentration is needed, the problem can be mitigated by using the VOC CEMS as a relative indicator of total VOC concentration if statistical analysis indicates that a sufficient margin of compliance exists for this approach to be acceptable. Otherwise, consideration can be given to calibrating the CEMS with a mixture of the same VOC's in the same proportions as they actually occur in the measured source. In those circumstances where only one organic species is present in the source, or where equal incremental amounts of each of the organic species present generate equal CEMS responses, the latter choice can be more easily achieved.
2.0 Summary of Performance Specification
2.1 Calibration drift and relative accuracy tests are conducted to determine adherence of the CEMS with specifications given for those items. The performance specifications include criteria for installation and measurement location, equipment and performance, and procedures for testing and data reduction.
3.0 Definitions.
Same as section 3.0 of PS 2.
4.0 Interferences [Reserved]
5.0 Safety
The procedures required under this performance specification may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This performance specification may not address all of the safety problems associated with these procedures. It is the responsibility of the user to establish appropriate safety problems associated with these procedures. It is the responsibility of the user to establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the application regulatory limitations prior to performing these procedures. The CEMS user's manual and materials recommended by the reference method should be consulted for specific precautions to be taken.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
6.1 VOC CEMS Selection. When possible, select a VOC CEMS with the detection principle of the reference method specified in the regulation or permit (usually either FI, NDIR, or PI). Otherwise, use knowledge of the source process chemistry, previous emission studies, or gas chromatographic analysis of the source gas to select an appropriate VOC CEMS. Exercise extreme caution in choosing and installing any CEMS in an area with explosive hazard potential.
6.2 Data Recorder Scale. Same as section 6.1 of PS 2.
7.0 Reagents and Standards [Reserved]
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport
8.1 Installation and Measurement Location Specifications. Same as section 8.1 of PS 2.
8.2 Pretest Preparation. Same as section 8.2 of PS 2.
8.3 Calibration Drift Test Procedure. Same as section 8.3 of PS 2.
8.4 Reference Method (RM). Use the method specified in the applicable regulation or permit, or any approved alternative, as the RM.
8.5 Sampling Strategy for RM Tests, Correlation of RM and CEMS Data, and Number of RM Tests. Follow PS 2, sections 8.4.3, 8.4.5, and 8.4.4, respectively.
8.6 Reporting. Same as section 8.5 of PS 2.
9.0 Quality Control [Reserved]
10.0 Calibration and Standardization [Reserved]
11.0 Analytical Procedure
Sample collection and analysis are concurrent for this PS (see section 8.0). Refer to the RM for specific analytical procedures.
12.0 Calculations and Data Analysis
Same as section 12.0 of PS 2.
13.0 Method Performance
13.1 Calibration Drift. The CEMS calibration must not drift by more than 2.5 percent of the span value.
13.2 CEMS Relative Accuracy. Unless stated otherwise in the regulation or permit, the RA of the CEMS must not be greater than 20 percent of the mean value of the RM test data in terms of the units of the emission standard, or 10 percent of the applicable standard, whichever is greater.
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 References
Same as section 17.0 of PS 2.
17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data [Reserved]
Performance Specification 8A—Specifications and Test Procedures for Total Hydrocarbon Continuous Monitoring Systems in Stationary Sources
1. Applicability and Principle
1.1 Applicability. These performance specifications apply to hydrocarbon (HC) continuous emission monitoring systems (CEMS) installed on stationary sources. The specifications include procedures which are intended to be used to evaluate the acceptability of the CEMS at the time of its installation or whenever specified in regulations or permits. The procedures are not designed to evaluate CEMS performance over an extended period of time. The source owner or operator is responsible for the proper calibration, maintenance, and operation of the CEMS at all times.
1.2 Principle. A gas sample is extracted from the source through a heated sample line and heated filter to a flame ionization detector (FID). Results are reported as volume concentration equivalents of propane. Installation and measurement location specifications, performance and equipment specifications, test and data reduction procedures, and brief quality assurance guidelines are included in the specifications. Calibration drift, calibration error, and response time tests are conducted to determine conformance of the CEMS with the specifications.
2. Definitions
2.1 Continuous Emission Monitoring System (CEMS). The total equipment used to acquire data, which includes sample extraction and transport hardware, analyzer, data recording and processing hardware, and software. The system consists of the following major subsystems:
2.1.1 Sample Interface. That portion of the system that is used for one or more of the following: Sample acquisition, sample transportation, sample conditioning, or protection of the analyzer from the effects of the stack effluent.
2.1.2 Organic Analyzer. That portion of the system that senses organic concentration and generates an output proportional to the gas concentration.
2.1.3 Data Recorder. That portion of the system that records a permanent record of the measurement values. The data recorder may include automatic data reduction capabilities.
2.2 Instrument Measurement Range. The difference between the minimum and maximum concentration that can be measured by a specific instrument. The minimum is often stated or assumed to be zero and the range expressed only as the maximum.
2.3 Span or Span Value. Full scale instrument measurement range. The span value must be documented by the CEMS manufacturer with laboratory data.
2.4 Calibration Gas. A known concentration of a gas in an appropriate diluent gas.
2.5 Calibration Drift (CD). The difference in the CEMS output readings from the established reference value after a stated period of operation during which no unscheduled maintenance, repair, or adjustment takes place. A CD test is performed to demonstrate the stability of the CEMS calibration over time.
2.6 Response Time. The time interval between the start of a step change in the system input (e.g., change of calibration gas) and the time when the data recorder displays 95 percent of the final value.
2.7 Accuracy. A measurement of agreement between a measured value and an accepted or true value, expressed as the percentage difference between the true and measured values relative to the true value. For these performance specifications, accuracy is checked by conducting a calibration error (CE) test.
2.8 Calibration Error (CE). The difference between the concentration indicated by the CEMS and the known concentration of the cylinder gas. A CE test procedure is performed to document the accuracy and linearity of the monitoring equipment over the entire measurement range.
2.9 Performance Specification Test (PST) Period. The period during which CD, CE, and response time tests are conducted.
2.10 Centroidal Area. A concentric area that is geometrically similar to the stack or duct cross section and is no greater than 1 percent of the stack or duct cross-sectional area.
3. Installation and Measurement Location Specifications
3.1 CEMS Installation and Measurement Locations. The CEMS must be installed in a location in which measurements representative of the source's emissions can be obtained. The optimum location of the sample interface for the CEMS is determined by a number of factors, including ease of access for calibration and maintenance, the degree to which sample conditioning will be required, the degree to which it represents total emissions, and the degree to which it represents the combustion situation in the firebox (where applicable). The location should be as free from in-leakage influences as possible and reasonably free from severe flow disturbances. The sample location should be at least two equivalent duct diameters downstream from the nearest control device, point of pollutant generation, or other point at which a change in the pollutant concentration or emission rate occurs and at least 0.5 diameter upstream from the exhaust or control device. The equivalent duct diameter is calculated as per 40 CFR part 60, appendix A, method 1, section 2.1. If these criteria are not achievable or if the location is otherwise less than optimum, the possibility of stratification should be investigated as described in section 3.2. The measurement point must be within the centroidal area of the stack or duct cross section.
3.2 Stratification Test Procedure. Stratification is defined as a difference in excess of 10 percent between the average concentration in the duct or stack and the concentration at any point more than 1.0 meter from the duct or stack wall. To determine whether effluent stratification exists, a dual probe system should be used to determine the average effluent concentration while measurements at each traverse point are being made. One probe, located at the stack or duct centroid, is used as a stationary reference point to indicate the change in effluent concentration over time. The second probe is used for sampling at the traverse points specified in 40 CFR part 60 appendix A, method 1. The monitoring system samples sequentially at the reference and traverse points throughout the testing period for five minutes at each point.
4. CEMS Performance and Equipment Specifications
If this method is applied in highly explosive areas, caution and care must be exercised in choice of equipment and installation.
4.1 Flame Ionization Detector (FID) Analyzer. A heated FID analyzer capable of meeting or exceeding the requirements of these specifications. Heated systems must maintain the temperature of the sample gas between 150 °C (300 °F) and 175 °C (350 °F) throughout the system. This requires all system components such as the probe, calibration valve, filter, sample lines, pump, and the FID to be kept heated at all times such that no moisture is condensed out of the system. The essential components of the measurement system are described below:
4.1.1 Sample Probe. Stainless steel, or equivalent, to collect a gas sample from the centroidal area of the stack cross-section.
4.1.2 Sample Line. Stainless steel or Teflon tubing to transport the sample to the analyzer.
5. Performance Specification Test (PST) Periods
5.1 Pretest Preparation Period. Install the CEMS, prepare the PTM test site according to the specifications in section 3, and prepare the CEMS for operation and calibration according to the manufacturer's written instructions. A pretest conditioning period similar to that of the 7-day CD test is recommended to verify the operational status of the CEMS.
5.2 Calibration Drift Test Period. While the facility is operating under normal conditions, determine the magnitude of the CD at 24-hour intervals for seven consecutive days according to the procedure given in section 6.1. All CD determinations must be made following a 24-hour period during which no unscheduled maintenance, repair, or adjustment takes place. If the combustion unit is taken out of service during the test period, record the onset and duration of the downtime and continue the CD test when the unit resumes operation.
5.3 Calibration Error Test and Response Time Test Periods. Conduct the CE and response time tests during the CD test period.
6. Performance Specification Test Procedures
6.1 Relative Accuracy Test Audit (RATA) and Absolute Calibration Audits (ACA). The test procedures described in this section are in lieu of a RATA and ACA.
6.2 Calibration Drift Test.
6.2.1 Sampling Strategy. Conduct the CD test at 24-hour intervals for seven consecutive days using calibration gases at the two daily concentration levels specified in section 4.3. Introduce the two calibration gases into the sampling system as close to the sampling probe outlet as practical. The gas must pass through all CEM components used during normal sampling. If periodic automatic or manual adjustments are made to the CEMS zero and calibration settings, conduct the CD test immediately before these adjustments, or conduct it in such a way that the CD can be determined. Record the CEMS response and subtract this value from the reference (calibration gas) value. To meet the specification, none of the differences may exceed 3 percent of the span of the CEM.
6.2.2 Calculations. Summarize the results on a data sheet. An example is shown in Figure 1. Calculate the differences between the CEMS responses and the reference values.
6.3 Response Time. The entire system including sample extraction and transport, sample conditioning, gas analyses, and the data recording is checked with this procedure.
6.3.1 Introduce the calibration gases at the probe as near to the sample location as possible. Introduce the zero gas into the system. When the system output has stabilized (no change greater than 1 percent of full scale for 30 sec), switch to monitor stack effluent and wait for a stable value. Record the time (upscale response time) required to reach 95 percent of the final stable value.
6.3.2 Next, introduce a high-level calibration gas and repeat the above procedure. Repeat the entire procedure three times and determine the mean upscale and downscale response times. The longer of the two means is the system response time.
6.4 Calibration Error Test Procedure.
6.4.1 Sampling Strategy. Challenge the CEMS with zero gas and EPA Protocol 1 cylinder gases at measurement points within the ranges specified in section 4.7.
6.4.1.1 The daily calibration gases, if Protocol 1, may be used for this test.
6.4.1.2 Operate the CEMS as nearly as possible in its normal sampling mode. The calibration gas should be injected into the sampling system as close to the sampling probe outlet as practical and must pass through all filters, scrubbers, conditioners, and other monitor components used during normal sampling. Challenge the CEMS three non-consecutive times at each measurement point and record the responses. The duration of each gas injection should be for a sufficient period of time to ensure that the CEMS surfaces are conditioned.
6.4.2 Calculations. Summarize the results on a data sheet. An example data sheet is shown in Figure 2. Average the differences between the instrument response and the certified cylinder gas value for each gas. Calculate three CE results according to Equation 1. No confidence coefficient is used in CE calculations.
7. Equations
Calibration Error. Calculate CE using Equation 1.
Where:
d = Mean difference between CEMS response and the known reference concentration, determined using Equation 2.
Where:
di = Individual difference between CEMS response and the known reference concentration.
8. Reporting
At a minimum, summarize in tabular form the results of the CD, response time, and CE test, as appropriate. Include all data sheets, calculations, CEMS data records, and cylinder gas or reference material certifications.
9. References
1. Measurement of Volatile Organic Compounds-Guideline Series. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, North Carolina, 27711, EPA-450/2-78-041, June 1978.
2. Traceability Protocol for Establishing True Concentrations of Gases Used for Calibration and Audits of Continuous Source Emission Monitors (Protocol No. 1). U.S. Environmental Protection Agency ORD/EMSL, Research Triangle Park, North Carolina, 27711, June 1978.
3. Gasoline Vapor Emission Laboratory Evaluation-Part 2. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, OAQPS, Research Triangle Park, North Carolina, 27711, EMB Report No. 76-GAS-6, August 1975.
Performance Specification 9—Specifications and Test Procedures for Gas Chromatographic Continuous Emission Monitoring Systems in Stationary Sources
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Applicability. These requirements apply to continuous emission monitoring systems (CEMSs) that use gas chromatography (GC) to measure gaseous organic compound emissions. The requirements include procedures intended to evaluate the acceptability of the CEMS at the time of its installation and whenever specified in regulations or permits. Quality assurance procedures for calibrating, maintaining, and operating the CEMS properly at all times are also given in this procedure.
2.0 Summary of Performance Specification
2.1 Calibration precision, calibration error, and performance audit tests are conducted to determine conformance of the CEMS with these specifications. Daily calibration and maintenance requirements are also specified.
3.0 Definitions
3.1 Gas Chromatograph (GC). That portion of the system that separates and detects organic analytes and generates an output proportional to the gas concentration. The GC must be temperature controlled.
3.1.1 Column. Analytical column capable of separating the analytes of interest.
3.1.2 Detector. A detection system capable of detecting and quantifying all analytes of interest.
3.1.3 Integrator. That portion of the system that quantifies the area under a particular sample peak generated by the GC.
3.1.4 Data Recorder. A strip chart recorder, computer, or digital recorder capable of recording all readings within the instrument's calibration range.
3.2 Calibration Precision. The error between triplicate injections of each calibration standard.
4.0 Interferences [Reserved]
5.0 Safety
The procedures required under this performance specification may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This performance specification does not purport to address all of the safety problems associated with these procedures. It is the responsibility of the user to establish appropriate safety problems associated with these procedures. It is the responsibility of the user to establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the application regulatory limitations prior to performing these procedures. The CEMS user's manual and materials recommended by the reference method should be consulted for specific precautions to be taken.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
6.1 Presurvey Sample Analysis and GC Selection. Determine the pollutants to be monitored from the applicable regulation or permit and determine the approximate concentration of each pollutant (this information can be based on past compliance test results). Select an appropriate GC configuration to measure the organic compounds. The GC components should include a heated sample injection loop (or other sample introduction systems), separatory column, temperature-controlled oven, and detector. If the source chooses dual column and/or dual detector configurations, each column/detector is considered a separate instrument for the purpose of this performance specification and thus the procedures in this performance specification shall be carried out on each system. If this method is applied in highly explosive areas, caution should be exercised in selecting the equipment and method of installation.
6.2 Sampling System. The sampling system shall be heat traced and maintained at a minimum of 120 °C with no cold spots. All system components shall be heated, including the probe, calibration valve, sample lines, sampling loop (or sample introduction system), GC oven, and the detector block (when appropriate for the type of detector being utilized, e.g., flame ionization detector).
7.0 Reagents and Standards
7.1 Calibration Gases. Obtain three concentrations of calibration gases certified by the manufacturer to be accurate to within 2 percent of the value on the label. A gas dilution system may be used to prepare the calibration gases from a high concentration certified standard if the gas dilution system meets the requirements specified in Test Method 205, 40 CFR Part 51, Appendix M. The performance test specified in Test Method 205 shall be repeated quarterly, and the results of the Method 205 test shall be included in the report. The calibration gas concentration of each target analyte shall be as follows (measured concentration is based on the presurvey concentration determined in section 6.1).
7.1.1 Low-level. 40-60 percent of measured concentration.
7.1.2 Mid-level. 90-110 percent of measured concentration.
7.1.3 High-level. 140-160 percent of measured concentration, or select highest expected concentration.
7.2 Performance Audit Gas. Performance Audit Gas is an independent cylinder gas or cylinder gas mixture. A certified EPA audit gas shall be used, when possible. A gas mixture containing all the target compounds within the calibration range and certified by EPA's Traceability Protocol for Assay and Certification of Gaseous Calibration Standards may be used when EPA performance audit materials are not available. If a certified EPA audit gas or a traceability protocol gas is not available, use a gas manufacturer standard accurate to 2 percent.
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport
8.1 Installation and Measurement Location Specifications. Install the CEMs in a location where the measurements are representative of the source emissions. Consider other factors, such as ease of access for calibration and maintenance purposes. The location should not be close to air in-leakages. The sampling location should be at least two equivalent duct diameters downstream from the nearest control device, point of pollutant generation, or other point at which a change in the pollutant concentration or emission rate occurs. The location should be at least 0.5 diameter upstream from the exhaust or control device. To calculate equivalent duct diameter, see section 12.2 of Method 1 (40 CFR Part 60, Appendix A). Sampling locations not conforming to the requirements in this section may be used if necessary upon approval of the Administrator.
8.2 Pretest Preparation Period. Using the procedures described in Method 18
(40 CFR Part 60, Appendix A), perform initial tests to determine GC conditions that provide good resolution and minimum analysis time for compounds of interest. Resolution interferences that may occur can be eliminated by appropriate GC column and detector choice or by shifting the retention times through changes in the column flow rate and the use of temperature programming.
8.3 Seven (7)-Day Calibration Error (CE) Test Period. At the beginning of each 24-hour period, set the initial instrument set points by conducting a multi-point calibration for each compound. The multi-point calibration shall meet the requirements in sections 13.1, 13.2, and 13.3. Throughout the 24-hour period, sample and analyze the stack gas at the sampling intervals prescribed in the regulation or permit. At the end of the 24-hour period, inject the calibration gases at three concentrations for each compound in triplicate and determine the average instrument response. Determine the CE for each pollutant at each concentration using Equation 9-2. Each CE shall be ≤10 percent. Repeat this procedure six more times for a total of 7 consecutive days.
8.4 Performance Audit Test Periods. Conduct the performance audit once during the initial 7-day CE test and quarterly thereafter. Performance Audit Tests must be conducted through the entire sampling and analyzer system. Sample and analyze the EPA audit gas(es) (or the gas mixture) three times. Calculate the average instrument response. Results from the performance audit test must meet the requirements in sections 13.3 and 13.4.
8.5 Reporting. Follow the reporting requirements of the applicable regulation or permit. If the reporting requirements include the results of this performance specification, summarize in tabular form the results of the CE tests. Include all data sheets, calculations, CEMS data records, performance audit results, and calibration gas concentrations and certifications.
9.0 Quality Control [Reserved]
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
10.1 Multi-Point Calibration. After initial startup of the GC, after routine maintenance or repair, or at least once per month, conduct a multi-point calibration of the GC for each target analyte. Calibration is performed at the instrument independent of the sample transport system. The multi-point calibration for each analyte shall meet the requirements in sections 13.1, 13.2, and 13.3.
10.2 Daily Calibration. Once every 24 hours, analyze the mid-level calibration standard for each analyte in triplicate. Calibration is performed at the instrument independent of the sample transport system. Calculate the average instrument response for each analyte. The average instrument response shall not vary by more than 10 percent from the certified concentration value of the cylinder for each analyte. If the difference between the analyzer response and the cylinder concentration for any target compound is greater than 10 percent, immediately inspect the instrument making any necessary adjustments, and conduct an initial multi-point calibration as described in section 10.1.
11.0 Analytical Procedure. Sample Collection and Analysis Are Concurrent for This Performance Specification (See section 8.0)
12.0 Calculations and Data Analysis
12.1 Nomenclature.
Cm = average instrument response, ppm.
Ca = cylinder gas value, ppm.
F = Flow rate of stack gas through sampling system, in Liters/min.
n = Number of measurement points.
r 2 = Coefficient of determination.
V = Sample system volume, in Liters, which is the volume inside the sample probe and tubing leading from the stack to the sampling loop.
x = CEMS response.
y = Actual value of calibration standard.
12.2 Coefficient of Determination. Calculate r 2 using linear regression analysis and the average concentrations obtained at three calibration points as shown in Equation 9-1.
12.3 Calibration Error Determination. Determine the percent calibration error (CE) at each concentration for each pollutant using the following equation.
12.4 Sampling System Time Constant (T).
13.0 Method Performance
13.1 Calibration Error (CE). The CEMS must allow the determination of CE at all three calibration levels. The average CEMS calibration response must not differ by more than 10 percent of calibration gas value at each level after each 24-hour period and after any triplicate calibration response check.
13.2 Calibration Precision and Linearity. For each triplicate injection at each concentration level for each target analyte, any one injection shall not deviate more than 5 percent from the average concentration measured at that level. When the CEMS response is evaluated over three concentration levels, the linear regression curve for each organic compound shall be determined using Equation 9-1 and must have an r 2 ≥0.995.
13.3 Measurement Frequency. The sample to be analyzed shall flow continuously through the sampling system. The sampling system time constant shall be ≤5 minutes or the sampling frequency specified in the applicable regulation, whichever is less. Use Equation 9-3 to determine T. The analytical system shall be capable of measuring the effluent stream at the frequency specified in the appropriate regulation or permit.
13.4 Audit Test Error. Determine the error for each average pollutant measurement using the Equation 9-2 in section 12.3. Each error shall be less than or equal to 10 percent of the cylinder gas certified value. Report the audit results including the average measured concentration, the error and the certified cylinder concentration of each pollutant as part of the reporting requirements in the appropriate regulation or permit.
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 References [Reserved]
17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data [Reserved]
Performance Specification 11—Specifications and Test Procedures for Particulate Matter Continuous Emission Monitoring Systems at Stationary Sources
1.0 What Are the Purpose and Applicability of Performance Specification 11?
The purpose of Performance Specification 11 (PS-11) is to establish the initial installation and performance procedures that are required for evaluating the acceptability of a particulate matter (PM) continuous emission monitoring system (CEMS); it is not to evaluate the ongoing performance of your PM CEMS over an extended period of time, nor to identify specific calibration techniques and auxiliary procedures to assess CEMS performance. You will find procedures for evaluating the ongoing performance of a PM CEMS in Procedure 2 of Appendix F—Quality Assurance Requirements for Particulate Matter Continuous Emission Monitoring Systems Used at Stationary Sources.
1.1 Under what conditions does PS-11 apply to my PM CEMS? The PS-11 applies to your PM CEMS if you are required by any provision of Title 40 of the Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) to install and operate PM CEMS.
1.2 When must I comply with PS-11? You must comply with PS-11 when directed by the applicable rule that requires you to install and operate a PM CEMS.
1.3 What other monitoring must I perform? To report your PM emissions in units of the emission standard, you may need to monitor additional parameters to correct the PM concentration reported by your PM CEMS. Your CEMS may include the components listed in paragraphs (1) through (3) of this section:
(1) A diluent monitor (i.e., O2, CO2, or other CEMS specified in the applicable regulation), which must meet its own performance specifications (also found in this appendix),
(2) Auxiliary monitoring equipment to allow measurement, determination, or input of the flue gas temperature, pressure, moisture content, and/or dry volume of stack effluent sampled, and
(3) An automatic sampling system. The performance of your PM CEMS and the establishment of its correlation to manual reference method measurements must be determined in units of mass concentration as measured by your PM CEMS (e.g., milligrams per actual cubic meter (mg/acm) or milligrams per dry standard cubic meter (mg/dscm)).
2.0 What Are the Basic Requirements of PS-11?
The PS-11 requires you to perform initial installation and calibration procedures that confirm the acceptability of your CEMS when it is installed and placed into operation. You must develop a site-specific correlation of your PM CEMS response against manual gravimetric reference method measurements (including those made using EPA Methods 5, 5I, or 17).
2.1 What types of PM CEMS technologies are covered? Several different types of PM CEMS technologies (e.g., light scattering, Beta attenuation, etc.) can be designed with in-situ or extractive sample gas handling systems. Each PM CEMS technology and sample gas handling technology has certain site-specific advantages. You should select and install a PM CEMS that is appropriate for the flue gas conditions at your source.
2.2 How is PS-11 different from other performance specifications? The PS-11 is based on a technique of correlating PM CEMS responses relative to emission concentrations determined by the reference method. This technique is called “the correlation.” This differs from CEMS used to measure gaseous pollutants that have available calibration gases of known concentration. Because the type and characteristics of PM vary from source to source, a single PM correlation, applicable to all sources, is not possible.
2.3 How are the correlation data handled? You must carefully review your manual reference method data and your PM CEMS responses to include only valid, high-quality data. For the correlation, you must convert the manual reference method data to measurement conditions (e.g., wet or dry basis) that are consistent with your PM CEMS. Then, you must correlate the manual method and PM CEMS data in terms of the output as received from the monitor (e.g., milliamps). At the appropriate PM CEMS response specified in section 13.2 of this performance specification, you must calculate the confidence interval half range and tolerance interval half range as a percentage of the applicable PM concentration emission limit and compare the confidence interval and tolerance interval percentages with the performance criteria. Also, you must calculate the correlation coefficient and compare the correlation coefficient with the applicable performance criterion specified in section 13.2 of this performance specification.
Situations may arise where you will need two or more correlations. If you need multiple correlations, you must collect sufficient data for each correlation, and each correlation must satisfy the performance criteria specified in section 13.2 of this performance specification.
2.4 How do I design my PM CEMS correlation program? When planning your PM CEMS correlation effort, you must address each of the items in paragraphs (1) through (7) of this section to enhance the probability of success. You will find each of these elements further described in this performance specification or in the applicable reference method procedure.
(1) What type of PM CEMS should I select? You should select a PM CEMS that is appropriate for your source with technical consideration for potential factors such as interferences, site-specific configurations, installation location, flue gas conditions, PM concentration range, and other PM characteristics. You can find guidance on which technology is best suited for specific situations in our report “Current Knowledge of Particulate Matter (PM) Continuous Emission Monitoring” (PM CEMS Knowledge Document, see section 16.5).
(2) Where should I install my PM CEMS? Your PM CEMS must be installed in a location that is most representative of PM emissions, as determined by the reference method, such that the correlation between PM CEMS response and emissions determined by the reference method will meet these performance specifications. Care must be taken in selecting a location and measurement point to minimize problems due to flow disturbances, cyclonic flow, and varying PM stratification.
(3) How should I record my CEMS data? You need to ensure that your PM CEMS and data logger are set up to collect and record all normal emission levels and excursions. You must ensure that your data logger and PM CEMS have been properly programmed to accept and transfer status signals of valid monitor operation (e.g., flags for internal calibration, suspect data, or maintenance periods).
(4) What CEMS data should I review? You must review drift data daily to document proper operation. You must also ensure that any audit material is appropriate for the typical operating range of your PM CEMS.
(5) How long should I operate my PM CEMS before conducting the initial correlation test? You should allow sufficient time for your PM CEMS to operate for you to become familiar with your PM CEMS.
(i) You should observe PM CEMS response over time during normal and varying process conditions. This will ensure that your PM CEMS has been properly set up to operate at a range that is compatible with the concentrations and characteristics of PM emissions for your source. You should use this information to establish the range of operating conditions necessary to determine the correlations of PM CEMS data to manual reference method measurements over a wide operating range.
(ii) You must determine the types of process changes that will influence, on a definable and repeatable basis, flue gas PM concentrations and the resulting PM CEMS responses. You may find this period useful to make adjustments to your planned approach for operating your PM CEMS at your source. For instance, you may change the measurement range or batch sampling period to something other than those you initially planned to use.
(6) How do I conduct the initial correlation test? When conducting the initial correlation test of your PM CEMS response to PM emissions determined by the reference method, you must pay close attention to accuracy and details. Your PM CEMS must be operating properly. You must perform the manual reference method testing accurately, with attention to eliminating site-specific systemic errors. You must coordinate the timing of the manual reference method testing with the sampling cycle of your PM CEMS. You must complete a minimum of 15 manual reference method tests. You must perform the manual reference method testing over the full range of PM CEMS responses that correspond to normal operating conditions for your source and control device and will result in the widest range of emission concentrations.
(7) How should I perform the manual reference method testing? You must perform the manual reference method testing in accordance with specific rule requirements, coordinated closely with PM CEMS and process operations. It is highly recommended that you use paired trains for the manual reference method testing. You must perform the manual reference method testing over a suitable PM concentration range that corresponds to the full range of normal process and control device operating conditions. Because the manual reference method testing for this correlation test is not for compliance reporting purposes, you may conduct the reference method test runs for less than the typical minimum test run duration of 1 hour.
(8) What do I do with the manual reference method data and PM CEMS data? You must complete each of the activities in paragraphs (8)(i) through (v) of this section.
(i) Screen the manual reference method data for validity (e.g., isokinetics, leak checks), quality assurance, and quality control (e.g., outlier identification).
(ii) Screen your PM CEMS data for validity (e.g., daily drift check requirements) and quality assurance (e.g., flagged data).
(iii) Convert the manual reference method test data into measurement units (e.g., mg/acm) consistent with the measurement conditions of your PM CEMS.
(iv) Calculate the correlation equation(s) as specified in section 12.3.
(v) Calculate the correlation coefficient, confidence interval half range, and tolerance interval half range for the complete set of PM CEMS and reference method correlation data for comparison with the correlation performance criteria specified in section 13.2.
2.5 What other procedures must I perform? Before conducting the initial correlation test, you must successfully complete a 7-day drift test (See section 8.5).
3.0 What Special Definitions Apply to PS-11?
3.1 “Appropriate Measurement Range of your PM CEMS” means a measurement range that is capable of recording readings over the complete range of your source's PM emission concentrations during routine operations. The appropriate range is determined during the pretest preparations as specified in section 8.4.
3.2 “Appropriate Data Range for PM CEMS Correlation” means the data range that reflects the full range of your source's PM emission concentrations recorded by your PM CEMS during the correlation test planning period or other normal operations as defined in the applicable regulations.
3.3 “Batch Sampling” means that gas is sampled on an intermittent basis and concentrated on a collection medium before intermittent analysis and follow-up reporting. Beta gauge PM CEMS are an example of batch sampling devices.
3.4 “Confidence Interval Half Range (CI)” is a statistical term and means one-half of the width of the 95 percent confidence interval around the predicted mean PM concentration (y value) calculated at the PM CEMS response value (x value) where the confidence interval is narrowest. Procedures for calculating CI are specified in section 12.3. The CI as a percent of the emission limit value (CI%) is calculated at the appropriate PM CEMS response value and must satisfy the criteria specified in section 13.2 (2).
3.5 “Continuous Emission Monitoring System (CEMS)” means all of the equipment required for determination of PM mass concentration in units of the emission standard. The sample interface, pollutant monitor, diluent monitor, other auxiliary data monitor(s), and data recorder are the major subsystems of your CEMS.
3.6 “Correlation” means the primary mathematical relationship for correlating the output from your PM CEMS to a PM concentration, as determined by the PM reference method. The correlation is expressed in the measurement units that are consistent with the measurement conditions (e.g., mg/dscm, mg/acm) of your PM CEMS.
3.7 “Correlation Coefficient (r)” means a quantitative measure of the association between your PM CEMS outputs and the reference method measurements. Equations for calculating the r value are provided in section 12.3(1)(iv) for linear correlations and in section 12.3(2)(iv) for polynomial correlations.
3.8 “Cycle Time” means the time required to complete one sampling, measurement, and reporting cycle. For a batch sampling PM CEMS, the cycle time would start when sample gas is first extracted from the stack/duct and end when the measurement of that batch sample is complete and a new result for that batch sample is produced on the data recorder.
3.9 “Data Recorder” means the portion of your CEMS that provides a permanent record of the monitor output in terms of response and status (flags). The data recorder may also provide automatic data reduction and CEMS control capabilities (see section 6.6).
3.10 “Diluent Monitor and Other Auxiliary Data Monitor(s) (if applicable)” means the portion of your CEMS that provides the diluent gas concentration (such as O2 or CO2, as specified by the applicable regulations), temperature, pressure, and/or moisture content, and generates an output proportional to the diluent gas concentration or gas property.
3.11 “Drift Check” means a check of the difference between your PM CEMS output readings and the established reference value of a reference standard or procedure after a stated period of operation during which no unscheduled maintenance, repair, or adjustment took place. The procedures used to determine drift are specific to the operating principles of your specific PM CEMS. A drift check includes both a zero drift check and an upscale drift check.
3.12 “Exponential Correlation” means an exponential equation used to define the relationship between your PM CEMS output and the reference method PM concentration, as indicated by Equation 11-37.
3.13 “Flagged Data” means data marked by your CEMS indicating that the response value(s) from one or more CEMS subsystems is suspect or invalid or that your PM CEMS is not in source-measurement operating mode.
3.14 “Linear Correlation” means a first-order mathematical relationship between your PM CEMS output and the reference method PM concentration that is linear in form, as indicated by Equation 11-3.
3.15 “Logarithmic Correlation” means a first-order mathematical relationship between the natural logarithm of your PM CEMS output and the reference method PM concentration that is linear in form, as indicated by Equation 11-34.
3.16 “Low-Emitting Source” means a source that operated at no more than 50 percent of the emission limit during the most recent performance test, and, based on the PM CEMS correlation, the daily average emissions for the source, measured in the units of the applicable emission limit, have not exceeded 50 percent of the emission limit for any day since the most recent performance test.
3.17 “Paired Trains” means two reference method trains that are used to conduct simultaneous measurements of PM concentrations. Guidance on the use of paired sampling trains can be found in the PM CEMS Knowledge Document (see section 16.5).
3.18 “Polynomial Correlation” means a second-order equation used to define the relationship between your PM CEMS output and reference method PM concentration, as indicated by Equation 11-16.
3.19 “Power Correlation” means an equation used to define a power function relationship between your PM CEMS output and the reference method concentration, as indicated by Equation 11-42.
3.20 “Reference Method” means the method defined in the applicable regulations, but commonly refers to those methods collectively known as EPA Methods 5, 5I, and 17 (for particulate matter), found in Appendix A of 40 CFR 60. Only the front half and dry filter catch portions of the reference method can be correlated to your PM CEMS output.
3.21 “Reference Standard” means a reference material or procedure that produces a known and unchanging response when presented to the pollutant monitor portion of your CEMS. You must use these standards to evaluate the overall operation of your PM CEMS, but not to develop a PM CEMS correlation.
3.22 “Response Time” means the time interval between the start of a step change in the system input and the time when the pollutant monitor output reaches 95 percent of the final value (see sections 6.5 and 13.3 for procedures and acceptance criteria).
3.23 “Sample Interface” means the portion of your CEMS used for one or more of the following: sample acquisition, sample delivery, sample conditioning, or protection of the monitor from the effects of the stack effluent.
3.24 “Sample Volume Check” means a check of the difference between your PM CEMS sample volume reading and the sample volume reference value.
3.25 “Tolerance Interval half range (TI)” means one-half of the width of the tolerance interval with upper and lower limits, within which a specified percentage of the future data population is contained with a given level of confidence, as defined by the respective tolerance interval half range equations in section 12.3(1)(iii) for linear correlations and in section 12.3(2)(iii) for polynomial correlations. The TI as a percent of the emission limit value (TI%) is calculated at the appropriate PM CEMS response value specified in section 13.2(3).
3.26 “Upscale Check Value” means the expected response to a reference standard or procedure used to check the upscale response of your PM CEMS.
3.27 “Upscale Drift (UD) Check” means a check of the difference between your PM CEMS output reading and the upscale check value.
3.28 “Zero Check Value” means the expected response to a reference standard or procedure used to check the response of your PM CEMS to particulate-free or low-particulate concentration conditions.
3.29 “Zero Drift (ZD) Check” means a check of the difference between your PM CEMS output reading and the zero check value.
3.30 “Zero Point Correlation Value” means a value added to PM CEMS correlation data to represent low or near zero PM concentration data (see section 8.6 for rationale and procedures).
4.0 Are There Any Potential Interferences for My PM CEMS?
Yes, condensible water droplets or condensible acid gas aerosols (i.e., those with condensation temperatures above those specified by the reference method) at the measurement location can be interferences for your PM CEMS if the necessary precautions are not met.
4.1 Where are interferences likely to occur? Interferences may develop if your CEMS is installed downstream of a wet air pollution control system or any other conditions that produce flue gases, which, at your PM CEMS measurement point, normally or occasionally contain entrained water droplets or condensible salts before release to the atmosphere.
4.2 How do I deal with interferences? We recommend that you use a PM CEMS that extracts and heats representative samples of the flue gas for measurement to simulate results produced by the reference method for conditions such as those described in section 4.1. Independent of your PM CEMS measurement technology and extractive technique, you should have a configuration simulating the reference method to ensure that:
(1) No formation of new PM or deposition of PM occurs in sample delivery from the stack or duct; and
(2) No condensate accumulates in the sample flow measurement apparatus.
4.3 What PM CEMS measurement technologies should I use? You should use a PM CEMS measurement technology that is free of interferences from any condensible constituent in the flue gas.
5.0 What Do I Need To Know To Ensure the Safety of Persons Using PS-11?
People using the procedures required under PS-11 may be exposed to hazardous materials, operations, site conditions, and equipment. This performance specification does not purport to address all of the safety issues associated with its use. It is your responsibility to establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicable regulatory limitations before performing these procedures. You must consult your CEMS user's manual and other reference materials recommended by the reference method for specific precautions to be taken.
6.0 What Equipment and Supplies Do I Need?
Different types of PM CEMS use different operating principles. You should select an appropriate PM CEMS based on your site-specific configurations, flue gas conditions, and PM characteristics.
(1) Your PM CEMS must sample the stack effluent continuously or, for batch sampling PM CEMS, intermittently.
(2) You must ensure that the averaging time, the number of measurements in an average, the minimum data availability, and the averaging procedure for your CEMS conform with those specified in the applicable emission regulation.
(3) Your PM CEMS must include, as a minimum, the equipment described in sections 6.1 through 6.7.
6.1 What equipment is needed for my PM CEMS's sample interface? Your PM CEMS's sample interface must be capable of delivering a representative sample of the flue gas to your PM CEMS. This subsystem may be required to heat the sample gas to avoid PM deposition or moisture condensation, provide dilution air, perform other gas conditioning to prepare the sample for analysis, or measure the sample volume or flow rate.
(1) If your PM CEMS is installed downstream of a wet air pollution control system such that the flue gases normally or occasionally contain entrained water droplets, we recommend that you select a sampling system that includes equipment to extract and heat a representative sample of the flue gas for measurement so that the pollutant monitor portion of your CEMS measures only dry PM. Heating should be sufficient to raise the temperature of the extracted flue gas above the water condensation temperature and should be maintained at all times and at all points in the sample line from where the flue gas is extracted, including the pollutant monitor and any sample flow measurement devices.
(2) You must consider the measured conditions of the sample gas stream to ensure that manual reference method test data are converted to units of PM concentration that are appropriate for the correlation calculations. Additionally, you must identify what, if any, additional auxiliary data from other monitoring and handling systems are necessary to convert your PM CEMS response into the units of the PM standard.
(3) If your PM CEMS is an extractive type and your source's flue gas volumetric flow rate varies by more than 10 percent from nominal, your PM CEMS should maintain an isokinetic sampling rate (within 10 percent of true isokinetic). If your extractive-type PM CEMS does not maintain an isokinetic sampling rate, you must use actual site-specific data or data from a similar installation to prove to us, the State, and/or local enforcement agency that isokinetic sampling is not necessary.
6.2 What type of equipment is needed for my PM CEMS? Your PM CEMS must be capable of providing an electronic output that can be correlated to the PM concentration.
(1) Your PM CEMS must be able to perform zero and upscale drift checks. You may perform these checks manually, but performing these checks automatically is preferred.
(2) We recommend that you select a PM CEMS that is capable of performing automatic diagnostic checks and sending instrument status signals (flags) to the data recorder.
(3) If your PM CEMS is an extractive type that measures the sample volume and uses the measured sample volume as part of calculating the output value, your PM CEMS must be able to perform a check of the sample volume to verify the accuracy of the sample volume measuring equipment. The sample volume check must be conducted daily and at the normal sampling rate of your PM CEMS.
6.3 What is the appropriate measurement range for my PM CEMS? Initially, your PM CEMS must be set up to measure over the expected range of your source's PM emission concentrations during routine operations. You may change the measurement range to a more appropriate range prior to correlation testing.
6.4 What if my PM CEMS does automatic range switching? Your PM CEMS may be equipped to perform automatic range switching so that it is operating in a range most sensitive to the detected concentrations. If your PM CEMS does automatic range switching, you must configure the data recorder to handle the recording of data values in multiple ranges during range-switching intervals.
6.5 What averaging time and sample intervals should be used? Your CEMS must sample the stack effluent such that the averaging time, the number of measurements in an average, the minimum sampling time, and the averaging procedure for reporting and determining compliance conform with those specified in the applicable regulation. Your PM CEMS must be designed to meet the specified response time and cycle time established in this performance specification (see section 13.3).
6.6 What type of equipment is needed for my data recorder? Your CEMS data recorder must be able to accept and record electronic signals from all the monitors associated with your PM CEMS.
(1) Your data recorder must record the signals from your PM CEMS that can be correlated to PM mass concentrations. If your PM CEMS uses multiple ranges, your data recorder must identify what range the measurement was made in and provide range-adjusted results.
(2) Your data recorder must accept and record monitor status signals (flagged data).
(3) Your data recorder must accept signals from auxiliary data monitors, as appropriate.
6.7 What other equipment and supplies might I need? You may need other supporting equipment as defined by the applicable reference method(s) (see section 7) or as specified by your CEMS manufacturer.
7.0 What Reagents and Standards Do I Need?
You will need reference standards or procedures to perform the zero drift check, the upscale drift check, and the sample volume check.
7.1 What is the reference standard value for the zero drift check? You must use a zero check value that is no greater than 20 percent of the PM CEMS's response range. You must obtain documentation on the zero check value from your PM CEMS manufacturer.
7.2 What is the reference standard value for the upscale drift check? You must use an upscale check value that produces a response between 50 and 100 percent of the PM CEMS's response range. For a PM CEMS that produces output over a range of 4 mA to 20 mA, the upscale check value must produce a response in the range of 12 mA to 20 mA. You must obtain documentation on the upscale check value from your PM CEMS manufacturer.
7.3 What is the reference standard value for the sample volume check? You must use a reference standard value or procedure that produces a sample volume value equivalent to the normal sampling rate. You must obtain documentation on the sample volume value from your PM CEMS manufacturer.
8.0 What Performance Specification Test Procedure Do I Follow?
You must complete each of the activities in sections 8.1 through 8.8 for your performance specification test.
8.1 How should I select and set up my equipment? You should select a PM CEMS that is appropriate for your source, giving consideration to potential factors such as flue gas conditions, interferences, site-specific configuration, installation location, PM concentration range, and other PM characteristics. Your PM CEMS must meet the equipment specifications in sections 6.1 and 6.2.
(1) You should select a PM CEMS that is appropriate for the flue gas conditions at your source. If your source's flue gas contains entrained water droplets, we recommend that your PM CEMS include a sample delivery and conditioning system that is capable of extracting and heating a representative sample.
(i) Your PM CEMS must maintain the sample at a temperature sufficient to prevent moisture condensation in the sample line before analysis of PM.
(ii) If condensible PM is an issue, we recommend that you operate your PM CEMS to maintain the sample gas temperature at the same temperature as the reference method filter.
(iii) Your PM CEMS must avoid condensation in the sample flow rate measurement lines.
(2) Some PM CEMS do not have a wide measurement range capability. Therefore, you must select a PM CEMS that is capable of measuring the full range of PM concentrations expected from your source from normal levels through the emission limit concentration.
(3) Some PM CEMS are sensitive to particle size changes, water droplets in the gas stream, particle charge, stack gas velocity changes, or other factors. Therefore, you should select a PM CEMS appropriate for the emission characteristics of your source.
(4) We recommend that you consult your PM CEMS vendor to obtain basic recommendations on the instrument capabilities and setup configuration. You are ultimately responsible for setup and operation of your PM CEMS.
8.2 Where do I install my PM CEMS? You must install your PM CEMS at an accessible location downstream of all pollution control equipment. You must perform your PM CEMS concentration measurements from a location considered representative or be able to provide data that can be corrected to be representative of the total PM emissions as determined by the manual reference method.
(1) You must select a measurement location that minimizes problems due to flow disturbances, cyclonic flow, and varying PM stratification (refer to Method 1 for guidance).
(2) If you plan to achieve higher emissions for correlation test purposes by adjusting the performance of the air pollution control device (per section 8.6(4)(i)), you must locate your PM CEMS and reference method sampling points well downstream of the control device (e.g., downstream of the induced draft fan), in order to minimize PM stratification that may be created in these cases.
8.3 How do I select the reference method measurement location and traverse points? You must follow EPA Method 1 for identifying manual reference method traverse points. Ideally, you should perform your manual reference method measurements at locations that satisfy the measurement site selection criteria specified in EPA Method 1 of at least eight duct diameters downstream and at least two duct diameters upstream of any flow disturbance. Where necessary, you may conduct testing at a location that is two diameters downstream and 0.5 diameters upstream of flow disturbances. If your location does not meet the minimum downstream and upstream requirements, you must obtain approval from us to test at your location.
8.4 What are my pretest preparation steps? You must install your CEMS and prepare the reference method test site according to the specifications in sections 8.2 and 8.3.
(1) After completing the initial field installation, we recommend that you operate your PM CEMS according to the manufacturer's instructions to familiarize yourself with its operation before you begin correlation testing.
(i) During this initial period of operation, we recommend that you conduct daily checks (zero and upscale drift and sample volume, as appropriate), and, when any check exceeds the daily specification (see section 13.1), make adjustments and perform any necessary maintenance to ensure reliable operation.
(2) When you are confident that your PM CEMS is operating properly, we recommend that you operate your CEMS over a correlation test planning period of sufficient duration to identify the full range of operating conditions and PM emissions to be used in your PM CEMS correlation test.
(i) During the correlation test planning period, you should operate the process and air pollution control equipment over the normal range of operating conditions, except when you attempt to produce higher emissions.
(ii) Your data recorder should record PM CEMS response during the full range of routine process operating conditions.
(iii) You should try to establish the relationships between operating conditions and PM CEMS response, especially those conditions that produce the highest PM CEMS response over 15-minute averaging periods, and the lowest PM CEMS response as well. The objective is to be able to reproduce the conditions for purposes of the actual correlation testing discussed in section 8.6.
(3) You must set the response range of your PM CEMS such that the instrument measures the full range of responses that correspond to the range of source operating conditions that you will implement during correlation testing.
(4) We recommend that you perform preliminary reference method testing after the correlation test planning period. During this preliminary testing, you should measure the PM emission concentration corresponding to the highest PM CEMS response observed during the full range of normal operation, when perturbing the control equipment, or as the result of PM spiking.
(5) Before performing correlation testing, you must perform a 7-day zero and upscale drift test (see section 8.5).
(6) You must not change the response range of the monitor once the response range has been set and the drift test successfully completed.
8.5 How do I perform the 7-day drift test? You must check the zero (or low-level value between 0 and 20 percent of the response range of the instrument) and upscale (between 50 and 100 percent of the instrument's response range) drift. You must perform this check at least once daily over 7 consecutive days. Your PM CEMS must quantify and record the zero and upscale measurements and the time of the measurements. If you make automatic or manual adjustments to your PM CEMS zero and upscale settings, you must conduct the drift test immediately before these adjustments, or conduct it in such a way that you can determine the amount of drift. You will find the calculation procedures for drift in section 12.1 and the acceptance criteria for allowable drift in section 13.1.
(1) What is the purpose of 7-day drift tests? The purpose of the 7-day drift test is to demonstrate that your system is capable of operating in a stable manner and maintaining its calibration for at least a 7-day period.
(2) How do I conduct the 7-day drift test? To conduct the 7-day drift test, you must determine the magnitude of the drift once each day, at 24-hour intervals, for 7 consecutive days while your source is operating normally.
(i) You must conduct the 7-day drift test at the two points specified in section 8.5. You may perform the 7-day drift tests automatically or manually by introducing to your PM CEMS suitable reference standards (these need not be certified) or by using other appropriate procedures.
(ii) You must record your PM CEMS zero and upscale response and evaluate them against the zero check value and upscale check value.
(3) When must I conduct the 7-day drift test? You must complete a valid 7-day drift test before attempting the correlation test.
8.6 How do I conduct my PM CEMS correlation test? You must conduct the correlation test according to the procedure given in paragraphs (1) through (5) of this section. If you need multiple correlations, you must conduct testing and collect at least 15 sets of reference method and PM CEMS data for calculating each separate correlation.
(1) You must use the reference method for PM (usually EPA Methods 5, 5I, or 17) that is prescribed by the applicable regulations. You may need to perform other reference methods or performance specifications (e.g., Method 3 for oxygen, Method 4 for moisture, etc.) depending on the units in which your PM CEMS reports PM concentration.
(i) We recommend that you use paired reference method trains when collecting manual PM data to identify and screen the reference method data for imprecision and bias. Procedures for checking reference method data for bias and precision can be found in the PM CEMS Knowledge Document (see section 16.5).
(ii) You may use test runs that are shorter than 60 minutes in duration (e.g., 20 or 30 minutes). You may perform your PM CEMS correlation tests during new source performance standards performance tests or other compliance tests subject to the Clean Air Act or other statutes, such as the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act. In these cases, your reference method results obtained during the PM CEMS correlation test may be used to determine compliance so long as your source and the test conditions and procedures (e.g., reference method sample run durations) are consistent with the applicable regulations and the reference method.
(iii) You must convert the reference method results to units consistent with the conditions of your PM CEMS measurements. For example, if your PM CEMS measures and reports PM emissions in the units of mass per actual volume of stack gas, you must convert your reference method results to those units (e.g., mg/acm). If your PM CEMS extracts and heats the sample gas to eliminate water droplets, then measures and reports PM emissions under those actual conditions, you must convert your reference method results to those same conditions (e.g., mg/acm at 160 °C).
(2) During each test run, you must coordinate process operations, reference method sampling, and PM CEMS operations. For example, you must ensure that the process is operating at the targeted conditions, both reference method trains are sampling simultaneously (if paired sampling trains are being used), and your PM CEMS and data logger are operating properly.
(i) You must coordinate the start and stop times of each run between the reference method sampling and PM CEMS operation. For a batch sampling PM CEMS, you must start the reference method at the same time as your PM CEMS sampling.
(ii) You must note the times for port changes (and other periods when the reference method sampling may be suspended) on the data sheets so that you can adjust your PM CEMS data accordingly, if necessary.
(iii) You must properly align the time periods for your PM CEMS and your reference method measurements to account for your PM CEMS response time.
(3) You must conduct a minimum of 15 valid runs each consisting of simultaneous PM CEMS and reference method measurement sets.
(i) You may conduct more than 15 sets of CEMS and reference method measurements. If you choose this option, you may reject certain test results so long as the total number of valid test results you use to determine the correlation is greater than or equal to 15.
(ii) You must report all data, including the rejected data.
(iii) You may reject the results of up to five test runs without explanation.
(iv) If you reject the results of more than five test runs, the basis for rejecting the results of the additional test runs must be explicitly stated in the reference method, this performance specification, Procedure 2 of appendix F, or your quality assurance plan.
(4) Simultaneous PM CEMS and reference method measurements must be performed in a manner to ensure that the range of data that will be used to establish the correlation for your PM CEMS is maximized. You must first attempt to maximize your correlation range by following the procedures described in paragraphs (4)(i) through (iv) of this section. If you cannot obtain the three levels as described in paragraphs (i) through (iv), then you must use the procedure described in section 8.6(5).
(i) You must attempt to obtain the three different levels of PM mass concentration by varying process operating conditions, varying PM control device conditions, or by means of PM spiking.
(ii) The three PM concentration levels you use in the correlation tests must be distributed over the complete operating range experienced by your source.
(iii) At least 20 percent of the minimum 15 measured data points you use should be contained in each of the following levels:
• Level 1: From no PM (zero concentration) emissions to 50 percent of the maximum PM concentration;
• Level 2: 25 to 75 percent of the maximum PM concentration; and
• Level 3: 50 to 100 percent of the maximum PM concentration.
(iv) Although the above levels overlap, you may only apply individual run data to one level.
(5) If you cannot obtain three distinct levels of PM concentration as described, you must perform correlation testing over the maximum range of PM concentrations that is practical for your PM CEMS. To ensure that the range of data used to establish the correlation for your PM CEMS is maximized, you must follow one or more of the steps in paragraphs (5)(i) through (iv) of this section.
(i) Zero point data for in-situ instruments should be obtained, to the extent possible, by removing the instrument from the stack and monitoring ambient air on a test bench.
(ii) Zero point data for extractive instruments should be obtained by removing the extractive probe from the stack and drawing in clean ambient air.
(iii) Zero point data also can be obtained by performing manual reference method measurements when the flue gas is free of PM emissions or contains very low PM concentrations (e.g., when your process is not operating, but the fans are operating or your source is combusting only natural gas).
(iv) If none of the steps in paragraphs (5)(i) through (iii) of this section are possible, you must estimate the monitor response when no PM is in the flue gas (e.g., 4 mA = 0 mg/acm).
8.7 What do I do with the initial correlation test data for my PM CEMS? You must calculate and report the results of the correlation testing, including the correlation coefficient, confidence interval, and tolerance interval for the PM CEMS response and reference method correlation data that are use to establish the correlation, as specified in section 12. You must include all data sheets, calculations, charts (records of PM CEMS responses), process data records including PM control equipment operating parameters, and reference media certifications necessary to confirm that your PM CEMS met the requirements of this performance specification. In addition, you must:
(1) Determine the integrated (arithmetic average) PM CEMS output over each reference method test period;
(2) Adjust your PM CEMS outputs and reference method test data to the same clock time (considering response time of your PM CEMS);
(3) Confirm that the reference method results are consistent with your PM CEMS response in terms of, where applicable, moisture, temperature, pressure, and diluent concentrations; and
(4) Determine whether any of the reference method test results do not meet the test method criteria.
8.8 What is the limitation on the range of my PM CEMS correlation? Although the data you collect during the correlation testing should be representative of the full range of normal operating conditions at your source, you must conduct additional correlation testing if either of the conditions specified in paragraphs (1) and (2) of this section occurs.
(1) If your source is a low-emitting source, as defined in section 3.16 of this specification, you must conduct additional correlation testing if either of the events specified in paragraphs (1)(i) or (ii) of this section occurs while your source is operating under normal conditions.
(i) Your source generates 24 consecutive hourly average PM CEMS responses that are greater than 125 percent of the highest PM CEMS response (e.g., mA reading) used for the correlation curve or are greater than the PM CEMS response that corresponds to 50 percent of the emission limit, whichever is greater, or
(ii) The cumulative hourly average PM CEMS responses generated by your source are greater than 125 percent of the highest PM CEMS response used for the correlation curve or are greater than the PM CEMS response that corresponds to 50 percent of the emission limit, whichever is greater, for more than 5 percent of your PM CEMS operating hours for the previous 30-day period.
(2) If your source is not a low-emitting source, as defined in section 3.16 of this specification, you must conduct additional correlation testing if either of the events specified in paragraph (i) or (ii) of this section occurs while your source is operating under normal conditions.
(i) Your source generates 24 consecutive hourly average PM CEMS responses that are greater than 125 percent of the highest PM CEMS response (e.g., mA reading) used for the correlation curve, or
(ii) The cumulative hourly average PM CEMS responses generated by your source are greater than 125 percent of the highest PM CEMS response used for the correlation curve for more than 5 percent of your PM CEMS operating hours for the previous 30-day period.
(3) If additional correlation testing is required, you must conduct at least three additional test runs under the conditions that caused the higher PM CEMS response.
(i) You must complete the additional testing and use the resulting new data along with the previous data to calculate a revised correlation equation within 60 days after the occurrence of the event that requires additional testing, as specified in paragraphs 8.8(1) and (2).
(4) If your source generates consecutive PM CEMS hourly responses that are greater than 125 percent of the highest PM CEMS response used to develop the correlation curve for 24 hours or for a cumulative period that amounts to more than 5 percent of the PM CEMS operating hours for the previous 30-day period, you must report the reason for the higher PM CEMS responses.
9.0 What Quality Control Measures Are Required?
Quality control measures for PM CEMS are specified in 40 CFR 60, Appendix F, Procedure 2.
10.0 What Calibration and Standardization Procedures Must I Perform? [Reserved]
11.0 What Analytical Procedures Apply to This Procedure?
Specific analytical procedures are outlined in the applicable reference method(s).
12.0 What Calculations and Data Analyses Are Needed?
You must determine the primary relationship for correlating the output from your PM CEMS to a PM concentration, typically in units of mg/acm or mg/dscm of flue gas, using the calculations and data analysis process in sections 12.2 and 12.3. You develop the correlation by performing an appropriate regression analysis between your PM CEMS response and your reference method data.
12.1 How do I calculate upscale drift and zero drift? You must determine the difference in your PM CEMS output readings from the established reference values (zero and upscale check values) after a stated period of operation during which you performed no unscheduled maintenance, repair or adjustment.
(1) Calculate the upscale drift (UD) using Equation 11-1:
Where:
UD = The upscale (high-level) drift of your PM CEMS in percent,
RCEM = The measured PM CEMS response to the upscale reference standard,
RU = The pre-established numerical value of the upscale reference standard, and
Rr = The response range of the analyzer.
(2) Calculate the zero drift (ZD) using Equation 11-2:
Where:
ZD = The zero (low-level) drift of your PM CEMS in percent,
RCEM = The measured PM CEMS response to the zero reference standard,
RL = The pre-established numerical value of the zero reference standard, and
Rr = The response range of the analyzer.
(3) Summarize the results on a data sheet similar to that shown in Table 2 (see section 17).
12.2 How do I perform the regression analysis? You must couple each reference method PM concentration measurement, y, in the appropriate units, with an average PM CEMS response, x, over corresponding time periods. You must complete your PM CEMS correlation calculations using data deemed acceptable by quality control procedures identified in 40 CFR 60, Appendix F, Procedure 2.
(1) You must evaluate all flagged or suspect data produced during measurement periods and determine whether they should be excluded from your PM CEMS's average.
(2) You must assure that the reference method and PM CEMS results are on a consistent moisture, temperature, and diluent basis. You must convert the reference method PM concentration measurements (dry standard conditions) to the units of your PM CEMS measurement conditions. The conditions of your PM CEMS measurement are monitor-specific. You must obtain from your PM CEMS vendor or instrument manufacturer the conditions and units of measurement for your PM CEMS.
(i) If your sample gas contains entrained water droplets and your PM CEMS is an extractive system that measures at actual conditions (i.e., wet basis), you must use the measured moisture content determined from the impinger analysis when converting your reference method PM data to PM CEMS conditions; do not use the moisture content calculated from a psychrometric chart based on saturated conditions.
12.3 How do I determine my PM CEMS correlation? To predict PM concentrations from PM CEMS responses, you must use the calculation method of least squares presented in paragraphs (1) through (5) of this section. When performing the calculations, each reference method PM concentration measurement must be treated as a discrete data point; if using paired sampling trains, do not average reference method data pairs for any test run.
This performance specification describes procedures for evaluating five types of correlation models: linear, polynomial, logarithmic, exponential, and power. Procedures for selecting the most appropriate correlation model are presented in section 12.4 of this specification.
(1) How do I evaluate a linear correlation for my correlation test data? To evaluate a linear correlation, follow the procedures described in paragraphs (1)(i) through (iv) of this section.
(i) Calculate the linear correlation equation, which gives the predicted PM concentration () as a function of the PM CEMS response (x), as indicated by Equation 11-3:
Where:
y = the predicted PM concentration,
b0 = the intercept for the correlation curve, as calculated using Equation 11-4,
b1 = the slope of the correlation curve, as calculated using Equation 11-6, and
x = the PM CEMS response value.
Calculate the y intercept (b0) of the correlation curve using Equation 11-4:
Where:
x = the mean value of the PM CEMS response data, as calculated using Equation 11-5, and
y = the mean value of the PM concentration data, as calculated using Equation 11-5:
Where:
xi = the PM CEMS response value for run i,
yi = the PM concentration value for run i, and
n = the number of data points.
Calculate the slope (b1) of the correlation curve using Equation 11-6:
Where:
Sxx, Sxy = as calculated using Equation 11-7:
(ii) Calculate the half range of the 95 percent confidence interval (CI) for the predicted PM concentration () at the mean value of x, using Equation 11-8:
Where:
CI = the half range of the 95 percent confidence interval for the predicted PM concentration at the mean x value,
tdf,1-a/2 = the value for the t statistic provided in Table 1 for df = (n - 2), and
SL = the scatter or deviation of values about the correlation curve, which is determined using Equation 11-9:
Calculate the confidence interval half range for the predicted PM concentration () at the mean x value as a percentage of the emission limit (CI%) using Equation 11-10:
Where:
CI = the half range of the 95 percent confidence interval for the predicted PM concentration at the mean x value, and
EL = PM emission limit, as described in section 13.2.
(iii) Calculate the half range of the tolerance interval (TI) for the predicted PM concentration () at the mean x value using Equation 11-11:
Where:
TI = the half range of the tolerance interval for the predicted PM concentration () at the mean x value,
kT = as calculated using Equation 11-12, and
SL = as calculated using Equation 11-9:
Where:
n′ = the number of test runs (n),
un′ = the tolerance factor for 75 percent coverage at 95 percent confidence provided in Table 1 for df = (n−2), and
vdf = the value from Table 1 for df = (n−2).
Calculate the half range of the tolerance interval for the predicted PM concentration () at the mean x value as a percentage of the emission limit (TI%) using Equation 11-13:
Where:
TI = the half range of the tolerance interval for the predicted PM concentration () at the mean x value, and
EL = PM emission limit, as described in section 13.2.
(iv) Calculate the linear correlation coefficient (r) using Equation 11-14:
Where:
SL = as calculated using Equation 11-9, and
Sy = as calculated using Equation 11-15:
(2) How do I evaluate a polynomial correlation for my correlation test data? To evaluate a polynomial correlation, follow the procedures described in paragraphs (2)(i) through (iv) of this section.
(i) Calculate the polynomial correlation equation, which is indicated by Equation 11-16, using Equations 11-17 through 11-22:
Where:
= the PM CEMS concentration predicted by the polynomial correlation equation, and
b0, b1, b2 = the coefficients determined from the solution to the matrix equation Ab = B
Where:
Where:
Xi = the PM CEMS response for run i,
Yi = the reference method PM concentration for run i, and
n = the number of test runs.
Calculate the polynomial correlation curve coefficients (b0, b1, and b2) using Equations 11-19 through 11-21, respectively:
Where:
(ii) Calculate the 95 percent confidence interval half range (CI) by first calculating the C coefficients (Co to C5) using Equations 11-23 and 11-24:
Where:
Calculate Δ using Equation 11-25 for each x value:
Determine the x value that corresponds to the minimum value of Δ (Δmin). Determine the scatter or deviation of values about the polynomial correlation curve (SP) using Equation 11-26:
Calculate the half range of the 95 percent confidence interval (CI) for the predicted PM concentration () at the x value that corresponds to Δmin using Equation 11-27:
Where:
df = (n-3), and
tdf = as listed in Table 1 (see section 17).
Calculate the half range of the 95 percent confidence interval for the predicted PM concentration at the x value that corresponds to Δmin as a percentage of the emission limit (CI%) using Equation 11-28:
Where:
CI = the half range of the 95 percent confidence interval for the predicted PM concentration at the x value that corresponds to Δmin, and
EL = PM emission limit, as described in section 13.2.
(iii) Calculate the tolerance interval half range (TI) for the predicted PM concentration at the x value that corresponds to Δmin, as indicated in Equation 11-29 for the polynomial correlation, using Equations 11-30 and 11-31:
Where:
un′ = the value indicated in Table 1 for df = (n′-3), and
vdf = the value indicated in Table 1 for df = (n′—3).
Calculate the tolerance interval half range for the predicted PM concentration at the x value that corresponds to Δmin as a percentage of the emission limit (TI%) using Equation 11-32:
Where:
TI = the tolerance interval half range for the predicted PM concentration at the x value that corresponds to Δmin, and
EL = PM emission limit, as described in section 13.2.
(iv) Calculate the polynomial correlation coefficient (r) using Equation 11-33:
Where:
SP = as calculated using Equation 11-26, and
Sy = as calculated using Equation 11-15.
(3) How do I evaluate a logarithmic correlation for my correlation test data? To evaluate a logarithmic correlation, which has the form indicated by Equation 11-34, follow the procedures described in paragraphs (3)(i) through (iii) of this section.
(i) Perform a logarithmic transformation of each PM CEMS response value (x values) using Equation 11-35:
Where:
xi′ = is the transformed value of xi, and
Ln(xi) = the natural logarithm of the PM CEMS response for run i.
(ii) Using the values for xi′ in place of the values for xi, perform the same procedures used to develop the linear correlation equation described in paragraph (1)(i) of this section. The resulting equation has the form indicated by Equation 11-36:
Where:
x′ = the natural logarithm of the PM CEMS response, and the variables , b0, and b1 are as defined in paragraph (1)(i) of this section.
(iii) Using the values for xi′ in place of the values for xi, calculate the confidence interval half range at the mean x′ value as a percentage of the emission limit (CI%), the tolerance interval half range at the mean x′ value as a percentage of the emission limit (TI%), and the correlation coefficient (r) using the procedures described in paragraphs (1)(ii) through (iv) of this section.
(4) How do I evaluate an exponential correlation for my correlation test data? To evaluate an exponential correlation, which has the form indicated by Equation 11-37, follow the procedures described in paragraphs (4)(i) through (v) of this section:
(i) Perform a logarithmic transformation of each PM concentration measurement (y values) using Equation 11-38:
Where:
y′i = is the transformed value of yi, and
Ln(yi) = the natural logarithm of the PM concentration measurement for run i.
(ii) Using the values for y′i in place of the values for yi, perform the same procedures used to develop the linear correlation equation described in paragraph (1)(i) of this section. The resulting equation will have the form indicated by Equation 11-39.
Where:
′ = the predicted log PM concentration value,
b′0 = the natural logarithm of b0, and the variables b0, b1, and x are as defined in paragraph (1)(i) of this section.
(iii) Using the values for y″i in place of the values for yi, calculate the half range of the 95 percent confidence interval (CI′), as described in paragraph (1)(ii) of this section for CI. Note that CI′ is on the log scale. Next, calculate the upper and lower 95 percent confidence limits for the mean value y′ using Equations 11-40 and 11-41:
Where:
LCL′ = the lower 95 percent confidence limit for the mean value y′,
UCL′ = the upper 95 percent confidence limit for the mean value y′,
y′ = the mean value of the log-transformed PM concentrations, and
CI′ = the half range of the 95 percent confidence interval for the predicted PM concentration (′), as calculated in Equation 11-8.
Calculate the half range of the 95 percent confidence interval (CI) on the original PM concentration scale using Equation 11-42:
Where:
CI = the half range of the 95 percent confidence interval on the original PM concentration scale, and UCL′ and LCL′ are as defined previously.
Calculate the half range of the 95 percent confidence interval for the predicted PM concentration corresponding to the mean value of x as a percentage of the emission limit (CI%) using Equation 11-10.
(iv) Using the values for y′i in place of the values for yi, calculate the half range tolerance interval (TI′), as described in paragraph (1)(iii) of this section for TI. Note that TI′ is on the log scale. Next, calculate the half range tolerance limits for the mean value y′ using Equations 11-43 and 11-44:
Where:
LTL′ = the lower 95 percent tolerance limit for the mean value y′,
UTL′ = the upper 95 percent tolerance limit for the mean value y′,
y′, = the mean value of the log-transformed PM concentrations, and
TI′ = the half range of the 95 percent tolerance interval for the predicted PM concentration (′), as calculated in Equation 11-11.
Calculate the half range tolerance interval (TI) on the original PM concentration scale using Equation 11-45:
TI = the half range of the 95 percent tolerance interval on the original PM scale, and UTL′ and LTL′ are as defined previously.
Calculate the tolerance interval half range for the predicted PM concentration corresponding to the mean value of x as a percentage of the emission limit (TI%) using Equation 11-13.
(v) Using the values for y″ i in place of the values for yi, calculate the correlation coefficient (r) using the procedure described in paragraph (1)(iv) of this section.
(5) How do I evaluate a power correlation for my correlation test data? To evaluate a power correlation, which has the form indicated by Equation 11-46, follow the procedures described in paragraphs (5)(i) through (v) of this section.
(i) Perform logarithmic transformations of each PM CEMS response (x values) and each PM concentration measurement (y values) using Equations 11-35 and 11-38, respectively.
(ii) Using the values for x″i in place of the values for xi, and the values for y″i in place of the values for yi, perform the same procedures used to develop the linear correlation equation described in paragraph (1)(i) of this section. The resulting equation will have the form indicated by Equation 11-47:
Where:
′ = the predicted log PM concentration value, and
x′ = the natural logarithm of the PM CEMS response values,
b′0 = the natural logarithm of b0, and the variables b0, b1, and x are as defined in paragraph (1)(i) of this section.
(iii) Using the same procedure described for exponential models in paragraph (4)(iii) of this section, calculate the half range of the 95 percent confidence interval for the predicted PM concentration corresponding to the mean value of x′ as a percentage of the emission limit.
(iv) Using the same procedure described for exponential models in paragraph (4)(iv) of this section, calculate the tolerance interval half range for the predicted PM concentration corresponding to the mean value of x′ as a percentage of the emission limit.
(v) Using the values for y′i in place of the values for yi, calculate the correlation coefficient (r) using the procedure described in paragraph (1)(iv) of this section.
Note: PS-11 does not address the application of correlation equations to calculate PM emission concentrations using PM CEMS response data during normal operations of a PM CEMS. However, we will provide guidance on the use of specific correlation models (i.e., logarithmic, exponential, and power models) to calculate PM concentrations in an operating PM CEMS in situations when the PM CEMS response values are equal to or less than zero, and the correlation model is undefined.
12.4 Which correlation model should I use? Follow the procedures described in paragraphs (1) through (4) of this section to determine which correlation model you should use.
(1) For each correlation model that you develop using the procedures described in section 12.3 of this specification, compare the confidence interval half range percentage, tolerance interval half range percentage, and correlation coefficient to the performance criteria specified in section 13.2 of this specification. You can use the linear, logarithmic, exponential, or power correlation model if the model satisfies all of the performance criteria specified in section 13.2 of this specification. However, to use the polynomial model you first must check that the polynomial correlation curve satisfies the criteria for minimum and maximum values specified in paragraph (3) of this section.
(2) If you develop more than one correlation curve that satisfy the performance criteria specified in section 13.2 of this specification, you should use the correlation curve with the greatest correlation coefficient. If the polynomial model has the greatest correlation coefficient, you first must check that the polynomial correlation curve satisfies the criteria for minimum and maximum values specified in paragraph (3) of this section.
(3) You can use the polynomial model that you develop using the procedures described in section 12.3(2) if the model satisfies the performance criteria specified in section 13.2 of this specification, and the minimum or maximum value of the polynomial correlation curve does not occur within the expanded data range. The minimum or maximum value of the polynomial correlation curve is the point where the slope of the curve equals zero. To determine if the minimum or maximum value occurs within the expanded data range, follow the procedure described in paragraphs (3)(i) through (iv) of this section.
(i) Determine if your polynomial correlation curve has a minimum or maximum point by comparing the polynomial coefficient b2 to zero. If b2 is less than zero, the curve has a maximum value. If b2 is greater than zero, the curve has a minimum value. (Note: If b2 equals zero, the correlation curve is linear.)
(ii) Calculate the minimum value using Equation 11-48.
(iii) If your polynomial correlation curve has a minimum point, you must compare the minimum value to the minimum PM CEMS response used to develop the correlation curve. If the correlation curve minimum value is less than or equal to the minimum PM CEMS response value, you can use the polynomial correlation curve, provided the correlation curve also satisfies all of the performance criteria specified in section 13.2 of this specification. If the correlation curve minimum value is greater than the minimum PM CEMS response value, you cannot use the polynomial correlation curve to predict PM concentrations.
(iv) If your polynomial correlation curve has a maximum, the maximum value must be greater than the allowable extrapolation limit. If your source is not a low-emitting source, as defined in section 3.16 of this specification, the allowable extrapolation limit is 125 percent of the highest PM CEMS response used to develop the correlation curve. If your source is a low-emitting source, the allowable extrapolation limit is 125 percent of the highest PM CEMS response used to develop the correlation curve or the PM CEMS response that corresponds to 50 percent of the emission limit, whichever is greater. If the polynomial correlation curve maximum value is greater than the extrapolation limit, and the correlation curve satisfies all of the performance criteria specified in section 13.2 of this specification, you can use the polynomial correlation curve to predict PM concentrations. If the correlation curve maximum value is less than the extrapolation limit, you cannot use the polynomial correlation curve to predict PM concentrations.
(4) You may petition the Administrator for alternative solutions or sampling recommendations if the correlation models described in section 12.3 of this specification do not satisfy the performance criteria specified in section 13.2 of this specification.
13.0 What Are the Performance Criteria for My PM CEMS?
You must evaluate your PM CEMS based on the 7-day drift check, the accuracy of the correlation, and the sampling periods and cycle/response time.
13.1 What is the 7-day drift check performance specification? Your daily PM CEMS internal drift checks must demonstrate that the daily drift of your PM CEMS does not deviate from the value of the reference light, optical filter, Beta attenuation signal, or other technology-suitable reference standard by more than 2 percent of the response range. If your CEMS includes diluent and/or auxiliary monitors (for temperature, pressure, and/or moisture) that are employed as a necessary part of this performance specification, you must determine the calibration drift separately for each ancillary monitor in terms of its respective output (see the appropriate performance specification for the diluent CEMS specification). None of the calibration drifts may exceed their individual specification.
13.2 What performance criteria must my PM CEMS correlation satisfy? Your PM CEMS correlation must meet each of the minimum specifications in paragraphs (1), (2), and (3) of this section. Before confidence and tolerance interval half range percentage calculations are made, you must convert the emission limit to the appropriate units of your PM CEMS measurement conditions using the average of emissions gas property values (e.g., diluent concentration, temperature, pressure, and moisture) measured during the correlation test.
(1) The correlation coefficient must satisfy the criterion specified in paragraph (1)(i) or (ii), whichever applies.
(i) If your source is not a low-emitting source, as defined in section 3.16 of this specification, the correlation coefficient (r) must be greater than or equal to 0.85.
(ii) If your source is a low-emitting source, as defined in section 3.16 of this specification, the correlation coefficient (r) must be greater than or equal to 0.75.
(2) The confidence interval half range must satisfy the applicable criterion specified in paragraph (2)(i), (ii), or (iii) of this section, based on the type of correlation model.
(i) For linear or logarithmic correlations, the 95 percent confidence interval half range at the mean PM CEMS response value from the correlation test must be within 10 percent of the PM emission limit value specified in the applicable regulation. Therefore, the CI% calculated using Equation 11-10 must be less than or equal to 10 percent.
(ii) For polynomial correlations, the 95 percent confidence interval half range at the PM CEMS response value from the correlation test that corresponds to the minimum value for Δ must be within 10 percent of the PM emission limit value specified in the applicable regulation. Therefore, the CI% calculated using Equation 11-28 must be less than or equal to 10 percent.
(iii) For exponential or power correlations, the 95 percent confidence interval half range at the mean of the logarithm of the PM CEMS response values from the correlation test must be within 10 percent of the PM emission limit value specified in the applicable regulation. Therefore, the CI% calculated using Equation 11-10 must be less than or equal to 10 percent.
(3) The tolerance interval half range must satisfy the applicable criterion specified in paragraph (3)(i), (ii), or (iii) of this section, based on the type of correlation model.
(i) For linear or logarithmic correlations, the half range tolerance interval with 95 percent confidence and 75 percent coverage at the mean PM CEMS response value from the correlation test must be within 25 percent of the PM emission limit value specified in the applicable regulation. Therefore, the TI% calculated using Equation 11-13 must be less than or equal to 25 percent.
(ii) For polynomial correlations, the half range tolerance interval with 95 percent confidence and 75 percent coverage at the PM CEMS response value from the correlation test that corresponds to the minimum value for Δ must be within 25 percent of the PM emission limit value specified in the applicable regulation. Therefore, the TI% calculated using Equation 11-32 must be less than or equal to 25 percent.
(iii) For exponential or power correlations, the half range tolerance interval with 95 percent confidence and 75 percent coverage at the mean of the logarithm of the PM CEMS response values from the correlation test must be within 25 percent of the PM emission limit value specified in the applicable regulation. Therefore, the TI% calculated using Equation 11-13 must be less than or equal to 25 percent.
13.3 What are the sampling periods and cycle/response time? You must document and maintain the response time and any changes in the response time following installation.
(1) If you have a batch sampling PM CEMS, you must evaluate the limits presented in paragraphs (1)(i) and (ii) of this section.
(i) The response time of your PM CEMS, which is equivalent to the cycle time, must be no longer than 15 minutes. In addition, the delay between the end of the sampling time and reporting of the sample analysis must be no greater than 3 minutes. You must document any changes in the response time following installation.
(ii) The sampling time of your PM CEMS must be no less than 30 percent of the cycle time. If you have a batch sampling PM CEMS, sampling must be continuous except during pauses when the collected pollutant on the capture media is being analyzed and the next capture medium starts collecting a new sample.
13.4 What PM compliance monitoring must I do? You must report your CEMS measurements in the units of the standard expressed in the regulations (e.g., mg/dscm @ 7 percent oxygen, pounds per million Btu (lb/mmBtu), etc.). You may need to install auxiliary data monitoring equipment to convert the units reported by your PM CEMS into units of the PM emission standard.
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 Which References Are Relevant to This Performance Specification?
16.1 Technical Guidance Document: Compliance Assurance Monitoring. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards Emission Measurement Center. August 1998.
16.2 40 CFR 60, Appendix B, “Performance Specification 2—Specifications and Test Procedures for SO2, and NOX, Continuous Emission Monitoring Systems in Stationary Sources.”
16.3 40 CFR 60, Appendix B, “Performance Specification 1—Specification and Test Procedures for Opacity Continuous Emission Monitoring Systems in Stationary Sources.”
16.4 40 CFR 60, Appendix A, “Method 1—Sample and Velocity Traverses for Stationary Sources.”
16.5 “Current Knowledge of Particulate Matter (PM) Continuous Emission Monitoring.” EPA-454/R-00-039. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, NC. September 2000.
16.6 40 CFR 266, Appendix IX, section 2, “Performance Specifications for Continuous Emission Monitoring Systems.”
16.7 ISO 10155, “Stationary Source Emissions—Automated Monitoring of Mass Concentrations of Particles: Performance Characteristics, Test Procedures, and Specifications.” American National Standards Institute, New York City. 1995.
16.8 Snedecor, George W. and Cochran, William G. (1989), Statistical Methods, Eighth Edition, Iowa State University Press.
16.9 Wallis, W. A. (1951) “Tolerance Intervals for Linear Regression,” in Second Berkeley Symposium on Mathematical Statistics and Probability, ed. J. Neyman, Berkeley: University of California Press, pp. 43-51.
17.0 What Reference Tables and Validation Data Are Relevant to PS-11?
Use the information in Table 1 for determining the confidence and tolerance interval half ranges. Use Table 2 to record your 7-day drift test data.
| df | Student's t, tdf | Tolerance interval with 75% coverage and 95% confidence level | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| vdf (95%) | un′ (75%) | kT | ||
| 3 | 3.182 | 2.920 | 1.266 | 3.697 |
| 4 | 2.776 | 2.372 | 1.247 | 2.958 |
| 5 | 2.571 | 2.089 | 1.233 | 2.576 |
| 6 | 2.447 | 1.915 | 1.223 | 2.342 |
| 7 | 2.365 | 1.797 | 1.214 | 2.183 |
| 8 | 2.306 | 1.711 | 1.208 | 2.067 |
| 9 | 2.262 | 1.645 | 1.203 | 1.979 |
| 10 | 2.228 | 1.593 | 1.198 | 1.909 |
| 11 | 2.201 | 1.551 | 1.195 | 1.853 |
| 12 | 2.179 | 1.515 | 1.192 | 1.806 |
| 13 | 2.160 | 1.485 | 1.189 | 1.766 |
| 14 | 2.145 | 1.460 | 1.186 | 1.732 |
| 15 | 2.131 | 1.437 | 1.184 | 1.702 |
| 16 | 2.120 | 1.418 | 1.182 | 1.676 |
| 17 | 2.110 | 1.400 | 1.181 | 1.653 |
| 18 | 2.101 | 1.384 | 1.179 | 1.633 |
| 19 | 2.093 | 1.370 | 1.178 | 1.614 |
| 20 | 2.086 | 1.358 | 1.177 | 1.597 |
| 21 | 2.080 | 1.346 | 1.175 | 1.582 |
| 22 | 2.074 | 1.335 | 1.174 | 1.568 |
| 23 | 2.069 | 1.326 | 1.173 | 1.555 |
| 24 | 2.064 | 1.316 | 1.172 | 1.544 |
| 25 | 2.060 | 1.308 | 1.172 | 1.533 |
| 26 | 2.056 | 1.300 | 1.171 | 1.522 |
| 27 | 2.052 | 1.293 | 1.170 | 1.513 |
| 28 | 2.048 | 1.286 | 1.170 | 1.504 |
| 29 | 2.045 | 1.280 | 1.169 | 1.496 |
| 30 | 2.042 | 1.274 | 1.168 | 1.488 |
| 31 | 2.040 | 1.268 | 1.168 | 1.481 |
| 32 | 2.037 | 1.263 | 1.167 | 1.474 |
| 33 | 2.035 | 1.258 | 1.167 | 1.467 |
| 34 | 2.032 | 1.253 | 1.166 | 1.461 |
| 35 | 2.030 | 1.248 | 1.166 | 1.455 |
| 36 | 2.028 | 1.244 | 1.165 | 1.450 |
| 37 | 2.026 | 1.240 | 1.165 | 1.444 |
| 38 | 2.024 | 1.236 | 1.165 | 1.439 |
| 39 | 2.023 | 1.232 | 1.164 | 1.435 |
| 40 | 2.021 | 1.228 | 1.164 | 1.430 |
| 41 | 2.020 | 1.225 | 1.164 | 1.425 |
| 42 | 2.018 | 1.222 | 1.163 | 1.421 |
| 43 | 2.017 | 1.218 | 1.163 | 1.417 |
| 44 | 2.015 | 1.215 | 1.163 | 1.413 |
| 45 | 2.014 | 1.212 | 1.163 | 1.410 |
| 46 | 2.013 | 1.210 | 1.162 | 1.406 |
| 47 | 2.012 | 1.207 | 1.162 | 1.403 |
| 48 | 2.011 | 1.204 | 1.162 | 1.399 |
| 49 | 2.010 | 1.202 | 1.162 | 1.396 |
| 50 | 2.009 | 1.199 | 1.161 | 1.393 |
| 51 | 2.008 | 1.197 | 1.161 | 1.390 |
| 52 | 2.007 | 1.195 | 1.161 | 1.387 |
| 53 | 2.006 | 1.192 | 1.161 | 1.384 |
| 54 | 2.005 | 1.190 | 1.161 | 1.381 |
| 55 | 2.004 | 1.188 | 1.160 | 1.379 |
| 56 | 2.003 | 1.186 | 1.160 | 1.376 |
| 57 | 2.002 | 1.184 | 1.160 | 1.374 |
| 58 | 2.002 | 1.182 | 1.160 | 1.371 |
| 59 | 2.001 | 1.180 | 1.160 | 1.369 |
| 60 | 2.000 | 1.179 | 1.160 | 1.367 |
| References 16.8 (t values) and 16.9 (vdf and un′ values). |
| Zero drift day # | Date and time |
Zero check value (RL) |
PM CEMS response (RCEMS) |
Difference (RCEMS−RL) |
Zero drift ((RCEMS−RL) /RU) × 100 |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | |||||
| 2 | |||||
| 3 | |||||
| 4 | |||||
| 5 | |||||
| 6 | |||||
| 7 |
| Upscale drift day # | Date and time |
Upscale check value (RU) |
PM CEMS response (RCEMS) |
Difference (RCEMS−RU) |
Upscale drift ((RCEMS−RU)/RU) × 100% |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | |||||
| 2 | |||||
| 3 | |||||
| 4 | |||||
| 5 | |||||
| 6 | |||||
| 7 |
Performance Specification 12A—Specifications and Test Procedures for Total Vapor Phase Mercury Continuous Emission Monitoring Systems in Stationary Sources
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Analyte. The analyte measured by these procedures and specifications is total vapor phase mercury (Hg) in the flue gas, which represents the sum of elemental Hg (Hg°, CAS Number 7439-97-6) and oxidized forms of gaseous Hg (Hg+2), in concentration units of micrograms per cubic meter (µg/m 3).
1.2 Applicability.
1.2.1 This specification is for evaluating the acceptability of total vapor phase Hg continuous emission monitoring systems (CEMS) installed at stationary sources at the time of or soon after installation and whenever specified in the regulations. The Hg CEMS must be capable of measuring the total concentration in µg/m 3 of vapor phase Hg, regardless of speciation, and recording that concentration at standard conditions on a wet or dry basis. These specifications do not address measurement of particle bound Hg.
1.2.2 This specification is not designed to evaluate an installed CEMS's performance over an extended period of time nor does it identify specific calibration techniques and auxiliary procedures to assess the CEMS's performance. The source owner or operator, however, is responsible to calibrate, maintain, and operate the CEMS properly. The Administrator may require, under section 114 of the Clean Air Act, the operator to conduct CEMS performance evaluations at other times besides the initial performance evaluation test. See §§ 60.13(c) and 63.8(e)(1).
1.2.3 Mercury monitoring approaches not entirely suited to these specifications may be approvable under the alternative monitoring or alternative test method provisions of § 60.13(i) and § 63.8(f) or § 60.8(b)(3) and § 63.7(f), respectively.
2.0 Summary of Performance Specification
Procedures for determining CEMS relative accuracy, linearity, and calibration drift are outlined. CEMS installation and measurement location specifications, data reduction procedures, and performance criteria are included.
3.0 Definitions
3.1 Continuous Emission Monitoring System (CEMS) means the total equipment required to measure a pollutant concentration. The system generally consists of the following three major subsystems:
3.2 Sample Interface means that portion of the CEMS used for one or more of the following: sample acquisition, sample transport, sample conditioning, and protection of the monitor from the effects of the stack effluent.
3.3 Hg Analyzer means that portion of the Hg CEMS that measures the total vapor phase Hg mass concentration and generates a proportional output.
3.4 Data Recorder means that portion of the CEMS that provides a permanent electronic record of the analyzer output. The data recorder may provide automatic data reduction and CEMS control capabilities.
3.5 Span Value means the measurement range as specified in the applicable regulation or other requirement. If the span is not specified in the applicable regulation or other requirement, then it must be a value approximately equivalent to two times the emission standard. Unless otherwise specified, the span value may be rounded up to the nearest multiple of 10.
3.6 Measurement Error Test means a test procedure in which the accuracy of the concentrations measured by a CEMS at three or more points over its measurement range is evaluated using reference gases. For Hg CEMS, elemental and oxidized Hg (Hg 0 and mercuric chloride, HgCl2) gas standards of known concentration are used for this procedure.
3.7 Measurement Error (ME) means the absolute value of the difference between the concentration indicated by the CEMS and the known concentration of a reference gas, expressed as a percentage of the span value, when the entire CEMS, including the sampling interface, is challenged.
3.8 Calibration Drift (CD) means the absolute value of the difference between the CEMS output response and either an upscale Hg reference gas or a zero-level Hg reference gas, expressed as a percentage of the span value, when the entire CEMS, including the sampling interface, is challenged after a stated period of operation during which no unscheduled maintenance or repair took place.
3.9 Relative Accuracy Test Procedure means a test procedure consisting of at least nine test runs, in which the accuracy of the concentrations measured by a CEMS is evaluated by comparison against concurrent measurements made with a reference method (RM). Relative accuracy tests repeated on a regular, on-going basis are referred to as relative accuracy test audits or RATAs.
3.10 Relative Accuracy (RA) means the absolute mean difference between the pollutant concentrations determined by the CEMS and the values determined by the RM plus the 2.5 percent error confidence coefficient of a series of tests divided by the mean of the RM tests. Alternatively, for sources with an average RM concentration less than 5.0 micrograms per standard cubic meter (µg/scm), the RA may be expressed as the absolute value of the difference between the mean CEMS and RM values.
4.0 Interferences [Reserved]
5.0 Safety
The procedures required under this performance specification may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This performance specification may not address all of the safety problems associated with these procedures. It is the responsibility of the user to establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicable regulatory limitations prior to performing these procedures. The CEMS user's manual and materials recommended by the RM should be consulted for specific precautions to be taken.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
6.1 CEMS Equipment Specifications.
6.1.1 Data Recorder Scale. The Hg CEMS data recorder output range must include the full range of expected Hg concentration values in the gas stream to be sampled including zero and the span value.
6.1.2 The Hg CEMS design should also provide for the determination of CD and ME at a zero value (zero to 20 percent of the span value) and at upscale values (between 50 and 100 percent of the span value). The Hg CEMS must be constructed to permit the introduction of known concentrations of Hg and HgCl2 separately into the sampling system of the CEMS immediately preceding the sample extraction filtration system such that the entire CEMS can be challenged.
6.2 Reference Gas Delivery System. The reference gas delivery system must be designed so that the flowrate exceeds the sampling system flow requirements of the CEMS and that the gas is delivered to the CEMS at atmospheric pressure.
6.3 Other equipment and supplies, as needed by the reference method used for the Relative Accuracy Test Procedure. See section 8.6.2.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
7.1 Reference Gases. Reference gas standards are required for both elemental and oxidized Hg (Hg and mercuric chloride, HgCl2). The use of National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST)-traceable standards and reagents is required. The following gas concentrations are required.
7.1.1 Zero-level. 0 to 20 percent of the span value.
7.1.2 Mid-level. 50 to 60 percent of the span value.
7.1.3 High-level. 80 to 100 percent of the span value.
7.2 Reference gas standards may also be required for the reference methods. See section 8.6.2.
8.0 Performance Specification Test Procedure
8.1 Installation and Measurement Location Specifications.
8.1.1 CEMS Installation. Install the CEMS at an accessible location downstream of all pollution control equipment. Place the probe outlet or other sampling interface at a point or location in the stack (or vent) representative of the stack gas concentration of Hg. Since the Hg CEMS sample system normally extracts gas from a single point in the stack, a location that has been shown to be free of stratification for Hg or, alternatively, SO2 is recommended. If the cause of failure to meet the RA test requirement is determined to be the measurement location and a satisfactory correction technique cannot be established, the Administrator may require the CEMS to be relocated. Measurement locations and points or paths that are most likely to provide data that will meet the RA requirements are described in sections 8.1.2 and 8.1.3 below.
8.1.2 Measurement Location. The measurement location should be (1) at least two equivalent diameters downstream of the nearest control device, point of pollutant generation or other point at which a change of pollutant concentration may occur, and (2) at least half an equivalent diameter upstream from the effluent exhaust. The equivalent duct diameter is calculated according to Method 1 in appendix A-1 to this part.
8.1.3 Hg CEMS Sample Extraction Point. Use a sample extraction point either (1) no less than 1.0 meter from the stack or duct wall, or (2) within the centroidal velocity traverse area of the stack or duct cross section. This does not apply to cross-stack, in-situ measurement systems.
8.2 Measurement Error (ME) Test Procedure. Sequentially inject each of at least three elemental Hg reference gases (zero, mid-level, and high level, as defined in section 7.1), three times each for a total of nine injections. Inject the gases in such a manner that the entire CEMS is challenged. Do not inject the same gas concentration twice in succession. At each reference gas concentration, determine the average of the three CEMS responses and subtract the average response from the reference gas value. Calculate the measurement error (ME) using Equation 12-1 by expressing the absolute value of the difference between the average CEMS response (A) and the reference gas value (R) as a percentage of the span (see example data sheet in Figure 12A-1). For each elemental Hg reference gas, the absolute value of the difference between the CEMS response and the reference value must not exceed 5 percent of the span value. If this specification is not met, identify and correct the problem before proceeding. Repeat the measurement error test procedure using oxidized Hg reference gases. For each oxidized Hg reference gas, the absolute value of the difference between the CEMS response and the reference value shall not exceed 10 percent of the span value. If this specification is not met, identify and correct the problem before proceeding.
8.3 Seven-Day Calibration Drift (CD) Test Procedure.
8.3.1 CD Test Period. While the affected facility is operating normally, or as specified in an applicable regulation, determine the magnitude of the CD once each day (at 24-hour intervals, to the extent practicable) for 7 consecutive unit operating days according to the procedures in sections 8.3.2 and 8.3.3. The 7 consecutive unit operating days need not be 7 consecutive calendar days. Use either Hg° or HgCl2 standards for this test.
8.3.2 The purpose of the CD measurement is to verify the ability of the CEMS to conform to the established CEMS response used for determining emission concentrations or emission rates. Therefore, if periodic automatic or manual adjustments are made to the CEMS zero and upscale response settings, conduct the CD test immediately before these adjustments, or conduct it in such a way that the CD can be determined.
8.3.3 Conduct the CD test using the zero gas specified and either the mid-level or high-level gas as specified in section 7.1. Sequentially introduce the reference gases to the CEMS at the sampling system of the CEMS immediately preceding the sample extraction filtration system. Record the CEMS response (A) for each reference gas and, using Equation 12A-2, subtract the corresponding reference value (R) from the CEMS value, and express the absolute value of the difference as a percentage of the span value (see also example data sheet in Figure 12A-2). For each reference gas, the absolute value of the difference between the CEMS response and the reference value must not exceed 5 percent of the span value. If these specifications are not met, identify and correct the problem before proceeding.
8.4 Relative Accuracy (RA) Test Procedure.
8.4.1 RA Test Period. Conduct the RA test according to the procedure given in sections 8.4.2 through 8.4.6 while the affected facility is operating normally, or as specified in an applicable subpart. The RA test may be conducted during the CD test period.
8.4.2 Reference Methods (RM). Unless otherwise specified in an applicable subpart of this part, use method 29, method 30A, or method 30B in appendix A-8 to this part or ASTM Method D6784-16 (IBR, see § 60.17) as the RM for Hg concentration. For method 29 and ASTM Method D6784-16 only, the filterable portion of the sample need not be included when making comparisons to the CEMS results. When method 29, method 30B, or ASTM D6784-16 is used, conduct the RM test runs with paired or duplicate sampling systems and use the average of the vapor phase Hg concentrations measured by the two trains. When method 30A is used, paired sampling systems are not required. If the RM and CEMS measure on a different moisture basis, data derived with method 4 in appendix A-3 to this part must also be obtained during the RA test.
8.4.3 Sampling Strategy for RM Tests. Conduct the RM tests in such a way that they will yield results representative of the emissions from the source and can be compared to the CEMS data. The RM and CEMS locations need not be immediately adjacent. Locate the RM measurement points in accordance with section 8.1.3 of Performance Specification 2 (PS 2) in this appendix. It is preferable to conduct moisture measurements (if needed) and Hg measurements simultaneously, although moisture measurements that are taken within an hour of the Hg measurements may be used to adjust the Hg concentrations to a consistent moisture basis. In order to correlate the CEMS and RM data properly, note the beginning and end of each RM test period for each paired RM run (including the exact time of day) on the CEMS chart recordings or other permanent record of output.
8.4.4 Number and Length of RM Test Runs. Conduct a minimum of nine RM test runs. When method 29, method 30B, or ASTM D6784-16 is used, only test runs for which the paired RM trains meet the relative deviation criteria (RD) of this PS must be used in the RA calculations. In addition, for method 29 and ASTM D6784-16, use a minimum sample time of 2 hours and for methods 30A and 30B use a minimum sample time of 30 minutes.
8.4.5 Correlation of RM and CEMS Data. Correlate the CEMS and the RM test data as to the time and duration by first determining from the CEMS final output (the one used for reporting) the integrated average pollutant concentration for each RM test period. Consider system response time, if important, and confirm that the results are on a consistent moisture basis with the RM test. Then, compare each integrated CEMS value against the corresponding RM value. When method 29, method 30B, or ASTM D6784-16 is used, compare each CEMS value against the corresponding average of the paired RM values.
8.4.6 Paired RM Outliers.
8.4.6.1 When method 29, method 30B, or ASTM D6784-16 is used, outliers are identified through the determination of relative deviation (RD) of the paired RM tests. Data that do not meet the RD criteria must be flagged as a data quality problem and may not be used in the calculation of RA. The primary reason for performing paired RM sampling is to ensure the quality of the RM data. The percent RD of paired data is the parameter used to quantify data quality. Determine RD for paired data points as follows:
Where Ca and Cb are the Hg concentration values determined from the paired samples.
8.4.6.2 The minimum performance criteria for RM Hg data is that RD for any data pair must be ≤10 percent as long as the mean Hg concentration is greater than 1.0 µg/m 3. If the mean Hg concentration is less than or equal to 1.0 µg/m 3, the RD must be ≤20 percent or ≤0.2 µg/m 3 absolute difference. Pairs of RM data exceeding these RD criteria should be eliminated from the data set used to develop a Hg CEMS correlation or to assess CEMS RA.
8.4.7 Calculate the mean difference between the RM and CEMS values in the units of micrograms per cubic meter (µg/m 3), the standard deviation, the confidence coefficient, and the RA according to the procedures in section 12.0.
8.5 Reporting. At a minimum (check with the appropriate EPA Regional Office, State or local Agency for additional requirements, if any), summarize in tabular form the results of the CD tests, the linearity tests, and the RA test or alternative RA procedure, as appropriate. Include all data sheets, calculations, charts (records of CEMS responses), reference gas concentration certifications, and any other information necessary to confirm that the CEMS meets the performance criteria.
9.0 Quality Control [Reserved]
10.0 Calibration and Standardization [Reserved]
11.0 Analytical Procedure
For Method 30A, sample collection and analysis are concurrent. For the other RM, post-run sample analyses are performed. Refer to the RM employed for specific analytical procedures.
12.0 Calculations and Data Analysis
Calculate and summarize the RA test results on a data sheet similar to Figure 12A-3.
12.1 Consistent Basis. All data from the RM and CEMS must be compared in units of micrograms per standard cubic meter (µg/scm), on a consistent and identified moisture basis. The values must be standardized to 20 °C, 760 mm Hg.
12.1.1 Moisture Correction (as applicable). If the RM and CEMS measure Hg on a different moisture basis, they will need to be corrected to a consistent basis. Use Equation 12A-4a to correct data from a wet basis to a dry basis.
Use Equation 12A-4b to correct data from a dry basis to a wet basis.
Where:
Bws is the moisture content of the flue gas from Method 4, expressed as a decimal fraction (e.g., for 8.0 percent H2O, Bws= 0.08).
12.2 Arithmetic Mean. Calculate d , the arithmetic mean of the differences (di) of a data set as follows:
Where:
n = Number of data points.
12.3 Standard Deviation. Calculate the standard deviation, Sd, as follows:
12.3 Confidence Coefficient (CC). Calculate the 2.5 percent error confidence coefficient (one-tailed), CC, as follows:
12.4 Relative Accuracy. Calculate the RA of a set of data as follows:
Where:
|d | = Absolute value of the mean of the differences (from Equation 12A-5)
|CC| = Absolute value of the confidence coefficient (from Equation 12A-7)
RM = Average reference method value
13.0 Method Performance
13.1 Measurement Error (ME). For Hg 0, the ME must not exceed 5 percent of the span value at the zero-, mid-, and high-level reference gas concentrations. For HgCl2, the ME must not exceed 10 percent of the span value at the zero-, mid-, and high-level reference gas concentrations.
13.2 Calibration Drift (CD). The CD must not exceed 5 percent of the span value on any of the 7 days of the CD test.
13.3 Relative Accuracy (RA). The RA of the CEMS must be no greater than 20 percent of the mean value of the RM test data in terms of units of µg/scm. Alternatively, if the mean RM is less than 2.5 µg/scm, the results are acceptable if the absolute value of the difference between the mean RM and CEMS values added to the absolute value of the confidence coefficient from equation 12A-7 of this method does not exceed 0.5 µg/scm.
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 Alternative Procedures [Reserved]
17.0 Bibliography
17.1 40 CFR part 60, appendix B, “Performance Specification 2—Specifications and Test Procedures for SO2 and NOX Continuous Emission Monitoring Systems in Stationary Sources.”
17.2 40 CFR part 60, appendix A, “Method 29—Determination of Metals Emissions from Stationary Sources.”
17.3 40 CFR part 60, appendix A, “Method 30A—Determination of Total Vapor Phase Mercury Emissions From Stationary Sources (Instrumental Analyzer Procedure).
17.4 40 CFR part 60, appendix A, “Method 30B—Determination of Total Vapor Phase Mercury Emissions From Coal-Fired Combustion Sources Using Carbon Sorbent Traps.”
17.5 ASTM Method D6784-16, “Standard Test Method for Elemental, Oxidized, Particle-Bound and Total Mercury in Flue Gas Generated from Coal-Fired Stationary Sources (Ontario Hydro Method).”
18.0 Tables and Figures
| na | t0.975 | na | t0.975 | na | t0.975 |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 2 | 12.706 | 7 | 2.447 | 12 | 2.201 |
| 3 | 4.303 | 8 | 2.365 | 13 | 2.179 |
| 4 | 3.182 | 9 | 2.306 | 14 | 2.160 |
| 5 | 2.776 | 10 | 2.262 | 15 | 2.145 |
| 6 | 2.571 | 11 | 2.228 | 16 | 2.131 |
| a The values in this table are already corrected for n-1 degrees of freedom. Use n equal to the number of individual values. |
| Date | Time | Reference gas value (µg/m3) |
CEMS measured value (µg/m3) |
Absolute difference (µg/m3) |
ME (% of span value) |
|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Zero level | ||||||
| Average | ||||||
| Mid level | ||||||
| Average | ||||||
| High level | ||||||
| Average |
| Date | Time | Reference gas value (µg/m3) |
CEMS measured value (µg/m3) |
Absolute difference (µg/m3) |
CD (% of span value) |
|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Zero level | ||||||
| Upscale (Mid or High) |
||||||
| Run No. | Date | Begin time | End time | RM value
(µg/m3) |
CEMS value
(µg/m3) |
Difference
(µg/m3) |
Run used?
(yes/no) |
RD 1 |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | ||||||||
| 2 | ||||||||
| 3 | ||||||||
| 4 | ||||||||
| 5 | ||||||||
| 6 | ||||||||
| 7 | ||||||||
| 8 | ||||||||
| 9 | ||||||||
| 10 | ||||||||
| 11 | ||||||||
| 12 | ||||||||
| Average Values | ||||||||
| Arithmetic Mean Difference: | ||||||||
| Standard Deviation: | ||||||||
| Confidence Coefficient: | ||||||||
| T-Value: | ||||||||
| % Relative Accuracy: | ||||||||
| | (RM)avg − (CEMS)avg|: | ||||||||
| 1 Calculate the RD only if paired samples are taken using RM 30B, RM 29, or ASTM D6784-16. Express RD as a percentage or, for very low RM concentrations (≤1.0 µg/m3), as the absolute difference between Ca and Cb. |
Performance Specification 12B—Specifications and Test Procedures for Monitoring Total Vapor Phase Mercury Emissions From Stationary Sources Using a Sorbent Trap Monitoring System
1.0 Scope and Application
The purpose of Performance Specification 12B (PS 12B) is to establish performance benchmarks for, and to evaluate the acceptability of, sorbent trap monitoring systems used to monitor total vapor-phase mercury (Hg) emissions in stationary source flue gas streams. These monitoring systems involve continuous repetitive in-stack sampling using paired sorbent media traps with periodic analysis of the time-integrated samples. Persons using PS 12B should have a thorough working knowledge of Methods 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 30B in appendices A-1 through A-3 and A-8 to this part.
1.1 Analyte. The analyte measured by these procedures and specifications is total vapor phase Hg in the flue gas, which represents the sum of elemental Hg (Hg 0, CAS Number 7439-97-6) and gaseous forms of oxidized Hg (i.e., Hg+2) in mass concentration units of micrograms per dry standard cubic meter (µg/dscm).
1.2 Applicability
1.2.1 These procedures are only intended for use under relatively low particulate conditions (e.g., monitoring after all pollution control devices). This specification is for evaluating the acceptability of total vapor phase Hg sorbent trap monitoring systems installed at stationary sources at the time of, or soon after, installation and whenever specified in the regulations. The Hg monitoring system must be capable of measuring the total concentration of vapor phase Hg (regardless of speciation), in units of µg/dscm.
1.2.2 This specification contains routine procedures and specifications designed to evaluate an installed sorbent trap monitoring system's performance over time; Procedure 5 of appendix F to this part contains additional procedures and specifications which may be required for long term operation. In addition, the source owner or operator is responsible to calibrate, maintain, and operate the monitoring system properly. The Administrator may require the owner or operator, under section 114 of the Clean Air Act, to conduct performance evaluations at other times besides the initial test to evaluate the CEMS performance. See § 60.13(c) and 63.8(e)(1).
2.0 Principle
Known volumes of flue gas are continuously extracted from a stack or duct through paired, in-stack, pre-spiked sorbent media traps at appropriate nominal flow rates. The sorbent traps in the sampling system are periodically exchanged with new ones, prepared for analysis as needed, and analyzed by any technique that can meet the performance criteria. For quality-assurance purposes, a section of each sorbent trap is spiked with Hg 0 prior to sampling. Following sampling, this section is analyzed separately and a specified minimum percentage of the spike must be recovered. Paired train sampling is required to determine method precision.
3.0 Definitions
3.1 Sorbent Trap Monitoring System means the total equipment required for the collection of gaseous Hg samples using paired three-partition sorbent traps.
3.2 Relative Accuracy Test Procedure means a test procedure consisting of at least nine runs, in which the accuracy of the total vapor phase Hg concentrations measured by the sorbent trap monitoring system is evaluated by comparison against concurrent measurements made with a reference method (RM). Relative accuracy tests repeated on a regular, on-going basis are referred to as relative accuracy test audits or RATAs.
3.3 Relative Accuracy (RA) means the absolute mean difference between the pollutant (Hg) concentrations determined by the sorbent trap monitoring system and the values determined by the reference method (RM) plus the 2.5 percent error confidence coefficient of a series of tests divided by the mean of the RM tests. Alternatively, for low concentration sources, the RA may be expressed as the absolute value of the difference between the mean sorbent trap monitoring system and RM values.
3.4 Relative Deviation (RD) means the absolute difference of the Hg concentration values obtained with a pair of sorbent traps divided by the sum of those concentrations, expressed as a percentage. RD is used to assess the precision of the sorbent trap monitoring system.
3.5 Spike Recovery means the mass of Hg recovered from the spiked trap section, expressed as a percentage of the amount spiked. Spike recovery is used to assess sample matrix interference.
4.0 Interferences [Reserved]
5.0 Safety
The procedures required under this performance specification may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This performance specification may not address all of the safety problems associated with these procedures. It is the responsibility of the user to establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicable regulatory limitations prior to performing these procedures.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
6.1 Sorbent Trap Monitoring System Equipment Specifications.
6.1.1 Monitoring System. The equipment described in Method 30B in appendix A-8 to this part must be used to continuously sample for Hg emissions, with the substitution of three-section traps in place of two-section traps, as described below. A typical sorbent trap monitoring system is shown in Figure 12B-1.
6.1.2 Three-Section Sorbent Traps. The sorbent media used to collect Hg must be configured in traps with three distinct and identical segments or sections, connected in series, to be separately analyzed. section 1 is designated for primary capture of gaseous Hg. section 2 is designated as a backup section for determination of vapor-phase Hg breakthrough. section 3 is designated for quality assurance/quality control (QA/QC) purposes. section 3 must be spiked with a known amount of gaseous Hg 0 prior to sampling and later analyzed to determine the spike (and hence sample) recovery efficiency.
6.1.3 Gaseous Hg 0 Sorbent Trap Spiking System. A known mass of gaseous Hg 0 must be spiked onto section 3 of each sorbent trap prior to sampling. Any approach capable of quantitatively delivering known masses of Hg 0 onto sorbent traps is acceptable. Several technologies or devices are available to meet this objective. Their practicality is a function of Hg mass spike levels. For low levels, NIST-certified or NIST-traceable gas generators or tanks may be suitable, but will likely require long preparation times. A more practical, alternative system, capable of delivering almost any mass required, employs NIST-certified or NIST-traceable Hg salt solutions (e.g., Hg(NO3)2). With this system, an aliquot of known volume and concentration is added to a reaction vessel containing a reducing agent (e.g., stannous chloride); the Hg salt solution is reduced to Hg 0 and purged onto section 3 of the sorbent trap by using an impinger sparging system.
6.1.4 Sample Analysis Equipment. Any analytical system capable of quantitatively recovering and quantifying total gaseous Hg from sorbent media is acceptable provided that the analysis can meet the performance criteria in Table 12B-1 in section 9 of this performance specification. Candidate recovery techniques include leaching, digestion, and thermal desorption. Candidate analytical techniques include ultraviolet atomic fluorescence (UV AF); ultraviolet atomic absorption (UV AA), with and without gold trapping; and in-situ X-ray fluorescence (XRF).
7.0 Reagents and Standards
Only NIST-certified or NIST-traceable calibration gas standards and reagents must be used for the tests and procedures required under this performance specification. The sorbent media may be any collection material (e.g., carbon, chemically treated filter, etc.) capable of quantitatively capturing and recovering for subsequent analysis, all gaseous forms of Hg in the emissions from the intended application. Selection of the sorbent media must be based on the material's ability to achieve the performance criteria contained in this method as well as the sorbent's vapor phase Hg capture efficiency for the emissions matrix and the expected sampling duration at the test site.
8.0 Performance Specification Test Procedure
8.1 Installation and Measurement Location Specifications.
8.1.1 Selection of Monitoring Site. Sampling site information should be obtained in accordance with Method 1 in appendix A-1 to this part. Place the probe inlet at a point or location in the stack (or vent) downstream of all pollution control equipment and representative of the stack gas concentration of Hg. A location that has been shown to be free of stratification for Hg or, alternatively, SO2 is recommended. An estimation of the expected stack Hg concentration is required to establish a target sample flow rate, total gas sample volume, and the mass of Hg 0 to be spiked onto section 3 of each sorbent trap.
8.1.2 Pre-sampling Spiking of Sorbent Traps. Based on the estimated Hg concentration in the stack, the target sample rate and the target sampling duration, calculate the expected mass loading for section 1 of each sorbent trap (see section 12.1 of this performance specification). The pre-sampling spike to be added to section 3 of each sorbent trap must be within ±50 percent of the expected section 1 mass loading. Spike section 3 of each sorbent trap at this level, as described in section 6.1.3 of this performance specification. For each sorbent trap, keep a record of the mass of Hg 0 added to section 3. This record must include, at a minimum, the identification number of the trap, the date and time of the spike, the name of the analyst performing the procedure, the method of spiking, the mass of Hg 0 added to section 3 of the trap (µg), and the supporting calculations.
8.1.3 Pre-monitoring Leak Check. Perform a leak check with the sorbent traps in place in the sampling system. Draw a vacuum in each sample train. Adjust the vacuum in each sample train to ∼15″ Hg. Use the gas flow meter to determine leak rate. The leakage rate must not exceed 4 percent of the target sampling rate. Once the leak check passes this criterion, carefully release the vacuum in the sample train, then seal the sorbent trap inlet until the probe is ready for insertion into the stack or duct.
8.1.4 Determination of Flue Gas Characteristics. Determine or measure the flue gas measurement environment characteristics (gas temperature, static pressure, gas velocity, stack moisture, etc.) in order to determine ancillary requirements such as probe heating requirements (if any), sampling rate, proportional sampling conditions, moisture management, etc.
8.2 Monitoring.
8.2.1 System Preparation and Initial Data Recording. Remove the plug from the end of each sorbent trap and store each plug in a clean sorbent trap storage container. Remove the stack or duct port cap and insert the probe(s) with the inlet(s) aligned perpendicular to the stack gas flow. Secure the probe(s) and ensure that no leakage occurs between the duct and environment. Record initial data including the sorbent trap ID, start time, starting gas flow meter readings, initial temperatures, set points, and any other appropriate information.
8.2.2 Flow Rate Control. Set the initial sample flow rate at the target value from section 8.1.1 of this performance specification. Then, for every operating hour during the sampling period, record the date and time, the sample flow rate, the gas flow meter reading, the stack temperature (if needed), the flow meter temperatures (if needed), temperatures of heated equipment such as the vacuum lines and the probes (if heated), and the sampling system vacuum readings. Also, record the stack gas flow rate and the ratio of the stack gas flow rate to the sample flow rate. Adjust the sampling flow rate to maintain proportional sampling, i.e., keep the ratio of the stack gas flow rate to sample flow rate within ±25 percent of the reference ratio from the first hour of the data collection period (see section 12.2 of this performance specification). The sample flow rate through a sorbent trap monitoring system during any hour (or portion of an hour) that the unit is not operating must be zero.
8.2.3 Stack Gas Moisture Determination. If data from the sorbent trap monitoring system will be used to calculate Hg mass emissions, determine the stack gas moisture content using a continuous moisture monitoring system or other means acceptable to the Administrator, such as the ones described in § 75.11(b) of this chapter. Alternatively, for combustion of coal, wood, or natural gas in boilers only, a default moisture percentage from § 75.11(b) of this chapter may be used.
8.2.4 Essential Operating Data. Obtain and record any essential operating data for the facility during the test period, e.g., the barometric pressure for correcting the sample volume measured by a dry gas meter to standard conditions. At the end of the data collection period, record the final gas flow meter reading and the final values of all other essential parameters.
8.2.5 Post-monitoring Leak Check. When the monitoring period is completed, turn off the sample pump, remove the probe/sorbent trap from the port and carefully re-plug the end of each sorbent trap. Perform a leak check with the sorbent traps in place, at the maximum vacuum reached during the monitoring period. Use the same general approach described in section 8.1.3 of this performance specification. Record the leakage rate and vacuum. The leakage rate must not exceed 4 percent of the average sampling rate for the monitoring period. Following the leak check, carefully release the vacuum in the sample train.
8.2.6 Sample Recovery. Recover each sampled sorbent trap by removing it from the probe and seal both ends. Wipe any deposited material from the outside of the sorbent trap. Place the sorbent trap into an appropriate sample storage container and store/preserve it in an appropriate manner.
8.2.7 Sample Preservation, Storage, and Transport. While the performance criteria of this approach provide for verification of appropriate sample handling, it is still important that the user consider, determine, and plan for suitable sample preservation, storage, transport, and holding times for these measurements. Therefore, procedures in recognized voluntary consensus standards such as those in ASTM D6911-03 “Standard Guide for Packaging and Shipping Environmental Samples for Laboratory Analysis” should be followed for all samples.
8.2.8 Sample Custody. Proper procedures and documentation for sample chain of custody are critical to ensuring data integrity. Chain of custody procedures in recognized voluntary consensus standards such as those in ASTM D4840-99 “Standard Guide for Sample Chain-of-Custody Procedures” should be followed for all samples (including field samples and blanks).
8.3 Relative Accuracy (RA) Test Procedure
8.3.1 For the initial certification of a sorbent trap monitoring system, a RA Test is required. Follow the basic RA test procedures and calculation methodology described in sections 8.4.1 through 8.4.7 and 12.4 of PS 12A in this appendix, replacing the term “CEMS” with “sorbent trap monitoring system”.
8.3.2 Special Considerations. The type of sorbent material used in the traps must be the same as that used for daily operation of the monitoring system; however, the size of the traps used for the RA test may be smaller than the traps used for daily operation of the system. Spike the third section of each sorbent trap with elemental Hg, as described in section 8.1.2 of this performance specification. Install a new pair of sorbent traps prior to each test run. For each run, the sorbent trap data must be validated according to the quality assurance criteria in Table 12B-1 in section 9.0, below.
8.3.3 Acceptance Criteria. The RA of the sorbent trap monitoring system must be no greater than 20 percent of the mean value of the RM test data in terms of units of µg/scm. Alternatively, if the RM concentration is less than or equal to 5.0 µg/scm, then the RA results are acceptable if the absolute difference between the means of the RM and sorbent trap monitoring system values does not exceed 1.0 µg/scm.
9.0 Quality Assurance and Quality Control (QA/QC)
Table 12B-1 summarizes the QA/QC performance criteria that are used to validate the Hg emissions data from a sorbent trap monitoring system. Failure to achieve these performance criteria will result in invalidation of Hg emissions data, except where otherwise noted.
| QA/QC test or specification |
Acceptance criteria | Frequency | Consequences if not met |
|---|---|---|---|
| Pre-test leak check | ≤4% of target sampling rate | Prior to monitoring | Monitoring must not commence until the leak check is passed. |
| Post-test leak check | ≤4% of average sampling rate | After monitoring | Invalidate the data from the paired traps or, if certain conditions are met, report adjusted data from a single trap (see Section 12.8.3). |
| Ratio of stack gas flow rate to sample flow rate | No more than 5% of the hourly ratios or 5 hourly ratios (whichever is less restrictive) may deviate from the reference ratio by more than ±25% | Every hour throughout monitoring period | Invalidate the data from the paired traps or, if certain conditions are met, report adjusted data from a single trap (see Section 12.8.3). |
| Sorbent trap section 2 breakthrough | ≤5% of Section 1 Hg mass ≤10% of Section 1 Hg mass if average Hg concentration is ≤0.5 µg/scm |
Every sample | Invalidate the data from the paired traps or, if certain conditions are met, report adjusted data from a single trap (see Section 12.8.3). |
| No criterion when Hg concentration for trap less than 10% of the applicable emission limit (must meet all other QA/QC specifications) | |||
| Paired sorbent trap agreement | ≤10% Relative Deviation (RD) if the average concentration is > 1.0 µg/m3 ≤20% RD if the average concentration is ≤1.0 µg/m3 |
Every sample | Either invalidate the data from the paired traps or report the results from the trap with the higher Hg concentration. |
| Results also acceptable if absolute difference between concentrations from paired traps is ≤ 0.03 µg/m3 | |||
| Spike Recovery Study | Average recovery between 85% and 115% for each of the 3 spike concentration levels | Prior to analyzing field samples and prior to use of new sorbent media | Field samples must not be analyzed until the percent recovery criteria have been met. |
| Multipoint analyzer calibration | Each analyzer reading within ±10% of true value and r2 ≥ 0.99 | On the day of analysis, before analyzing any samples | Recalibrate until successful. |
| Analysis of independent calibration standard | Within ±10% of true value | Following daily calibration, prior to analyzing field samples | Recalibrate and repeat independent standard analysis until successful. |
| Spike recovery from section 3 of both sorbent traps | 75-125% of spike amount | Every sample | Invalidate the data from the paired traps or, if certain conditions are met, report adjusted data from a single trap (see Section 12.8.3). |
| Relative Accuracy | RA ≤ 20.0% of RM mean value; or if RM mean value ≤5.0 µg/scm, absolute difference between RM and sorbent trap monitoring system mean values ≤1.0 µg/scm | RA specification must be met for initial certification | Data from the system are invalid until a RA test is passed. |
| Gas flow meter calibration | An initial calibration factor (Y) has been determined at 3 settings; for mass flow meters, initial calibration with stack gas has been performed. For subsequent calibrations, Y within ±5% of average value from the most recent 3-point calibration | At 3 settings prior to initial use and at least quarterly at one setting thereafter | Recalibrate meter at 3 settings to determine a new value of Y. |
| Temperature sensor calibration | Absolute temperature measured by sensor within ±1.5% of a reference sensor | Prior to initial use and at least quarterly thereafter | Recalibrate; sensor may not be used until specification is met. |
| Barometer calibration | Absolute pressure measured by instrument within ±10 mm Hg of reading with a NIST-traceable barometer | Prior to initial use and at least quarterly thereafter | Recalibrate; instrument may not be used until specification is met. |
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
10.1 Gaseous and Liquid Standards. Only NIST certified or NIST-traceable calibration standards (i.e., calibration gases, solutions, etc.) must be used for the spiking and analytical procedures in this performance specification.
10.2 Gas Flow Meter Calibration. The manufacturer or supplier of the gas flow meter should perform all necessary set-up, testing, programming, etc., and should provide the end user with any necessary instructions, to ensure that the meter will give an accurate readout of dry gas volume in standard cubic meters for the particular field application.
10.2.1 Initial Calibration. Prior to its initial use, a calibration of the flow meter must be performed. The initial calibration may be done by the manufacturer, by the equipment supplier, or by the end user. If the flow meter is volumetric in nature (e.g., a dry gas meter), the manufacturer, equipment supplier, or end user may perform a direct volumetric calibration using any gas. For a mass flow meter, the manufacturer, equipment supplier, or end user may calibrate the meter using a bottled gas mixture containing 12 ±0.5% CO2, 7 ±0.5% O2, and balance N2, or these same gases in proportions more representative of the expected stack gas composition. Mass flow meters may also be initially calibrated on-site, using actual stack gas.
10.2.1.1 Initial Calibration Procedures. Determine an average calibration factor (Y) for the gas flow meter, by calibrating it at three sample flow rate settings covering the range of sample flow rates at which the sorbent trap monitoring system typically operates. Either the procedures in section 10.3.1 of Method 5 in appendix A-3 to this part or the procedures in section 16 of Method 5 in appendix A-3 to this part may be followed. If a dry gas meter is being calibrated, use at least five revolutions of the meter at each flow rate.
10.2.1.2 Alternative Initial Calibration Procedures. Alternatively, the initial calibration of the gas flow meter may be performed using a reference gas flow meter (RGFM). The RGFM may be either: (1) A wet test meter calibrated according to section 10.3.1 of Method 5 in appendix A-3 to this part; (2) A gas flow metering device calibrated at multiple flow rates using the procedures in section 16 of Method 5 in appendix A-3 to this part; or (3) A NIST-traceable calibration device capable of measuring volumetric flow to an accuracy of 1 percent. To calibrate the gas flow meter using the RGFM, proceed as follows: While the sorbent trap monitoring system is sampling the actual stack gas or a compressed gas mixture that simulates the stack gas composition (as applicable), connect the RGFM to the discharge of the system. Care should be taken to minimize the dead volume between the sample flow meter being tested and the RGFM. Concurrently measure dry gas volume with the RGFM and the flow meter being calibrated for a minimum of 10 minutes at each of three flow rates covering the typical range of operation of the sorbent trap monitoring system. For each 10-minute (or longer) data collection period, record the total sample volume, in units of dry standard cubic meters (dscm), measured by the RGFM and the gas flow meter being tested.
10.2.1.3 Initial Calibration Factor. Calculate an individual calibration factor Yi at each tested flow rate from section 10.2.1.1 or 10.2.1.2 of this performance specification (as applicable), by taking the ratio of the reference sample volume to the sample volume recorded by the gas flow meter. Average the three Yi values, to determine Y, the calibration factor for the flow meter. Each of the three individual values of Yi must be within ±0.02 of Y. Except as otherwise provided in sections 10.2.1.4 and 10.2.1.5 of this performance specification, use the average Y value from the three level calibration to adjust all subsequent gas volume measurements made with the gas flow meter.
10.2.2 Initial On-Site Calibration Check. For a mass flow meter that was initially calibrated using a compressed gas mixture, an on-site calibration check must be performed before using the flow meter to provide data. While sampling stack gas, check the calibration of the flow meter at one intermediate flow rate typical of normal operation of the monitoring system. Follow the basic procedures in section 10.2.1.1 or 10.2.1.2 of this performance specification. If the onsite calibration check shows that the value of Yi, the calibration factor at the tested flow rate, differs by more than 5 percent from the value of Y obtained in the initial calibration of the meter, repeat the full 3-level calibration of the meter using stack gas to determine a new value of Y, and apply the new Y value to all subsequent gas volume measurements made with the gas flow meter.
10.2.3 Ongoing Quality Control. Recalibrate the gas flow meter quarterly at one intermediate flow rate setting representative of normal operation of the monitoring system. Follow the basic procedures in section 10.2.1.1 or 10.2.1.2 of this performance specification. If a quarterly recalibration shows that the value of Yi, the calibration factor at the tested flow rate, differs from the current value of Y by more than 5 percent, repeat the full 3-level calibration of the meter to determine a new value of Y, and apply the new Y value to all subsequent gas volume measurements made with the gas flow meter.
10.3 Calibration of Thermocouples and Other Temperature Sensors. Use the procedures and criteria in section 10.3 of Method 2 in appendix A-1 to this part to calibrate in-stack temperature sensors and thermocouples. Calibrations must be performed prior to initial use and at least quarterly thereafter. At each calibration point, the absolute temperature measured by the temperature sensor must agree to within ±1.5 percent of the temperature measured with the reference sensor, otherwise the sensor may not continue to be used.
10.4 Barometer Calibration. Calibrate the barometer against another barometer that has a NIST-traceable calibration. This calibration must be performed prior to initial use and at least quarterly thereafter. At each calibration point, the absolute pressure measured by the barometer must agree to within ±10 mm Hg of the pressure measured by the NIST-traceable barometer, otherwise the barometer may not continue to be used.
10.5 Calibration of Other Sensors and Gauges. Calibrate all other sensors and gauges according to the procedures specified by the instrument manufacturer(s).
10.6 Analytical System Calibration. See section 11.1 of this performance specification.
11.0 Analytical Procedures
The analysis of the Hg samples may be conducted using any instrument or technology capable of quantifying total Hg from the sorbent media and meeting the performance criteria in section 9 of this performance specification.
11.1 Analyzer System Calibration. Perform a multipoint calibration of the analyzer at three or more upscale points over the desired quantitative range (multiple calibration ranges must be calibrated, if necessary). The field samples analyzed must fall within a calibrated, quantitative range and meet the necessary performance criteria. For samples that are suitable for aliquotting, a series of dilutions may be needed to ensure that the samples fall within a calibrated range. However, for sorbent media samples that are consumed during analysis (e.g., thermal desorption techniques), extra care must be taken to ensure that the analytical system is appropriately calibrated prior to sample analysis. The calibration curve range(s) should be determined based on the anticipated level of Hg mass on the sorbent media. Knowledge of estimated stack Hg concentrations and total sample volume may be required prior to analysis. The calibration curve for use with the various analytical techniques (e.g., UV AA, UV AF, and XRF) can be generated by directly introducing standard solutions into the analyzer or by spiking the standards onto the sorbent media and then introducing into the analyzer after preparing the sorbent/standard according to the particular analytical technique. For each calibration curve, the value of the square of the linear correlation coefficient, i.e., r 2, must be ≥0.99, and the analyzer response must be within ±10 percent of reference value at each upscale calibration point. Calibrations must be performed on the day of the analysis, before analyzing any of the samples. Following calibration, an independently prepared standard (not from same calibration stock solution) must be analyzed. The measured value of the independently prepared standard must be within ±10 percent of the expected value.
11.2 Sample Preparation. Carefully separate the three sections of each sorbent trap. Combine for analysis all materials associated with each section, i.e., any supporting substrate that the sample gas passes through prior to entering a media section (e.g., glass wool, polyurethane foam, etc.) must be analyzed with that segment.
11.3 Spike Recovery Study. Before analyzing any field samples, the laboratory must demonstrate the ability to recover and quantify Hg from the sorbent media by performing the following spike recovery study for sorbent media traps spiked with elemental mercury. Using the procedures described in sections 6.2 and 12.1 of this performance specification, spike the third section of nine sorbent traps with gaseous Hg 0, i.e., three traps at each of three different mass loadings, representing the range of masses anticipated in the field samples. This will yield a 3 × 3 sample matrix. Prepare and analyze the third section of each spiked trap, using the techniques that will be used to prepare and analyze the field samples. The average recovery for each spike concentration must be between 85 and 115 percent. If multiple types of sorbent media are to be analyzed, a separate spike recovery study is required for each sorbent material. If multiple ranges are calibrated, a separate spike recovery study is required for each range.
11.4 Field Sample Analyses. Analyze the sorbent trap samples following the same procedures that were used for conducting the spike recovery study. The three sections of each sorbent trap must be analyzed separately (i.e., section 1, then section 2, then section 3). Quantify the total mass of Hg for each section based on analytical system response and the calibration curve from section 11.1 of this performance specification. Determine the spike recovery from sorbent trap section 3. The spike recovery must be no less than 75 percent and no greater than 125 percent. To report the final Hg mass for each trap, add together the Hg masses collected in trap sections 1 and 2.
12.0 Calculations, Data Reduction, and Data Analysis
12.1 Calculation of Pre-Sampling Spiking Level. Determine sorbent trap section 3 spiking level using estimates of the stack Hg concentration, the target sample flow rate, and the expected monitoring period. Calculate Mexp, the expected Hg mass that will be collected in section 1 of the trap, using Equation 12B-1. The pre-sampling spike must be within ±50 percent of this mass.
Where:
Mexp = Expected sample mass (µg)
Qs = Sample flow rate (L/min)
ts = Expected monitoring period (min)
Cest = Estimated Hg concentration in stack gas (µg/m 3)
10−3 = Conversion factor (m 3/L)
For an estimated stack Hg concentration of 5 µg/m 3, a target sample rate of 0.30 L/min, and a monitoring period of 5 days:
Mexp = (0.30 L/min)(1440 min/day)(5 days)(10−3 m 3/L)(5 µg/m 3) = 10.8 µg
A pre-sampling spike of 10.8 µg ±50 percent is, therefore, appropriate.
12.2 Calculations for Flow-Proportional Sampling. For the first hour of the data collection period, determine the reference ratio of the stack gas volumetric flow rate to the sample flow rate, as follows:
Where:
Rref = Reference ratio of hourly stack gas flow rate to hourly sample flow rate
Qref = Average stack gas volumetric flow rate for first hour of collection period (scfh)
Fref = Average sample flow rate for first hour of the collection period, in appropriate units (e.g., liters/min, cc/min, dscm/min)
K = Power of ten multiplier, to keep the value of Rref between 1 and 100. The appropriate K value will depend on the selected units of measure for the sample flow rate.
Then, for each subsequent hour of the data collection period, calculate ratio of the stack gas flow rate to the sample flow rate using Equation 12B-3:
Where:
Rh = Ratio of hourly stack gas flow rate to hourly sample flow rate
Qh = Average stack gas volumetric flow rate for the hour (scfh)
Fh = Average sample flow rate for the hour, in appropriate units (e.g., liters/min, cc/min, dscm/min)
K = Power of ten multiplier, to keep the value of Rh between 1 and 100. The appropriate K value will depend on the selected units of measure for the sample flow rate and the range of expected stack gas flow rates.
Maintain the value of Rh within ±25 percent of Rref throughout the data collection period.
12.3 Calculation of Spike Recovery. Calculate the percent recovery of each section 3 spike, as follows:
Where:
%R = Percentage recovery of the pre-sampling spike
M3 = Mass of Hg recovered from section 3 of the sorbent trap, (µg)
Ms = Calculated Hg mass of the pre-sampling spike, from section 8.1.2 of this performance specification, (µg)
12.4 Calculation of Breakthrough. Calculate the percent breakthrough to the second section of the sorbent trap, as follows:
Where:
%B = Percent breakthrough
M2 = Mass of Hg recovered from section 2 of the sorbent trap, (µg)
M1 = Mass of Hg recovered from section 1 of the sorbent trap, (µg)
12.5 Calculation of Hg Concentration. Calculate the Hg concentration for each sorbent trap, using the following equation:
Where:
C = Concentration of Hg for the collection period, (µg/dscm)
M* = Total mass of Hg recovered from sections 1 and 2 of the sorbent trap, (µg)
Vt = Total volume of dry gas metered during the collection period, (dscm). For the purposes of this performance specification, standard temperature and pressure are defined as 20 °C and 760 mm Hg, respectively.
12.6 Calculation of Paired Trap Agreement. Calculate the relative deviation (RD) between the Hg concentrations measured with the paired sorbent traps:
Where:
RD = Relative deviation between the Hg concentrations from traps “a” and “b” (percent)
Ca = Concentration of Hg for the collection period, for sorbent trap “a” (µg/dscm)
Cb = Concentration of Hg for the collection period, for sorbent trap “b” (µg/dscm)
12.7 Calculation of Relative Accuracy. Calculate the relative accuracy as described in section 12.4 of PS 12A in this appendix.
12.8 Data Reduction. Typical monitoring periods for normal, day-to-day operation of a sorbent trap monitoring system range from about 24 hours to 168 hours. For the required RA tests of the system, smaller sorbent traps are often used, and the “monitoring period” or time per run is considerably shorter (e.g., 1 hour or less). Generally speaking, to validate sorbent trap monitoring system data, the acceptance criteria for the following five QC specifications in Table 12B-1 above must be met for both traps: (a) the post-monitoring leak check; (b) the ratio of stack gas flow rate to sample flow rate; (c) section 2 breakthrough; (d) paired trap agreement; and (e) section 3 spike recovery.
12.8.1 For routine day-to-day operation of a sorbent trap monitoring system, when both traps meet the acceptance criteria for all five QC specifications, the two measured Hg concentrations must be averaged arithmetically and the average value must be applied to each hour of the data collection period.
12.8.2 To validate a RA test run, both traps must meet the acceptance criteria for all five QC specifications. However, as specified in section 12.8.3 below, for routine day-to-day operation of the monitoring system, a monitoring period may, in certain instances, be validated based on the results from one trap.
12.8.3 For the routine, day-to-day operation of the monitoring system, when one of the two sorbent trap samples or sampling systems either: (a) Fails the post-monitoring leak check; or (b) has excessive section 2 breakthrough; or (c) fails to maintain the proper stack flow-to-sample flow ratio; or (d) fails to achieve the required section 3 spike recovery; or (e) is lost, broken, or damaged, provided that the other trap meets the acceptance criteria for all four of these QC specifications, the Hg concentration measured by the valid trap may be multiplied by a factor of 1.111 and then used for reporting purposes. Further, if both traps meet the acceptance criteria for all four of these QC specifications, but the acceptance criterion for paired trap agreement is not met, the owner or operator may report the higher of the two Hg concentrations measured by the traps, in lieu of invalidating the data from the paired traps.
12.8.4 Whenever the data from a pair of sorbent traps must be invalidated and no quality-assured data from a certified backup Hg monitoring system or Hg reference method are available to cover the hours in the data collection period, treat those hours in the manner specified in the applicable regulation (i.e., use missing data substitution procedures or count the hours as monitoring system down time, as appropriate).
13.0 Monitoring System Performance
These monitoring criteria and procedures have been successfully applied to coal-fired utility boilers (including units with post-combustion emission controls), having vapor-phase Hg concentrations ranging from 0.03 µg/dscm to approximately 100 µg/dscm.
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 Alternative Procedures [Reserved]
17.0 Bibliography
17.1 40 CFR Part 60, Appendix B, “Performance Specification 2—Specifications and Test Procedures for SO2 and NOX Continuous Emission Monitoring Systems in Stationary Sources.”
17.2 40 CFR Part 60, Appendix B, “Performance Specification 12A—Specifications and Test Procedures for Total Vapor Phase Mercury Continuous Emission Monitoring Systems in Stationary Sources.”
Performance Specification 15—Performance Specification for Extractive FTIR Continuous Emissions Monitor Systems in Stationary Sources
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Analytes. This performance specification is applicable for measuring all hazardous air pollutants (HAPs) which absorb in the infrared region and can be quantified using Fourier Transform Infrared Spectroscopy (FTIR), as long as the performance criteria of this performance specification are met. This specification is to be used for evaluating FTIR continuous emission monitoring systems for measuring HAPs regulated under Title III of the 1990 Clean Air Act Amendments. This specification also applies to the use of FTIR CEMs for measuring other volatile organic or inorganic species.
1.2 Applicability. A source which can demonstrate that the extractive FTIR system meets the criteria of this performance specification for each regulated pollutant may use the FTIR system to continuously monitor for the regulated pollutants.
2.0 Summary of Performance Specification
For compound-specific sampling requirements refer to FTIR sampling methods (e.g., reference 1). For data reduction procedures and requirements refer to the EPA FTIR Protocol (reference 2), hereafter referred to as the “FTIR Protocol.” This specification describes sampling and analytical procedures for quality assurance. The infrared spectrum of any absorbing compound provides a distinct signature. The infrared spectrum of a mixture contains the superimposed spectra of each mixture component. Thus, an FTIR CEM provides the capability to continuously measure multiple components in a sample using a single analyzer. The number of compounds that can be speciated in a single spectrum depends, in practice, on the specific compounds present and the test conditions.
3.0 Definitions
For a list of definitions related to FTIR spectroscopy refer to Appendix A of the FTIR Protocol. Unless otherwise specified, spectroscopic terms, symbols and equations in this performance specification are taken from the FTIR Protocol or from documents cited in the Protocol. Additional definitions are given below.
3.1 FTIR Continuous Emission Monitoring System (FTIR CEM).
3.1.1 FTIR System. Instrument to measure spectra in the mid-infrared spectral region (500 to 4000 cm−1). It contains an infrared source, interferometer, sample gas containment cell, infrared detector, and computer. The interferometer consists of a beam splitter that divides the beam into two paths, one path a fixed distance and the other a variable distance. The computer is equipped with software to run the interferometer and store the raw digitized signal from the detector (interferogram). The software performs the mathematical conversion (the Fourier transform) of the interferogram into a spectrum showing the frequency dependent sample absorbance. All spectral data can be stored on computer media.
3.1.2 Gas Cell. A gas containment cell that can be evacuated. It contains the sample as the infrared beam passes from the interferometer, through the sample, and to the detector. The gas cell may have multi-pass mirrors depending on the required detection limit(s) for the application.
3.1.3 Sampling System. Equipment used to extract sample from the test location and transport the gas to the FTIR analyzer. Sampling system components include probe, heated line, heated non-reactive pump, gas distribution manifold and valves, flow measurement devices and any sample conditioning systems.
3.2 Reference CEM. An FTIR CEM, with sampling system, that can be used for comparison measurements.
3.3 Infrared Band (also Absorbance Band or Band). Collection of lines arising from rotational transitions superimposed on a vibrational transition. An infrared absorbance band is analyzed to determine the analyte concentration.
3.4 Sample Analysis. Interpreting infrared band shapes, frequencies, and intensities to obtain sample component concentrations. This is usually performed by a software routine using a classical least squares (cls), partial least squares (pls), or K- or P- matrix method.
3.5 (Target) Analyte. A compound whose measurement is required, usually to some established limit of detection and analytical uncertainty.
3.6 Interferant. A compound in the sample matrix whose infrared spectrum overlaps at least part of an analyte spectrum complicating the analyte measurement. The interferant may not prevent the analyte measurement, but could increase the analytical uncertainty in the measured concentration. Reference spectra of interferants are used to distinguish the interferant bands from the analyte bands. An interferant for one analyte may not be an interferant for other analytes.
3.7 Reference Spectrum. Infrared spectra of an analyte, or interferant, prepared under controlled, documented, and reproducible laboratory conditions (see section 4.6 of the FTIR Protocol). A suitable library of reference spectra can be used to measure target analytes in gas samples.
3.8 Calibration Spectrum. Infrared spectrum of a compound suitable for characterizing the FTIR instrument configuration (Section 4.5 in the FTIR Protocol).
3.9 One hundred percent line. A double beam transmittance spectrum obtained by combining two successive background single beam spectra. Ideally, this line is equal to 100 percent transmittance (or zero absorbance) at every point in the spectrum. The zero absorbance line is used to measure the RMS noise of the system.
3.10 Background Deviation. Any deviation (from 100 percent) in the one hundred percent line (or from zero absorbance). Deviations greater than ±5 percent in any analytical region are unacceptable. Such deviations indicate a change in the instrument throughput relative to the single-beam background.
3.11 Batch Sampling. A gas cell is alternately filled and evacuated. A Spectrum of each filled cell (one discreet sample) is collected and saved.
3.12 Continuous Sampling. Sample is continuously flowing through a gas cell. Spectra of the flowing sample are collected at regular intervals.
3.13 Continuous Operation. In continuous operation an FTIR CEM system, without user intervention, samples flue gas, records spectra of samples, saves the spectra to a disk, analyzes the spectra for the target analytes, and prints concentrations of target analytes to a computer file. User intervention is permitted for initial set-up of sampling system, initial calibrations, and periodic maintenance.
3.14 Sampling Time. In batch sampling—the time required to fill the cell with flue gas. In continuous sampling—the time required to collect the infrared spectrum of the sample gas.
3.15 PPM-Meters. Sample concentration expressed as the concentration-path length product, ppm (molar) concentration multiplied by the path length of the FTIR gas cell. Expressing concentration in these units provides a way to directly compare measurements made using systems with different optical configurations. Another useful expression is (ppm-meters)/K, where K is the absolute temperature of the sample in the gas cell.
3.16 CEM Measurement Time Constant. The Time Constant (TC, minutes for one cell volume to flow through the cell) determines the minimum interval for complete removal of an analyte from the FTIR cell. It depends on the sampling rate (Rs in Lpm), the FTIR cell volume (Vcell in L) and the chemical and physical properties of an analyte.
For example, if the sample flow rate (through the FTIR cell) is 5 Lpm and the cell volume is 7 liters, then TC is equal to 1.4 minutes (0.71 cell volumes per minute). This performance specification defines 5 * TC as the minimum interval between independent samples.
3.17 Independent Measurement. Two independent measurements are spectra of two independent samples. Two independent samples are separated by, at least 5 cell volumes. The interval between independent measurements depends on the cell volume and the sample flow rate (through the cell). There is no mixing of gas between two independent samples. Alternatively, estimate the analyte residence time empirically: (1) Fill cell to ambient pressure with a (known analyte concentration) gas standard, (2) measure the spectrum of the gas standard, (3) purge the cell with zero gas at the sampling rate and collect a spectrum every minute until the analyte standard is no longer detected spectroscopically. If the measured time corresponds to less than 5 cell volumes, use 5 * TC as the minimum interval between independent measurements. If the measured time is greater than 5 * TC, then use this time as the minimum interval between independent measurements.
3.18 Test Condition. A period of sampling where all process, and sampling conditions, and emissions remain constant and during which a single sampling technique and a single analytical program are used. One Run may include results for more than one test condition. Constant emissions means that the composition of the emissions remains approximately stable so that a single analytical program is suitable for analyzing all of the sample spectra. A greater than two-fold change in analyte or interferant concentrations or the appearance of additional compounds in the emissions, may constitute a new test condition and may require modification of the analytical program.
3.19 Run. A single Run consists of spectra (one spectrum each) of at least 10 independent samples over a minimum of one hour. The concentration results from the spectra can be averaged together to give a run average for each analyte measured in the test run.
4.0 Interferences
Several compounds, including water, carbon monoxide, and carbon dioxide, are known interferences in the infrared region in which the FTIR instrument operates. Follow the procedures in the FTIR protocol for subtracting or otherwise dealing with these and other interferences.
5.0 Safety
The procedures required under this performance specification may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This performance specification may not address all of the safety problems associated with these procedures. It is the responsibility of the user to establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicable regulatory limitations prior to performing these procedures. The CEMS users manual and materials recommended by this performance specification should be consulted for specific precautions to be taken.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
6.1 Installation of sampling equipment should follow requirements of FTIR test Methods such as references 1 and 3 and the EPA FTIR Protocol (reference 2). Select test points where the gas stream composition is representative of the process emissions. If comparing to a reference method, the probe tips for the FTIR CEM and the RM should be positioned close together using the same sample port if possible.
6.2 FTIR Specifications. The FTIR CEM must be equipped with reference spectra bracketing the range of path length-concentrations (absorbance intensities) to be measured for each analyte. The effective concentration range of the analyzer can be adjusted by changing the path length of the gas cell or by diluting the sample. The optical configuration of the FTIR system must be such that maximum absorbance of any target analyte is no greater than 1.0 and the minimum absorbance of any target analyte is at least 10 times the RMSD noise in the analytical region. For example, if the measured RMSD in an analytical region is equal to 10−3, then the peak analyte absorbance is required to be at least 0.01. Adequate measurement of all of the target analytes may require changing path lengths during a run, conducting separate runs for different analytes, diluting the sample, or using more than one gas cell.
6.3 Data Storage Requirements. The system must have sufficient capacity to store all data collected in one week of routine sampling. Data must be stored to a write-protected medium, such as write-once-read-many (WORM) optical storage medium or to a password protected remote storage location. A back-up copy of all data can be temporarily saved to the computer hard drive. The following items must be stored during testing.
• At least one sample interferogram per sampling Run or one interferogram per hour, whichever is greater. This assumes that no sampling or analytical conditions have changed during the run.
• All sample absorbance spectra (about 12 per hr, 288 per day).
• All background spectra and interferograms (variable, but about 5 per day).
• All CTS spectra and interferograms (at least 2 each 24 hour period).
• Documentation showing a record of resolution, path length, apodization, sampling time, sampling conditions, and test conditions for all sample, CTS, calibration, and background spectra.
Using a resolution of 0.5 cm−1, with analytical range of 3500 cm−1, assuming about 65 Kbytes per spectrum and 130 Kb per interferogram, the storage requirement is about 164 Mb for one week of continuous sampling. Lower spectral resolution requires less storage capacity. All of the above data must be stored for at least two weeks. After two weeks, storage requirements include: (1) all analytical results (calculated concentrations), (2) at least 1 sample spectrum with corresponding background and sample interferograms for each test condition, (3) CTS and calibration spectra with at least one interferogram for CTS and all interferograms for calibrations, (4) a record of analytical input used to produce results, and (5) all other documentation. These data must be stored according to the requirements of the applicable regulation.
7.0 Reagents and Standards [Reserved]
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport [Reserved]
9.0 Quality Control
These procedures shall be used for periodic quarterly or semiannual QA/QC checks on the operation of the FTIR CEM. Some procedures test only the analytical program and are not intended as a test of the sampling system.
9.1 Audit Sample. This can serve as a check on both the sampling system and the analytical program.
9.1.1 Sample Requirements. The audit sample can be a mixture or a single component. It must contain target analyte(s) at approximately the expected flue gas concentration(s). If possible, each mixture component concentration should be NIST traceable (±2 percent accuracy). If a cylinder mixture standard(s) cannot be obtained, then, alternatively, a gas phase standard can be generated from a condensed phase analyte sample. Audit sample contents and concentrations are not revealed to the FTIR CEM operator until after successful completion of procedures in 5.3.2.
9.1.2 Test Procedure. Spike the audit sample using the analyte spike procedure in section 11. The audit sample is measured directly by the FTIR system (undiluted) and then spiked into the effluent at a known dilution ratio. Measure a series of spiked and unspiked samples using the same procedures as those used to analyze the stack gas. Analyze the results using sections 12.1 and 12.2. The measured concentration of each analyte must be within ±5 percent of the expected concentration (plus the uncertainty), i.e., the calculated correction factor must be within 0.93 and 1.07 for an audit with an analyte uncertainty of ±2 percent.
9.2 Audit Spectra. Audit spectra can be used to test the analytical program of the FTIR CEM, but provide no test of the sampling system.
9.2.1 Definition and Requirements. Audit spectra are absorbance spectra that; (1) have been well characterized, and (2) contain absorbance bands of target analyte(s) and potential interferants at intensities equivalent to what is expected in the source effluent. Audit spectra are provided by the administrator without identifying information. Methods of preparing Audit spectra include; (1) mathematically adding sample spectra or adding reference and interferant spectra, (2) obtaining sample spectra of mixtures prepared in the laboratory, or (3) they may be sample spectra collected previously at a similar source. In the last case it must be demonstrated that the analytical results are correct and reproducible. A record associated with each Audit spectrum documents its method of preparation. The documentation must be sufficient to enable an independent analyst to reproduce the Audit spectra.
9.2.2 Test Procedure. Audit spectra concentrations are measured using the FTIR CEM analytical program. Analytical results must be within ±5 percent of the certified audit concentration for each analyte (plus the uncertainty in the audit concentration). If the condition is not met, demonstrate how the audit spectra are unrepresentative of the sample spectra. If the audit spectra are representative, modify the FTIR CEM analytical program until the test requirement is met. Use the new analytical program in subsequent FTIR CEM analyses of effluent samples.
9.3 Submit Spectra For Independent Analysis. This procedure tests only the analytical program and not the FTIR CEM sampling system. The analyst can submit FTIR CEM spectra for independent analysis by EPA. Requirements for submission include; (1) three representative absorbance spectra (and stored interferograms) for each test period to be reviewed, (2) corresponding CTS spectra, (3) corresponding background spectra and interferograms, (4) spectra of associated spiked samples if applicable, and (5) analytical results for these sample spectra. The analyst will also submit documentation of process times and conditions, sampling conditions associated with each spectrum, file names and sampling times, method of analysis and reference spectra used, optical configuration of FTIR CEM including cell path length and temperature, spectral resolution and apodization used for every spectrum. Independent analysis can also be performed on site in conjunction with the FTIR CEM sampling and analysis. Sample spectra are stored on the independent analytical system as they are collected by the FTIR CEM system. The FTIR CEM and the independent analyses are then performed separately. The two analyses will agree to within ±120 percent for each analyte using the procedure in section 12.3. This assumes both analytical routines have properly accounted for differences in optical path length, resolution, and temperature between the sample spectra and the reference spectra.
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
10.1 Calibration Transfer Standards. For CTS requirements see section 4.5 of the FTIR Protocol. A well characterized absorbance band in the CTS gas is used to measure the path length and line resolution of the instrument. The CTS measurements made at the beginning of every 24 hour period must agree to within ±5 percent after correction for differences in pressure.
Verify that the frequency response of the instrument and CTS absorbance intensity are correct by comparing to other CTS spectra or by referring to the literature.
10.2 Analyte Calibration. If EPA library reference spectra are not available, use calibration standards to prepare reference spectra according to section 6 of the FTIR Protocol. A suitable set of analyte reference data includes spectra of at least 2 independent samples at each of at least 2 different concentrations. The concentrations bracket a range that includes the expected analyte absorbance intensities. The linear fit of the reference analyte band areas must have a fractional calibration uncertainty (FCU in Appendix F of the FTIR Protocol) of no greater than 10 percent. For requirements of analyte standards refer to section 4.6 of the FTIR Protocol.
10.3 System Calibration. The calibration standard is introduced at a point on the sampling probe. The sampling system is purged with the calibration standard to verify that the absorbance measured in this way is equal to the absorbance in the analyte calibration. Note that the system calibration gives no indication of the ability of the sampling system to transport the target analyte(s) under the test conditions.
10.4 Analyte Spike. The target analyte(s) is spiked at the outlet of the sampling probe, upstream of the particulate filter, and combined with effluent at a ratio of about 1 part spike to 9 parts effluent. The measured absorbance of the spike is compared to the expected absorbance of the spike plus the analyte concentration already in the effluent. This measures sampling system bias, if any, as distinguished from analyzer bias. It is important that spiked sample pass through all of the sampling system components before analysis.
10.5 Signal-to-Noise Ratio (S/N). The measure of S/N in this performance specification is the root-mean-square (RMS) noise level as given in Appendix C of the FTIR Protocol. The RMS noise level of a contiguous segment of a spectrum is defined as the RMS difference (RMSD) between the n contiguous absorbance values (Ai) which form the segment and the mean value (AM) of that segment.
A decrease in the S/N may indicate a loss in optical throughput, or detector or interferometer malfunction.
10.6 Background Deviation. The 100 percent baseline must be between 95 and 105 percent transmittance (absorbance of 0.02 to −0.02) in every analytical region. When background deviation exceeds this range, a new background spectrum must be collected using nitrogen or other zero gas.
10.7 Detector Linearity. Measure the background and CTS at three instrument aperture settings; one at the aperture setting to be used in the testing, and one each at settings one half and twice the test aperture setting. Compare the three CTS spectra. CTS band areas should agree to within the uncertainty of the cylinder standard. If test aperture is the maximum aperture, collect CTS spectrum at maximum aperture, then close the aperture to reduce the IR through-put by half. Collect a second background and CTS at the smaller aperture setting and compare the spectra as above. Instead of changing the aperture neutral density filters can be used to attenuate the infrared beam. Set up the FTIR system as it will be used in the test measurements. Collect a CTS spectrum. Use a neutral density filter to attenuate the infrared beam (either immediately after the source or the interferometer) to approximately 1/2 its original intensity. Collect a second CTS spectrum. Use another filter to attenuate the infrared beam to approximately 1/4 its original intensity. Collect a third background and CTS spectrum. Compare the CTS spectra as above. Another check on linearity is to observe the single beam background in frequency regions where the optical configuration is known to have a zero response. Verify that the detector response is “flat” and equal to zero in these regions. If detector response is not linear, decrease aperture, or attenuate the infrared beam. Repeat the linearity check until system passes the requirement.
11.0 Analytical Procedure
11.1 Initial Certification. First, perform the evaluation procedures in section 6.0 of the FTIR Protocol. The performance of an FTIR CEM can be certified upon installation using EPA Method 301 type validation (40 CFR, Part 63, Appendix A), or by comparison to a reference Method if one exists for the target analyte(s). Details of each procedure are given below. Validation testing is used for initial certification upon installation of a new system. Subsequent performance checks can be performed with more limited analyte spiking. Performance of the analytical program is checked initially, and periodically as required by EPA, by analyzing audit spectra or audit gases.
11.1.1 Validation. Use EPA Method 301 type sampling (reference 4, section 5.3 of Method 301) to validate the FTIR CEM for measuring the target analytes. The analyte spike procedure is as follows: (1) a known concentration of analyte is mixed with a known concentration of a non-reactive tracer gas, (2) the undiluted spike gas is sent directly to the FTIR cell and a spectrum of this sample is collected, (3) pre-heat the spiked gas to at least the sample line temperature, (4) introduce spike gas at the back of the sample probe upstream of the particulate filter, (5) spiked effluent is carried through all sampling components downstream of the probe, (6) spike at a ratio of roughly 1 part spike to 9 parts flue gas (or more dilute), (7) the spike-to-flue gas ratio is estimated by comparing the spike flow to the total sample flow, and (8) the spike ratio is verified by comparing the tracer concentration in spiked flue gas to the tracer concentration in undiluted spike gas. The analyte flue gas concentration is unimportant as long as the spiked component can be measured and the sample matrix (including interferences) is similar to its composition under test conditions. Validation can be performed using a single FTIR CEM analyzing sample spectra collected sequentially. Since flue gas analyte (unspiked) concentrations can vary, it is recommended that two separate sampling lines (and pumps) are used; one line to carry unspiked flue gas and the other line to carry spiked flue gas. Even with two sampling lines the variation in unspiked concentration may be fast compared to the interval between consecutive measurements. Alternatively, two FTIR CEMs can be operated side-by-side, one measuring spiked sample, the other unspiked sample. In this arrangement spiked and unspiked measurements can be synchronized to minimize the affect of temporal variation in the unspiked analyte concentration. In either sampling arrangement, the interval between measured concentrations used in the statistical analysis should be, at least, 5 cell volumes (5 * TC in equation 1). A validation run consists of, at least, 24 independent analytical results, 12 spiked and 12 unspiked samples. See section 3.17 for definition of an “independent” analytical result. The results are analyzed using sections 12.1 and 12.2 to determine if the measurements passed the validation requirements. Several analytes can be spiked and measured in the same sampling run, but a separate statistical analysis is performed for each analyte. In lieu of 24 independent measurements, averaged results can be used in the statistical analysis. In this procedure, a series of consecutive spiked measurements are combined over a sampling period to give a single average result. The related unspiked measurements are averaged in the same way. The minimum 12 spiked and 12 unspiked result averages are obtained by averaging measurements over subsequent sampling periods of equal duration. The averaged results are grouped together and statistically analyzed using section 12.2.
11.1.1.1 Validation with a Single Analyzer and Sampling Line. If one sampling line is used, connect the sampling system components and purge the entire sampling system and cell with at least 10 cell volumes of sample gas. Begin sampling by collecting spectra of 2 independent unspiked samples. Introduce the spike gas into the back of the probe, upstream of the particulate filter. Allow 10 cell volumes of spiked flue gas to purge the cell and sampling system. Collect spectra of 2 independent spiked samples. Turn off the spike flow and allow 10 cell volumes of unspiked flue gas to purge the FTIR cell and sampling system. Repeat this procedure 6 times until the 24 samples are collected. Spiked and unspiked samples can also be measured in groups of 4 instead of in pairs. Analyze the results using sections 12.1 and 12.2. If the statistical analysis passes the validation criteria, then the validation is completed. If the results do not pass the validation, the cause may be that temporal variations in the analyte sample gas concentration are fast relative to the interval between measurements. The difficulty may be avoided by: (1) Averaging the measurements over long sampling periods and using the averaged results in the statistical analysis, (2) modifying the sampling system to reduce TC by, for example, using a smaller volume cell or increasing the sample flow rate, (3) using two sample lines (4) use two analyzers to perform synchronized measurements. This performance specification permits modifications in the sampling system to minimize TC if the other requirements of the validation sampling procedure are met.
11.1.1.2 Validation With a Single Analyzer and Two Sampling Lines. An alternative sampling procedure uses two separate sample lines, one carrying spiked flue gas, the other carrying unspiked gas. A valve in the gas distribution manifold allows the operator to choose either sample. A short heated line connects the FTIR cell to the 3-way valve in the manifold. Both sampling lines are continuously purged. Each sample line has a rotameter and a bypass vent line after the rotameter, immediately upstream of the valve, so that the spike and unspiked sample flows can each be continuously monitored. Begin sampling by collecting spectra of 2 independent unspiked samples. Turn the sampling valve to close off the unspiked gas flow and allow the spiked flue gas to enter the FTIR cell. Isolate and evacuate the cell and fill with the spiked sample to ambient pressure. (While the evacuated cell is filling, prevent air leaks into the cell by making sure that the spike sample rotameter always indicates that a portion of the flow is directed out the by-pass vent.) Open the cell outlet valve to allow spiked sample to continuously flow through the cell. Measure spectra of 2 independent spiked samples. Repeat this procedure until at least 24 samples are collected.
11.1.1.3 Synchronized Measurements With Two Analyzers. Use two FTIR analyzers, each with its own cell, to perform synchronized spiked and unspiked measurements. If possible, use a similar optical configuration for both systems. The optical configurations are compared by measuring the same CTS gas with both analyzers. Each FTIR system uses its own sampling system including a separate sampling probe and sampling line. A common gas distribution manifold can be used if the samples are never mixed. One sampling system and analyzer measures spiked effluent. The other sampling system and analyzer measures unspiked flue gas. The two systems are synchronized so that each measures spectra at approximately the same times. The sample flow rates are also synchronized so that both sampling rates are approximately the same (TC1 ∼ TC2 in equation 1). Start both systems at the same time. Collect spectra of at least 12 independent samples with each (spiked and unspiked) system to obtain the minimum 24 measurements. Analyze the analytical results using sections 12.1 and 12.2. Run averages can be used in the statistical analysis instead of individual measurements.
11.1.1.4 Compare to a Reference Method (RM). Obtain EPA approval that the method qualifies as an RM for the analyte(s) and the source to be tested. Follow the published procedures for the RM in preparing and setting up equipment and sampling system, performing measurements, and reporting results. Since FTIR CEMS have multicomponent capability, it is possible to perform more than one RM simultaneously, one for each target analyte. Conduct at least 9 runs where the FTIR CEM and the RM are sampling simultaneously. Each Run is at least 30 minutes long and consists of spectra of at least 5 independent FTIR CEM samples and the corresponding RM measurements. If more than 9 runs are conducted, the analyst may eliminate up to 3 runs from the analysis if at least 9 runs are used.
11.1.1.4.1 RMs Using Integrated Sampling. Perform the RM and FTIR CEM sampling simultaneously. The FTIR CEM can measure spectra as frequently as the analyst chooses (and should obtain measurements as frequently as possible) provided that the measurements include spectra of at least 5 independent measurements every 30 minutes. Concentration results from all of the FTIR CEM spectra within a run may be averaged for use in the statistical comparison even if all of the measurements are not independent. When averaging the FTIR CEM concentrations within a run, it is permitted to exclude some measurements from the average provided the minimum of 5 independent measurements every 30 minutes are included: The Run average of the FTIR CEM measurements depends on both the sample flow rate and the measurement frequency (MF). The run average of the RM using the integrated sampling method depends primarily on its sampling rate. If the target analyte concentration fluctuates significantly, the contribution to the run average of a large fluctuation depends on the sampling rate and measurement frequency, and on the duration and magnitude of the fluctuation. It is, therefore, important to carefully select the sampling rate for both the FTIR CEM and the RM and the measurement frequency for the FTIR CEM. The minimum of 9 run averages can be compared according to the relative accuracy test procedure in Performance Specification 2 for SO2 and NOX CEMs (40 CFR, Part 60, App. B).
11.1.1.4.2 RMs Using a Grab Sampling Technique. Synchronize the RM and FTIR CEM measurements as closely as possible. For a grab sampling RM, record the volume collected and the exact sampling period for each sample. Synchronize the FTIR CEM so that the FTIR measures a spectrum of a similar cell volume at the same time as the RM grab sample was collected. Measure at least five independent samples with both the FTIR CEM and the RM for each of the minimum nine runs. Compare the run concentration averages by using the relative accuracy analysis procedure in Performance Specification 2 of appendix B of 40 CFR part 60.
11.1.1.4.3 Continuous Emission Monitors as RMs. If the RM is a CEM, synchronize the sampling flow rates of the RM and the FTIR CEM. Each run is at least 1 hour long and consists of at least 10 FTIR CEM measurements and the corresponding 10 RM measurements (or averages). For the statistical comparison, use the relative accuracy analysis procedure in Performance Specification 2 of appendix B of 40 CFR part 60. If the RM time constant is < 1/2 the FTIR CEM time constant, brief fluctuations in analyte concentrations that are not adequately measured with the slower FTIR CEM time constant can be excluded from the run average along with the corresponding RM measurements. However, the FTIR CEM run average must still include at least 10 measurements over a 1-hour period.
12.0 Calculations and Data Analysis
12.1 Spike Dilution Ratio, Expected Concentration. The Method 301 bias is calculated as follows.
Where:
B = Bias at the spike level
Sm = Mean of the observed spiked sample concentrations
Mm = Mean of the observed unspiked sample concentrations
CS = Expected value of the spiked concentration.
The CS is determined by comparing the SF6 tracer concentration in undiluted spike gas to the SF6 tracer concentrations in the spiked samples;
The expected concentration (CS) is the measured concentration of the analyte in undiluted spike gas divided by the dilution factor
Where:
[anal]dir = The analyte concentration in undiluted spike gas measured directly by filling the FTIR cell with the spike gas.
If the bias is statistically significant (Section 12.2), Method 301 requires that a correction factor, CF, be multiplied by the analytical results, and that 0.7 ≤CF ≤1.3.
12.2 Statistical Analysis of Validation Measurements. Arrange the independent measurements (or measurement averages) as in Table 1. More than 12 pairs of measurements can be analyzed. The statistical analysis follows EPA Method 301, section 6.3. section 12.1 of this performance specification shows the calculations for the bias, expected spike concentration, and correction factor. This section shows the determination of the statistical significance of the bias. Determine the statistical significance of the bias at the 95 percent confidence level by calculating the t-value for the set of measurements. First, calculate the differences, di, for each pair of spiked and each pair of unspiked measurements. Then calculate the standard deviation of the spiked pairs of measurements.
Where:
di = The differences between pairs of spiked measurements.
SDs = The standard deviation in the di values.
n = The number of spiked pairs, 2n = 12 for the minimum of 12 spiked and 12 unspiked measurements.
Calculate the relative standard deviation, RSD, using SDs and the mean of the spiked concentrations, Sm. The RSD must be ≤50%.
Repeat the calculations in equations 7 and 8 to determine SDu and RSD, respectively, for the unspiked samples. Calculate the standard deviation of the mean using SDs and SDu from equation 7.
The t-statistic is calculated as follows to test the bias for statistical significance;
where the bias, B, and the correction factor, CF, are given in section 12.1. For 11 degrees of freedom, and a one-tailed distribution, Method 301 requires that t ≤2.201. If the t-statistic indicates the bias is statistically significant, then analytical measurements must be multiplied by the correction factor. There is no limitation on the number of measurements, but there must be at least 12 independent spiked and 12 independent unspiked measurements. Refer to the t-distribution (Table 2) at the 95 percent confidence level and appropriate degrees of freedom for the critical t-value.
13.0 Method Performance [Reserved]
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 References
1. Method 318, 40 CFR, Part 63, Appendix A (Draft), “Measurement of Gaseous Formaldehyde, Phenol and Methanol Emissions by FTIR Spectroscopy,” EPA Contract No. 68D20163, Work Assignment 2-18, February, 1995.
2. “EPA Protocol for the Use of Extractive Fourier Transform Infrared (FTIR) Spectrometry in Analyses of Gaseous Emissions from Stationary Industrial Sources,” February, 1995.
3. “Measurement of Gaseous Organic and Inorganic Emissions by Extractive FTIR Spectroscopy,” EPA Contract No. 68-D2-0165, Work Assignment 3-08.
4. “Method 301—Field Validation of Pollutant Measurement Methods from Various Waste Media,” 40 CFR 63, App A.
17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
| Measurement (or average) |
Time | Spiked (ppm) |
di spiked | Unspiked (ppm) |
di unspiked |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | S1 | U1 | |||
| 2 | S2 | S2−S1 | U2 | U2−U1 | |
| 3 | S3 | U3 | |||
| 4 | S4 | S4−S3 | U4 | U4−U3 | |
| 5 | S5 | U5 | |||
| 6 | S6 | S6−S5 | U6 | U6−U5 | |
| 7 | S7 | U7 | |||
| 8 | S8 | S8−S7 | U8 | U8−U7 | |
| 9 | S9 | U9 | |||
| 10 | S10 | S10−S9 | U10 | U10−U9 | |
| 11 | S11 | U11 | |||
| 12 | S12 | S12−S11 | U12 | U12−U11 | |
| Average −> | Sm | Mm |
| n−1 a | t−value | n−1 a | t−value | n−1 a | t−value | n−1 a | t−value |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 11 | 2.201 | 17 | 2.110 | 23 | 2.069 | 29 | 2.045 |
| 12 | 2.179 | 18 | 2.101 | 24 | 2.064 | 30 | 2.042 |
| 13 | 2.160 | 19 | 2.093 | 25 | 2.060 | 40 | 2.021 |
| 14 | 2.145 | 20 | 2.086 | 26 | 2.056 | 60 | 2.000 |
| 15 | 2.131 | 21 | 2.080 | 27 | 2.052 | 120 | 1.980 |
| 16 | 2.120 | 22 | 2.074 | 28 | 2.048 | 8 | 1.960 |
| a n is the number of independent pairs of measurements (a pair consists of one spiked and its corresponding unspiked measurement). Either discreet (independent) measurements in a single run, or run averages can be used. |
Performance Specification 16—Specifications and Test Procedures for Predictive Emission Monitoring Systems in Stationary Sources
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Does this performance specification apply to me? If you, the source owner or operator, intend to use (with any necessary approvals) a predictive emission monitoring system (PEMS) to show compliance with your emission limitation under this part or 40 CFR part 61 or 63, you must use the procedures in this performance specification (PS) to determine whether your PEMS is acceptable for use in demonstrating compliance with applicable requirements. Use these procedures to certify your PEMS after initial installation and periodically thereafter to ensure the PEMS is operating properly. If your PEMS contains a diluent (O2 or CO2) measuring component, the diluent component must be tested as well. These specifications apply to PEMS that are installed under 40 CFR parts 60, 61, and 63 after April 24, 2009.
1.1.1 How do I certify my PEMS after it is installed? PEMS must pass a relative accuracy (RA) test and accompanying statistical tests in the initial certification test to be acceptable for use in demonstrating compliance with applicable requirements. Ongoing quality assurance tests also must be conducted to ensure the PEMS is operating properly. An ongoing sensor evaluation procedure must be in place before the PEMS certification is complete. The amount of testing and data validation that is required depends upon the regulatory needs, i.e., whether precise quantification of emissions will be needed or whether indication of exceedances of some regulatory threshold will suffice. Performance criteria are more rigorous for PEMS used in determining continual compliance with an emission limit than those used to measure excess emissions. You must perform the initial certification test on your PEMS before reporting any PEMS data as quality-assured.
1.1.2 Is other testing required after certification? After you initially certify your PEMS, you must pass additional periodic performance checks to ensure the long-term quality of data. These periodic checks are listed in the table in section 9. You are always responsible for properly maintaining and operating your PEMS.
2.0 Summary of Performance Specification
The following performance tests are required in addition to other equipment and measurement location requirements.
2.1 Initial PEMS Certification.
2.1.1 Excess Emissions PEMS. For a PEMS that is used for excess emission reporting, the owner or operator must perform a minimum 9-run, 3-level (3 runs at each level) RA test (see section 8.2).
2.1.2 Compliance PEMS. For a PEMS that is used for continual compliance standards, the owner or operator must perform a minimum 27-run, 3-level (9 runs at each level) RA test (see section 8.2). Additionally, the data must be evaluated for bias and by F-test and correlation analysis.
2.2 Periodic Quality Assurance (QA) Assessments. Owners and operators of all PEMS are required to conduct quarterly relative accuracy audits (RAA) and yearly relative accuracy test audits (RATA) to assess ongoing PEMS operation. The frequency of these periodic assessments may be shortened by successful operation during a prior year.
3.0 Definitions
The following definitions apply:
3.1 Centroidal Area means that area in the center of the stack (or duct) comprising no more than 1 percent of the stack cross-sectional area and having the same geometric shape as the stack.
3.2 Data Recorder means the equipment that provides a permanent record of the PEMS output. The data recorder may include automatic data reduction capabilities and may include electronic data records, paper records, or a combination of electronic data and paper records.
3.3 Defective sensor means a sensor that is responsible for PEMS malfunction or that operates outside the approved operating envelope. A defective sensor may be functioning properly, but because it is operating outside the approved operating envelope, the resulting predicted emission is not validated.
3.4 Diluent PEMS means the total equipment required to predict a diluent gas concentration or emission rate.
3.5 Operating envelope means the defined range of a parameter input that is established during PEMS development. Emission data generated from parameter inputs that are beyond the operating envelope are not considered quality assured and are therefore unacceptable.
3.6 PEMS means all of the equipment required to predict an emission concentration or emission rate. The system may consist of any of the following major subsystems: sensors and sensor interfaces, emission model, algorithm, or equation that uses process data to generate an output that is proportional to the emission concentration or emission rate, diluent emission model, data recorder, and sensor evaluation system. Systems that use fewer than 3 variables do not qualify as PEMS unless the system has been specifically approved by the Administrator for use as a PEMS. A PEMS may predict emissions data that are corrected for diluent if the relative accuracy and relevant QA tests are passed in the emission units corrected for diluent. Parametric monitoring systems that serve as indicators of compliance and have parametric limits but do not predict emissions to comply with an emissions limit are not included in this definition.
3.7 PEMS training means the process of developing or confirming the operation of the PEMS against a reference method under specified conditions.
3.8 Quarter means a quarter of a calendar year in which there are at least 168 unit operating hours.
3.9 Reconciled Process Data means substitute data that are generated by a sensor evaluation system to replace that of a failed sensor. Reconciled process data may not be used without approval from the Administrator.
3.10 Relative Accuracy means the accuracy of the PEMS when compared to a reference method (RM) at the source. The RA is the average difference between the pollutant PEMS and RM data for a specified number of comparison runs plus a 2.5 percent confidence coefficient, divided by the average of the RM tests. For a diluent PEMS, the RA may be expressed as a percentage of absolute difference between the PEMS and RM. Alternative specifications are given for units that have very low emissions.
3.11 Relative Accuracy Audit (RAA) means a quarterly audit of the PEMS against a portable analyzer meeting the requirements of ASTM D6522-00 or a RM for a specified number of runs. A RM may be used in place of the portable analyzer for the RAA.
3.12 Relative Accuracy Test Audit (RATA) means a RA test that is performed at least once every four calendar quarters after the initial certification test. The RATA shall be conducted as described in section 8.2 of this method.
3.13 Reference Value means a PEMS baseline value that may be established by RM testing under conditions when all sensors are functioning properly. This reference value may then be used in the sensor evaluation system or in adjusting new sensors.
3.14 Sensor Evaluation System means the equipment or procedure used to periodically assess the quality of sensor input data. This system may be a sub-model that periodically cross-checks sensor inputs among themselves or any other procedure that checks sensor integrity at least daily (when operated for more than one hour in any calendar day).
3.15 Sensors and Sensor Interface means the equipment that measures the process input signals and transports them to the emission prediction system.
4.0 Interferences [Reserved]
5.0 Safety [Reserved]
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
6.1 PEMS Design. You must detail the design of your PEMS and make this available in reports and for on-site inspection. You must also establish the following, as applicable:
6.1.1 Number of Input Parameters. An acceptable PEMS will normally use three or more input parameters. You must obtain the Administrator's permission on a case-by-case basis if you desire to use a PEMS having fewer than three input parameters.
6.1.2 Parameter Operating Envelopes. Before you evaluate your PEMS through the certification test, you must specify the input parameters your PEMS uses, define their range of minimum and maximum values (operating envelope), and demonstrate the integrity of the parameter operating envelope using graphs and data from the PEMS development process, vendor information, or engineering calculations, as appropriate. If you operate the PEMS beyond these envelopes at any time after the certification test, the data generated during this condition will not be acceptable for use in demonstrating compliance with applicable requirements. If these parameter operating envelopes are not clearly defined and supported by development data, the PEMS operation will be limited to the range of parameter inputs encountered during the certification test until the PEMS has a new operating envelope established.
6.1.3 Source-Specific Operating Conditions. Identify any source-specific operating conditions, such as fuel type, that affect the output of your PEMS. You may only use the PEMS under the source-specific operating conditions it was certified for.
6.1.4 Ambient Conditions. You must explain whether and how ambient conditions and seasonal changes affect your PEMS. Some parameters such as absolute ambient humidity cannot be manipulated during a test. The effect of ambient conditions such as humidity on the pollutant concentration must be determined and this effect extrapolated to include future anticipated conditions. Seasonal changes and their effects on the PEMS must be evaluated unless you can show that such effects are negligible.
6.1.5 PEMS Principle of Operation. If your PEMS is developed on the basis of known physical principles, you must identify the specific physical assumptions or mathematical manipulations that support its operation. If your PEMS is developed on the basis of linear or nonlinear regression analysis, you must make available the paired data (preferably in graphic form) used to develop or train the model.
6.1.6 Data Recorder Scale. If you are not using a digital recorder, you must choose a recorder scale that accurately captures the desired range of potential emissions. The lower limit of your data recorder's range must be no greater than 20 percent of the applicable emission standard (if subject to an emission standard). The upper limit of your data recorder's range must be determined using the following table. If you obtain approval first, you may use other lower and upper recorder limits.
| If PEMS is measuring. . . | And if. . . | Then your upper limit. . . |
|---|---|---|
| Uncontrolled emissions, such as NOX at the stack of a natural gas-fired boiler | No other regulation sets an upper limit for the data recorder's range | Must be 1.25 to 2 times the average potential emission level |
| Uncontrolled emissions, such as NOX at the stack of a natural gas-fired boiler | Another regulation sets an upper limit for the data recorder's range | Must follow the other regulation |
| Controlled emissions | Must be 1.5 to 2.0 times concentration of the emission standard that applies to your emission unit | |
| Continual compliance emissions for an applicable regulation | Must be 1.1 to 1.5 times the concentration of the emission standard that applies to your emission unit |
6.1.7 Sensor Location and Repair. We recommend you install sensors in an accessible location in order to perform repairs and replacements. Permanently-installed platforms or ladders may not be needed. If you install sensors in an area that is not accessible, you may be required to shut down the emissions unit to repair or replace a sensor. Conduct a new RATA after replacing a sensor that supplies a critical PEMS parameter if the new sensor provides a different output or scaling or changes the historical training dataset of the PEMS. Replacement of a non-critical sensor that does not cause an impact in the accuracy of the PEMS does not trigger a RATA. All sensors must be calibrated as often as needed but at least as often as recommended by the manufacturers.
6.1.8 Sensor Evaluation System. Your PEMS must be designed to perform automatic or manual determination of defective sensors on at least a daily basis. This sensor evaluation system may consist of a sensor validation sub-model, a comparison of redundant sensors, a spot check of sensor input readings at a reference value, operation, or emission level, or other procedure that detects faulty or failed sensors. Some sensor evaluation systems generate substitute values (reconciled data) that are used when a sensor is perceived to have failed. You must obtain prior approval before using reconciled data.
6.1.9 Parameter Envelope Exceedances. Your PEMS must include a plan to detect and notify the operator of parameter envelope exceedances. Emission data collected outside the ranges of the sensor envelopes will not be considered quality assured.
6.2 Recordkeeping. All valid data recorded by the PEMS must be used to calculate the emission value.
7.0 Reagents and Standards [Reserved]
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport
8.1 Initial Certification. Use the following procedure to certify your PEMS. Complete all PEMS training before the certification begins.
8.2 Relative Accuracy Test.
8.2.1 Reference Methods. Unless otherwise specified in the applicable regulations, you must use the test methods in appendix A of this part for the RM test. Conduct the RM tests at three operating levels. The RM tests shall be performed at a low-load (or production) level between the minimum safe, stable load and 50 percent of the maximum level load, at the mid-load level (an intermediary level between the low and high levels), and at a high-load level between 80 percent and the maximum load. Alternatively, if practicable, you may test at three levels of the key operating parameter (e.g. selected based on a covariance analysis between each parameter and the PEMS output) equally spaced within the normal range of the parameter.
8.2.2 Number of RM Tests for Excess Emission PEMS. For PEMS used for excess emission reporting, conduct at least the following number of RM tests at the following key parameter operating levels:
(1) Three at a low level.
(2) Three at a mid level.
(3) Three at a high level.
You may choose to perform more than nine total RM tests. If you perform more than nine tests, you may reject a maximum of three tests as long as the total number of test results used to determine the RA is nine or greater and each operating level has at least three tests. You must report all data, including the rejected data.
8.2.3 Number of RM Tests for Continual Compliance PEMS. For PEMS used to determine compliance, conduct at least the following number of RM tests at the following key parameter operating levels:
(1) Nine at a low level.
(2) Nine at a mid level.
(3) Nine at a high level.
You may choose to perform more than 9 RM runs at each operating level. If you perform more than 9 runs, you may reject a maximum of three runs per level as long as the total number of runs used to determine the RA at each operating level is 9 or greater.
8.2.4 Reference Method Measurement Location. Select an accessible measurement point for the RM that will ensure you measure emissions representatively. Ensure the location is at least two equivalent stack diameters downstream and half an equivalent diameter upstream from the nearest flow disturbance such as the control device, point of pollutant generation, or other place where the pollutant concentration or emission rate can change. You may use a half diameter downstream instead of the two diameters if you meet both of the following conditions:
(1) Changes in the pollutant concentration are caused solely by diluent leakage, such as leaks from air heaters.
(2) You measure pollutants and diluents simultaneously at the same locations.
8.2.5 Traverse Points. Select traverse points that ensure representative samples. Conduct all RM tests within 3 cm of each selected traverse point but no closer than 3 cm to the stack or duct wall. The minimum requirement for traverse points are as follows:
(1) Establish a measurement line across the stack that passes through the center and in the direction of any expected stratification.
(2) Locate a minimum of three traverse points on the line at 16.7, 50.0, and 83.3 percent of the stack inside diameter.
(3) Alternatively, if the stack inside diameter is greater than 2.4 meters, you may locate the three traverse points on the line at 0.4, 1.2, and 2.0 meters from the stack or duct wall. You may not use this alternative option after wet scrubbers or at points where two streams with different pollutant concentrations are combined. You may select different traverse points if you demonstrate and provide verification that it provides a representative sample. You may also use the traverse point specifications given the RM.
8.2.6 Relative Accuracy Procedure. Perform the number of RA tests at the levels required in sections 8.2.2 and 8.2.3. For integrated samples (e.g., Method 3A or 7E), make a sample traverse of at least 21 minutes, sampling for 7 minutes at each traverse point. For grab samples (e.g., Method 3 or 7), take one sample at each traverse point, scheduling the grab samples so that they are taken simultaneously (within a 3-minute period) or at an equal interval of time apart over a 21-minute period. A test run for grab samples must be made up of at least three separate measurements. Where multiple fuels are used in the monitored unit and the fuel type affects the predicted emissions, determine a RA for each fuel unless the effects of the alternative fuel on predicted emissions or diluent were addressed in the model training process. The unit may only use fuels that have been evaluated this way.
8.2.7 Correlation of RM and PEMS Data. Mark the beginning and end of each RM test run (including the exact time of day) on the permanent record of PEMS output. Correlate the PEMS and the RM test data by the time and duration using the following steps:
A. Determine the integrated pollutant concentration for the PEMS for each corresponding RM test period.
B. Consider system response time, if important, and confirm that the pair of results is on a consistent moisture, temperature, and diluent concentration basis.
C. Compare each average PEMS value to the corresponding average RM value. Use the following guidelines to make these comparisons.
| If . . . | Then . . . | And then . . . |
|---|---|---|
| The RM has an instrumental or integrated non-instrumental sampling technique | Directly compare RM and PEMS results | |
| The RM has a grab sampling technique | Average the results from all grab samples taken during the test run. The test run must include ≥3 separate grab measurements | Compare this average RM result with the PEMS result obtained during the run. |
Use the paired PEMS and RM data and the equations in section 12.2 to calculate the RA in the units of the applicable emission standard. For this 3-level RA test, calculate the RA at each operation level.
8.3 Statistical Tests for PEMS that are Used for Continual Compliance. In addition to the RA determination, evaluate the paired RA and PEMS data using the following statistical tests.
8.3.1 Bias Test. From the RA data taken at the mid-level, determine if a bias exists between the RM and PEMS. Use the equations in section 12.3.1.
8.3.2 F-test. Perform a separate F-test for the RA paired data from each operating level to determine if the RM and PEMS variances differ by more than might be expected from chance. Use the equations in section 12.3.2.
8.3.3 Correlation Analysis. Perform a correlation analysis using the RA paired data from all operating levels combined to determine how well the RM and PEMS correlate. Use the equations in section 12.3.3. The correlation is waived if the process cannot be varied to produce a concentration change sufficient for a successful correlation test because of its technical design. In such cases, should a subsequent RATA identify a variation in the RM measured values by more than 30 percent, the waiver will not apply, and a correlation analysis test must be performed at the next RATA.
8.4 Reporting. Summarize in tabular form the results of the RA and statistical tests. Include all data sheets, calculations, and charts (records of PEMS responses) necessary to verify that your PEMS meets the performance specifications. Include in the report the documentation used to establish your PEMS parameter envelopes.
8.5 Reevaluating Your PEMS After a Failed Test, Change in Operations, or Change in Critical PEMS Parameter. After initial certification, if your PEMS fails to pass a quarterly RAA or yearly RATA, or if changes occur or are made that could result in a significant change in the emission rate (e.g., turbine aging, process modification, new process operating modes, or changes to emission controls), your PEMS must be recertified using the tests and procedures in section 8.1. For example, if you initially developed your PEMS for the emissions unit operating at 80-100 percent of its range, you would have performed the initial test under these conditions. Later, if you wanted to operate the emission unit at 50-100 percent of its range, you must conduct another RA test and statistical tests, as applicable, to verify that the new conditions of 50-100 percent of range are functional. These tests must demonstrate that your PEMS provides acceptable data when operating in the new range or with the new critical PEMS parameter(s). The requirements of section 8.1 must be completed by the earlier of 60 unit operating days or 180 calendar days after the failed RATA or after the change that caused a significant change in emission rate.
9.0 Quality Control
You must incorporate a QA plan beyond the initial PEMS certification test to verify that your system is generating quality-assured data. The QA plan must include the components of this section.
9.1 QA/QC Summary. Conduct the applicable ongoing tests listed in this section.
| Test | PEMS
regulatory purpose |
Acceptability | Frequency |
|---|---|---|---|
| Sensor Evaluation | All | Daily. | |
| RAA | All | Same as for RA in section 13.5 of this method | Each quarter except quarter when RATA performed. |
| RATA | All | Same as for RA in section 13.1 of this method | Yearly in quarter when RAA not performed. |
| Bias Correction | All | If davg ≤ |cc| | Bias test passed (no correction factor needed). |
| PEMS Training | All | If Fcritical ≥ F, r ≥ 0.8 | Optional after initial and subsequent RATAs. |
| Sensor Evaluation Alert Test (optional) | All | See section 6.1.8 of this method | After each PEMS training. |
9.2 Daily Sensor Evaluation Check. Your sensor evaluation system must check the integrity of each PEMS input at least daily.
9.3 Quarterly Relative Accuracy Audits. In the first year of operation after the initial certification, perform a RAA consisting of at least three 30-minute portable analyzer or RM determinations each quarter a RATA is not performed. To conduct a RAA, follow the procedures in Section 8.2 for the relative accuracy test, except that only three sets of measurement data are required, and the statistical tests are not required. The average of the three or more portable analyzer or RM determinations must not exceed the limits given in Section 13.5. Report the data from all sets of measurement data. If a PEMS passes all quarterly RAAs in the first year and also passes the subsequent yearly RATA in the second year, you may elect to perform a single mid-year RAA in the second year in place of the quarterly RAAs. This option may be repeated, but only until the PEMS fails either a mid-year RAA or a yearly RATA. When such a failure occurs, you must resume quarterly RAAs in the quarter following the failure and continue conducting quarterly RAAs until the PEMS successfully passes both a year of quarterly RAAs and a subsequent RATA.
9.4 Yearly Relative Accuracy Test. Perform a minimum 9-run RATA at the normal operating level on a yearly basis in the quarter that the RAA is not performed. The statistical tests in Section 8.3 are not required for the yearly RATA.
10.0 Calibration and Standardization [Reserved]
11.0 Analytical Procedure [Reserved]
12.0 Calculations and Data Analysis
12.1 Nomenclature
B = PEMS bias adjustment factor.
cc = Confidence coefficient.
di = Difference between each RM and PEMS run.
d = Arithmetic mean of differences for all runs.
ei = Individual measurement provided by the PEMS or RM at a particular level.
em = Mean of the PEMS or RM measurements at a particular level.
ep = Individual measurement provided by the PEMS.
ev = Individual measurement provided by the RM.
F = Calculated F-value.
n = Number of RM runs.
PEMSi = Individual measurement provided by the PEMS.
PEMSiAdjusted = Individual measurement provided by the PEMS adjusted for bias.
PEMS = Mean of the values provided by the PEMS at the normal operating range during the bias test.
r = Coefficient of correlation.
RA = Relative accuracy.
RAA = Relative accuracy audit.
RM = Average RM value (or in the case of the RAA, the average portable analyzer value). In cases where the average emissions for the test are less than 50 percent of the applicable standard, substitute the emission standard value here in place of the average RM value.
Sd = Standard deviation of differences.
S 2 = Variance of your PEMS or RM.
t0.025 = t-value for a one-sided, 97.5 percent confidence interval (see Table 16-1).
12.2 Relative Accuracy Calculations. Calculate the mean of the RM values. Calculate the differences between the pairs of observations for the RM and the PEMS output sets. Finally, calculate the mean of the differences, standard deviation, confidence coefficient, and PEMS RA, using Equations 16-1, 16-2, 16-3, and 16-4, respectively. For compliance PEMS, calculate the RA at each test level. The PEMS must pass the RA criterion at each test level.
12.2.1 Arithmetic Mean. Calculate the arithmetic mean of the differences between paired RM and PEMS observations using Equation 16-1.
12.2.2 Standard Deviation. Calculate the standard deviation of the differences using Equation 16-2 (positive square root).
12.2.3 Confidence Coefficient. Calculate the confidence coefficient using Equation 16-3 and Table 16-1 for n−1 degrees of freedom.
12.2.4 Relative Accuracy. Calculate the RA of your data using Equation 16-4.
12.3 Compliance PEMS Statistical Tests. If your PEMS will be used for continual compliance purposes, conduct the following tests using the information obtained during the RA tests. For the pollutant measurements at any one test level, if the mean value of the RM is less than either 10 ppm or 5 percent of the emission standard, all statistical tests are waived at that specific test level. For diluent measurements at any one test level, if the mean value of the RM is less than 3 percent of span, all statistical tests are waived for that specific test level.
12.3.1 Bias Test. Conduct a bias test to determine if your PEMS is biased relative to the RM. Determine the PEMS bias by comparing the confidence coefficient obtained from Equation 16-3 to the arithmetic mean of the differences determined in Equation 16-1. If the arithmetic mean of the differences (d ) is greater than the absolute value of the confidence coefficient (cc), your PEMS must incorporate a bias factor to adjust future PEMS values as in Equation 16-5.
Where:
12.3.2 F-test. Conduct an F-test for each of the three RA data sets collected at different test levels. Calculate the variances of the PEMS and the RM using Equation 16-6.
Determine if the variance of the PEMS data is significantly different from that of the RM data at each level by calculating the F-value using Equation 16-7.
Compare the calculated F-value with the critical value of F at the 95 percent confidence level with n-1 degrees of freedom. The critical value is obtained from Table 16-2 or a similar table for F-distribution. If the calculated F-value is greater than the critical value at any level, your proposed PEMS is unacceptable. For pollutant PEMS measurements, if the standard deviation of the RM is less than either 3 percent of the span or 5 ppm, use a RM standard deviation of either 5 ppm or 3 percent of span. For diluent PEMS measurements, if the standard deviation of the reference method is less than 3 percent of span, use a RM standard deviation of 3 percent of span.
12.3.3 Correlation Analysis. Calculate the correlation coefficient either manually using Eq. 16-8, on a graph, or by computer using all of the paired data points from all operating levels. Your PEMS correlation must be 0.8 or greater to be acceptable. If during the initial certification test, your PEMS data are determined to be auto-correlated according to the procedures in 40 CFR 75.41(b)(2), or if the signal-to-noise ratio of the data is less than 4, then the correlation analysis is permanently waived.
12.4 Relative Accuracy Audit. Calculate the quarterly RAA using Equation 16-9.
13.0 Method Performance
13.1 PEMS Relative Accuracy. The RA, calculated in units of the emission standard, must not exceed 10 percent if the PEMS measurements are greater than 100 ppm or 0.2 lbs/mm Btu. The RA must not exceed 20 percent if the PEMS measurements are between 100 ppm (or 0.2 lb/mm Btu) and 10 ppm (or 0.02 lb/mm Btu). For measurements below 10 ppm (or 0.02 lb/mm Btu), the absolute mean difference between the PEMS measurements and the RM measurements must not exceed 2 ppm (or 0.01 lb/mm Btu). For diluent only PEMS, an alternative criterion of ±1 percent absolute difference between the PEMS and RM may be used if less stringent.
13.2 PEMS Bias. Your PEMS data is considered biased and must be adjusted if the arithmetic mean (d) is greater than the absolute value of the confidence coefficient (cc) in Equations 16.1 and 16.3. In such cases, a bias factor must be used to correct your PEMS data.
13.3 PEMS Variance. Your calculated F-value must not be greater than the critical F-value at the 95-percent confidence level for your PEMS to be acceptable.
13.4 PEMS Correlation. Your calculated r-value must be greater than or equal to 0.8 for your PEMS to be acceptable.
13.5 Relative Accuracy Audits (RAA). The average of the three portable analyzer or RM determinations must not differ from the simultaneous PEMS average value by more than 10 percent of the analyzer or RM for concentrations greater than 100 ppm (or 0.2 lb/mm Btu) or 20 percent for concentrations between 100 ppm (or 0.2 lb/mm Btu) and 10 ppm (or 0.02 lb/mm Btu), or the test is failed. For measurements at 20 ppm (or 0.04 lb/mm Btu) or less, this difference must not exceed 2 ppm (or 0.01 lb/mm Btu) for a pollutant PEMS. For diluent PEMS, the difference must not exceed 1 percent.
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 References [Reserved]
17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
| n−1 * | t-value | n−1 | t-value |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | 12.706 | 15 | 2.131 |
| 2 | 4.303 | 16 | 2.120 |
| 3 | 3.182 | 17 | 2.110 |
| 4 | 2.776 | 18 | 2.101 |
| 5 | 2.571 | 19 | 2.093 |
| 6 | 2.447 | 20 | 2.086 |
| 7 | 2.365 | 21 | 2.080 |
| 8 | 2.306 | 22 | 2.074 |
| 9 | 2.262 | 23 | 2.069 |
| 10 | 2.228 | 24 | 2.064 |
| 11 | 2.201 | 25 | 2.060 |
| 12 | 2.179 | 26 | 2.056 |
| 13 | 2.160 | 27 | 2.052 |
| 14 | 2.145 | >28 | t-Table |
| * The value n is the number of RM runs; n−1 equals the degrees of freedom. |
Performance Specification 17 [Reserved]
Performance Specification 18—Performance Specifications and Test Procedures for Gaseous Hydrogen Chloride (HCI) Continuous Emission Monitoring Systems at Stationary Sources
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Analyte. This performance specification (PS) is applicable for measuring gaseous concentrations of hydrogen chloride (HCl), CAS: 7647-01-0, on a continuous basis in the units of the applicable standard or in units that can be converted to units of the applicable standard(s).
1.2 Applicability.
1.2.1 This specification is used to evaluate the acceptability of HCl continuous emission monitoring systems (CEMS) at the time of installation or soon after and whenever specified in the regulations. The specification includes requirements for initial acceptance including instrument accuracy and stability assessments and use of audit samples if they are available.
1.2.2 The Administrator may require the operator, under section 114 of the Clean Air Act, to conduct CEMS performance evaluations at other times besides the initial test to evaluate the CEMS performance. See 40 CFR part 60, §§ 60.13(c) and 63.8(e)(1).
1.2.3 A source that demonstrates their CEMS meets the criteria of this PS may use the system to continuously monitor gaseous HCl under any regulation or permit that requires compliance with this PS. If your CEMS is capable of reporting the HCl concentration in the units of the applicable standard, no additional CEMS components are necessary. If your CEMS does not report concentrations in the units of the existing standard, then other CEMS components (e.g., oxygen (O2), temperature, stack gas flow, moisture and pressure) may be necessary to convert the units reported by your CEMS to the units of the standard.
1.2.4 These specification test results are intended to be valid for the life of the system. As a result, the HCl measurement system must be tested and operated in a configuration consistent with the configuration that will be used for ongoing continuous emissions monitoring.
1.2.5 Substantive changes to the system configuration require retesting according to this PS. Examples of such conditions include, but are not limited to: major changes in dilution ratio (for dilution based systems); changes in sample conditioning and transport, if used, such as filtering device design or materials; changes in probe design or configuration and changes in materials of construction. Changes consistent with instrument manufacturer upgrade that fall under manufacturer's certification do not require additional field verification. Manufacturer's upgrades require recertification by the manufacturer for those requirements allowed by this PS, including interference, level of detection (LOD), and light intensity qualification.
1.2.6 This specification is not designed to evaluate the ongoing CEMS performance nor does it identify specific calibration techniques and auxiliary procedures to assess CEMS performance over an extended period of time. The requirements in appendix F, Procedure 6 are designed to provide a way to assess CEMS performance over an extended period of time. The source owner or operator is responsible to calibrate, maintain, and operate the CEMS properly.
2.0 Summary of Performance Specification
2.1 This specification covers the procedures that each CEMS must meet during the performance evaluation test. Installation and measurement location specifications, data reduction procedures, and performance criteria are included.
2.2 The technology used to measure gaseous HCl must provide a distinct response and address any appropriate interference correction(s). It must accurately measure gaseous HCl in a representative sample (path or point sampling) of stack effluent.
2.3 The relative accuracy (RA) must be established against a reference method (RM) (e.g., Method 26A, Method 320, ASTM International (ASTM) D6348-12, including mandatory annexes, or Method 321 for Portland cement plants as specified by the applicable regulation or, if not specified, as appropriate for the source concentration and category). Method 26 may be approved as a RM by the Administrator on a case-by-case basis if not otherwise allowed or denied in an applicable regulation.
2.4 A standard addition (SA) procedure using a reference standard is included in appendix A to this performance specification for use in verifying LOD. For extractive CEMS, where the SA is done by dynamic spiking (DS), the appendix A procedure is allowed as an option for assessing calibration drift and is also referenced by Procedure 6 of appendix F to this part for ongoing quality control tests.
3.0 Definitions
3.1 Beam attenuation is the reduction in electromagnetic radiation (light) throughput from the maximum beam intensity experienced during site specific CEMS operation.
3.2 Beam intensity is the electromagnetic radiation (light) throughput for an IP-CEMS instrument measured following manufacturers specifications.
3.3 Calibration cell means a gas containment cell used with cross stack or integrated path (IP) CEMS for calibration and to perform many of the test procedures required by this performance specification. The cell may be a removable sealed cell or an evacuated and/or purged cell capable of exchanging reference and other calibration gases as well as zero gas standards. When charged, it contains a known concentration of HCl and/or interference gases. The calibration cell is filled with zero gas or removed from the optical path during stack gas measurement.
3.4 Calibration drift (CD) means the absolute value of the difference between the CEMS output response and an upscale reference gas or a zero-level gas, expressed as a percentage of the span value, when the CEMS is challenged after a stated period of operation during which no unscheduled adjustments, maintenance or repairs took place.
3.5 Centroidal area means a central area that is geometrically similar to the stack or duct cross section and is no greater than 10 percent of the stack or duct cross-sectional area.
3.6 Continuous Emission Monitoring System (CEMS) means the total equipment required to measure the pollutant concentration or emission rate continuously. The system generally consists of the following three major subsystems:
3.6.1 Sample interface means that portion of the CEMS used for one or more of the following: Sample acquisition, sample transport, sample conditioning, defining the optical measurement path, and protection of the monitor from the effects of the stack effluent.
3.6.2 HCl analyzer means that portion of the HCl CEMS that measures the total vapor phase HCl concentration and generates a proportional output.
3.6.3 Data recorder means that portion of the CEMS that provides a permanent electronic record of the analyzer output. The data recorder may record other pertinent data such as effluent flow rates, various instrument temperatures or abnormal CEMS operation. The data recorder may also include automatic data reduction capabilities and CEMS control capabilities.
3.7 Diluent gas means a major gaseous constituent in a gaseous pollutant mixture. For combustion sources, either carbon dioxide (CO2) or oxygen (O2) or a combination of these two gases are the major gaseous diluents of interest.
3.8 Dynamic spiking (DS) means the procedure where a known concentration of HCl gas is injected into the probe sample gas stream for extractive CEMS at a known flow rate to assess the performance of the measurement system in the presence of potential interference from the flue gas sample matrix.
3.9 Independent measurement(s) means the series of CEMS data values taken during sample gas analysis separated by two times the procedure specific response time (RT) of the CEMS.
3.10 Integrated path CEMS (IP-CEMS) means an in-situ CEMS that measures the gas concentration along an optical path in the stack or duct cross section.
3.11 Interference means a compound or material in the sample matrix other than HCl whose characteristics may bias the CEMS measurement (positively or negatively). The interference may not prevent the sample measurement, but could increase the analytical uncertainty in the measured HCl concentration through reaction with HCl or by changing the electronic signal generated during HCl measurement.
3.12 Interference test means the test to detect CEMS responses to interferences that are not adequately accounted for in the calibration procedure and may cause measurement bias.
3.13 Level of detection (LOD) means the lowest level of pollutant that the CEMS can detect in the presence of the source gas matrix interferents with 99 percent confidence.
3.14 Liquid evaporative standard means a reference gas produced by vaporizing National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) traceable liquid standards of known HCl concentration and quantitatively diluting the resultant vapor with a carrier gas.
3.15 Measurement error (ME) is the mean difference between the concentration measured by the CEMS and the known concentration of a reference gas standard, divided by the span, when the entire CEMS, including the sampling interface, is challenged.
3.16 Optical path means the route light travels from the light source to the receiver used to make sample measurements.
3.17 Path length means, for an extractive optical CEMS, the distance in meters of the optical path within a gas measurement cell. For an IP-CEMS, path length means the distance in meters of the optical path that passes through the source gas in the stack or duct.
3.18 Point CEMS means a CEMS that measures the source gas concentration, either at a single point at the sampling probe tip or over a path length for IP-CEMS less than 10 percent of the equivalent diameter of the stack or duct cross section.
3.19 Stack pressure measurement device means a NIST-traceable gauge or monitor that measures absolute pressure and conforms to the design requirements of ASME B40.100-2010, “Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments” (incorporated by reference—see § 60.17).
3.20 Reference gas standard means a NIST-traceable gas standard containing a known concentration of HCl certified in accordance with an EPA traceability protocol in section 7.1 of this PS.
3.21 Relative accuracy (RA) means the absolute mean difference between the gas concentration or the emission rate determined by the CEMS and the value determined by the RM, plus the confidence coefficient of a series of nine test runs, divided by the average of the RM or the applicable emission standard.
3.22 Response time (RT) means the time it takes for the measurement system, while operating normally at its target sample flow rate, dilution ratio, or data collection rate to respond to a known step change in gas concentration, either from a low- or zero-level to a high-level gas concentration or from a high-level to a low or zero-level gas concentration, and to read 95 percent of the change to the stable instrument response. There may be several RTs for an instrument related to different functions or procedures (e.g., DS, LOD, and ME).
3.23 Span value means an HCl concentration approximately equal to two times the concentration equivalent to the emission standard unless otherwise specified in the applicable regulation, permit or other requirement. Unless otherwise specified, the span may be rounded up to the nearest multiple of 5.
3.24 Standard addition means the addition of known amounts of HCl gas (either statically or dynamically) to the actual measurement path or measured sample gas stream.
3.25 Zero gas means a gas or liquid with an HCl concentration that is below the LOD of the measurement system.
4.0 Interferences
Sample gas interferences will vary depending on the instrument or technology used to make the measurement. Interferences must be evaluated through the interference test in this PS. Several compounds including carbon dioxide (CO2), carbon monoxide (CO), formaldehyde (CH2O), methane (CH4), and water (H2O) are potential optical interferences with certain types of HCl monitoring technology. Ammonia is a potential chemical interference with HCl.
5.0 Safety
The procedures required under this PS may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This PS may not address all of the safety issues associated with these procedures. It is the responsibility of the user to establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicable regulatory limitations prior to performing these procedures. The CEMS user's manual and materials recommended by the RM should be consulted for specific precautions to be taken.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
Equipment and supplies for CEMS will vary depending on the measurement technology and equipment vendors. This section provides a description of the equipment and supplies typically found in one or more types of CEMS.
6.1 Sample Extraction System. The portion of an extractive CEMS that collects and transports the sample to the pressure regulation and sample conditioning module. The extraction system must deliver a representative sample to the measurement instrument. The sample extraction system typically consists of a sample probe and a heated umbilical line.
6.2 Sample Conditioning Module. The portion of an extractive CEMS that removes particulate matter and moisture from the gas stream and provides a sample gas stream to the CEMS analysis module or analyzer. You must keep the particle-free gas sample above the dew point temperature of its components.
6.3 HClAnalyzer. The portion of the CEMS that detects, quantifies and generates an output proportional to the sample gas HCl concentration.
6.4 System Controller. The portion of the CEMS that provides control of the analyzer and other sub-systems (e.g., sample extraction, sample conditioning, reference gas) as necessary for continuous operation and periodic maintenance/QC activities.
6.5 Data Recorder. The portion of the CEMS that provides a record of analyzer output. The data recorder may record other pertinent data such as effluent flow rates, various instrument temperatures or abnormal CEMS operation. The data recorder output range must include the full range of expected HCl concentration values in the gas stream to be sampled including zero and span value.
6.6 Reference Gas System(s). Gas handling system(s) needed to introduce reference and other gases into the measurement system. For extractive CEMS, the system must be able to introduce gas flow sufficient to flood the sampling probe and prevent entry of gas from the effluent stream. For IP-CEMS, the system must be able to introduce a known concentration of HCl, at known cell length, pressure and temperature, into the optical path used to measure HCl gas concentration.
6.7 Moisture Measurement System. If correction of the measured HCl emissions for moisture is required, you must install, operate, maintain, and quality assure a continuous moisture monitoring system for measuring and recording the moisture content of the flue gases. The following continuous moisture monitoring systems are acceptable: An FTIR system validated according to Method 301 or section 13.0 of Method 320 in appendix A to part 63 of this chapter; a continuous moisture sensor; an oxygen analyzer (or analyzers) capable of measuring O2 both on a wet basis and on a dry basis; a stack temperature sensor and a moisture look-up table, i.e., a psychrometric chart (for saturated gas streams following wet scrubbers or other demonstrably saturated gas streams, only); or other continuous moisture measurement methods approved by the Administrator. Alternatively, for any type of fuel, you may determine an appropriate site-specific default moisture value (or values), using measurements made with Method 4—Determination of Moisture Content In Stack Gases, in appendix A-3 to of this part. If this option is selected, the site-specific moisture default value(s) must represent the fuel(s) or fuel blends that are combusted in the unit during normal, stable operation, and must account for any distinct difference(s) in the stack gas moisture content associated with different process operating conditions. At least nine Method 4 runs are required for determining each site-specific default moisture percentage. Calculate each site-specific default moisture value by taking the arithmetic average of the Method 4 runs. Each site-specific moisture default value shall be updated whenever the current value is non-representative, due to changes in unit or process operation, but in any event no less frequently than annually.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
7.1 Reference Gases. Reference gases (e.g., cylinder gases or liquid evaporative standards) used to meet the requirements of this PS must be NIST certified or NIST-traceable and vendor certified to ±5.0 percent accuracy. HCl cylinder gases must be certified according to Reference 5 in section 16 of this PS through a documented unbroken chain of comparisons each contributing to the reported uncertainty. Liquid evaporative standards must be certified using the gravimetrically-based procedures of the latest version of the EPA Traceability Protocol for Qualification and Certification of Evaporative HCl Gas Standards and Humidification of HCl Gas Standards from Cylinders (see EPA-HQ-OAR-2013-0696-0026.pdf).
7.2 Cylinder gas and/or liquid evaporative standards must be used within their certification periods.
7.3 High concentration cylinder gas or liquid evaporative HCl standards may be diluted for use in this specification. You must document the quantitative introduction of HCl standards into the system using Method 205, found in 40 CFR part 51, appendix M, or other procedure approved by the Administrator.
8.0 CEMS Measurement Location Specifications and Pretest Preparation
8.1 Prior to the start of your initial PS tests, you must ensure that the CEMS is installed according to the manufacturer's specifications and the requirements in this section. You may use either point or IP sampling technology.
8.2 CEMS Installation. Install the CEMS at an accessible location where the pollutant concentration or emission rate measurements are directly representative of the HCl emissions or can be corrected so as to be representative of the total emissions from the affected facility. The CEMS need not be installed at the same location as the relative accuracy test location. If you fail the RA requirements in this specification due to the CEMS measurement location and a satisfactory correction technique cannot be established, the Administrator may require the CEMS to be relocated.
8.2.1 Single point sample gas extraction should be (1) no less than 1.0 m (3.3 ft.) from the stack or duct wall or (2) within the centroidal area of the stack or duct cross section.
8.2.2 IP-CEMS measurements should (1) be conducted totally within the inner area bounded by a line 1.0 m (3.3 ft.) from the stack or duct wall, (2) have at least 70 percent of the path within the inner 50 percent of the stack or duct cross-sectional area, or (3) be located over any part of the centroidal area.
8.2.2.1 You must measure the IP-CEMS path length from the inner flange of the sampling ports or the inner end of the instrument insertion into the stack cavity using a laser tape measure, mechanical measurement tape, or similar device accurate to ±1.5 mm (0.059 in).
8.2.2.2 You must ensure that any purge flow used to protect IP-CEMS instrument windows from stack gas does not alter the measurement path length. Purge flow of less than or equal to 10 percent of the gas velocity in the duct meets this requirement.
8.2.3 CEMS and Data Recorder Scale Check. After CEMS installation, record and document the measurement range of the HCl CEMS. The CEMS operating range and the range of the data recording device must encompass all potential and expected HCl concentrations, including the concentration equivalent to the applicable emission limit and the span value.
9.0 Quality Control [Reserved]
10.0 Calibration and Standardization [Reserved]
11.0 Performance Specification Test Procedure
After completing the CEMS installation, setup and calibration, you must complete the PS test procedures in this section. You must perform the following procedures and meet the performance requirements for the initial demonstration of your CEMS:
a. Interference Test;
b. Beam Intensity Test (IP-CEMS only);
c. Temperature Verification Procedure (IP-CEMS only);
d. Pressure Verification Procedure (IP-CEMS only);
e. Level of Detection Determination;
f. Response Time Test;
g. Measurement Error Test;
h. Calibration Drift Test; and
i. Relative Accuracy Test.
11.1 Interference Test
11.1.1 Prior to its initial use in the field, you must demonstrate that your monitoring system meets the performance requirements of the interference test in section 13.5 to verify that the candidate system measures HCl accurately in the presence of common interferences in emission matrices.
11.1.2 Your interference test must be conducted in a controlled environment. The equipment you test for interference must include the combination of the analyzer, related analysis software, and any sample conditioning equipment (e.g., dilution module, moisture removal equipment or other interferent scrubber) used to control interferents.
11.1.3 If you own multiple measurement systems with components of the same make and model numbers, you need only perform this interference test on one analyzer and associated interference conditioning equipment combination. You may also rely on an interference test conducted by the manufacturer or a continuous measurement system integrator on a system having components of the same make and model(s) of the system that you use.
11.1.4 Perform the interference check using an HCl reference gas concentration of approximately five times the LOD.
11.1.5 Introduce the interference test gases listed in Table 1 in section 17.0 of this PS to the analyzer/conditioning system separately or in any combination. The interference test gases need not be of reference gas quality.
11.1.5.1 For extractive CEMS, the interference test gases may be introduced directly into the inlet to the analyzer/conditioning system after the probe extension coupling.
11.1.5.2 For IP-CEMS, the interference test gases may be added with the HCl in a calibration cell or separately in a temperature-controlled cell. The effective concentration of the gas in the cell must meet the requirements in Table 1 corrected for absolute pressure, temperature and the nominal stack sampling path length of the CEMS.
11.1.6 The interference test must be performed by combining an HCl reference gas with each interference test gas (or gas mixture). You must measure the baseline HCl response, followed by the response after adding the interference test gas(es) while maintaining a constant HCl concentration. You must perform each interference gas injection and evaluation in triplicate.
11.1.7 You should document the gas volume/rate, temperature, and pressure used to conduct the interference test. A gas blending system or manifold may be used.
11.1.8 Ensure the duration of each interference test is sufficient to condition the HCl measurement system surfaces before a stable measurement is obtained.
11.1.9 Measure the HCl response of the analyzer/sample conditioning system combination to the test gases in ppmv. Record the responses and determine the overall interference response using Table 2 in section 17.0.
11.1.10 For each interference gas (or mixture), calculate the mean difference (ΔMCavg) between the measurement system responses with and without the interference test gas(es) using Equation 1 in section 12.2. Summarize the results following the format contained in Table 2 in section 17.
11.1.11 Calculate the percent interference (I) for the gas runs using Equation 2 in section 12.2.
11.1.12 The total interference response (i.e., the sum of the interference responses of all tested gaseous components) must not exceed the criteria set forth in section 13.5 of this PS.
11.2 Beam Intensity Test for IP-CEMS
11.2.1 For IP-CEMS, you must establish the tolerance of your system to beam intensity attenuation.
11.2.1.1 Your beam intensity test may be conducted in either a controlled environment or on-site during initial setup and demonstration of your CEMS.
11.2.1.2 If you have multiple measurement systems with components of the same make and model numbers, you need only perform this attenuation check on one system and you may also rely on an attenuation test conducted by the manufacturer on a system having components of the same make and model(s) of the system that you use.
11.2.2 Insert one or more neutral density filter(s) or otherwise attenuate the beam intensity by a known percentage (e.g., 90 percent of the beam intensity).
11.2.3 Perform a high-level HCl reference gas measurement.
11.2.4 Record and report the attenuated beam intensity, the measured HCl calibration gas concentration at full beam intensity, the measured HCl gas concentration with attenuated beam intensity, and the percent difference between the two HCl measurements with and without attenuation of the beam intensity. The percent difference must not exceed the criteria set forth in section 13.6 of this PS.
11.2.5 In the future, you may not operate your IP-CEMS at a beam intensity lower than that established based on the attenuation used during this test. However, you may repeat the test to establish a lower beam intensity limit or level.
11.3 Temperature Measurement Verification Procedure for IP-CEMS
11.3.1 Any measurement instrument or device that is used as a reference in verification of temperature measurement must have an accuracy that is traceable to NIST.
11.3.2 You must verify the temperature sensor used in IP-CEMS measurements on-site as part of the initial installation and verification procedures.
11.3.3 Comparison to Calibrated Temperature Measurement Device.
11.3.3.1 Place the sensor of a calibrated temperature reference device adjacent to the sensor used to measure stack temperature for your IP-CEMS. The calibrated temperature reference device must satisfy the accuracy requirements specified in Table 3 of this PS. The calibrated temperature reference device must also have a range equal to or greater than the range of your IP-CEMS temperature sensor.
11.3.3.2 Allow sufficient time for the response of the calibrated temperature reference device to reach equilibrium. With the process and control device operating under normal conditions, concurrently record the temperatures measured by your IP-CEMS system (Mt) and the calibrated temperature reference device (Vt). You must meet the accuracy requirements specified in section 13.7 of this PS.
11.3.3.3 If your IP-CEMS temperature sensor does not satisfy the accuracy requirement of this PS, check all system components and take any corrective action that is necessary to achieve the required minimum accuracy. Repeat this verification procedure until the accuracy requirement of this specification is satisfied.
11.4 Pressure Measurement Verification Procedure for IP-CEMS
11.4.1 For stack pressure measurement verification, you must select a NIST-traceable gauge or monitor that conforms to the design requirements of ASME B40.100-2010, “Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments,” (incorporated by reference—see § 60.17) as a reference device.
11.4.2 As an alternative for a calibrated pressure reference device with NIST-traceable accuracy, you may use a water-in-glass U-tube manometer to verify your IP-CEMS pressure measurement equipment, provided there is also an accurate measurement of absolute atmospheric pressure at the manometer location.
11.4.3 Allow sufficient time for the response of the reference pressure measurement device to reach equilibrium. With the process and control device operating under normal conditions, concurrently record the pressures measured by your IP-CEMS system (MP) and the pressure reference device (Vp). You must meet the accuracy requirements specified in section 13.8 of this PS.
11.4.4 If your IP-CEMS pressure sensor does not satisfy the accuracy requirement of this PS, check all system components and take any corrective action that is necessary to achieve the required minimum accuracy. Repeat this verification procedure until the accuracy requirement of this specification is satisfied.
11.5 Level of Detection Determination
11.5.1 You must determine the minimum amount of HCl that can be detected above the background in a representative gas matrix.
11.5.2 You must perform the LOD determination in a controlled environment such as a laboratory or manufacturer's facility.
11.5.3 You must add interference gases listed in Table 1 of this PS to a constant concentration of HCl reference gas.
11.5.3.1 You may not use an effective reference HCl gas concentration greater than five times the estimated instrument LOD.
11.5.3.2 For extractive CEMS, inject the HCl and interferents described in section 11.1.5 directly into the inlet to the analyzer.
11.5.3.3 For IP-CEMS, the HCl and interference test gases may be added to a calibration cell or separately in a temperature-controlled cell that is part of the measurement path. The effective concentration of the gas in the cell must meet the requirements in Table 1 corrected for absolute pressure, temperature and the nominal stack sampling path length of the CEMS.
11.5.4 Collect seven or more consecutive measurements separated by twice the RT (described in section 11.6) to determine the LOD.
11.5.5 Calculate the standard deviation of the measured values and define the LOD as three times the standard deviation of these measurements.
11.5.5.1 The LOD for extractive units must be determined and reported in ppmv.
11.5.5.2 The LOD for IP units must be determined and reported on a ppm-meter basis and the site- or installation-specific LOD must be calculated based on the actual measurement path length and gas density of the emissions at the specific site installation in ppmv.
11.5.6 You must verify the controlled environment LOD of section 11.5.2 of this PS for your CEMS during initial setup and field certification testing. You must use the SA procedure in appendix A of this PS with the following exceptions:
11.5.6.1 For the LOD verification in the field, you must make three independent SA measurements spiking the native source concentration by no more than three times the controlled environment LOD concentration determined in section 11.5.5.
11.5.6.2 For extractive CEMS, you must perform the SA as a dynamic spike by passing the spiked source gas sample through all filters, scrubbers, conditioners and other monitoring system components used during normal sampling, and as much of the sampling probe as practical. For IP-CEMS, you must perform the SA procedure by adding or passing a known concentration reference gas into a calibration cell in the optical path of the CEMS; you must also include the source measurement optical path while performing the SA measurement.
11.5.6.3 The amount detected, or standard addition response (SAR), is based on the average difference of the native HCl concentration in the stack or duct relative to the native stack concentration plus the SA. You must be able to detect the effective spike addition (ESA) above the native HCl present in the stack gas matrix. For extractive CEMS, the ESA is calculated using Equation A7 in appendix A of this PS. For IP-CEMS, the ESA is calculated as Ci,eff using Equation 4 of this PS.
11.5.6.4 For extractive CEMS, calculate the SAR using Equation A4 in appendix A of this PS. For IP-CEMS, calculate the SAR using Equation A8.
11.5.6.5 If your system LOD field verification does not demonstrate a SAR greater than or equal to your initial controlled environment LOD, you must increase the SA concentration incrementally and repeat the field verification procedure until the SAR is equal to or greater than LOD. The site-specific standard addition detection level (SADL) is equal to the standard addition needed to achieve the acceptable SAR, and SADL replaces the controlled environment LOD. For extractive CEMS, the SADL is calculated as the ESA using Equation A7 in appendix A of this PS. For IP-CEMS, the SADL is the SA calculated using Equation A8 in appendix A of this PS. As described in section 13.1 of this PS, the LOD or the SADL that replaces an LOD must be less than 20 percent of the applicable emission limit.
11.6 Response Time Determination. You must determine ME-, LOD- and SA-RT
11.6.1 For ME- or LOD-RT, start the upscale RT determination by injecting zero gas into the measurement system as required by the procedures in section 11.7 or 11.5, respectively. You may use humidified zero gas. For standard addition RT, start the upscale RT determination by measuring the native stack gas concentration of HCl.
11.6.1.1 For extractive CEMS measuring ME- or LOD-RT, the output has stabilized when there is no change greater than 1.0 percent of full scale for 30 seconds.
11.6.1.2 For standard addition RT that includes the stack gas matrix the final stable response may continue to vary by more than 1 percent, but may be considered stable if the variability is random and not continuously rising or falling.
11.6.2 When the CEMS output has stabilized, record the response in ppmv and introduce an upscale (high level) or spike reference gas as required by the relevant procedure.
11.6.3 Record the time (upscale RT) required to reach 95 percent of the change to the final stable value.
11.6.4 Next, for ME or LOD RT, reintroduce the zero gas and record the time required to reach 95 percent of the change to the stable instrument response at the zero gas reading. For SA RT, introduce zero gas to the IP-CEMS cell or stop the spike gas flow to the extractive CEMS as required by the specified procedure and record the time required to reach 95 percent of the change to the stable instrument response of the native gas reading. This time is the downscale RT.
(Note: For CEMS that perform a series of operations (purge, blow back, sample integration, analyze, etc.), you must start adding reference or zero gas immediately after these procedures are complete.)
11.6.5 Repeat the entire procedure until you have three sets of data, then determine the mean upscale and mean downscale RTs for each relevant procedure. Report the greater of the average upscale or average downscale RTs as the RT for the system.
11.7 Measurement Error (ME) Test
11.7.1 On the same day and as close in time as practicable to when the ME test is conducted, perform and meet requirements for a calibration drift (CD) test using a zero gas as used in the Seven-Day Drift Test (see section 11.8) and document and report the results. To meet this requirement, the ME test may be conducted during the Seven-Day CD Test.
11.7.2 Extractive CEMS ME Test.
11.7.2.1 Introduce reference gases to the CEMS probe, prior to the sample conditioning and filtration system.
11.7.2.2 Measure three upscale HCl reference gas concentrations in the range shown in Table 4 of this PS.
11.7.2.3 Introduce the gases into the sampling probe with sufficient flow rate to replace the entire source gas sample.
11.7.2.4 Continue to add the reference gas until the response is stable as evidenced when the difference between two consecutive measurements is less than the LOD or within five percent of each other.
11.7.2.5 Make triplicate measurements for each reference gas for a total of nine measurements. Introduce different reference gas concentrations in any order but do not introduce the same gas concentration twice in succession.
11.7.2.6 At each reference gas concentration, determine the average of the three CEMS responses (MCl). Calculate the ME using Equation 3A in section 12.3.
11.7.2.7 If you desire to determine the system RT during this test, you must inject zero gas immediately before and after each injection of the high-level gas standard.
11.7.2.8 For non-dilution systems, you may adjust the system to maintain the correct flow rate at the analyzer during the test, but you may not make adjustments for any other purpose. For dilution systems, you must operate the measurement system at the appropriate dilution ratio during all system ME checks, and you may make only the adjustments necessary to maintain the proper ratio.
11.7.3 IP-CEMS ME Test.
11.7.3.1 Conduct a 3-level system ME test by individually adding the known concentrations of HCl reference gases into a calibration cell of known volume, temperature, pressure and path length.
Note: The optical path used for IP-CEMS ME checks must include the native HCl measurement path. You must also collect native stack concentration HCl measurements before and after each HCl standard measurement. Bracketing HCl reference gas measurements with native stack HCl measurements must be used in the calculations in Equation 5 in section 12.4.2 to correct the upscale measurements for stack gas HCl concentration changes.
11.7.3.2 Introduce HCl reference gas into your calibration cell in a range of concentrations that produce responses equivalent to the source concentrations shown in Table 4 of this PS for your path length.
11.7.3.3 Make triplicate measurements for each reference gas standard for a total of nine measurements. Introduce different calibration concentrations in any order but do not introduce the same reference gas concentration twice in succession.
11.7.3.4 You must calculate the effective concentration (Ci,eff) of the HCl reference gas equivalent to the stack concentration by correcting for calibration cell temperature, pressure, path length, line strength factor (LSF) and, if necessary, the native stack gas HCl concentration using Equation 4 in section 12.0.
11.7.3.5 You may use the LSF provided by your instrument manufacturer or determine an instrument-specific LSF as a function of temperature using a heated gas cell and equivalent concentrations (Ci,eff) between 50 and 150 percent of the emission limit.
11.7.3.6 At each reference gas concentration, average the three independent CEMS measurement responses corrected for native HCl stack concentration. Calculate the ME using Equation 6A in section 12.4.3.
11.7.4 You may use Figure 1 in section 17.0 to record and report your ME test results.
11.7.5 If the ME specification in section 13.3 is not met for all three reference gas concentrations, take corrective action and repeat the test until an acceptable 3-level ME test is achieved.
11.8 Seven-Day Calibration Drift (CD) Test
11.8.1 The CD Test Period. Prior to the start of the RA tests, you must perform a seven-day CD test. The purpose of the seven-day CD test is to verify the ability of the CEMS to maintain calibration for each of seven consecutive unit operating days as specified in section 11.8.5 of this PS.
11.8.2 The CD tests must be performed using the zero gas and mid-level reference gas standards as defined in Table 4 of this PS.
11.8.3 Conduct the CD test on each day during continuous operation of the CEMS and normal facility operations following the procedures in section 11.7 of this PS, except that the zero gas and mid-level gas need only be introduced to the measurement system once each.
11.8.4 If periodic automatic or manual adjustments are made to the CEMS zero and upscale response factor settings, conduct the CD test immediately before these adjustments.
11.8.5 Determine the magnitude of the CD at approximately 24-hour intervals, for 7 consecutive unit operating days. The 7 consecutive unit operating days need not be 7 consecutive calendar days.
11.8.6 Record the CEMS response for single measurements of zero gas and mid-level reference gas. You may use Figure 2 in section 17 of this PS to record and report the results of your 7-day CD test.
11.8.6.1 For extractive CEMS, calculate the CD using Equation 3B in section 12.3. Report the absolute value of the differences as a percentage of the span value.
11.8.6.2 For IP-CEMS, you must include the source measurement optical path while performing the upscale CD measurement; you may exclude the source measurement optical path when determining the zero gas concentration. Calculate the CD for IP CEMS using equations 4, 5, 6B, and 7 in section 12.4.
11.8.7 The zero-level and mid-level CD for each day must be less than 5.0 percent of the span value as specified in section 13.2 of this PS. You must meet this criterion for 7 consecutive operating days.
11.8.8 Dynamic Spiking Option for Seven-Day CD Test. For extractive CEMS, you have the option to conduct a mid-level dynamic spiking procedure for each of the 7 days in lieu of the mid-level reference gas injection described in sections 11.8.2 and 11.8.3. If this option is selected, the daily zero CD check is still required.
11.8.8.1 To conduct each of the seven daily mid-level dynamic spikes, you must use the DS procedure described in appendix A of this PS using a single spike of the mid-level reference gas (see Table 4).
11.8.8.2 You must perform the dynamic spike procedure by passing the spiked source gas sample through all filters, scrubbers, conditioners and other monitoring system components used during normal sampling, and as much of the sampling probe as practical.
11.8.8.3 Calculate the mid-level CD as a percent of span using Equation A6 of appendix A to this PS and calculate the zero drift using Equation 3B in section 12.3. Record and report the results as described in sections 11.8.6 and 11.8.7.
11.9 Relative Accuracy Test
11.9.1 Unless otherwise specified in an applicable regulation, use Method 26A in 40 CFR part 60, appendix A-8, Method 320 in 40 CFR part 63, appendix A, or ASTM D6348-12 including all annexes, as applicable, as the RMs for HCl measurement. Obtain and analyze RM audit samples, if they are available, concurrently with RM test samples according to the same procedure specified for performance tests in the general provisions of the applicable part. If Method 26 is not specified in an applicable subpart of the regulations, you may request approval to use Method 26 in appendix A-8 to this part as the RM on a site-specific basis under §§ 63.7(f) or 60.8(b). Other RMs for moisture, O2, etc., may be necessary. Conduct the RM tests in such a way that they will yield results representative of the emissions from the source and can be compared to the CEMS data.
11.9.1.1 When Method 26A is used as the RM, you must sample sufficient gas to reach three times your method detection limit for Method 26A in 40 CFR part 60, appendix A-8, or for a minimum of one hour, whichever is greater.
11.9.1.2 When Method 320 or Method 321, both found in 40 CFR part 63, appendix A, or ASTM D6348-12, are used as the RM, you must collect gas samples that are at stack conditions (hot and wet) and you must traverse as required in section 11.9.3.
11.9.2 Conduct the diluent (if applicable), moisture (if needed), and pollutant measurements simultaneously. However, diluent and moisture measurements that are taken within an hour of the pollutant measurements may be used to calculate dry pollutant concentration and emission rates.
11.9.3 Reference Method Measurement Location and Traverse Point(s) Selection.
11.9.3.1 Measurement Location. Select, as appropriate, an accessible RM measurement location at least two equivalent diameters downstream from the nearest control device, point of pollutant generation, or other point at which a change in the pollutant concentration or emission rate may occur, and at least one half equivalent diameter upstream from the effluent exhaust or a control device. When pollutant concentration changes are due solely to diluent leakage (e.g., air heater leakages) and pollutants and diluents are simultaneously measured at the same location, a half diameter may be used in lieu of two equivalent diameters. The equivalent duct diameter is calculated according to Method 1 in appendix A-1 to this part. The CEMS and RM sampling locations need not be the same.
11.9.3.2 Traverse Point Selection. Select traverse points that assure acquisition of representative RM samples over the stack or duct cross section according to one of the following options: (a) sample at twelve traverse points located according to section 11.3 of Method 1 in appendix A-1 to this part, (b) sample at 6 Method 1 traverse points according to section 6.5.6(b)(1) of appendix A to part 75 of this chapter, or (c) sample at three points on a measurement line (“3-point long line”) that passes through the centroidal area of the duct in the direction of any potential stratification. If this line interferes with the CEMS measurements, you may displace the line up to 20 cm (12 in.) or 5.0 percent of the equivalent diameter of the cross section, whichever is less, from the centroidal area. Locate the three traverse points at 16.7, 50.0, and 83.3 percent of the measurement line. Alternatively, you may conduct a stratification test following the procedures in sections 11.9.3.2.1 through 11.9.3.2.4 to justify sampling at a single point or three points located on the measurement line at 0.4, 1.2, and 2.0 m from the stack wall (“3-point short line”). Stratification testing must be conducted at the sampling location to be used for the RM measurements during the RA test and must be made during normal facility operating conditions. You must evaluate the stratification by measuring the gas on the same moisture basis as the HCl CEMS (wet or dry). Stratification testing must be repeated for each RA test program to justify single point or “3-point short line” sampling.
11.9.3.2.1 Use a probe of appropriate length to measure the HCl concentration or an alternative analyte, as described in this section, using 12 traverse points located according to section 11.3 of Method 1 in appendix A-1 to 40 CFR part 60 for a circular stack or nine points at the centroids of similarly-shaped, equal area divisions of the cross section of a rectangular stack.
11.9.3.2.2 You may substitute a stratification test for SO2 for the HCl stratification test. If you select this option, you must follow the test procedures in Method 6C of appendix A-4 to 40 CFR part 60 or Method 320 of appendix A of 40 CFR part 63.
11.9.3.2.3 Calculate the mean measured concentration for all sampling points (MNavg).
11.9.3.2.4 Calculate the percent stratification (St) of each traverse point using Equation 8 in section 12.5.
11.9.3.2.5 The gas stream is considered to be unstratified and you may perform the RA testing at a single point that most closely matches the mean if the concentration at each traverse point differs from the mean concentration for all traverse points by: (a) No more than 5.0 percent of the mean concentration; or (b) 0.2 ppm (for HCl) or 3 ppm (for SO2) absolute, whichever is less restrictive.
11.9.3.2.6 If the criterion for single point sampling (5.0 percent, 0.2 ppm for HCl or 3 ppm for SO2 are not met, but the concentration at each traverse point differs from the mean concentration for all traverse points by no more than 10.0 percent of the mean, the gas stream is considered to be minimally stratified, and you may take RA samples using the “3-point short line”. Alternatively, you may use the 3-point short line if each traverse point differs from the mean value by no more than 0.4 ppm (for HCl) or 5 ppm (for SO2).
11.9.3.2.7 If the concentration at any traverse point differs from the mean concentration by more than 10 percent, the gas stream is considered stratified and you must sample using one of the options in section 11.9.3.2 above.
11.9.3.3 Conduct all necessary RM tests within 3 cm (1.2 in.) of the traverse points, but no closer than 3 cm (1.2 in.) to the stack or duct wall.
11.9.4 In order to correlate the CEMS and RM data properly, record the beginning and end of each RM run (including the time of day in hours, minutes, and seconds) using a clock synchronized with the CEM clock used to create a permanent time record with the CEMS output.
11.9.5 You must conduct the RATA during representative process and control operating conditions or as specified in an applicable regulation, permit or subpart.
11.9.6 Conduct a minimum of nine RM test runs. NOTE: More than nine RM test runs may be performed. If this option is chosen, up to three test run results may be excluded so long as the total number of test run results used to determine the CEMS RA is greater than or equal to nine. However, all data must be reported including the excluded test runs.
11.9.7 Analyze the results from the RM test runs using Equations 9-14 in section 12.6. Calculate the RA between the CEMS results and the RM.
11.10 Record Keeping and Reporting
11.10.1 For systems that use a liquid evaporative standard generator to deliver HCl reference gas standards, record supporting data for these devices, including liquid feed calibrations, liquid standard concentration(s) and NIST-traceability, feed rate and gas flow calibrations for all diluent and HCl gas flows. All calibrations must include a stated uncertainty, and the combined uncertainty of the delivered HCl reference gas concentration must be calculated and reported.
11.10.2 Record the results of the CD test, the RT test, the ME test, the RA test, and for IP-CEMS, the results of the beam intensity, temperature and pressure verification procedures. Also keep records of the RM and CEMS field data, calculations, and reference gas certifications necessary to confirm that the performance of the CEMS met the performance specifications.
11.10.3 For systems that use Method 205 to prepare HCl reference gas standards, record results of Method 205 performance test field evaluation, reference gas certifications, and gas dilution system calibration.
11.10.4 Record the LOD for the CEMS. For extractive CEMS, record the LOD in ppmv. For IP-CEMS, record the LOD on a ppm-meter basis along with a calculation of the installation specific LOD in ppmv. For both CEMS types, you must also record the field verified SADL.
11.10.5 Record the results of the interference test.
11.10.6 Report the results of all certification tests to the appropriate regulatory agency (or agencies), in hardcopy and/or electronic format, as required by the applicable regulation or permit.
12.0 Calculations and Data Analysis
12.1 Nomenclature
Ci = Zero or HCl reference gas concentration used for test i (ppmv);
Ci,eff = Equivalent concentration of the reference gas value, Ci, at the specified conditions (ppmv);
CC = Confidence coefficient (ppmv);
CDextractive = Calibration drift for extractive CEMS (percent);
CDIP = Calibration drift for IP-CEMS (percent);
CD0 = Calibration drift at zero HCl concentrations for an IP-CEMS (percent);
davg = Mean difference between CEMS response and the reference gas (ppmv);
di = Difference of CEMS response and the RM value (ppmv);
I = Total interference from major matrix stack gases, (percent);
LSF = Line strength factor for IP-CEMS instrument specific correction for temperature and gas matrix effects derived from the HITRAN and/or manufacturer specific database (unitless);
ΔMCavg = Average of the 3 absolute values of the difference between the measured HCl calibration gas concentrations with and without interference from selected stack gases (ppmv);
MCi = Measured HCl reference gas concentration i (ppmv);
MCi = Average of the measured HCl reference gas concentration i (ppmv);
MCint = Measured HCl concentration of the HCl reference gas plus the individual or combined interference gases (ppmv);
MEextractive = Measurement error for extractive CEMS (percent);
MEIP = Measurement error for IP-CEMS (percent);
MNavg = Average concentration at all sampling points (ppmv);
MNbi = Measured native concentration bracketing each calibration check measurement (ppmv);
MNi = Measured native concentration for test or run I (ppmv);
n = Number of measurements in an average value;
Pstack = Absolute stack pressure (mm Hg)
Preference = Absolute pressure of the calibration cell for IP-CEMS (mm Hg)
PLCell = Path length of IP-CEMS calibration cell (m);
PLStack = Path length of IP-CEMS stack optical path (m);
RA = Relative accuracy of CEMS compared to a RM (percent);
RMi = RM concentration for test run i (ppmv);
RMavg = Mean measured RM value (ppmv);
S = Span value (ppmv);
Sd = Standard deviation of the differences (ppmv);
Sti = Stratification at traverse point i (percent);
SADL = Standard addition detection level (ppmv);
t0.975 = One-sided t-value at the 97.5th percentile obtained from Table 5 in section 17.0 for n-1 measurements;
Treference = Temperature of the calibration cell for IP-CEMS (degrees Kelvin);
Tstack = Temperature of the stack at the monitoring location for IP-CEM (degrees Kelvin).
12.2 Calculate the difference between the measured HCl concentration with and without interferents for each interference gas (or mixture) for your CEMS as:
Calculate the total percent interference as:
12.2.1 Calculate the equivalent concentration Ci,eff using Equation 4:
12.3 Calculate the ME or CD at Concentration i for an Extractive CEMS as:
12.4 Calculate the ME or CD at Concentration i for IP-CEMS That Use a Calibration Cell as Follows:
12.4.1 Calculate the equivalent concentration Ci,eff using Equation 4:
12.4.2 Calculate the average native concentration before and after each calibration check measurement as:
12.4.3 Calculate the ME or CD at concentration i for an IP-CEM as:
12.4.4 Calculate the zero CD as a percent of span for an IP-CEMS as:
12.5 Calculate the Percent Stratification at Each Traverse Point as:
12.6 Calculate the RA Using RM and CEMS Data
12.6.1 Determine the CEMS final integrated minute average pollutant concentration or emission rate for each RM test period. Consider system RT, if important, and confirm that the results have been corrected to the same moisture, temperature and diluent concentration basis.
12.6.2 When Method 26A (or if approved for use, Method 26), found in 40 CFR part 60, appendix A-8 of this part, is used as the RM, compare each CEMS integrated average value against the corresponding RM value for identical test periods. Make these comparisons on the same basis (e.g., wet, dry, ppmv, or units of the standard). To convert results generate by Method 26A or 26 in mg/DSCM to ppmv, use the conversion factor 0.662 ppm/(mg/DSCM).
12.6.3 If the RM is Method 320 or Method 321, found in 40 CFR part 63, appendix A, or ASTM D6348-12, make a direct comparison of the average RM results and CEMS average value for identical test periods.
12.6.4 For each test run, calculate the arithmetic difference of the RM and CEMS results using Equation 9.
12.6.5 Calculate the standard deviation of the differences (Sd) of the CEMS measured and RM results using Equation 10.
12.6.6 Calculate the confidence coefficient (CC) for the RATA using Equation 11.
12.6.7 Calculate the mean difference (davg) between the RM and CEMS values in the units of ppmv or the emission standard using Equation 12.
12.6.8 Calculate the average RM value using Equation 13.
12.6.9 Calculate RA of the CEMS using Equation 14.
13.0 Method Performance
13.1 Level of Detection. You may not use a CEMS whose LOD or SADL is greater than 20 percent of the applicable regulatory limit or other action level for the intended use of the data.
13.2 Calibration Drift. The zero- and mid-level calibration drift for the CEMS must not exceed 5.0 percent of the span value for 7 consecutive operating days.
13.3 Measurement Error. The ME must be less than or equal to 5.0 percent of the span value at the low-, mid-, and high-level reference gas concentrations.
13.4 Relative Accuracy. Unless otherwise specified in an applicable regulation or permit, the RA of the CEMS, whether calculated in units of HCl concentration or in units of the emission standard, must be less than or equal to 20.0 percent of the RM when RMavg is used in the denominator of Equation 14.
13.4.1 In cases where the RA is calculated on a concentration (ppmv) basis, if the average RM emission level for the test is less than 75 percent of the HCl concentration equivalent to the emission standard, you may substitute the HCl concentration equivalent to the standard in the denominator of Equation 14 in place of RMavg.
13.4.2 Similarly, if the RA is calculated in units of the emission standard and the HCl emission level measured by the RMs is less than 75 percent of the emission standard, you may substitute the emission standard in the denominator of Equation 14 in place of RMavg.
13.4.3 The alternative calculated RA in paragraph 13.4.1 or 13.4.2 must be less than or equal to 15.0 percent.
13.5 Interference Test.
13.5.1 The sum of the interference response(s) from Equation 2 must not be greater than 2.5 percent of the calibration span or ±3.0 percent of the equivalent HCl concentration used for the interference test, whichever is less restrictive. The results are also acceptable if the sum of the interference response(s) does not exceed six times the LOD or 0.5 ppmv for a calibration span of 5 to 10 ppm, or 0.2 ppmv for a calibration span of less than 5 ppmv.
13.6 IP-CEMS Beam Intensity Test. For IP-CEMS, the percent difference between the measured concentration with and without attenuation of the light source must not exceed ±3.0 percent.
13.7 IP-CEMS Temperature Measurement Verification. Your temperature sensor satisfies the accuracy required if the absolute relative difference between measured value of stack temperature (Mt) and the temperature value from the calibrated temperature reference device (Vt) is ≤1.0 percent or if the absolute difference between Mt and Vt is ≤2.8 °C (5.0 °F), whichever is less restrictive.
13.8 IP-CEMS Pressure Sensor Measurement Verification. Your pressure sensor satisfies the accuracy required if the absolute relative difference between the measured value of stack pressure (MP) and the pressure value from the calibrated pressure reference device (VP) is ≤5.0 percent or if the absolute difference between Mp and VP is ≤0.12 kilopascals (0.5 inches of water column), whichever is less restrictive.
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 Bibliography
1. Method 318—Extractive FTIR Method for the Measurement of Emissions From the Mineral Wool and Wool Fiberglass Industries, 40 CFR, part 63, subpart HHHHHHH, appendix A.
2. “EPA Protocol for the Use of Extractive Fourier Transform Infrared (FTIR) Spectrometry in Analyses of Gaseous Emissions from Stationary Industrial Sources,” February, 1995.
3. “Measurement of Gaseous Organic and Inorganic Emissions by Extractive FTIR Spectroscopy,” EPA Contract No. 68-D2-0165, Work Assignment 3-08.
4. “Method 301—Field Validation of Pollutant Measurement Methods from Various Waste Media,” 40 CFR part 63, appendix A.
5. EPA Traceability Protocol for Assay and Certification of Gaseous Calibration Standards, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency office of Research and Development, EPA/600/R-12/531, May 2012.
17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
| Potential interferent gas 1 | Approximate concentration (balance N2) |
|---|---|
| CO2 | 15% ± 1% CO2.2 |
| CO | 100 ± 20 ppm. |
| CH2 O | 20 ± 5 ppm. |
| CH4 | 100 ± 20 ppm. |
| NH3 | 10 ± 5 ppm (extractive CEMS only). |
| NO | 250 ± 50 ppm. |
| SO2 | 200 ± 20 ppm. |
| O2 | 3% ± 1% O2.2 |
| H2 O | 10% ± 1% H2 O.2 |
| N2 | Balance.2 |
| 1 Any of these specific gases can be tested at a lower level if the manufacturer has provided reliable means for limiting or scrubbing that gas to a specified level in CEMS field installations. | |
| 2 Gases for short path IP cell interference tests cannot be added above 100 percent stack equivalent concentration. Add these gases at the indicated percentages to make up the remaining cell volume. |
| If the sensor is a . . . | You can use the following design standards as guidance in selecting a sensor for your IP-CEMS |
|---|---|
| 1. Thermocouple | a. ASTM E235-88 (1996), “Specification for Thermocouples, Sheathed, Type K, for Nuclear or Other High-Reliability Applications.” |
| b. ASTM E585/E585M-04, “Specification for Compacted Mineral-Insulated, Metal-Sheathed, Base Metal Thermocouple Cable.” | |
| c. ASTM E608/E608M-06, “Specification for Mineral-Insulated, Metal-Sheathed Base Metal Thermocouples.” | |
| d. ASTM E696-07, “Specification for Tungsten-Rhenium Alloy Thermocouple Wire.” | |
| e. ASTM E1129/E1129M-98 (2002), “Standard Specification for Thermocouple Connectors.” | |
| f. ASTM E1159-98 (2003), “Specification for Thermocouple Materials, Platinum-Rhodium Alloys, and Platinum.” | |
| g. ISA-MC96.1-1982, “Temperature Measurement Thermocouples.” | |
| 2. Resistance temperature detector | ASTM E1137/E1137M-04, “Standard Specification for Industrial Platinum Resistance Thermometers.” |
| Test | Units | HCl Zero and Reference Gas Concentrations in Terms of Percent of Span a | Section | |||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Zero | Low Level | Mid Level | High Level | |||
| Calibration Drift | % of Span | <LOD | NA | 50-60 b | NA | 11.8 |
| Measurement Error | % of Span | NA | 20-30 | 50-60 | 80-100 | 11.7 |
| a Reference gas concentration must be NIST traceable. (see section 7.1) | ||||||
| b Mid-level is required. For DS calibration drift option, choose a concentration that yields a value in this range at the analyzer. |
| n-1 a | t-value | n-1 a | t-value | n-1 a | t-value |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | 12.71 | 11 | 2.201 | 21 | 2.080 |
| 2 | 4.303 | 12 | 2.179 | 22 | 2.074 |
| 3 | 3.182 | 13 | 2.160 | 23 | 2.069 |
| 4 | 2.776 | 14 | 2.145 | 24 | 2.064 |
| 5 | 2.571 | 15 | 2.131 | 25 | 2.060 |
| 6 | 2.447 | 16 | 2.120 | 26 | 2.056 |
| 7 | 2.365 | 17 | 2.110 | 27 | 2.052 |
| 8 | 2.306 | 18 | 2.101 | 28 | 2.048 |
| 9 | 2.262 | 19 | 2.093 | 29 | 2.045 |
| 10 | 2.228 | 20 | 2.086 | 30 | 2.042 |
| a The value n is the number of independent pairs of measurements. Either discrete (independent) measurements in a single run, or run averages can be used. |
PS-18 Appendix A Standard Addition Procedures
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 This appendix to Performance Specification (PS) 18 describes the procedure and performance requirements for standard addition (SA) as a quality check for hydrogen chloride (HCl) continuous emission monitoring systems (CEMS).
1.2 This appendix is applicable to quality checks of both extractive and integrated path (IP) technologies used to measure HCl emissions.
1.3 For extractive CEMS, this procedure must be used, as a level of detection (LOD) verification of all field-installed CEMS. Additionally, it is allowed by Procedure 6 in appendix F to this part as an alternative to upscale calibration drift (CD) tests, cylinder gas audits and relative accuracy audits (RAAs), and may be used for quality assurance purposes under other applicable regulations or permits that require HCl monitoring.
1.4 For IP-CEMS, this procedure must be used as a LOD verification of all field-installed CEMS.
2.0 Summary of the Appendix for Standard Addition
As used here, SA is a gas phase method of standard additions (either static or dynamic) used to verify the accuracy of CEMS measurements in the presence of the sample matrix. For extractive CEMS, it consists of spiking a known quantity of HCl dynamically into the measurement system as an addition to the native HCl and the native source gas matrix. For IP-CEMS, this procedure consists of introducing a known quantity of HCl into the optical path that also includes the native source gas.
3.0 Definitions. (See PS-18 and Procedure 6 of Appendix F to Part 60 for the Definitions Used in This Appendix.)
4.0 Interferences. Interferences are discussed in PS-18, section 4.0
5.0 Safety. The procedures required under this appendix may involve hazardous materials, operations and equipment. This procedure may not address all of the safety problems associated with these procedures. You as the facility or operator must establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicable regulatory limitations prior to performing these procedures. As the CEMS user, you should consult instrument operation manuals, material safety data sheets, compressed gas safety requirements, and other Occupational Safety and Health Administration regulations for specific precautions to be taken.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies. An example of equipment and supplies is described in section 6 of PS-18.
7.0 Reagents and Standards. SA materials must meet the requirements defined for reference gases in section 7 of PS-18 to perform this procedure with the following exception. You may use gases certified by the gas vendor to ±5 percent to perform the daily calibration drift assessment in section 4.1 of Procedure 6 in appendix F of this part.
8.0 Standard Addition and Dynamic Spiking Procedure. The standard addition procedure consists of measuring the native source gas concentration, addition of reference gas, and measurement of the resulting SA elevated source gas concentration. For extractive CEMS, HCl is spiked dynamically and thus, one must account for the dilution of sample gas from the addition of the HCl reference gas. For IP-CEMS, standard addition of an HCl reference gas is made by either adding an HCl reference gas to a flow through cell or inserting a sealed reference gas cell into the measurement path of the CEMS. The enclosed cell or a fixed cell must contain an HCl concentration that accounts for the difference in path length of the cell used for SA relative to the measurement path.
8.1 SA Concentration and Measurement Replicates.
8.1.1 You must inject HCl gas to create a measured concentration based on the requirements of the particular performance test (e.g., LOD verification, CD, DSA).
8.1.2 Each dynamic spike (DS) or standard addition (SA) replicate consists of a measurement of the source emissions concentration of HCl (native stack concentration) with and without the addition of HCl. With a single CEMS, you must alternate the measurement of the native and SA-elevated source gas so that each measurement of SA-elevated source gas is immediately preceded and followed by a measurement of native stack gas. Introduce the SA gases in such a manner that the entire CEMS is challenged. Alternatively, you may use an independent continuous HCl monitor to measure the native source concentration before and after each standard addition as described in section 8.1.4.
8.1.3 Unless specified otherwise by an applicable rule, your SA-elevated concentration may not exceed 100 percent of span when the SA and native HCl concentration are combined.
8.1.4 As an alternative to making background measurements pre- and post-SA, you may use an independent continuous HCl monitor as a temporary unit to measure native stack HCl concentration while simultaneously using the CEMS to measure the SA-elevated source concentration. If you use an independent continuous HCl monitor you must make one concurrent background or native HCl measurement using both the installed CEMS and the independent continuous HCl monitor, immediately before the SA procedure in section 8.2 or 8.3 begins, to confirm that the independent monitoring system measures the same background concentration as the CEMS being qualified with this PS.
8.2 SA Procedure for Extractive CEMS (Dynamic Spiking)
8.2.1 Your HCl spike addition must not alter the total volumetric sample system flow rate or basic dilution ratio of your CEMS (if applicable).
8.2.2 Your spike gas flow rate must not contribute more than 10 percent of the total volumetric flow rate through the CEMS.
8.2.3 You must determine a dilution factor (DF) or relative concentration of HCl for each dynamic spike. Calibrated, NIST-traceable flow meters accurate to within 2.0 percent or highly accurate tracer gas measurements are required to make the necessary DF determinations at the accuracy required for this PS. Calibrated, NIST-traceable flow meters (e.g., venturi, orifice) accurate to within 2.0 percent should be recertified against an NIST-traceable flow meter annually. Note: Since the spiking mass balance calculation is directly dependent on the accuracy of the DF determination, the accuracy of measurements required to determine the total volumetric gas flow rate, spike gas flow rate, or tracer gas standard addition concentration is critical to your ability to accurately perform the DS procedure and calculate the results.
8.2.4 You must monitor and record the total sampling system flow rate and sample dilution factor (DF) for the spiking and stack gas sampling systems to ensure they are known and do not change during the spiking procedure. Record all data on a data sheet similar to Table A1 in section 13 of this appendix.
8.2.4.1 You may either measure the spike gas flow and the total flow with calibrated flow meters capable of NIST traceable accuracy to ±2.0 percent or calculate the flow using a stable tracer gas included in your spike gas standard.
8.2.4.2 If you use flow measurements to determine the spike dilution, then use Equation A1 in section 11.2.1 of this appendix to calculate the DF. Determination of the spike dilution requires measurement of HCl spike flow (Qspike) and total flow through the CEM sampling system (Qprobe).
8.2.4.3 If your CEMS is capable of measuring an independent stable tracer gas, you may use a spike gas that includes the tracer to determine the DF using Equation A2 or A3 (sections 11.2.2 and 11.2.3 of this appendix) depending on whether the tracer gas is also present in the native source emissions.
8.2.4.4 For extractive CEMS, you must correct the background measurements of HCl for the dilution caused by the addition of the spike gas standard. For spiking systems that alternate between addition of HCl and zero gas at a constant DF, the background measurements between spikes will not be equal to the native source concentration.
8.2.5 Begin by collecting unspiked sample measurements of HCl. You must use the average of two unspiked sample measurements as your pre-spike background.
8.2.5.1 Introduce the HCl gas spike into the permanent CEMS probe, upstream of the particulate filter or sample conditioning system and as close to the sampling inlet as practical.
8.2.5.2 Maintain the HCl gas spike for at least twice the DS response time of your CEMS or until the consecutive measurements agree within 5.0 percent. Collect two independent measurements of the native plus spiked HCl concentration.
8.2.5.3 Stop the flow of spike gas for at least twice the DS response time of your CEMS or until the consecutive measurements agree within 5.0 percent. Collect two independent measurements of the native HCl concentration.
8.2.6 Repeat the collection of sample measurements in section 8.2.5 until you have data for each spike concentration including a final set of unspiked sample measurements according to section 8.2.5.3.
8.2.7 Verify that the CEMS responded as expected for each spike gas injection, and that the data quality is not impacted by large shifts in the native source concentration. Discard and repeat any spike injections as necessary to generate a complete set of the required replicate spike measurements.
8.2.8 Calculate the standard addition response (SAR) for extractive CEMS, using Equation A4 in section 11.2, of this appendix.
8.2.9 If the DS results do not meet the specifications for the appropriate performance test in PS-18 or Procedure 6 of appendix F of this part, you must take corrective action and repeat the DS procedure.
8.3 SA Procedure for IP-CEMS (Static Spiking).
8.3.1 For IP-CEMS, you must make measurements of native source gas HCl concentration and an HCl standard addition using a calibration cell added to the optical measurement path.
8.3.2 Introduce zero gas into a calibration cell located in the optical measurement path of the instrument. Continue to flush the zero gas into the cell for at least the SA response time of your CEMS or until two consecutive measurements taken are within 5.0 percent, then collect two independent measurements. Alternatively you may measure native concentrations without the calibration cell in the optical path.
8.3.3 Introduce the HCl spike gas into the calibration cell. Continue to flush the spike gas into the cell for at least the SA response time of your CEMS or until two consecutive measurements taken are within 5.0 percent of one another. Then collect two independent measurements of the SA addition to the native concentration. Alternatively you may insert a sealed calibration cell, containing HCl at the appropriate concentration, into the optical path to measure the SA addition to the native concentration.
8.3.4 Repeat the collection of SA-elevated and native HCl measurements in sections 8.3.2 and 8.3.3 until you have data for each SA concentration. Then, make a final native HCl measurement. The measured concentrations must be corrected for calibration cell and stack temperature, pressure and stack measurement path length.
8.3.5 Calculate the standard addition response (SAR) for an IP-CEMS, using Equation A8 in section 11.3 of this appendix.
8.3.6 If the SA results do not meet the specifications for the appropriate performance test in PS-18 or Procedure 6 of appendix F of this part, you must take corrective action and repeat the SA procedure.
9.0 Quality Control [Reserved]
10.0 Calibration and Standardization [Reserved]
11.0 Calculations and Data Analysis. Calculate the SA response for each measurement and its associated native HCl measurement(s), using equations in this section. (Note: For cases where the emission standard is expressed in units of lb/MMBtu or corrected to a specified O2 or CO2 concentration, an absolute accuracy specification based on a span at stack conditions may be calculated using the average concentration and applicable conversion factors. The appropriate procedures for use in cases where a percent removal standard is more restrictive than the emission standard are the same as in 40 CFR part 60, PS-2, sections 12 and 13.)
11.1 Nomenclature.
Cspike = Actual HCl reference gas concentration spiked (e.g., bottle or reference gas concentration) ppmv;
Ctracer spiked = Tracer gas concentration injected with spike gas (“reference concentration”) ppmv;
DF = Spiked gas dilution factor;
DSCD = Calibration drift determined using DS procedure (percent);
DSE = Dynamic spike error (ppmv);
ESA = Effective spike addition (ppmv);
MCSA = Measured SA-elevated source gas concentration (ppmv);
MCspiked = Measured HCl reference gas concentration i (ppmv);
MCnative = Average measured concentration of the native HCl (ppmv);
Mnative tracer = Measured tracer gas concentration present in native effluent gas (ppmv);
Mspiked tracer = Measured diluted tracer gas concentration in a spiked sample (ppmv);
Qspike = Flow rate of the dynamic spike gas (Lpm);
Qprobe = Average total stack sample flow through the system (Lpm);
S = Span (ppmv);
SAR = Standard addition response (ppmv)
11.2 Calculating Dynamic Spike Response and Error for Extractive CEMS.
11.2.1 If you determine your spike DF using spike gas and stack sample flow measurements, calculate the DF using equation A1:
11.2.2 If you determine your spike DF using an independent stable tracer gas that is not present in the native source emissions, calculate the DF for DS using equation A2:
11.2.3 If you determine your spike dilution factor using an independent stable tracer that is present in the native source emissions, calculate the dilution factor for dynamic spiking using equation A3:
11.2.4 Calculate the SA response using Equation A4:
11.2.5 Calculate the DS error using Equation A5.
11.2.6 Calculating CD using DS. When using the DS option for determining mid-level CD, calculate the CD as a percent of span using equation A6:
11.2.7 The effective spike addition (ESA) is the expected increase in the measured concentration as a result of injecting a spike. Calculate ESA using Equation A7:
11.3 Standard Addition Response for IP-CEMS. If you use an IP-CEMS and a calibration cell, calculate the SA response using Equation A8.
12.0 [Reserved]
13. Tables and Figures.
Performance Specification 19-Performance Specifications and Test Procedures for Ethylene Oxide (ETO) Continuous Emission Monitoring Systems
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Analyte. This performance specification (PS) is applicable for measuring gaseous concentrations of Ethylene Oxide (EtO), CAS: 775-21-8, on a continuous basis in the units of the applicable standard or in units that can be converted to units of the applicable standard(s) (e.g., lbs/hr,). This performance specification may be approved for the measurement of other pollutants and/or in other sectors by the Administrator on a case-by-case basis if not otherwise allowed or denied in an applicable subpart of the regulations.
1.2 Applicability.
1.2.1 This specification is used to evaluate the acceptability of EtO continuous emission monitoring systems (CEMS) at the time of installation or soon after and whenever specified in the regulations. The specification includes requirements for initial acceptance including instrument accuracy and stability assessments and use of audit samples if they are available.
1.2.2 The Administrator may require the operator, under section 114 of the Clean Air Act, to conduct CEMS performance evaluations at other times besides the initial test to evaluate the CEMS performance. See 40 CFR part 60, § 60.13(c) and § 63.8(e)(1).
1.2.3 A source that demonstrates their CEMS meets the criteria of this PS may use the system to continuously monitor gaseous EtO under any regulation or permit that requires compliance with this PS. If your CEMS reports the EtO concentration in the units of the applicable standard, no additional CEMS components are necessary. If your CEMS does not report concentrations in the units of the existing standard, then other CEMS (i.e., oxygen) or CEMS components (e.g., temperature, stack gas flow, moisture, and pressure) may be necessary to convert the units reported by your CEMS to the units of the standard.
1.2.4 These specification test results are intended to be valid for the life of the system. As a result, the EtO measurement system must be tested and operated in a configuration consistent with the configuration that will be used for ongoing continuous emissions monitoring.
1.2.5 Substantive changes to the system configuration require retesting according to this PS. Examples of such conditions include but are not limited to: major changes in dilution ratio (for dilution-based systems); changes in sample conditioning and transport, if used, such as filtering device design or materials; changes in probe design or configuration and changes in materials of construction. Changes consistent with instrument manufacturer upgrade that fall under manufacturer's certification do not require additional field verification. Manufacturer's upgrades (e.g., changes to the quantification algorithm) require recertification by the manufacturer for those requirements allowed by this PS, including interference, and level of detection (LOD).
1.2.6 This specification is not designed to evaluate the ongoing CEMS performance, nor does it identify specific calibration techniques and auxiliary procedures to assess CEMS performance over an extended period of time. The requirements in Procedure 7 to Appendix F of this part are designed to provide a way to assess CEMS and CEMS components (if applicable) performance over an extended period of time. The source owner or operator is responsible to calibrate, maintain, and operate the CEMS properly.
2.0 Summary of Performance Specification
2.1 This specification covers the procedures that each EtO CEMS must meet during the performance evaluation test. Installation and measurement location specifications, data reduction procedures, and performance criteria are included.
2.2 The technology used to measure EtO must provide a distinct response and address any appropriate interference correction(s). It must accurately measure EtO in a representative sample of stack effluent.
2.3 The relative accuracy (RA) must be established against a reference method (RM) (i.e., Method 320, or other alternative approved as a RM by the Administrator) on a case-by-case basis if not otherwise allowed or denied in an applicable subpart of the regulations.
2.4 A standard addition (SA) procedure using a reference standard is included in appendix A to this performance specification for use in verifying LOD. For extractive CEMS, where the SA is done by dynamic spiking (DS), the appendix A procedure is allowed as an option for assessing calibration drift and is also referenced by Procedure 7 of appendix F to this part for ongoing quality control tests.
3.0 Definitions
3.1 Calibration drift (CD) means the absolute value of the difference between the CEMS output response and an upscale reference gas or a zero-level gas, expressed as a percentage of the span value, when the CEMS is challenged after a stated period of operation during which no unscheduled adjustments, maintenance or repairs took place. For other parameters that are selectively measured by the CEMS (e.g., temperature, velocity, pressure, flow rate) to measure in the units of the applicable standard, use two analogous values (e.g., Low: 0-20% of full scale, High: 50-100% of full scale). 3.2 Calibration Span means the calibrated portion of the measurement range as specified in the applicable regulation or another requirement. If the span is not specified in the applicable regulation or other requirement, then it must be a value approximately equivalent to three times the applicable emission standard. When the emission standard is expressed as mass emissions, use the average flow rate in the duct to calculate the concentration equivalent of the emission standard.
3.3 Centroidal area means a central area that is geometrically similar to the stack or duct cross section and is no greater than 10 percent of the stack or duct cross-sectional area.
3.4 Continuous Emission Monitoring System (CEMS) means the total equipment required to measure the pollutant concentration or emission rate continuously. The system generally consists of the following three major subsystems:
3.4.1 Sample interface means that portion of the CEMS used for one or more of the following: Sample acquisition, sample transport, sample conditioning, and protection of the monitor from the effects of the stack effluent.
3.4.2 EtO analyzer means that portion of the EtO CEMS that measures the total vapor phase EtO concentration and generates a proportional output.
3.4.3 Data recorder means that portion of the CEMS that provides a permanent electronic record of the analyzer output. The data recorder may record other pertinent data such as effluent flow rates, various instrument temperatures or abnormal CEMS operation. The data recorder may also include automatic data reduction capabilities and CEMS control capabilities.
3.5 Diluent gas means a major gaseous constituent in a gaseous pollutant mixture. For combustion sources, either carbon dioxide (CO2) or oxygen (O2) or a combination of these two gases are the major gaseous diluents of interest.
3.6 Dynamic spiking (DS) means the procedure where a known concentration of EtO gas is injected into the probe sample gas stream for extractive CEMS at a known flow rate to assess the performance of the measurement system in the presence of potential interference from the flue gas sample matrix.
3.7 Flow Rate Sensor means that portion of the CEMS that senses the volumetric flow rate and generates an output proportional to that flow rate. The flow rate sensor shall have provisions to check the CD for each flow rate parameter that it measures individually (e.g., velocity, pressure).
3.8 Independent measurement(s) means the series of CEMS data values taken during sample gas analysis separated by two times the procedure specific response time (RT) of the CEMS.
3.9 Interference means a compound or material in the sample matrix other than EtO whose characteristics may bias the CEMS measurement (positively or negatively). The interference may not prevent the sample measurement but could increase the analytical uncertainty in the measured EtO concentration through reaction with EtO or by changing the electronic signal generated during EtO measurement.
3.10 Interference test means the test to detect CEMS responses to interferences that are not adequately accounted for in the calibration procedure and may cause measurement bias.
3.11 Level of detection (LOD) means the lowest level of pollutant that the CEMS can detect in the presence of the source gas matrix interferents with 99 percent confidence.
3.12 Measurement error (ME) is the mean difference between the concentration measured by the CEMS and the known concentration of a reference gas standard, divided by the span, when the entire CEMS, including the sampling interface, is challenged.
3.13 Reference gas standard means the gas mixture containing EtO at a known concentration and produced and certified in accordance with “EPA Traceability Protocol for Assay and Certification of Gaseous Calibration Standards,” September 1997, as amended August 25, 1999, EPA-600/R-97/121 or more recent updates. The tests for analyzer measurement error, calibration drift, and system bias require the use of calibration gas prepared according to this protocol. If a zero gas is used for the low-level gas, it must meet the requirements under the definition for “zero air” in 40 CFR 72.2. Alternatively, if the “protocol” gas is not commercially available, you must use a reference gas that has been prepared according to the procedures in appendix B of this PS.
3.14 Relative accuracy (RA) means the absolute mean difference between the gas concentration, or the emission rate determined by the CEMS, and the value determined by the RM, plus the confidence coefficient of a series of nine test runs, divided by the average of the RM or the applicable emission standard.
3.15 Response time (RT) means the time it takes for the measurement system, while operating normally at its target sample flow rate, dilution ratio, or data collection rate to respond to a known step change in gas concentration, either from a low- or zero-level to a high-level gas concentration or from a high-level to a low or zero-level gas concentration, and to read 95 percent of the change to the stable instrument response. There may be several RTs for an instrument related to different functions or procedures (e.g., DS, LOD, and ME).
3.16 Span value means an EtO concentration approximately equal to two times the concentration equivalent to the emission standard unless otherwise specified in the applicable regulation, permit or another requirement. Unless otherwise specified, the span may be rounded up to the nearest multiple of 5.
3.17 Stable value means the measure of two or more values that are statistically the same and the absence of measurement system drift.
3.18 Standard addition means the addition of known amounts of EtO gas (either statically or dynamically) measured sample gas stream.
3.19 Zero gas means a gas with an EtO concentration that is below the LOD of the measurement system.
4.0 Interferences
Sample gas interferences will vary depending on the instrument or technology used to make the measurement. Interferences must be evaluated through the interference test in this PS. Several compounds including carbon dioxide (CO2), carbon monoxide (CO), methane (CH4), and water (H2O) are potential optical interferences with certain types of EtO monitoring technology.
Note: Interferences may be mitigated though the use of dilution systems, however this approach could also affect the sensitivity of the measurement.
5.0 Safety
The procedures required under this PS may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This PS may not address all the safety issues associated with these procedures. It is the responsibility of the user to establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicable regulatory limitations prior to performing these procedures. The CEMS user's manual and as well as cautions within and materials recommended by the RM should be consulted for specific precautions to be taken in regard to the relative accuracy testing.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
The equipment and supplies are the same as in section 6 of PS 18, except replace HCl for EtO where appropriate. The following definitions are added and/or revised:
6.1 Moisture Measurement System. If correction of the measured EtO emissions for moisture is required, you must install, operate, maintain, and quality assure a continuous moisture monitoring system for measuring and recording the moisture content of the flue gases. The following continuous moisture monitoring systems are acceptable: Any optical measurement system validated according to Method 301 or section 13.0 of Method 320 in appendix A to part 63 of this chapter; a continuous moisture sensor; an oxygen analyzer (or analyzers) capable of measuring O2 both on a wet basis and on a dry basis; or other continuous moisture measurement methods approved by the Administrator.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
7.1 Reference Gases means the gas mixture containing EtO at a known concentration and produced and certified in accordance with “EPA Traceability Protocol for Assay and Certification of Gaseous Standards, May 2012 (EPA 600/R-12/531) or more recent updates. The tests for analyzer measurement error, calibration drift, and system bias require the use of calibration gas prepared according to this protocol. If a zero gas is used for the low-level gas, it must meet the requirements under the definition for “zero air” in 40 CFR 72.2. Alternatively, if the “protocol” gas is not commercially available, you must use a reference gas that has been prepared according to the procedures in appendix B of this PS and meeting the requirements in section 12.2 of appendix B of this PS, if applicable.
7.2 Cylinder gas may be diluted for use in this specification, including measurement error testing. You must document the quantitative introduction of EtO standards into the system using Method 205, found in 40 CFR part 51, appendix M, or other procedure approved by the Administrator. The laboratory/field evaluations in Method 205 must be conducted at least quarterly and prior to any audit test (e.g., CGA, RAA) required in QA Procedure 7 (40 CFR part 60, appendix F). Calibration must be conducted on an annual basis or whenever significant changes are made to the dilution system. In addition to the requirements in Method 205, when in use, you must document gas flow rates through each of the channels; if the dilution system records these values electronically, this is considered the documentation. For the purpose of this PS, cylinder gas should not be diluted beyond a dilution ratio of 500:1 using Method 205.
8.0 CEMS Measurement Location Specifications and Pretest Preparation
8.1 Prior to the start of your initial PS tests, you must ensure that the CEMS is installed according to the manufacturer's specifications and the requirements in this section.
8.2 CEMS Installation. Install the CEMS at an accessible location where the pollutant concentration or emission rate measurements are directly representative of the EtO emissions. If the units of the emission standard are expressed as a mass (e.g., lb/hr), then the CEMS probe must also be located within 0.5 equivalent diameters of the flow sensor and the CEMS must be located (1) at least two equivalent diameters downstream from the nearest control device, the point of pollutant generation, or other point at which a change in the pollutant concentration or emission rate may occur and (2) at least a half equivalent diameter upstream from the effluent exhaust or control device. If the CEMS are to utilize time-sharing, the distance between each measurement point and the CEMS should be approximately the same. The CEMS need not be installed at the same location as the relative accuracy test location. If you fail the RA requirements in this specification due to the CEMS measurement location and a satisfactory correction technique cannot be established, the Administrator may require the CEMS to be relocated.
8.2.1 Single point sample gas extraction should be (1) no less than 1.0 m (3.3 ft.) from the stack or duct wall or (2) within the centroidal area of the stack or duct cross section.
8.2.2 CEMS and Data Recorder Scale Check. After CEMS installation, record and document the measurement range of the EtO CEMS. The CEMS operating range and the range of the data recording device must encompass all potential and expected EtO concentrations, including the concentration equivalent to the applicable emission limit and the span value.
9.0 Quality Control—Reserved
10.0 Calibration and Standardization—Reserved
11.0 Performance Specification Test Procedure
After completing the CEMS installation, setup, and calibration, you must complete the PS test procedures in this section. You must perform the following procedures and meet the performance requirements for the initial demonstration of your CEMS:
a. Interference Test;
b. Level of Detection Determination;
c. Response Time Test;
d. Measurement Error Test;
e. Calibration Drift Test; and
f. Relative Accuracy Test.
g. If CEMS is to be time-shared, determine the response time to each measurement point, the sampling time at each measurement point, and the cycle time at each measurement point. The sampling time at each measurement point shall be at least 3 times as long as the system response time (RT), and the maximum number of measurement points shall not exceed the quotient, rounded down to the next whole number, of 15 minutes divided by the longest cycle time of the measurement point.
11.1 Interference Test
11.1.1 Prior to its initial use in the field, you must demonstrate that your monitoring system meets the performance requirements of the interference test in section 13.5 of this PS to verify that the candidate system measures EtO accurately in the presence of common interferences in emission matrices from commercial sterilizers. In the event this performance specification is applied in other emission sources, the interference test must evaluate any other predominant gases is the emission matrices of those sources.
11.1.2 Your interference test must be conducted in a controlled environment. The equipment you test for interference must include the combination of the analyzer, related analysis software, and any sample conditioning equipment (e.g., dilution module, moisture removal equipment or other interferent scrubber) used to control interferents.
11.1.3 If you own multiple measurement systems with components of the same make and model numbers, you need only perform this interference test on one analyzer and associated interference conditioning equipment combination. You may also rely on an interference test conducted by the manufacturer or a continuous measurement system integrator on a system having components of the same make(s) and model(s) of the system that you use.
11.1.4 Perform the interference check using an EtO reference gas concentration of approximately ten times the LOD or at 50 parts per billion, whichever is greater.
11.1.5 Introduce the interference test gases listed in table 1 in section 17.0 of this PS to the analyzer/conditioning system separately or in any combination. The interference test gases need not be of reference gas quality.
11.1.6 The interference test must be performed by combining an EtO reference gas with each interference test gas (or gas mixture). You must measure the baseline EtO response, followed by the response after adding the interference test gas(es) while maintaining a constant EtO concentration. You must perform each interference gas injection and evaluation in triplicate.
Note: The baseline EtO gas may include interference gases at concentrations typical of ambient air (e.g., 21 percent O2, 400 parts per million (ppm) CO2, 2 percent H2O), but these concentrations must be brought to the concentrations listed in table 1 of this PS when their interference effects are being evaluated.
11.1.7 You should document the gas volume/rate, temperature, and pressure used to conduct the interference test. A gas blending system or manifold may be used.
11.1.8 Ensure the duration of each interference test is sufficient to condition the EtO measurement system surfaces before a stable measurement is obtained.
11.1.9 Measure the EtO response of the analyzer/sample conditioning system combination to the test gases in ppbv. Record the responses and determine the overall interference response using table 2 in section 17.0 of this PS.
11.1.10 For each interference gas (or mixture), calculate the mean difference (ΔMCavg) between the measurement system responses with and without the interference test gas(es) using equation 1 in section 12.2 of this PS. Summarize the results following the format contained in table 2 in section 17.
11.1.11 Calculate the percent interference (I) for the gas runs using equation 2 in section 12.2 of this PS.
11.1.12 The total interference response (i.e., the sum of the interference responses of all tested gaseous components) must not exceed the criteria set forth in section 13.5 of this PS.
11.2 Level of Detection Determination
11.2.1 You must determine the minimum amount of EtO that can be detected above the background in a representative gas matrix.
11.2.2 You must perform the LOD determination in a controlled environment such as a laboratory or manufacturer's facility.
11.2.3 You must add interference gases listed in table 1 of this PS to a constant concentration of EtO reference gas.
11.2.3.1 You may not use an effective reference EtO gas concentration greater than ten times the estimated instrument LOD.
11.2.3.2 Inject the EtO and interferents described in section 11.1.5 of this PS directly into the inlet to the analyzer, allow time for the value to stabilize and then collect measurement data for 15 minutes and average those results. Repeat this procedure to obtain a total of seven or more of these runs, purging the measurement system with ambient air between each run, to determine the LOD.
11.2.4 Calculate the standard deviation of the measured values and define the LOD as three times the standard deviation of these measurements.
11.2.5 You must verify the controlled environment LOD of section 11.2.2 of this PS for your CEMS during initial setup and field certification testing using the SA procedure in appendix A of this PS with the following exceptions:
11.2.5.1 You must make three independent SA measurements spiking the native source concentration by no more than five times the controlled environment LOD concentration determined in section 11.2.4.
11.2.5.2 You must perform the SA as a dynamic spike by passing the spiked source gas sample through all filters, scrubbers, conditioners, and other monitoring system components used during normal sampling, and as much of the sampling probe as practical.
11.2.5.3 The amount detected, or standard addition response (SAR), is based on the average difference of the native EtO concentration in the stack or duct relative to the native stack concentration plus the SA. You must be able to detect the effective spike addition (ESA) above the native EtO present in the stack gas matrix. The ESA is calculated using equation A7 in appendix A of this PS.
11.2.5.4 If the field verification of your system LOD does not demonstrate a SAR greater than or equal to your initial controlled environment LOD, you must increase the SA concentration incrementally and repeat the field verification procedure until the SAR is equal to or greater than LOD. The site-specific standard addition detection level (SADL) is equal to the standard addition needed to achieve the acceptable SAR, and the SADL replaces the controlled environment LOD. The SADL is calculated as the ESA using equation A7 in appendix A of this PS. As described in section 13.1 of this PS, the controlled environment LOD or the SADL that replaces a controlled environment LOD must be less than 20 percent of the applicable emission limit.
11.3 Response Time Determination. You must determine ME- and SA-RT.
11.3.1 For ME-RT, start the upscale RT determination by injecting zero gas into the measurement system as required by the procedures in section 11.4 of this PS. For the SA-RT start the upscale RT determination at native stack concentration of EtO. Allow the value to stabilize, which for the purpose of this PS is a change no change greater than 1.0 percent of span or 10 ppbv (whichever is greater) for 30 seconds.
11.3.2 When the CEMS output has stabilized, record the response in ppbv, record the time (hh:mm:ss), and immediately introduce an upscale (high level) or spike reference gas as required by the relevant (ME-RT or SA-RT) procedure. Record the time (hh:mm:ss) required for the measurement system to reach 95 percent of the change to the final stable value, the difference in these times is the upscale RT.
11.3.3 Reintroduce the zero gas for the ME-RT or stop the upscale gas flow for the SA-RT and immediately record the time (hh:mm:ss). Record the time (hh:mm:ss) required to reach within 95 percent of the previous stable response in 11.3.1 or 10 ppbv (whichever is greater); the difference in these times is the downscale RT.
Note: For CEMS that perform a series of operations (purge, blow back, sample integration, analyze, etc.), you must start adding reference or zero gas immediately after these procedures are complete.)
11.3.4 Repeat the entire procedure until you have three sets of data, then determine the mean upscale and mean downscale RTs for each relevant procedure (from each measurement point if the CEMS is time-sharing). Report the greater of the average upscale or average downscale RTs as the RT for the system.
11.4 Measurement Error (ME) Test
11.4.1 The measurement error test must be performed at the same time as the calibration drift test when the system is being placed in service. The measurement error test must be performed any time a substantive change (see section 1.2.5) has been made to the measurement system.
11.4.1.1 Introduce reference gases to the CEMS probe, prior to the sample conditioning and filtration system. You may use a gas dilution system meeting the requirement in section 7.2 of this PS.
11.4.1.2 Challenge the measurement system with a zero gas and at the three upscale EtO reference gas concentrations in the range shown in table 3 of this PS. You may introduce different reference gas concentrations in any order, but you must not introduce the same gas concentration twice in succession.
11.4.1.3 Introduce the calibration gas into the sampling probe with sufficient flow rate to replace the entire source gas sample and continue the gas flow until the response is stable, as evidenced when the difference between two consecutive measurements is within 1.0 percent of span or 5 ppbv (whichever is less). Record this value and inject the next calibration gas.
11.4.1.4 Make triplicate measurements for each reference gas for a total of twelve measurements.
11.4.1.5 At each reference gas concentration, determine the average of the three CEMS responses (MCl). Calculate the ME using equation 3A in section 12.3.
11.4.1.6 For non-dilution systems, you may adjust the system to maintain the correct flow rate at the analyzer during the test, but you may not make adjustments for any other purpose. For dilution systems, you must operate the measurement system at the appropriate dilution ratio during all system ME checks, and you may make only the adjustments necessary to maintain the proper ratio.
11.4.2 You may use table 5 in section 17.0 to record and report your ME test results.
11.4.3 If the ME specification in section 13.3 is not met for all four reference gas concentrations, take corrective action, and repeat the test until an acceptable 4-level ME test is achieved.
11.5 Seven-Day Calibration Drift (CD) Test
11.5.1 The CD Test Period. Prior to the start of the RA tests, you must perform a seven-day CD test. The purpose of the seven-day CD test is to verify the ability of the CEMS to maintain calibration for each of seven consecutive unit operating days as specified in section 11.5.5 of this PS.
11.5.2 The CD tests must be performed using the zero gas and high-level reference gas standards as defined in table 3 of this PS.
11.5.3 Conduct the CD test on each day during continuous operation of the CEMS and normal facility operations following the procedures in section 11.7 of this PS, except that the zero gas and high-level gas need only be introduced to the measurement system once each for the seven days.
11.5.4 If periodic automatic or manual adjustments are made to the CEMS zero and upscale response factor settings, conduct the CD test immediately before these adjustments.
Note: Automatic signal or mathematical processing of all measurement data to determine emission results may be performed throughout the entire CD process.
11.5.5 Determine the magnitude of the CD at approximately 24-hour intervals, for 7 consecutive unit operating days. The 7 consecutive unit operating days need not be 7 consecutive calendar days.
11.5.6 Record the CEMS response for single measurements of zero gas and high-level reference gas. You may use table 6 in section 17 of this PS to record and report the results of your 7-day CD test. Calculate the CD using equation 3B in section 12.3. Report the absolute value of the differences as a percentage of the span value.
11.5.7 The zero-level and high-level CD for each day must be less than 5.0 percent of the span value or an absolute difference of 10 ppbv, as specified in section 13.2 of this PS. You must meet this criterion for 7 consecutive operating days.
11.5.8 Dynamic Spiking Option for Seven-Day CD Test. You have the option to conduct a high-level dynamic spiking procedure for each of the 7 days in lieu of the high-level reference gas injection described in sections 11.5.2 and 11.5.3. If this option is selected, the daily zero CD check is still required.
11.5.8.1 To conduct each of the seven daily mid-level dynamic spikes, you must use the DS procedure described in appendix A of this PS using a single spike chosen to yield the range as indicated in table 3.
11.5.8.2 You must perform the dynamic spike procedure by passing the spiked source gas sample through all filters, scrubbers, conditioners, and other monitoring system components used during normal sampling, and as much of the sampling probe as practical.
11.5.8.3 Calculate the high-level CD as a percent of span using equation A6 of appendix A to this PS and calculate the zero-drift using equation 3B in section 12.3. Record and report the results as described in sections 11.5.6 and 11.5.7.
11.6 Relative Accuracy Test
11.6.1 Unless otherwise specified in an applicable regulation, use Method 320 as the RM for EtO measurement. Conduct the RM tests in such a way that they will yield results representative of the emissions from the source that can be compared to the CEMS data. You must collect gas samples that are at stack conditions (hot and wet), and you must traverse the stack or duct as required in section 11.6.3.
11.6.2 Conduct the diluent (if applicable), moisture (if needed), and pollutant measurements simultaneously. If the emission standard is expressed in a mass unit (i.e., lb/hr) you must also determine the flowrate simultaneously with each test using Method 2, 2A, 2B, 2C or 2D in appendix A-1 to this part, as applicable.
11.6.3 Reference Method Measurement Location and Traverse Point(s) Selection.
11.6.3.1 Measurement Location. Select, as appropriate, an accessible RM measurement location at least two equivalent diameters downstream from the nearest control device, point of pollutant generation, or other point at which a change in the pollutant concentration or emission rate may occur, and at least one-half equivalent diameter upstream from the effluent exhaust or a control device. When pollutant concentration changes are due solely to diluent leakage (e.g., air heater leakages) and pollutants and diluents are simultaneously measured at the same location, a half diameter may be used in lieu of two equivalent diameters. The equivalent duct diameter is calculated according to Method 1 in appendix A-1 to this part. The CEMS and RM sampling locations need not be the same.
11.6.3.2 Traverse Point Selection. Select traverse points that assure acquisition of representative RM samples over the stack or duct cross section according to one of the following options: (a) sample at twelve traverse points located according to section 11.3 of Method 1 in appendix A-1 to this part or (b) sample at the three traverse points at 16.7, 50.0, and 83.3 percent of the measurement line. Alternatively, you may conduct a stratification test following the procedures in sections 11.6.3.2.1 through 11.6.3.2.4 to justify sampling at a single point. Stratification testing must be conducted at the sampling location to be used for the RM measurements during the RA test and must be made during normal facility operating conditions. You must evaluate the stratification by measuring the gas on the same moisture basis as the EtO CEMS (wet or dry). Stratification testing must be repeated for each RA test program to justify single point.
11.6.3.2.1 Use a probe of appropriate length to measure the EtO concentration, as described in this section, using 12 traverse points located according to section 11.3 of Method 1 in appendix A-1 to this part for a circular stack or nine points at the centroids of similarly shaped, equal area divisions of the cross section of a rectangular stack.
11.6.3.2.2 Calculate the mean measured concentration for all sampling points (MNavg).
11.6.3.2.3 Calculate the percent stratification (St) of each traverse point using equation 5 in section 12.5.
11.6.3.2.4 The gas stream is considered to be unstratified and you may perform the RA testing at a single point that most closely matches the mean if the concentration at each traverse point differs from the mean measured concentration for all traverse points by no more than 5.0 percent of the mean concentration of EtO or 10 ppbv, whichever is less restrictive.
11.6.4 In order to correlate the CEMS and RM data properly, record the beginning and end of each RM run (including the time of day in hours, minutes, and seconds) using a clock synchronized with the CEMS clock used to create a permanent time record with the CEMS output.
11.6.5 You must conduct the RA test during representative process and control operating conditions or as specified in an applicable regulation, permit or subpart.
11.6.6 Conduct a minimum of nine RM test runs.
Note: More than nine RM test runs may be performed. If this option is chosen, up to three test run results may be excluded so long as the total number of test run results used to determine the CEMS RA is greater than or equal to nine. However, all data must be reported including the excluded test runs.
11.6.7 Analyze the results from the RM test runs using equations 9 through14 in section 12.6. Calculate the RA between the CEMS results and the RM results.
11.7 Record Keeping and Reporting
11.7.1 Record the results of the CD test, the RT test, the ME test, and the RA test. Also keep records of the RM and CEMS field data, calculations, and reference gas certifications necessary to confirm that the performance of the CEMS met the performance specifications.
11.7.2 For systems that use Method 205 to prepare EtO reference gas standards, record results of Method 205 performance test field evaluation, reference gas certifications, and gas dilution system calibration.
11.7.3 Record the LOD and field verified SADL for the CEMS in ppbv.
11.7.4 Record the results of the interference test.
11.7.5 Report the results of all certification tests to the appropriate regulatory agency (or agencies), in hardcopy and/or electronic format, as required by the applicable regulation or permit.
12.0 Calculations and Data Analysis
12.1 Nomenclature.
Ci = Zero or EtO reference gas concentration used for test i (ppbv);
CC = Confidence coefficient (ppbv);
CD = Calibration drift (percent);
davg = Mean difference between CEMS response and the reference gas (ppbv);
di = Difference of CEMS response and the RM value (ppbv or units of emission standard, as applicable);
I = Total interference from major matrix stack gases (percent);
ΔMCavg = Average of the 3 absolute values of the difference between the measured EtO calibration gas concentrations with and without interference from selected stack gases (ppbv);
MCi = Measured EtO (or zero) reference gas concentration i (ppbv);
MCi = Average of the measured EtO (or zero) reference gas concentration i (ppbv);
MCint = Measured EtO concentration of the EtO reference gas plus the individual or combined interference gases (ppbv);
ME = Measurement error for CEMS (percent);
MNavg = Average concentration at all sampling points (ppbv);
MNbi = Measured native concentration bracketing each calibration check measurement (ppbv);
MNi = Measured native concentration for test or run I (ppbv);
n = Number of measurements in an average value;
RA = Relative accuracy of CEMS compared to a RM (percent);
RMavg = Mean measured RM value (ppbv) or units of the emission standard);
RMi = RM concentration for test run i (ppbv or units of the emission standard);
S = Span value (ppmv);
Sd = Standard deviation of the differences (ppmv);
Sti = Stratification at traverse point i (percent);
SADL = Standard addition detection level (ppmv);
t0.975 = One-sided t-value at the 97.5th percentile obtained from table 4 in section 17.0 for n-1 measurements;
12.2 Calculate the difference between the measured EtO concentration with and without interferents for each interference gas (or mixture) for your CEMS as:
Calculate the total percent interference as:
12.3 Calculate the ME or CD at Concentration i as:
12.4 Calculate the average native concentration before and after each calibration check measurement as:
12.5 Calculate the Percent Stratification at Each Traverse Point as:
12.6 Calculate the RA Using RM and CEMS Data
12.6.1 Determine the CEMS final integrated average pollutant concentration or emission rate for each RM test period. Consider system RT, if important, and confirm that the results have been corrected to the same moisture, temperature, and diluent concentration basis, as applicable. If the emission standard is based on a mass emission (i.e., lbs/hr), confirm the results have been calculated correctly.
12.6.3 Make a direct comparison of the average RM results and CEMS average value for identical test periods.
12.6.4 For each test run, calculate the arithmetic difference of the RM and CEMS results using equation 6.
12.6.5 Calculate the standard deviation of the differences (Sd) of the CEMS measured results and RM results using equation 7.
12.6.6 Calculate the confidence coefficient (CC) for the RA test using equation 8.
12.6.7 Calculate the mean difference (davg) between the RM and CEMS values in the units of ppbv or of the emission standard using equation 9.
12.6.8 Calculate the average RM value using equation 10.
12.6.9 Calculate RA of the CEMS using equation 11.
13.0 Method Performance
13.1 Level of Detection. You may not use a CEMS whose LOD or SADL is greater than 20 percent of the applicable regulatory limit or other action level for the intended use of the data. If the regulatory limit is not based on a concentration, document the calculated concentration equivalent as required in section 11.7.
13.2 Calibration Drift. The zero- and high-level calibration drift for the CEMS must not exceed 5.0 percent of the span value or an absolute difference of 10.0 ppbv for 7 consecutive operating days.
13.3 Measurement Error. The ME must be less than or equal to 5.0 percent of the span or an absolute difference of 10.0 ppbv value at the low-, mid-, and high-level reference gas concentrations.
13.4 Relative Accuracy. Unless otherwise specified in an applicable regulation or permit, the RA of the CEMS, whether calculated in units of EtO concentration or in units of the emission standard, must be less than or equal to 20.0 percent of the RM when RMavg is used in the denominator of equation 11.
13.4.1 In cases where the RA is calculated on a concentration (ppmv) basis, if the average RM emission level for the test is less than 50 percent of the EtO concentration equivalent to the emission standard, you may substitute the EtO concentration equivalent to the standard in the denominator of equation 14 in place of RMavg.
13.4.2 Similarly, if the RA is calculated in units of the emission standard and the EtO emission level measured by the RMs is less than 50 percent of the emission standard, you may substitute the emission standard in the denominator of equation 14 in place of RMavg.
13.4.3 The alternative calculated RA in paragraph 13.4.1 or 13.4.2 must be less than or equal to 15.0 percent.
13.5 Interference Test.
13.5.1 The sum of the interference response(s) from equation 2 must not be greater than 2.5 percent of the calibration span or ±3.0 percent of the equivalent EtO concentration used for the interference test, whichever is less restrictive. The results are also acceptable if the sum of the interference response(s) does not exceed ten times the LOD or 30 ppbv.
14.0 Pollution Prevention—[Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management—[Reserved]
16.0 Bibliography
1. “Method 301—Field Validation of Pollutant Measurement Methods from Various Waste Media,” 40 CFR part 63, appendix A.
2. EPA Traceability Protocol for Assay and Certification of Gaseous Calibration Standards, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency office of Research and Development, EPA/600/R-12/531, May 2012.
17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
| Potential interferent gas 1 | Approximate concentration (balance N2) |
|---|---|
| CO2 | 1% ± 0.2% CO2. |
| CH4 | 20 ± 5 ppm. |
| H2 O | 5% ± 1% H2 O.1 |
| N2 | Balance.1 |
| 1 Any of these specific gases can be tested at a lower level if the manufacturer has provided reliableness for limiting or scrubbing that gas to a specified level in CEMS field installations. |
| Date of Test | |
| Analyzer type | |
| Model Number | |
| Serial Number | |
| Span | |
| Test Organization | |
| Test Personnel |
| Interference gas or combination | EtO concentration (ppbv) |
EtO concentration w/interference (ppbv) |
Absolute difference (ppbv) |
Average absolute difference (ppbv) |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Test | Units | EtO zero and reference gas concentrations in terms of percent of span a |
Section | |||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Zero | Low level | Mid-level | High level | |||
| Calibration Drift | % Of Span | <LOD | NA | b 80-100 | 11.5 | |
| Measurement Error | % Of Span | NA | 20-30 | 50-60 | 80-100 | 11.4 |
| a Reference gas concentration must be NIST traceable. (See section 7.1) | ||||||
| b High-level is required. For DS calibration drift option, choose a concentration that yields a value in this range at the analyzer. |
| n−1 a | t-value | n−1 a | t-value | n−1 a | t-value |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | 12.71 | 11 | 2.201 | 21 | 2.080 |
| 2 | 4.303 | 12 | 2.179 | 22 | 2.074 |
| 3 | 3.182 | 13 | 2.160 | 23 | 2.069 |
| 4 | 2.776 | 14 | 2.145 | 24 | 2.064 |
| 5 | 2.571 | 15 | 2.131 | 25 | 2.060 |
| 6 | 2.447 | 16 | 2.120 | 26 | 2.056 |
| 7 | 2.365 | 17 | 2.110 | 27 | 2.052 |
| 8 | 2.306 | 18 | 2.101 | 28 | 2.048 |
| 9 | 2.262 | 19 | 2.093 | 29 | 2.045 |
| 10 | 2.228 | 20 | 2.086 | 30 | 2.042 |
| a The value n is the number of independent pairs of measurements. Either discrete (independent) measurements in a single run or run averages can be used. |
| Source: | Date: | ||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| CEMS: | Location: | ||||
| Serial Number: | Span: | ||||
| Run number | Reference gas value (ppbv) |
CEMS response (ppbv) |
Difference— low (ppbv) |
Difference— low (ppbv) |
Difference— low (ppbv) |
| 1 | |||||
| 2 | |||||
| 3 | |||||
| 4 | |||||
| 5 | |||||
| 6 | |||||
| 7 | |||||
| 8 | |||||
| 9 | |||||
| Mean Difference—ppbv | |||||
| Measurement Error—% |
| Source/Location: | ||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| CEMS: | ||||||
| Instrument Serial Number: | ||||||
| Instrument Span: | ||||||
| Day | Date | Time | Reference gas value (ppbv) |
CEMS response (ppbv) |
Difference (ppbv) |
Percent of span |
| Zero Gas | ||||||
| 1 | 0 | |||||
| 2 | 0 | |||||
| 3 | 0 | |||||
| 4 | 0 | |||||
| 5 | 0 | |||||
| 6 | 0 | |||||
| 7 | 0 | |||||
| High-Level Gas | ||||||
| 1 | ||||||
| 2 | ||||||
| 3 | ||||||
| 4 | ||||||
| 5 | ||||||
| 6 | ||||||
| 7 |
PS-19 Appendix A Standard Addition Procedures
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 This appendix A (appendix PS-19A) to Performance Specification 19 (PS-19) describes the procedure and performance requirements for standard addition (SA) as a quality check for ethylene oxide (EtO) continuous emission monitoring systems (CEMS).
1.2 This procedure must be used, as a level of detection (LOD) verification of all field-installed CEMS. Additionally, it is allowed by Procedure 7 in appendix F to this part as an alternative to upscale calibration drift (CD) tests, cylinder gas audits and relative accuracy audits (RAAs), and may be used for quality assurance purposes under other applicable regulations or permits that require EtO monitoring.
2.0 Summary of the Appendix for Standard Addition
As used here, SA is a gas phase method of standard additions (either static or dynamic) used to verify the accuracy of CEMS measurements in the presence of the sample matrix. For extractive CEMS, it consists of spiking a known quantity of EtO dynamically into the measurement system as an addition to the native EtO and the native source gas matrix.
3.0 Definitions
(See PS-19 and Procedure 7 of appendix F to this part for the Definitions Used in this appendix.)
4.0 Interferences
Interferences are discussed in PS-19, section 4.0.
5.0 Safety
The procedures required under this appendix may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This procedure may not address all of the safety problems associated with these procedures. You as the facility or operator must establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicable regulatory limitations prior to performing these procedures. As the CEMS user, you should consult instrument operation manuals, material safety data sheets, compressed gas safety requirements, and other Occupational Safety and Health Administration regulations for specific precautions to be taken.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
An example of equipment and supplies is described in section 6 of PS-18.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
SA materials must meet the requirements defined for reference gases in section 7 of PS-19 to perform this procedure.
8.0 Standard Addition and Dynamic Spiking Procedure
The standard addition procedure consists of measuring the native source gas concentration, addition of reference gas, and measurement of the resulting SA elevated source gas concentration. EtO is spiked dynamically and thus, one must account for the dilution of sample gas from the addition of the EtO reference gas.
8.1 SA Concentration and Measurement Replicates.
8.1.1 You must inject EtO gas to create a measured concentration based on the requirements of the particular performance test (e.g., LOD verification, CD).
8.1.2 Each dynamic spike (DS) or standard addition (SA) replicate consists of a measurement of the source emissions concentration of EtO (native stack concentration) with and without the addition of EtO. With a single CEMS, you must alternate the measurement of the native and SA-elevated source gas so that each measurement of SA-elevated source gas is immediately preceded and followed by a measurement of native stack gas. Introduce the SA gases in such a manner that the entire CEMS is challenged. Alternatively, you may use an independent continuous EtO monitor to measure the native source concentration before and after each standard addition as described in section 8.1.4.
8.1.3 Unless specified otherwise by an applicable rule, your SA-elevated concentration may not exceed 100 percent of span when the SA and native EtO concentration are combined.
8.1.4 As an alternative to making background measurements pre- and post-SA, you may use an independent continuous EtO monitor as a temporary unit to measure native stack EtO concentration while simultaneously using the CEMS to measure the SA-elevated source concentration. If you use an independent continuous EtO monitor you must make one concurrent background or native EtO measurement using both the installed CEMS and the independent continuous EtO monitor, immediately before the SA procedure in section 8.2 or 8.3 begins, to confirm that the independent monitoring system measures the same background concentration as the CEMS being qualified with this PS.
8.2 Dynamic Spiking Procedure.
8.2.1 Your EtO spike addition must not alter the total volumetric sample system flow rate or basic dilution ratio of your CEMS (if applicable).
8.2.2 Your spike gas flow rate must not contribute more than 10 percent of the total volumetric flow rate through the CEMS.
8.2.3 You must determine a dilution factor (DF) or relative concentration of EtO for each dynamic spike. Calibrated, NIST-traceable flow meters accurate to within 2.0 percent or highly accurate tracer gas measurements are required to make the necessary DF determinations at the accuracy required for this PS. Calibrated, NIST-traceable flow meters (e.g., venturi, orifice) accurate to within 2.0 percent should be recertified against an NIST-traceable flow meter annually. Note: Since the spiking mass balance calculation is directly dependent on the accuracy of the DF determination, the accuracy of measurements required to determine the total volumetric gas flow rate, spike gas flow rate, or tracer gas standard addition concentration is critical to your ability to accurately perform the DS procedure and calculate the results.
8.2.4 You must monitor and record the total sampling system flow rate and sample dilution factor (DF) for the spiking and stack gas sampling systems to ensure they are known and do not change during the spiking procedure. Record all data on a data sheet similar to table A1 in section 13 of this appendix.
8.2.4.1 You may either measure the spike gas flow and the total flow with calibrated flow meters capable of NIST traceable accuracy to ±2.0 percent or calculate the flow using a stable tracer gas included in your spike gas standard.
8.2.4.2 If you use flow measurements to determine the spike dilution, then use equation A1 in section 11.2.1 of this appendix PS-19A to calculate the DF. Determination of the spike dilution requires measurement of EtO spike flow (Qspike) and total flow through the CEM sampling system (Qprobe).
8.2.4.3 If your CEMS is capable of measuring an independent stable tracer gas, you may use a spike gas that includes the tracer to determine the DF using equation A2 or A3 (sections 11.2.2 and 11.2.3 of this appendix PS-19A) depending on whether the tracer gas is also present in the native source emissions.
8.2.4.4 For extractive CEMS, you must correct the background measurements of EtO for the dilution caused by the addition of the spike gas standard. For spiking systems that alternate between addition of EtO and zero gas at a constant DF, the background measurements between spikes will not be equal to the native source concentration.
8.2.5 Begin by collecting unspiked sample measurements of EtO. You must use the average of two unspiked sample measurements as your pre-spike background.
Note: Measurements should agree within 5.0 percent or three times the level of detection to avoid biasing the spike results.
8.2.5.1 Introduce the EtO gas spike into the permanent CEMS probe, upstream of the particulate filter or sample conditioning system and as close to the sampling inlet as practical.
8.2.5.2 Maintain the EtO gas spike for at least twice the DS response time of your CEMS or until the consecutive measurements agree within 5.0 percent. Collect two independent measurements of the native plus spiked EtO concentration.
8.2.5.3 Stop the flow of spike gas for at least twice the DS response time of your CEMS or until the consecutive measurements agree within 5.0 percent. Collect two independent measurements of the native EtO concentration.
8.2.6 Repeat the collection of sample measurements in section 8.2.5 until you have data for each spike concentration including a final set of unspiked sample measurements according to section 8.2.5.3.
8.2.7 Verify that the CEMS responded as expected for each spike gas injection, and that the data quality is not impacted by large shifts in the native source concentration. Discard and repeat any spike injections as necessary to generate a complete set of the required replicate spike measurements.
8.2.8 Calculate the standard addition response (SAR) for extractive CEMS, using equation A4 in section 11.2, of this appendix PS-19A.
8.2.9 If the DS results do not meet the specifications for the appropriate performance test in PS-19 or Procedure 7 of appendix F of this part, you must take corrective action and repeat the DS procedure.
9.0 Quality Control—Reserved
10.0 Calibration and Standardization—Reserved
11.0 Calculations and Data Analysis
Calculate the SA response for each measurement and its associated native EtO measurement(s), using equations in this section. (Note: For cases where the emission standard is expressed in units of lb/hr or corrected to a specified O2 or CO2 concentration, an absolute accuracy specification based on a span at stack conditions may be calculated using the average concentration and applicable conversion factors. The appropriate procedures for use in cases where a percent removal standard is more restrictive than the emission standard is the same as in PS-2, sections 12 and 13, in this appendix.)
11.1 Nomenclature.
Cspike = Actual EtO reference gas concentration spiked (e.g., bottle or reference gas concentration) ppmv;
Ctracer spiked = Tracer gas concentration injected with spike gas (“reference concentration”) ppmv;
DF = Spiked gas dilution factor;
DSCD = Calibration drift determined using DS procedure (percent);
DSE = Dynamic spike error (ppmv);
ESA = Effective spike addition (ppmv);
MCSA = Measured SA-elevated source gas concentration (ppmv);
MCspiked = Measured EtO reference gas concentration i (ppmv);
MCnative = Average measured concentration of the native EtO (ppmv);
Mnative tracer = Measured tracer gas concentration present in native effluent gas (ppmv);
Mspiked tracer = Measured diluted tracer gas concentration in a spiked sample (ppmv);
Qspike = Flow rate of the dynamic spike gas (Lpm);
Qprobe = Average total stack sample flow through the system (Lpm);
S = Span (ppmv);
SAR = Standard addition response (ppmv)
11.2 Calculating Dynamic Spike Response and Error.
11.2.1 If you determine your spike DF using spike gas and stack sample flow measurements, calculate the DF using equation A1:
11.2.2 If you determine your spike DF using an independent stable tracer gas that is not present in the native source emissions, calculate the DF for DS using equation A2:
11.2.3 If you determine your spike dilution factor using an independent stable tracer that is present in the native source emissions, calculate the dilution factor for dynamic spiking using equation A3:
11.2.4 Calculate the SA response using equation A4:
11.2.5 Calculate the DS error using equation A5.
11.2.6 Calculating CD using DS. When using the DS option for determining mid-level CD, calculate the CD as a percent of span using equation A6:
11.2.7 The effective spike addition (ESA) is the expected increase in the measured concentration as a result of injecting a spike. Calculate ESA using equation A7:
12.0 Reserved
13.0 Tables and Figures
| Facility Name: | Date: | Time: |
| Unit(s) Tested: | Personnel: | |
| Analyzer Make and Mode | ||
| Serial Number | ||
| Calibration Span |
| Qprobe (lpm) |
Qspike (lpm) |
DF 1 | MCnative | Actual value (ppb) | DSE (ppbv) |
|||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Pre | Post | Avg. | Cspike 2 | MCspike 3 | ||||
| Average | ||||||||
| SD | ||||||||
| 1 DF must be less than or equal to 10%. | ||||||||
| 2 Cspike = Actual EtO concentration of the spike gas, ppbv. | ||||||||
| 3 MCspike = Measured EtO concentration of the spiked sample at the target level, ppbv. |
PS-19 Appendix B Preparation and Certification of Ethylene Oxide Gas Standards
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 This appendix (appendix PS-19B) to Performance Specification 19 (PS-19) describes the procedure and performance criteria for the preparation and certification of EtO Gas Manufacturer Primary Standards (GMPS) and Gas Manufacturer Alternative Certified Standards (GMACS). These procedures are not specific to ethylene oxide and could be transferable to the preparation of gas standards for other pollutants regulated under 40 CFR parts 59, 60, 61, 63, and 65.
2.0 Summary of the Appendix
EPA requires the use of EPA Protocol gas standards for emissions monitoring. These gases are established following the EPA Traceability Protocol for Assay and Certification of Gaseous Standards, May 2012 (EPA 600/R-12/531) otherwise referred in this appendix PS-19B as the EPA Traceability Protocol. The EPA Traceability Protocol requires the use of certified reference gas standards directly traceable to National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) or other recognized national metrology institute (NMI) reference gas standards. A NIST certified value is a value for which NIST has the highest confidence in that all known or suspected sources of bias and imprecision have been accounted for. Without NIST or other NMI reference gas standards, the necessary EPA Protocol gas standards cannot be prepared. An alternative approach is needed to establish a gas standard functionally equivalent to the EPA Protocol gas standard when NIST or NMI reference gas standard are not available. This appendix PS-19B is intended to provide procedures and performance criteria for the establishment of Gas Manufacturer Alternative Certified Standards (GMACS), the functional equivalent of EPA Protocol gas standards. GMACS and Gas Manufacturer Primary Standards (GMPS), the functional equivalent of the NIST or NMI reference gas standards. The GMPS are the reference gases used to establish the certified concentrations of the GMACs. The GMPS are established using a dual certification approach where the gravimetrically prepared reference value is confirmed using an independent measurement approach traceable to the International System of Units (SI) and references materials or devices.
2.1 This appendix PS-19B is intended to be performance-based and allow specialty gas manufacturers (SGM) flexibility in the preparation and certification of GMPS and GMACS.
2.2 This appendix PS-19B is not intended to be a replacement for the EPA Protocol gases established according to the EPA Traceability Protocol when calibration gases that meet EPA Traceability Protocol requirements are available. When NIST or other recognized NMI reference gas standards are manufactured and readily available, those gases must be used.
2.3 This appendix PS-19B is reliant on the procedures included the EPA Traceability Protocol for Assay and Certification of Gaseous Standards, May 2012 (EPA 600/R-12/531). Users of this appendix PS-19B for the preparation of GMPS and GMACS must be proficient with the preparation protocol cylinders using this standard.
2.4 Any alternatives to the procedures in this appendix PS-19B are subject to Administrator review under the alternative test method the authority to approve alternatives or changes to test methods specified in the General Provisions to 40 CFR parts 60, 61, and 63 (§§ 60.8(b)(2), 61.13(h)(1)(ii), and 63.7(e)(2)(ii)). Requests for alternative to the procedures must be submitted to the agency according to Guideline Document 22 (https://www.epa.gov/system/files/documents/2022-09/gd-022r5.pdf).
3.0 Definitions
3.1 Certification means a set of procedures and performance criteria used by a SGM to prepare and certify a GMPS and/or GMACS for commercial sale.
3.2 Certified Reference Material or CRM means a material that has been certified or verified by either NIST or other NMI (e.g., VSL, NPL) and may be used for traceability purposes.
3.3 Dual Method Certification means a process in which the gravimetric value is independently confirmed by a measured value.
3.4 EPA Protocol Gas means a calibration or reference gas required for emissions monitoring directly traceable to NIST or other accepted NMI reference gas standards, prepared following the EPA Traceability Protocol
3.5 EPA Traceable Protocol for Assay and Calibration Gas Standards or commonly referred to as the “EPA Traceability Protocol” means the document The protocol allows producers of these standards, users of gaseous standards, and other analytical laboratories to establish traceability of EPA Protocol Gases to gaseous reference standards produced by the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST).
3.6 Gas Calibration Cylinder means a refillable cylinder that meets the applicable DOT/TC specifications for high pressure cylinders. The cylinders shall be permanently stamped with a unique value.
3.7 Gas Manufacturer Alternative Certified Standards or GMACS means a gas that has been prepared according to this procedure and serves as a functional substitute for an EPA Protocol Gas where EPA Protocol gases are not available.
3.8 Gas Manufacturer Intermediate Standard means a gas reference standard made by a gas supplier and certified according to the U.S. EPA protocol rules for GMISs. For the purpose of this Appendix, GMISs may be assayed against a GMPS.
3.9 Gas Manufacturer Primary Standards or GMPS means a reference gas standard prepared and certified by the SGM that serves as a functional substitute for the reference gas standards established by, but not yet available from NIST or other accepted NMI and required by the EPA Traceability Protocol to produce EPA Protocol gases.
3.10 Gravimetry means the quantitative measurement of an analyte by weight.
3.11 NIST means the National Institute of Standards and Technology, located in Gaithersburg, Maryland.
3.12 NIST Traceable Reference Material or NTRM means is a reference material produced by a commercial supplier with a well-defined traceability linkage to NIST and named by NIST procedures, on a batch rather than individual basis. This linkage is established via criteria and protocols defined by NIST that are tailored to meet the needs of the metrological community to be served.
3.13 Primary Reference Materials or PRM means a mixture composition is verified against VSL's own primary standard gas mixtures to confirm the assigned value.
3.14 Protocol Gas means a calibration or reference gas required for emissions monitoring traceable to NIST or other accepted NMI, prepared following the EPA Traceability Protocol.
3.15 Research Gas Mixture or RGMs means a reference material produced by a commercial supplier certified by NIST on an individual basis, often using non routine procedures, are called Research Gas Mixtures (RGMs), and may be used for traceability purposes.
3.16 Specialty Gas Manufacturer or SGM means an organization that prepares and certified gas calibration gas mixtures.
3.17 International System of Units or SI means the standards for international measurement and are comprised of length (meter), time (second), amount of substance (mole), electric current (ampere), temperature (kelvin), luminous intensity (candela), and mass (kilogram).
3.18 Standard Reference Material or SRM means a material or substance issued by NIST that meets NIST-specific certification criteria and is issues with that with a certificate or certificate of analysis that reports the results of its characterizations and provides information regarding the appropriate use(s) of the material.
3.19 Uncertainty means the expression of the statistical dispersion of the values attributed to a measured quantity. For the purpose of this appendix, uncertainty is calculated using the root sum square of all uncertainty budget items associated with each procedure at k=2 (i.e., approximately 95 confidence).
3.20 VSL means Van Swinden National Lab, located in Delft, Netherlands.
4.0 Interferences—Reserved
5.0 Safety
The procedures required under this appendix may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This procedure may not address all of the safety problems associated with these procedures. You as the facility or operator must establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicable regulatory limitations prior to performing these procedures. You should consult instrument operation manuals, material safety data sheets, compressed gas safety requirements, and other Occupational Safety and Health Administration regulations for specific precautions to be taken.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
This procedure is not prescriptive on the type of equipment or the supplies necessary for the preparation of GMPS and GMACS gaseous cylinder standards, however SGM must use the appropriate equipment and supplies necessary to meet the uncertainty requirements in this appendix.
7.0 Reagents and Standards—Reserved
8.0 Procedures.
The exact procedures used will depend on the gas manufacturer and the physical characteristics of the compound being prepared as a gaseous calibration standard. Any procedure is deemed appropriate so long as the criteria in section 8.1 for GMPS and section 8.2 for GMACS are met.
8.1 Preparation and Certification of the GMPS.
The GMPS certified value is established using the dual certification approach. A candidate GMPS cylinder is prepared gravimetrically, and its established reference value is confirmed by an independent measurement traceable to SI units as well as other appropriate reference materials. The level of agreement between the gravimetric reference value and the SI-based independent measurements along with the average value and associated, combined, expanded uncertainties serve to establish the certified reference value. If high purity reference material is not readily available for a gravimetric preparation, a user may petition the Administrator for an alternative method for preparation of a GMPS.
The procedures for the gravimetric preparation, stability evaluation, and independent verification of GMPS must meet the criteria in this section following the procedures in 8.1(a) through (g).
(a) Raw Materials
(b) GMPS Cylinder Preparation/Creation
(c) GMPS Cylinder Independent Verification
(d) GMPS Cylinder Certification
(e) GMPS Cylinder Stability
(f) GMPS Cylinder Expiration Period
(g) GMPS Documentation
8.1.1 Raw Materials. Raw materials used in the production of GMPS must be of high quality (e.g., 99+% purity recommended). Additionally, because raw material purity is the largest component of uncertainty in gas gravimetry, SGMs must substantiate the purity of the raw material prior to use, either via (1) a validated certificate of analysis for the actual lot number purchased provided by the raw material vendor, or (2) a purity assay conducted by the SGM on the actual raw material to be used. The uncertainty of the raw material (Ur) assay must be included as one of the components of the total combined uncertainty for the mixture.
8.1.2 GMPS Gravimetric Cylinder Preparation/Creation. The GMPS standards shall be based on a gravimetric preparation. The gravimetric preparation shall yield an expected concentration for the target component, and with the required statistical controls in place to calculate the uncertainty of that concentration.
8.1.2.1 The scale used to generate the gravimetric reference standard must be independently calibrated over the range of target masses with ASTM E617-13 Class-1 weights on no less than a yearly basis. For such certifications, a high accuracy mass comparator (electronic or pendulum-type scale) is employed as the “scale.” The resolution of the scale should be sufficient to be able to calculate the overall uncertainty of any concentration derived from these steps.
8.1.2.1.1 The scale used for the gravimetric operation must be independently calibrated and traceable to NIST standards with a defined uncertainty (ut).
8.1.2.1.2 The scale calibration must be checked before the start of each new weighing operation (i.e., the day of) with a weight in the appropriate range that also meets ASTM E617-13 Class-1 requirements.
8.1.2.1.3 All material and equipment associated with the gravimetric analysis shall have or apply a procedure to estimate the uncertainty of the measurement, including but not limited to the balance(s) used (uca) standard weight (uw).
8.1.2.1.4 The assay purity and associated material uncertainty (ur) of the assay for each component raw material and the balance gas must be known. This purity deviation is factored into the uncertainty of the mass of each material blended into the mixture.
8.1.2.1.5 The procedures below are minimum requirements and do not speak to all of the details an SRM would do to ensure the preparation of a high-accuracy gravimetric candidate GMPS, (e.g., controls for external factors that would influence scale reading accuracy buoyancy effects, moisture/dust adsorption on the cylinder surface, and errors caused by the location of the cylinder on the scale). The SGM should develop and follow and internal standard operation procedures (SOP) for the preparation of the candidate GMPS.
8.1.2.1.6 Record the Target cylinder identification number, blend date, and balance gas on the appropriate form (see figure B-1). Additionally, record the intended component(s) to be used in the preparation for this candidate GMPS, identifying the standard type, material name (e.g., Ethylene Oxide), MW (g/mol), and purity (wt%).
8.1.2.1.7 Add the components to the candidate GMPS, recording the weight of each component added.
8.1.2.1.8 GMPS Gravimetric Uncertainty. Calculate and document the gravimetric concentration (GMPS-Cg) for each component of the candidate GMPS. You must also document the combined uncertainty, expressed as the root sum of the uncertainty budget items identified, for the candidate GMPS value (GMPS-Cgu). Gravimetric preparation uncertainty budget items include:
(a) The purity of the raw material and the balance gas;
(b) The measured accuracy of the (electronic) balance including consideration the uncertainty of the calibration weights, the calibration uncertainty, and its linearity;
(c) The repeatability of the balance readings including errors caused by the location of the cylinder on the balance;
(d) Balance Buoyancy effects;
(e) Effects of moisture adsorption and dust on the outer surface of the cylinder;
(f) Cylinder dilutions, if any, used to prepare target concentrations, including propagated uncertainties.
8.1.3 GMPS Independent Verification. The certification of the candidate GMPS is based on independent measurements verifying the reference concentration of the gravimetrically prepared GMPS candidate. The independent verification must be based on a measurement approach traceable to the SI and may include the use of intrinsic NIST or accepted NMI reference materials to establish said traceability. Candidate independent verification measurement approaches include classical chemistry, spectroscopic approaches, as well as other instrumental approaches as long as adequate and appropriate SI traceability can be incorporated. The approach must be performed using NIST (or equivalent) traceable calibrations materials and using procedures that would allow the user to determine the overall uncertainty of the measurement. In some instances, a component may not be suitable to analysis using a classical approach, in those instances alternative approaches may be used do long as they (1) yield a concentration for the target com, (2) have a calculated uncertainty, (3) have traceability to the SI, and (4) documented conformity to the general metrological principles for primary methods outlined above.
8.1.3.1 GMPS Independent Verification Measurement Uncertainty. The cumulative uncertainty of the GMPS independent verification measurement approach is integral to the ability to assess the overall quality of the independent verification measurement. You must also document the combined uncertainty, expressed as the root sum of the uncertainty budget items identified. Ensure that all known or suspected sources of bias and imprecision have been accounted for. The following elements are examples of sources of measurement error that must be included in the overall uncertainty calculation for the GMPS independent verification measurement:
(a) The uncertainty of the certified reference solution (the traceability source);
(b) Any propagated uncertainties through serial dilutions;
(c) The errors in volumetric sampling of the candidate GMPS mixture;
(d) The uncertainty of the instrument calibration curve (least squares fit and residual);
(e) The bias or error associated with any measurement interferences;
(f) The repeatability of replicate aliquot injections from the same sample;
(g) The repeatability of replicate samples of the mixture;
(h) Any external factors influencing sampling or instrument accuracy;
(i) The uncertainty of measured volumetric gas flows;
(j) The bias or uncertainty associated with quantitative gas flow delivery;
(k) The error associated with instrumental measurement analyzers;
(l) Replicate measurement instrument error and precision.
8.1.4 GMPS Certification. The candidate GMPS certified value is based on three factors:
(a) The relative agreement between the gravimetric reference value and the independent, measured value of the gravimetrically-prepared GMPS candidate;
(b) The combined, expanded uncertainty (k=2) of the gravimetric value and independently measured concentrations values;
(c) The average of the independently measured concentrations values.
8.1.4.1 GMPS Relative Agreement. Calculate the relative agreement according to equation B-1, expressed as Relative Percent Difference (RPD) between the gravimetric concentration (GMPS-Cg) the independently measured concentrations (GMPS-Ca). The results of these two analyses must agree within 4.0 percent (%).
8.1.4.2 GMPS Combined, Expanded Uncertainty. Determine the individual uncertainties for the gravimetric approach (GMPS-Cug) and the independent measurement verification approach (GMPS-Cua) according to equation B-2. Establish the GMPS combined, expanded uncertainty (GMPS-Cuc) as the root sum of the two individual uncertainties with a coverage factor k=2. The combined uncertainty must ≤5.0 percent (%). If these objectives are not met, the candidate GMPS is not acceptable, and must not be used.
8.1.4.3 GMPS Certified Concentration Value. If the GMPS meets the Relative Agreement criteria in section 8.1.5.3 and the combined, expanded uncertainty criteria in section 8.1.5.4, the GMPS is valid. The GMPS certified value (GMPS-CC) is based on the independently measurement concentration (GMPS-Ca). The certification date is the date of the last confirmatory measurement.
8.1.4.4 An SGMs may propose to Administrator an alternative acceptance values for section 8.1.5.1 or 8.1.5.2 for those components that are unable to meet the documented criteria. These proposals must include sufficient documentation that the objectives are unreasonable for a given component and concentrations.
8.1.5 GMPS Stability Testing. The SGM must test and document mixture stability of the GMPS to assure that the mixture stays within claimed accuracy bounds for the entire claimed expiration period. Alternatively, once a preparation process has been developed, the SGM can perform a stability study consisting not less than three cylinders prepared using the defined process and at the concentration(s) defined by the process. Once the stability study cylinders have demonstrated acceptable stability for the minimum expiration period (6-months), additional GMPS cylinders can be prepared under identical process conditions.
8.1.5.1 The SGM may select the sampling frequency based on the targeted expiration period, the gas consumed in the analysis and expected component behavior. Stability testing data must consist of at least:
(a) Five discrete samplings of the retained mixture for an expiration period of 6-months to 1-year;
(b) Ten discrete samplings for an expiration period of 1-3 years; and
(c) Twenty for any period greater than 3 years.
8.1.5.2 Stability testing must be conducted for each cylinder size/type and at a similar concentration as the candidate GMPS. Stability analyses must be performed using methods that assure consistent results can be achieved. If instrumental analysis using a gas standard is employed, use of a GMPS standard is highly recommended. In the absence of a certified GMPS, stability testing must be conducted using the same independent verification measurement procedures and methodology used in section 8.1.4, or using another known-to-be-stable gas standard containing the target component in a similar concentration range.
8.1.5.3 Stability testing data must not show any upward or downward trends that would cause the mixture to become out of specification prior to the claimed expiration period.
8.1.6 GMPS Expiration Period. The expiration period for the GMPS mixture based must be based on the empirical stability test data. The expiration periods for reactive gases must not exceed the length of the stability test, however for non-reactive gases you may forecast an expiration period not to exceed two times the actual stability testing duration. The maximum expiration period for a GMPS is time span from the date of preparation to the date of the last/most recent stability study may not be less than 6-months. Provided that acceptable stability is observed, the maximum expiration period may be extended by retaining the stability study cylinders and performing additional analyses.
8.1.7 GMPS Documentation. You must document the preparation of the GMPS through the appropriate record keeping and document the certification of a GMPS. The information is section 8.1.8.1 and 8.1.8.2 must be maintained as a record by the SGM for the purpose of maintaining traceability and to verify the preparation. The information in section 8.1.8.3 must be documented and maintained by the SGM. This documentation and the records of the preparation and certification must be made available upon request by the appropriate delegated authority.
8.1.7.1 The following information for the gravimetric preparation information of the GMPS must be documented and maintained as a record. This record should include but is not limited to the: blend date, gravimetric concentration, gravimetric concentration uncertainties as a percentage and absolute, reference material information and purity, scale ID, scale accuracy, and calculated gravimetric uncertainties associated with material, balance, and environmental effects. You must include sufficient information that will allow a 3rd party to recalculate the prepared concentration and expanded uncertainties.
8.1.7.2 The following information for the analytical verification of the GMPS must be recorded and maintained as a record. This record should include the confirming methodology and any associated SOPs, confirming concentration(s), instrumentation used, calibration standards used and associated COAs, calibration curve data, replicate analysis calculated, and expanded uncertainties.
8.1.7.3 The following information must be documented for inclusion on the COA for the GMACS.
(a) Manufacturer's company name and address of the producing location
(b) Manufacturer's part number for the GMPS, lot number, and/or production record.
(c) Cylinder number, cylinder type, cylinder preparation ID, moisture dew point and cylinder pressure.
(d) Certification date and claimed expiration date.
(e) GMPS component(s) name, final certified concentration(s) (GMPS-Cc), and balance gas.
(f) Gravimetric value and uncertainty
(g)Verification value and uncertainty
(h) GMPS final certified value and uncertainty absolute as a percentage (GMPS-Cu)
8.2 Preparation and Certification of the GMACS. The preparation and certification of the candidate GMACS is also based on the independent verification of the gravimetrically prepared reference value. However, the independent verification utilizes the GMPS to perform the independent verification. This is accomplished by following the procedures in section 2.1 and 2.2 of the EPA Traceability Protocol, using the GMPS as the certified reference material. The measured value of the independent verification following the EPA Traceability Protocol procedures also establishes the certified reference value, providing the relative agreement performance criteria are met.
8.2.1 GMACS Gravimetric Cylinder Preparation/Creation. The gravimetric preparation of the GMACS is identical to the procedures used to gravimetrically prepare the GMPS. You must maintain the same information required for the gravimetric preparation of GMPS, as found in section 8.1.8.1 for GMACS, as a record.
8.2.2 GMACS Independent Verification and Certification. The candidate GMACS independent verification of the gravimetrically prepared reference value is contingent on the SGM following the procedures in sections 2.1 and 2.2 of the EPA Traceability Protocol. In addition, the EtO candidate GMACS certified reference value and associated expanded uncertainty is based on the EPA Traceability Protocol measured value. This is contingent upon the gravimetric and measured values meeting the relative agreement performance criteria established in section 8.1.5.3 and the uncertainty criteria established in section 8.1.5.4. Gas Manufacturers Intermediate Standards (GMIS) can be prepared by direct comparison to a GMPS that has been prepared and certified according to section 2.1.3.1 and 2.2 of the EPA Traceability Protocol. The tagged value of the GMACS must be based on the EPA Traceability Protocol measured value as long as the performance criteria in sections 12.1 and 12.2 are met.
8.2.3 GMACS Stability Testing. The SGM must test and document the stability of the GMACS to assure that the mixture stays within claimed certified bounds for the entire claimed expiration period. Use the procedures in section 8.1.6 to assess stability. The GMACS must also meet the requirements in section 2.1.5.2 of the EPA Traceability Protocol.
8.2.4 GMACS Expiration Date. The certification period of the GMACS shall be based on the documented stability tests of the GMPS in section 8.1.6. The expiration date shall be based on the certification date, plus the certification period plus one day. There is not a maximum period of expiration; however, expiration periods must not be less than six months.
8.2.5 GMACS Documentation You must document and maintain the same information required for the analytical verification of the GMPS, as found in section 8.1.8 for GMACS, as a record. The records of the preparation and certification must be made available upon request by the appropriate delegated authority.
8.2.6 GMACS Certificate of Analysis (COA). You must provide comprehensive documentation of the GMPS and GMACS development process in the form of a GMACS Certificate of Analysis (COA) that accompanies each commercially distributed GMACS. As a minimum, the COA must contain the following information:
(a) Identification of the gas as a Gas Manufacturer Alternative Certified Standard;
(b) The cylinder number;
(c) The certified concentration of the GMACS;
(d) The combined expanded uncertainty (k=2) of the GMACS reference value (both absolute and relative);
(e) The expiration date;
(f) The reference materials or standards used (i.e., GMPS and GMIS);
(g) The same information (cylinder number, certified concentration, uncertainties, expiration dates, etc. for these cylinders);
(h) The gravimetric and independent measured verification reference concentration values and associated uncertainties for each GMPS used;
(i) Associated measurement principles and uncertainties;
(j) Any additional information stipulated by the EPA Traceability Protocol;
(k) Any comments/special instructions.
The SGM GMACS provider is encouraged to include additional relevant information to the COA, as appropriate. An example GMACS COA can be found in section 14 of this appendix.
9.0 Quality Control—Reserved
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
There is a myriad of instrumental and mechanical techniques used in the performance of this Appendix B. When reference methods are used, you must follow the calibration requirements of those methods and as defined in this appendix. For all other approaches, it is recommended to develop internal SOPs and develop.
11.0 Calculations and Data Analysis—Reserved
12.0 Method Performance
12.1 GMPS/GMACS Relative Agreement. As part of the certification/verification procedures for the candidate GMPS and GMACS, the relative agreement between the gravimetrically prepared reference value and the independently measured verification value must agree within 4.0 percent (%).
12.2 GMACS/GMPS Uncertainty. Final certification of the GMPS and GMACS reference concentrations must meet the combined expanded uncertainty (k=2) of ≤5.0 percent (%).
13.0 Pollution Prevention—Reserved
14.0 Waste Management—Reserved
15.0 Bibliography
1. EPA Traceability Protocol for Assay and Certification of Gaseous Calibration Standards, Office of Research and Development, National Risk Management Research Laboratory, May 2012, EPA 600/R-12/531. https://www.epa.gov/air-research/epa-traceability-protocol-assay-and-certification-gaseous-calibration-standards.
2. EPA Alternative Method 114, Approval of Alternative Method for preparation of HCl Gas Standards for PS-18 and Procedure 6, February 22, 2016, https://www.epa.gov/sites/default/files/2020-08/documents/alt114.pdf.
3. Evaluation of Measurement Data—Guide to the Expression of Uncertainty in Measurement, JCGM 100:2008, https://www.bipm.org/documents/20126/2071204/JCGM_100_2008_E.pdf/cb0ef43f-baa5-11cf-3f85-4dcd86f77bd6.
16.0 Tables and Figures
Figure B-1 Example Gravimetric Preparation Sheet for GMPS and GMACS
Figure B-2 Apparatus for the assay of the GMACs
Figure B-3 Examples COA
[48 FR 13327, Mar. 30, 1983 and 48 FR 23611, May 25, 1983]
Appendix C to Part 60—Determination of Emission Rate Change
1. Introduction
1.1 The following method shall be used to determine whether a physical or operational change to an existing facility resulted in an increase in the emission rate to the atmosphere. The method used is the Student's t test, commonly used to make inferences from small samples.
2. Data
2.1 Each emission test shall consist of n runs (usually three) which produce n emission rates. Thus two sets of emission rates are generated, one before and one after the change, the two sets being of equal size.
2.2 When using manual emission tests, except as provided in § 60.8(b) of this part, the reference methods of appendix A to this part shall be used in accordance with the procedures specified in the applicable subpart both before and after the change to obtain the data.
2.3 When using continuous monitors, the facility shall be operated as if a manual emission test were being performed. Valid data using the averaging time which would be required if a manual emission test were being conducted shall be used.
3. Procedure
3.1 Subscripts a and b denote prechange and postchange respectively.
3.2 Calculate the arithmetic mean emission rate, E, for each set of data using Equation 1.
Where:
Ei = Emission rate for the i th run.
n = number of runs.
3.3 Calculate the sample variance, S2, for each set of data using Equation 2.
3.4 Calculate the pooled estimate, Sp, using Equation 3.
3.5 Calculate the test statistic, t, using Equation 4.
4. Results
4.1 If Eb>,Ea and t>t′, where t′ is the critical value of t obtained from Table 1, then with 95% confidence the difference between Eb and Ea is significant, and an increase in emission rate to the atmosphere has occurred.
| Degrees of freedom (n a=n b−2) | t′ (95 percent confidence level) |
|---|---|
| 2 | 2.920 |
| 3 | 2.353 |
| 4 | 2.132 |
| 5 | 2.015 |
| 6 | 1.943 |
| 7 | 1.895 |
| 8 | 1.860 |
For greater than 8 degrees of freedom, see any standard statistical handbook or text.
5.1 Assume the two performance tests produced the following set of data:
| Test a | Test b |
|---|---|
| Run 1. 100 | 115 |
| Run 2. 95 | 120 |
| Run 3. 110 | 125 |
5.2 Using Equation 1—
Ea = 100 + 95 + 110/3 = 102
Eb = 115 + 120 + 125/3 = 120
5.3 Using Equation 2—
Sa2 = (100−102) 2 + (95−102) 2 + (110−102) 2/3−1 = 58.5
Sb2 = (115−120) 2 + (120−120) 2 + (125−120) 2/3−1 = 25
5.4 Using Equation 3—
Sp = [(3 − 1)(58.5) + (3 + 1)(25) / 3 + 3 − 2] 1/2 = 6.46
5.5 Using Equation 4—
5.6 Since (n 1 + n 2 − 2) = 4, t′ = 2.132 (from Table 1). Thus since t>t′ the difference in the values of Ea and Eb is significant, and there has been an increase in emission rate to the atmosphere.
6. Continuous Monitoring Data
6.1 Hourly averages from continuous monitoring devices, where available, should be used as data points and the above procedure followed.
[40 FR 58420, Dec. 16, 1975]
Appendix D to Part 60—Required Emission Inventory Information
(a) Completed NEDS point source form(s) for the entire plant containing the designated facility, including information on the applicable criteria pollutants. If data concerning the plant are already in NEDS, only that information must be submitted which is necessary to update the existing NEDS record for that plant. Plant and point identification codes for NEDS records shall correspond to those previously assigned in NEDS; for plants not in NEDS, these codes shall be obtained from the appropriate Regional Office.
(b) Accompanying the basic NEDS information shall be the following information on each designated facility:
(1) The state and county identification codes, as well as the complete plant and point identification codes of the designated facility in NEDS. (The codes are needed to match these data with the NEDS data.)
(2) A description of the designated facility including, where appropriate:
(i) Process name.
(ii) Description and quantity of each product (maximum per hour and average per year).
(iii) Description and quantity of raw materials handled for each product (maximum per hour and average per year).
(iv) Types of fuels burned, quantities and characteristics (maximum and average quantities per hour, average per year).
(v) Description and quantity of solid wastes generated (per year) and method of disposal.
(3) A description of the air pollution control equipment in use or proposed to control the designated pollutant, including:
(i) Verbal description of equipment.
(ii) Optimum control efficiency, in percent. This shall be a combined efficiency when more than one device operates in series. The method of control efficiency determination shall be indicated (e.g., design efficiency, measured efficiency, estimated efficiency).
(iii) Annual average control efficiency, in percent, taking into account control equipment down time. This shall be a combined efficiency when more than one device operates in series.
(4) An estimate of the designated pollutant emissions from the designated facility (maximum per hour and average per year). The method of emission determination shall also be specified (e.g., stack test, material balance, emission factor).
[40 FR 53349, Nov. 17, 1975]
Appendix E to Part 60 [Reserved]
Appendix F to Part 60—Quality Assurance Procedures
Procedure 1. Quality Assurance Requirements for Gas Continuous Emission Monitoring Systems Used for Compliance Determination
1. Applicability and Principle
1.1 Applicability. Procedure 1 is used to evaluate the effectiveness of quality control (QC) and quality assurance (QA) procedures and the quality of data produced by any continuous emission monitoring system (CEMS) that is used for determining compliance with the emission standards on a continuous basis as specified in the applicable regulation. The CEMS may include pollutant (e.g., S02 and N0x) and diluent (e.g., 02 or C02) monitors.
This procedure specifies the minimum QA requirements necessary for the control and assessment of the quality of CEMS data submitted to the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). Source owners and operators responsible for one or more CEMS's used for compliance monitoring must meet these minimum requirements and are encouraged to develop and implement a more extensive QA program or to continue such programs where they already exist.
Data collected as a result of QA and QC measures required in this procedure are to be submitted to the Agency. These data are to be used by both the Agency and the CEMS operator in assessing the effectiveness of the CEMS QC and QA procedures in the maintenance of acceptable CEMS operation and valid emission data.
Appendix F, Procedure 1 is applicable December 4, 1987. The first CEMS accuracy assessment shall be a relative accuracy test audit (RATA) (see section 5) and shall be completed by March 4, 1988 or the date of the initial performance test required by the applicable regulation, whichever is later.
1.2 Principle. The QA procedures consist of two distinct and equally important functions. One function is the assessment of the quality of the CEMS data by estimating accuracy. The other function is the control and improvement of the quality of the CEMS data by implementing QC policies and corrective actions. These two functions form a control loop: When the assessment function indicates that the data quality is inadequate, the control effort must be increased until the data quality is acceptable. In order to provide uniformity in the assessment and reporting of data quality, this procedure explicitly specifies the assessment methods for response drift and accuracy. The methods are based on procedures included in the applicable performance specifications (PS's) in appendix B of 40 CFR part 60. Procedure 1 also requires the analysis of the EPA audit samples concurrent with certain reference method (RM) analyses as specified in the applicable RM's.
Because the control and corrective action function encompasses a variety of policies, specifications, standards, and corrective measures, this procedure treats QC requirements in general terms to allow each source owner or operator to develop a QC system that is most effective and efficient for the circumstances.
2. Definitions
2.1 Continuous Emission Monitoring System. The total equipment required for the determination of a gas concentration or emission rate.
2.2 Diluent Gas. A major gaseous constituent in a gaseous pollutant mixture. For combustion sources, CO2 and O2 are the major gaseous constituents of interest.
2.3 Span Value. The upper limit of a gas concentration measurement range that is specified for affected source categories in the applicable subpart of the regulation.
2.4 Zero, Low-Level, and High-Level Values. The CEMS response values related to the source specific span value. Determination of zero, low-level, and high-level values is defined in the appropriate PS in appendix B of this part.
2.5 Calibration Drift (CD). The difference in the CEMS output reading from a reference value after a period of operation during which no unscheduled maintenance, repair or adjustment took place. The reference value may be supplied by a cylinder gas, gas cell, or optical filter and need not be certified.
2.6 Relative Accuracy (RA). The absolute mean difference between the gas concentration or emission rate determined by the CEMS and the value determined by the RM's plus the 2.5 percent error confidence coefficient of a series of tests divided by the mean of the RM tests or the applicable emission limit.
3. QC Requirements
Each source owner or operator must develop and implement a QC program. As a minimum, each QC program must include written procedures which should describe in detail, complete, step-by-step procedures and operations for each of the following activities:
1. Calibration of CEMS.
2. CD determination and adjustment of CEMS.
3. Preventive maintenance of CEMS (including spare parts inventory).
4. Data recording, calculations, and reporting.
5. Accuracy audit procedures including sampling and analysis methods.
6. Program of corrective action for malfunctioning CEMS.
As described in section 5.2, whenever excessive inaccuracies occur for two consecutive quarters, the source owner or operator must revise the current written procedures or modify or replace the CEMS to correct the deficiency causing the excessive inaccuracies.
These written procedures must be kept on record and available for inspection by the enforcement agency.
4. CD Assessment
4.1 CD Requirement. As described in § 60.13(d), source owners and operators of CEMS must check, record, and quantify the CD at two concentration values at least once daily (approximately 24 hours) in accordance with the method prescribed by the manufacturer. When using reference gases, introduce the reference gas prior to any sample conditioning or filtration equipment and ensure that it passes through all filters, scrubbers, conditioners, and other monitor components used during normal sampling. The reference gas must pass through as much of the sampling probe as practical. The CEMS calibration must, at a minimum, be adjusted whenever the daily zero (or low-level) CD or the daily high-level CD exceeds two times the limits of the applicable PS's in appendix B to this part.
4.2 Recording Requirement for Automatic CD Adjusting Monitors. Monitors that automatically adjust the data to the corrected calibration values (e.g., microprocessor control) must be programmed to record the unadjusted concentration measured in the CD prior to resetting the calibration, if performed, or record the amount of adjustment.
4.3 Criteria for Excessive CD. If either the zero (or low-level) or high-level CD result exceeds twice the applicable drift specification in appendix B for five, consecutive, daily periods, the CEMS is out-of-control. If either the zero (or low-level) or high-level CD result exceeds four times the applicable drift specification in appendix B during any CD check, the CEMS is out-of-control. If the CEMS is out-of-control, take necessary corrective action. Following corrective action, repeat the CD checks.
4.3.1 Out-Of-Control Period Definition. The beginning of the out-of-control period is the time corresponding to the completion of the fifth, consecutive, daily CD check with a CD in excess of two times the allowable limit, or the time corresponding to the completion of the daily CD check preceding the daily CD check that results in a CD in excess of four times the allowable limit. The end of the out-of-control period is the time corresponding to the completion of the CD check following corrective action that results in the CD's at both the zero (or low-level) and high-level measurement points being within the corresponding allowable CD limit (i.e., either two times or four times the allowable limit in appendix B).
4.3.2 CEMS Data Status During Out-of-Control Period. During the period the CEMS is out-of-control, the CEMS data may not be used in calculating emission compliance nor be counted towards meeting minimum data availability as required and described in the applicable subpart [e.g., § 60.47a(f)].
4.4 Data Recording and Reporting. As required in § 60.7(d) of this regulation (40 CFR part 60), all measurements from the CEMS must be retained on file by the source owner for at least 2 years. However, emission data obtained on each successive day while the CEMS is out-of-control may not be included as part of the minimum daily data requirement of the applicable subpart [e.g., § 60.47a(f)] nor be used in the calculation of reported emissions for that period.
5. Data Accuracy Assessment
5.1 Auditing Requirements. Each CEMS must be audited at least once each calendar quarter. Successive quarterly audits shall occur no closer than 2 months. The audits shall be conducted as follows:
5.1.1 Relative Accuracy Test Audit (RATA). The RATA must be conducted at least once every four calendar quarters, except as otherwise noted in section 5.1.4 of this appendix. Conduct the RATA as described for the RA test procedure in the applicable PS in appendix B (e.g., PS 2 for SO2 and NOX). In addition, analyze the appropriate performance audit samples received from EPA as described in the applicable sampling methods (e.g., Methods 6 and 7).
5.1.2 Cylinder Gas Audit (CGA). If applicable, a CGA may be conducted in three of four calendar quarters, but in no more than three quarters in succession.
To conduct a CGA: (1) Challenge the CEMS (both pollutant and diluent portions of the CEMS, if applicable) with an audit gas of known concentration at two points within the following ranges:
| Audit point | Audit range | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| Pollutant monitors | Diluent monitors for— | ||
| CO2 | O2 | ||
| 1 | 20 to 30% of span value | 5 to 8% by volume | 4 to 6% by volume. |
| 2 | 50 to 60% of span value | 10 to 14% by volume | 8 to 12% by volume. |
Introduce each of the audit gases, three times each for a total of six challenges. Introduce the gases in such a manner that the entire CEMS is challenged. Do not introduce the same gas concentration twice in succession.
Use of separate audit gas cylinder for audit points 1 and 2. Do not dilute gas from audit cylinder when challenging the CEMS.
The monitor should be challenged at each audit point for a sufficient period of time to assure adsorption-desorption of the CEMS sample transport surfaces has stabilized.
(2) Operate each monitor in its normal sampling mode, i.e., pass the audit gas through all filters, scrubbers, conditioners, and other monitor components used during normal sampling, and as much of the sampling probe as is practical. At a minimum, the audit gas should be introduced at the connection between the probe and the sample line.
(3) Use Certified Reference Materials (CRM's) (See Citation 1) audit gases that have been certified by comparison to National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) Standard Reference Materials (SRM's) or EPA Protocol Gases following the most recent edition of the EPA Traceability Protocol for Assay and Certification of Gaseous Calibration Standards (See Citation 2). Procedures for preparation of CRM's are described in Citation 1. Procedures for preparation of EPA Protocol Gases are described in Citation 2. In the case that a suitable audit gas level is not commercially available, Method 205 (See Citation 3) may be used to dilute CRM's or EPA Protocol Gases to the needed level. The difference between the actual concentration of the audit gas and the concentration indicated by the monitor is used to assess the accuracy of the CEMS.
5.1.3 Relative Accuracy Audit (RAA). The RAA may be conducted three of four calendar quarters, but in no more than three quarters in succession. To conduct a RAA, follow the procedure described in the applicable PS in appendix B for the relative accuracy test, except that only three sets of measurement data are required. Analyses of EPA performance audit samples are also required.
The relative difference between the mean of the RM values and the mean of the CEMS responses will be used to assess the accuracy of the CEMS.
5.1.4 Other Alternative Audits. Other alternative audit procedures may be used as approved by the Administrator for three of four calendar quarters. One RATA is required at least every four calendar quarters, except in the case where the affected facility is off-line (does not operate) in the fourth calendar quarter since the quarter of the previous RATA. In that case, the RATA shall be performed in the quarter in which the unit recommences operation. Also, cylinder gas audits are not be required for calendar quarters in which the affected facility does not operate.
5.2 Excessive Audit Inaccuracy. If the RA, using the RATA, CGA, or RAA exceeds the criteria in section 5.2.3, the CEMS is out-of-control. If the CEMS is out-of-control, take necessary corrective action to eliminate the problem. Following corrective action, the source owner or operator must audit the CEMS with a RATA, CGA, or RAA to determine if the CEMS is operating within the specifications. A RATA must always be used following an out-of-control period resulting from a RATA. The audit following corrective action does not require analysis of EPA performance audit samples. If audit results show the CEMS to be out-of-control, the CEMS operator shall report both the audit showing the CEMS to be out-of-control and the results of the audit following corrective action showing the CEMS to be operating within specifications.
5.2.1 Out-Of-Control Period Definition. The beginning of the out-of-control period is the time corresponding to the completion of the sampling for the RATA, RAA, or CGA. The end of the out-of-control period is the time corresponding to the completion of the sampling of the subsequent successful audit.
5.2.2 CEMS Data Status During Out-Of-Control Period. During the period the monitor is out-of-control, the CEMS data may not be used in calculating emission compliance nor be counted towards meeting minimum data availabilty as required and described in the applicable subpart [e.g., § 60.47a(f)].
5.2.3 Criteria for Excessive Audit Inaccuracy. Unless specified otherwise in the applicable subpart of this part, the criteria for excessive inaccuracy are:
(1) For the RATA, the allowable RA in the applicable PS in appendix B to this part.
(2) For the CGA, for pollutant monitors, the audit inaccuracy must be ±15 percent of the average audit value as calculated using equation 1-1 of this method or the difference between the average CEMS response and the average audit value must be less than one of the following:
| Analyzer span | Alternative
CGA criteria (ppm) |
|---|---|
| ≥50 ppm | ±5 |
| >20 ppm, but ≤50 ppm | ±3 |
| ≤20 ppm | +2 |
For diluent monitors, ±15 percent of the average audit value.
(3) For the RAA, ±15 percent of the three-run average or ±7.5 percent of the applicable standard, whichever is greater.
5.3 Criteria for Acceptable QC Procedure. Repeated excessive inaccuracies (i.e., out-of-control conditions resulting from the quarterly audits) indicates the QC procedures are inadequate or that the CEMS is incapable of providing quality data. Therefore, whenever excessive inaccuracies occur for two consective quarters, the source owner or operator must revise the QC procedures (see section 3) or modify or replace the CEMS.
6. Calculations for CEMS Data Accuracy
6.1 RATA RA Calculation. Follow the equations described in section 8 of appendix B, PS 2 to calculate the RA for the RATA. The RATA must be calculated in units of the applicable emission standard (e.g., ng/J).
6.2 RAA Accuracy Calculation. Use equation 1-1 of this method to calculate the accuracy for the RAA. The RAA must be calculated in the units of the applicable emission standard.
6.3 CGA Accuracy Calculation. Use Equation 1-1 to calculate the accuracy for the CGA, which is calculated in units of the appropriate concentration (e.g., ppm SO2 or percent O2). Each component of the CEMS must meet the acceptable accuracy requirement.
where:
A = Accuracy of the CEMS, percent.
Cm = Average CEMS response during audit in units of applicable standard or appropriate concentration.
Ca = Average audit value (CGA certified value or three-run average for RAA) in units of applicable standard or appropriate concentration.
6.4 Example Accuracy Calculations. Example calculations for the RATA, RAA, and CGA are available in Citation 3.
7. Reporting Requirements
At the reporting interval specified in the applicable regulation, report for each CEMS the accuracy results from section 6 and the CD assessment results from section 4. Report the drift and accuracy information as a Data Assessment Report (DAR), and include one copy of this DAR for each quarterly audit with the report of emissions required under the applicable subparts of this part.
As a minimum, the DAR must contain the following information:
1. Source owner or operator name and address.
2. Identification and location of monitors in the CEMS.
3. Manufacturer and model number of each monitor in the CEMS.
4. Assessment of CEMS data accuracy and date of assessment as determined by a RATA, RAA, or CGA described in section 5 including the RA for the RATA, the A for the RAA or CGA, the RM results, the cylinder gases certified values, the CEMS responses, and the calculations results as defined in section 6. If the accuracy audit results show the CEMS to be out-of-control, the CEMS operator shall report both the audit results showing the CEMS to be out-of-control and the results of the audit following corrective action showing the CEMS to be operating within specifications.
5. Results from EPA performance audit samples described in section 5 and the applicable RM's.
6. Summary of all corrective actions taken when CEMS was determined out-of-control, as described in sections 4 and 5.
An example of a DAR format is shown in Figure 1.
8. Bibliography
1. “A Procedure for Establishing Traceability of Gas Mixtures to Certain National Bureau of Standards Standard Reference Materials.” Joint publication by NBS and EPA-600/7-81-010, Revised 1989. Available from the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Quality Assurance Division (MD-77). Research Triangle Park, NC 27711.
2. “EPA Traceability Protocol For Assay And Certification Of Gaseous Calibration Standards.” EPA-600/R-97/121, September 1997. Available from EPA's Emission Measurement Center at http://www.epa.gov/ttn/emc.
3. Method 205, “Verification of Gas Dilution Systems for Field Instrument Calibrations,” 40 CFR 51, appendix M.
Figure 1—Example Format for Data Assessment Report
Period ending date
Year
Company name
Plant name
Source unit no.
CEMS manufacturer
Model no.
CEMS serial no.
CEMS type (e.g., in situ)
CEMS sampling location (e.g., control device outlet)
CEMS span values as per the applicable regulation: ____________ (e.g., SO2 ________ ppm, NOX ________ ppm). ________________
I. Accuracy assessment results (Complete A, B, or C below for each CEMS or for each pollutant and diluent analyzer, as applicable.) If the quarterly audit results show the CEMS to be out-of-control, report the results of both the quarterly audit and the audit following corrective action showing the CEMS to be operating properly.
A. Relative accuracy test audit (RATA) for ________ (e.g., SO2 in ng/J).
1. Date of audit ________.
2. Reference methods (RM's) used ________ (e.g., Methods 3 and 6).
3. Average RM value ________ (e.g., ng/J, mg/dsm 3, or percent volume).
4. Average CEMS value ________.
5. Absolute value of mean difference [d] ________.
6. Confidence coefficient [CC] ________.
7. Percent relative accuracy (RA) ________ percent.
8. EPA performance audit results:
a. Audit lot number (1) ________ (2) ________
b. Audit sample number (1) ________ (2) ________
c. Results (mg/dsm 3) (1) ________ (2) ________
d. Actual value (mg/dsm 3)* (1) ________ (2) ________
e. Relative error* (1) ________ (2) ________
B. Cylinder gas audit (CGA) for ________ (e.g., SO2 in ppm).
| Audit point 1 | Audit point 2 | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| 1. Date of audit | |||
| 2. Cylinder ID number | |||
| 3. Date of certification | |||
| 4. Type of certification | (e.g., EPA Protocol 1 or CRM). | ||
| 5. Certified audit value | (e.g., ppm). | ||
| 6. CEMS response value | (e.g., ppm). | ||
| 7. Accuracy | percent. |
C. Relative accuracy audit (RAA) for ________ (e.g., SO2 in ng/J).
1. Date of audit ________.
2. Reference methods (RM's) used ________ (e.g., Methods 3 and 6).
3. Average RM value ________ (e.g., ng/J).
4. Average CEMS value ________.
5. Accuracy ________ percent.
6. EPA performance audit results:
a. Audit lot number (1) ________ (2) ________
b. Audit sample number (1) ________ (2) ________
c. Results (mg/dsm 3) (1) ________ (2) ________
d. Actual value (mg/dsm 3) *(1) ________ (2)
e. Relative error* (1) ________ (2) ________
* To be completed by the Agency.
D. Corrective action for excessive inaccuracy.
1. Out-of-control periods.
a. Date(s) ________.
b. Number of days ________.
2. Corrective action taken
3. Results of audit following corrective action. (Use format of A, B, or C above, as applicable.)
II. Calibration drift assessment.
A. Out-of-control periods.
1. Date(s) ________.
2. Number of days ________.
B. Corrective action taken
Procedure 2—Quality Assurance Requirements for Particulate Matter Continuous Emission Monitoring Systems at Stationary Sources
1.0 What Are the Purpose and Applicability of Procedure 2?
The purpose of Procedure 2 is to establish the minimum requirements for evaluating the effectiveness of quality control (QC) and quality assurance (QA) procedures and the quality of data produced by your particulate matter (PM) continuous emission monitoring system (CEMS). Procedure 2 applies to PM CEMS used for continuously determining compliance with emission standards or operating permit limits as specified in an applicable regulation or permit. Other QC procedures may apply to diluent (e.g., O2) monitors and other auxiliary monitoring equipment included with your CEMS to facilitate PM measurement or determination of PM concentration in units specified in an applicable regulation.
1.1 What measurement parameter does Procedure 2 address? Procedure 2 covers the instrumental measurement of PM as defined by your source's applicable reference method (no Chemical Abstract Service number assigned).
1.2 For what types of devices must I comply with Procedure 2? You must comply with Procedure 2 for the total equipment that:
(1) We require you to install and operate on a continuous basis under the applicable regulation, and
(2) You use to monitor the PM mass concentration associated with the operation of a process or emission control device.
1.3 What are the data quality objectives (DQOs) of Procedure 2? The overall DQO of Procedure 2 is the generation of valid, representative data that can be transferred into useful information for determining PM CEMS concentrations averaged over a prescribed interval. Procedure 2 is also closely associated with Performance Specification 11 (PS-11).
(1) Procedure 2 specifies the minimum requirements for controlling and assessing the quality of PM CEMS data submitted to us or the delegated permitting authority.
(2) You must meet these minimum requirements if you are responsible for one or more PM CEMS used for compliance monitoring. We encourage you to develop and implement a more extensive QA program or to continue such programs where they already exist.
1.4 What is the intent of the QA/QC procedures specified in Procedure 2? Procedure 2 is intended to establish the minimum QA/QC requirements for PM CEMS and is presented in general terms to allow you to develop a program that is most effective for your circumstances. You may adopt QA/QC procedures that go beyond these minimum requirements to ensure compliance with applicable regulations.
1.5 When must I comply with Procedure 2? You must comply with the basic requirements of Procedure 2 immediately following successful completion of the initial correlation test of PS-11.
2.0 What Are the Basic Requirements of Procedure 2?
Procedure 2 requires you to perform periodic evaluations of PM CEMS performance and to develop and implement QA/QC programs to ensure that PM CEMS data quality is maintained.
2.1 What are the basic functions of Procedure 2?
(1) Assessment of the quality of your PM CEMS data by estimating measurement accuracy;
(2) Control and improvement of the quality of your PM CEMS data by implementing QC requirements and corrective actions until the data quality is acceptable; and
(3) Specification of requirements for daily instrument zero and upscale drift checks and daily sample volume checks, as well as routine response correlation audits, absolute correlation audits, sample volume audits, and relative response audits.
3.0 What Special Definitions Apply to Procedure 2?
The definitions in Procedure 2 include those provided in PS-11 of Appendix B, with the following additions:
3.1 “Absolute Correlation Audit (ACA)” means an evaluation of your PM CEMS response to a series of reference standards covering the full measurement range of the instrument (e.g., 4 mA to 20 mA).
3.2 “Correlation Range” means the range of PM CEMS responses used in the complete set of correlation test data.
3.3 “PM CEMS Correlation” means the site-specific relationship (i.e., a regression equation) between the output from your PM CEMS (e.g., mA) and the particulate concentration, as determined by the reference method. The PM CEMS correlation is expressed in the same units as the PM concentration measured by your PM CEMS (e.g., mg/acm). You must derive this relation from PM CEMS response data and manual reference method data that were gathered simultaneously. These data must be representative of the full range of source and control device operating conditions that you expect to occur. You must develop the correlation by performing the steps presented in sections 12.2 and 12.3 of PS-11.
3.4 “Reference Method Sampling Location” means the location in your source's exhaust duct from which you collect manual reference method data for developing your PM CEMS correlation and for performing relative response audits (RRAs) and response correlation audits (RCAs).
3.5 “Response Correlation Audit (RCA)” means the series of tests specified in section 10.3(8) of this procedure that you conduct to ensure the continued validity of your PM CEMS correlation.
3.6 “Relative Response Audit (RRA)” means the brief series of tests specified in section 10.3(6) of this procedure that you conduct between consecutive RCAs to ensure the continued validity of your PM CEMS correlation.
3.7 “Sample Volume Audit (SVA)” means an evaluation of your PM CEMS measurement of sample volume if your PM CEMS determines PM concentration based on a measure of PM mass in an extracted sample volume and an independent determination of sample volume.
4.0 Interferences [Reserved]
5.0 What Do I Need To Know To Ensure the Safety of Persons Using Procedure 2?
People using Procedure 2 may be exposed to hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. Procedure 2 does not purport to address all of the safety issues associated with its use. It is your responsibility to establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicable regulatory limitations before performing this procedure. You must consult your CEMS user's manual for specific precautions to be taken with regard to your PM CEMS procedures.
6.0 What Equipment and Supplies Do I Need? [Reserved]
7.0 What Reagents and Standards Do I Need?
You will need reference standards or procedures to perform the zero drift check, the upscale drift check, and the sample volume check.
7.1 What is the reference standard value for the zero drift check? You must use a zero check value that is no greater than 20 percent of the PM CEMS's response range. You must obtain documentation on the zero check value from your PM CEMS manufacturer.
7.2 What is the reference standard value for the upscale drift check? You must use an upscale check value that produces a response between 50 and 100 percent of the PM CEMS's response range. For a PM CEMS that produces output over a range of 4 mA to 20 mA, the upscale check value must produce a response in the range of 12 mA to 20 mA. You must obtain documentation on the upscale check value from your PM CEMS manufacturer.
7.3 What is the reference standard value for the sample volume check? You must use a reference standard value or procedure that produces a sample volume value equivalent to the normal sampling rate. You must obtain documentation on the sample volume value from your PM CEMS manufacturer.
8.0 What Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport Are Relevant to This Procedure? [Reserved]
9.0 What Quality Control Measures Are Required by This Procedure for My PM CEMS?
You must develop and implement a QC program for your PM CEMS. Your QC program must, at a minimum, include written procedures that describe, in detail, complete step-by-step procedures and operations for the activities in paragraphs (1) through (8) of this section.
(1) Procedures for performing drift checks, including both zero drift and upscale drift and the sample volume check (see sections 10.2(1), (2), and (5)).
(2) Methods for adjustment of PM CEMS based on the results of drift checks, sample volume checks (if applicable), and the periodic audits specified in this procedure.
(3) Preventative maintenance of PM CEMS (including spare parts inventory and sampling probe integrity).
(4) Data recording, calculations, and reporting.
(5) RCA and RRA procedures, including sampling and analysis methods, sampling strategy, and structuring test conditions over the prescribed range of PM concentrations.
(6) Procedures for performing ACAs and SVAs and methods for adjusting your PM CEMS response based on ACA and SVA results.
(7) Program of corrective action for malfunctioning PM CEMS, including flagged data periods.
(8) For extractive PM CEMS, procedures for checking extractive system ducts for material accumulation.
9.1 What QA/QC documentation must I have? You are required to keep the written QA/QC procedures on record and available for inspection by us, the State, and/or local enforcement agency for the life of your CEMS or until you are no longer subject to the requirements of this procedure.
9.2 How do I know if I have acceptable QC procedures for my PM CEMS? Your QC procedures are inadequate or your PM CEMS is incapable of providing quality data if you fail two consecutive QC audits (i.e., out-of-control conditions resulting from the annual audits, quarterly audits, or daily checks). Therefore, if you fail the same two consecutive audits, you must revise your QC procedures or modify or replace your PM CEMS to correct the deficiencies causing the excessive inaccuracies (see section 10.4 for limits for excessive audit inaccuracy).
10.0 What Calibration/Correlation and Standardization Procedures Must I Perform for My PM CEMS?
You must generate a site-specific correlation for each of your PM CEMS installation(s) relating response from your PM CEMS to results from simultaneous PM reference method testing. The PS-11 defines procedures for developing the correlation and defines a series of statistical parameters for assessing acceptability of the correlation. However, a critical component of your PM CEMS correlation process is ensuring the accuracy and precision of reference method data. The activities listed in sections 10.1 through 10.10 assure the quality of the correlation.
10.1 When should I use paired trains for reference method testing? Although not required, we recommend that you should use paired-train reference method testing to generate data used to develop your PM CEMS correlation and for RCA testing. Guidance on the use of paired sampling trains can be found in the PM CEMS Knowledge Document (see section 16.5 of PS-11).
10.2 What routine system checks must I perform on my PM CEMS? You must perform routine checks to ensure proper operation of system electronics and optics, light and radiation sources and detectors, and electric or electro-mechanical systems. Necessary components of the routine system checks will depend on design details of your PM CEMS. As a minimum, you must verify the system operating parameters listed in paragraphs (1) through (5) of this section on a daily basis. Some PM CEMS may perform one or more of these functions automatically or as an integral portion of unit operations; for other PM CEMS, you must initiate or perform one or more of these functions manually.
(1) You must check the zero drift to ensure stability of your PM CEMS response to the zero check value. You must determine system output on the most sensitive measurement range when the PM CEMS is challenged with a zero reference standard or procedure. You must, at a minimum, adjust your PM CEMS whenever the daily zero drift exceeds 4 percent.
(2) You must check the upscale drift to ensure stability of your PM CEMS response to the upscale check value. You must determine system output when the PM CEMS is challenged with a reference standard or procedure corresponding to the upscale check value. You must, at a minimum, adjust your PM CEMS whenever the daily upscale drift check exceeds 4 percent.
(3) For light-scattering and extinction-type PM CEMS, you must check the system optics to ensure that system response has not been altered by the condition of optical components, such as fogging of lens and performance of light monitoring devices.
(4) You must record data from your automatic drift-adjusting PM CEMS before any adjustment is made. If your PM CEMS automatically adjusts its response to the corrected calibration values (e.g., microprocessor control), you must program your PM CEMS to record the unadjusted concentration measured in the drift check before resetting the calibration. Alternately, you may program your PM CEMS to record the amount of adjustment.
(5) For extractive PM CEMS that measure the sample volume and use the measured sample volume as part of calculating the output value, you must check the sample volume on a daily basis to verify the accuracy of the sample volume measuring equipment. This sample volume check must be done at the normal sampling rate of your PM CEMS. You must adjust your PM CEMS sample volume measurement whenever the daily sample volume check error exceeds 10 percent.
10.3 What are the auditing requirements for my PM CEMS? You must subject your PM CEMS to an ACA and an SVA, as applicable, at least once each calendar quarter. Successive quarterly audits must occur no closer than 2 months apart. You must conduct an RCA and an RRA at the frequencies specified in the applicable regulation or facility operating permit. An RRA or RCA conducted during any calendar quarter can take the place of the ACA required for that calendar quarter. An RCA conducted during the period in which an RRA is required can take the place of the RRA for that period.
(1) When must I perform an ACA? You must perform an ACA each quarter unless you conduct an RRA or RCA during that same quarter.
(2) How do I perform an ACA? You perform an ACA according to the procedure specified in paragraphs (2)(i) through (v) of this section.
(i) You must challenge your PM CEMS with an audit standard or an equivalent audit reference to reproduce the PM CEMS's measurement at three points within the following ranges:
| Audit point | Audit range |
|---|---|
| 1 | 0 to 20 percent of measurement range |
| 2 | 40 to 60 percent of measurement range |
| 3 | 70 to 100 percent of measurement range |
(ii) You must then challenge your PM CEMS three times at each audit point and use the average of the three responses in determining accuracy at each audit point. Use a separate audit standard for audit points 1, 2, and 3. Challenge the PM CEMS at each audit point for a sufficient period of time to ensure that your PM CEMS response has stabilized.
(iii) Operate your PM CEMS in the mode, manner, and range specified by the manufacturer.
(iv) Store, maintain, and use audit standards as recommended by the manufacturer.
(v) Use the difference between the actual known value of the audit standard and the response of your PM CEMS to assess the accuracy of your PM CEMS.
(3) When must I perform an SVA? You must perform an audit of the measured sample volume (e.g., the sampling flow rate for a known time) once per quarter for applicable PM CEMS with an extractive sampling system. Also, you must perform and pass an SVA prior to initiation of any of the reference method data collection runs for an RCA or RRA.
(4) How do I perform an SVA? You perform an SVA according to the procedure specified in paragraphs (4)(i) through (iii) of this section.
(i) You perform an SVA by independently measuring the volume of sample gas extracted from the stack or duct over each batch cycle or time period with a calibrated device. You may make this measurement either at the inlet or outlet of your PM CEMS, so long as it measures the sample gas volume without including any dilution or recycle air. Compare the measured volume with the volume reported by your PM CEMS for the same cycle or time period to calculate sample volume accuracy.
(ii) You must make measurements during three sampling cycles for batch extractive monitors (e.g., Beta-gauge) or during three periods of at least 20 minutes for continuous extractive PM CEMS.
(iii) You may need to condense, collect, and measure moisture from the sample gas prior to the calibrated measurement device (e.g., dry gas meter) and correct the results for moisture content. In any case, the volumes measured by the calibrated device and your PM CEMS must be on a consistent temperature, pressure, and moisture basis.
(5) How often must I perform an RRA? You must perform an RRA at the frequency specified in the applicable regulation or facility operating permit. You may conduct an RCA instead of an RRA during the period when the RRA is required.
(6) How do I perform an RRA? You must perform the RRA according to the procedure specified in paragraphs (6)(i) and (ii) of this section.
(i) You perform an RRA by collecting three simultaneous reference method PM concentration measurements and PM CEMS measurements at the as-found source operating conditions and PM concentration.
(ii) We recommend that you use paired trains for reference method sampling. Guidance on the use of paired sampling trains can be found in the PM CEMS Knowledge Document (see section 16.5 of PS-11).
(7) How often must I perform an RCA? You must perform an RCA at the frequency specified in the applicable regulation or facility operating permit.
(8) How do I perform an RCA? You must perform the RCA according to the procedures for the PM CEMS correlation test described in PS-11, section 8.6, except that the minimum number of runs required is 12 in the RCA instead of 15 as specified in PS-11.
(9) What other alternative audits can I use? You can use other alternative audit procedures as approved by us, the State, or local agency for the quarters when you would conduct ACAs.
10.4 What are my limits for excessive audit inaccuracy? Unless specified otherwise in the applicable subpart, the criteria for excessive audit inaccuracy are listed in paragraphs (1) through (6) of this section.
(1) What are the criteria for excessive zero or upscale drift? Your PM CEMS is out of control if the zero drift check or upscale drift check either exceeds 4 percent for five consecutive daily periods or exceeds 8 percent for any one day.
(2) What are the criteria for excessive sample volume measurement error? Your PM CEMS is out of control if sample volume check error exceeds 10 percent for five consecutive daily periods or exceeds 20 percent for any one day.
(3) What are the criteria for excessive ACA error? Your PM CEMS is out of control if the results of any ACA exceed ±10 percent of the average audit value, as calculated using Equation 2-1a, or 7.5 percent of the applicable standard, as calculated using Equation 2-1b, whichever is greater.
(4) What is the criterion for excessive SVA error? Your PM CEMS is out of control if results exceed ±5 percent of the average sample volume audit value.
(5) What are the criteria for passing a RCA? To pass a RCA, you must meet the criteria specified in paragraphs (5)(i) and (ii) of this section. If your PM CEMS fails to meet these RCA criteria, it is out of control.
(i) For all 12 data points, the PM CEMS response value can be no greater than the greatest PM CEMS response value used to develop your correlation curve.
(ii) At least 75 percent of a minimum number of 12 sets of PM CEMS and reference method measurements must fall within a specified area on a graph of the correlation regression line. The specified area on the graph of the correlation regression line is defined by two lines parallel to the correlation regression line, offset at a distance of ±25 percent of the numerical emission limit value from the correlation regression line. If any of the PM CEMS response values resulting from your RCA are lower than the lowest PM CEMS response value of your existing correlation curve, you may extend your correlation regression line to the point corresponding to the lowest PM CEMS response value obtained during the RCA. This extended correlation regression line must then be used to determine if the RCA data meets this criterion.
(6) What are the criteria to pass a RRA? To pass a RRA, you must meet the criteria specified in paragraphs (6)(i) and (ii) of this section. If your PM CEMS fails to meet these RRA criteria, it is out of control.
(i) For all three data points, the PM CEMS response value can be no greater than the greatest PM CEMS response value used to develop your correlation curve.
(ii) At least two of the three sets of PM CEMS and reference method measurements must fall within the same specified area on a graph of the correlation regression line as required for the RCA and described in paragraph (5)(ii) of this section.
10.5 What do I do if my PM CEMS is out of control? If your PM CEMS is out of control, you must take the actions listed in paragraphs (1) and (2) of this section.
(1) You must take necessary corrective action to eliminate the problem and perform tests, as appropriate, to ensure that the corrective action was successful.
(i) Following corrective action, you must repeat the previously failed audit to confirm that your PM CEMS is operating within the specifications.
(ii) If your PM CEMS failed an RRA, you must take corrective action until your PM CEMS passes the RRA criteria. If the RRA criteria cannot be achieved, you must perform an RCA.
(iii) If your PM CEMS failed an RCA, you must follow procedures specified in section 10.6 of this procedure.
(2) You must report both the audit showing your PM CEMS to be out of control and the results of the audit following corrective action showing your PM CEMS to be operating within specifications.
10.6 What do I do if my PM CEMS fails an RCA? After an RCA failure, you must take all applicable actions listed in paragraphs (1) through (3) of this section.
(1) Combine RCA data with data from the active PM CEMS correlation and perform the mathematical evaluations defined in PS-11 for development of a PM CEMS correlation, including examination of alternate correlation models (i.e., linear, polynomial, logarithmic, exponential, and power). If the expanded data base and revised correlation meet PS-11 statistical criteria, use the revised correlation.
(2) If the criteria specified in paragraph (1) of this section are not achieved, you must develop a new PM CEMS correlation based on revised data. The revised data set must consist of the test results from only the RCA. The new data must meet all requirements of PS-11 to develop a revised PM CEMS correlation, except that the minimum number of sets of PM CEMS and reference method measurements is 12 instead of the minimum of 15 sets required by PS-11. Your PM CEMS is considered to be back in controlled status when the revised correlation meets all of the performance criteria specified in section 13.2 of PS-11.
(3) If the actions in paragraphs (1) and (2) of this section do not result in an acceptable correlation, you must evaluate the cause(s) and comply with the actions listed in paragraphs (3)(i) through (iv) of this section within 90 days after the completion of the failed RCA.
(i) Completely inspect your PM CEMS for mechanical or operational problems. If you find a mechanical or operational problem, repair your PM CEMS and repeat the RCA.
(ii) You may need to relocate your PM CEMS to a more appropriate measurement location. If you relocate your PM CEMS, you must perform a new correlation test according to the procedures specified in PS-11.
(iii) The characteristics of the PM or gas in your source's flue gas stream may have changed such that your PM CEMS measurement technology is no longer appropriate. If this is the case, you must install a PM CEMS with measurement technology that is appropriate for your source's flue gas characteristics. You must perform a new correlation test according to the procedures specified in PS-11.
(iv) If the corrective actions in paragraphs (3)(i) through (iii) of this section were not successful, you must petition us, the State, or local agency for approval of alternative criteria or an alternative for continuous PM monitoring.
10.7 When does the out-of-control period begin and end? The out-of-control period begins immediately after the last test run or check of an unsuccessful RCA, RRA, ACA, SVA, drift check, or sample volume check. The out-of-control period ends immediately after the last test run or check of the subsequent successful audit or drift check.
10.8 Can I use the data recorded by my PM CEMS during out-of-control periods? During any period when your PM CEMS is out of control, you may not use your PM CEMS data to calculate emission compliance or to meet minimum data availability requirements described in the applicable regulation.
10.9 What are the QA/QC reporting requirements for my PM CEMS? You must report the accuracy results for your PM CEMS, specified in section 10.4 of this procedure, at the interval specified in the applicable regulation. Report the drift and accuracy information as a Data Assessment Report (DAR), and include one copy of this DAR for each quarterly audit with the report of emissions required under the applicable regulation. An example DAR is provided in Procedure 1, Appendix F of this part.
10.10 What minimum information must I include in my DAR? As a minimum, you must include the information listed in paragraphs (1) through (5) of this section in the DAR:
(1) Your name and address.
(2) Identification and location of monitors in your CEMS.
(3) Manufacturer and model number of each monitor in your CEMS.
(4) Assessment of PM CEMS data accuracy/acceptability, and date of assessment, as determined by an RCA, RRA, ACA, or SVA described in section 10, including the acceptability determination for the RCA or RRA, the accuracy for the ACA or SVA, the reference method results, the audit standards, your PM CEMS responses, and the calculation results as defined in section 12. If the accuracy audit results show your PM CEMS to be out of control, you must report both the audit results showing your PM CEMS to be out of control and the results of the audit following corrective action showing your PM CEMS to be operating within specifications.
(5) Summary of all corrective actions you took when you determined your PM CEMS to be out of control, as described in section 10.5, or after failing on RCA, as described in section 10.6.
10.7 Where and how long must I retain the QA data that this procedure requires me to record for my PM CEMS? You must keep the records required by this procedure for your PM CEMS onsite and available for inspection by us, the State, and/or local enforcement agency for a period of 5 years.
11.0 What Analytical Procedures Apply to This Procedure?
Sample collection and analysis are concurrent for this procedure. You must refer to the appropriate reference method for the specific analytical procedures.
12.0 What Calculations and Data Analysis Must I Perform for my PM CEMS?
(1) How do I determine RCA and RRA acceptability? You must plot each of your PM CEMS and reference method data sets from an RCA or RRA on a graph based on your PM CEMS correlation line to determine if the criteria in paragraphs 10.4(5) or (6), respectively, are met.
(2) How do I calculate ACA accuracy? You must use either Equation 2-1a or 2-1b to calculate ACA accuracy for each of the three audit points. However, when calculating ACA accuracy for the first audit point (0 to 20 percent of measurement range), you must use Equation 2-1b to calculate ACA accuracy if the reference standard value (Rv) equals zero.
Where:
ACA Accuracy = The ACA accuracy at each audit point, in percent,
RCEM = Your PM CEMS response to the reference standard, and
RV = The reference standard value.
Where:
ACA Accuracy = The ACA accuracy at each audit point, in percent,
CCEM = The PM concentration that corresponds to your PM CEMS response to the reference standard, as calculated using the correlation equation for your PM CEMS,
CRV = The PM concentration that corresponds to the reference standard value in units consistent with CCEM, and
Cs = The PM concentration that corresponds to the applicable emission limit in units consistent with CCEM.
(3) How do I calculate daily upscale and zero drift? You must calculate the upscale drift using Equation 2-2 and the zero drift using Equation 2-3:
Where:
UD = The upscale drift of your PM CEMS, in percent,
RCEM = Your PM CEMS response to the upscale check value,
RU = The upscale check value, and
Rr = The response range of the analyzer.
Where:
ZD = The zero (low-level) drift of your PM CEMS, in percent,
RCEM = Your PM CEMS response of the zero check value,
RL = The zero check value, and
Rr = The response range of the analyzer.
(4) How do I calculate SVA accuracy? You must use Equation 2-4 to calculate the accuracy, in percent, for each of the three SVA tests or the daily sample volume check:
Where:
SVA Accuracy = The SVA accuracy at each audit point, in percent,
VM = Sample gas volume determined/reported by your PM CEMS (e.g., dscm), and
VR = Sample gas volume measured by the independent calibrated reference device (e.g., dscm) for the SVA or the reference value for the daily sample volume check.
13.0 Method Performance [Reserved]
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 Which References are Relevant to This Method? [Reserved]
17.0 What Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data Are Relevant to This Method? [Reserved]
Procedure 3—Quality Assurance Requirements for Continuous Opacity Monitoring Systems at Stationary Sources
1.0 What are the purpose and applicability of Procedure 3?
The purpose of Procedure 3 is to establish quality assurance and quality control (QA/QC) procedures for continuous opacity monitoring systems (COMS). Procedure 3 applies to COMS used to demonstrate continuous compliance with opacity standards specified in new source performance standards (NSPS) promulgated by EPA pursuant to section 111(b) of the Clean Air Act, 42 U.S.C. 7411(b)—Standards of Performance for New Stationary Sources.
1.1 What are the data quality objectives of Procedure 3? The overall data quality objective (DQO) of Procedure 3 is the generation of valid and representative opacity data. Procedure 3 specifies the minimum requirements for controlling and assessing the quality of COMS data submitted to us or the delegated regulatory agency. Procedure 3 requires you to perform periodic evaluations of a COMS performance and to develop and implement QA/QC programs to ensure that COMS data quality is maintained.
1.2 What is the intent of the QA/QC procedures specified in Procedure 3? Procedure 3 is intended to establish the minimum QA/QC requirements to verify and maintain an acceptable level of quality of the data produced by COMS. It is presented in general terms to allow you to develop a program that is most effective for your circumstances.
1.3 When must I comply with Procedure 3? You must comply with Procedure 3 no later than November 12, 2014.
2.0 What are the basic functions of Procedure 3?
The basic functions of Procedure 3 are assessment of the quality of your COMS data and control and improvement of the quality of the data by implementing QC requirements and corrective actions. Procedure 3 provides requirements for:
(1) Daily instrument zero and upscale drift checks and status indicators checks;
(2) Quarterly performance audits which include the following assessments:
(i) Optical alignment,
(ii) Calibration error, and
(iii) Zero compensation.
Sources that achieve quality assured data for four consecutive quarters may reduce their auditing frequency to semi-annual. If a performance audit is failed, the source must resume quarterly testing for that audit requirement until it again demonstrates successful performance over four consecutive quarters.
(3) Annual zero alignment.
3.0 What special definitions apply to Procedure 3?
The definitions in Procedure 3 include those provided in Performance Specification 1 (PS-1) of Appendix B of this part and ASTM D6216-12 and the following additional definitions.
3.1 Out-of-control periods. Out-of-control periods mean that one or more COMS parameters falls outside of the acceptable limits established by this rule.
(1) Daily Assessments. Whenever the calibration drift (CD) exceeds twice the specification of PS-1, the COMS is out-of-control. The beginning of the out-of-control period is the time corresponding to the completion of the daily calibration drift check. The end of the out-of-control period is the time corresponding to the completion of appropriate adjustment and subsequent successful CD assessment.
(2) Quarterly and Annual Assessments. Whenever an annual zero alignment or quarterly performance audit fails to meet the criteria established in paragraphs (2) and (3) of section 10.4, the COMS is out-of-control. The beginning of the out-of-control period is the time corresponding to the completion of the performance audit indicating the failure to meet these established criteria. The end of the out-of-control period is the time corresponding to the completion of appropriate corrective actions and the subsequent successful audit (or, if applicable, partial audit).
4.0 What interferences must I avoid?
Opacity cannot be measured accurately in the presence of condensed water vapor. Thus, COMS opacity compliance determinations cannot be made when condensed water vapor is present, such as downstream of a wet scrubber without a reheater or at other saturated flue gas locations. Therefore, COMS must be located where condensed water vapor is not present.
5.0 What do I need to know to ensure the safety of persons using Procedure 3?
Those implementing Procedure 3 may be exposed to hazardous materials, operations and equipment. Procedure 3 does not purport to address all of the safety issues associated with its use. It is your responsibility to establish appropriate health and safety practices and determine the applicable regulatory limitations before performing this procedure. You should consult the COMS user's manual for specific precautions to take.
6.0 What equipment and supplies do I need?
The equipment and supplies that you need are specified in PS-1. You are not required to purchase a new COMS if your existing COMS meets the requirements specified in Procedure 3.
7.0 What reagents and standards do I need?
The reagents and standards that you need are specified in PS-1. You are not required to purchase a new COMS if your existing COMS meets the requirements specified in Procedure 3.
8.0 What sample collection, preservation, storage, and transport are relevant to this procedure? [Reserved]
9.0 What quality control measures are required by this procedure for my COMS?
You must develop and implement a QC program for your COMS. Your QC program must, at a minimum, include written procedures which describe in detail complete step-by-step procedures and operations for the activities in paragraphs (1) through (4):
(1) Procedures for performing drift checks, including both zero and upscale drift and the status indicators check,
(2) Procedures for performing quarterly performance audits,
(3) A means of checking the zero alignment of the COMS, and
(4) A program of corrective action for a malfunctioning COMS. The corrective action must include, at a minimum, the requirements specified in section 10.5.
9.1 What QA/QC documentation must I have? You are required to keep the QA/QC written procedures required in section 9.0 on site and available for inspection by us, the state, and/or local enforcement agencies.
9.2 What actions must I take if I fail QC audits? If you fail two consecutive annual audits, two consecutive quarterly audits, or five consecutive daily checks, you must either revise your QC procedures or determine if your COMS is malfunctioning. If you determine that your COMS is malfunctioning, you must take the necessary corrective action as specified in section 10.5. If you determine that your COMS requires extensive repairs, you may use a substitute COMS provided the substitute meets the requirements in section 10.6.
10.0 What calibration and standardization procedures must I perform for my COMS?
(1) You must perform daily system checks to ensure proper operation of system electronics and optics, light and radiation sources and detectors, electric or electro-mechanical systems, and general stability of the system calibration. Daily is defined as any portion of a calendar day in which a unit operates.
(2) You must subject your COMS to a performance audit to include checks of the individual COMS components and factors affecting the accuracy of the monitoring data at least once per QA operating quarter. A QA operating quarter is a calendar quarter in which a unit operates at least 168 hours.
(3) At least annually, you must perform a zero alignment by comparing the COMS simulated zero to the actual clear path zero. Annually is defined as a period wherein the unit is operating at least 28 days in a calendar year. The simulated zero device produces a simulated clear path condition or low-level opacity condition, where the energy reaching the detector is between 90 and 110 percent of the energy reaching the detector under actual clear path conditions.
10.1 What daily system checks must I perform on my COMS? The specific components required to undergo daily system checks will depend on the design details of your COMS. At a minimum, you must verify the system operating parameters listed in paragraphs (1) through (3) of this section. Some COMS may perform one or more of these functions automatically or as an integral portion of unit operations; other COMS may perform one or more of these functions manually.
(1) You must check the zero drift to ensure stability of your COMS response to the simulated zero device. The simulated zero device, an automated mechanism within the transmissometer that produces a simulated clear path condition or low-level opacity condition, is used to check the zero drift. You must, at a minimum, take corrective action on your COMS whenever the daily zero drift exceeds twice the applicable drift specification in section 13.3(6) of PS-1.
(2) You must check the upscale drift to ensure stability of your COMS response to the upscale drift value. The upscale calibration device, an automated mechanism (employing an attenuator or reduced reflectance device) within the transmissometer that produces an upscale opacity value is used to check the upscale drift. You must, at a minimum, take corrective action on your COMS whenever the daily upscale drift check exceeds twice the applicable drift specification in section 13.3(6) of PS-1.
(3) You must, at a minimum, check the status indicators, data acquisition system error messages, and other system self-diagnostic indicators. You must take appropriate corrective action based on the manufacturer's recommendations when the COMS is operating outside preset limits.
10.2 What are the quarterly auditing requirements for my COMS? At a minimum, the parameters listed in paragraphs (1) through (3) of this section must be included in the performance audit conducted on a quarterly basis as defined in section 10.0(2).
(1) For units with automatic zero compensation, you must determine the zero compensation for the COMS. The value of the zero compensation applied at the time of the audit must be calculated as equivalent opacity and corrected to stack exit conditions according to the procedures specified by the manufacturer. The compensation applied to the effluent by the monitor system must be recorded.
(2) You must conduct a three-point calibration error test of the COMS. Three calibration attenuators, either primary or secondary must meet the requirements of PS-1, with one exception. Instead of recalibrating the attenuators semi-annually, they must be recalibrated annually. If two annual calibrations agree within 0.5 percent opacity, the attenuators may then be calibrated once every five years. The three attenuators must be placed in the COMS light beam path for at least three nonconsecutive readings. All monitor responses must then be independently recorded from the COMS permanent data recorder. Additional guidance for conducting this test is included in section 8.1(3)(ii) of PS-1. The low-, mid-, and high-range calibration error results must be computed as the mean difference and 95 percent confidence interval for the difference between the expected and actual responses of the monitor as corrected to stack exit conditions. The equations necessary to perform the calculations are found in section 12.0 of PS-1. For the calibration error test method, you must use the external audit device. When the external audit device is installed, with no calibration attenuator inserted, the COMS measurement reading must be less than or equal to one percent opacity. You must also document procedures for properly handling and storing the external audit device and calibration attenuators within your written QC program.
(3) You must check the optical alignment of the COMS in accordance with the instrument manufacturer's recommendations. If the optical alignment varies with stack temperature, perform the optical alignment test when the unit is operating.
10.3 What are the annual auditing requirements for my COMS?
(1) You must perform the primary zero alignment method under clear path conditions. The COMS must be removed from its installation and set up under clear path conditions. There must be no adjustments to the monitor other than the establishment of the proper monitor path length and correct optical alignment of the COMS components. You must record the COMS response to a clear condition and to the COMS's simulated zero condition as percent opacity corrected to stack exit conditions. For a COMS with automatic zero compensation, you must disconnect or disable the zero compensation mechanism or record the amount of correction applied to the COMS's simulated zero condition. The response difference in percent opacity to the clear path and simulated zero conditions must be recorded as the zero alignment error. You must adjust the COMS's simulated zero device to provide the same response as the clear path condition as specified in paragraph (3) of section 10.0.
(2) As an alternative, monitors capable of allowing the installation of an external zero device may use the device for the zero alignment provided that: (1) The external zero device setting has been established for the monitor path length and recorded for the specific COMS by comparison of the COMS responses to the installed external zero device and to the clear path condition, and (2) the external zero device is demonstrated to be capable of producing a consistent zero response when it is repeatedly (i.e., three consecutive installations and removals prior to conducting the final zero alignment check) installed on the COMS. This can be demonstrated by either the manufacturer's certificate of conformance (MCOC) or actual on-site performance. The external zero device setting must be permanently set at the time of initial zeroing to the clear path zero value and protected when not in use to ensure that the setting equivalent to zero opacity does not change. The external zero device response must be checked and recorded prior to initiating the zero alignment. If the external zero device setting has changed, you must remove the COMS from the stack in order to reset the external zero device. If you employ an external zero device, you must perform the zero alignment audits with the COMS off the stack at least every three years. If the external zero device is adjusted within the three-year period, you must perform the zero alignment with the COMS off the stack no later than three years from the date of adjustment.
(3) The procedure in section 6.8 of ASTM D6216-12 is allowed.
10.4 What are my limits for excessive audit inaccuracy? Unless specified otherwise in the applicable subpart, the criteria for excessive inaccuracy are listed in paragraphs (1) through (4).
(1) What is the criterion for excessive zero or upscale drift? Your COMS is out-of-control if either the zero drift check or upscale drift check exceeds twice the applicable drift specification in PS-1 for any one day.
(2) What is the criterion for excessive zero alignment? Your COMS is out-of-control if the zero alignment error exceeds 2 percent opacity.
(3) What is the criterion to pass the quarterly performance audit? Your COMS is out-of-control if the results of a quarterly performance audit indicate noncompliance with the following criteria:
(i) The optical alignment indicator does not show proper alignment (i.e., does not fall within a specific reference mark or condition).
(ii) The zero compensation exceeds 4 percent opacity, or
(iii) The calibration error exceeds 3 percent opacity.
(4) What is the criterion for data capture? You must adhere to the data capture criterion specified in the applicable subpart.
10.5 What corrective action must I take if my COMS is malfunctioning? You must have a corrective action program in place to address the repair and/or maintenance of your COMS. The corrective action program must address routine/preventative maintenance and various types of analyzer repairs. The corrective action program must establish what diagnostic testing must be performed after each type of activity to ensure that the COMS is collecting valid, quality-assured data. Recommended maintenance and repair procedures and diagnostic testing after repairs may be found in an associated guidance document.
10.6 What requirements must I meet if I use a temporary opacity monitor?
(1) In the event that your certified opacity monitor has to be removed for extended service, you may install a temporary replacement monitor to obtain required opacity emissions data provided that:
(i) The temporary monitor has been certified according to ASTM D6216-12 for which a MCOC has been provided;
(ii) The use of the temporary monitor does not exceed 1080 hours (45 days) of operation per year as a replacement for a fully certified opacity monitor. After that time, the analyzer must complete a full certification according to PS-1 prior to further use as a temporary replacement monitor. Once a temporary replacement monitor has been installed and required testing and adjustments have been successfully completed, it cannot be replaced by another temporary replacement monitor to avoid the full PS-1 certification testing required after 1080 hours (45 days) of use;
(iii) The temporary monitor has been installed and successfully completed an optical alignment assessment and status indicator assessment;
(iv) The temporary monitor has successfully completed an off-stack clear path zero assessment and zero calibration value adjustment procedure;
(v) The temporary monitor has successfully completed an abbreviated zero and upscale drift check consisting of seven zero and upscale calibration value drift checks which may be conducted within a 24-hour period with not more than one calibration drift check every three hours and not less than one calibration drift check every 25 hours. Calculated zero and upscale drift requirements are the same as specified for the normal PS-1 certification;
(vi) The temporary monitor has successfully completed a three-point calibration error test;
(vii) The upscale reference calibration check value of the new monitor has been updated in the associated data recording equipment;
(viii) The overall calibration of the monitor and data recording equipment has been verified; and
(ix) The user has documented all of the above in the maintenance log.
(2) Data generated by the temporary monitor is considered valid when paragraphs (i) through (ix) in this section have been met.
10.7 When do out-of-control periods begin and end? The out-of-control periods are as specified in section 3.1.
10.8 What are the limitations on the use of my COMS data collected during out-of-control periods? During the period your COMS is out-of-control, you may not use your COMS data to calculate emission compliance or to meet minimum data capture requirements in this procedure or the applicable regulation.
10.9 What are the QA/QC reporting requirements for my COMS? You must report in a Data Assessment Report (DAR) the information required by sections 10.0, 10.1, 10.2, and 10.3 for your COMS at the interval specified in the applicable regulation.
10.10 What minimum information must I include in my DAR? At a minimum, you must include the information listed in paragraphs (1) through (5) of this section in the DAR.
(1) Name of person completing the report and facility address,
(2) Identification and location of your COMS(s),
(3) Manufacturer, model, and serial number of your COMS(s),
(4) Assessment of COMS data accuracy/acceptability and date of assessment as determined by a performance audit described in section 10.0. If the accuracy audit results show your COMS to be out-of-control, you must report both the audit results showing your COMS to be out-of-control and the results of the audit following corrective action showing your COMS to be operating within specifications, and
(5) Summary of all corrective actions you took when you determined your COMS was out-of-control.
10.11 Where and how long must I retain the QA data that this procedure requires me to record for my COMS? You must keep the records required by this procedure for your COMS on site and available for inspection by us, the state, and/or the local enforcement agency for the period specified in the regulations requiring the use of COMS.
11.0 What analytical procedures apply to this procedure? [Reserved]
12.0 What calculations and data analysis must I perform for my COMS? The calculations required for the quarterly performance audit are in section 12.0 of PS-1.
13.0 Method Performance [Reserved]
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 References
16.1 Performance Specification 1-Specifications and Test Procedures for Continuous Opacity Monitoring Systems in Stationary Sources, 40 CFR part 60, Appendix B.
16.2 ASTM D6216-12-Standard Practice for Opacity Monitor Manufacturers to Certify Conformance with Design and Performance Specifications, American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).
17.0 What tables, diagrams, flowcharts, and validation data are relevant to this procedure? [Reserved]
Procedure 4. [Reserved]
Procedure 5. Quality Assurance Requirements for Vapor Phase Mercury Continuous Emissions Monitoring Systems and Sorbent Trap Monitoring Systems Used for Compliance Determination at Stationary Sources
1.0 Applicability and Principle
1.1 Applicability. The purpose of Procedure 5 is to establish the minimum requirements for evaluating the effectiveness of quality control (QC) and quality assurance (QA) procedures as well as the quality of data produced by vapor phase mercury (Hg) continuous emissions monitoring systems (CEMS) and sorbent trap monitoring systems. Procedure 5 applies to Hg CEMS and sorbent trap monitoring systems used for continuously determining compliance with emission standards or operating permit limits as specified in an applicable regulation or permit. Other QA/QC procedures may apply to other auxiliary monitoring equipment that may be needed to determine Hg emissions in the units of measure specified in an applicable permit or regulation.
Procedure 5 covers the measurement of Hg emissions as defined in Performance Specification 12A (PS 12A) and Performance Specification 12B (PS 12B) in appendix B to this part, i.e., total vapor phase Hg representing the sum of the elemental (Hg°, CAS Number 7439-97-6) and oxidized (Hg+2) forms of gaseous Hg.
Procedure 5 specifies the minimum requirements for controlling and assessing the quality of Hg CEMS and sorbent trap monitoring system data submitted to EPA or a delegated permitting authority. You must meet these minimum requirements if you are responsible for one or more Hg CEMS or sorbent trap monitoring systems used for compliance monitoring. We encourage you to develop and implement a more extensive QA program or to continue such programs where they already exist.
You must comply with the basic requirements of Procedure 5 immediately following successful completion of the initial performance test described in PS 12A or PS 12B in appendix B to this part (as applicable).
1.2 Principle. The QA procedures consist of two distinct and equally important functions. One function is the assessment of the quality of the Hg CEMS or sorbent trap monitoring system data by estimating accuracy. The other function is the control and improvement of the quality of the CEMS or sorbent trap monitoring system data by implementing QC policies and corrective actions. These two functions form a control loop: When the assessment function indicates that the data quality is inadequate, the quality control effort must be increased until the data quality is acceptable. In order to provide uniformity in the assessment and reporting of data quality, this procedure explicitly specifies assessment methods for calibration drift, system integrity, and accuracy. Several of the procedures are based on those of PS 12A and PS 12B in appendix B to this part. Because the control and corrective action function encompasses a variety of policies, specifications, standards, and corrective measures, this procedure treats QC requirements in general terms to allow each source owner or operator to develop a QC system that is most effective and efficient for the circumstances.
2.0 Definitions
2.1 Mercury Continuous Emission Monitoring System (Hg CEMS) means the equipment required for the determination of the total vapor phase Hg concentration in the stack effluent. The Hg CEMS consists of the following major subsystems:
2.1.1 Sample Interface means that portion of the CEMS used for one or more of the following: sample acquisition, sample transport, sample conditioning, and protection of the monitor from the effects of the stack effluent.
2.1.2 Hg Analyzer means that portion of the Hg CEMS that measures the total vapor phase Hg concentration and generates a proportional output.
2.1.3 Data Recorder means that portion of the CEMS that provides a permanent electronic record of the analyzer output. The data recorder may provide automatic data reduction and CEMS control capabilities.
2.2 Sorbent Trap Monitoring System means the total equipment required for the collection of gaseous Hg samples using paired three-partition sorbent traps as described in PS 12B in appendix B to this part.
2.3 Span Value means the measurement range as specified for the affected source category in the applicable regulation and/or monitoring performance specification.
2.4 Zero, Mid-Level, and High Level Values means the reference gas concentrations used for calibration drift assessments and system integrity checks on a Hg CEMS, expressed as percentages of the span value (see section 7.1 of PS 12A in appendix B to this part).
2.5 Calibration Drift (CD) means the absolute value of the difference between the CEMS output response and either the upscale elemental Hg reference gas or the zero-level elemental Hg reference gas, expressed as a percentage of the span value, when the entire CEMS, including the sampling interface, is challenged after a stated period of operation during which no unscheduled maintenance, repair, or adjustment took place.
2.6 System Integrity (SI) Check means a test procedure assessing transport and measurement of oxidized Hg by a Hg CEMS. In particular, system integrity is expressed as the absolute value of the difference between the CEMS output response and the reference value of either a mid- or high-level mercuric chloride (HgCl2) reference gas, as a percentage of span, when the entire CEMS, including the sampling interface, is challenged.
2.7 Relative Accuracy (RA) means the absolute mean difference between the pollutant concentrations determined by a continuous monitoring system (e.g., Hg CEMS or sorbent trap monitoring system) and the values determined by a reference method (RM) plus the 2.5 percent error confidence coefficient of a series of tests divided by the mean of the RM tests. Alternatively, for sources with an average RM concentration less than 5.0 micrograms per standard cubic meter (µg/scm), the RA may be expressed as the absolute value of the difference between the mean CEMS and RM values.
2.8 Relative Accuracy Test Audit (RATA) means an audit test procedure consisting of at least nine runs, in which the accuracy of the total vapor phase Hg concentrations measured by a CEMS or sorbent trap monitoring system is evaluated by comparison against concurrent measurements made with a reference test method.
2.9 Quarterly Gas Audit (QGA) means an audit procedure in which the accuracy of the total vapor phase Hg concentrations measured by a CEMS is evaluated by challenging the CEMS with a zero and two upscale reference gases.
3.0 QC Requirements
3.1 Each source owner or operator must develop and implement a QC program. At a minimum, each QC program must include written procedures which should describe in detail, complete, step-by-step procedures and operations for each of the following activities (as applicable):
(a) Calibration drift (CD) checks of Hg CEMS.
(b) CD determination and adjustment of Hg CEMS.
(c) Weekly system integrity check procedures for Hg CEMS.
(d) Routine operation, maintenance, and QA/QC procedures for sorbent trap monitoring systems.
(e) Routine and preventive maintenance procedures for Hg CEMS (including spare parts inventory).
(f) Data recording, calculations, and reporting.
(g) Accuracy audit procedures for Hg CEMS and sorbent trap monitoring systems including sampling and analysis methods.
(h) Program of corrective action for malfunctioning Hg CEMS and sorbent trap monitoring systems.
These written procedures must be kept on record and available for inspection by the responsible enforcement agency. Also, as noted in section 5.2.4, below, whenever excessive inaccuracies of a Hg CEMS occur for two consecutive quarters, the source owner or operator must revise the current written procedures or modify or replace the CEMS or sorbent trap monitoring system to correct the deficiency causing the excessive inaccuracies.
4.0 Calibration Drift (CD) Assessment and Weekly System Integrity Check
4.1 CD Requirement. As described in 40 CFR 60.13(d) and 63.8(c), source owners and operators of Hg CEMS must check, record, and quantify the CD at two concentration values at least once daily (approximately 24 hours) in accordance with the method prescribed by the manufacturer. The Hg CEMS calibration must, as minimum, be adjusted whenever the daily zero (or low-level) CD or the daily high-level CD exceeds two times the limits of the applicable PS in appendix B of this part.
4.2 Recording Requirement for Automatic CD Adjusting CEMS. CEMS that automatically adjust the data to the corrected calibration values (e.g., microprocessor control) must either be programmed to record the unadjusted concentration measured in the CD prior to resetting the calibration, if performed, or to record the amount of adjustment.
4.3 Criteria for Excessive CD. If either the zero (or low-level) or high-level CD result exceeds twice the applicable drift specification in section 13.2 of PS 12A in appendix B to this part for five, consecutive, daily periods, the CEMS is out-of-control. If either the zero (or low-level) or high-level CD result exceeds four times the applicable drift specification in PS 12A during any CD check, the CEMS is out-of-control. If the CEMS is out-of-control, take necessary corrective action. Following corrective action, repeat the CD checks.
4.3.1 Out-Of-Control Period Definition. The beginning of the out-of-control period is the time corresponding to the completion of the fifth, consecutive, daily CD check with a CD in excess of two times the allowable limit, or the time corresponding to the completion of the daily CD check preceding the daily CD check that results in a CD in excess of four times the allowable limit. The end of the out-of-control period is the time corresponding to the completion of the CD check following corrective action that results in the CD's at both the zero (or low-level) and high-level measurement points being within the corresponding allowable CD limit (i.e., either two times or four times the allowable limit in the applicable PS in appendix B).
4.3.2 CEMS Data Status During Out-of-Control Period. During the period the CEMS is out-of-control, the CEMS data may not be used either to determine compliance with an emission limit or to meet a minimum data availability requirement specified in an applicable regulation or permit.
4.4 Weekly System Integrity Check. At least once every 7 operating days, using the procedure described in section 8.3.3 of Performance Specification 12A in appendix B to this part, source owners and operators of Hg CEMS must use a single mid- or high-level oxidized Hg (mercuric chloride, HgCl2) reference gas to assess transport and measurement of oxidized mercury. The absolute value of the difference between the Hg CEMS output response and the reference gas must be less than or equal to 10.0 percent of the reference gas value or 0.8 µg/scm.
5.0 Data Accuracy Assessment
5.1 Hg CEMS Audit Requirements. For each Hg CEMS, an accuracy audit must be performed at least once each calendar quarter. Successive quarterly audits must, to the extent practicable, be performed no less than 2 months apart. The audits must be conducted as follows:
5.1.1 Relative Accuracy Test Audit (RATA). A RATA of the Hg CEMS must be conducted at least once every four calendar quarters, except as otherwise noted in section 5.1.4 of this appendix. Perform the RATA as described in section 8.5 of PS 12A in appendix B to this part. Calculate the results according to section 12.4 of PS 12A.
5.1.2 Quarterly Gas Audit. A quarterly gas audit (QGA) may be conducted in three of four calendar quarters, but in no more than three quarters in succession. To perform a QGA, challenge the CEMS with a zero-level and two upscale level audit gases of known concentrations, first of elemental Hg and then of oxidized Hg, within the following ranges:
| Audit point | Audit range |
|---|---|
| 1 | 20 to 30% of span value. |
| 2 | 50 to 60% of span value. |
Sequentially inject each of the three audit gases (zero and two upscale), three times each for a total of nine injections. Inject the gases in such a manner that the entire CEMS is challenged. Do not inject the same gas concentration twice in succession.
Use elemental Hg and oxidized Hg (mercuric chloride, HgCl2) audit gases that are National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST)-certified or NIST-traceable following an EPA Traceability Protocol. If audit gas cylinders are used, do not dilute gas when challenging the Hg CEMS. For each reference gas concentration, determine the average of the three CEMS responses and subtract the average response from the reference gas value. Calculate the measurement error at each gas level using Equation 12A-1 in section 8.2 of PS 12A.
5.1.3 Relative Accuracy Audit (RAA). As an alternative to the QGA, a RAA may be conducted in three of four calendar quarters, but in no more than three quarters in succession. To conduct a RAA, follow the RATA test procedures in section 8.5 of PS 12A in appendix B to this part, except that only three test runs are required. Calculate the relative accuracy according to equation 1-1 of Procedure 1 of this appendix.
5.1.4 Alternative Quarterly Audits. Alternative quarterly audit procedures may be used as approved by the Administrator for three of four calendar quarters. One RATA is required at least every four calendar quarters, except in the case where the affected facility is off-line (does not operate) in the fourth calendar quarter since the quarter of the previous RATA. In that case, the RATA must be performed in the quarter in which the unit recommences operation. Also, quarterly gas audits (or RAAs, if applicable) are not required for calendar quarters in which the affected facility does not operate.
5.2 Sorbent Trap Monitoring System Audit Requirements. For each sorbent trap monitoring system, a RATA must be conducted at least once every four calendar quarters, except as otherwise noted in section 5.1.4 of this appendix. Perform the RATA as described in section 8.3 of PS 12B in appendix B to this part. Calculate the results according to section 12.4 of PS 12A.
5.3 Excessive Audit Inaccuracy. If the results of a RATA, QGA, or RAA exceed the applicable criteria in section 5.3.3, the Hg CEMS or sorbent trap monitoring system is out-of-control. If the Hg CEMS or sorbent trap monitoring system is out-of-control, take necessary corrective action to eliminate the problem. Following corrective action, the source owner or operator must audit the CEMS or sorbent trap monitoring system using the same type of test that failed to meet the accuracy criterion. For instance, a RATA must always be performed following an out-of-control period resulting from a failed RATA. Whenever audit results show the Hg CEMS or sorbent trap monitoring system to be out-of-control, the owner or operator must report both the results of the failed test and the results of the retest following corrective action showing the CEMS to be operating within specifications.
5.3.1 Out-Of-Control Period Definition. The beginning of the out-of-control period is the hour immediately following the completion of a RATA, RAA, QGA or system integrity check that fails to meet the applicable performance criteria in section 5.3.3, below. The end of the out-of-control period is the time corresponding to the completion of a subsequent successful test of the same type.
5.3.2 Monitoring Data Status During Out-Of-Control Period. During the period the monitor is out-of-control, the monitoring data may not be used to determine compliance with an applicable emission limit or to meet a minimum data availability requirement in an applicable regulation or permit.
5.3.3 Criteria for Excessive Audit Inaccuracy. Unless specified otherwise in an applicable regulation or permit, the criteria for excessive inaccuracy are:
(a) For the RATA, the allowable RA in the applicable PS in appendix B (e.g., PS 12A or PS 12B).
(b) For the QGA, ±15 percent of the average audit value or ±0.5 µg/m 3, whichever is greater.
(c) For the RAA, ±20 percent of the three run average or ±10 percent of the applicable standard, whichever is greater.
5.3.4 Criteria for Acceptable QC Procedures. Repeated excessive inaccuracies (i.e., out-of-control conditions resulting from the quarterly audits) indicates the QC procedures are inadequate or that the CEMS or sorbent trap monitoring system is incapable of providing quality data. Therefore, whenever excessive inaccuracies occur for two consecutive quarters, the source owner or operator must revise the QC procedures (see section 3) or modify, repair, or replace the CEMS or sorbent trap monitoring system.
6.0 Reporting Requirements
6.1 Data Assessment Report. At the reporting interval specified in the applicable regulation or permit, report for each Hg CEMS and/or sorbent trap monitoring system the accuracy assessment results from section 5, above. For Hg CEMS, also report the CD assessment results from section 4, above. Report this information as a Data Assessment Report (DAR), and include the appropriate DAR(s) with the emissions report required under the applicable regulation or permit.
6.2 Contents of the DAR. At a minimum, the DAR must contain the following information:
6.2.1 Facility name and address including identification of source owner/operator.
6.2.2 Identification and location of each Hg CEMS and/or sorbent trap monitoring system.
6.2.3 Manufacturer, model, and serial number of each Hg CEMS and/or sorbent trap monitoring system.
6.2.4 CD Assessment for each Hg CEMS, including the identification of out-of-control periods.
6.2.5 System integrity check data for each Hg CEMS.
6.2.6 Accuracy assessment for each Hg CEMS and/or sorbent trap monitoring system, including the identification of out-of-control periods. The results of all required RATAs, QGAs, RAAs, and audits of auxiliary equipment must be reported. If an accuracy audit shows a CEMS or sorbent trap monitoring system to be out-of-control, report both the audit results that caused the out-of-control period and the results of the retest following corrective action, showing the monitoring system to be operating within specifications.
6.2.7 Summary of all corrective actions taken when the Hg CEMS and/or sorbent trap monitoring system was determined to be out-of-control.
6.3 Data Retention. As required in 40 CFR 60.7(d) and 63.10(b), all measurements from CEMS and sorbent trap monitoring systems, including the quality assurance data required by this procedure, must be retained by the source owner for at least 5 years.
7.0 Bibliography
7.1 Calculation and Interpretation of Accuracy for Continuous Emission Monitoring Systems (CEMS). section 3.0.7 of the Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement Systems, Volume III, Stationary Source Specific Methods. EPA-600/4-77-027b. August 1977. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Office of Research and Development Publications, 26 West St. Clair Street, Cincinnati, OH 45268.
Procedure 6. Quality Assurance Requirements for Gaseous Hydrogen Chloride (HCl) Continuous Emission Monitoring Systems Used for Compliance Determination at Stationary Sources
1.0 Applicability and Principle
1.1 Applicability. Procedure 6 is used to evaluate the effectiveness of quality control (QC) and quality assurance (QA) procedures and evaluate the quality of data produced by any hydrogen chloride (HCl) gas, CAS: 7647-01-0, continuous emission monitoring system (CEMS) that is used for determining compliance with emission standards for HCl on a continuous basis as specified in an applicable permit or regulation.
1.1.1 This procedure specifies the minimum QA requirements necessary for the control and assessment of the quality of CEMS data submitted to the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) or a delegated authority. If you are responsible for one or more CEMS used for HCl compliance monitoring you must meet these minimum requirements and you are encouraged to develop and implement a more extensive QA program or to continue such programs where they already exist.
1.1.2 Data collected as a result of QA and QC measures required in this procedure are to be submitted to the EPA or the delegated authority in accordance with the applicable regulation or permit. These data are to be used by both the delegated authority and you, as the CEMS operator, in assessing the effectiveness of the CEMS QC and QA procedures in the maintenance of acceptable CEMS operation and valid emission data.
1.2 Principle
1.2.1 The QA procedures consist of two distinct and equally important functions. One function is the assessment of the quality of the CEMS data by estimating accuracy. The other function is the control and improvement of the quality of the CEMS data by implementing QC policies and corrective actions. These two functions form an iterative control loop. When the assessment function indicates that the data quality is inadequate, the control effort must be increased until the data quality is acceptable. In order to provide uniformity in the assessment and reporting of data quality, this procedure specifies the assessment procedures to evaluate response drift and accuracy. The procedures specified are based on Performance Specification 18 (PS-18) in appendix B to this part.
(Note: Because the control and corrective action function encompasses a variety of policies, specifications, standards and corrective measures, this procedure treats QC requirements in general terms to allow you, as source owner or operator to develop the most effective and efficient QC system for your circumstances.)
2.0 Definitions
See PS-18 of this subpart for the primary definitions used in this Procedure.
3.0 QC Requirements
3.1 You, as a source owner or operator, must develop and implement a QC program. At a minimum, each QC program must include written procedures and/or manufacturer's information which should describe in detail, complete, step-by-step procedures and operations for each of the following activities:
(a) Calibration Drift (CD) checks of CEMS;
(b) CD determination and adjustment of CEMS;
(c) Integrated Path (IP) CEMS temperature and pressure sensor accuracy checks;
(d) IP CEMS beam intensity checks;
(e) Routine and preventative maintenance of CEMS (including spare parts inventory);
(f) Data recording, calculations, and reporting;
(g) Accuracy audit procedures for CEMS including reference method(s); and
(h) Program of corrective action for malfunctioning CEMS.
3.2 These written procedures must be kept on site and available for inspection by the delegated authority. As described in section 5.4, whenever excessive inaccuracies occur for two consecutive quarters, you must revise the current written procedures, or modify or replace the CEMS to correct the deficiency causing the excessive inaccuracies.
4.0 Daily Data Quality Requirements and Measurement Standardization Procedures
4.1 CD Assessment. An upscale gas, used to meet a requirement in this section must be either a NIST-traceable reference gas or a gas certified by the gas vendor to ±5.0 percent accuracy.
4.1.1 CD Requirement. Consistent with 40 CFR 60.13(d) and 63.8(c), you, as source owners or operators of CEMS must check, record, and quantify the CD at two levels, using a zero gas and mid-level gas at least once daily (approximately every 24 hours). Perform the CD check in accordance with the procedure in applicable performance specification (e.g., section 11.8 of PS-18 in appendix B of this part). The daily zero- and mid-level CD must not exceed two times the drift limits specified in the applicable performance specification (e.g., section 13.2 of PS-18 in appendix B to this part.)
4.1.2 Recording Requirement for CD Corrective action. Corrective actions taken to bring a CEMS back in control after exceeding a CD limit must be recorded and reported with the associated CEMS data. Reporting corrective action must include the unadjusted concentration measured prior to resetting the calibration and the adjusted value after resetting the calibration to bring the CEMS back into control.
4.1.3 Dynamic Spiking Option for Mid-level CD. For extractive CEMS, you have the option to conduct a daily dynamic spiking procedure found in section 11.8.8 of PS-18 of appendix B of this part in lieu of the daily mid-level CD check. If this option is selected, the daily zero CD check is still required.
4.1.4 Out of Control Criteria for Excessive CD. As specified in § 63.8(c)(7)(i)(A), a CEMS is out of control if the zero or mid-level CD exceeds two times the applicable CD specification in the applicable PS or in the relevant standard. When a CEMS is out of control, you as owner or operator of the affected source must take the necessary corrective actions and repeat the tests that caused the system to go out of control (in this case, the failed CD check) until the applicable performance requirements are met.
4.1.5 Additional Quality Assurance for Data above Span. This procedure must be used when required by an applicable regulation and may be used when significant data above span are being collected. Furthermore, the terms of this procedure do not apply to the extent that alternate terms are otherwise specified in an applicable rule or permit.
4.1.5.1 Any time the average measured concentration of HCl exceeds 150 percent of the span value for two consecutive one-hour averages, conduct the following 'above span' CEMS response check.
4.1.5.1.1 Within a period of 24 hours (before or after) of the 'above span' period, introduce a higher, 'above span' HCl reference gas standard to the CEMS. Use 'above span' reference gas that meets the requirements of section 7.0 of PS-18 and target a concentration level between 75 and 125 percent of the highest hourly concentration measured during the period of measurements above span.
4.1.5.1.2 Introduce the reference gas at the probe for extractive CEMS or for IP-CEMS as an equivalent path length corrected concentration in the instrument calibration cell.
4.1.5.1.3 At no time may the 'above span' concentration exceed the analyzer full-scale range.
4.1.5.2 Record and report the results of this procedure as you would for a daily calibration. The 'above span' response check is successful if the value measured by the CEMS is within 20 percent of the certified value of the reference gas.
4.1.5.3 If the 'above span' response check is conducted during the period when measured emissions are above span and there is a failure to collect at least one data point in an hour due to the response check duration, then determine the emissions average for that missed hour as the average of hourly averages for the hour preceding the missed hour and the hour following the missed hour.
4.1.5.4 In the event that the 'above span' response check is not successful (i.e., the CEMS measured value is not within 20 percent of the certified value of the reference gas), then you must normalize the one-hour average stack gas values measured above the span during the 24-hour period preceding or following the 'above span' response check for reporting based on the CEMS response to the reference gas as shown in Eq. 6-1:
4.2 Beam Intensity Requirement for HCl IP-CEMS.
4.2.1 Beam Intensity Measurement. If you use a HCl IP-CEMS, you must quantify and record the beam intensity of the IP-CEMS in appropriate units at least once daily (approximately 24 hours apart) according to manufacturer's specifications and procedures.
4.2.2 Out of Control Criteria for Excessive Beam Intensity Loss. If the beam intensity falls below the level established for the operation range determined following the procedures in section 11.2 of PS-18 of this part, then your CEMS is out-of-control. This quality check is independent of whether the CEMS daily CD is acceptable. If your CEMS is out-of-control, take necessary corrective action. You have the option to repeat the beam intensity test procedures in section 11.2 of PS-18 to expand the acceptable range of acceptable beam intensity. Following corrective action, repeat the beam intensity check.
4.3 Out Of Control Period Duration for Daily Assessments. The beginning of the out-of-control period is the hour in which the owner or operator conducts a daily performance check (e.g., calibration drift or beam intensity check) that indicates an exceedance of the performance requirements established under this procedure. The end of the out-of-control period is the completion of daily assessment of the same type following corrective actions, which shows that the applicable performance requirements have been met.
4.4 CEMS Data Status During Out-of-Control Period. During the period the CEMS is out-of-control, the CEMS data may not be used in calculating compliance with an emissions limit nor be counted towards meeting minimum data availability as required and described in the applicable regulation or permit.
5.0 Data Accuracy Assessment
You must audit your CEMS for the accuracy of HCl measurement on a regular basis at the frequency described in this section, unless otherwise specified in an applicable regulation or permit. Quarterly audits are performed at least once each calendar quarter. Successive quarterly audits, to the extent practicable, shall occur no closer than 2 months apart. Annual audits are performed at least once every four consecutive calendar quarters.
5.1 Temperature and Pressure Accuracy Assessment for IP CEMS.
5.1.1 Stack or source gas temperature measurement audits for HCl IP-CEMS must be conducted and recorded at least annually in accordance with the procedure described in section 11.3 of PS-18 in appendix B to this part. As an alternative, temperature measurement devices may be replaced with certified instruments on an annual basis. Units removed from service may be bench tested against an NIST traceable sensor and reused during subsequent years. Any measurement instrument or device that is used to conduct ongoing verification of temperature measurement must have an accuracy that is traceable to NIST.
5.1.2 Stack or source gas pressure measurement audits for HCl IP-CEMS must be conducted and recorded at least annually in accordance with the procedure described in section 11.4 of PS-18 in appendix B of this part. As an alternative, pressure measurement devices may be replaced with certified instruments on an annual basis. Units removed from service may be bench tested against an NIST traceable sensor and reused during subsequent years. Any measurement instrument or device that is used to conduct ongoing verification of pressure measurement must have an accuracy that is traceable to NIST.
5.1.3 Out of Control Criteria for Excessive Parameter Verification Inaccuracy. If the temperature or pressure verification audit exceeds the criteria in sections 5.3.4.5 and 5.3.4.6, respectively, the CEMS is out-of-control. If the CEMS is out-of-control, take necessary corrective action to eliminate the problem. Following corrective action, you must repeat the failed verification audit until the temperature or pressure measurement device is operating within the applicable specifications, at which point the out-of-control period ends.
5.2 Concentration Accuracy Auditing Requirements. Unless otherwise specified in an applicable rule or permit, you must audit the HCl measurement accuracy of each CEMS at least once each calendar quarter, except in the case where the affected facility is off-line (does not operate). In that case, the audit must be performed as soon as is practicable in the quarter in which the unit recommences operation. Successive quarterly audits must, to the extent practicable, be performed no less than 2 months apart. The accuracy audits shall be conducted as follows:
5.2.1 Relative Accuracy Test Audit. A RATA must be conducted at least once every four calendar quarters, except as otherwise noted in sections 5.2.5 or 5.5 of this procedure. Perform the RATA as described in section 11.9 of PS-18 in appendix B to this part. If the HCl concentration measured by the RM during a RATA (in ppmv) is less than or equal to 20 percent of the concentration equivalent to the applicable emission standard, you must perform a Cylinder Gas Audit (CGA) or a Dynamic Spike Audit (DSA) for at least one subsequent (one of the following three) quarterly accuracy audits.
5.2.2 Quarterly Relative Accuracy Audit (RAA). A quarterly RAA may be conducted as an option to conducting a RATA in three of four calendar quarters, but in no more than three quarters in succession. To conduct an RAA, follow the test procedures in section 11.9 of PS-18 in appendix B to this part, except that only three test runs are required. The difference between the mean of the RM values and the mean of the CEMS responses relative to the mean of the RM values (or alternatively the emission standard) is used to assess the accuracy of the CEMS. Calculate the RAA results as described in section 6.2. As an alternative to an RAA, a cylinder gas audit or a dynamic spiking audit may be conducted.
5.2.3 Cylinder Gas Audit. A quarterly CGA may be conducted as an option to conducting a RATA in three of four calendar quarters, but in no more than three consecutive quarters. To perform a CGA, challenge the CEMS with a zero-level and two upscale level audit gases of known concentrations within the following ranges:
| Audit point | Audit range |
|---|---|
| 1 (Mid-Level) | 50 to 60% of span value. |
| 2 (High-Level) | 80 to 100% of span value. |
5.2.3.1 Inject each of the three audit gases (zero and two upscale) three times each for a total of nine injections. Inject the gases in such a manner that the entire CEMS is challenged. Do not inject the same gas concentration twice in succession.
5.2.3.2 Use HCl audit gases that meet the requirements of section 7 of PS-18 in appendix B to this part.
5.2.3.3 Calculate results as described in section 6.3.
5.2.4 Dynamic Spiking Audit. For extractive CEMS, a quarterly DSA may be conducted as an option to conducting a RATA in three of four calendar quarters, but in no more than three quarters in succession.
5.2.4.1 To conduct a DSA, you must challenge the entire HCl CEMS with a zero gas in accordance with the procedure in section 11.8 of PS-18 in appendix B of this part. You must also conduct the DS procedure as described in appendix A to PS-18 of appendix B to this part. You must conduct three spike injections with each of two upscale level audit gases. The upscale level gases must meet the requirements of section 7 of PS-18 in appendix B to this part and must be chosen to yield concentrations at the analyzer of 50 to 60 percent of span and 80 to 100 percent of span. Do not inject the same gas concentration twice in succession.
5.2.4.2 Calculate results as described in section 6.4. To determine CEMS accuracy, you must calculate the dynamic spiking error (DSE) for each of the two upscale audit gases using Equation A5 in appendix A to PS-18 and Equation 6-3 in section 6.4 of Procedure 6 in appendix B to this part.
5.2.5 Other Alternative Quarterly Audits. Other alternative audit procedures, as approved by the Administrator, may be used for three of four calendar quarters.
5.3 Out of Control Criteria for Excessive Audit Inaccuracy. If the results of the RATA, RAA, CGA, or DSA do not meet the applicable performance criteria in section 5.3.4, the CEMS is out-of-control. If the CEMS is out-of-control, take necessary corrective action to eliminate the problem. Following corrective action, the CEMS must pass a test of the same type that resulted in the out-of-control period to determine if the CEMS is operating within the specifications (e.g., a RATA must always follow an out-of-control period resulting from a RATA).
5.3.1 If the audit results show the CEMS to be out-of-control, you must report both the results of the audit showing the CEMS to be out-of-control and the results of the audit following corrective action showing the CEMS to be operating within specifications.
5.3.2 Out-Of-Control Period Duration for Excessive Audit Inaccuracy. The beginning of the out-of-control period is the time corresponding to the completion of the sampling for the failed RATA, RAA, CGA or DSA. The end of the out-of-control period is the time corresponding to the completion of the sampling of the subsequent successful audit.
5.3.3 CEMS Data Status During Out-Of-Control Period. During the period the CEMS is out-of-control, the CEMS data may not be used in calculating emission compliance nor be counted towards meeting minimum data availability as required and described in the applicable regulation or permit.
5.3.4 Criteria for Excessive Quarterly and Yearly Audit Inaccuracy. Unless specified otherwise in the applicable regulation or permit, the criteria for excessive inaccuracy are:
5.3.4.1 For the RATA, the CEMS must meet the RA specifications in section 13.4 of PS-18 in appendix B to this part.
5.3.4.2 For the CGA, the accuracy must not exceed 5.0 percent of the span value at the zero gas and the mid- and high-level reference gas concentrations.
5.3.4.3 For the RAA, the RA must not exceed 20.0 percent of the RMavg as calculated using Equation 6-2 in section 6.2 of this procedure whether calculated in units of HCl concentration or in units of the emission standard. In cases where the RA is calculated on a concentration (ppmv) basis, if the average HCl concentration measured by the RM during the test is less than 75 percent of the HCl concentration equivalent to the applicable standard, you may substitute the equivalent emission standard value (in ppmvw) in the denominator of Equation 6-2 in the place of RMavg and the result of this alternative calculation of RA must not exceed 15.0 percent.
5.3.4.4 For DSA, the accuracy must not exceed 5.0 percent of the span value at the zero gas and the mid- and high-level reference gas concentrations or 20.0 percent of the applicable emission standard, whichever is greater.
5.3.4.5 For the gas temperature measurement audit, the CEMS must satisfy the requirements in section 13.7 in PS-18 of appendix B to this part.
5.3.4.6 For the gas pressure measurement audit, the CEMS must satisfy the requirements in section 13.8 in PS-18 of appendix B to this part.
5.4 Criteria for Acceptable QC Procedures. Repeated excessive inaccuracies (i.e., out-of-control conditions resulting from the quarterly or yearly audits) indicate that the QC procedures are inadequate or that the CEMS is incapable of providing quality data. Therefore, whenever excessive inaccuracies occur for two consecutive quarters, you must revise the QC procedures (see section 3.0) or modify or replace the CEMS.
5.5 Criteria for Optional QA Test Frequency. If all the quality criteria are met in sections 4 and 5 of this procedure, the CEMS is in-control.
5.5.1 Unless otherwise specified in an applicable rule or permit, if the CEMS is in-control and if your source emits ≤75 percent of the HCl emission limit for each averaging period as specified in the relevant standard for eight consecutive quarters that include a minimum of two RATAs, you may revise your auditing procedures to use CGA, RAA or DSA each quarter for seven subsequent quarters following a RATA.
5.5.2 You must perform at least one RATA that meets the acceptance criteria every 2 years.
5.5.3 If you fail a RATA, RAA, CGA, or DSA, then the audit schedule in section 5.2 must be followed until the audit results meet the criteria in section 5.3.4 to start requalifying for the optional QA test frequency in section 5.5.
6.0 Calculations for CEMS Data Accuracy
6.1 RATA RA Calculation. Follow Equations 9 through 14 in section 12 of PS-18 in appendix B to this part to calculate the RA for the RATA. The RATA must be calculated either in units of the applicable emission standard or in concentration units (ppmv).
6.2 RAA Accuracy Calculation. Use Equation 6-2 to calculate the accuracy for the RAA. The RA may be calculated in concentration units (ppmv) or in the units of the applicable emission standard.
Where:
RA = Accuracy of the CEMS (percent)
MNavg = Average measured CEMS response during the audit in units of applicable standard or appropriate concentration.
RMavg = Average reference method value in units of applicable standard or appropriate concentration.
6.3 CGA Accuracy Calculation. For each gas concentration, determine the average of the three CEMS responses and subtract the average response from the audit gas value. For extractive CEMS, calculate the ME at each gas level using Equation 3A in section 12.3 of PS-18 in appendix B to this part. For IP-CEMS, calculate the ME at each gas level using Equation 6A in section 12.4.3 of PS-18 in appendix B to this part.
6.4 DSA Accuracy Calculation. DSA accuracy is calculated as a percent of span. To calculate the DSA accuracy for each upscale spike concentration, first calculate the DSE using Equation A5 in appendix A of PS-18 in appendix B to this part. Then use Equation 6-3 to calculate the average DSA accuracy for each upscale spike concentration. To calculate DSA accuracy at the zero level, use equation 3A in section 12.3 of PS-18 in appendix B to this part.
7.0 Reporting Requirements
At the reporting interval specified in the applicable regulation or permit, report for each CEMS the quarterly and annual accuracy audit results from section 6 and the daily assessment results from section 4. Unless otherwise specified in the applicable regulation or permit, include all data sheets, calculations, CEMS data records (i.e., charts, records of CEMS responses), reference gas certifications and reference method results necessary to confirm that the performance of the CEMS met the performance specifications.
7.1 Unless otherwise specified in the applicable regulations or permit, report the daily assessments (CD and beam intensity) and accuracy audit information at the interval for emissions reporting required under the applicable regulations or permits.
7.1.1 At a minimum, the daily assessments and accuracy audit information reporting must contain the following information:
a. Company name and address.
b. Identification and location of monitors in the CEMS.
c. Manufacturer and model number of each monitor in the CEMS.
d. Assessment of CEMS data accuracy and date of assessment as determined by a RATA, RAA, CGA or DSA described in section 5 including:
i. The RA for the RATA;
ii. The accuracy for the CGA, RAA, or DSA;
iiii. Temperature and pressure sensor audit results for IP-CEMS;
iv. The RM results, the reference gas certified values;
v. The CEMS responses;
vi. The calculation results as defined in section 6; and
vii. Results from the performance audit samples described in section 5 and the applicable RMs.
e. Summary of all out-of-control periods including corrective actions taken when CEMS was determined out-of-control, as described in sections 4 and 5.
7.1.2 If the accuracy audit results show the CEMS to be out-of-control, you must report both the audit results showing the CEMS to be out-of-control and the results of the audit following corrective action showing the CEMS to be operating within specifications.
8.0 Bibliography
1. EPA Traceability Protocol for Assay and Certification of Gaseous Calibration Standards, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency office of Research and Development, EPA/600/R-12/531, May 2012.
2. Method 205, “Verification of Gas Dilution Systems for Field Instrument Calibrations,” 40 CFR part 51, appendix M.
9.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts [Reserved]
Procedure 7. Quality Assurance Requirements for Gaseous Ethylene Exide (ETO) Continuous Emission Monitoring Systems Used for Compliance Determination
1.0 Applicability and Principle
1.1 Applicability. Procedure 7 is used to evaluate the effectiveness of quality control (QC) and quality assurance (QA) procedures and to evaluate the quality of data produced by any ethylene oxide (EtO) gas, CAS: 75-21-8, continuous emission monitoring system (CEMS) that is used for determining compliance with emission standards for EtO on a continuous basis as specified in an applicable permit or regulation.
1.1.1 This procedure specifies the minimum QA requirements necessary for the control and assessment of the quality of CEMS data submitted to the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) or a delegated authority. If you are responsible for one or more CEMS used for EtO compliance monitoring you must meet these minimum requirements and you are encouraged to develop and implement a more extensive QA program or to continue such programs where they already exist.
1.1.2 Data collected as a result of QA and quality control (QC) measures required in this procedure are to be submitted to the EPA or the delegated authority in accordance with the applicable regulation or permit. These data are to be used by both the delegated authority and you, as the CEMS operator, in assessing the effectiveness of the CEMS QC and QA procedures in the maintenance of acceptable CEMS operation and valid emission data.
1.2 Principle
1.2.1 The QA procedures consist of two distinct and equally important functions. One function is the assessment of the quality of the CEMS data by estimating accuracy. The other function is the control and improvement of the quality of the CEMS data by implementing QC policies and corrective actions. These two functions form an iterative control loop. When the assessment function indicates that the data quality is inadequate, the control effort must be increased until the data quality is acceptable. In order to provide uniformity in the assessment and reporting of data quality, this procedure specifies the assessment procedures to evaluate response drift and accuracy. The procedures specified are based on Performance Specification 19 (PS-19) in appendix B to this part.
2.0 Definitions
See PS-19 in appendix B to this part for the primary definitions used in this Procedure.
3.0 QC Requirements
3.1 You, as a source owner or operator, must develop and implement a QC program. At a minimum, each QC program must include written procedures and/or manufacturer's information which should describe in detail, complete, step-by-step procedures and operations for each of the following activities:
(a) Calibration Drift (CD) checks of CEMS;
(b) CD determination and adjustment of CEMS;
(c) Routine and preventative maintenance of CEMS (including spare parts inventory);
(d) Data recording, calculations, and reporting;
(e) Accuracy audit procedures for CEMS including reference method(s); and
(f) Program of corrective action for malfunctioning CEMS.
3.2 These written procedures must be kept on site and available for inspection by the delegated authority. As described in section 5.4, whenever excessive inaccuracies occur for two consecutive quarters, you must revise the current written procedures, or modify or replace the CEMS to correct the deficiency causing the excessive inaccuracies.
4.0 Daily Data Quality Requirements and Measurement Standardization Procedures
4.1 CD Assessment. An upscale gas, used to meet a requirement in this section must be a gas meeting the requirements in section 7.1 of PS-19 of appendix B to this part.
4.1.1 CD Requirement. Consistent with § 60.13(d) and with § 63.8(c) of this chapter, you, as source owners or operators of CEMS must check, record, and quantify the CD at two levels, using a zero gas and high-level gas at least once daily (approximately every 24 hours). Perform the CD check in accordance with the procedure in the applicable performance specification (e.g., section 11.3 of PS-19 in appendix B to this part). The daily zero- and high-level CD must not exceed two times the drift limits specified in the applicable performance specification (e.g., section 13.2 of PS-19 in appendix B to this part.)
4.1.2 Recording Requirement for CD Corrective action. Corrective actions taken to bring a CEMS back in control after exceeding a CD limit must be recorded and reported with the associated CEMS data. Reporting of a corrective action must include the unadjusted concentration measured prior to resetting the calibration and the adjusted value after resetting the calibration to bring the CEMS back into control.
4.1.3 Dynamic Spiking Option for high-level CD. You have the option to conduct a daily dynamic spiking procedure found in section 11.5.8 of PS-19 of appendix B to this part in lieu of the daily high-level CD check. If this option is selected, the daily zero CD check is still required.
4.1.4 Out of Control Criteria for Excessive CD. Consistent with § 63.8(c)(7)(i)(A) of this chapter, an EtO CEMS is out of control if the zero or high-level CD exceeds two times the applicable CD specification in the applicable performance specification or in the relevant standard. When a CEMS is out of control, you as owner or operator of the affected source must take the necessary corrective actions and repeat the tests that caused the system to go out of control (in this case, the failed CD check) until the applicable performance requirements are met.
4.1.5 Additional Quality Assurance for Data Above Span. This procedure must be used when required by an applicable regulation and may be used when significant data above span are being collected. Furthermore, the terms of this procedure do not apply to the extent that alternate terms are otherwise specified in an applicable rule or permit.
4.1.5.1 Any time the average measured concentration of EtO exceeds 200 percent of the span value for two consecutive one-hour averages, conduct the following 'above span' CEMS response check.
4.1.5.1.1 Within a period of 24 hours (before or after) of the 'above span' period, introduce a higher, 'above span' EtO reference gas standard to the CEMS. Use 'above span' reference gas that meets the requirements of section 7.0 of PS-19 in appendix B to this part and target a concentration level between 75 and 125 percent of the highest hourly concentration measured during the period of measurements above span or 5 ppmv whichever is greater.
4.1.5.1.2 Introduce the reference gas at the probe for extractive CEMS.
4.1.5.1.3 At no time may the 'above span' concentration exceed the analyzer full-scale range.
4.1.5.2 Record and report the results of this procedure as you would for a daily calibration. The 'above span' response check is successful if the value measured by the CEMS is within 20 percent of the certified value of the reference gas.
4.1.5.3 If the 'above span' response check is conducted during the period when measured emissions are above span and there is a failure to collect at least one data point in an hour due to the response check duration, then determine the emissions average for that missed hour as the average of hourly averages for the hour preceding the missed hour and the hour following the missed hour.
4.1.5.4 In the event that the 'above span' response check is not successful (i.e., the CEMS measured value is not within 20 percent of the certified value of the reference gas), then you must normalize the one-hour average stack gas values measured above the span during the 24-hour period preceding or following the 'above span' response check for reporting based on the CEMS response to the reference gas as shown in Eq. 7-1:
4.2 Out of Control Period Duration for Daily Assessments. The beginning of the out-of-control period is the hour in which the owner or operator conducts a daily performance check (e.g., calibration drift) that indicates an exceedance of the performance requirements established under this procedure. The end of the out-of-control period is the completion of daily assessment of the same type following corrective actions, which shows that the applicable performance requirements have been met.
4.3 CEMS Data Status During Out-of-Control Period. During the period the CEMS is out-of- control, the CEMS data may not be used in calculating compliance with an emissions limit nor be counted towards meeting minimum data availability as required and described in the applicable regulation or permit.
5.0 Data Accuracy Assessment
You must audit your CEMS for the accuracy of EtO measurement on a regular basis at the frequency described in this section, unless otherwise specified in an applicable regulation or permit. Quarterly audits are performed at least once each calendar quarter. Successive quarterly audits, to the extent practicable, shall occur no closer than 2 months apart. Annual audits are performed at least once every four consecutive calendar quarters.
5.1 Concentration Accuracy Auditing Requirements. Unless otherwise specified in an applicable regulation or permit, you must audit the EtO measurement accuracy of each CEMS at least once each calendar quarter, except in the case where the affected facility is off-line (does not operate). In that case, the audit must be performed as soon as is practicable in the quarter in which the unit recommences operation. Successive quarterly audits must, to the extent practicable, be performed no less than 2 months apart. The accuracy audits shall be conducted as follows:
5.1.1 Relative Accuracy Test Audit (RATA). A RATA must be conducted at least once every four calendar quarters, except as otherwise noted in sections 5.1.5 or 5.5 of this procedure. Perform the RATA as described in section 11.6 of PS-19 in appendix B to this part. If the EtO concentration measured by the RM during a RATA (in ppmv or other units of the standard) is less than or equal to 20 percent of the concentration equivalent to the applicable emission standard, you must perform a Cylinder Gas Audit (CGA) or a Dynamic Spike Audit (DSA) for at least one subsequent (one of the following three) quarterly accuracy audits.
5.1.2 Quarterly Relative Accuracy Audit (RAA). A quarterly RAA may be conducted as an option to conducting a RATA in three of four calendar quarters, but in no more than three quarters in succession. To conduct an RAA, follow the test procedures in section 11.6 of PS-19 in appendix B to this part, except that only three test runs are required. The difference between the mean of the RM values and the mean of the CEMS responses relative to the mean of the values (or alternatively the emission standard) is used to assess the accuracy of the CEMS. Calculate the RAA results as described in section 6.2. As an alternative to an RAA, a cylinder gas audit or a dynamic spiking audit may be conducted.
5.1.3 Cylinder Gas Audit. A quarterly CGA may be conducted as an option to conducting a RATA in three of four calendar quarters, but in no more than three consecutive quarters. To perform a CGA, challenge the CEMS with a zero-level and two upscale level audit gases of known concentrations within the following ranges:
| Audit point | Audit range |
|---|---|
| 1 (Mid-Level) | 50 to 60% of span value. |
| 2 (High-Level) | 80 to 100% of span value. |
5.1.3.1 Inject each of the three audit gases (zero and two upscale) three times each for a total of nine injections. Inject the gases so that the entire measurement system is challenged. Do not inject the same gas concentration twice in succession.
5.1.3.2 Use EtO audit gases that meet the requirements of section 7 of PS-19 in appendix B to this part.
5.2.3.3 Calculate results as described in section 6.3.
5.1.4 Dynamic Spiking Audit. A quarterly DSA may be conducted as an option to conducting a RATA in three of four calendar quarters, but in no more than three quarters in succession.
5.1.4.1 To conduct a DSA, you must challenge the entire EtO CEMS with a zero gas in accordance with the procedure in section 11.8 of PS-19 in appendix B of this part. You must also conduct the DS procedure as described in appendix A to PS-19 of appendix B to this part. You must conduct three spike injections with each of two upscale level audit gases. The upscale level gases must meet the requirements of section 7 of PS-19 in appendix B to this part and must be chosen to yield concentrations at the analyzer of 50 to 60 percent of span and 80 to 100 percent of span. Do not inject the same spike gas concentration twice in succession.
5.1.4.2 Calculate results as described in section 6.4. To determine CEMS accuracy, you must calculate the dynamic spiking error (DSE) for each of the two upscale audit gases using equation A5 in appendix A to PS-19 and equation 7-3 in section 6.4 of this Procedure.
5.1.5 Other Alternative Quarterly Audits. Other alternative audit procedures, as approved by the Administrator, may be used for three of four calendar quarters.
5.2 Out of Control Criteria for Excessive Audit Inaccuracy. If the results of the RATA, RAA, CGA, or DSA do not meet the applicable performance criteria in section 5.2.4, the CEMS is out-of-control. If the CEMS is out-of-control, take necessary corrective action to eliminate the problem. Following corrective action, the CEMS must pass a test of the same type that resulted in the out-of-control period to determine if the CEMS is operating within the specifications (e.g., a RATA must always follow an out-of-control period resulting from a RATA).
5.2.1 If the audit results show the CEMS to be out-of-control, you must report both the results of the audit showing the CEMS to be out-of-control and the results of the audit following corrective action showing the CEMS to be operating within specifications.
5.2.2 Out-Of-Control Period Duration for Excessive Audit Inaccuracy. The beginning of the out-of-control period is the time corresponding to the completion of the sampling for the failed RATA, RAA, CGA or DSA. The end of the out-of-control period is the time corresponding to the completion of the sampling of the subsequent successful audit.
5.2.3 CEMS Data Status During Out-Of-Control Period. During the period the CEMS is out-of- control, the CEMS data may not be used in calculating emission compliance nor be counted towards meeting minimum data availability as required and described in the applicable regulation or permit.
5.2.4 Criteria for Excessive Quarterly and Yearly Audit Inaccuracy. Unless specified otherwise in the applicable regulation or permit, the criteria for excessive inaccuracy are:
5.2.4.1 For the RATA, the CEMS must meet the RA specifications in section 13.4 of PS-19 in appendix B to this part.
5.2.4.2 For the CGA, the accuracy must not exceed 10.0 percent of the span value at the zero gas and the mid- and high-level reference gas concentrations.
5.2.4.3 For the RAA, the RA must not exceed 20.0 percent of the RMavg as calculated using equation 7-2 in section 6.2 of this procedure whether calculated in units of EtO concentration or in units of the emission standard. In cases where the RA is calculated on a concentration (ppbv) basis, if the average EtO concentration measured by the RM during the test is less than 75 percent of the EtO concentration equivalent to the applicable standard, you may substitute the equivalent emission standard value (in ppbw) in the denominator of equation 7-2 in the place of RMavg and the result of this alternative calculation of RA must not exceed 15.0 percent.
5.2.4.4 For DSA, the accuracy must not exceed 5.0 percent of the span value at the zero gas and the mid- and high-level reference gas concentrations or 20.0 percent of the applicable emission standard, whichever is greater.
5.3 Criteria for Acceptable QC Procedures. Repeated excessive inaccuracies (i.e., out-of-control conditions resulting from the quarterly or yearly audits) indicate that the QC procedures are inadequate or that the CEMS is incapable of providing quality data. Therefore, whenever excessive inaccuracies occur for two consecutive quarters, you must revise the QC procedures (see section 3.0) or modify or replace the CEMS.
5.4 Criteria for Optional QA Test Frequency. If all the quality criteria are met in sections 4 and 5 of this procedure, the CEMS is in-control.
5.5.1 Unless otherwise specified in an applicable rule or permit, if the CEMS is in-control and if your source emits ≤75 percent of the EtO emission limit for each averaging period as specified in the relevant standard for eight consecutive quarters that include a minimum of two RATAs, you may revise your auditing procedures to use CGA, RAA or DSA each quarter for seven subsequent quarters following a RATA.
5.5.2 You must perform at least one RATA that meets the acceptance criteria every 2 years.
5.5.3 If you fail a RATA, RAA, CGA, or DSA, then the audit schedule in section 5.2 must be followed until the audit results meet the criteria in section 5.3.4 to start requalifying for the optional QA test frequency in section 5.5.
6.0 Calculations for CEMS Data Accuracy
6.1 RATA RA Calculation. Follow equations 9 through 14 in section 12 of PS-19 in appendix B to this part to calculate the RA for the RATA. The RATA must be calculated either in units of the applicable emission standard or in concentration units (ppbv).
6.2 RAA Accuracy Calculation. Use equation 7-2 to calculate the accuracy for the RAA. The RA may be calculated in concentration units (ppmv) or in the units of the applicable emission standard.
Where:
RA = Accuracy of the CEMS (percent)
MNavg = Average measured CEMS response during the audit in units of applicable standard or appropriate concentration.
RMavg = Average reference method value in units of applicable standard or appropriate concentration.
6.3 CGA Accuracy Calculation. For each gas concentration, determine the average of the three CEMS responses and subtract the average response from the audit gas value. For extractive CEMS, calculate the ME at each gas level using equation 3A in section 12.3 of PS-19 of appendix B to this part.
6.4 DSA Accuracy Calculation. DSA accuracy is calculated as a percent of span. To calculate the DSA accuracy for each upscale spike concentration, first calculate the DSE using equation A5 in appendix A of PS-19 in appendix B to this part. Then use equation 7-3 to calculate the average DSA accuracy for each upscale spike concentration. To calculate DSA accuracy at the zero level, use equation 3A in section 12.3 of PS-19 in appendix B to this part.
7.0 Reporting Requirements
At the reporting interval specified in the applicable regulation or permit, report for each CEMS the quarterly and annual accuracy audit results from section 6 and the daily assessment results from section 4. Unless otherwise specified in the applicable regulation or permit, include all data sheets, calculations, CEMS data records (i.e., charts, records of CEMS responses), reference gas certifications and reference method results necessary to confirm that the performance of the CEMS met the performance specifications.
7.1 Unless otherwise specified in the applicable regulations or permit, report the daily assessments (CD and beam intensity) and accuracy audit information at the interval for emissions reporting required under the applicable regulations or permits.
7.1.1 At a minimum, the daily assessments and accuracy audit information reporting must contain the following information:
a. Company name and address.
b. Identification and location of monitors in the CEMS.
c. Manufacturer and model number of each monitor in the CEMS.
d. Assessment of CEMS data accuracy and date of assessment as determined by a RATA, RAA, CGA or DSA described in section 5 including:
i. The RA for the RATA;
ii. The accuracy for the CGA, RAA, or DSA;
iii. The RM results, the reference gas certified values;
iv. The CEMS responses;
v. The calculation results as defined in section 6; and
vi. Results from the performance audit samples described in section 5 and the applicable RMs.
e. Summary of all out-of-control periods including corrective actions taken when CEMS was determined out-of-control, as described in sections 4 and 5. 7.1.2 If the accuracy audit results show the CEMS to be out-of-control, you must report both the audit results showing the CEMS to be out-of-control and the results of the audit following corrective action showing the CEMS to be operating within specifications.
7.1.2 If the accuracy audit results show the CEMS to be out-of-control, you must report both the audit results showing the CEMS to be out-of-control and the results of the audit following corrective action showing the CEMS to be operating within specifications.
8.0 Bibliography
1. EPA Traceability Protocol for Assay and Certification of Gaseous Calibration Standards, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency office of Research and Development, EPA/600/R-12/531, May 2012.
2. Method 205, “Verification of Gas Dilution Systems for Field Instrument Calibrations,” 40 CFR part 51, appendix M.
9.0 [Reserved]
[52 FR 21008, June 4, 1987; 52 FR 27612, July 22, 1987, as amended at 56 FR 5527, Feb. 11, 1991; 69 FR 1816, Jan. 12, 2004; 72 FR 32768, June 13, 2007; 74 FR 12590, Mar. 25, 2009; 75 FR 55040, Sept. 9, 2010; 79 FR 11274, Feb. 27, 2014; 79 FR 28441, May 16, 2014; 80 FR 38649, July 7, 2015; 81 FR 59824, Aug. 30, 2016; 82 FR 37824, Aug. 14, 2017; 82 FR 44108, Sept. 21, 2017; 83 FR 56725, Nov. 14, 2018; 85 FR 63418, Oct. 7, 2020; 88 FR 18411, Mar. 29, 2023; 89 FR 24168, Apr. 5, 2024]
Appendix G to Part 60—Provisions for an Alternative Method of Demonstrating Compliance With 40 CFR 60.43 for the Newton Power Station of Central Illinois Public Service Company
1. Designation of Affected Facilities
1.1 The affected facilities to which this alternative compliance method applies are the Unit 1 and 2 coal-fired steam generating units located at the Central Illinois Public Service Company's (CIPS) Newton Power Station in Jasper County, Illinois. Each of these units is subject to the Standards of Performance for Fossil-Fuel-Fired Steam Generators for Which Construction Commenced After August 17, 1971 (subpart D).
2. Definitions
2.1 All definitions in subparts D and Da of part 60 apply to this provision except that:
24-hour period means the period of time between 12:00 midnight and the following midnight.
Boiler operating day means a 24-hour period during which any fossil is combusted in either the Unit 1 or Unit 2 steam generating unit and during which the provisions of § 60.43(e) are applicable.
CEMs means continuous emission monitoring system.
Coal bunker means a single or group of coal trailers, hoppers, silos or other containers that:
(1) are physically attached to the affected facility; and
(2) provide coal to the coal pulverizers.
DAFGDS means the dual alkali flue gas desulfurization system for the Newton Unit 1 steam generating unit.
3. Compliance Provisions
3.1 If the owner or operator of the affected facility elects to comply with the 470 ng/J (1.1 lbs/MMBTU) of combined heat input emission limit under § 60.43(e), he shall notify the Regional Administrator, of the United States Environmental Protection Agency (USEPA), Region 5 and the Director, of the Illinois Environmental Protection Agency (IEPA) at least 30 days in advance of the date such election is to take effect, stating the date such operation is to commence. When the owner or operator elects to comply with this limit after one or more periods of reverting to the 520 ng/J heat input (1.2 lbs/MMBTU) limit of § 60.43(a)(2), as provided under 3.4, he shall notify the Regional Administrator of the USEPA, Region 5 and the Director of the (IEPA) in writing at least ten (10) days in advance of the date such election is to take effect.
3.2 Compliance with the sulfur dioxide emission limit under § 60.43(e) is determined on a continuous basis by performance testing using CEMs. Within 60 days after the initial operation of Units 1 and 2 subject to the combined emission limit in § 60.43(e), the owner or operator shall conduct an initial performance test, as required by § 60.8, to determine compliance with the combined emission limit. This initial performance test is to be scheduled so that the thirtieth boiler operating day of the 30 successive boiler operating days is completed within 60 days after initial operation subject to the 470 ng/J (1.1 lbs/MMBTU) combined emission limit. Following the initial performance test, a separate performance test is completed at the end of each boiler operating day Unit 1 and Unit 2 are subject to § 60.43(e), and a new 30 day average emission rate calculated.
3.2.1 Following the initial performance test, a new 30 day average emission rate is calculated for each boiler operating day the affected facility is subject to § 60.43(e). If the owner or operator of the affected facility elects to comply with § 60.43(e) after one or more periods of reverting to the 520 ng/J heat input (1.2 lbs/MMBTU) limit under § 60.43(a)(2), as provided under 3.4, the 30 day average emission rate under § 60.43(e) is calculated using emissions data of the current boiler operating day and data for the previous 29 boiler operating days when the affected facility was subject to § 60.43(e). Periods of operation of the affected facility under § 60.43(a)(2) are not considered boiler operating days. Emissions data collected during operation under § 60.43(a)(2) are not considered relative to 4.6 and emissions data are not included in calculations of emission under § 60.43(e).
3.2.2 When the affected facility is operated under the provisions of § 60.43(e), the Unit 1 DAFGDS bypass damper must be fully closed. The DAFGDS bypass may be opened only during periods of DAFGDS startup, shutdown, malfunction or testing as described under sections 3.5.1, 3.5.2, 3.5.3, 3.5.4, and 4.8.2.
3.3 Compliance with the sulfur dioxide emission limit set forth in § 60.43(e) is based on the average combined hourly emission rate from Units 1 and 2 for 30 successive boiler operating days determined as follows:
where:
n = the number of available hourly combined emission rate values in the 30 successive boiler operating day period where Unit 1 and Unit 2 are subject to § 60.43(e).
E30 = average emission rate for 30 successive boiler operating days where Unit 1 and Unit 2 are subject to § 60.43(e).
EC = the hourly combined emission rate from Units 1 and 2, in ng/J or lbs/MMBTU.
3.3.1 The average hourly combined emission rate for Units 1 and 2for each hour of operation of either Unit 1 or 2, or both, is determined as follows:
EC=[(E1) + (E2)]/[H1 + H2]
where:
EC = the hourly combined SO2 emission rate, lbs/MMBTU, from Units 1 and 2 when Units 1 and 2 are subject to § 60.43(e).
E1 = the hourly SO2 mass emission, lb/hr, from Unit 1 as determined from CEMs data using the calculation procedures in section 4 of this appendix.
E2 = the hourly SO2 mass emission, lb/hr, from Unit 2 as determined from CEMs data using the calculation procedures in section 4 of this appendix.
H1 = the hourly heat input, MMBTU/HR to Unit 1 as determined in section 4 of this appendix.
H2 = the hourly heat input, MMBTU/HR, to Unit 2 as determined by section 4 of this appendix.
3.3.2 If data for any of the four hourly parameters (E1, E2, H1and H2, under 3.3.1 are unavailable during an hourly period, the combined emission rate (EC) is not calculated and the period is counted as missing data under 4.6.1., except as provided under 3.5. and 4.4.2.
3.4 After the date of initial operation subject to the combined emission limit, Units 1 and 2 shall remain subject to the combined emission limit and the owner or operator shall remain subject to the requirements of this Appendix until the initial performance test as required by 3.2 is completed and the owner or operator of the affected facility elects and provides notice to revert on a certain date to the 520 ng/J heat input (1.2 lbs/MMBTU) limit of § 60.43(a)(2) applicable separately at each unit. The Regional Administrator of the USEPA, Region 5 and the Director, of the IEPA shall be given written notification from CIPS as soon as possible of CIPs' decision to revert to the 520 ng/J heat input (1.2 lbs/MMBTU) limit of § 60.43(a)(2) separately at each unit, but no later than 10 days in advance of the date such election is to take effect.
3.5 Emission monitoring data for Unit 1 may be excluded from calculations of the 30 day rolling average only during the following times:
3.5.1 Periods of DAFGDS startup.
3.5.2 Periods of DAFGDS shutdown.
3.5.3 Periods of DAFGDS malfunction during system emergencies as defined in § 60.41a.
3.5.4 The first 250 hours per calendar year of DAFGDS malfunctions of Unit 1 DAFGDS provided that efforts are made to minimize emissions from Unit 1 in accordance with § 60.11(d), and if, after 16 hours but not more than 24 hours of DAFGDS malfunction, the owner or operator of the affected facility begins (following the customary loading procedures) loading into the Unit 1 coal bunker, coal with a potential SO2 emission rate equal to or less than the emission rate of Unit 2 recorded at the beginning of the DAFGDS malfunction. Malfunction periods under 3.5.3 are not counted toward the 250 hour/yr limit under this section.
3.5.4.1 The malfunction exemption in 3.5.4 is limited to the first 250 hours per calendar year of DAFGDS malfunction.
3.5.4.2 For malfunctions of the DAFGDS after the 250 hours per calendar year limit (cumulative), other than those defined in 3.5.3, the owner or operator of the affected facility shall combust lower sulfur coal or use any other method to comply with the 470 ng/J (1.1 lbs/MMBTU) combined emission limit.
3.5.4.3 During the first 250 hours of DAFGDS malfunction per year or during periods of DAFGDS startup, or DAFGDS shutdown, CEMs emissions data from Unit 2 shall continue to be included in the daily calculation of the combined 30 day rolling average emission rate; that is, the load on Unit 1 is assumed to be zero (H1 and E1 = O; EC = E2/H2).
3.5.5-3.5.7 [Reserved]
3.6 The provision for excluding CEMs data from Unit 1 during the first 250 hours of DAFGDS malfunctions from combined hourly emissions calculations supersedes the provisions of § 60.11(d). However, the general purpose contained in § 60.11(d) (i.e., following good control practices to minimize air pollution emission during malfunctions) has not been superseded.
4. Continuous Emission Monitoring
4.1 The CEMs required under section 3.2 are operated and data are recorded for all periods of operation of the affected facility including periods of the DAFGDS startup, shutdown and malfunction except for CEMs breakdowns, repairs, calibration checks, and zero and span adjustment. All provisions of § 60.45 apply except as follows:
4.2 The owner or operator shall install, calibrate, maintain, and operate CEMs and monitoring devices for measuring the following:
4.2.1 For Unit 1:
4.2.1.1 Sulfur dioxide, oxygen or carbon dioxide, and volumetric flow rate for the Unit 1 DAFGDS stack.
4.2.1.2 Sulfur dioxide, oxygen or carbon dioxide, and volumetric flow rate for the Unit 1 DAFGDS bypass stack.
4.2.1.3 Moisture content of the flue gas must be determined continuously for the Unit 1 DAFGDS stack and the Unit 1 DAFGDS bypass stack, if the sulfur dioxide concentration in each stack is measured on a dry basis.
4.2.2 For Unit 2, sulfur dioxide, oxygen or carbon dioxide, and volumetric flow rate.
4.2.2.1 Moisture content of the flue gas must be determined continuously for the Unit 2 stack, if the sulfur dioxide concentration in the stack is measured on a dry basis.
4.2.3 For Units 1 and 2, the hourly heat input, the hourly steam production rate, or the hourly gross electrical power output from each unit.
4.3 For the Unit 1 bypass stack and the Unit 2 stack, the span value of the sulfur dioxide analyzer shall be equivalent to 200 percent of the maximum estimated hourly potential sulfur dioxide emissions of the fuel fired in parts per million sulfur dioxide. For the Unit 1 DAFGDS stack, the span value of the sulfur dioxide analyzer shall be equivalent to 100 percent of the maximum estimated hourly potential emissions of the fuel fired in parts per million sulfur dioxide. The span value for volumetric flow monitors shall be equivalent to 125 percent of the maximum estimated hourly flow in standard cubic meters/minute (standard cubic feet per minute). The span value of the continuous moisture monitors, if required by 4.2.1.3 and 4.2.2.1, shall be equivalent to 100 percent by volume. The span value of the oxygen or carbon dioxide analyzers shall be equivalent to 25 percent by volume.
4.3.1-4.3.2 [Reserved]
4.4 The monitoring devices required in 4.2 shall be installed, calibrated, and maintained as follows:
4.4.1 Each volumetric flow rate monitoring device specified in 4.2 shall be installed at approximately the same location as the sulfur dioxide emission monitoring sample location.
4.4.2 Hourly steam production rate and hourly electrical power output monitoring devices for Unit 1 and Unit 2 shall be calibrated and maintained according to manufacturer's specifications. The data from either of these devices may be used in the calculation of the combined emission rate in section 3.3.1, only when the hourly heat input for Unit 1 (H1) or the hourly heat input for Unit 2 (H2) cannot be determined from CEM data, and the hourly heat input to steam production or hourly heat input to electrical power output efficiency over a given segment of each boiler or generator operating range, respectively, varies by less than 5 percent within the specified operating range, or the efficiencies of the boiler/generator units differ by less than 5 percent. The hourly heat input for Unit 1 (H1) or the hourly heat input for Unit 2 (H2) in section 3.3.1 may also be calculated based on the fuel firing rates and fuel analysis.
4.4.3-4.4.5 [Reserved]
4.5 The hourly mass emissions from Unit 1 (E1) and Unit 2 (E2) and the hourly heat inputs from Unit 1 (H1) and Unit 2 (H2) used to determine the hourly combined emission rate for Units 1 and 2 (EC) in section 3.3.1 are calculated using CEM data for each respective stack as follows:
4.5.1 The hourly SO2 mass emission from each respective stack is determined as follows:
E = (C) (F) (D) (K)
Where:
E = SO2 mass emission from the respective stack in lb per hour
C = SO2 concentration from the respective stack ppm
F = flue gas flow rate from the respective stack in scfm
D = density of SO2 in lb per standard cubic feet
K = time conversion, 60 mins./hr
4.5.2 The hourly heat input from each respective stack is determined as follows:
H=[(F) (C) (K)/(Fc)
where:
H = heat input from the respective stack in MMBTU per hour
C = CO2 or O2 concentration from the respective stack as a decimal
F = flue gas flow rate from the respective stack in scfm
K = time conversion, 60 mins./hr
Fc = fuel constant for the appropriate diluent in scf/MMBTU as per §§ 60.45(f) (4) and (5)
4.5.3 The hourly SO2 mass emission for Unit 1 in pounds per hour (E1) is calculated as follows, when leakage or diversion of any DAFGDS inlet gas to the bypass stack occurs:
E1 = (EF) + (EB)
Where:
EF = Hourly SO2 mass emission measured in DAFGDS stack, lb/hr, using the calculation in section 4.5.1.
EB = Hourly SO2 mass emission measured in bypass stack, lb/hr, using the calculation in section 4.5.1.
Other than during conditions under 3.5.1, 3.5.2, 3.5.3, 3.5.4, or 4.8.2, the DAFGDS bypass damper must be fully closed and any leakage will be indicated by the bypass stack volumetric flow and SO2 measurements, and when no leakage through the bypass damper is indicated:
E1 = EF
4.5.4 The hourly heat input for Unit 1 in MMBTU per hour (H1) is calculated as follows, when leakage or diversion of any DAFGDS inlet gas to the bypass stack occurs:
H1 = (HF) + (HB)
where:
HF = Hourly heat input as determined from the DAFGDS stack CEMs, in MMBTU per hour, using the calculation in section 4.5.2
HB = Hourly heat input as determined from the DAFGDS bypass stack CEMs, in MMBTU per hour, using the calculation in section 4.5.2
4.6 For the CEMs required for Unit 1 and Unit 2, the owner or operator of the affected facility shall maintain and operate the CEMs and obtain combined emission data values (EC) for at least 75 percent of the boiler operting hours per day for at least 26 out of each 30 successive boiler operating days.
4.6.1 When hourly SO2 emission data are not obtained by the CEMs because of CEMs breakdowns, repairs, calibration checks and zero and span adjustment, hourly emission data required by 4.6 are obtained by using Methods 6 or 6C and 3 or 3A, 6A, or 8 and 3, or by other alternative methods approved by the Regional Administrator of the USEPA, Region 5 and the Director, of the IEPA. Failure to obtain the minimum data requirements of 4.6 by CEMs, or by CEMs supplemented with alternative methods of this section, is a violation of performance testing requirements.
4.6.2 Independent of complying with the minimum data requirements of 4.6, all valid emissions data collected are used to calculate combined hourly emission rates (EC) and 30-day rolling average emission rates (E30) are calculated and used to judge compliance with 60.43(e).
4.7 For each continuous emission monitoring system, a quality control plan shall be prepared by CIPS and submitted to the Regional Administrator of the USEPA, Region 5 and the Director, of the IEPA. The plan is to be submitted to the Regional Administrator of the USEPA, Region 5 and the Director, of the IEPA 45 days before initiation of the initial performance test. At a minimum, the plan shall contain the following quality control elements:
4.7.1 Calibration of continuous emission monitoring systems (CEMs) and volumetric flow measurement devices.
4.7.2 Calibration drift determination and adjustment of CEMs and volumetric flow measurement devices.
4.7.3 Periodic CEMs, volumetric flow measurement devices and relative accuracy determinations.
4.7.4 Preventive maintenance of CEMs and volumetric flow measurement devices (including spare parts inventory).
4.7.5 Data recording and reporting.
4.7.6 Program of corrective action for malfunctioning CEMs and volumetric flow measurement devices.
4.7.7 Criteria for determining when the CEMs and volumetric flow measurement devices are not producing valid data.
4.7.8 Calibration and periodic checks of monitoring devices identified in 4.4.2.
4.8 For the purpose of conducting the continuous emission monitoring system performance specification tests as required by § 60.13 and appendix B, the following conditions apply:
4.8.1 The calibration drift specification of Performance Specification 2, appendix B shall be determined separately for each of the Unit 1 SO2 CEMs and the Unit 2 SO2 CEMs. The calibration drift specification of Performance Specification 3, appendix B shall be determined separately for each of the Unit 1 diluent CEMs and Unit 2 diluent CEMs.
4.8.2 The relative accuracy of the combined SO2 emission rate for Unit 1 and Unit 2, as calculated from CEMs and volumetric flow data using the procedures in 3.3.1, 4.5.1, 4.5.2 and 4.5.3 shall be no greater than 20 percent of the mean value of the combined emission rate, as determined from testing conducted simultaneously on the DAFGDS stack, the DAFGDS bypass stack and the Unit 2 stack using reference methods 2, 3, or 3A and 6 or 6C, or shall be no greater than 10 percent of the emission limit in § 60.43(e), whichever criteria is less stringent. The relative accuracy shall be computed from at least nine comparisons of the combined emission rate values using the procedures in section 7 and the equations in section 8, Performance Specification 2, appendix B. Throughout, but only during, the relative accuracy test period the DAFGDS bypass damper shall be partially opened such that there is a detectable flow.
4.8.3-4.8.3.4 [Reserved]
4.9 The total monitoring system required by 4.2 shall be subject only to an annual relative accuracy test audit (RATA) in accordance with the quality assurance requirements of section 5.1.1 of 40 CFR part 60, appendix F. Each SO2 and diluent CEMs shall be subject to cylinder gas audits (OGA) in accordance with the quality assurance requirements of section 5.1.2 of appendix F with the exception that any SO2 or diluent CEMs without any type of probe or sample line shall be exempt from the OGA requirements.
5. Recordkeeping Requirements
5.1 The plant owner or operator shall keep a record of each hourly emission rate, each hourly SO2 CEMs value and hourly flow rate value, and each hourly Btu heat input rate, hourly steam rate, or hourly electrical power output, and a record of each hourly weighted average emission rate. These records shall be kept for all periods of operation of Unit 1 or 2 under provisions of § 60.43(e), including operations of Unit 1 (E1) during periods of DAFGDS startup, shutdown, and malfunction when H1 and E1 are assumed to be zero (0) (see 4.5).
5.2 The plant owner or operator shall keep a record of each hourly gas flow rate through the DAFGDS stack, each hourly stack gas flow rate through the bypass stack during any periods that the DAFGDS bypass damper is opened or flow is indicated, and reason for bypass operation.
6. Reporting Requirements
6.1 The owner or operator of any affected facility shall submit the written reports required under 6.2 of this section and subpart A to the Regional Administrator of the USEPA, Region 5 and the Director, of the IEPA for every calendar quarter. All quarterly reports shall be submitted by the 30th day following the end of each calendar quarter.
6.2 For sulfur dioxide, the following data resubmitted to the Regional Administrator of the USEPA, Region 5 and the Director, of the IEPA for each 24-hour period:
6.2.1 Calendar date
6.2.2 The combined average sulfur dioxide emission rate (ng/J or lb/million Btu) for the past 30 successive boiler operating days (ending with the last 30-day period in the quarter); and, for any noncompliance periods, reasons for noncompliance with the emission standards and description of corrective action taken.
6.2.3 Identification of the boiler operating days for which valid sulfur dioxide emissions data required by 4.6 have not been obtained for 75 percent of the boiler operating hours; reasons for not obtaining sufficient data; and description of corrective actions taken to prevent recurrence.
6.2.4 Identification of the time periods (hours) when Unit 1 or Unit 2 were operated but combined hourly emission rates (EC) were not calculated because of the unavailability of parameters E1, E2, H1, or H2 as described in 3.2.
6.2.5 Identification of the time periods (hours) when Unit 1 and Unit 2 were operated and where the combined hourly emission rate (EC) equalled Unit 2 (E2/H2) emissions because of the Unit 1 malfunction provisions under 3.5.3, and 3.5.4.
6.2.6 Identification of the time periods (hours) when emissions from the Unit 1 DAFGDS have been excluded from the calculation of average sulfur dioxide emission rates because of Unit 1 DAFGDS startup, shutdown, malfunction, or other reasons; and justification for excluding data for reasons other than startup or shutdown. Reporting of hourly emission rate of Unit 1 (E1/H2) during each hour of the DAFGDS startup, malfunction under 3.5.1, 3.5.2, 3.5.3, and 3.5.4 (see 4.5).
6.2.7 Identification of the number of days in the calendar quarter that the affected facility was operated (any fuel fired).
6.2.8 Identify any periods where Unit 1 DAFGDS malfunctions occurred and the cumulative hours of Unit 1 DAFGDS malfunction for the quarter.
6.2.9 Identify any periods of time that any exhaust gases were discharged to the DAFGDS bypass stack and the hourly gas flow rate through the DAFGDS stack and through the DAFGDS bypass stack during such periods and reason for bypass operation.
6.2.10 [Reserved]
[52 FR 28955, Aug. 4, 1987, as amended at 58 FR 28785, May 17, 1993; 59 FR 8135, Feb. 18, 1994]
Appendix H to Part 60 [Reserved]
Appendix I to Part 60—Owner's Manuals and Temporary Labels for Wood Heaters Subject to Subparts AAA and QQQQ of Part 60
1. Introduction
The purpose of this appendix is to provide specific instructions and examples to manufacturers for compliance with the owner's manual provisions of subparts AAA and QQQQ of this part.
2. Instructions for Preparation of Wood Heater Owner's Manuals
2.1 Introduction
Although the owner's manuals do not require premarket approval, EPA will monitor the contents to ensure that sufficient information is included to provide heater proper operation and maintenance information affecting emissions to consumers. The manufacturer must make current and historical owner's manuals available on the company Web site and upon request to the EPA. The purpose of this section is to provide instructions to manufacturers for compliance with the owner's manual provisions of § 60.536(g) of subpart AAA that applies to wood heaters and § 60.5478(f) of subpart QQQQ that applies to hydronic heaters and forced-air furnaces. A checklist of topics and illustrative language is provided as instructions. Owner's manuals should be tailored to specific wood heater models, as appropriate.
2.2 Topics Required To Be Addressed in Owner's Manual
(a) Wood heater description and compliance status;
(b) Tamper warnings;
(c) Overall heater warranty information and catalyst information and warranty (if catalyst-equipped);
(d) Fuel selection;
(e) Achieving and maintaining catalyst light-off (if catalyst-equipped);
(f) Catalyst monitoring (if catalyst-equipped);
(g) Troubleshooting catalytic-equipped heaters (if catalyst-equipped);
(h) Catalyst replacement (if catalyst-equipped);
(i) Wood heater proper operation and maintenance, including minimizing visible emissions;
(j) Wood heater proper installation, including location, stack height and achieving proper draft;
(k) Use of smoke detectors and carbon monoxide monitors; and
(l) Efficiency.
2.3 Sample Text/Descriptions
(a) The following are example texts and/or further descriptions illustrating the topics identified above. Although the regulation requires manufacturers to address (where applicable) the 10 topics identified above, the exact language is not specified. Manuals should be written specific to the model and design of the wood heater. The following instructions are composed of generic descriptions and texts.
(b) If manufacturers choose to use the language provided in the example, the portion in italics should be revised as appropriate. Any manufacturer electing to use the EPA example language will be considered to be in compliance with owner's manual requirements provided that the particular language is printed in full with only such changes as are necessary to ensure accuracy.
Example language is not provided for certain topics, since these areas are generally heater specific. For these topics, manufacturers should develop text that is specific to the proper operation and maintenance of their particular products.
2.3.1 Wood Heater Description and Compliance Status
Owner's manuals must include:
(a) Manufacturer and model;
(b) Compliance status (2015 standard, 2016 standard, 2017 standard, 2020 standard, crib wood standard or cord wood alternative standard, last allowable sell date, etc.); and
(c) Heat output range.
Exhibit 1—Example Text covering 2.3.1(a), (b), and (c) of this appendix:
“This manual describes the installation and operation of the Brand X, Model 0 catalytic equipped wood heater. This heater meets the 2015 U.S. Environmental Protection Agency's crib wood emission limits for wood heaters sold after May 15, 2015. Under specific test conditions this heater has been shown to deliver heat at rates ranging from 8,000 to 35,000 Btu/hr.”
2.3.2 Tamper Warnings
(a) The following statement must be included in the owner's manual for all units:
“This wood heater has a manufacturer-set minimum low burn rate that must not be altered. It is against federal regulations to alter this setting or otherwise operate this wood heater in a manner inconsistent with operating instructions in this manual.”
(b) The following statement must be included in the owner's manual for catalyst-equipped units:
“This wood heater contains a catalytic combustor, which needs periodic inspection and replacement for proper operation. It is against federal regulations to operate this wood heater in a manner inconsistent with operating instructions in this manual, or if the catalytic element is deactivated or removed.”
2.3.3 Overall Heater Warranty Information and Catalyst Information and Warranty (if catalyst-equipped)
The following information must be included with or supplied in the owner's and warranty manuals:
(a) Manufacturer and model, including catalyst if catalyst-equipped;
(b) Warranty details, including catalyst if catalyst-equipped; and
(c) Instructions for warranty claims.
Exhibit 2—Example Text covering 2.3.3(a), (b), and (c) of this appendix for catalysts:
“The combustor supplied with this heater is a Brand Z, Long Life Combustor. Consult the catalytic combustor warranty also supplied with this wood heater. Warranty claims should be addressed to:
Stove or Catalyst Manufacturer
Address
Phone #____________________________”
2.3.3.1 This section should also provide clear instructions on how to exercise the warranty (how to package parts for return shipment, etc.).
2.3.4 Fuel Selection
Owner's manuals must include:
(a) Instructions on acceptable fuels;
(b) Warning against inappropriate fuels; and
(c) How to determine seasoned wood compared to unseasoned wood, how to use moisture meters and other techniques and the importance of seasoned wood.
Exhibit 3—Example Text covering 2.3.4(a) and (b) of this appendix:
“This heater is designed to burn natural wood only. Higher efficiencies and lower emissions generally result when burning air dried seasoned hardwoods, as compared to softwoods or to green or freshly cut hardwoods. DO NOT BURN:
(1) Garbage;
(2) Lawn clippings or yard waste;
(3) Materials containing rubber, including tires;
(4) Materials containing plastic;
(5) Waste petroleum products, paints or paint thinners, or asphalt products;
(6) Materials containing asbestos;
(7) Construction or demolition debris;
(8) Railroad ties or pressure-treated wood;
(9) Manure or animal remains;
(10) Salt water driftwood or other previously salt water saturated materials;
(11) Unseasoned wood; or
(12) Paper products, cardboard, plywood, or particleboard. The prohibition against burning these materials does not prohibit the use of fire starters made from paper, cardboard, saw dust, wax and similar substances for the purpose of starting a fire in an affected wood heater.
Burning these materials may result in release of toxic fumes or render the heater ineffective and cause smoke.”
2.3.5 Achieving and Maintaining Catalyst Light-Off
Owner's manuals must describe in detail proper procedures for:
(a) Operation of catalyst bypass (stove specific);
(b) Achieving catalyst light-off from a cold start; and
(c) Achieving catalyst light-off when refueling.
2.3.5.1 No example text is supplied for describing operation of catalyst bypass mechanisms (Item 2.3.5(a) of this appendix) since these are typically stove-specific. Manufacturers must provide instructions specific to their model describing:
(1) Bypass position during startup;
(2) Bypass position during normal operation; and
(3) Bypass position during reloading.
Exhibit 4—Example Text for Item 2.3.5(b) of this appendix:
“The temperature in the stove and the gases entering the combustor must be raised to between 500° to 700 °F for catalytic activity to be initiated. During the startup of a cold stove, a medium to high firing rate must be maintained for about 20 minutes. This ensures that the stove, catalyst, and fuel are all stabilized at proper operating temperatures. Even though it is possible to have gas temperatures reach 600 °F within 2 to 3 minutes after a fire is started, if the fire is allowed to die down immediately, it may go out or the combustor may stop working. Once the combustor starts working, heat generated in it by burning the smoke will keep it working.”
Exhibit 5—Example Text for Item 2.3.5(c) of this appendix:
“REFUELING: During the refueling and rekindling of a cool fire, or a fire that has burned down to the charcoal phase, operate the stove at a medium to high firing rate for about 10 minutes to ensure that the catalyst reaches approximately 600 °F.”
2.3.6 Catalyst Monitoring
Owner's manuals must include:
(a) Recommendation to visually inspect combustor at least three times during the heating season;
(b) Discussion on expected combustor temperatures for monitor-equipped units; and
(c) Suggested monitoring and inspection techniques and importance of ensuring catalyst is operating properly.
Exhibit 6—Example Text covering 2.3.6(a), (b) and (c) of this appendix:
“It is important to periodically monitor the operation of the catalytic combustor to ensure that it is functioning properly and to determine when it needs to be replaced. A non-functioning combustor will result in a loss of heating efficiency, and an increase in creosote and emissions. Following is a list of items that should be checked on a periodic basis:
• Combustors should be visually inspected at least three times during the heating season to determine if physical degradation has occurred. Actual removal of the combustor is not recommended unless more detailed inspection is warranted because of decreased performance. If any of these conditions exists, refer to Catalyst Troubleshooting section of this owner's manual.
• This catalytic (or hybrid) heater is equipped with a temperature probe to monitor catalyst operation. Properly functioning combustors typically maintain temperatures in excess of 500 °F, and often reach temperatures in excess of 1,000 °F. If catalyst temperatures are not in excess of 500 °F, refer to Catalyst Troubleshooting section of this owner's manual.
• You can get an indication of whether the catalyst is working by comparing the amount of smoke leaving the chimney when the smoke is going through the combustor and catalyst light-off has been achieved, to the amount of smoke leaving the chimney when the smoke is not routed through the combustor (bypass mode).
Step 1—Light stove in accordance with instructions in section 3.3.5.
Step 2—With smoke routed through the catalyst, go outside and observe the emissions leaving the chimney.
Step 3—Engage the bypass mechanism and again observe the emissions leaving the chimney.
Significantly more smoke will be seen when the exhaust is not routed through the combustor (bypass mode).”
2.3.7 Catalyst Troubleshooting
The owner's manual must provide clear descriptions of symptoms and remedies to common combustor problems and importance. It is recommended that photographs of catalyst peeling, plugging, thermal cracking, mechanical cracking, and masking be included in the manual to aid the consumer in identifying problems and to provide direction for corrective action.
2.3.8 Catalyst Replacement
The owner's manual must provide clear step-by-step instructions on how to remove and replace the catalytic combustor. The section should include diagrams and/or photographs.
2.3.9 Wood Heater Proper Operation and Maintenance
The owner's manual must provide clear descriptions of symptoms and remedies to common heater problems and importance. The owner's manual information must be adequate to enable consumers to achieve optimal emissions performance. Such information must be consistent with the operating instructions provided by the manufacturer to the approved test laboratory for operating the wood heater during certification testing, except for details of the certification test that would not be relevant to the user.
Owner's manual must include:
(a) Recommendations about building and maintaining a fire, especially for cold starts and the effectiveness of the top-down approach for starting fires;
(b) Instruction on proper use of air controls, including how to establish good combustion and how to ensure good combustion at the lowest burn rate for which the heater is warranted;
(c) Ash removal and disposal;
(d) Instruction replacement of gaskets, air tubes and other parts that are critical to the emissions performance of the unit, and other maintenance and repair instructions;
(e) Warning against overfiring; and
(f) Suggested monitoring and inspection techniques and importance of ensuring heater is operating properly, including ensuring visible emissions are minimized.
2.3.9.1 No example text is supplied for 2.3.9(a), (b), (d) and (f) of this appendix since these items are model specific. Manufacturers should provide detailed instructions on building and maintaining a fire including selection of fuel pieces, fuel quantity and stacking arrangement. Manufacturers should also provide instruction on proper air settings (both primary and secondary) for attaining minimum and maximum heat outputs and any special instructions for operating thermostatic controls. Step-by-step instructions on inspection and replacement of gaskets should also be included. Manufacturers should provide diagrams and/or photographs to assist the consumer. Gasket type and size should be specified.
Exhibit 7—Example Text for Item 2.3.9(c) of this appendix:
“Whenever ashes get 3 to 4 inches deep in your firebox or ash pan, and when the fire has burned down and cooled, remove excess ashes. Leave an ash bed approximately 1 inch deep on the firebox bottom to help maintain a hot charcoal bed.”
“Ashes should be placed in a metal container with a tight-fitting lid. The closed container of ashes should be placed on a noncombustible floor or on the ground, away from all combustible materials, pending final disposal. The ashes should be retained in the closed container until all cinders have thoroughly cooled.”
Exhibit 8—Example Text covering Item 2.3.9(e) of this appendix:
“DO NOT OVERFIRE THIS HEATER”
“Attempts to achieve heat output rates that exceed heater design specifications can result in permanent damage to the heater and to the catalytic combustor if so equipped.”
2.3.10 Wood Heater Installation, Including Stack Height, Heater Locations and Achieving Proper Draft
Owner's manual must include:
(a) Importance of proper draft;
(b) Conditions indicating inadequate draft;
(c) Conditions indicating excessive draft; and
(d) Guidance on proper stack height and proper heater locations, i.e., not too close to neighbors or in valleys that would cause unhealthy air quality or nuisance conditions.
2.3.10.1 No example text is supplied for (d) because state, local and tribal requirements are model and location specific.
Exhibit 9—Example Text for Item (a):
“Draft is the force which moves air from the appliance up through the chimney. The amount of draft in your chimney depends on the length of the chimney, local geography, nearby obstructions and other factors. Too much draft may cause excessive temperatures in the appliance and may damage the catalytic combustor. Inadequate draft may cause backpuffing into the room and 'plugging' of the chimney or the catalyst.”
Exhibit 10—Example Text for Item (b):
“Inadequate draft will cause the appliance to leak smoke into the room through appliance and chimney connector joints.”
Exhibit 11—Example Text for Item (c):
“An uncontrollable burn or excessive temperature indicates excessive draft.”
2.3.11 Efficiency
Owner's manual must include:
(a) Description of how the efficiency was determined, e.g., use higher heating value of the fuel instead of lower heating value of the fuel, discuss sweet spot versus annual average versus annual fuel usage efficiency (AFUE);
(b) How operation and fuels affect efficiency, e.g., seasoned wood versus high moisture fuel; operation at sweet spot versus low-burn rates; and
(c) How location affects the efficiency, e.g., in main living area versus basement versus outdoors in sub-freezing temperatures.
2.3.12 Smoke and Carbon Monoxide Emissions and Monitors
Owner's manual must include:
(a) Discussion of smoke and carbon monoxide (CO) emissions, including the CO data submitted in the certification application and expected variations for different operating conditions;
(b) Recommendation to have smoke monitors; and
(c) Recommendation to have monitors for areas that are expected to generate CO, e.g., heater fueling areas, pellet fuel bulk storage areas, sheds containing hydronic heaters.
3. Instructions for Preparation of Wood Heater Temporary Labels
3.1 Temporary labels that show the values for emissions, efficiency, recommended heating area and the compliance status may (voluntarily) be affixed by the manufacturer to wood heaters that meet the 2020 particulate matter emission standards early or that meet the cord wood alternative compliance options in subparts AAA and QQQQ of this part.
3.2 The seller of each heater covered by section 3.1 may ensure that the temporary label remains affixed until each heater is purchased by the end user.
3.3 The temporary label option for the 2020 particulate matter emission standards end as of May 15, 2020.
3.4 The template for the temporary labels will be supplied by the Administrator upon request.
[80 FR 13751, Mar. 16, 2015]
Appendix J to Part 60 [Reserved]
Appendix K to Part 60—Determination of Volatile Organic Compound and Greenhouse Gas Leaks Using Optical Gas Imaging
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Analytes.
| Analytes | CAS No. |
|---|---|
| Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs) | No CAS number assigned. |
| Methane | 74-82-8. |
| Ethane | 74-84-0. |
1.1.1 This protocol is applicable to the detection of VOCs, including hazardous air pollutants, and hydrocarbons, such as methane and ethane.
1.2 Scope. This protocol covers surveys of process equipment using Optical Gas Imaging (OGI) cameras in sectors where the majority of constituents (>75 percent by volume) in the emissions streams have a response factor of at least 0.25 when compared to the response factor of propane and can be imaged by the equipment specified in Section 6.0. The specific component focus for the surveys is determined by the referencing subpart, and can include, but is not limited to, valves, flanges, connectors, pumps, compressors, open-ended lines, pressure relief devices, and seal systems.
1.3 Applicability. This protocol is applicable to facilities when specified in a referencing subpart. This protocol is intended to help determine the presence and location of leaks and is not currently applicable for use in direct emission rate measurements from sources.
2.0 Summary
2.1 A field portable infrared (IR) camera capable of imaging the target gas species is employed to survey process equipment and locate fugitive or leaking gas emissions. By restricting the amount of incoming thermal radiation to a small bandwidth corresponding to a region of interaction for the gas species of interest, the camera provides an image of an invisible gas to the camera operator. The camera type and manufacturer are not specified in this protocol, but the camera used must meet the specifications and performance criteria presented in Section 6. The keys to becoming proficient and maintaining leak detection proficiency using OGI cameras are proper camera operator training with sufficient field experience and conducting OGI surveys frequently throughout the year.
3.0 Definitions
Ambient air temperature means the air temperature in the general location of the component being surveyed.
Camera configuration means different ways of setting up an OGI camera that affect its detection capability. Examples of camera configurations that can be changed include the operating mode (e.g., standard versus high sensitivity or enhanced), the lens, the portability (e.g., handheld versus tripod), and the viewer (e.g., OGI camera screen versus an external device like a tablet).
Delta temperature (delta-T or ΔT) means the difference in temperature between the emitted process gas temperature and the surrounding background temperature. It is an acceptable practice in the field to assume that the emitted process gas temperature is equal to the ambient air temperature.
Dwell time means the minimum amount of time required to survey a scene in order to provide adequate probability of leak detection. The dwell time is the active time the operator is looking for potential leaks and does not begin until the scene is in focus and steady.
Fugitive emission or leak means any emissions observed using OGI from components regulated by the referencing subpart.
Imaging is the process of producing a visual representation of emissions that may otherwise be invisible to the naked eye.
Monitoring survey means imaging equipment with an OGI camera at one site on one day. Changing the site being surveyed or changing the day of imaging constitutes a new monitoring survey.
OGI camera operator is someone who has completed the training required in Section 10 and passed the final survey test in Section 10.2.2.4.
Operating envelope means the range of conditions (i.e., wind speed, delta-T, viewing distance) within which a survey must be conducted to achieve the quality objective.
Optical gas imaging camera means any field portable instrumentation that makes visible emissions that may otherwise be invisible to the naked eye.
Persistent leak is any leak that is not intermittent in nature.
Referencing subpart means a subpart in this part or in 40 CFR part 61, 62, 63, or 65 that requires the monitoring of regulated equipment for fugitive emissions or leaks, for which this protocol is referenced.
Response factor means the OGI camera's response to a compound of interest relative to a reference compound at a concentration path-length of 10,000 parts per million-meter. Response factors are specific to the OGI camera model and can be obtained from peer reviewed articles or may be developed according to procedures specified in Annex 1 of this appendix K.
Senior OGI camera operator is a camera operator who has conducted OGI surveys for a minimum of 1400 survey hours over the entirety of his/her career, including at least 40 survey hours in the past 12 months, and has completed or developed the classroom camera operator training as defined in Section 10.2.1. Previous 12 months means the 365-calendar days prior to the day of the activity that requires a senior OGI camera operator. The survey hours spent by the senior OGI camera operator performing comparative monitoring, either as part of initial training, retraining, or auditing other OGI camera operators, can be included when determining the senior OGI camera operator's experience both over his/her career and the past 12 months.
Simple scene is defined as a scene that contains 10 or fewer components in the field of view.
Survey hour is 60 minutes of observation conducted with an OGI camera. Survey hours do not include periods of time when the OGI camera operator is on a rest break. The 60 minutes do not need to be consecutive but are cumulative.
4.0 Interferences
4.1 Interferences from atmospheric conditions can impact the operator's ability to detect gas leaks. It is recommended that conditions involving steam, fog, mist, rain, solar glint, high particulate matter concentrations, and extremely hot backgrounds are avoided for a survey of acceptable quality.
5.0 Safety
5.1 Site Hazards. Prior to applying this protocol in the field, the potential hazards at the survey site should be considered; advance coordination with the site is critical to understand the conditions and applicable safety policies. Users should be aware of safety concerns with viewing equipment through a camera while walking around an industrial setting. Users should also be aware of hazards related to eye strain, eye fatigue, and mental fatigue that may occur from prolonged periods of viewing equipment with an OGI camera. This protocol does not address all of the safety concerns associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this protocol to establish appropriate health and safety practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to implementing this protocol.
5.2 Hazardous Pollutants. Several of the compounds encountered over the course of implementing this protocol may be irritating or corrosive to tissues (e.g., heptane) or may be toxic (e.g., benzene, methyl alcohol, hydrogen sulfide). Nearly all are fire hazards. Chemical compounds in gaseous emissions should be determined from process knowledge of the source. Appropriate precautions can be found in reference documents, such as reference 13.1.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
6.1 An OGI camera model meeting the following specifications is required. This testing can be performed by the owner or operator, the camera manufacturer, or a third party. As required by Section 8.1, this testing must be performed initially, prior to using the OGI camera to conduct surveys. The determination in Section 6.1.1 must also be made any time the OGI camera will be used to survey components on equipment that was not previously included in monitoring surveys or whenever there are process changes that are expected to cause the gaseous emissions composition to change. The determination in Section 6.1.2 is only required initially and is required for each camera operating mode (e.g., standard versus high sensitivity or enhanced).
6.1.1 The spectral range of infrared radiation measured by the OGI camera must overlap with a major absorption peak for the chemical target of interest, meaning the OGI camera must be sensitive with a response factor of at least 0.25 when compared to the response factor of propane for the majority of constituents (>75 percent by volume) of the expected gaseous emissions composition.
6.1.2 The OGI camera must be capable of detecting (or producing a detectable image of) methane emissions of 19 grams per hour (g/hr) and either n-butane emissions of 29 g/hr or propane emissions of 22 g/hr at a viewing distance of 2.0 meters and a delta-T of 5.0 °C in an environment of calm wind conditions around 1 meter per second (m/s) or less, unless the referencing subpart provides detection rates for a different compound(s) for that subpart.
6.2 The following items are needed for the initial specification confirmation of each OGI camera model, as required by Sections 6.1.2, and development of operating envelopes, as required by Section 8:
6.2.1 Methane test gas, chemically pure grade (99.5 percent) or higher.
6.2.2 n-Butane test gas or propane test gas, chemically pure grade (99 percent) or higher.
6.2.3 Release orifice, 1/4 inch (64 millimeter) inner diameter.
6.2.4 Mass flow controller or rotameter, capable of controlling the gas emission rate within an accuracy of 5 percent and traceable to the International System of Units (SI) through an unbroken chain of comparisons, i.e., calibrations.
6.2.5 An industrial fan, capable of adjusting the sustained nominal wind speeds at regular intervals, with the ability to maintain a spatially uniform set speed within 20 percent of the target wind speed over the area of detection.
6.2.6 A meteorological station capable of providing representative data on ambient temperature, ambient pressure, relative humidity, and wind speed and direction at least once every hour. Follow the calibration and standardization requirements for meteorological measurements in EPA-454/B-08-002 (incorporated by reference, see § 60.17). The equipment must meet the following minimum specifications:
6.2.6.1 Ambient temperature readings accurate to at least 0.50 °C, with a resolution of 0.10 °C or less, and a minimum range of −20 to 70 °C.
6.2.6.2 Ambient pressure readings accurate to at least 5.0 millibar (mbar), with a resolution of 1.0 mbar or less, and a minimum range of 700 to 1100 mbar.
6.2.6.3 Wind speed readings accurate to at least 1.0 m/s, with a resolution of 0.10 m/s or less, and a minimum range of 0.10 to 20 m/s.
6.2.6.4 Wind direction readings accurate to at least 5 degrees, with a resolution of 1 degree or less.
6.2.6.5 Relative humidity readings accurate to at least 5.0 percent, with a resolution of 0.50 percent or less, and a minimum range of 10 to 90 percent noncondensing.
6.2.7 A temperature-controlled background large enough for viewing the emissions plume and capable of maintaining a uniform temperature. Uniform is defined as all points on the background deviating no more than 1.0 °C from the average temperature of the background.
6.2.8 T-type probe thermocouple and readout, accurate to at 1.0 °C and traceable to the SI through an unbroken chain of comparisons, i.e., calibrations, for measuring the test gas at or near the point of release.
6.2.9 T-type surface skin thermocouple and readout, accurate to at 1.0 °C and traceable to the SI through an unbroken chain of comparisons, i.e., calibrations, for measuring the background immediately behind the test gas.
6.2.10 Device to measure the distance between the OGI camera and the release point (e.g., tape measure, laser measurement tool), accurate to at least 2.0 centimeters (cm), with a resolution of at least 1.0 cm and traceable to the SI through an unbroken chain of comparisons, i.e., calibrations.
7.0 Camera Calibration and Maintenance
7.1 The camera does not require routine calibration for purposes of gas leak detection but may require calibration if it is used for thermography (such as with ΔT determination features). Operators should follow manufacturer recommendations regarding maintenance and calibration, as appropriate.
8.0 Camera Specification Confirmation and Development of the Operating Envelope
8.1 Determine that the OGI camera meets the specifications in Section 6.1 prior to conducting surveys with the OGI camera. The determination in Section 6.1.1 must also be made any time the OGI camera will be used to survey components on equipment that was not previously included in monitoring surveys or whenever there are process changes that are expected to cause the gaseous emissions composition to change. The determination in Section 6.1.2 is only required initially. The results of this determination must be documented.
8.2 Field conditions such as the viewing distance to the component to be monitored, wind speed, ambient air temperature, and the background temperature all have the potential to impact the ability of the OGI camera operator to detect a leak. It is important that the OGI camera has been tested under the full range of expected field conditions in which the OGI camera will be used.
8.3 An operating envelope must be established for field use of the OGI camera. Imaging must not be performed when the conditions are outside of the developed operating envelope.
8.3.1 The operating envelope is specific to each model of OGI camera. The operating envelope can be developed by the owner or operator, the camera manufacturer, or a third party. The operating envelope must be developed initially, prior to conducting surveys with the OGI camera. The operating envelope may be updated or expanded at any time, following the procedures in this section.
8.3.2 The operating envelope must be confirmed for all potential configurations that could impact the detection limit, such as high sensitivity modes, available lenses, and handheld versus tripod. Conversely, separate operating envelopes may be developed for different configurations. If, in addition to or in lieu of the display on the camera itself, an external device (e.g., laptop, tablet) is intended to be used to visualize the leak in the field, the operating envelope must be developed while using the external device. If the external device will not be used at all times, use of the external device is considered a separate configuration, and the operating envelope testing must be performed for both configurations.
8.4 Development of the operating envelope is to be performed using the test gas composition, flow rate, and orifice diameter described in Section 6.1.2, and must include the following variables:
8.4.1 Delta-T, regulated through the use of a temperature-controlled background encompassing approximately 50 percent of the field of view, with no potential for solar interference;
8.4.2 Viewing distance from the OGI camera to the component being imaged; and
8.4.3 Wind speed, controlled through the use of an industrial fan.
8.5 Determine the operating envelope using the following procedure:
8.5.1 Set up the methane test gas at a flow rate of 19 g/hr.
8.5.2 For this flow rate, the ability of the OGI camera to produce an observable image is challenged by ranges of the variables in Sections 8.4.1 through 8.4.3.
8.5.3 A panel of no less than 4 observers who have been trained using the OGI camera and who have a demonstrated capability of detecting gaseous leaks will observe the test gas release for each combination of delta-T, distance, and wind speed. A test emission is determined to be observed when at least 75 percent of the observers (i.e., 3 of the 4 observers) see the image.
8.5.4 Repeat the procedures in Sections 8.5.2 and 8.5.3 using either an n-butane test gas at a flow rate of 29 g/hr or a propane test gas at a flow rate of 22 g/hr.
8.5.5 The operating envelope to be used in the field for each OGI camera configuration tested is the more restrictive operating envelope developed between the two test gases.
8.5.6 Repeat the procedures in Sections 8.5.1-8.5.5 for each camera configuration that will be used to conduct surveys in the field.
8.6 The results of the testing to establish the operating envelope, including supporting videos, must be documented.
8.7 If an operating envelope has not been developed for an OGI camera model or an OGI camera operator wants to expand an operating envelope to account for site-specific conditions, a daily field check for maximum viewing distance must be completed prior to conducting a monitoring survey. This daily field check for maximum viewing distance does not need to be performed if an OGI suvey will be conducted within an operating envelope developed according to Sections 8.3 through 8.6.
8.7.1 A complete video record of the daily field check must be retained with the OGI survey records.
8.7.2 Each OGI camera operator who will conduct the monitoring survey must complete their own daily field check for maximum viewing distance using the OGI camera they will use to complete the monitoring survey. The daily field check must be conducted for each camera configuration that will be used during the monitoring survey.
8.7.3 The daily field check must be performed using the test gas composition and orifice diameter described in Section 6.1.2.
8.7.4 The daily field check must be conducted first for methane at a flow rate of 19 g/hr and then for either n-butane at a flow rate of 29 g/hr or propane at a flow rate of 22 g/hr. You must use a flow meter with a minimum accuracy of 5 percent of the mass rate. The daily field check for the two gases must occur at the same delta-T and wind speed conditions.
8.7.5 The OGI camera operator must determine the maximum distance from the gas release point at which the operator is able to visualize the gas release with the OGI camera. The OGI camera operator must document this distance, as well as the delta-T and the wind speed at the time of the daily field check and include this information with the OGI survey records.
8.7.6 If the daily check results in different maximum viewing distances for methane and n-butane/propane, the maximum viewing distance for the day for the OGI camera operator will be the shorter of the two maximum viewing distances.
8.7.7 If the delta-T in the field decreases below the delta-T that was recorded for the daily field check or if the wind speed increases above the wind speed recorded for the daily field check, the maximum viewing distance determination must be repeated for the new delta-T and wind speed conditions.
8.7.8 If multiple camera configurations will be used during the monitoring survey, the OGI camera operator may use the shortest maximum viewing distance of any configuration for all the configurations that will be used during the survey, or the OGI camera operator may use a different maximum viewing distance for each configuration that will be used during the survey.
9.0 Conducting the Monitoring Survey
Each site must have a monitoring plan that describes the procedures for conducting a monitoring survey. One monitoring plan can be used for multiple sites, as long as the plan contains the relevant information for each site. At a minimum, the monitoring plan must include the elements in this section.
9.1 The monitoring plan must include a description of a daily verification check to be performed prior to imaging to confirm that the camera is operating properly. This verification must consist of the following at a minimum:
9.1.1 Confirm that the OGI camera software loads successfully and does not display any error messages upon startup;
9.1.2 Confirm that the OGI camera focuses properly at the shortest and longest distances that will be imaged;
9.1.3 Confirm that the OGI camera produces a live IR image using a known emissions source, such as a butane lighter or a propane cylinder;
9.1.4 Confirm that the OGI camera can perform the delta-T check function as expected if this function will be used to meet the requirement in Section 9.2.3.
9.2 The monitoring plan must include a procedure for ensuring that the monitoring survey is performed only when conditions in the field are within the operating envelope established in Section 8 or the conditions established by the daily field check in Section 8.7. This procedure must include the following:
9.2.1 If the OGI camera operator will use an operating envelope established under Section 8, a description of how the viewing distance from the surveyed components, the wind speed, and the delta-T will be monitored and how the operator will deal with changes in site conditions during the survey to ensure that the monitoring survey is conducted within the limits of the operating envelope;
9.2.2 If the OGI camera operator performs a daily field check according to Section 8.7, a description of how the OGI camera operator will monitor viewing distance to ensure the viewing distance is less than the daily maximum viewing distance and how the OGI camera operator will monitor the delta-T and wind speed to ensure the delta-T remains above and the wind speed remains below those that occurred during the daily field check;
9.2.3 Description of how the operator will ensure an adequate delta-T is present in order to view potential gaseous emissions, e.g., using a delta-T check function built into the features of the OGI camera or using a background temperature reading in the OGI camera field of view;
9.2.4 Description of how the operator will recognize the presence of and deal with potential interferences and/or adverse monitoring conditions, such as steam, fog, mist, rain, solar glint, extremely high concentrations of particulate matter, and hot temperature backgrounds.
9.3 The site must conduct monitoring surveys using a methodology that ensures that all the components regulated by the referencing subpart within the unit or area are monitored. This must be achieved using one of the following three approaches or a combination of these approaches. The approach(es) chosen and how the approach(es) will be implemented must be described in the monitoring plan.
9.3.1 Use of a route map or a map with designated observation locations. The map must be included as part of the monitoring plan, with a predetermined sequence of process unit monitoring (such as directional arrows along the monitoring path) depicted or designated observation locations clearly marked.
9.3.2 Use of visual cues. The facility must develop visual cues (e.g., tags, streamers, or color-coded pipes) to ensure that all components regulated by the referencing subpart were monitored. The monitoring plan must describe what visual cue method is used and how it will be used to ensure all components are monitored during the survey.
9.3.3 Use of global positioning system (GPS) route tracing. The facility must document the path taken during the survey by capturing GPS coordinates along the survey path, along with date and time stamps. These locations should be identified by latitude and longitude coordinates in decimal degrees to an accuracy and precision of at least five decimals of a degree using the North American Datum of 1983. GPS coordinates must be recorded frequently enough to document that all components regulated by the referencing subpart were monitored. The monitoring plan must describe how often GPS coordinates will be recorded and how the route tracing will ensure all components regulated by the referencing subpart are monitored.
9.4 The monitoring plan must include a procedure that describes how components will be viewed with the OGI camera.
9.4.1 Components must be imaged from at least two different angles.
9.4.2 For a simple scene, which is a scene that contains 10 or fewer components in the field of view, the OGI camera operator must have a minimum dwell time on each angle of 10 seconds per scene before changing the angle, distance, or focus and dwelling again.
9.4.3 For scenes other than simple scenes, the operator must divide the scene into manageable subsections. The OGI camera operator must have a minimum dwell time of 2 seconds per component in the field of view for each angle.
9.4.4 It may be necessary to reduce distance or change angles in order to reduce the number of components in the field of view. An OGI camera operator may choose to reduce the distance from components in order to create simple scenes.
9.4.5 The required dwell times stated in this section are minimum dwell times. Additional dwell time may be necessary to assess whether each monitored component is leaking or not leaking. OGI camera operators should use training and knowledge of environmental conditions and component configurations to increase dwell time where appropriate.
9.4.6 The dwell time is the time that the OGI camera is in a particular operating mode and the scene is in focus and held steady such that an OGI camera operator is able to monitor for leaks. Changing OGI camera operating modes or viewing angles requires the OGI camera operator to restart the dwell time.
9.4.7 The procedure must discuss changes, if necessary, to the imaging mode of the OGI camera that are appropriate to ensure that leaks from all components regulated by the referencing subpart can be imaged.
9.5 The monitoring plan must include a plan for avoiding camera operator fatigue, as physical, mental, and eye fatigue are concerns with continuous field operation of OGI cameras. The OGI camera operator should not survey continuously for a period of more than 30 minutes without taking a rest break. Taking a rest break between surveys of process units may satisfy this requirement; however, for process units or complex scenes requiring continuous survey periods of more than 30 minutes, the operator must take a break of at least 5 minutes after every 30 minutes of surveying. Operators can complete tasks related to the monitoring survey, such as documentation, during the 5-minute rest break, so long as the operator is not actively imaging components.
Note: If continuous surveying is desired for extended time periods, two camera operators can alternate between surveying and taking breaks.
9.6 The monitoring plan must include a procedure for documenting monitoring surveys. The information documented must include:
9.6.1 The name of the facility, date, and approximate start and end times for each monitoring survey.
9.6.2 The weather conditions, including ambient temperature, wind speed, relative humidity, and sky conditions at the start and end of each monitoring survey. For monitoring surveys conducted for more than four hours, record the weather conditions every two hours.
9.7 The site must have a procedure for documenting fugitive emissions or leaks found during the monitoring survey.
9.7.1 If a leak is found, capture either a short video clip or photograph of the component associated with the leak. If the leak is not immediately repaired, the leaking component must be tagged for repair. The date, time, location of the leak, and an identification of the component associated with the leak must be recorded and stored with the OGI survey records. A full recording of the survey will suffice for this requirement.
9.7.2 If no emissions are found, no recorded footage is required to demonstrate that the component was not leaking.
9.8 The monitoring plan must include a quality assurance (QA) verification video for each OGI operator at least once each monitoring day. The QA verification video must be a minimum of 5 minutes long and document the procedures the operator uses to survey (e.g., dwell times, angles, distances, backgrounds) and the camera configuration.
9.9 The monitoring plan must describe the process that will be used to ensure the validity of the monitoring data as detailed in Section 11.
10.0 Camera Operator Training
10.1 The facility or company performing the OGI surveys must have a training plan which ensures and monitors the proficiency of the camera operators. Training should include classroom instruction and field training on the OGI camera and external devices, monitoring techniques, best practices, process knowledge, and other regulatory requirements related to leak detection that are relevant to the facility's OGI monitoring efforts. If the facility does not perform its own OGI monitoring, the facility must ensure that the training plan for the company performing the OGI surveys adheres to this requirement.
10.2 Prior to conducting monitoring surveys, camera operators must complete initial training and demonstrate proficiency with the OGI camera and any external devices to be utilized for detecting a potential leak.
10.2.1 At a minimum, the training plan must include the following classroom training elements as part of the initial training. Classroom training can be conducted at a physical location, remotely, or online.
10.2.1.1 Key fundamental concepts of the OGI camera technology, such as the types of images the camera is capable of visualizing and the technology basis (theory) behind this capability.
10.2.1.2 Parameters that can affect image detection (e.g., wind speed, temperature, distance, background, and potential interferences).
10.2.1.3 Description of the components to be surveyed and example imagery of the various types of leaks that can be expected.
10.2.1.4 Operating and maintenance instructions for the OGI camera used at the facility.
10.2.1.5 Procedures for performing the monitoring survey according to the monitoring plan, including the daily verification check; how to ensure the monitoring survey is performed only when the conditions in the field are within the established operating envelope; the number of angles a component or set of components should be imaged from; the minimum dwell time for a scene before changing the angle, distance, and/or focus; how to improve the background visualization; the procedure for ensuring that all components regulated by the referencing subpart are visualized; and required rest breaks.
10.2.1.6 Recordkeeping requirements.
10.2.1.7 Common mistakes and best practices.
10.2.1.8 Discussion of the regulatory requirements related to leak detection that are relevant to the facility's OGI monitoring efforts.
10.2.2 At a minimum, the training plan must include the following field training elements as part of the initial training:
10.2.2.1 A minimum of 3 survey hours with OGI where trainees observe the techniques and methods of a senior OGI camera operator (see definition in Section 3.0) who reinforces the classroom training elements.
10.2.2.2 A minimum of 12 survey hours with OGI where the trainee performs the initial OGI survey with a senior OGI camera operator verifying the results by conducting a side-by-side comparative survey and providing instruction/correction where necessary.
10.2.2.3 A minimum of 15 survey hours with OGI where the trainee performs monitoring surveys independently with a senior OGI camera operator trainer present and the senior OGI camera operator providing oversight and instruction/correction to the trainee where necessary.
10.2.2.4 A final monitoring survey test where the trainee conducts an OGI survey of at least 2 suvey hours and a senior OGI camera operator follows behind with a second camera to confirm the OGI survey results. If there are 10 or more leaks identified by the senior OGI operator, the trainee must achieve no more than 10 percent missed persistent leaks relative to the senior OGI camera operator to be considered authorized for independent survey execution. If there are less than 10 leaks identified by the senior OGI operator, the trainee must achieve zero missed persistent leaks relative to the senior OGI camera operator to be considered authorized for independent survey execution.
10.2.2.5 If the trainee doesn't pass the monitoring survey test in Section 10.2.2.4, the senior OGI operator must discuss the reasons for the failure with the trainee and provide instruction/correction on improving the trainee's performance. Following the discussion with the senior OGI operator, the trainee may repeat the test in Section 10.2.2.4.
10.3 All OGI camera operators must attend a biennial classroom training refresher. This refresher can be shorter in duration than the initial classroom training but must cover all the salient points necessary to operate the camera (e.g., performing surveys according to the monitoring plan, best practices, discussion of lessons learned). Refresher training can be conducted at a physical location, remotely, or online.
10.4 Performance audits for all OGI camera operators must occur on a semiannual basis with at least three months between two consecutive audits. Performance audits must be conducted according to one of the following procedures:
10.4.1 Performance audit by comparative monitoring. Comparative monitoring in near real-time is where a senior OGI camera operator reviews the performance of the employee being audited by performing an independent monitoring survey.
10.4.1.1 Following a survey conducted by the camera operator being audited, the senior OGI camera operator will conduct a survey of at least 2 survey hours in the same area to ensure that no persistent leaks were missed.
10.4.1.2 If there are 10 or more leaks identified by the senior OGI operator, the camera operator being audited must achieve no more than 10 percent missed persistent leaks relative to the senior OGI camera operator. If there are less than 10 leaks identified by the senior OGI operator, the camera operator being audited must achieve zero missed persistent leaks relative to the senior OGI camera operator. If the camera operator being audited does not achieve this benchmark, then the camera operator being audited will need to be retrained as outlined in Section 10.4.3.
10.4.2 Performance audit by video review. The camera operator being audited must submit unedited and uncut video footage of their OGI survey technique to a senior OGI camera operator for review.
10.4.2.1 The videos must contain at least 2 survey hours of survey footage. If a single monitoring survey is less than 2 survey hours, footage from multiple monitoring surveys may be submitted; however, all videos necessary to cover a 2-hour period must be recorded and submitted for review. The senior OGI camera operator will review the survey technique of the camera operator being audited, as well as look for any missed leaks.
10.4.2.2 If the senior OGI camera operator finds that the survey techniques during the video review do not match those described in the monitoring plan, then the camera operator being audited will need to be retrained as outlined in Section 10.4.3. Additionally, if there are 10 or more leaks identified by the senior OGI operator, the camera operator being audited must achieve no more than 10 percent missed persistent leaks relative to the senior OGI camera operator. If there are less than 10 leaks identified by the senior OGI operator, the camera operator being audited must achieve zero missed persistent leaks relative to the senior OGI camera operator. If the camera operator being audited does not achieve this benchmark, then the camera operator being audited will need to be retrained as outlined in Section 10.4.3.
10.4.3 At a minimum, retraining must consist of the following elements:
10.4.3.1 A discussion of the reasons for the failure with the OGI operator being audited and techniques to improve performance.
10.4.3.2 A minimum of 8 survey hours with OGI where the trainee performs the initial OGI survey with a senior OGI camera operator verifying the results by conducting a side-by-side comparative survey and providing instruction/correction where necessary.
10.4.3.3 A minimum of 8 survey hours with OGI where the trainee performs the survey independently with the senior OGI camera operator trainer present and the senior OGI camera operator provides oversight and instruction/correction to the trainee where necessary.
10.4.3.4 The audited camera operator must perform a final monitoring survey test as described in Section 10.2.2.4 and meet the requirements in Section 10.2.2.4 to be recertified.
10.4.4 If an OGI operator requires retraining in two consecutive semiannual audits, the OGI operator must repeat the initial training requirements in Section 10.2.
10.4.5 If a camera operator is not scheduled to perform an OGI survey during a semiannual period, then the audit must occur with the next scheduled monitoring survey.
10.5 If an OGI camera operator has not conducted a monitoring survey in over 12 months, then the operator must complete the retraining requirements in Section 10.4.3 prior to conducting surveys. If an OGI camera operator has not conducted a monitoring survey in over 24 months, then the operator must complete the biennial classroom training in Section 10.3 and complete the retraining requirements in Section 10.4.3 prior to conducting surveys.
10.6 Previous experience with OGI camera operation can be substituted for some of the initial training requirements in Section 10.2 as outlined in this Section 10.6.1 and 10.6.2.
10.6.1 OGI camera operators with previous classroom training (at a physical location, remotely, or online) that included a majority of the elements listed in Section 10.2.1 do not need to complete the initial classroom training as described in Section 10.2.1, but if the date of training is more than two years before March 8, 2024, the biennial classroom training in Section 10.3 must be completed in lieu of the initial classroom training in Section 10.2.1.
10.6.2 OGI camera operators who have 40 survey hours of experience over the 12 calendar months prior to March 8, 2024 may substitute the retraining requirements in Section 10.4.3, including the final monitoring survey test, for the initial field training requirements in Section 10.2.2.
11.0 Quality Assurance and Quality Control
11.1 As part of the facility's monitoring plan, the facility must have a process which ensures the validity of the monitoring data. Examples may include routine review and sign-off of the monitoring data by the camera operator's supervisor, periodic comparative monitoring using a different camera operator as part of a continuing training verification plan described in Section 10, or other due diligence procedures.
11.2 For each monitoring day, the daily OGI camera verification must be performed as described in Section 9.1. Additionally, the daily QA verification video for each operator must be recorded as described in Section 9.8 for each operator for each monitoring day.
11.3 The following table is a summary of the mandatory QA and quality control (QC) measures in this protocol with the associated frequency and acceptance criteria. All of the QA/QC data must be documented and kept with other OGI records.
| Parameter | QA/QC specification | Acceptance criteria | Frequency |
|---|---|---|---|
| OGI Camera Design | Spectral bandpass range | Must overlap with major absorption peak of the compound(s) of interest | Once initially (prior to using the OGI camera to conduct surveys), when survey components on equipment that was not previously included in monitoring surveys, whenever there are process changes that are expected to cause the gaseous emissions composition to change. |
| OGI Camera Design | Initial camera specification confirmation | Must be capable of detecting (or producing a detectable image of) methane emissions of 19 g/hr and either n-butane emission of 29 g/hr or propane emissions of 22 g/hr at a viewing distance of 2.0 meters and a delta-T of 5.0 °C in an environment of calm wind conditions around 1.0 m/s or less | Once initially (prior to using the OGI camera to conduct surveys). |
| Developing the Operating Envelope | Observation confirmation | Leak is observed by 3 out of 4 panel observers for specific combinations of delta-T, distance, and wind speed | Once initially (prior to using the OGI camera to conduct surveys) and prior to using a new camera configuration for which an envelope was not previously established. The operating envelope may be updated or expanded at any time, following the procedures in Section 8. |
| Daily Field Check | Maximum viewing distance | Determine distance at which each OGI camera operator can visualize leaks according to Section 8.7 | Each monitoring day. Not required for OGI camera operators using operating envelopes established according to Section 8. |
| OGI Camera Functionality | Verification Check | Meet the requirements of Section 9.1 to confirm that the OGI camera software loads successfully and that the camera focuses properly, produces a live IR image, and, as applicable, performs the delta-T check function | Each monitoring day, prior to conducting a survey. |
| Camera Operator Training | Classroom training | Meet the requirements of Sections 10.2.1 and 10.3 with the issuing of a certificate or record of attendance | Prior to conducting surveys (except as noted in Section 10.6.1), with a biennial refresher. |
| Camera Operator Training | Field training | Meet the requirements of Section 10.2.2 while maintaining the records of survey hours by the trainee along with a certificate or record of completion issued upon passing the final monitoring survey test in Section 10.2.2.4 with the date of the survey recorded | Except as noted in Section 10.6.2, prior to conducting surveys and if retraining is required following two consecutive semiannual audits. |
| OGI Camera Operator Performance | Semiannual performance audits | Comparative monitoring or video review. Meet the benchmarks in Section 10.4.1.2 or 10.4.2.2 | Every 6 months, with at least 3 months between consecutive audits or at the next scheduled monitoring survey if a camera operator is not scheduled to perform an OGI survey during the semiannual period. |
| Camera Operator Training | Field retraining | Meet the requirements of Section 10.4.3 while maintaining the records of survey hours by the trainee along with a certificate or record of completion issued upon passing the final monitoring survey test in Section 10.2.2.4 with the date of the survey recorded | After failing to meet the benchmarks in Section 10.4.1.2 or 10.4.2.2 during a semiannual audit or after a prolonged period (greater than 12 months) of not performing OGI surveys. May be substituted for initial field training as noted in Section 10.6.2. |
| OGI Camera Operator Performance | QA verification video | Record a video that is a minimum of 5 minutes long that documents the procedures the operator uses to survey (e.g., dwell times, angles, distances, backgrounds) and the camera configuration | Each monitoring day. |
12.0 Recordkeeping
12.1 Records must be kept for a period of 5 years, unless otherwise noted below or otherwise specified in a referencing subpart. Records may be retained in hard copy or electronic form.
12.2 The facility must maintain the following records in a manner that is easily accessible to all OGI camera operators. These records must be retained for as long as the site performs OGI surveys. Older versions of these records that are no longer relevant because they have been replaced by newer versions must be retained for a period of 5 years past the date on which they are replaced.
12.2.1 Complete site monitoring plan with all the required elements.
12.2.2 The OGI camera operating envelope limitations.
12.3 All data supporting the OGI camera specification confirmation (initially and updated as required in Section 8.1) and development of the operating envelope. While the owner or operator does not need to have a copy of these records onsite if another entity performed the camera specification confirmation or development of the operating envelope, the owner or operator must:
(1) Ensure that the camera specification confirmation and development of the operating envelope were performed in accordance with the requirements of this appendix K,
(2) Ensure easy access to these records, and
(3) Make the records available for review if requested by the Administrator.
These records must be retained for the entire period that the OGI camera is used to conduct surveys at the site plus 5 years.
12.4 The training plan for OGI camera operators. The plan must be retained for as long as the site performs OGI surveys. Older versions of the plan that are no longer relevant because they have been replaced by a newer version must be retained for a period of 5 years past the date on which they are replaced. If the facility does not perform its own OGI monitoring, the owner or operator must:
(1) Ensure that the training plan for the company performing the OGI surveys adheres to the requirements of this appendix K,
(2) Ensure easy access to the plan, and
(3) Make the plan available for review if requested by the Administrator.
12.5 For each OGI camera operator, the following records. These may be kept in a separate location for privacy but must be easily accessible to program administrators and available for review if requested by the Administrator. It may be necessary to retain the records in Section 12.5.3 for longer than 5 years to show the career experience survey hours for senior OGI camera operators. If the facility does not perform its own OGI monitoring, the owner or operator must:
(1) Ensure that the training plan for the company performing the OGI surveys adheres to the requirements of this appendix K,
(2) Be able to easily access these records, and
(3) Make the records available for review if requested by the Administrator.
The records must include the following information.
12.5.1 The date of completion of initial OGI camera operator classroom training;
12.5.2 The date of the passed final site survey test following the initial OGI camera operator field training or retraining;
12.5.3 The number and date of all surveys performed, and if the survey is part of initial field training or retraining, the amount of survey hours and notation of whether the survey was performed by observing a senior OGI camera operator, side-by-side with a senior OGI camera operator, or with oversight from a senior OGI camera operator;
12.5.4 The date and results of semiannual performance audits;
12.5.5 The date of the biennial classroom training refresher; and
12.5.6 Documentation to support the use of previous experience as a substitution for initial training requirements, including the date of previous classroom training and documentation of survey hours over the 12 calendar months prior to March 8, 2024, as appropriate.
12.6 Monitoring survey results shall be kept in a manner that is accessible to those technicians executing repairs and at a minimum must contain the following:
12.6.1 Daily verification check;
12.6.2 Identification of the site surveyed, the survey date, and the start and end times of the survey;
12.6.3 Name of the OGI camera operator performing the survey and identification of the OGI camera used to conduct the survey. The identification of the OGI camera can be the serial number or an assigned name/number labeled on the camera, but it must allow an operator or inspector to tie the camera back to the records associated with the camera (e.g., maintenance, initial specification confirmation);
12.6.4 Weather conditions, including the ambient temperature, wind speed, relative humidity, and sky conditions, at the start and end of the survey and every two hours (if the survey exceeded four hours in length);
12.6.5 Video footage or photograph of any leak detected, or video footage of the entire survey, along with the date, time, and location of the leak, and identification of the component associated with the leak;
12.6.6 The daily QA verification video for each operator; and
12.6.7 GPS coordinates for the route taken, if Section 9.3.3 is used to ensure all components regulated by the referencing subpart are monitored.
12.7 For each instance that an OGI camera operator uses the daily field check outlined in Section 8.7 instead of an operating enveloped established under Section 8, the following records must be kept with the monitoring survey records required by Section 12.6.
12.7.1 Date and time of each daily field check.
12.7.2 Video record of the daily field check.
12.7.3 Maximum viewing distance determined for each test gas in each configuration for each OGI camera operator. The overall maximum viewing distance (or overall maximum viewing distance per configuration) that will be used for the monitoring day for each OGI camera operator.
12.7.4 The delta-T and wind speed at the time of the daily field check.
12.7.5 Documentation of the test gas flow rate and concentrations during the daily field check.
12.8 Camera maintenance and calibration records over the entire period that the OGI camera is used to conduct surveys at the site. Older versions of these records that are no longer relevant because they have been replaced by newer versions must be retained for a period of 5 years past the date on which they are replaced. If the facility does not perform its own OGI monitoring, the owner or operator must be able to easily access these records and must make the records available for review if requested by the Administrator.
13.0 References
13.1 U.S. Department of Health and Human Services. (2010). NIOSH Pocket Guide to Chemical Hazards. NIOSH Publication No. 2010-168c. Also available from https://www.cdc.gov/niosh/docs/2010-168c/default.html.
13.2 U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. (2023). Technical Support Document: Optical Gas Imaging Protocol (Appendix K to this part).
13.3 U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. (2020). Optical Gas Imaging Stakeholder Input Workshop Presentations and Discussion; Summary Letter Report.
13.4 Zimmerle, D., T. Vaughn, C. Bell, K. Bennett, P. Deshmukh, and E. Thoma. (2020). Detection Limits of Optical Gas Imaging for Natural Gas Leak Detection in Realistic Controlled Conditions. Environmental Science & Technology, 54(18), 11506-11514. DOI: 10.1021/acs.est.0c01285.
14.0 Annexes
14.1 Annex 1—Development of Response Factors for OGI Cameras.
14.1.1 Introduction.
The purpose of this annex 14.1 is to outline the protocol for the development of response factors (RFs) for optical gas imaging (OGI) cameras. As defined in Section 3.0 of this appendix K, a response factor is the OGI camera's response to a compound of interest relative to a reference compound at a concentration path-length of 10,000 parts per million-meter (ppm-m).
14.1.1.1 Nomenclature.
14.1.1.1.1 The definitions listed in Section 3.0 of this appendix K apply to this annex 14.1.
14.1.1.1.2 Infrared (IR) radiance pixel area. The IR radiance pixel area is the average of a set of pixel IR radiance for an instantaneous measurement. There will be three different areas representing the reference cell, gas cell, and the raw blackbody surface. The pixel count for each area must be at a minimum of 0.5 percent of the total pixels of the detector. The pixel locations selected for an area must not change throughout the test.
14.1.1.1.3 Measurement data set. Measurement data set is the number of time independent IR radiance pixel areas that are taken. The minimum number of measured IR radiance pixel area within a data set is 1,000 data points. The number of measured IR radiance pixel area within a measurement data set should stay consistent throughout the test.
14.1.1.1.4 Reference Compound. The reference compound is the compound that provides the reference for determination of the RF with the compound of interest. The reference compound for this annex 14.1 is propane, unless otherwise specified in a referencing subpart.
14.1.2 Applicability and Analytical Principle.
14.1.2.1 Applicability. This annex 14.1 applies to the determination of compound specific RFs through empirical testing for use with this appendix K. This annex 14.1 does not apply to other applications of OGI cameras or other instruments. This annex 14.1 does not limit the use of other peer reviewed and published techniques and RFs per Section 3.0 of this appendix K.
14.1.2.2 Analytical Principle. OGI cameras work by providing an image or video with each pixel representing a measurement of the IR radiation. OGI cameras limit measurement to specific wavelengths of IR through the choice of the detector and generally through the addition of a bandpass filter. Limiting the measurement to specific wavelengths of IR allows the OGI camera to focus on a specific region of interest in order to increase the detection capabilities of particular compounds of interest. The combination of detector and bandpass filter, in addition to limiting the region of interest, will allow varying amounts of IR over the specific wavelength region.
14.1.3.0 Equipment and Supplies.
14.1.3.1 Section 6.0 of this appendix K lists equipment and supplies that may be used in this annex 14.1.
14.1.3.2 Blackbody Source. A sufficiently large blackbody source capable of maintaining high emissivity, as well as temperature stability and homogeneity.
14.1.3.2.1 The blackbody must have an emissivity of 0.95 or higher in the IR region of interest.
14.1.3.2.2 The source emissive area must have a uniform temperature, where uniform is defined as all points on the emissive area deviating no more than 0.10 degree Celsius ( °C) from the average temperature of the emissive area. The temperature readings must be accurate to at least 0.10 °C. The blackbody must be able to maintain its temperature within 0.10 °C.
14.1.3.2.3 The source's surface area must be large enough to allow the OGI camera to take IR measurements of two gas cells and allow for the proper measurement of IR radiance through the gas and reference cell and IR radiance of the surface itself.
14.1.3.3 Test gas for each compound of interest, used for determining the RF. The concentration of the gas in the cylinder must be vendor certified to ± 5.0 percent of the cylinder tag value and be in a balance of nitrogen. The concentration of the gas must be such that the gas cell concentration is 10,000 ppm-m with less than 2.0 percent error. Alternatively, the gas standard may be produced with dilution per Method 205 of 40 CFR part 51 Appendix M with the exception that the mid-supply gas may be vendor certified to ± 5.0 percent of the cylinder tag value.
14.1.3.4 Gas Cell. A windowed gas cell that is leak tight and has the ability to flow gas through the cell. The size of the cell should be such to allow for 10,000 ppm-m to be viewed by the OGI camera with less than 2.0 percent error. The windows should be 99 percent transmissive in the IR region of interest and deviate no more than 0.50 percent transmission over than region of interest. The cell must have associated temperature, flow, and pressure measurements.
14.1.3.5 Reference Compound Gas Standard. Propane gas standard, unless a referencing subpart specifies otherwise, used as the reference for determination of the RF. The concentration of the gas in the cylinder must be vendor certified to ± 2.0 percent of the cylinder tag value and be in a balance of nitrogen. The concentration of the gas must be such that the gas cell concentration is 10,000. ppm-m with less than 2.0 percent error.
14.1.3.6 Reference Cell. A gas cell for the reference compound gas standard which meets all of the requirements in Section 14.1.3.4 of this annex 14.1.
14.1.3.7 Zero Gas. A 99.99 percent pure diatomic gas, typically nitrogen, that has no IR response from the OGI camera, used to assess the detection level of the system and baseline response of the gas cells.
14.1.3.8 OGI Camera is the specific OGI camera that is being tested. RFs must be determined for each IR detector and bandpass filter combination. The OGI camera must have the ability to output the raw IR radiance at the pixel level.
14.1.3.8.1 The combination of IR detector and bandpass filter may be consistent over several models such that the developed RFs may be applicable to more than one model of OGI camera.
14.1.3.8.2 If the OGI camera model has exchangeable bandpass filters, more than one set of RFs may be needed for the OGI camera model to account for the differences between filters.
4.0 Pre-Test Preparation and Evaluations.
14.1.4.1 Room Preparation. The room where testing will occur must be prepared by removing all extraneous thermal sources, or at a minimum, isolating extraneous thermal sources with IR absorptive material before any testing is conducted.
14.1.4.2 Reference and Gas Cell Preparation. Perform leak checks on both the reference and gas cells. Ensure that the temperatures of the cells are within 0.10 °C and that the pressure measurements are working.
14.1.4.3 OGI Camera Preparation. Ensure the OGI camera is operating to manufacturer specifications and able to record in raw IR radiance on a per pixel basis.
14.1.4.4 Blackbody Preparation and Verification. Prepare the blackbody by setting the temperature 10.0 °C different than the gas and reference cell temperatures. Ensure the blackbody is working correctly by verifying the IR radiance homogeneity of the blackbody surface with the OGI camera.
14.1.4.5 System Preparation. Ensure the alignment of the cells, blackbody source, and OGI camera are all fixed in place and cannot deviate from their position during the testing.
14.1.4.5.1 The reference and gas cell windows must overlap the blackbody surface in a manner that provides sufficient viewing of the blackbody surface from the vantage point of the camera.
14.1.4.5.2 The reference and gas cells should be placed sufficiently away from the blackbody surface. The distance must be far enough to ensure that the reference and gas cells are not heated or cooled by the blackbody surface.
14.1.4.5.3 The OGI camera should be located at a distance such that the field of view allows the requirements of the IR radiance pixel area to be met. Additionally, the distance must be such that it does not nominally change the path length of the cell.
14.1.4.5.4 For both the reference cell and the gas cell, the depth of the cell and concentration of the gas must result in a concentration 10,000. ppm-m with less than 2 percent error.
14.1.4.6 Initial System Assessment.
14.1.4.6.1 Flow zero gas through both the reference and gas cell, and ensure the gas cell temperatures are within 0.1 °C.
14.1.4.6.2 Record the temperatures of the gas and reference cells, the blackbody surface, and the room. Record the pressures in the reference and gas cells. Record the flowrates into the reference and gas cells.
14.1.4.6.3 Measure the IR radiance of the reference cell, the gas cell, and the blackbody surface for a measurement data set. For the IR radiance pixel area for the blackbody, the blackbody through the reference cell, and the blackbody through the gas cell, calculate the average, the standard deviation, and the 99 percent confidence level for the measurement data set.
14.1.4.6.4 The detection limit for the system will be the highest 99 percent confidence level of the IR radiance measurement of the blackbody, blackbody through the reference cell, or blackbody through the gas cell.
14.1.4.6.5 If the standard deviation of the reference cell's and the gas cell's average pixel areas of interest have a difference greater than 5 percent, take corrective actions and repeat the assessment.
14.1.5.0 Sampling and Analysis Procedure.
14.1.5.1 Flow reference compound gas through the reference cell and test gas for the compound of interest through the gas cell and ensure the cell temperatures are within 0.10 °C.
14.1.5.2 Record the temperatures of the gas and reference cells, the blackbody surface, and the room temperature. Record the pressures in the reference and gas cells. Record the flowrates into the reference and gas cells. If using Method 205 of 40 CFR part 51 Appendix M for dilution of the test gas for the compound of interest, record the appropriate parameters required by the method.
14.1.5.3 Adjust the gas flow if the pressure in the cell is not within an inch of water of ambient pressure. Ensure cell temperatures are within 0.10 °C of the room temperature.
14.1.5.4 Measure the IR radiance of the reference cell, the gas cell, and the blackbody surface for a measurement data set. Calculate the average of the IR radiance pixel area and the standard deviation of the IR radiance pixel area for the reference cell, gas cell, and the blackbody surface for the measurement data set.
14.1.6.0 Post-test Requirements.
14.1.6.1 Post-test Assessment.
14.1.6.1.1 Flow zero gas through both the reference and gas cells and ensure the cell temperatures are within 0.1 °C.
14.1.6.1.2 Record the temperatures of the gas and reference cells, the blackbody surface, and the room. Record the pressures in the reference and gas cells. Record the flowrates into the reference and gas cells.
14.1.6.1.3 Measure the IR radiance of the reference cell, the gas cell, and the blackbody surface for a measurement data set. Calculate the average of the IR radiance pixel area, the standard deviation of the IR radiance pixel area, and the 99 percent confidence level of the IR radiance pixel area for the reference cell, gas cell, and the blackbody surface for the measurement data set.
14.1.6.1.4 If the average and standard deviation of the reference cell's and the gas cell's average pixel areas of interest have a difference greater than 5.0 percent between the pre-test and post-test assessment, then the test is invalid. Take corrective actions and repeat the test.
14.1.6.2 When the average of the IR radiance pixel areas for the compound of interest over the measurement set as determined in Section 14.1.5.4 of this annex 14.1 is greater than the detection limit established in Section 14.1.4.6.4 of this annex 14.1, calculate the RF for the compound of interest as follows:
RF = response factor of the compound of interest (unitless).
IBlackbody = average of the IR radiance pixel areas for the blackbody over the measurement set as determined in Section 14.1.4.6.3 of this annex 14.1, W·m−2·sr−1 (watts per square meter per steradian).
ICompound of interest = average of the IR radiance pixel areas for the compound of interest over the measurement set as determined in Section 14.1.5.4 of this annex 14.1, W·m−2·sr−1.
IGas Cell = average of the IR radiance pixel areas for the gas cell over the measurement set during the pre-test assessment as determined in Section 14.1.4.6.3 of this annex 14.1, W·m−2·sr−1.
IReference Compound = average of the IR radiance pixel areas for the reference compound over the measurement set as determined in Section 14.1.5.4 of this annex 14.1, W·m−2·sr−1.
IReference Cell = average of the IR radiance pixel areas for the reference cell over the measurement set during the pre-test assessment as determined in Section 14.1.4.6.3 of this annex 14.1, W·m−2·sr−1.
14.1.6.3 When the average of the IR radiance pixel areas for the compound of interest over the measurement set as determined in Section 14.1.5.4 of this annex 14.1 is less than the detection limit established in Section 14.1.4.6.4 of this annex 14.1, the RF is equal to zero.
14.1.7.0 Reporting and Recordkeeping Requirements.
14.1.7.1 Records, including all raw data and calculations, must be kept for a period of 5 years, unless otherwise noted below or otherwise specified in a referencing subpart. Records may be retained in hard copy or electronic form.
14.1.7.2 All records supporting the development of RFs under this annex 14.1 must be maintained in a manner that is easily accessible to all OGI camera operators using the RFs. While the owner or operator does not need to have a copy of these records onsite if another entity performed the development of the RFs, the owner or operator must:
(1) Ensure that the RF development was performed in accordance with the requirements of this annex,
(2) Ensure easy access to these records, and
(3) Make the records available for review if requested by the Administrator.
These records must be retained for the entire period that the OGI camera is used to conduct surveys at the site plus 5 years. Previous versions of these records that are no longer relevant because they have been replaced by newer versions or because the specific OGI camera model is no longer being used to conduct surveys at the site must be retained for a period of 5 years past the date on which the records are replaced or the OGI camera model is no longer being used to conduct surveys at the site.
14.1.8.0 References.
14.1.8.1 U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. (2023). Technical Support Document: Optical Gas Imaging Protocol (appendix K to this part).
[89 FR 17219, Mar. 8, 2024]